IR 6275i ADVANCE SERVICE MANUAL PDF

imageRUNNER ADVANCE
6275 / 6265 / 6255 Series

Service Manual
Product Overview
Technology
Periodic Service
Parts Replacement and Clearning
Adjustment
Troubleshooting
Error Code
Service Mode
Installation
1
REVISION 0
Appendix
Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory,
The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are
installation, maintenance, and repair of products. This manual covers all localities where the
inconsistent with local law.
products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this manual that does not
apply to your locality.
Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks
Corrections
of the individual companies.
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements
or changes in products. When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this
Copyright
manual, Canon will release technical information as the need arises. In the event of major
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may
changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new
not be copied, reproduced or translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the
edition of this manual.
consent of Canon Inc.
CANON INC. 2011
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential
information.
Explanation of Symbols
The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:
The following symbols are used throughout this Service Manual.

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the
Symbols
Explanation
Check.
Symbols
relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of
Explanation
Remove the claw.
operation.

In the diagrams,
represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal
name accompanies the symbol, the arrow
indicates the direction of the
electric signal.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the
Check visually.
Insert the claw.
Check the noise.
Use the bundled part.
front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in supplying the machine with
power.
2. In the digital circuits, '1' is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is
"High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low". (The voltage value, however, differs from
circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD
signal goes on when '0'.
Disconnect the connector.
Push the part.
In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked

in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors used in the machines
are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC
controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads.
Connect the connector.
Plug the power cable.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product
improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be communicated in the form of
Remove the cable/wire

from the cable guide or wire
saddle.
Set the cable/wire to the

cable guide or wire saddle.
Remove the screw.
Tighten the screw.
Service Information bulletins.

Turn on the power.
All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service
Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults
in the machine.
Blank Page
Contents
0 Safety Precautions
CDRH Act------------------------------------------------------------------------0-2
Laser Safety---------------------------------------------------------------------0-2
Handling of Laser System---------------------------------------------------0-2
Turn power switch ON--------------------------------------------------------0-3
Safety of Toner------------------------------------------------------------------0-3
About Toner-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0-3

Toner on Clothing or Skin--------------------------------------------------------- 0-3
Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery---------------------------------0-3

Notes Before it Works Serving----------------------------------------------0-3
Points to Note at Cleaning---------------------------------------------------0-4
1 Product Overview
Product Lineup------------------------------------------------------------------1-2
Main Body---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-2

Pickup/Delivery System Option------------------------------------------------- 1-2
Applicable Option for Each Model------------------------------------------------------- 1-2
Required Options/Conditions------------------------------------------------------------- 1-3
Scanning System Options-------------------------------------------------------- 1-4

Required Options and Conditions------------------------------------------------------- 1-4
Function Expansion System Options------------------------------------------ 1-5

Required Options and Conditions------------------------------------------------------- 1-5
Features--------------------------------------------------------------------------1-7
Product Features-------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-7

Service Features-------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-7
Improved Service Operability------------------------------------------------------------- 1-7
New Service Mode-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-8
Improved Upgrading Operability--------------------------------------------------------- 1-8
Jam/Error Code Display Specifications------------------------------------------------ 1-9
Applying New Connectors----------------------------------------------------------------1-10
Specifications----------------------------------------------------------------- 1-11
Product Specifications------------------------------------------------------------ 1-11
Power Supply Specifications:---------------------------------------------------1-12

Weight and Size--------------------------------------------------------------------1-12
Productivity (Print Speed)--------------------------------------------------------1-13
Paper Type--------------------------------------------------------------------------1-14
External View/Internal View----------------------------------------------- 1-25
External View-----------------------------------------------------------------------1-25
External Cover-------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-25
Switches, I/F, Others-----------------------------------------------------------------------1-26
Cross-Section View---------------------------------------------------------------1-26
Operation----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-27
Power Switch-----------------------------------------------------------------------1-27
Types of Power Switches-----------------------------------------------------------------1-27
Points to Note on Turning ON/OFF the Power Switch----------------------------1-27
Control Panel-----------------------------------------------------------------------1-27
Control Panel--------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-27
Main Menu------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-28
Differences in Main Menu----------------------------------------------------------------1-28
Settings/Registration Menu--------------------------------------------------------------1-29
Differences in Settings/Registration Menu-------------------------------------------1-29
2 Technology
Basic Configuration------------------------------------------------------------2-2
Functional Configuration---------------------------------------------------------- 2-2

Basic Sequence--------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-3
Basic sequence at power ON------------------------------------------------------------ 2-3
Basic sequence at printing <Condition: A4 1-sided (2 sheets), Right deck,
Reverse delivery>--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-4
Basic sequence at printing <Condition: A4 2-sided (2 sheets), Right deck,
Reverse delivery>--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-5
Main Controller-----------------------------------------------------------------2-6
Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-6
Features---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-6
Specifications/configuration--------------------------------------------------------------- 2-7
Boot/Shutdown sequence---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-11
Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-13
Flow of Image Data------------------------------------------------------------------------2-13
Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)------2-14
Option HDD----------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-23
HDD mirroring feature (option)----------------------------------------------------------2-24
Removable HDD (option)-----------------------------------------------------------------2-29
HDD Encryption/ Mirroring Kit (optional)----------------------------------------------2-29
Service Operations----------------------------------------------------------------2-32
HDD--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-32
Main Controller PCB 1--------------------------------------------------------------------2-33
Main Controller PCB 2--------------------------------------------------------------------2-34
TPM PCB-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-36
Laser Exposure System---------------------------------------------------- 2-37

Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-37
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-37
Specifications--------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-38
Parts Configuration-------------------------------------------------------------------------2-38
Exposure--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-55
Primary Charging---------------------------------------------------------------------------2-56
Developing-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-58
Transfer---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-60
Separation------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-64
Drum Cleaning------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-66
Drum-related Issues-----------------------------------------------------------------------2-67
Toner Supply Area--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-70
Waste Toner Feeding Area---------------------------------------------------------------2-72
Image Stabilization Control--------------------------------------------------------------2-74
Auxiliary Control-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-81
Servicing-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-88
Periodically Replaced Parts--------------------------------------------------------------2-88
Consumable Parts--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-88
Periodical Servicing List------------------------------------------------------------------2-88
When Replacing Parts--------------------------------------------------------------------2-89
Major Adjustments--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-93
Troubleshooting-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-94
Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-39
Fixing-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-102
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-39
Laser ON Timing Control-----------------------------------------------------------------2-39
Laser Beam Intensity Control------------------------------------------------------------2-41
Polygon Motor Control--------------------------------------------------------------------2-42
Laser Shutter Control----------------------------------------------------------------------2-42
Characteristics----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-102
Specifications------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-103
Parts configuration----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-103
Drive configuration----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-104
Servicing-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-45
Periodically Replaced Parts--------------------------------------------------------------2-45
Consumable Parts--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-45
Periodical Servicing List------------------------------------------------------------------2-45
When Replacing Parts--------------------------------------------------------------------2-45
Major Adjustments--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-45
Image Formation System-------------------------------------------------- 2-46
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-46
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-46
Specifications--------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-46
Parts Configuration-------------------------------------------------------------------------2-47
Drive Configuration-------------------------------------------------------------------------2-50
Print Process---------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-52
Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-54
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-102
Controls---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-106
Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-106
Fixing temperature control------------------------------------------------------------- 2-106
Down sequence control----------------------------------------------------------------- 2-111
Shutter Control---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-113
Paper Anti-wrapping Control----------------------------------------------------------- 2-114
Thermistor reciprocating control------------------------------------------------------ 2-115
Upper separation claw reciprocating control--------------------------------------- 2-116
Cleaning web drive control------------------------------------------------------------- 2-116
Cleaning web length detection-------------------------------------------------------- 2-117
Protective function------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-118
Servicing--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-119
Periodically Replaced Parts------------------------------------------------------------ 2-119
Consumable Parts------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-119
Periodical Servicing List---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-119

When Replacing Parts------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-120
Troubleshooting--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-121
Pickup / Feed System----------------------------------------------------- 2-122
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-122
Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-122
Specifications------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-123
Parts configuration----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-124
Drive Configuration----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-126
Paper path---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-127
Interval speed------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-128
Various types of control----------------------------------------------------------------- 2-129
Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit---------------------------------------------------- 2-130

Basic Movement-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-130
Deck/Cassette detection---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-131
Paper Size Detection-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-132
Paper Level Detection------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-134
Paper Detection--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-136
Lifter Control------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-137
Pickup Retry Control--------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-138
Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit----------------------------------------------- 2-139

Basic Movement-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-139
Paper Size Detection-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-140
Paper Detection--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-140
Registration Unit----------------------------------------------------------------- 2-141

Pre-registration Control----------------------------------------------------------------- 2-141
Registration Control---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-142
Registration Deceleration Control---------------------------------------------------- 2-142
Registration Acceleration Control----------------------------------------------------- 2-143
Transfer----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-143
Post-transfer Guide Attraction Control---------------------------------------------- 2-143
Delivery/Reverse Unit----------------------------------------------------------- 2-144

Basic Operation--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-144
Duplex Unit------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-146

Basic Operation--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-146
Side Registration Control--------------------------------------------------------------- 2-147
Circulation quantity and limit----------------------------------------------------------- 2-148
Jam Detection-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-152
Jam Code List----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-152

Forced Paper Feed Control------------------------------------------------------------ 2-154
Servicing--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-155
Periodical Servicing List---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-155
Major Adjustments------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-155
External Auxiliary System------------------------------------------------ 2-156

Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-156
Power Supply Configuration----------------------------------------------------------- 2-156
Controls---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-157
Power supply control-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-157
Quick Startup ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-161
Fan Control--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-163
Counter control---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-164
Servicing--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-166
Periodical Servicing---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-166
MEAP------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-169
Changes---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-169
LDAP Authentication (SSO-H Server Authentication)--------------------------- 2-169
Integrated Authentication Disabling Setting Screen----------------------------- 2-170
Preparation for Using SSO-H------------------------------------------------- 2-170

Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-170
Server authentication management-------------------------------------------------- 2-170
PC Environment of Administrator Users and General Users------------------ 2-171
Preparation for Using SMS---------------------------------------------------- 2-172

Preparation of PC for Accessing SMS---------------------------------------------- 2-172
Settings on the Device Side----------------------------------------------------------- 2-173
How to Check the Serial Number----------------------------------------------------- 2-180
Login to SMS---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-180

Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-180
When SMS Cannot Be Accessed---------------------------------------------------- 2-181
How to Deal with a Message "Certificate Error" That Appears at the Time of
Access--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-182
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-218
Procedure to Check MEAP Application Information---------------------------- 2-218
Installing an MEAP Application----------------------------------------------- 2-182
Check License-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-219
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-182
Procedure to install applications------------------------------------------------------ 2-183
Resource Information-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-185
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-219
Procedure to Check the License File------------------------------------------------ 2-219
MEAP Specifications------------------------------------------------------------ 2-186

What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)?-------------------------- 2-186
MEAP Application Management--------------------------------------------- 2-189

Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-189
Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application---------------------- 2-189
Managing the License File------------------------------------------------------------- 2-191
Other License File Management Functions---------------------------------------- 2-196
Enhanced System Application Management----------------------------- 2-198

Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-198
About Login Service--------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-198
Default Authentication overview------------------------------------------------------ 2-198
SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview------------------------------------------------ 2-198
Local device authentication------------------------------------------------------------ 2-203
Server authentication (Active Directory authentication)------------------------- 2-204
Server Authentication (LDAP Authentication)------------------------------------- 2-206
Server authentication and local device authentication-------------------------- 2-207
Steps to Change Login Services----------------------------------------------------- 2-207
Login Service Installation Procedure------------------------------------------------ 2-208
Login Service Uninstallation Procedure--------------------------------------------- 2-209
System Application Management-------------------------------------------- 2-210

Password authentication---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-210
RLS Authentication----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-211
Setting the method to login to SMS----------------------------------------- 2-213

Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-213
Initial Display Languages of SMS---------------------------------------------------- 2-216
MEAP Application System Information------------------------------------- 2-216

Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-216
Checking the System Information---------------------------------------------------- 2-216
Display of System Information Details---------------------------------------------- 2-217
Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application------------------------ 2-217
Content of MEAP system information----------------------------------------------- 2-218
MEAP Application Information------------------------------------------------ 2-218
Changing SMS Login Password--------------------------------------------- 2-220

Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-220
Procedure to Change the SMS Login Password--------------------------------- 2-220
MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log

Management---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-220
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-220
Advantages Obtained When Using the Services--------------------------------- 2-221
MEAP Application Setting Information Management---------------------------- 2-221
MEAP Application Log Management------------------------------------------------ 2-222
Maintenance---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-223
Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using
SST------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-223
Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST------------ 2-224
Procedures to Restore Backup Data------------------------------------------------ 2-226
Formatting and Replacing the HDD-------------------------------------------------- 2-227
MEAP Safe Mode (level 2)------------------------------------------------------------- 2-229
Collection of MEAP Console Logs--------------------------------------------------- 2-231
Using USB Devices---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-236
Integrated Authentication Function--------------------------------------------------- 2-241
Points to Note When Enabling the [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power]
Setting--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-243
Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be
Logged in----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-244
Reference material----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-247
Option for exclusive individual measure-------------------------------------------- 2-249
Embedded RDS------------------------------------------------------------ 2-251
Product Overview---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-251

Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-251
Features and benefits------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-251
Major Functions--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-251
Limitations------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-252
Service Mode Menu Transmission Function--------------------------------------- 2-252
Service cautions------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-253
E-RDS Setup---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-254

Confirmation and preparation in advance------------------------------------------ 2-254
Steps to E-RDS settings---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-255
Steps to Service Call button settings------------------------------------------------ 2-257
Steps to Service Browser settings--------------------------------------------------- 2-261
Initializing E-RDS settings-------------------------------------------------------------- 2-262
FAQ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-262
Troubleshooting------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-264
Error code and strings---------------------------------------------------------- 2-268
Updater----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-271
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-271
Installing Firmware-------------------------------------------------------------- 2-271
Installing MEAP Application/System Option------------------------------- 2-272
System Configuration----------------------------------------------------------- 2-273
List of Functions------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-274
Distribution Flow----------------------------------------------------------------- 2-274
Firmware Installation Flow------------------------------------------------------------- 2-274
MEAP Application/System Option Installation Flow------------------------------ 2-275
Limitations and Cautions------------------------------------------------------- 2-275

Limitations---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-275
Cautions------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-275
Overview of Preparation------------------------------------------------------- 2-277

Setting Sales Companys HQ------------------------------------------------- 2-277
Network Settings----------------------------------------------------------------- 2-278
Connecting to External Network------------------------------------------------------ 2-278
Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server------------------------------------ 2-278
Communication Test--------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-280
Enabling UGW Link------------------------------------------------------------- 2-281

Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode---------------------- 2-282
Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode----------- 2-282
Enabling [Manual Update] Button of User Mode (Remote UI)------- 2-283
System Management Operations-------------------------------------- 2-284
Various Setting------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-284

Setting URL of Distribution Server--------------------------------------------------- 2-284
Setting Log Level------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-285
Displaying Logs------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-286

Update Logs------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-286
System Logs------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-287
Communication Test------------------------------------------------------------ 2-289

Upgrading Updater-------------------------------------------------------------- 2-291
Formatting Hard Disk----------------------------------------------------------- 2-291
How to Replace Controller Boards------------------------------------------ 2-292
How to Replace Devices------------------------------------------------------- 2-292
FAQ on Installing Firmware--------------------------------------------------- 2-293
FAQ on Installing MEAP Application/System Option-------------------- 2-294
FAQ on General Matters of Updater---------------------------------------- 2-295
DCM--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-296
DCM--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-296
Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-296
Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM----------------- 2-302
Import/export by service mode (external)------------------------------------------ 2-309
Import/export by service mode (internal)------------------------------------------- 2-315
3 Periodic Service
Periodical Service Operation Item-----------------------------------------3-2
4 Parts Replacement and Clearning

List of Parts----------------------------------------------------------------------4-2
List of External / Internal Cover------------------------------------------------- 4-2

List of Main Unit--------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-4
Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts-----------------4-10
Periodic Replacing Parts, Durable Parts - -------------------------------------------4-10
List of Cleaning Parts----------------------------------------------------------------------4-20
List of Fan----------------------------------------------------------------------------4-34
List of Clutch / Solenoid----------------------------------------------------------4-36
List of Motor-------------------------------------------------------------------------4-40
List of Sensor-----------------------------------------------------------------------4-46
List of Switch------------------------------------------------------------------------4-52
List of PCB---------------------------------------------------------------------------4-54
Heater,others------------------------------------------------------------------------4-58
Connector List----------------------------------------------------------------------4-60
Main Controller--------------------------------------------------------------- 4-80
Removing Main Controller PCB 1---------------------------------------------4-80
Removing Main Controller PCB 2---------------------------------------------4-82
Laser Exposure System---------------------------------------------------- 4-92

Removing the Laser Scanner Unit---------------------------------------------4-92
Cleaning the Dust Collecting Glass-------------------------------------------4-95
Image Formation System-------------------------------------------------- 4-96
Removing the Primary Charging Assembly---------------------------------4-96

Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder (Right/
Left)------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-97
Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire------------------ 4-100
Replacing the Primary Charging Wire-------------------------------------- 4-103
Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire------------------- 4-106
Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly-------------------------- 4-107
Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner
Holder------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-108
Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire----------------------------------4-111
Cleaning the Pre-transfer Charging Wire---------------------------------- 4-113
Removing the Process Unit--------------------------------------------------- 4-113
Cleaning the Process Unit----------------------------------------------------- 4-115
Removing the Drum Cleaning Unit------------------------------------------ 4-116
Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade---------------------------------------- 4-117
Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Unit-------------------------------------------- 4-119
Replacing the Pre-exposure Plastic Film---------------------------------- 4-120
Removing the Drum Unit------------------------------------------------------- 4-121
Removing the Photosensitive Drum----------------------------------------- 4-122
Cleaning Photosensitive Drum----------------------------------------------- 4-125
Cleaning the Drum edges------------------------------------------------------ 4-126
Removing the Cleaner Separation Claw----------------------------------- 4-127
Removing the Side Seal------------------------------------------------------- 4-127
Removing the Developing Assembly---------------------------------------- 4-128
Cleaning the Developing Assembly----------------------------------------- 4-131
Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Developing Roller------ 4-132
Removing the ETB Unit-------------------------------------------------------- 4-137
Removing the ETB-------------------------------------------------------------- 4-139
Cleaning the ETB---------------------------------------------------------------- 4-140
Removing the Transfer Roller------------------------------------------------- 4-141
Removing the ETB Cleaning Blade----------------------------------------- 4-142
Removing the ETB Brush Roller--------------------------------------------- 4-142

Removing the Waste Toner Container-------------------------------------- 4-145
Removing the Drum Heater--------------------------------------------------- 4-146
Removing the Primary Charging Shutter Unit---------------------------- 4-147
Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit--------- 4-150
Removing the Drum Brush Roller-------------------------------------------- 4-152
Removing the ETB Drive Unit------------------------------------------------ 4-153
Removing the Transfer Cleaning Unit-------------------------------------- 4-156
Removing the Post-transfer Static Eliminator----------------------------- 4-156
Removing the Toner Receptacle Tray-------------------------------------- 4-158
Removing the Hopper Unit---------------------------------------------------- 4-159
Removing the Buffer Unit------------------------------------------------------ 4-163
Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit--------------------------------- 4-166
Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit-------------------------------------- 4-168
Removing the Drum Drive Unit----------------------------------------------- 4-171
Removing the Developing Drive Unit--------------------------------------- 4-173
Fixing-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-176
Removing the Fixing Assembly----------------------------------------------- 4-176

Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide,Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag, Fixing Right
Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder---------------------------------------------------- 4-178
Cleaning the Inner Delivery Roller------------------------------------------- 4-179
Cleaning the Fixing Oil Pan, Fixing Cleaning Web Guide------------- 4-180
Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web----------------------------------------- 4-180
Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit-------- 4-182
Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper--- 4-186
Removing the Pressure Roller------------------------------------------------ 4-188
Removing the Pressure Roller Static Eliminator Unit------------------- 4-189
Removing the Main Thermistor, Sub Thermistor2----------------------- 4-190
Removing the Sub Thermistor1---------------------------------------------- 4-192
Removing the Upper Separation Claw------------------------------------- 4-193
Cleaning the Upper Separation Claw--------------------------------------- 4-194
Removing the Thermoswitch-------------------------------------------------- 4-195
Pickup/Feed System------------------------------------------------------ 4-197

Removing the Left Pickup Deck---------------------------------------------- 4-197
Removing the Left Deck Pickup Roller------------------------------------- 4-197
Removing the Left Deck Feed Roller--------------------------------------- 4-198
Removing the Right Pickup Deck-------------------------------------------- 4-198

Removing the Left Deck Separation Roller------------------------------- 4-199
Removing the Right Deck Pickup Roller----------------------------------- 4-199
Removing the Right Deck Feed Roller------------------------------------- 4-200
Removing the Right Deck Separation Roller----------------------------- 4-200
Removing the Upper Cassette----------------------------------------------- 4-201
Removing the Upper Cassette Pickup Roller----------------------------- 4-201
Removing the Upper Cassette Feed Roller------------------------------- 4-202
Removing the Upper Cassette Separation Roller----------------------- 4-202
Removing the Lower Cassette----------------------------------------------- 4-203
Removing the Lower Cassette Pickup Roller----------------------------- 4-203
Removing the Lower Cassette Feed Roller------------------------------- 4-204
Removing the Lower Cassette Separation Roller----------------------- 4-204
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller--------------------------- 4-205
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller------------------- 4-206
Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly------------------------- 4-207
Removing the Left Deck Pickup Unit---------------------------------------- 4-215
Removing the Right Deck Pickup Unit-------------------------------------- 4-216
Removing the Cassettes 3 and 4 Pickup Unit---------------------------- 4-217
Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit--------------- 4-218
Removing the Registration Unit---------------------------------------------- 4-221
Removing the Left Deck Pickup Drive Unit-------------------------------- 4-224
Removing the Main Drive Unit------------------------------------------------ 4-225
External Auxiliary System------------------------------------------------ 4-230

Removing the Filter (for primary charging)-------------------------------- 4-230
Removing the Ozone Filter---------------------------------------------------- 4-230
Removing the DC Controller PCB------------------------------------------- 4-231
Removing the Power Supply Assembly------------------------------------ 4-234
Removing the Fixing Power Unit--------------------------------------------- 4-235
Removing the Feed Driver PCB---------------------------------------------- 4-236
Removing the Upper High Voltage Unit------------------------------------ 4-237
Removing the Flat Control Panel-------------------------------------------- 4-238
5 Adjustment
Overview-------------------------------------------------------------------------5-2
When replacing parts---------------------------------------------------------5-2
Controller System------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-2

HDD--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-2
Main Controller PCB 1--------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-4
Main Controller PCB 2--------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-5
TPM PCB-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-7
Image Formation System--------------------------------------------------------- 5-7

Primary Charging Wire--------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-7
Primary Charging Assembly-------------------------------------------------------------- 5-7
Pre-transfer Charging Assembly--------------------------------------------------------- 5-9
Pre-transfer Charging Wire--------------------------------------------------------------- 5-9
Photosensitive Drum-----------------------------------------------------------------------5-10
Drum Side Seals (Front and Rear)----------------------------------------------------- 5-11
Developing Assembly, Developing Cylinder----------------------------------------- 5-11
Potential Sensor / Potential Control PCB--------------------------------------------- 5-11
ETB Unit / ETB------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-11
Waste Toner Container-------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-11
Fixing System-----------------------------------------------------------------------5-12
Fixing Roller----------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-12
External Auxiliary System--------------------------------------------------------5-12

DC Controller PCB-------------------------------------------------------------------------5-12
6 Troubleshooting
Test Print-------------------------------------------------------------------------6-2
Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6-2
How to View the Test Print-------------------------------------------------------- 6-3
Grid (TYPE=1)-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-3
17 gradations (TYPE=2/3)----------------------------------------------------------------- 6-3
Solid white (TYPE=4)----------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-4
Halftone (TYPE=5/6/11/12/13/14)------------------------------------------------------- 6-4
Solid black (TYPE=7)----------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-5
Horizontal line (TYPE=8/9/10)------------------------------------------------------------ 6-5
Image Faults--------------------------------------------------------------------6-6
Trailing Edge Shock Imaget------------------------------------------------------ 6-6

Uneven density correction by 2D shading------------------------------------ 6-7
ADF black line---------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-11
Separation Failure Jam due to Deformation of Separation Claw------6-12
Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex
Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller-----------------------------------6-12

Uneven density---------------------------------------------------------------------6-19
Smeared image--------------------------------------------------------------------6-20
Adjusting the Edge Emphasis Level------------------------------------------6-22
Soiling at an interval equal to the circumference of the Developing
Sleeve--------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-23
MTF Adjustment--------------------------------------------------------------------6-24
Adjustment Procedure---------------------------------------------------------------------6-24
When Making Fine Adjustment After Sampling the MTF Value-----------------6-25
When Disabling the MTF Adjustment--------------------------------------------------6-25
Feed Faults-------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-26
Paper wrinkle-----------------------------------------------------------------------6-26
Other---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-26
Adjusting rotation of the Upright Control Panel Arm----------------------6-26

Remedy to be implemented when the ETB Disengage Member (Transfer
Frame Stopper) is left unremoved---------------------------------------------6-28
Checking nip width----------------------------------------------------------------6-30
Controller Self Diagnosis--------------------------------------------------- 6-31
Introduction--------------------------------------------------------------------------6-31
Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool -----------------------------------------------------6-31
Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool ----------------------------------------------6-31
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-31
Writing System Software------------------------------------------------------------------6-41

Download Mode-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-41
System Software Components----------------------------------------------------------6-42
Note on Download Process--------------------------------------------------------------6-43
Version Upgrade via SST--------------------------------------------------------6-44

Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-44
Copying System Software----------------------------------------------------------------6-45
Connection-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-46
Downloading System Software (Assist mode)--------------------------------------6-48
Downloading System Software (Single mode)--------------------------------------6-49
Formatting HDD-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-52
Backup----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-56
Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device-------------------6-60

Relation between SST and USB memory Storage Device-----------------------6-60
Copying System Software----------------------------------------------------------------6-61
Connection-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-64
Upgrading System Software-------------------------------------------------------------6-65
Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic)-------------------------------6-67
Downloading System Software (Confirmation)--------------------------------------6-68
Downloading System Software (Overwriting)---------------------------------------6-70
Formatting HDD-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-71
Backup----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-73
Clearing Download File-------------------------------------------------------------------6-73
Download Menu 2--------------------------------------------------------------------------6-73
Other Menu-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-73
Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool------------------------------------------------------6-31

Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool-----------------------------------------------6-32
Layout Drawing------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-32
Troubleshooting--------------------------------------------------------------------6-74
Basic Flowchart--------------------------------------------------------------------6-33
Error Code: E753-0001-------------------------------------------------------------------6-74
Basic Check Items -------------------------------------------------------------------------6-34
Operation----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-34
Diagnosis Time -----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-35
Error Diagnosis -----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-36
Making Initial Checks------------------------------------------------------- 6-75
List of Initial Check Items--------------------------------------------------------6-75

Version Upgrade via CDS-------------------------------------------------------6-76
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-76
Controller System Error Diagnosis--------------------------------------------6-36
Preparation--------------------------------------------------------------------------6-76
Boot Method - -------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-36

Diagnosis Time -----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-37
Restrictions-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-39
Overview of Preparation------------------------------------------------------------------6-76
Setting Sales Companys HQ------------------------------------------------------------6-77
Network Settings----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-77
Enabling UGW Link------------------------------------------------------------------------6-80
Version upgrade-------------------------------------------------------------- 6-40
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-40
Overview of Version Upgrade-----------------------------------------------------------6-40
a. UGW-linked Download and Update (Full-remote Update)-----------6-81

b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)----------------6-81
c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service

Mode)---------------------------------------------------------------------------------6-83
Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule------------------------------------6-89
Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware)-------------------6-90
Deleting Downloaded Firmware------------------------------------------------6-91
Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation-----------------------------------6-92
Information required for Reports-----------------------------------------------6-94
Information required for Service Technicians to Obtain on Site-----------------6-94
Information to Report----------------------------------------------------------------------6-94
Debug Logs-------------------------------------------------------------------------6-94
Obtaining Log Files------------------------------------------------------------------------6-94
Error Messages--------------------------------------------------------------- 6-96

Error Codes------------------------------------------------------------------ 6-102
How to read an error code----------------------------------------------------- 6-102
Error Code------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-103
Debug log-------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-107
Scope of Application------------------------------------------------------------ 6-107

Purpose ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6-107
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-107
Function Overview ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-107
Collecting System Information------------------------------------------------ 6-108

Collection Destination ------------------------------------------------------------------ 6-108
Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device)------------------------------------- 6-108
Uploading Data by SST----------------------------------------------------------------- 6-109
Preconditions: - --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-109
Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs--------------------------- 6-112

Location of LEDs------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-112
Preconditions------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6-112
Checking the lighting of the LED4, LED5 on the Main Controller 2 --------- 6-112
Check the lighting of the LDEs on the Main Controller PCB 1---------------- 6-113
7 Error Code
Overview-------------------------------------------------------------------------7-2
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-2
Location code--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-2
Pickup position code------------------------------------------------------------------------ 7-2
Points to Note When Clearing MN-CON----------------------------------------------- 7-2
Points to Note When Clearing HDD---------------------------------------------------- 7-2
Error Code-----------------------------------------------------------------------7-3
Error Code Details------------------------------------------------------------------ 7-3
E000 to E069--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-3
E100 to E199--------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-14
E202 to E280--------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-17
E301 to E355--------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-20
E400 to E490--------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-22
E500 to E5F6--------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-25
E602-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-35
E604 to E677--------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-71
E710 to E760--------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-73
E804 to E996--------------------------------------------------------------------------------7-79
Jam Code---------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-83

Jam Type-----------------------------------------------------------------------------7-83
Main Unit-----------------------------------------------------------------------------7-84
Duplex Color Image Reader-G1-----------------------------------------------7-86
Paper Deck Unit-D1---------------------------------------------------------------7-87
Paper Deck Unit-A1---------------------------------------------------------------7-87
Inserter-L1---------------------------------------------------------------------------7-88
Paper Folding Inserter Unit-H1-------------------------------------------------7-89
External 2-hole Puncher-A1-----------------------------------------------------7-90
Staple Finisher-P1/Booklet Finisher-P1--------------------------------------7-91
Alarm Code-------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-92

List of Alarm Code-----------------------------------------------------------------7-92
8 Service Mode
Overview-------------------------------------------------------------------------8-2
Entering Service Mode-----------------------------------------------------------Service Mode Menu---------------------------------------------------------------Service mode item explanations-----------------------------------------------I/O information enhancement---------------------------------------------------Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description-----------------------------COPIER > OPTION > BODY, Item Segmentation-------------------------Security features--------------------------------------------------------------------
8-2
8-2
8-2
8-3
8-3
8-4
8-5
Related service modes--------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-5
Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2)--------------------------------------------- 8-6
Language switch-------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-6

Back-up of service mode---------------------------------------------------------- 8-7
COPIER--------------------------------------------------------------------------8-8
DISPLAY------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-8
VERSION-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-8
USER------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-31
ACC-STS-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-31
ANALOG--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-33
CST-STS--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-34
HV-STS----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-35
CCD--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-36
DPOT------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-39
SENSOR--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-40
MISC-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-40
ENVRNT--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-41
2D-SHADE-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-41
I/O (I/O display mode)------------------------------------------------------------8-42

Host Machine_Main Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P005))----------------------8-52
Reader (R-CON>P001 to P005)--------------------------------------------------------8-53
ADF (FEEDER>P001 to P007)---------------------------------------------------------8-54
Paper Deck Uint - A1 (DC-CON>P048 to P050)------------------------------------8-55
Paper Deck Uint - D1 (DC-CON>P048 to P050)-----------------------------------8-56
Inserter - L1 (SORTER>P047 to P061)-----------------------------------------------8-57
Paper Folding Inserter Unit - H1 (SORTER>P047 to P061)---------------------8-58
External Punch - A1 (SORTER>SORTER>P041 to P046)----------------------8-60
Staple Finisher - E1 / Booklet Finisher -E1 (SORTER>P001 to P040)-------8-61
ADJUST------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-66
AE----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-66
ADJ-XY----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-66
CCD--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-68
LASER-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-78
IMG-REG-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-78
DEVELOP------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-79
DENS------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-79
BLANK-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-80
V-CONT---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-80
PASCAL---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-82
HV-PRI----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-82
HV-TR-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-83
FEED-ADJ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-90
CST-ADJ--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-94
MISC-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-95
EXP-LED--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-98
FUNCTION--------------------------------------------------------------------------8-99
INSTALL---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-99
CCD------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-102
DPC------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-103
CST------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-103
CLEANING--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-104
FIXING-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-105
PANEL--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-105
PART-CHK--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-106
CLEAR-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-107
MISC-R-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-110
MISC-P-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-114
SENS-ADJ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-115
SYSTEM------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-116
2D-SHADE--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-117
OPTION---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-119
CLEANING--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-119
CUSTOM----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-120
DSPLY-SW--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-123
ENV-SET------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-127
FEED-SW----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-127
FNC-SW------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-130
IMG-DEV------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-139
IMG-FIX------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-141
IMG-LSR------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-144
IMG-MCON--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-145
IMG-RDR----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-147
NETWORK--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-149
USER---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-156
CST------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-170
ACC------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-172
INT-FACE----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-174
TEMPO-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-175
LCNS-TR----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-176
TEST-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-186
PG-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-186
NETWORK--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-187
NET-CAP----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-188
COUNTER------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-190
TOTAL--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-190
PICKUP------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-191
FEEDER------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-191
JAM------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-192
MISC----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-192
JOB------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-193
PRDC-1------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-193
DRBL-1-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-194
DRBL-2-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-199
LF--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-202
FEEDER---------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-203
DISPLAY--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-203
ADJUST---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-204
FUNCTION------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-205
OPTION---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-207
SORTER--------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-208
ADJUST---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-208
FUNCTION------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-213
OPTION---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-214
BOARD----------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-217
OPTION---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-217
9 Installation
Checking before Installation-------------------------------------------------9-2
Checking Power Supply----------------------------------------------------------Checking the Installation Environment---------------------------------------Checking Installation Space-----------------------------------------------------Points to Note at Installation Work---------------------------------------------
9-2
9-2
9-2
9-3
Table of Options Combination----------------------------------------------9-4

Order to Install the Host machine and the Options------------------------- 9-4
Checking the Contents-------------------------------------------------------9-5
Unpacking------------------------------------------------------------------------9-7
Installation-----------------------------------------------------------------------9-9
Installing the Developing Assembly-------------------------------------------- 9-9

Installing the Pickup Assembly ------------------------------------------------9-12
Installing the Fixing Assembly--------------------------------------------------9-13
Installing the Toner Container---------------------------------------------------9-15
Installing the Exhaust Filter------------------------------------------------------9-15
Installing the USB Device Port (only with the products designed for
Europe) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-16
Setting the Environment Heater Switch--------------------------------------9-18
Turning ON the Main Power----------------------------------------------------9-18
Toner Stirring------------------------------------------------------------------------9-19
Installation of the Host Machine------------------------------------------------9-19
Other Installation Work-----------------------------------------------------------9-19
Setting the Deck--------------------------------------------------------------------9-20
Setting the Paper Cassette------------------------------------------------------9-22
Auto Adjust Gradation------------------------------------------------------------9-23
Image Position Adjustment------------------------------------------------------9-23
Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)-----------------------------------------------9-23
Left Edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side)----------------------------------------------9-26
Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)-----------------------------------------9-26
Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side)----------------------------------------9-27
Adjusting margin of Multi-purpose Pickup Tray-------------------------------------9-27
Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (Multi-purpose Tray Pickup)-----------------9-28
Checking the Network Connection--------------------------------------------9-29

Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------9-29
Checking the Network Connection-----------------------------------------------------9-29
Operation Procedure Using Ping-------------------------------------------------------9-29
Checking by the Remote Host Address-----------------------------------------------9-29
Network Troubleshooting--------------------------------------------------------9-30
Checking Connection of the Network Cable-----------------------------------------9-30
Operation Procedure Using Ping-------------------------------------------------------9-30
Checking the Network Setting of the Host Machine----------------------9-30

Checking Network Function on the Main Controller----------------------9-30
When Relocating the Machine-------------------------------------------- 9-33

Printer Cover -B1------------------------------------------------------------- 9-36
Points to Note at Installation----------------------------------------------------9-36
Checking the Contents ----------------------------------------------------------9-36

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power-------------------------9-36
Installation Outline Drawing-----------------------------------------------------9-36
Installation Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------9-41
Operation Check-------------------------------------------------------------------9-44
Auto Adjust Gradation------------------------------------------------------------9-44
Shift Tray-E1------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-45
Checking the Contents-----------------------------------------------------------9-45

Checking before Installation-----------------------------------------------------9-45
Checking after Installation-------------------------------------------------------9-50
Reader Heater Unit---------------------------------------------------------- 9-51
Checking the Contents (ASIA only)-------------------------------------------9-51

Reader Heater Unit-G1-------------------------------------------------------------------9-51
Checking the Parts to be Installed (Europe only)--------------------------9-51

Reader Heater Unit------------------------------------------------------------------------9-51

Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1----------------------------------------------- 9-60

Installation Procedure (Paper Deck Unit-A1)-------------------------------9-61
Installation Procedure (Paper Deck Unit-D1)-------------------------------9-68
Utility Tray-A2----------------------------------------------------------------- 9-77

When Installing the USB Keyboard-------------------------------------------9-81
Copy Card Reader-F1------------------------------------------------------ 9-84

Copy Card Reader-F1---------------------------------------------------------------------9-84
Copy Card Reader Attachment-A2-----------------------------------------------------9-84
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power -------------------------9-85

Setting After Installation----------------------------------------------------------9-93
Voice Guidance Kit-F2------------------------------------------------------ 9-94

Checking after Installation----------------------------------------------------- 9-101
Operation Check----------------------------------------------------------------- 9-101
Additional Memory Type B (512MB)---------------------------------- 9-102
Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-102

Checking before Installation--------------------------------------------------- 9-102
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power ----------------------- 9-102
Installation Outline Drawing--------------------------------------------------- 9-102
Installation Procedure----------------------------------------------------------- 9-102
Combination of HDD Options------------------------------------------- 9-104

Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export--------------------- 9-105
Making a Backup of the Data (reference only)--------------------- 9-106

Procedure for Import/Export ALL of User Settings---------------------- 9-106

Backup of MEAP Application-------------------------------------------------- 9-106
Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download of Disabled License
Files and Uninstallation--------------------------------------------------------- 9-106
User Authentication Information Registered by SSO-H (Single Sign-ON
H)------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-107
Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data------------ 9-107
Contents of Card Reader-C1------------------------------------------------------------9-82

Contents of Copy Card Reader Attachment-A2-------------------------------------9-83
Installation Outline Drawing--------------------------------------------- 9-108

[TYPE-1] Option HDD (1TB)-------------------------------------------- 9-109
Card Reader-C1/Copy Card Reader-F1------------------------------- 9-82

Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power----------------------- 9-110
Assembling the Option HDD-------------------------------------------------- 9-110
Procedure to Replace with the HDD-----------------------------------------9-111
Installing the System Software Using the SST--------------------------- 9-113
Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation----------------------------------------- 9-113
[TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit-------------------------------------------9-114

Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit------------------------------------------- 9-115

Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host
Machine------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-118
Changing Configuration inside of HDD Case Unit------------------------------- 9-121
Installing the HDD Case Unit---------------------------------------------------------- 9-122
[TYPE-3] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit-------------- 9-126

Option HDD (1TB)------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-126
Removable HDD Kit--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-127

Assembling the Option HDD----------------------------------------------------------- 9-128
Installing the HDD Case Unit---------------------------------------------------------- 9-135

Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation----------------------------------------- 9-139
[TYPE-4] Option HDD (160GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data

Encryption & Mirroring Kit------------------------------------------------ 9-140
Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring

Kit------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-140
Option HDD (160GB)-------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-140
HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-------------------- 9-141
Setting Before Turning OFF the Power------------------------------------- 9-142

Removing the Covers------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-142

Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board------------------------------- 9-144
Installing the System Software Using the SST (Only when installing
HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)-------------------------------------- 9-153
Checking the Security Version (Only when installing HDD Data
Encryption & Mirroring Kit)----------------------------------------------------- 9-153
Checking the Security Mark (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption
& Mirroring Kit)-------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-153
Setting the Mirroring------------------------------------------------------------- 9-154
Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work (Only
when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)----------------- 9-155
Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation (Only when installing HDD Data
[TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data


Kit------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-161
Option HDD (1TB)------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-161

Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board------------------------------- 9-166
Installing the System Software Using the SST (Only when installing
HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)-------------------------------------- 9-174
Checking the Security Version (Only when installing HDD Data
Checking the Security Mark (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption
& Mirroring Kit)-------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-174
Setting the Mirroring------------------------------------------------------------- 9-175
when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)----------------- 9-176
Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation (Only when installing HDD Data
[TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-------------------- 9-182
Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been
Installed---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-182
Installing the Encryption Board----------------------------------------------- 9-185

Checking the Security Version------------------------------------------------ 9-192
Checking the Security Mark--------------------------------------------------- 9-192
Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work------ 9-193
Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment---------------------------------- 9-193
[TYPE-7] Option HDD (1TB) + HDD Data Encryption

& Mirroring Kit--------------------------------------------------------------- 9-199
Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption

& Mirroring Kit--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-199
Option HDD (1TB)------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-199
HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit------------------------------------------------ 9-200

Installing the Encryption Board----------------------------------------------- 9-204

[TYPE-8] Option HDD (160GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD
Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit------------- 9-219

Kit------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-219
Option HDD (160GB)-------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-219

Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machine
(the First HDD)---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-225
Assembling the Option HDD (the Second HDD)--------------------------------- 9-228
Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board and HDD Case Unit--- 9-233
After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit------------------- 9-239

Installing the System Software Using the SST------------------------------------ 9-239
Checking the Security Version-------------------------------------------------------- 9-240
Checking the Security Mark------------------------------------------------------------ 9-240
Setting for Mirroring------------------------------------------------------------- 9-240

Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work--------------- 9-241
Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment------------------------------------------- 9-241
[TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD

Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit------------- 9-246
Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been
Installed---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-246
Option HDD (1TB)------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-246


Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board and HDD Case Unit--- 9-258



Checking the Security Version-------------------------------------------------------- 9-264

Checking the Security Mark------------------------------------------------------------ 9-264
Setting for Mirroring------------------------------------------------------------- 9-265

When HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been Installed)---- 9-266
[TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring

Kit------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-271

Kit------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-271

Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host
Machine------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-276
Installing the Encryption Board and HDD Case Unit---------------------------- 9-281

TYPE-11] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data


Kit------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-294
Option HDD (1TB)------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-294

Installing the Encryption Board and HDD Case Unit---------------------------- 9-305

Document Scan Lock Kit-B1-------------------------------------------- 9-318
Points to Note Before Installation-------------------------------------------- 9-318

USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2--------------- 9-321
Points to Note before Installation-------------------------------------------- 9-321

USB Device Port-A2--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-321
Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2---------------------------------------------------------- 9-322

Installing the USB Device Port----------------------------------------------- 9-322
<For Upper Middle Cover>------------------------------------------------------------- 9-323
<For Control Panel>--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-325
Installing the Card Reader----------------------------------------------------- 9-327

Installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer------------------------------------ 9-329
Operation Check [Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2]------------------------ 9-332
Writing Check------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-332
Reading Check---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-333
Memory Media Removal---------------------------------------------------------------- 9-335
Points to Note at Installation-------------------------------------------------- 9-336

Serial Intreface KIT-K1------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-336
Copy Control Interface KIT-A1-------------------------------------------------------- 9-336

Removing the Main Controller PCB 1----------------------------------------------- 9-337
Installing the Serial Interface Kit-K1------------------------------------------------- 9-338
Installing the Copy Control Interface Kit-A1---------------------------------------- 9-339
Voice Operation Kit-C2--------------------------------------------------- 9-341
Points to Note at Installation-------------------------------------------------- 9-341

Operation Check----------------------------------------------------------------- 9-349
When Starting to Use-------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-349
When Stopping to Use------------------------------------------------------------------ 9-349
Appendix
Service Tools---------------------------------------------------------------------- II
Special Tools---------------------------------------------------------------------------- II
Solvents and Oils----------------------------------------------------------------------V
General Timing Chart---------------------------------------------------------- VI
Basic sequence at power ON------------------------------------------------------ VI

Basic sequence at printing <Condition: A4 1-sided (2 sheets), Right
deck, Reverse delivery>----------------------------------------------------------- VII
Basic sequence at printing <Condition: A4 2-sided (2 sheets), Right
deck, Reverse delivery>---------------------------------------------------------- VIII
General Circuit Diagram------------------------------------------------------- IX
Signal Input/Output List------------------------------------------------------------- IX

General Circuit Diagram----------------------------------------------------------- XII
General Circuit Diagram (1/23)----------------------------------------------------------- XII

General Circuit Diagram (2/23)---------------------------------------------------------- XIII
General Circuit Diagram (3/23)---------------------------------------------------------- XIV
General Circuit Diagram (4/23)-----------------------------------------------------------XV
General Circuit Diagram (5/23)---------------------------------------------------------- XVI
General Circuit Diagram (6/23)--------------------------------------------------------- XVII
General Circuit Diagram (7/23)-------------------------------------------------------- XVIII
General Circuit Diagram (8/23)---------------------------------------------------------- XIX
General Circuit Diagram (9/23)-----------------------------------------------------------XX
General Circuit Diagram (10/23)--------------------------------------------------------- XXI
General Circuit Diagram (11/23)-------------------------------------------------------- XXII
General Circuit Diagram (12/23)------------------------------------------------------- XXIII
General Circuit Diagram (13/23)------------------------------------------------------- XXIV
General Circuit Diagram (14/23)--------------------------------------------------------XXV
General Circuit Diagram (15/23)------------------------------------------------------- XXVI
General Circuit Diagram (16/23)------------------------------------------------------ XXVII
General Circuit Diagram (17/23)----------------------------------------------------- XXVIII
General Circuit Diagram (18/23)------------------------------------------------------- XXIX
General Circuit Diagram (19/23)--------------------------------------------------------XXX
General Circuit Diagram (20/23)------------------------------------------------------- XXXI
General Circuit Diagram (21/23)------------------------------------------------------ XXXII
General Circuit Diagram (22/23)----------------------------------------------------- XXXIII
General Circuit Diagram (23/23)----------------------------------------------------- XXXIV
List of User Mode---------------------------------------------------------- XXXV
Device Information Delivery Settings---------------------------------------XXXV

Environment Settings---------------------------------------------------------- XXXVI
Paper Settings---------------------------------------------------------------------------- XXXVI
Display Settings------------------------------------------------------------------------- XXXVII
Timer/Energy Settings---------------------------------------------------------------- XXXVIII
Network------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ XXXIX
External Interface--------------------------------------------------------------------------- XLV
Accessibility---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- XLV
Adjustment/Maintenance-------------------------------------------------------- XLVI
Adjust Image Quality*1-------------------------------------------------------------------- XLVI
Adjust Action*1------------------------------------------------------------------------------ XLVI
Maintenance-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- XLVI
Function Settings-----------------------------------------------------------------XLVII
Common-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------XLVII
Copy*1---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- L
Printer---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- L
Send---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- LI
Receive/Forward ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- LV
Store/Access Files--------------------------------------------------------------------------- LVI
Encrypted Secure Print--------------------------------------------------------------------LVII
Set Destination--------------------------------------------------------------------- LVIII

Set Destination-----------------------------------------------------------------------------LVIII
Management Settings------------------------------------------------------------- LIX

User Management--------------------------------------------------------------------------- LIX
Device Management------------------------------------------------------------------------ LIX
License/Other--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- LXI
Data Management-------------------------------------------------------------------------- LXII
Backup Data------------------------------------------------------------------- LXIII

Detail of HDD partition---------------------------------------------------- LXVIII
Soft Counter List-------------------------------------------------------------LXIX
Soft counter specifications------------------------------------------------------ LXIX
Soft Counter List------------------------------------------------------------------ LXIX
000 to 099----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- LXIX

100 to 199------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ LXX
200 to 299----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- LXXI
300 to 399---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- LXXII
400 to 499----------------------------------------------------------------------------------LXXIII
500 to 599--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- LXXIV
600 to 699--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- LXXIV
700 to 799--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- LXXIV
800 to 899---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- LXXV
900 to 999--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- LXXVI
Removal-------------------------------------------------------------------- LXXVIII
Removal--------------------------------------------------------------------------LXXVIII
Overview----------------------------------------------------------------------------------LXXVIII
Work Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------------------LXXVIII
Safety Precautions
Act
CDRH
Safety
Laser
of Laser System
Handling
power switch ON
Turn
of Toner
Safety
When Handling a
Notes
Lithium Battery
Before it Works
Notes
Serving
to Note at Cleaning
Points
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
6075/6065/6055 Series
0-2
CDRH Act
Handling of Laser System
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health of the US Food and Drum Administration put
When servicing the area around the laser assembly, be sure to turn off the main power.
into force regulations concerning laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply
The machine's covers that can reflect laser light are identified by means of a warning label
to laser products manufactured on and after August 1, 1976, and the sale of laser products
(Figure). If you must detach a cover showing the label, be sure to take extra caution during
not certified under the regulations is banned within the Untied States. The label shown here
the work.
indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations, and its attachment is required on all laser
products that are soled in the United States.
F-0-1
A different description may be used for a different product.
Laser Safety
Laser beam radiation may pose a danger to the human body. A laser scanner mounted on the
machine is sealed with the protection housing and external cover to prevent the laser beam
F-0-2
from leaking to the outside. The laser beam never leaks out of the scanner as far as users
operate the machine normally.
This product is certificated as a Class 1 laser product under IEC60825-1:2007.
0-2
0-3
Turn power switch ON
Safety of Toner
The machine is equipped with 2 power switches: main power switch and control panel power
switch.
The machine goes on when the main power switch is turned on (i.e., other than in low power
mode, sleep mode).
Do not turn off the main power switch while the progress bar is indicated, during which
access is made to the HDD. If deprived of power, the HDD can suffer a fault (E602).
About Toner
The machine's toner is a non-toxic material made of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye.
Do not throw toner into fire. It may cause explosion.
Toner on Clothing or Skin

If your clothing or skin has come into contact with toner, wipe it off with tissue; then, wash it
off with water.
Do not use warm water, which will cause the toner to jell and fuse permanently with the
fibers of the cloth.
Tonner is easy to react with plastic material, avoid contact with plastic.
Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery

F-0-3
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.

DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
Notes Before it Works Serving
At servicing, be sure to turn OFF the power source according to the specified steps and
disconnect the power plug.
0-3
0-4
Points to Note at Cleaning
When performing cleaning using organic solvent such as alcohol, be sure to check that
the component of solvent is vaporized completely before assembling.
0-4
Product Overview
Product Overview
Lineup
Product
Features
Specifications
View/Internal View
External
Operation
Product Overview > Product Lineup > Pickup/Delivery System Option > Applicable Option for Each Model
Product Lineup
1-2
Pickup/Delivery System Option

Applicable Option for Each Model
Main Body
Combination
imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6275 / 6265 / 6255
Copy Tray-Q1
Paper Deck Unit-D1
Shift Tray-E1
Document Insertion Unit-L1
Extemal
Puncher-A1
Paper Deck Unit-A1
Staple Finisher-P1
/ Booklet Finisher-P1
F-1-1
The underlined numerical value indicates the print speed (ppm: print per minute).
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE 6275
Print speed
Positioning
Control Panel
HDD
Communication method
with pickup/delivery option
Pickup/delivery option
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE 6265
75 ppm
65 ppm
Target machine: iR5075
Flat Control Panel
* Option: Upright Control Panel
Standard: 160 GB, Maximum: 1 TB
IPC (Inter Process Communication)
iimageRUNNER
ADVANCE 6255
55 ppm
Document Insertion /
Folding Unit-H1
F-1-2
T-1-1
Product Overview > Product Lineup > Pickup/Delivery System Option > Applicable Option for Each Model
1-2
Product Overview > Product Lineup > Pickup/Delivery System Option > Required Options/Conditions
Product name (Japan)
Required Options/Conditions
Pickup System Options
Product name
Required options, conditions, etc.
Paper Deck Unit-A1
Paper Deck Unit-D1
Cassette Heater Unit-38

Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1
Pickup method: retard method

Pickup capacity: 3,500 sheets (80 g/m2)
Paper type: thin paper, plain paper, heavy paper, color paper,
recycled paper, pre-punched paper
Paper size: A4, B5, LTR
Paper weight: 52 to 220 g/m2
Double feed detection: not available
Pickup method: retard method
Pickup capacity: 3,500 sheets (80 g/m2)
Paper type: thin paper, plain paper, heavy paper, color paper,
recycled paper, pre-punched paper
Paper size: A4, B5, LTR
Double feed detection: not available
For cassette of main body
CLA, CAUS, CSPL, CHK, CCN, CKBS, TAIWAN only
Option for Paper Deck Unit-A1/D1
CMJ, CLA, CSPL, CHK, CCN, CKBS, TAIWAN only
In the 230V areas other than the areas above, this is set as a
service part.
T-1-2
Delivery System Options

Product name (Japan)
Shift Tray-E1
Copy Tray-Q1
Document Insertion
Unit-L1
1-3
Using with delivery-related options is not available.

Paper size: A3 to A5R, postcard
Tray capacity: 500 sheets (80 g/m2)
Other than CUSA, CCI, CLA
Using with delivery-related options is not available.
Tray capacity: 250 sheets (80 g/m2)
Staple Finisher/Booklet Finisher is required at the downstream side.
Pickup capacity: 100 sheets x 1 bin
Paper type: plain paper/recycled paper/color paper/heavy paper/coated
paper
Paper size: B5 to 13 x 19.2
Other than CMJ, CCN, CKBS, TAIWAN
Paper Folding Insertion Folding Unit + Insertion Unit

Unit-H1
Staple Finisher/Booklet Finisher is required at the downstream side.
<Folding Unit>
Folding type: Z-Fold, C-Fold, Half Fold, Accordion Z-Fold, Double Parallel
Fold
Paper type: thin paper, plain paper, color paper, recycled paper
Paper size: A4R to 11 x 17 (at folding), B5 to 13 x 19.2 (at through pass)
Paper weight: 60 to 105g/m2 (Double Parallel Fold: 52 to 90g/m2)
<Insertion Unit>
Pickup capacity: 100 sheets x 1 bin
Paper type: thin paper, plain paper, heaby paper, color paper, recycled
paper, index paper, coated paper
Paper size: A3 to B5
Staple Finisher-P1
Maximum stacking capacity: 4000 sheets
Staple: Type: 100 sheets (A4, B5, LTR)
Booklet Finisher-P1
Maximum stacking capacity: 4000 sheets
Saddle: 16-sheet saddle stitching
Staple: 100 sheets
External 2-hole
Option for Staple Finisher-P1/Booklet Finisher-P1.
Puncher-A1
2 holes / 3 holes (Inch)
Paper size: A3 to B5
Other than CUSA, CCI
External 2/3-hole
Puncher-A1
2 holes (AB)
Paper size: 11" x 17" to LTR, A3 to B5
CUSA, CCI, CLA, CSPL, CKBS, CAUS only
External 2/4-hole
Puncher-A1
FRN, 2 holes / 4 holes
Paper size: A3, A4
CEL only
External 4-hole
Puncher-A1
SWE, 4 holes
Paper size: A3, A4
CEL only
Staple-D2
Saddle Staple Cartridge.
Option for Booklet Finisher-P1.
Staple-D3
Saddle Staple Cartridge.
Option for Booklet Finisher-P1.
Staple-J1
Plain Staple Cartridge.
Option for Staple Finisher-E1/Booklet Finisher-P1.
T-1-3
Product Overview > Product Lineup > Pickup/Delivery System Option > Required Options/Conditions
1-3
Product Overview > Product Lineup > Scanning System Options > Required Options and Conditions
Scanning System Options
Product name
Duplex Color Image

Reader Unit-G1
Simultaneous 2-sided scanning

B/W (1-sided/2-sided): 600 dpi=120/120 ipm, 300 dpi: 120/200 ipm
Color (1-sided/2-sided): 600 dpi=51/51 ipm, 300 dpi:85/100 ipm
Paper weight:
<1-sided> AB configuration: 38 to 220 g/m2, Inch configuration: 50 to 220
g/m2
<2-sided> 50 to 220 g/m2
Color original, or color-mixed original: 64 to 220 g/m2
Stacking capacity: Max. 300 sheets
Reader Heater Unit-G1 Option for Color Image Reader Unit-C1/Duplex Color Image Reader
Unit-C1
CMJ, CLA, CSPL, CHK, CCN, CKBS, TAIWAN only
In the 230V areas other than the areas above, this is set as a service part.
ADF Access Handle-A1 It is the cover to be installed at the top of the host machine when using this
equipment as a printer model.
Printer Cover-C1
It is the handle to support opening and closing the Feeder.
Required Options and Conditions

Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-G1
Reader Heater
Unit-G1
1-4
ADF Access Handle-A1
T-1-4
Printer Cover-B1
F-1-3
Product Overview > Product Lineup > Scanning System Options > Required Options and Conditions
1-4
Product Overview > Product Lineup > Function Expansion System Options > Required Options and Conditions
Function Expansion System Options
1-5
Hardware Products
Product name
Required Options and Conditions
Utility Tray-A2
Utility Tray-A2
Card Reader-F1
Handset-G2
Card Reader-F1
Copy Card Reader Attachment-A2
Upright Control Panel-B1

Control Panel Sheet-E1
Voice
Guidance
Unit
Multimedia Reader/
Writer-A2
USB Device Port-A2
Voice Guidance Kit-F2
2.5inch/160GB HDD-J1
2.5inch/1TB HDD-K1
Copy Card Reader Installation Kit-A2

Upright Control Panel-B1
Control Panel Sheet-E1
Super G3 FAX Board-AL1
Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AL1
Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board-AL1
Handset-G2
Removable
HDD Kit-AG1
imagePASS-U2
Voice
Guidance
PCB

Serial Interface Kit-K1
Licence option
USB Device Port-A2

Copy Control Interface Kit-A1
Expansion Memory Type D (512 MB)

Option HDD (2.5 inch/160 GB)-J1
imagePASS-U2
Additional Memory
Type D (512MB)
HDD Mirroring Kit-G1
HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C5
Data Analyzer Board-B1
Option HDD (2.5 inch/1 TB)-K1

F-1-4

HDD Data Encryption/Mirroring Kit-C5
Removable HDD Kit-AG1

Document Scan Lock Kit-B1
Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2
SC Kit

Using with Handset-G2 is not available.
No particular options and conditions are required.
Copy Card Reader Installation Kit-A2 is required.
Using with Serial Interface Kit-K1 and Control Interface
Kit-A1 is not available.
Required when Card Reader-F1 is installed.
Control Panel Sheet-E1 is required.
Required when Upright Control Panel-B1 is installed.
Super G3 FAX Board-AL1 is required.
Super G3 FAX Board-AL1 is required.
Other than CEL, CCN
Super G3 FAX Board-AL1 and Super G3 2nd Line Fax
Board-AL1 is required.
Using with Utility Tray-A2 is not available.
CMJ only
Other than CMJ, CCN
Product configuration consists of Voice Guidance PCB
and Voice Guidance Unit.
Other than CMJ, CCN, CKBS
The product consists of USB 2 Port HUB PCB only.
CEL is standard
Required when 600 dpi color scanning (mode) is used.
This is used when the mirroring function is used with HDD
Mirroring Kit-G1 or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring
Kit-C5.
This is used when the mirroring function is used with HDD
Mirroring Kit-G1 or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring
Kit-C5.
Option HDD (2.5 inch/160 GB)-J1 or Option HDD (2.5
inch/1 TB)-K1 are required.
When performing mirroring, either the Option HDD (160
GB) or the Option HDD (1 TB) is required.
Other than CCN
CMJ only
USB Device Port-A2 is required.
To support the CF, the SD memory and the memory stick.
CMJ only
1-5
Product name
Serial Interface Kit-K1
Control Interface Kit-A1
1-6
Product name
Required when the coin manager is connected.

Using with Card Reader-C1 and Control Interface Kit-A1
is not available.
Required when the coin manager is connected.
Using with Card Reader-C1 and Serial Interface Kit-K1 is
not available.
T-1-5
ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM KIT-B1 No particular options and conditions are required.
Other than CKBS, TAIWAN
Web Access Software-H1
Other than CKBS
iR-ADV Security Kit-G1 for IEEE 2600.1
Common Criteria Certification
Remote Fax Kit-A1
T-1-6
License Products
At the time of installation, obtain the license number according to the license certificate
included. Then, enter the obtained license number from the Control Panel of the machine, so
that the applicable functions are enabled.
There is no physical installation work at the time of installation.
Product name
PCL Printer Kit-AV1

Other than CMJ
PS Printer Kit-AV1
Scan Solution Function Expansion Kit-B1 No particular options and conditions are required.
CMJ only
Universal Send Advanced Feature Set-D1 No particular options and conditions are required.
Other than CMJ
Universal Send Advanced Feature Set-E1 No particular options and conditions are required.
CEL only
Universal Send Advanced Feature Set-F1 No particular options and conditions are required.
CUSA only
Universal Send Security Feature Set-D1
Other than CMJ, CCN
Direct Print Kit (for PDF/XPS)-H1
CMJ, CUSA, CLA, CCI, CEL, CAUS only
Direct Print Kit (for PDF)-H1
CLA, CSPL, CHK, CCN, CKBS, TAIWAN, CAUS only
Direct Print Kit (for XPS)-H1
CLA, CSPL, CHK, CCN, CKBS, TAIWAN, CAUS only
Universal Send Digital User Signature
Kit-C1
Other than CMJ
Remote Operation Kit-B1
Data Erase Kit-C1
Encrypted Secure Print Software-D1
CUSA, CLA, CCI only
Encrypted Printing Software-D1
CEL, CAUS, CSPL, TAIWAN only
Barcode Printing Kit-D1
Other than CMJ
Secure Watermark-B1
1-6
Product Overview > Features > Service Features > Improved Service Operability
1-7
Features
Service Features
Improved Service Operability
Product Features
Removing of the Process Unit becomes easy.

The Process Unit can be removed by accessing only from the front side.
High productivity
High image quality
Energy saving
8-beam laser
Drum Heater is OFF

at night
High productivity
Silent machine
<Preparation>
1) Open the Inner Cover.
2) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly.
3) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly.
High image quality
<Procedure>
Twin development
1) Remove the 2 screws.
IH fixing
2) Remove the Drum Fixation Cylinder by removing the screw for installing the Drum Fixation
Cylinder, and remove the Process Unit.
High image quality

Silent machine
Air flow improved
High productivity
High image quality
Next generation
Controller
- A-Si drum (84)

- pO toner
- ETB (Rubber Belt)
- Charging Assembly
Shutter
Screw (RS Tightening)
x3
High productivity
- Pickup supporting
1319.2
- 220gsm paper
Screw (for installing

the Drum Fixation Cylinder)
F-1-5
F-1-6
Product Overview > Features > Service Features > Improved Service Operability
1-7
Product Overview > Features > Service Features > Improved Upgrading Operability
1-8
New Service Mode
Easy access to the parts at rear side.

Since the Rear Cover Unit becomes a retractable unit, access to the parts at rear side
The description of each service mode item is displayed as well.
becomes easy.
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Reader Communication Cable.
2) Remove the 4 screws, and open the Controller Box in the direction of the arrow.
Controller Box
F-1-7
Performing the rear side work while checking the Control Panel is
possible.
By removing the Rotation Control Screw, the Upright Control Panel can be turned to face the
rear side.
F-1-9
As a result, service modes can be executed even when working at rear side of the host
Features
machine.
Display in natural language
<Procedure>
Items in the following are newly classified: COPIER > OPTION > BODY
1) Remove the Shaft Support Cover Left.
Enhanced I/O information
2) Remove the screw on the arm, and turn the Upright Control Panel.
The description of error code/alarm code is displayed.

Easy switching of screens between Level 1 and Level 2
Improved Upgrading Operability

Almost all of the options (*) can be upgraded through the host machine.
Screw
SST (Service Support Tool) is used for upgrading as usual.
Upright Control
Panel
* Excluding Paper Folding Insertion Unit-H1, Document Insertion Unit-L1 and External
Puncher-A1.
F-1-8
Product Overview > Features > Service Features > Improved Upgrading Operability
1-8
Product Overview > Features > Service Features > Jam/Error Code Display Specifications
Jam/Error Code Display Specifications
1-9
Service Advantage
When a paper jam/error is reported from the user:
Jam code:
Jam Code and Location Code are displayed on the screen (*) when a paper jam occurs.
The location (device) causing the paper jam/error can be recognized before the service
technician is sent to the user site.
The cause of trouble and the remedy can be assumed before the service technician is sent
to the user site.
Depending on the cause of the paper jam (e.g.: paper jam caused by wrong operation by
the user), support can be completed by the phone or e-mail. (Visiting to the user site is not
necessary.)
aabbbb
aa : location
bbbb : jam code
F-1-10
Error Code
In addition to Error Code, Location Code is displayed on the screen when an error occurs.
Exxxxxx-yyyy-aa
xxxxxx : error code
yyyy : sub-code
aa : location
F-1-11
Product Overview > Features > Service Features > Jam/Error Code Display Specifications
1-9
Product Overview > Features > Service Features > Applying New Connectors
1-10
Applying New Connectors

Newly-configured connectors are used as some connectors on each controller PCB.
F-1-12
Purpose
To prevent the communication error caused by the following:
Loose/removed connector due to vibration during transportation
Half-inserted connector at the time of servicing
Features
Easy to hold because the overall height of the housing is high
Connector can be inserted with less force.
Lever lock mechanism is available. Proper insertion can be determined by the sound (snap)
or clicky feeling
Points to Caution when Inserting/Removing the Connector:
Be sure to keep the following in mind during work:
While releasing the lever lock of the housing, hold the housing to remove. Do not
hold and pull the harness.
Be sure to insert the connector while the housing is positioned straight to the socket.
Do not tilt the housing to insert the connector.
Product Overview > Features > Service Features > Applying New Connectors
1-10
Product Overview > Specifications > Product Specifications
Specifications
Installation type of main body

Paper size
Product Specifications
Installation type of main body
Photoreceptor
Exposure method
Charging method
Developing method
Transfer method
Separation method
Pickup method
Right/Left Deck
Upper/Lower
Cassette
Multi-purpose Tray
Cleaning method Drum
ETB
Fixing method
Delivery method
Type of toner
Toner supplying method
Toner level detection function
Leading edge image margin
Left image margin
Warm-up time
At power-on
At sleep recovery
First copy time
Console type
84 diameter amorphous silicon drum
Laser exposure method
Corona + Grid charging method
Dry, 1-component toner projection
Transfer Roller method
Transfer Belt
Separation retard method
Separation retard method
Simple retard method

Cleaning Blade
Cleaning Blade + Brush Roller
Heat Roller method
Face-up/face-down
Magnetic negative toner
Set-on
Yes
2.5 mm +/- 1.5 mm
2.5 mm +/- 1.5 mm
30 sec. or less
30 sec. or less
iR ADV 6075: 3.1 sec. or less
iR ADV 6065/6055: 3.3 sec. or less
Image gradations
256 gradations
Print resolution
Max. 1,200 dpi x 1,200 dpi
Maximum image guaranteed area
292 x 426.8mm
Maximum printable area
292 x 625mm
Paper Type
Deck
52 to 220 g/m2
thin paper, plain paper, heavy paper, color paper, recycled
paper, pre-punched paper, letterhead bond paper
Cassette
52 to 220 g/m2
Deck feedable type, index paper, tab paper
Multi-purpose Tray 52 to 256 g/m2
Deck feedable type, transparency, labels, tracing paper,
postcard
1-11
Product Overview > Specifications > Product Specifications
Console type
Deck
Cassette
A4, B5, LTR

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8K, 16K, LDR, LGL,
LTR, LTRR, STMTR, EXE
Multi-purpose Tray Cassette feedable size
Postcard, Reply Postcard, 4 on 1 Postcard
Custom paper size (100 x 139.7 mm to 297.4 x 431.8
mm)
Long length paper (297 mm to 630 mm)
Pickup capacity
Right/Left Deck
1,500 sheets each (80 g/m2)
Upper/Lower
550 sheets each (80g/m2)
Cassette
Multi-purpose Tray 100 sheets (80 g/m2)
Duplex method
Through pass
Memory capacity
For Main Controller 1: 1GB (standard)
For Main Controller 2: Max. 1GB (standard: 512MB,
option: 512MB)
HDD capacity
Standard: 160GB, Maximum: 1 TB
Environment temperature range
2.5 to 37.5 deg C
Environment humidity range
5 to 80 %RH
Environment atmosphere range
610 to 1013 hpa (0.6 to 1.0 atmospheric pressure)
Noise
At the time of
75 dB or less
printing
Rated power supply
See Power Supply Specifications.
Maximum power At the time of
2.0 kW or less (100 V)
consumption
printing
1.92 kW or less (120-127 V)
2.2 kW or less (220-240 V)
At the time of sleep 1.0 W or less (100 V, 120-127 V)
1.5 W or less (220-240 V)
At the time of save 240 Wh or less
mode
Dimension
645 (W) x 770 (D) x 1,220 (H) mm (including ADF)
Weight
237 kg (including Reader + ADF)
T-1-7
1-11
Product Overview > Specifications > Weight and Size
1-12
Power Supply Specifications:

Product name
Weight and Size
Power
Japan
North
Europe
Asia
Australia
supply
America
source
(number of V I (A) V I (A) V I (A) V I (A) V I (A)
cables)
(V)
(V)
(V)
(V)
(V)
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
6275 / 6265/ 6255
Paper Deck Unit-A1
Paper Deck Unit-D1
Power
100 15 120 16 220 10 220 10 220
outlet (1)
-127
-240
-240
-240
Main body
Main body
Power
100 5 100 5 100 5 100
outlet (1)
-240
-240
-240
-240
Paper Folding Insertion
Power
100 5 100 5 100 5 100 5 100
Unit-H1
outlet (1)
-240
-240
-240
-240
-240
Shift Tray-E1
Main body
Staple Finisher-P1
Main body
Saddle Finisher-P1
Main body
External Puncher-A1
Finisher
Duplex Color Image Reader Main body
Unit-G1
Color Image Reader Unit-G1 Main body
-
10
5
5
-
Product name
imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6275 /
6265/ 6255
Paper Deck Unit-A1
Paper Deck Unit-D1
Paper Folding Insertion Unit-H1
Copy Tray-Q1
Shift Tray-E1
Staple Finisher-P1
Booklet Finisher-P1
External Puncher-A1
Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-G1
Color Image Reader Unit-G1
Width (mm)
Depth (mm) Height (mm)
Weight (kg)
645
770
1220
235
323
601
746
662
420
366
649
756
107
635
635
583
621
793
679
382
547
656
656
615
605
605
570
570
1407
1242
175
256
1121
1121
367
253
253
37
57
61
76
1.1
4.2
48
70.5
7.7
39.4
37.4
T-1-9
T-1-8
Product Overview > Specifications > Weight and Size
1-12
Product Overview > Specifications > Productivity (Print Speed)
1-13
Productivity (Print Speed)

Unit: sheets / minute
Paper type
Plain paper
(64 to 90 g/m2)
Thin paper
(52 to 63 g/m2)
Heavy 1
(91 to 180 g/m2)
Heavy 2
(181 to 220 g/m2)
Heavy 3
(221 to 256 g/m2)
Bond
Tab
Transparency
Size
A5R
STMTR
B5
A4
LTR
B5R
LTRR
A4R
LGLR
B4R
K8R
A3R
LDRR
A5R
STMTR
B5
A4
LTR
B5R
LTRR
A4R
LGLR
B4R
K8R
A3R
LDRR
LTR
LTRR
A4
LTR
A4
LTR
Feeding
Width
direction direction
(mm)
(mm)
210.0
215.9
182.0
210.0
215.9
257.0
279.4
297.0
355.6
364.0
390.0
420.0
431.8
210.0
215.9
182.0
210.0
215.9
257.0
279.4
297.0
355.6
364.0
390.0
420.0
431.8
215.9
279.4
222.7
228.6
210.0
215.9
148.5
139.7
257.0
297.0
279.4
182.0
215.9
210.0
215.9
257.0
270.0
297.0
279.4
148.5
139.7
257.0
297.0
279.4
182.0
215.9
210.0
215.9
257.0
270.0
297.0
279.4
279.4
215.9
297.0
279.4
297.0
279.4
imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6275

Deck / Cassette
Multi-purpose Tray
1-sided
2-sided
1-sided
2-sided
35.0
35.0
75.0
75.0
75.0
63.0
58.0
54.0
45.0
45.0
37.0
37.0
37.0
35.0
35.0
65.0
65.0
65.0
54.0
50.0
46.0
39.0
39.0
32.0
32.0
32.0
35.0
24.0
59.0
59.0
-
17.5
17.5
37.5
37.5
37.5
31.5
29.0
27.0
22.5
22.5
18.5
18.5
18.5
17.5
17.5
32.5
32.5
32.5
27.0
25.0
23.0
19.5
19.5
16.0
16.0
16.0
17.5
12.0
-
35.0
35.0
53.0
53.0
53.0
47.0
45.0
44.0
38.0
38.0
33.0
33.0
33.0
35.0
35.0
53.0
53.0
53.0
47.0
45.0
44.0
39.0
39.0
32.0
32.0
32.0
35.0
24.0
53.0
17.5
17.5
26.5
26.5
26.5
23.5
22.5
22.0
19.0
19.0
16.5
16.5
16.5
17.5
17.5
26.5
26.5
26.5
23.5
22.5
22.0
19.5
19.5
16.0
16.0
16.0
17.5
12.0
-

Deck / Cassette
Multi-purpose Tray
1-sided
2-sided
1-sided
2-sided
35.0
35.0
65.0
65.0
65.0
55.0
50.0
47.0
39.0
39.0
32.0
32.0
32.0
35.0
35.0
56.0
56.0
56.0
47.0
43.0
40.0
33.0
33.0
27.0
27.0
27.0
30.0
21.0
51.0
51.0
-
17.5
17.5
32.5
32.5
32.5
27.5
25.0
23.5
19.5
19.5
16.0
16.0
16.0
17.5
17.5
28.0
28.0
28.0
23.5
21.5
20.0
16.5
16.5
13.5
13.5
13.5
15.0
10.5
-
35.0
35.0
46.0
46.0
46.0
41.0
39.0
38.0
33.0
33.0
29.0
29.0
29.0
35.0
35.0
46.0
46.0
46.0
41.0
39.0
38.0
33.0
33.0
27.0
27.0
27.0
30.0
21.0
80.0
46.0
17.5
17.5
23.0
23.0
23.0
20.5
19.5
19.0
16.5
16.5
14.5
14.5
14.5
17.5
17.5
23.0
23.0
23.0
20.5
19.5
19.0
16.5
16.5
13.5
13.5
13.5
15.0
10.5
-

Deck / Cassette
Multi-purpose Tray
1-sided
2-sided
1-sided
2-sided
35.0
35.0
55.0
55.0
55.0
46.0
43.0
40.0
39.0
39.0
32.0
32.0
32.0
35.0
35.0
55.0
55.0
55.0
46.0
43.0
40.0
33.0
33.0
27.0
27.0
27.0
30.0
21.0
51.0
51.0
-
17.5
17.5
27.5
27.5
27.5
23.0
21.5
20.0
19.5
19.5
16.0
16.0
16.0
17.5
17.5
27.5
27.5
27.5
23.0
21.5
20.0
16.5
16.5
13.5
13.5
13.5
15.0
10.5
-
35.0
35.0
46.0
46.0
46.0
41.0
39.0
38.0
33.0
33.0
29.0
29.0
29.0
35.0
35.0
46.0
46.0
46.0
41.0
39.0
38.0
33.0
33.0
27.0
27.0
27.0
30.0
21.0
80.0
46.0
17.5
17.5
23.0
23.0
23.0
20.5
19.5
19.0
16.5
16.5
14.5
14.5
14.5
17.5
17.5
23.0
23.0
23.0
20.5
19.5
19.0
16.5
16.5
13.5
13.5
13.5
15.0
10.5
T-1-10
Product Overview > Specifications > Productivity (Print Speed)
1-13
Product Overview > Specifications > Paper Type
1-14
Paper Type
Following shows the types of usable papers.
See the table below for the custom paper size.
Type
Feeding direction (mm)
Width direction (mm)
Custom paper size 0-1

Custom paper size 5 (long length)
148.0 to 487.7
148.0 to 181.9
182.0 to 209.9
210.0 to 279.2
279.3 to 432.0
432.1 to 487.7
182.0 to 209.9
210.0 to 279.2
279.3 to 432.0
432.1 to 487.7
182.0 to 209.9
210.0 to 279.2
279.3 to 432.0
432.1 to 487.7
487.8 to 630.0
100 to 139.6
139.7 to 330.2
139.7 to 181.9
182.0 to 210.0
210.1 to 297.0
139.7 to 330.2
T-1-11
1-14
Type
Thin paper (52 to 63 g/m2)
Size
A3
B4
A4R
A4
B5R
B5
A5R
11x17
LGL
LTR
LTRR
STMTR
SRA3
12x18
EXEC
OFFICIO
E-OFFICIO
B-OFFICIO
M-OFFICIO
A-OFFICIO
A-LTR
A-LTRR
GLTR-R
GLTR
GLGL
AFLS
FLS
13x19
K8
K16
K16R
F4A
Custom paper size 0-1, 0-2
Custom paper size 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 2-1,
2-2, 2-3, 3-1, 3-2, 3-3
Free size
Free size (long length)
1-15
Pickup position
Feeding
direction
(mm)
Width
direction
(mm)
420
364
297
210
257
182
210
431.8
355.6
215.9
279.4
215.9
450
457.2
184.1
317.5
320
355
341
340
220
280
266.7
203.2
330.2
337
330.2
482.6
390
195
270
342.9
-
297
257
210
297
182
257
148
279.4
215.9
279.4
215.9
139.7
320
304.8
266.7
215.9
220
216
216
220
280
220
203.2
266.7
203.2
206
215.9
330.2
270
270
195
215.9
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
182.2 to 487.7 100 to 297.0

487.8 to 630.0 100 to 297.0
Multi-purpose
Right Deck Left Deck Cassette 3 Cassette 4
Tray
Paper
Deck-A1
Paper
Insertion Unit
Deck-D1
1-15
Type
Plain paper 1
(64 to 90 g/m2)
Recycled paper 1
(64 to 90 g/m2)
Color paper
(64 to 90 g/m2)
Size
A3
B4
A4R
A4
B5R
B5
A5R
11x17
LGL
LTR
LTRR
STMTR
SRA3
12x18
EXEC
OFFICIO
E-OFFICIO
B-OFFICIO
M-OFFICIO
A-OFFICIO
A-LTR
A-LTRR
GLTR-R
GLTR
GLGL
AFLS
FLS
13x19
K8
K16
K16R
F4A
2-2, 2-3, 3-1, 3-2, 3-3
Free size
1-16
Pickup position
Feeding
direction
(mm)
Width
direction
(mm)
420
364
297
210
257
182
210
431.8
355.6
215.9
279.4
215.9
450
457.2
184.1
317.5
320
355
341
340
220
280
266.7
203.2
330.2
337
330.2
482.6
390
195
270
342.9
-
297
257
210
297
182
257
148
279.4
215.9
279.4
215.9
139.7
320
304.8
266.7
215.9
220
216
216
220
280
220
203.2
266.7
203.2
206
215.9
330.2
270
270
195
215.9
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
182.2 to 487.7 100 to 297.0

487.8 to 630.0 100 to 297.0
Multi-purpose
Tray
Paper
Deck-A1
Paper
Insertion Unit
Deck-D1
1-16
Type
Heavy paper 1
(91 to 180 g/m2)
Letterhead
Size
A3
B4
A4R
A4
B5R
B5
A5R
11x17
LGL
LTR
LTRR
STMTR
SRA3
12x18
EXEC
OFFICIO
E-OFFICIO
B-OFFICIO
M-OFFICIO
A-OFFICIO
A-LTR
A-LTRR
GLTR-R
GLTR
GLGL
AFLS
FLS
13x19
K8
K16
K16R
F4A
2-2, 2-3, 3-1, 3-2, 3-3
Free size
1-17
Pickup position
Feeding
direction
(mm)
Width
direction
(mm)
420
364
297
210
257
182
210
431.8
355.6
215.9
279.4
215.9
450
457.2
184.1
317.5
320
355
341
340
220
280
266.7
203.2
330.2
337
330.2
482.6
390
195
270
342.9
-
297
257
210
297
182
257
148
279.4
215.9
279.4
215.9
139.7
320
304.8
266.7
215.9
220
216
216
220
280
220
203.2
266.7
203.2
206
215.9
330.2
270
270
195
215.9
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
182.2 to 487.7 100 to 297.0

487.8 to 630.0 100 to 297.0
Multi-purpose
Tray
Paper
Deck-A1
Paper
Insertion Unit
Deck-D1
1-17
Type
Heavy paper 2
(181 to 220 g/m2)
Size
A3
B4
A4R
A4
B5R
B5
A5R
11x17
LGL
LTR
LTRR
STMTR
SRA3
12x18
EXEC
OFFICIO
E-OFFICIO
B-OFFICIO
M-OFFICIO
A-OFFICIO
A-LTR
A-LTRR
GLTR-R
GLTR
GLGL
AFLS
FLS
13x19
K8
K16
K16R
F4A
2-2, 2-3, 3-1, 3-2, 3-3
Free size
1-18
Pickup position
Feeding
direction
(mm)
Width
direction
(mm)
420
364
297
210
257
182
210
431.8
355.6
215.9
279.4
215.9
450
457.2
184.1
317.5
320
355
341
340
220
280
266.7
203.2
330.2
337
330.2
482.6
390
195
270
342.9
-
297
257
210
297
182
257
148
279.4
215.9
279.4
215.9
139.7
320
304.8
266.7
215.9
220
216
216
220
280
220
203.2
266.7
203.2
206
215.9
330.2
270
270
195
215.9
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
182.2 to 487.7 100 to 297.0

487.8 to 630.0 100 to 297.0
Multi-purpose
Tray
Paper
Deck-A1
Paper
Insertion Unit
Deck-D1
1-18
Type
Heavy paper 3
(221 to 256 g/m2)
Size
A3
B4
A4R
A4
B5R
B5
A5R
11x17
LGL
LTR
LTRR
STMTR
SRA3
12x18
EXEC
OFFICIO
E-OFFICIO
B-OFFICIO
M-OFFICIO
A-OFFICIO
A-LTR
A-LTRR
GLTR-R
GLTR
GLGL
AFLS
FLS
13x19
K8
K16
K16R
F4A
1-3, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 5 (long
length)
Free size
1-19
Pickup position
Feeding
direction
(mm)
Width
direction
(mm)
420
364
297
210
257
182
210
431.8
355.6
215.9
279.4
215.9
450
457.2
184.1
317.5
320
355
341
340
220
280
266.7
203.2
330.2
337
330.2
482.6
390
195
270
342.9
297
257
210
297
182
257
148
279.4
215.9
279.4
215.9
139.7
320
304.8
266.7
215.9
220
216
216
220
280
220
203.2
266.7
203.2
206
215.9
330.2
270
270
195
215.9
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
182.2 to 487.7 100 to 297.0

487.8 to 630.0 100 to 297.0
Multi-purpose
Tray
Paper
Deck-A1
Paper
Insertion Unit
Deck-D1
1-19
Type
Transparency
Size
A3
B4
A4R
A4
B5R
B5
A5R
11x17
LGL
LTR
LTRR
STMTR
SRA3
12x18
EXEC
OFFICIO
E-OFFICIO
B-OFFICIO
M-OFFICIO
A-OFFICIO
A-LTR
A-LTRR
GLTR-R
GLTR
GLGL
AFLS
FLS
13x19
K8
K16
K16R
F4A
1-3, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 5 (long
length)
Free size
1-20
Pickup position
Feeding
direction
(mm)
Width
direction
(mm)
420
364
297
210
257
182
210
431.8
355.6
215.9
279.4
215.9
450
457.2
184.1
317.5
320
355
341
340
220
280
266.7
203.2
330.2
337
330.2
482.6
390
195
270
342.9
297
257
210
297
182
257
148
279.4
215.9
279.4
215.9
139.7
320
304.8
266.7
215.9
220
216
216
220
280
220
203.2
266.7
203.2
206
215.9
330.2
270
270
195
215.9
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
182.2 to 487.7 100 to 297.0

487.8 to 630.0 100 to 297.0
Multi-purpose
Tray
Paper
Deck-A1
Paper
Insertion Unit
Deck-D1
1-20
Type
Labels
Size
A3
B4
A4R
A4
B5R
B5
A5R
11x17
LGL
LTR
LTRR
STMTR
SRA3
12x18
EXEC
OFFICIO
E-OFFICIO
B-OFFICIO
M-OFFICIO
A-OFFICIO
A-LTR
A-LTRR
GLTR-R
GLTR
GLGL
AFLS
FLS
13x19
K8
K16
K16R
F4A
1-3, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 5 (long
length)
Free size
1-21
Pickup position
Feeding
direction
(mm)
Width
direction
(mm)
420
364
297
210
257
182
210
431.8
355.6
215.9
279.4
215.9
450
457.2
184.1
317.5
320
355
341
340
220
280
266.7
203.2
330.2
337
330.2
482.6
390
195
270
342.9
297
257
210
297
182
257
148
279.4
215.9
279.4
215.9
139.7
320
304.8
266.7
215.9
220
216
216
220
280
220
203.2
266.7
203.2
206
215.9
330.2
270
270
195
215.9
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
182.2 to 487.7 100 to 297.0

487.8 to 630.0 100 to 297.0
Multi-purpose
Tray
Paper
Deck-A1
Paper
Insertion Unit
Deck-D1
1-21
Type
Tracing
Size
A3
B4
A4R
A4
B5R
B5
A5R
11x17
LGL
LTR
LTRR
STMTR
SRA3
12x18
EXEC
OFFICIO
E-OFFICIO
B-OFFICIO
M-OFFICIO
A-OFFICIO
A-LTR
A-LTRR
GLTR-R
GLTR
GLGL
AFLS
FLS
13x19
K8
K16
K16R
F4A
1-3, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 5 (long
length)
Free size
1-22
Pickup position
Feeding
direction
(mm)
Width
direction
(mm)
420
364
297
210
257
182
210
431.8
355.6
215.9
279.4
215.9
450
457.2
184.1
317.5
320
355
341
340
220
280
266.7
203.2
330.2
337
330.2
482.6
390
195
270
342.9
297
257
210
297
182
257
148
279.4
215.9
279.4
215.9
139.7
320
304.8
266.7
215.9
220
216
216
220
280
220
203.2
266.7
203.2
206
215.9
330.2
270
270
195
215.9
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
182.2 to 487.7 100 to 297.0

487.8 to 630.0 100 to 297.0
Multi-purpose
Tray
Paper
Deck-A1
Paper
Insertion Unit
Deck-D1
1-22
Type
Cotton (Bond)
Tab paper
Size
A3
B4
A4R
A4
B5R
B5
A5R
11x17
LGL
LTR
LTRR
STMTR
SRA3
12x18
EXEC
OFFICIO
E-OFFICIO
B-OFFICIO
M-OFFICIO
A-OFFICIO
A-LTR
A-LTRR
GLTR-R
GLTR
GLGL
AFLS
FLS
13x19
K8
K16
K16R
F4A
1-3, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, 3-2, 3-3, 5 (long
length)
Free size
A4
LTR
1-23
Pickup position
Feeding
direction
(mm)
Width
direction
(mm)
420
364
297
210
257
182
210
431.8
355.6
215.9
279.4
215.9
450
457.2
184.1
317.5
320
355
341
340
220
280
266.7
203.2
330.2
337
330.2
482.6
390
195
270
342.9
297
257
210
297
182
257
148
279.4
215.9
279.4
215.9
139.7
320
304.8
266.7
215.9
220
216
216
220
280
220
203.2
266.7
203.2
206
215.9
330.2
270
270
195
215.9
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
-
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
182.2 to 487.7 100 to 297.0

487.8 to 630.0 100 to 297.0
210
297
215.9
279.4
Multi-purpose
Tray
Paper
Deck-A1
Paper
Insertion Unit
Deck-D1
1-23
Type
Pre-Punched paper
Postcard
Size
A4
LTR
Postcard
Reply Postcard
4 on 1 Postcard
1-24
Feeding
direction
(mm)
Width
direction
(mm)
210
215.9
148
200
200
297
279.4
100
148
296
Pickup position
Multi-purpose
Tray
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
-
Paper
Deck-A1
Yes
Yes
-
Paper
Insertion Unit
Deck-D1
Yes
Yes
-
T-1-12
1-24
Product Overview > External View/Internal View > External View > External Cover
1-25
External View/Internal View

[32]
External View
[34]
[31]
External Cover
[30]
[2]
[1]
[18]
[29]
[3]
[16]
[17]
[33]
[28]
[4]
[19]
[27]
[26]
[5]
[15]
[25]
[14]
[20]
[24]
[6]
[23]
[21]
[22]
[8]
[13]
F-1-14
[9]
[12]
[7]
[10]
[11]
F-1-13
Product Overview > External View/Internal View > External View > External Cover
[1]
[3]
[5]
[7]
[9]
[11]
[13]
[15]
[17]
[19]
[21]
[23]
[25]
[27]
[29]
[31]
[33]
Upper Cover
Control Panel
Toner Exchange Cover
Deck Left Cover
Cassette Front Cover
Left Front Cover
Left Handle Cover
Finisher Connector Cover
Upper Rear Cover
Rear Upper Cover
Filter Cover
Right Lower Cover
Vertical Path Cover
Right Handle Cover
Right Cover
MP Pickup Tray
Right Rear Cover 1
[2]
[4]
[6]
[8]
[10]
[12]
[14]
[16]
[18]
[20]
[22]
[24]
[26]
[28]
[30]
[32]
[34]
Upper Left Cover

Upper Right Cover
Front Cover
Deck Right Cover
Left Lower Cover
Delivery Cover
Left Upper Cover
Left Rear Cover
Rear Lower Cover
Waste Toner Container Cover
Right Rear Cover 2
Right Front Cover
Inner Cove
MP Pickup Tray Sub Cover
Right Upper Cover
Right Rear Cover 2
1-25
Product Overview > External View/Internal View > Cross-Section View
1-26
Cross-Section View
Switches, I/F, Others
Drum Cleaning Unit

ETB Unit
(Transfer Belt Unit)
Pre-exposure
LED
Primary
Charging Assembly
Laser Scanner
Unit
Multi-purpose
Tray Pickup Unit
Fixing Assembly
Developing Assembly
Main Power Switch
Reverse Delivery Unit
Pre-transfer
Charging Assembly
Transfer Cleaning
Unit
Duplex Feed Unit
Environment
Heater Switch
Left Deck
Pickup Paper
Path Unit
Right Deck
Cassette
Heater Switch
Cassette 3
Leakage Breaker
Cassette 4
F-1-16
F-1-15
Be sure to perform the following procedure for checking the Leakage Breaker.
1) Turn OFF the main power switch and check that the Control Panel LED is off.
2) Using a pen point, press the test button of the breaker on the rear side of the machine.
3) Check that the breaker switch is OFF (O side).
4) Return the breaker switch to ON (I side).
5) Turn ON the main power switch.
Product Overview > External View/Internal View > Cross-Section View
1-26
Product Overview > Operation > Control Panel > Control Panel
1-27
Operation
Power Switch
Control Panel
Control Panel
6
Types of Power Switches
10
Power
Main Menu
This machine has the Main Power Switch, the Control Panel Power Switch and the
Environment Heater Switch.
Energy Saver
Quick Menu
Turning ON the Main Power Switch supplies the power in the usual case (except when the
Settings/Registration
machine is in sleep mode).
11
The Environment Switch supplies or blocks the power to the Drum Heater, the Cassette
Log In/Out
Status Monitor/Cancel
Do not turn OFF the Main Power Switch while the progress bar (to be displayed when the
Be sure to turn OFF the Main Power Switch to cut the power (there is no need to perform
the shutdown sequence which has been performed with the conventional machines).
After turning OFF the power (after turning OFF the Main Power Switch), do not turn ON the
Main Power Switch unless the screen disappears.
Do not turn OFF the power during downloading.
Product Overview > Operation > Control Panel > Control Panel
12
Start
Reset
Stop
13
17
Points to Note on Turning ON/OFF the Power Switch
Clear
16
15
Heater and the Reader Heater.
power is turned ON) is displayed, which indicates access to the HDD.
18
Processing/Date
Error
Main Power
14
F-1-17
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Main Menu Key

Custom Menu Key
Check/Stop Status Key
Volume Adjustment Key
Brightness Adjustment Key
Touch Panel Display
Control Panel Power Switch (Sub-power)
Energy Saver Key
USB Slot
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
Numeric Key
Settings/registration Key
Check Counter Key
Stop Key
Operation Pen
ID Key
Clear Key
Reset Key
Start Key
1-27
Product Overview > Operation > Control Panel > Differences in Main Menu
1-28
Main Menu
Differences in Main Menu

iR 7105/iR 5075 Series
Copy
Send/Fax
Mail Box
Menu Switch Key

Print
Remote Scanner
----(Easy NAVI)
Web Browser
Scan and Send

5
Fax / I-Fax
Inbox
9
iR ADVANCE 8105 / iR ADVANCE 6075 Series

Copy
Scan and Send
Scan and Save (New)
Access Stored Files (New)
Fax/I-Fax Inbox
----Secured Print
Remote Scanner
Shortcut to Settings/Registration (New)
Introduction to Useful Features
----T-1-13
F-1-18
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Copy
Scan and Send
Scan and Save
Access Stored Files
Fax/I-Fax Inbox
Secured Print
Remote Scanner
Shortcut to Settings/Registration
Introduction to Useful Features
Product Overview > Operation > Control Panel > Differences in Main Menu
1-28
Product Overview > Operation > Control Panel > Differences in Settings/Registration Menu
Settings/Registration Menu
1-29
Differences in Settings/Registration Menu
iR 5075/5065/5055 Series
Select an item to set
TOP
Preferences
Adjustment/Maintenance
Function Settings
Set Destination
1/1
Management Settings
Common Settings
Timer Setting
Adjustment/Cleaning
System Settings
Output Report
Copy Settings
Send/Receive Settings
Mail Box Settings
Printer Settings
Address Book Settings
iR ADVANCE 6075/6065/6055 Series

Preferences
Management Settings
Function Settings
Set Destination
T-1-14
4
5
OK
Log in
F-1-19
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Preferences
Function Settings
Set Destination
Management Settings
Product Overview > Operation > Control Panel > Differences in Settings/Registration Menu
1-29
Technology
Technology
Configuration
Basic
Controller
Main
Exposure System
Laser
Formation System
Image
Fixing
/ Feed System
Pickup
Auxiliary System
External
MEAP
RDS
Embedded
Updater
Management Operations
System
Technology > Basic Configuration > Functional Configuration
2-2
Basic Configuration
Functional Configuration
The machine may broadly be divided into the following functional system blocks; document
exposure system block, controller system block, laser exposure system block, image
formation system block, fixing system block and pickup/feed system block.
Document exposure system

Reader
controller
Laser
scanner
unit
(Bk)
Main
controller
1/2
Option
board
Exposure lamp
Laser exposure system
Controller system
HDD
CCD
DC
controller
Drum unit
(Bk)
ETB
Image
formation
system
Fixing system
Delivery
Transfer
Fixing
Duplexing feed
Pickup
Pickup/
feed
system
Left deck
Right deck
Cassette3
Flow of paper
Flow of signal
Cassette4
Laser beam
F-2-1
Technology > Basic Configuration > Functional Configuration
2-2
Technology > Basic Configuration > Basic Sequence > Basic sequence at power ON
2-3
Basic Sequence
Basic sequence at power ON
Main power ON
Print Unit
INITIAL
INITIAL ROTATION
STBY
Polygon Motor(M44)
ETB Motor(M43)
Developing Motor(M2)
Drum Motor(M1)
Developing Clutch(CL1)
Developing AC bias
Developing DC bias
Potential Sensor(EPC1)
Developing DC bias
Pre-transfer charging bias
Pre-exposure LED
Primary charging bias
Transfer bias
Fixing Motor(M3)
Standby Temperature Control
Fixing Heater(H3)
Duplex Feed Merging Motor(M32)
Duplex Feed Left Motor(M19)
Duplex Feed Right Motor(M18)
ETB Engagement
CCW
Detachment
CW
CCW
Delivery Motor(M13)
Multi-purpose Tray Registration Front Motor(M33)
Right Deck Pickup Solenoid(SL6)
Registration Motor(M34)
Reverse Motor(M14)
Vertical Path Upper Motor(M26)
* CW=Positive Rotation,CCW=Negative Rotation
F-2-2
Technology > Basic Configuration > Basic Sequence > Basic sequence at power ON
2-3
Technology > Basic Configuration > Basic Sequence > Basic sequence at printing <Condition: A4 1-sided (2 sheets), Right deck, Reverse delivery>
2-4
Basic sequence at printing <Condition: A4 1-sided (2 sheets), Right deck, Reverse delivery>
Start key ON
Print Unit
STBY
INTR
PRINT
LSTR
STBY
Print Status
PTOP
Video Signal
Polygon Motor(M44)
ETB Motor(M43)
Drum Motor(M1)
Developing AC bias
Developing DC bias
Developing DC bias
Pre-exposure LED
Transfer bias
Fixing Motor(M3)
Fixing Heater(H3)
ETB Engagement
CCW
CCW
Detachment
Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid(SL5)

Delivery Motor(M13)
Right Deck Pickup Motor(M11)
Reverse Motor(M14)
CCW
CCW
CW
CCW
CW

F-2-3
2-4
2-5
Start key ON
Print Unit
STBY
INTR
PRINT
LSTR
STBY
Print Status
PTOP
Video Signal
Polygon Motor(M44)
ETB Motor(M43)
Drum Motor(M1)
Developing AC bias
Developing DC bias
Developing DC bias
Pre-exposure LED
Transfer bias
Fixing Motor(M3)
Fixing Heater(H3)
CCW
CW
CW CW
CW CW
CCW
ETB Engagement

Delivery Motor(M13)
Reverse Motor(M14)
CCW
CCW
CW
CCW
CW

F-2-4
2-5
Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Features
2-6
Main Controller
Main Controller PCBs 1 and 2 are connected through the Riser (connector for interface).
Removability/installability of Main Controller PCB 1 has been improved by introducing this
configuration (Slot-in/out)
Overview
Features
Using a new controller enables high speed PDL processing, high image quality and high
functionality.
Main Controller PCB 1
F-2-6
F-2-5
Main Controller PCB 1 controls the entire system while Main Controller PCB 2 mainly controls
image processing.
Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Features
2-6
Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Specifications/configuration
2-7
Specifications/configuration
Memory
Main controller PCB 1
PCBs
BAT1
DDR2-SDRAM
1GB (Standard)

HDD(Option)
HDD(Standard)
TPM PCB
Flash PCB
F-2-7
Parts name
Function, specifications, features
Main controller CPU: 1.8 GHz, Control of the entire system

PCB 1
Various controls (HDD control,memory, control panel, electric power, voice), I/Fs
(PCI, USB(host),USB(devise),LAN), RTC
Flash PCB
Boot program
TPM PCB
To generate and save encryption key
Available only when TPM settings is ON: Management Settings > Data
Management > TPM Settings (default: OFF)
Not available with China models
Main controller CPU: 400 MHz, Image control
PCB 2
Image processing (resolution conversion, image rotation, halftone process, scanner
image process, printer image process, compression/decompression, decoding, direct
mapping, image area determination, generation of histogram,Trimming,Masking) ,
USB(devise) control,I/F (Reader, Printer,FAX,HDD,Power supply)
HDD
2.5 inch SATA I/F Standard: 160 GB (Area of use: 160 GB)
Up to 2 HDDs can be mounted in the case of mirroring configuration.
BOX data, Address book, security information (password, certificate)
Op.: (2.5 inch / 160 GB) HDD-J1, (2.5 inch / 1 TB) HDD-K1
F-2-8
Parts name
DDR2-SDRAM 1GB (standard)

Clock frequency: 667 MHz
Used for saving image, program data
Lithium battery For RTC
(BAT1)
Life: approx. 10 years
T-2-2
T-2-1
2-7
2-8
I/F, connector

J13
BAT1
DDR2-SDRAM
512MB Standard
Mini-USB
J6
DDR2-SDRAM
512MB Option
UI
J4
J13
FAN
J15
LAN
J7
USB(D)
J3
Riser
J17
USB(H)
J5
Flash
J11
TPM
J8
F-2-9
Parts name
DDR2-SDRAM 512 MB (standard) / clock frequency: 400 MHz

Scanner image process, printer image process, resolution conversion, compression/
decompression, coding/decoding
DDR2-SDRAM 512 MB (Op) / clock frequency: 400 MHz
Product name: Additional Memory Type B (512MB)
Rasterizing, rendering, resolution conversion, coding/decoding
Required when 600dpi color scanning (mode) is used
SRAM
16 Mbit
To save data in Settings/Registration Mode/ Service Mode and image data
management information in HDD
Lithium battery For SRAM backup, Life: approx. 10 years
(BAT1)
T-2-3
CC-VI
J21
No.
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
J11
PCI
J1025
Coin
J20
Function, specifications
USB I/F (Device)
UI:Control panel I/F
USB I/F (Host)
For MEAP, For USB keyboard (Op.)
Mini-USB I/F
Connect USB Device Port-A2 (Op.)
LAN I/F
1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
TPM PCB I/F
Flash PCB I/F
F-2-10
No.
J13
J15
J17
Voice I/F (Op.)

FAN:Fan I/F
Raiser I/F
To connect Main Controller PCB 2
Coin:I/F for card reader, I/F for serial
interface kit, I/F for coin manager (all Op.)
CC-VI:I/F for control interface kit (Op.)
J20
J21
J1025 Not used

T-2-4
2-8
2-9
Reader
J1
Data Analyzer Board
J2017
FAX-L1 Control
J2083
Memory PCB
J14
Riser
J2
FAX Power Supply

J20
DC Controller Image
J21
Power Supply
J4
Power Supply Control
J5
USB-FAX
J19
Jack
No.
HDD
J12
DC Controller Control
J22
HDD Power
Supply
J2024
J1
J2
Reader I/F
Riser I/F
To connect Main Controller PCB 1
J4
J5
Power Supply I/F

Power Supply Control I/F
J12
J14
HDD I/F
Memory PCB I/F
J19
USB-FAX I/F for 2 to 4-lines FAX

Product name: Advanced G3 2nd
Line Fax Board-AL1, Advanced G3
3rd/4th Line Fax Board-AL1
Jack
No.
F-2-11
J20
J21
FAX Power Supply I/F

DC Controller image data I/F
To connect from the back of Main
Controller PCB 2
J22 DC Controller Control data I/F
J2017 Image analysis PCB I/F
Product name: Data Analyzer Board-B1
J2024 HDD Power Supply I/F
J2083 FAX I/F for 1-line FAX
Product name: Advanced G3 FAX BoardAL1
T-2-5
2-9
2-10
Function expansion options
Main controller PCB1
Voice
Guidance
PCB
Data Analyzer Board
DDR2-SDRAM Board
F-2-13
Name
Image analysis PCB

Product name: Data Analyzer Board-B1
Scan protection for output original (Copy/SEND/BOX)
T-2-7
F-2-12
Name
Voice Guidance PCB
Product name: Voice Guidance Kit-F2

T-2-6
2-10
Technology > Main Controller > Overview > Boot/Shutdown sequence
2-11
Boot/Shutdown sequence
HDD
The partitions for Advanced Box and the distribution server are added.
Boot sequence
User Box (same as the existing machine) area is 50 GB and Advanced Box area is 15 GB.
Advanced Box area can be increased by installing the high-capacity HDD option.
[ ]: program storage location
FSTDEV
TMP_GEN
TMP_PSS
TMP_FAX
APL_SEND
APL_MEAP
APL_GEN
APL_KEEP
APL_LOG
IMG_MNG
PDLDEV
FSTCDEV
THUMDEV
BOOTDEV
CRBDEV
APL_CDS
- Starting BIOS
[Main controller PCB 1]
Image data (User Box)

Universal data (temporary file)
For PDL spooling
FAX data
Address book, filter
- Starting IPL, OS
[Flash PCB]
MEAP application
Universal data
- Starting system software for main/sub CPU

[HDD -> DDR2-SDRAM]
MEAP saving data

System log
Text management table
- Starting application
PDL-related file (font, registration form, etc.)

Job archiving (chasing)
Thumbnail
System software (System, language, RUI, etc.
For Advanced Box
For distribution server
F-2-14
Standby screen display

F-2-15
NOTE:
Due to the high speed startup, the progress bar and the activating PCB are not
synchronized.
For this reason, the progress bar cannot be utilized for troubleshooting.
See the following error code list for the troubleshooting.
2-11
2-12
Related error codes (major error codes):

Error code
E602
0001
0002
0006
4000
4001
E604
Error description
HDD error
HDD failed to be recognizedStartup partition (BOOTDEV) is not found at startup
No system software for the main CPU
No system software for the sub CPU
Startup failure of OS
OS startup file is not found
Insufficient memory
T-2-8
NOTE:
When the following errors occur, the system of the host machine has not been started
normally.
Therefore the error code is not recorded in the log.
E6020001
0002
0006
4000
4001
Shutdown sequence
Before turning OFF the main power switch, it is necessary to perform HDD completion
processing (to preventdamage on the HDD), cooling of the internal printer (to prevent fixed
toner due to high temperature) and exhaust (to prevent smeared image due to chemical
reaction of ozone in the machine and photosensitive drum). This sequential processing is
called shutdown sequence and was executed on the legacy models manually (by holding
down the power supply switch on the Control Panel for a specific duration).
When the main power switch is turned OFF on the main body, Main Controller PCB 1 detects
this operation and then the shutdown sequence starts/executes automatically.
NOTE:
On the assumption that the shutdown sequence was not completed normally, the host
machine is shut down by the Relay PCB in approx. 120 seconds.
2-12
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Flow of Image Data
2-13
Controls
Print
Flow of Image Data
Network
Following shows major image data flow.

The arrow mark indicates the flow of image data.
LAN
Controller
Numbers (1, 2, etc.) indicate processing order.
Copy
Printer driver
language
interpretation
Image data
buffer
Image data
buffer
SDRAM
SDRAM
Reader
Rendering
Scan type image

processing
Riser
Connector
Compression
Decompression
Image data
buffer
Image data
buffer
SDRAM
SDRAM
Riser
Connector
Compression

Spool
HDD
Decompression
To DC Controller
F-2-17
Print type image

processing

Spool
HDD
To DC Controller
F-2-16
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Flow of Image Data
2-13
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Security features (encryption key and certificate, password protection)
2-14
Security features (encryption key and certificate, password
SEND
protection)
Reader
Format conversion
Overview
Scan type image

processing
The main controller PCB 1 of the host machine holds a new PCB named TPM PCB. TPM
stands for Trusted Platform Module, which collectively refers to the chip set for generating
Image data
buffer
Image data
buffer
SDRAM
SDRAM
Riser
Connector
LAN
Controller
and storing encryption keys and computing public key encryption.
Compression
Network
Spool
HDD
Removable
F-2-18
FAX
TPM
FAX
F-2-20
The TPM PCB protects security information (passwords, certificates, and encryption keys)
FAX reception
stored in the HDD and SRAM. Note that this PCB does not protect set, registered or stored
Image processing
data other than security information.
The TPM key embedded in the chip is used to encrypt / decrypt security information. The
Image data
buffer
(JBIG Conversion)
TPM key is protected from illegal access in a virtually perfect manner, thus the security
SDRAM
Riser
Connector
information of the host machine is securely protected even in the following conditions.
Decompression
When the HDD and / or the main controller PCB is taken out from the host machine and
installed in the MFP with the different serial number (the model information held in the TPM
PCB is specific to the machine originally enabled the TPM setting)
When the system of the host machine is hacked via the network
Spool
HDD
Enable this function in Setting / Registration mode.

To DC Controller
Management Setting > Data Management > TPM Setting -> ON (OFF by default)
F-2-19
2-14
Configuration of Security Information
2-15
security information is not decodable correctly in case the HDD is failed or formatted because
The security functionality behaves differently depending on the TPM setting on the UI.
This machine provides the two types of TPM settings. See the figure below for the security
information flow in each setting.
the public key information stored in the HDD is cleared. If this occurs, execute Initialize All
Data / Settings in user mode to set the TPM setting to OFF. This will maintain the password
information in the SRAM even after the password information is initialized.
- When the TPM setting is OFF:

- When the TPM setting is ON
Common
Key
TPM Key
Backup
Backup of
Common Key
TPM PCB
Public Key
Backup Key
for TPM failure
Password
Password
(Temporarily stored in HDD)
SRAM
USB flash drive
HDD
F-2-22
When the TPM setting is OFF, the TPM key is disabled. Thus, the security information is
protected only by the common key.
Backup
Common
Key
Under this setting, the security information held in this machine is protected at the level
equivalent to the conventional machines.
Backup for
Common Key
The security functionality in this setting is configured by the common key and multiple
passwords stored in the SRAM and HDD.
Password
Password
SRAM
When the TPM setting is set to OFF, the security information is protected by the common key
and multiple passwords stored in SRAM and HDD.
HDD
The common key information is stored in the HDD as well as the SRAM. The common
F-2-21
When the TPM setting is ON, the TPM key is enabled to secure information with the three
keys. Therefore, the security information held in each machine is safely protected.
The security information in this setting can be accessed by the three keys and multiple
passwords stored in the SRAM and HDD.
Each data is stored in the specified location (enclosed with blue dots in the figure above).
Since the data in the upper layer are linked to those in the lower layer, security information is
activated only when data in all the layers are linked.
For the backup purpose, the backup key is temporarily stored also in the HDD to be prepared
for a TPM failure (only for the initial failure after the TPM setting is ON).
This key can be backed up using the USB flash drive. Once backed up, the backup key is
deleted from the HDD.
The common key information is stored in the HDD as well as the SRAM. The common key
stored in the SRAM is cleared when the main controller PCB 2 (SRAM) is replaced or after
MN-CON clear. However, the common key stored in the HDD automatically restores that in
the SRAM so that the security information is decodable even after servicing. Note that the
key stored in the SRAM is cleared when the main controller PCB 2 (SRAM) is replaced or
after MN-CON clear. Since the common key stored in the HDD will automatically restore
the common key in the SRAM, the security information is decodable correctly even after
servicing. Unlike the case that the TPM setting is set to ON, the password information stored
in the HDD is initialized when the HDD is replaced or formatted. However, the password
information is maintained in the SRAM.
TPM Setting for Security Information

The security information can be protected with or without TPM by switching between TPM
settings in Setting / Registration mode.
When the TPM setting is ON
The security functionality is enabled in 4 levels (TPM key, public key, common key and
password).
When the TPM setting is OFF
The security functionality is enabled in 2 levels (common key and password).
2-15
Preparation before Installing TPM
Works before / after introduction
Before installing TPM, ask the user to back up data.
Execute the following in Setting / Registration mode (TPM setting is OFF by default).
Follow the steps below to back up data.
1. Enable the feature
1) From Remote UI, execute Setting / Registration > Management Setting > Data
2. Backup the TPM key
Management > Import / Export. The following data types should be backed up.
3. Restore the TPM key
Address book (see *1)
2-16
4. Disable the feature
Device settings (transfer settings, address book, frequently-used Send functions) (see *2)
Setting / Registration
The works above are basically done by users.
Printer settings can be exported

Favorites stored in the web browser (only when the web browser is enabled) (see *3)
CAUTION:
When the TPM setting is set to ON, advice users on the following:
*1 Each of address books can be exported. If the address book is seen as a part of device
settings, this step can be disregarded.
*2 Among settings in the main menu, only Frequently-used Setting under Scan and
Send can be backed up.
*3 These are available only in the specific models or configurations.
2) Select Export from Custom Menu of the Remote UI to back up Custom Menu Setting
Information.
3) Log in to the system as Administrator from User Management of Advanced Box on Remote
UI. Then, execute Export to back up User Information of Advanced Box.
Back up the TPM key swiftly after the setting is ON

Keep the password used at backup securely
Never lose the USB flash drive with the backup TPM key file saved
The TPM key should be restored after the TPM PCB is replaced due to failures or the
like.
(TPM key restoration is enabled only at TPM PCB replacement.)
Unless the key is restored, the security information (passwords, encryption key, and
certificates) cannot be used.
When the key restoration is failed due to the USB flash drive lost or others, Initialize All
Data / Settings should be executed to reactivate TPM functionality. The security may
be undermined if the old Setting / Registration data are maintained as it is.
2-16
1. Enable Functionality
2-17
2.TPM Key Backup

The TPM key backup file can be stored only in USB flash drive (supported file system:
NOTE:Setup of System Management PIN

It is recommended for users (administrators) to set the system management PIN
before installing TPM. The TPM key is backed up after the TPM setting is set to ON.
However, the key backup is permitted only once. Unless the key is properly backed up,
users other than administrators may illegally obtain the backup file. To avoid such risks
effectively, the system management PIN should be set.
FAT32).
Note that this file requires the memory free space of several MBs.
F-2-25
1)Set Management Setting > Data Management > TPM Setting to ON.
Setting / Registration
1) Insert the USB flash drive to the machine.

The USB I/F (host) is found at the side of the control panel as well as the main
controller PCB.
CAUTION:
Ensure to insert only one USB flash drive.
If the backup job is started with 2 or more USB flash drives connected, the message is
shown to notify that the backup is failed.
F-2-23
NOTE:
The USB flash drive holds the TPM key backup files by serial number. Thus, backup
files for multiple machines can be saved in a USB flash drive.
2) Click Yes, and restart the machine.

2)Click [Back up TPM Key] in Management Setting > Data Management > TPM Setting.
F-2-24
This setting is enabled after the machine is restarted.
F-2-26
2-17
3) Click [Password] to enter the password (4-12 digits). Then, enter the password for
confirmation.
2-18
CAUTION: The following may cause failures in backup.

If any of the following is detected, the backup process is aborted and the message
and the cause for the failure are shown on the screen. Take an appropriate measure to
recover this.
The USB flash drive is not inserted to the machine
2 or more USB flash drives are inserted to the machine
The USB flash drive has insufficient free memory space
The USB flash drive is write-protected
No key is found
CAUTION: The USB flash drive should be securely stored.

Give advice users on the following points.
The USB flash drive should be securely stored
Once the TPM key backup file is saved in the USB flash drive, never save the
backup file on a server or the like accessible to unanimous users.
F-2-27
4) Click [OK] to initiate TPM key backup.

NOTE:Name of TPM key backup file
The serial number for the machine is automatically assigned as the backup file name.
F-2-28
5) Click [OK] on Backup Completion Screen and remove the USB flash drive.
2-18
3. Restore of TPM key
2-19
CAUTION: The following may cause failures in restoration.
Procedure is about the same as the backup work.

Difference between restore work and backup work:
Rebooting is necessary (turn OFF and then ON the main power) after completion of restore
work.
If any of the following is detected, the restoration process is aborted and the message
and the cause for the failure are shown on the screen. Take an appropriate measure for
recovery.
The USB flash drive is not inserted to the machine
1) Connect the USB memory that saves TPM key.
2 or more USB flash drives are inserted to the machine
2) Select the following: Management setting > Data management > TPM setting; and
The USB flash drive is security-protected
click [Restore TPM key].
No TPM key is saved in the USB flash drive

The TPM key saved in the USB flash drive is not for the machine
The wrong password is entered
After the TPM key was backed up, [Initialize All Systems/ Settings] was executed
SRAM (the main controller PCB 1) or HDD is crashed
F-2-29
3) Enter the password set in the backup process.

4) Click [OK] on Start Restoration Screen. The restoration process is started.
5) Click [OK] on Restoration Completion Screen. Remove the USB flash drive and turn
OFF/ ON the main power switch.
2-19
4. Disable the feature
2-20
Key pair and server certificate registered in Management Setting (Setting/ Registration) >
To set OFF for the TPM setting, execute [Initialize All Data / Settings].
[Device Management] > [Certificate Settings]

Steps of data restoration after recovery
The restoration process triggers Setting/ Registration > Management Setting > Data
Management > Import/ Export > Import/ Export Setting/ Registration on the UI.
The data listed below cannot be restored, thus should be set again.
Environment Settings
Paper settings
Display settings in the destination to save
Time fine-adjustment for timer/ power settings
Date/ time settings (excluding time zone and daylight-saving settings)
User settings for SNMPv3
F-2-30
CAUTION: Points to caution when disabling functionality

To disable the use of TPM, all data and settings should be initialized. If this is executed,
user information saved in the HDD/ SRAM is totally cleared. Ensure to back up the data
before disabling TPM settings.
Context settings
Firewall settings (excluding MAC address filter)
Function Settings
Image-composite form for the common print operation
Printer settings
Transfer settings for the common receipt/ transfer settings
List of data to be cleared

Data saved in BOX/ Advanced Box
Data saved in Inbox (Fax Box/ System Box)
Destination data registered in Address Book
Read mode registered using Send function
Mode memory registered using Copy/ Box function
MEAP applications and their license files
Data saved using MEAP applications
Password for MEAP SMS (Service Management Service)
(The password is returned to default if any change is made.)
User authentication information registered by local device authentication via SSO-H (Single
Sign-On H)
Unsent documents (documents for scheduled transmission and reserved transmission)
Job logs
Contents set in Setting / Registration
Image-composite registration form
Registered transfer settings
Inbox settings
Frequently-used Copy settings
Registered short-cuts in Other Functions
Frequently-used Send settings
Frequently-used settings for saving/ using files
Address Settings
Address Book
Management Settings
Sheet counts in Department ID Management
Settings for device information distribution
Certificate settings
License registration
Remote operation settings
Box backup/ restoration
TPM Settings
2-20
Overview of Actions taken against Troubles

Location
with failure
TPM PCB
HDD
Main
Controller
PCB 2
(SRAM)
TPM Setting = ON
TPM Setting = OFF
1. Check the TPM PCB connection

2. Replace the TPM PCBs
3. Turn OFF/ ON the power
4. See the section of Restoring TPM
Key to restore the TPM key.
5. Turn OFF/ ON the main power for
recovery
N/A (TPM PCB is

not in use when the
TPM setting is set to
OFF.)
2-21
Related Error Code

Relevant Error Code
Initially E746-0031 is
shown on the screen.
When the power is turned
OFF/ON after the TPM
PCB is replaced, E7460032 is shown (only when
the TPM setting is set to
ON).
1.Replace the HDDs.
1. Replace the
Initially E602-xxxx is shown
2.Format the HDD.
HDDs.
(the different extension is
3.Download the system software.
2. Format the HDD. shown depends on cases).
4.See the section of Disabling
3. Download the
After the system software
Functionality to execute Initialize
system software. is reinstalled, E746-0033 is
All Data/ Settings.
4. Restore the
shown.
5.Turn OFF/ON the power. The TPM
password
setting is automatically set to OFF.
information stored
6.Set the TPM setting to ON (the
in the HDD.
public key and the common key
are automatically set).
1. Replace the main controller PCB 2. 1. Replace the main E747-xxxx (the different
2. The common key backed up in the controller PCB 2. extension is shown
depends on cases).
HDD will be automatically restored 2. The common
in the SRAM.
key backed up
3. The TPM setting on the control
in the HDD will
panel is reset to OFF. Manually
be automatically
set the TPM setting to ON (the
restored in the
machine is operated in the TPM
SRAM.
setting ON).
3. Restore the
password
4. Restore the password information
stored in the SRAM (see *1).
information stored
in the SRAM (see
*1).
Error
Code
E746
0031
0032
Error description, Assumed cause, remedy

Error in encryption
Error in hardware
Assumed cause The TPM PCB is not mounted; the TPM PCB for the other machine is
mounted; the TPM chip is crashed.
Remedy
Mount the TPM PCB for the machine; replace with the new TPM PCB
Error in engine ID of SoftID
Assumed cause Mismatched data in TPM
Remedy
Format the system.
Format the HDD using SST or USB memory, and download the
system software. For details, see "Chapter 6: Upgrading". For your
reference, the method using USB memory is described below.
1. Prepare the USB memory which system software was registered.
2. Execute the following service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD to enter the
download mode.
3. Insert the USB memory to the equipment.
4. Execute [4]: Format HDD in the main menu.
After formatting is completed, the machine reboots automatically
and starts with the download mode.
5. Execute [1]: Upgrade (Auto) in the main menu.
System software is downloaded and the machine restarts
automatically.
T-2-9
*1 If No is indicated in the field of Backup Column in the table of Security Information

Storage Location, the relevant information should be set manually again.
2-21
2
Error
Code
E746
0033
Security Information Storage Location
Error description, Assumed cause, remedy

Error in encryption
Assumed cause Error that can be recovered
Remedy
When the TPM key was backed up, it can be restored.
1. Connect the USB memory which stores the TPM key.
2. Go to Management Settings > Data Management > TPM Settings,
and then click "Restore TPM Key".
3. Enter the password set at backup operation.
4. When the restoration completion screen is displayed, click "OK".
Remove the USB memory, and turn OFF and then ON the main
power.
When the TPM key was not backed up, formatting the system is
required.
system software. For details, see "Chapter 6: Upgrading". For your
reference, the method using USB memory is described below.
1. Prepare the USB memory which system software was registered.
download mode.
After formatting is completed, the machine reboots automatically
and starts with the download mode.
System software is downloaded and the machine restarts
automatically.
T-2-10
Storage
Data Type
Location
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
2-22
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Certificate/
Secret Key
Certificate/
Secret Key
Others
Function
Name of Data
BOX
BOX Password
Yes
BOX
Password for Fax BOX
Yes
SEND
Password for a file destination of Address Book
Yes
MEAP
Authentication information registered by local device Yes

authentication via SSO-H
Device key pair (SSL, AMS)
No
SSL,AMS
Signature User key pair

SEND
User
Key information linked to user (password)
setting
information
Password/ BOX
Password for encryption at BOX backup
PIN
Password/ BOX
Password for SMS server at BOX backup
PIN
Password/ Advanced Password for Advanced BOX backup
PIN
BOX
Password/ Advanced Password for SMS server at Advanced BOX backup
PIN
BOX
Password/ SEND
Password for LDAP server
PIN
Password/ SEND
Password for POP3 server
PIN
Password/ SEND
Password for time-stamped PDF
PIN
Password/ SEND
Password for Adobe ES Rights Management Server
PIN
Password/ SEND
PIN for destination list (in destination setting)
PIN
Password/ UI
Password for service mode
PIN
Password/ Network
Password for IPP authentication
PIN
Password/ Network
Password for FTP authentication
PIN
Password/ Network
User name and password for client in Proxy
PIN
authentication
Password/ Network
Login password for Netware print server
PIN
Backup
Availability
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-22
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Option HDD
Storage
Data Type
Location
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Encryption
key
Function
Name of Data
2-23
Backup
Availability
Network
Policy common key for IPSec
Yes
The HDD capacity mounted on this machine is 160GB as standard. Mounting a 2.5
Network
User name and password for PEAP/TTLS

authentication
Password for FAX receipt
Yes
case of saving large amounts of data with Advanced Box
Department management data (including System

Manager password)
Authentication and encryption keys for SNMPv3
Yes
No
SMS login password
Yes
Others
Others
MIB
Password/ MEAP
PIN
inch/1TB HDD-K1 (option) makes 1TB in HDD capacity. High capacity is required in the
Mounting this option increases capacity for Advanced Box.
Yes
15GB(Approximately): in the case of 160GB HDD capacity

629GB(Approximately): in the case of 1TB HDD capacity
T-2-11
Security Information Storage Location (data managed under the

mechanism other than TPM management)
Storage
Data Type
Location
HDD
Option HDD
Function
Password/ Advanced
PIN
BOX
Name of Data
User information in Advanced BOX
Backup
Availability
Yes
T-2-12
FSTDEV
TMP_GEN
TMP_PSS
TMP_FAX
APL_SEND
APL_MEAP
APL_GEN
APL_KEEP
APL_LOG
IMG_MNG
PDLDEV
FSTCDEV
THUMDEV
BOOTDEV
CRBDEV
APL_CDS
Image data (User Box)

Universal data (temporary file)
For PDL spooling
FAX data
Address book, filter
MEAP application
Universal data
MEAP saving data
System log
Text management table
PDL-related file (font, registration form, etc.)
Job archiving (chasing)
Thumbnail
System software (System, language, RUI, etc.
For Advanced Box
For distribution server
F-2-31
Out of 1TB capacity, 629GB(Approximately) is allocated to Advanced Box (CRBDEV).

After deducting 20% snapshot area and area used for the file system, the capacity that can
be actually used as document storage area is 503GB(Approximately).
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > Option HDD
2-23
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD mirroring feature (option)
HDD mirroring feature (option)
2-24
Mirroring PCB controls reading/writing timing of HDD data.
LED PCB makes the LED show operation status of the HDDs.
This option enables mirroring of HDD data (RAID1).

In the case of failure in one HDD, the operation is performed with the other HDD. This
feature minimizes downtime as well as improves reliability as the document server.
There are 2 types of mirroring configurations according to the HDD capacity (160GB / 1TB):
Master (HDD1)
80 GB
Standard
HDD Mirroring Kit E 1

Mirroring PCB
LED PCB
Ch B
(HDD2)
Ch A
Backup (HDD2)
Ch B
Ch A
(HDD1)
F-2-33
80 GB
Option
2.5inch/80GB HDD - C1
Master (HDD1)
250 GB
Option
2.5inch/250 GB HDD - D1
HDD Mirroring Kit - E 1
Mirroring PCB
Ch A
Backup (HDD2)
LED PCB
Ch B
250 GB
Option
2.5inch/250 GB HDD - D1
F-2-32
2-24
To start using this feature (installation)

Install HDD2
Rebuild progress is shown in a massage at the status line on the control panel.
Copying hard disk data... xx%
HDD1 is connected to Ch A on the

mirroring PCB
NOTE:
HDD2 is connected to Ch B on the

mirroring PCB.
This machine can be used even during rebuild process (operation is performed
with HDD1)
The HDD will not be damaged even if turning OFF the power during rebuild
process. Rebuild is resumed once the power is turned ON the next time. This
does not apply in the case of blackout or disconnecting the power code during
rebuild process
Slot.1 (HDD1)
Install the mirroring PCB and LED PCB

for HDD1,HDD2
2-25
Slot.2 (HDD2)
CH B
CH A
Turn ON the main power
Turn ON the mirroring feature
(Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

> W/RAID ---> 1
Turn OFF the main power
Turn ON the main power
Start Rebuild
Complete Rebuild
The storage data of the 1st HDD is

automatically copied to the 2nd HDD (this
operation is called Rebuild.
Time needed:
80 GB HDD --- Approx. 20 minutes
250GB HDD ---Approx. 60 minutes
F-2-34
2-25
2-26
HDD reading/writing operation

At reading:
Description of Modes
The mirroring system of this machine consists of 4 modes.
At writing:
Data is read by HDD1 (master HDD)

only
The status flows among the modes below during operation.

The table below lists descriptions of modes and operational overview.
Name of Mode
Mirroring PCB
HDD
1
The modes in parentheses show the mirroring system statuses.
The same data is written to each HDD at

the same timing
Mirror Mode
Mirroring PCB
HDD
2
HDD
1
HDD
2
F-2-35
The ACT LED (green) on the LED PCB is lighted up/blinking if reading/writing to each HDD
is performed properly.
In the case of failure:
The LED (red) on the LED PCB is blinking. If only one HDD is faulty, the operation is
continued by the other HDD.
Description
Both HDDs are normally

operated
Degrade Mode Any trouble occurred in
the backup HDD suspends
mirroring operation. The
machine can be used under this
condition, however, the backup
HDD should be replaced at the
earliest convenience.
Rebuild mode The data of the master HDD is
copied (rebuilt) to the backup
HDD. The machine can be
used under this condition.
Halt mode
Both HDDs are in trouble (see
*1)
Master HDD Status
Backup HDD Status
In normal operation
In normal operation
In normal operation
With troubles (HDD not

installed/ HDD in trouble)
In normal operation
In recovery from the

trouble (Copying data of
Master HDD)
In trouble (HDD not

installed/ HDD installed
not registered/ HDD
disconnected while the
mirroring board is in
operation)
With troubles (HDD not

installed/ HDD installed
not registered/ HDD
disconnected while the
mirroring board is in
operation)
T-2-14
If both two HDDs are faulty, E602 error is shown on the control panel to stop the
*1: Turn OFF/ ON the power in this mode, the mode returns to the previous mode.
operation.
List of operation status (LED)
---: Light-out A: lighting-up B: blinking
Status
At normal operation
During access with HDD1
During access with HDD2
HDD1 is faulty
HDD2 is faulty
During data copy to HDD1 (rebuild)
During data copy to HDD1 (rebuild)
HDD 1 (Ch A)
HDD 2 (Ch B)
Green LED Red LED Green LED Red LED
--A
---------/A
---/A
------A
--B
---
----A
-------/A
---/A
--------A
--B
T-2-13
2-26
Mode Flow at Start-up
2-27
Mode Flow during Operation
Turn ON Main Power Switch
Mirror Mode
Flow to Mode at Previous Job Completion
Trouble
Halt Mode
Degrade Mode
Mirror Mode
See Overview of
Trouble Recovery
Trouble
Both HDDs
In which HDD?
Either HDD
Degrade Mode
Rebuild Mode
In which HDD?
Trouble
Either HDD
Degrade Mode
Both HDDs
Backup HDD
See Overview of
Trouble Recovery
In which HDD?
Master HDD
See Overview of
Trouble Recovery
Degrade Mode
Halt Mode
In which HDD?
See Overview of
Trouble Recovery
Backup HDD
Unable to detect
Master HDD at Start-up
Unable to detect
Master HDD at Start-up
Halt Mode
Halt Mode
Rebuild Mode
Halt Mode
Halt Mode
Master HDD
Trouble
Halt Mode
Unable to detect
Master HDD
See Overview of Trouble Recovery
Halt Mode
Mirror Mode
HDD Status?
Unable to detect
Backup HDD
When successfully
Rebuilt
Degrade Mode
Unable to detect Master HDD
F-2-36
See Overview of
Trouble Recovery
Halt Mode
Mirror Mode
F-2-37
2-27
2-28
Overview of Trouble Recovery
Points to Note in Servicing concerning Mirroring Functionality
When any trouble occurs in the mirroring system, take the action for recovery appropriate to
1. The modes other than Mirror Mode indicate troubles, which require swift recovery.
each mode.
The power can be turned OFF even during Rebuild process. However, it is recommended
The HDD in trouble can be located by the red LED on the LED PCB.
not to turn off the power and wait until the mode flows to Mirror Mode. In addition, HDD
In case the master HDD cannot be located, turn OFF/ ON the power to check whether the
removal after power-OFF is guaranteed only in Mirror Mode.
green LED is lit on the LED PCB.

The firstly blinked green LED (ChA or ChB) in a high speed tells the Master HDD, which is
2. The mirroring board controls Master HDD and Backup HDD. This control is performed
accessed firstly.
based on the HDD serial number and the model serial number instead of slot locations.
The green LED not lit on a channel tells the location of Backup HDD.
If HDDs are replaced in a careless manner during servicing in the field, the Master and
Backup HDDs may be switched.
Name of
Mode
Status
Action for Recovery
Mirror Mode Normal (at standby)

Degrade
HDD1 in trouble
Mode (see*1)
Under normal operation

1. Check the connection between HDD1 and
Mirroring Board or Main Controller PCB 2.
2. When the trouble is not recovered,
replace the HDD1.
HDD2 in trouble
1. Check the connection between HDD2 and
Mirroring Board or Main Controller PCB 2.
replace HDD2.
Rebuild mode Copying data to HDD1 Copying (under Rebuild)
(Rebuild)
Copying Data to HDD2 Copying (under Rebuild)
(Rebuild)
Halt mode
Both HDDs in trouble 1. Check Master HDD and Backup HDD (see
*2)
replace the two HDDs (format the
replaced HDD and download the system
software).
HDD1 HDD2
(ChA) (ChB)
Red
Red
LED LED
--A
-----
A: Lit
the backup HDD as the master. Thus, the master and backup HDDs are switched
even without changing the slot locations.
If the Master HDD cannot be located, turn OFF/ ON the power to check on which channel
the green LED is lit on the LED PCB.
The firstly-blinked LED (ChA or ChB) shows the Master HDD, which is accessed firstly after
power-on.
---
3. For users who intend to use the removable and mirroring functionality concurrently, instruct
them not to change the removable HDD location in advance.
Change of HDD locations after power-OFF is allowed as specifications only in Mirror Mode.
---
---
Otherwise, HDD removal or change of location is not guaranteed.

4. The following conditions are required to replace HDDs at power-ON.
Removable HDD is extended
Either HDD is in trouble
5. Upgrading should be done only in Mirror Mode while mirroring in ongoing. Upgrading in
Degrade or Rebuild mode is basically prohibited. Always prioritize Mirror Mode when you
T-2-15
---: Not lit
Ex) When the master HDD is in trouble, the mirroring board automatically recognizes
take any actions.
B: Blinking at an interval of 0.5 seconds
*1: This mode shows the message, Need to replace hard disks (contact your service
engineer), on the control panel. In addition, 310006 is indicated in CODE field of Alarm Log
in service mode (COPIER > DISPLAY > ALARM-2).
*2: Never install the HDD used in the other model. The used HDD holds the ID specific to
the firstly-installed machine, thus this machine is unable to recognize it. If done, you need to
reinstall the HDD recognized in this machine.
2-28
Technology > Main Controller > Controls > HDD Encryption/ Mirroring Kit (optional)
Removable HDD (option)
2-29
HDD Encryption/ Mirroring Kit (optional)
With this option, users can easily install or remove the HDD (slot-in/out).
This option enables to generate the encryption key inside the encryption board and to encrypt
This option is assumed to be used for: enhancing information security at government/public
the whole HDD including the system software. Encryption allows leaks of confidential data,
offices or private
even when the HDD is stolen, including image data (temporarily generated at Copy or Print
With this option, users can easily install or remove the HDD (slot-in/out).
jobs) and user data stored in BOX/ Advanced BOX. In addition, the data written into the two
This option is assumed to be used for: enhancing information security at government/
hard disks are also encrypted when the HDD mirroring functionality is enabled. The following
public offices or private companies.
descriptions focus on the HDD encryption function. See the previous section for the mirroring
functionality.
HDD Encryption Functionality

The HDD of the host machine holds temporary image data including scanned images or PDL
data as well as user data in BOX and Advanced BOX. Such images or user file information
REMOVABLE HDD
are saved in the HDD only with system information cleared. Under this condition, the data
or images can be restored by accessing directly to the stolen HDD using the access editor
and the like. To counter such threats against securities, data written to the disk should be
always encrypted to protect them from illegal restoration of image data or others. This product
employs an unconventional approach to achieve HDD encryption and mirroring functionality
with the dedicated chipset on a board (Canon MFP Security Chip Version 2.00). Since the two
functions are operated in a HDD, the encryption functionality can be independently enabled.
Data Encryption Mechanism

The encryption board receives signals transmitted from the controller board, and encrypts
and saves them in the HDD.
The encryption board receives the encrypted data saved in the HDD to decode and send
them to the controller.
F-2-38
The encryption board can be configured with a HDD and an encryption/ mirroring board, or
with 2 HDDs and an encryption/ mirroring board.
NOTE:
To use this option, no setting is required with the software.

The user needs to prepare a key because there is no key with this kit.
Conditions for Encryption Board Operation

The encryption board has the function to recognize and authenticate the host machine. An
error is triggered if a second-hand HDD encryption/ mirroring board is installed to the other
machine.
Compatibility among Device, Encryption Board and HDD

E602-2000 error may occur if the unmatched authentication information is found between the
controller and the HDD encryption board and the encryption board is mounted.
The device, the encryption board and HDD can be connected in 4 use cases.
2-29
2-30
The following shows the statuses for each use case.
1. Initialize the encryption board via SST.
Case 1: Normally operated
This step makes the disk unformatted (E602-0001 is triggered if the unformatted disk is
Case 2: HDD-related error occurs because the system on the HDD cannot be read (other
started).
than E602-2000 error)
2. Format the HDD and reinstall SYSTEM via SST.
Case 3: E602-2000 is triggered by failure in mutual authentication
When you start the HDD formatting, the message is automatically shown to confirm whether
Case 4: Unable to decode properly due to unmatched key for the encryption board
to initialize the encryption board (Key Clear).

Key Clear will disable accesses to HDD data permanently. Cautions should be taken in Key
Encryption
Correct
encryption
board
Correct
controller
Clear execution.
Correct HDD
(Protection property)
<Points to Note in Initialization via SST>
two-way authentication
Correct
controller
The screen below is shown when you gain access to SST in safe mode due to E602-2000.
Poor board connection also causes this error. Check the board connection to seek error
Correct HDD
It is not possible to decode.

Correct
encryption
board
It is not possible two-way authentication
Controller
not authorized
Encryption board
not authorized
recovery. Initialization of the encryption board will disable accesses to HDD data permanently.
Cautions should be taken in initialization.
Encryption
Correct HDD
Correct HDD
It is not possible to decode.

F-2-39
F-2-40
Actions against Troubles Overview

Servicing
HDD
replacement
Encryption
board
replacement
User data
Recovery
cleared
Replace HDDs
cleared
Install HDD encryption

Kit
Main controller cleared

2 replacement
(SRAM)
Clear the key for HDD

data encryption kit
Main controller not cleared

N/A
1 replacement
Main controller Information
After MN-CON clear
clear
held in SRAM process is done
cleared
<Points to Note in Initialization using USB>

The screen below is shown on the control panel when E602-2000 occurred and the machine
Action
1) Format the HDD
2) Install the system software
1) Replace encryption board
2) Initialize Encryption Board (see *1)
3) Format the HDD
4) Install the system
1) Initialize the encryption board (see *1)
2) Format the HDD
3) Install the system
N/A
MN-CON clear does not clear
authentication information; no work is
required specifically for HDD encryption kit
T-2-16
is started in safe mode using the USB flash memory with system data stored.
The message as shown in the figure below is displayed.
Select 0 when you are ready to initialize the encryption board.
Encryption board
error occurred.
Check connection
of the board.
Initialize
the board.
All data is deleted
at initialization.
[0]=Initialization
[other key]=exit
F-2-41
*1: How to Initialize Encryption Board
2-30
The figure below shows the final screen in initializing the encryption board.
2-31
E610 and detailed codes
The message as shown in the figure below is shown on the screen.
E code
Select 2 when you initialize the encryption board.

We recommend checking the board connection before starting initialization
Detailed
Code
E610
0001
Attention!
Once initialization
is started,you
cannot cancel it.
is that OK?
[2]= Yes
[other keys]=No
0002
0101
0102
F-2-42
Relevant Error Codes

E602 and detailed codes
E code
E602
-2000
Description
Authentication Error
0201
Cause
Detection
Timing
Error in authentication Start-up

between the host
machine and the
encryption board
Failure in Encryption
Board
Error in recognition of
the encryption board
Device Error
Failure in the
encryption board
Actions
Check connections between
the encryption board and
the HDD and between the
encryption board and the main
controller 2. This error may be
triggered after replacement
of the encryption board or the
main controller 2. At any rate,
this error disables accesses to
HDD data. When no problem
is found in connections, use
SST to execute Key Clear >
Format > Install System.
T-2-17
Cause (Detected Error)

Failure in the HDD encryption key
(Error in hardware configuration). No
encryption board is installed.
(Error in hardware configuration).
The memory space is insufficient for
encryption operation.
Failure in the HDD encryption key (Error
in initialization). Failed to initialize the
memory space where the key is stored.
in initialization). Failed to initialize the
encryption processing unit.
Failure in the HDD encryption key.
Error in the encryption processing unit.
0202
Failure in the HDD encryption key.

Error in the encryption processing unit.
0301

in the encryption key). Failed to create
the encryption key.
in the encryption key). Detected the
failure in the encryption key.
0302
0303

in the encryption key). Detected the
failure in the encryption key.
0401

in the encryption processing). Error is
detected during the encryption process.
0402

in the encryption processing). Error is
detected during the decoding process.
Actions
Ask the user to check the hardware
configuration.
Ask the user to check the hardware
configuration.
Turn OFF/ON the power. If the error is

not recovered, this may be caused by
hardware-related factors.
not recovered, this may be caused by a
hardware-related factor (SRAM). Note
that this error initializes the HDD.
hardware-related factor (SRAM). Note
that this error initializes the HDD.
hardware-related factor (the encryption
board).
hardware-related factor (the encryption
board).
T-2-18
2-31
Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > HDD
Service Operations
HDD
2-32
2. After Replacing
1) HDD format
1-1) Start with the safe mode. (While pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously, turn
<Procedure of parts replacement>

Refer to Removing HDD
<Procedure of adjustment>
1. Before Replacing
Perform the following operations. Be sure to get an approval from the user beforehand.
1) Backup of the set/registered data
Use the Remote UI.
Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export
Target data:
Address List
Forwarding Settings
Web Access Favorites
Printer Settings
Paper Information
2) Printing the set/registered data
Use the service mode.
(Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > USER-PRT
ON the main powerswitch.)

1-2) Use SST to format all partitions.
2) Downloading system software
2-1) Use SST to download the system software (System, LANG, RUI and others).
3) Initializing the key, certificate and CA certificate
(Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CA-KEY
4) Turning OFF and ON the main power switch
5) Restoring the backup data
Use the Remote UI.
6) Resetting/registering the data
While referring to the list of set/registered data which was printed before replacement,
reset/register the data.
7) When the user generates and adds the encryption key, certificate and/or CA ertificate,
request the user to generate them again.
8) Executing Auto Adjust Gradation (Full Adjust)
Settings/Registration mode: Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto
Adjust Gradation
List of the set/registered data which cannot be backed up is printed.
Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > HDD
2-32
Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > Main Controller PCB 1
When using the Card Reader and imageWARE Accounting Manager

Card ID used for imageWARE Accounting Manager is stored in the HDD, so NSA
collection control is not enabledafter the HDD replacement. After the HDD is replaced,
reinstall the card ID from imageWARE Accounting Manager using the following
procedures.
2-33
see "Removing Main Controller PCB 1," on p. 4-80.
Service part:
Setting unit: Main Controller PCB 1 + Controller Box Frame + Cooling Fan
1) Go to COPIER > FUNCTION> INSTALL > CARD and enter the numerical value of
the leading card which is used for Department ID. Then, press OK button.(e.g.: If
No.1 to No.1000 cards are used for Department ID, enter 1 of the leading card.)
2) After turning OFF and ON the main power switch, perform the following operations
from Settings/Registration mode.
In Management Settings > User Management > Department ID Management > Page
Totals, be sure that ID00000001 to ID00001000 are created.
Set the following: Preferences > Network > TCP / IP Settings > IPv4 Settings> IP
Address Settings > IP Address, Gateway Address, Subnet Mask
In Management Settings > User Management> System Manager Information
Settings> System Manager ID and System PIN, register any number for them. Then,
turn OFF and ON the main power switch.
If System Manager ID and System PIN are not registered, card registration
to device cannot be executed for the imageWARE Accounting Manager setting
operation.
3) Download the card ID from imageWARE Accounting Manager to the Main Body
again.
4) After downloading is completed, go to Management Settings > User Management >
Department ID Management > Page Totals. Be sure that only the downloaded card
ID is displayed.
Parts number differs on a model basis (speed basis).

Cooling Fan
Controller
BOX Frame
F-2-43
In order to secure the accuracy of connector connection when slotting in, this service part is
provided with the PCB being installed to the frame.
1) Transferring the parts from old PCB to new PCB
DDR2-SDRAM (2 pc.)
Flash PCB
TPM PCB
DDR2-SDRAM
5) Print using the user card registered from imageWARE Accounting Manager. Be sure
that the card information used for the target devices of imageWARE Accounting
Manager is collected.
CAUTION:Points to Caution when Using the System Software-installed HDD

When using the HDD which was installed the system software of the other achine
(different serial number), be sure to format the HDD after the installation. If the HDD is
not formatted, the operation cannot be guaranteed.
TPM PCB
Flash PCB
F-2-44
2-33
NOTE:
Resetting/registering the data is not necessary after Main Controller PCB 1 is replaced.
2-34
Service part:
Setting unit: Main Controller PCB 2 + Controller Box Frame
F-2-45
2-34
1. Before Replacing
Use the Remote UI.
2-35
2. When Replacing
DDR2-SDRAM (1 pc.) (When option DDR2-SDRAM is installed: 2 pc.)
Memory PCB

Target data:
Address List
Forwarding Settings
Printer Settings
Paper Information
DDR2-SDRAM
2) Printing the set/registered data Use the service mode.

Memory PCB
F-2-46
Prohibited Operation:
Do not transfer the following parts to another model (which has a different serial
number).If you fail to do so, the Main Body does not activate normally and this might
cause to fail the restoration.
Main Controller PCB 2 (with Memory PCB installed)
Memory PCB
2-35
Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > TPM PCB
2-36
3. After Replacing
1) After installing the parts, turn ON the main power switch.
Use the Remote UI.
While referring to the list of set/registered data which was printed out before
replacement, reset/register the data.
4) When the user generates and adds the encryption key, certificate and/or CA certificate,
request the user to generate them again
TPM PCB
When TPM setting is OFF
Any operation is not necessary at replacement.
When TPM setting is ON
It is necessary to restore the TPM key which was backed up after changing the setting to ON.
1) Removing the network cable
Until the TPM key is restored, information might be leaked due to the inappropriate access
via network, so be sure to perform this operation appropriately.
2) Connecting the USB Memory after turning ON the main power switch
3) Restoring the TPM key
Management Settings > Data Management >TPM Settings> Restore of TPM Key
Technology > Main Controller > Service Operations > TPM PCB
2-36
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Overview
2-37
Laser Exposure System
Laser is applied to the Nom-image image on the positively-charged drum with this machine.
Image area
Non-image area
Non-image area
Overview
Overview
This machine uses an 8-beam method that enables exposure of 8 beams per scanning
direction for high productivity.
Laser ON
Laser ON
Enlarged view
F-2-48
Laser Scanner Unit can be removed from the side of the main body.
Video signal
Laser
Driver
PCB
Image Formation Lens Image Formation Lens

(small)
(large)
Reflection mirror
BD signal
Laser signal
Polygon motor drive signal
DC Controller PCB
Polygon motor
Laser Scanner Unit
BD Mirror
F-2-49
BD PCB
La
se
se r A
rB
La
La
se
rH
Photosensitive Drum
F-2-47
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Overview
2-37
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Parts Configuration
2-38
Specifications
Laser team
Item
Wave length
670nm
Laser type
Red color laser
Laser output
7mW(Max)
Number of laser beams
8 beams
Resolution
Scanner
motor
Description
Image Formation Lens

(large)
Image Formation Lens
(small)
Type
Number of rotations
Laser ON timing
control
Laser beam intensity
control
Others
Reflection mirror
Laser Driver PCB
1200dpi
Number of scanner mirror (polygon)

surfaces
Controls
Parts Configuration
Brushless motor
24,800rpm(Process speed 350mm/sec)
20,500rpm(Process speed 290mm/sec)
5
Laser ON/OFF control
Polygon motor
Main scanning synchronization control

Sub scanning synchronization control
APC control
Laser scanner motor control
BD Mirror
Laser shutter control

T-2-19
BD PCB
F-2-50
Name
Laser driver
Polygonal mirror
Reflection mirror
Correction lens
Tilt correction motor
Image Formation Lens (small)
Image Formation Lens (Large)
Role
Laser driver
Perform scanning with a laser beam in the main
scanning direction.
Reflect a laser team to the drum.
Correct a main-scanning tilt of the laser beam
coming from the folding mirror.
Correct a main-scanning tilt by moving the
correction lens.
To connect focuses on the Drum to provide an
image
To connect focuses on the Drum to provide an
image
T-2-20
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Overview > Parts Configuration
2-38
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser ON Timing Control
2-39
Controls
Laser ON Timing Control

Laser ON/OFF Control
Overview
This control is performed to turn ON/OFF a laser beam according to the combination of laser
control signals.
Laser Interface PCB
Laser Scanner Unit

DC
Controller
PCB
Laser Driver PCB

Horizontal scanning synchronous
Control
Vertical Scanning synchronous
Control
Main Controller
PCB 2
Polygon Mirror
Control signal
Laser ON/OFF Control
Video signal
Laser
Driver
PCB
Laser Beam
Polygon Motor Unit
APC Control
F-2-52
<Timing of Execution>
Polygon Motor Control
After the power is turned ON
Laser Shutter Control
<Details of the Control>

The DC controller switches the mode among four modes (Forcible OFF mode, APC mode,
Print mode, Standby mode) according to the laser control signal.
F-2-51
tem
Purpose/Description
Turn ON/OFF a laser beam according to the combination

of laser control signals.
Laser ON
Main scanning
Performed to adjust the writing position in the main
timing
synchronization control scanning direction.
control
Sub scanning
Performed to adjust the writing position in the sub
synchronization control scanning direction.
Laser beam
1Performed to keep a specified level of laser beam for
APC control
intensity control
each line.
To be executed to rotate the Polygon Mirror at the
Laser polygon motor control
specified speed.
To prevent exposure of laser light in the machine when
Laser shutter control
the Cover is open.
Laser ON/OFF control
Mode
Forcible OFF
APC
Print mode
Standby mode
Laser status
OFF
ON
OFF/ON
OFF
Remarks
Clear the laser beam intensity setting determined by APC.
Adjust the laser beam intensity.
Irradiate a laser beam according to the video signal.
The main unit is placed in the standby status.
T-2-22
T-2-21
2-39
Main Scanning Synchronization Control
2-40
NOTE:
EEPROM on the Laser Driver PCB stores the 8-beam phase displacement
coefficient (laser phase coefficient), which is unique to the Laser Scanner Unit,
and corrects 8-beam phase difference based on the stored coefficient. When a
Laser Scanner Unit is replaced, the DC Controller PCB automatically retrieves the
laser phase coefficient of EEPROM.
This control is performed to adjust the writing position in the main scanning direction.
<Timing of Execution>
For every eight lines
<Details of the Control>
1) The synchronization control in horizontal scanning direction is executed with reference to
Standard BD
Laser A.
2) The BD PCB is located on the light path of Laser A laser beam and the laser beam is
Laser H
emitted to the BD PCB.
3) The BD PCB detects laser beam of Laser A and generates BD signal to be sent to the DC
Controller PCB.
4) The DC Controller sends the PBD signal to Main Controller PCB 2 according to BD signal.
Laser G
5) Based on the laser phase coefficient and the BD signal, the DC Controller PCB generates
synchronization signal in horizontal scanning direction on an 8 lines basis at the generation
area of synchronization signal in horizontal scanning direction.
6) Once the PBD signal is received, Main Controller PCB 2 sends video signal to the DC
Controller PCB.
7) The video signal sent from Main Controller PCB 2 is output to the Laser Driver PCB
Laser F
Laser A
according to the synchronization signal in horizontal scanning direction.
T
F-2-54
PBD
signal
Main
Controller
PCB 2
ASIC
Horizontal
scanning
synchronous
signal
generation
assembly
Laser
phase
coefficient
Horizontal
scanning
synchronous
signal
BD PCB
EEPROM
Laser H
Laser G
Video
signal
Video
signal
BD signal
Laser
Driver
PCB
Polygon
Laser B
Laser A
DC Controller PCB
F-2-53
2-40
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser Beam Intensity Control
2-41
Laser Beam Intensity Control
Sub Scanning Synchronization Control

This control is performed to adjust the writing position in the sub scanning direction.
APC (Auto Power Control) Control

To keep constant laser light intensity per 8 beams (1BD basis)
<Execution timing>
When printing is started
<Execution timing>
When the laser is scanned (per line)
<Control Description>
1) The DC Controller PCB generates synchronization signal in vertical scanning direction
(PVREQ) and sends to Main Controller PCB 2.
1) The DC Controller PCB outputs laser control signal to the Laser Driver IC in the Laser
2) Main Controller PCB 2 receives PVREQ (synchronization signal in vertical scanning
Driver PCB to set in APC mode.
direction) and sends the video signal to the DC Controller PCB.

3) The DC Controller PCB sends drive signal to the Laser Driver PCB to turn on the laser.
2) The Laser Driver IC is set in APC mode and makes laser diodes (LD1 to LD8) to forcibly
emit in series.
3) The Laser Driver IC monitors laser diodes (LD1 to LD8) with the Photo Diode (PD) and
PVREQ
Main
Controller
PCB 2
Image
ASIC
adjusts output of laser diode until the laser light intensity reaches a specified level.
Laser Driver
PCB
Laser Driver PCB
Image signal
DC Controller
PCB
PD
F-2-55
LD1
LD2
LD3
LD4
Laser Driver IC
Laser Control
Signal
DC Controller PCB
LD5
LD6
LD7
LD8
F-2-56
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser Beam Intensity Control
2-41
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Controls > Laser Shutter Control
Polygon Motor Control
2-42
Laser Shutter Control
This control is performed to rotate the polygon mirror at a specified speed.
To prevent laser exposure in the machine when the Cover is open
<Execution timing>
<Execution timing>
When the Polygon Motor is started
When the Front Door or Multi tray Cover opens/closes
<Control description>
1) The DC Controller PCB outputs acceleration signal (ACC) to forcibly rotate the Polygon
When the Front Door or Multi tray Cover opens, the DC Controller PCB stops power supply
(DC5V) of the Laser Driver to prevent laser exposure.
Motor.
2) The speed detection signals (FG, BD) are detected to be compared with the reference
signal generated in the reference signal generation area, so that the acceleration signal
(ACC) and the deceleration signal (DEC) are controlled to keep the specified speed.
PS3
Multi-purpose Cover Open/Close Sensor
DC5V
Polygon motor
BD PCB
ACC
DEC
SW2
Front Door Open Detection Switch
DC Controller PCB
DC12V
DC/DC
DC Power Supply PCB
Relay PCB
BD
F-2-58
DC Controller PCB
F-2-57
NOTE:
This control is executed by the software only and there is no shutter to prevent
laser exposure.
Related Error Code

E100: Failure to detect PLOCK signal during BD rotation
E110: Failure to detect VLOCK signal during FG rotation
2-42
2-43
2-43
2-44
2-44
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Servicing > Major Adjustments
2-45
Servicing
Periodically Replaced Parts
None
Consumable Parts
None
Periodical Servicing List

Parts name
Qty
Cleaning
interval
Remarks
Dust-proof glass
Clean when black lines or the like occurs due to soil on

the Dustproof Glass.
T-2-23
When Replacing Parts

No.
1
Parts Name
Laser Scanner Unit
When replacing parts

1) Execution of potential control (COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>DPC)
2) Write down the write start position adjustment value of laser in the
following service mode on the service label.
COPIER > ADJUST > LASER > PVE-OFST
T-2-24
Major Adjustments
None
Technology > Laser Exposure System > Servicing > Major Adjustments
2-45
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Specifications
2-46
Image Formation System
Specifications
Basic Specifications
Overview
Item
Overview
Toner image is formed by the magnetic, 1-component toner projection developing method in
image formation system.
To ensure high quality print, this machine introduces the following new technologies:
Small-diameter toner
High resolution by fine-grained toner
Belt transfer method
Improved transfer/feeding performance by the belt feeding
The shutter mechanism is added to the Primary Charging Assembly and the Pre-transfer
Charging Assembly.
This prevents discharge products from attaching on the Drum, thus prevents image failure
just after startup.
Improved accessibility to the periodically replaced / durable parts provides increased
serviceability.
Drum Cleaning Unit
Primary Charging
Assembly
Laser
Developping Assembly
Photosensitive
Drum
Pre-transfer
Charging Assembly
Photosensitive Drum Material

Drum diameter
Cleaning
Process speed
Separation method
Drum Heater
Drum HP detection
Developing Assembly Developing method
Developing Cylinder
Toner
Toner level detection
Primary charging
Charging method
Cleaning
Shutter
Pre-transfer charging Charging method
Cleaning
Shutter
Transfer method
ETB Unit
Material
Circumferential length
Cleaning
Transfer method
Separation method
Disengagement
mechanism
Waste Toner
Capacity
Container
Full-level detection
Presence/absence
detection
Toner Container
Method
Patch Sensor
Function/Method
A-Si
84 mm diameter
Cleaning Blade
iR-ADV 6075: 350 mm/sec
iR-ADV 6065/6055: 290 mm/sec
Curvature separation + separation claw
Yes (42 +/- 2 deg C)
Yes
Dry, 1-component toner projection method
iR-ADV 6075/6065/6055 series
1 cylinder (single-developing method)
24.5 mm diameter
Magnetic negative toner
Yes (magnetic sensor)
Corona charging (2 charging wires + grind wire)
Cleaning Pad (charging wire)
Yes
Corona charging (1 charging wire)
Cleaning Pad (charging wire)
Yes
Direct transfer (ETB: Electrostatic Transfer Belt)
CR rubber + urethane resin
298.5 mm
Brush Roller + Cleaning Blade
Transfer Roller (sponge roller)
Curvature separation + static eliminator
Yes
Equivalent to 1 million sheets
Yes
No
Set-on (manual)
No
T-2-25
Paper
ETB
F-2-59
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Specifications
2-46
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Parts Configuration
2-47
Parts Configuration
Charging Specifications
Developing High
Voltage PCB
(PCB12)
Entire Configuration
Pre-transfer
Charging PCB
(PCB26)
Toner Container
Toner Supply Assembly
AC+DC negative
Developing
Cylinder
DC negative
Primary
Charging Wire
AC+DC positive
AC
DC positive
DC positive
Primary Charging
High Voltage PCB
(PCB11)
Transfer Assembly
Grid Wire
Process
Assembly
Photosensitive Drum
Waste Toner
Feed Assembly
Dust Collecting Roller

Separation Claw
Pre-transfer Charging Wire

F-2-60
Item
Primary charging
bias
Grid bias
Developing bias
Bias value
DC bias
DC bias
AC bias
DC bias
Dust-collection bias DC bias
Pre-transfer
AC bias
charging bias
DC bias
6000 to 9000
V
530 to 800 V
1200 V
200 to 300 V
-800 V
8300 V
0 to 6000 V
Transfer bias
DC bias
0 to 6500 V
Separation claw
bias
AC bias
690 V
Waste Toner
Container
Remarks
To be specified by the potential control
To be specified by the estimated life and environment*
Fixed value (ON/OFF only)
To be specified by the estimated life and environment*
Constant voltage control
Constant current control (to be specified by the
environment*)
Constant current control (to be specified by the
environment*, paper type and print mode)
F-2-61
T-2-26
* Detected by the Environment Sensor (THU1)
2-47
2-48
Process Area
Transfer Area
Pre-exposure LED
Drum Cleaning
Blade
Primary Charging
Assembly
Grid Wire
Primary
Charging Wire
Transfer Roller
Drive Roller
Static Eliminator
Cleaning Blade
Separation Guide
Potential Sensor
Idler Roller
Developing Blade
Drum Cleaning Unit

Developing Cylinder
Brush Roller
Transfer Belt
Cleaning Shaft
Photosensitive Drum
Engagement Arm
Engagement Cam
Waste Toner Feed Screw

Cleaning Unit
Waste Toner
Feed Screw
Separation Claw
Auxiliary Roller
Magnet Roller
Dust Collecting
Roller
Toner
Stirrer
F-2-63
Pre-transfer
Charging Assembly
Pre-transfer
Charging Wire
F-2-62
2-48
2-49
Toner Supply Area
Front View
Waste Toner Feeding Area
Toner Container
Hopper
Drum Cleaning Unit
ETB cleaning Unit
Sub Hopper
Toner Stirrer
Buffer
Waste Toner Feed Assembly
Magnet Roller
Toner Feed Screw
Waste Toner
Container
Right Side View

Hopper
Toner Container
Waste Toner
Sub Hopper
Toner Stirrer
Toner Feed Screw
Buffer
F-2-65
Magnet Roller
F-2-64
2-49
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Drive Configuration
2-50
Drive Configuration
Transfer Area
M2
CL1
M6
PS55
PS56
M43
M19
TS1
F-2-67
Code
PS61
M1
Parts name
M19
M43
Duplex Feed Left Motor

ETB Motor
PS55
PS56
ETB Engage Sensor

ETB Disengage Sensor
Function
To make the ETB Unit (ETB) engaged/disengaged
To drive the ETB Drive Roller, the Brush Roller and the
Waste Toner Feed Screw.
To detect engagement of the.
To detect disengagement of the ETB (home position).
T-2-28
M7
F-2-66
Code
M1
M2
M6
M7
CL1
TS1
PS61
Name
Function
Drum Motor
To drive the Photosensitive Drum and the Dustcollection Roller

Developing Motor
To drive the Developing Cylinder, the Toner Stirring
Plate, the Magnet Roller and the Waste Toner Feed
Screw
Primary Charging Wire
To drive the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad and
Cleaning Motor
the Primary Charging Shutter
Pre-transfer Charging Wire To drive the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad
Cleaning Motor
and the Pre-transfer Charging Shutter
Developing Clutch
To drive the Developing Cylinder and the Toner Stirring
Plate
Developing Toner Sensor
To detect toner level in the Developing Assembly
Drum Home Position
To detect home position of the Photosensitive Drum
Sensor
T-2-27
2-50
2-51
Toner Supply Area
Code
TS2
Parts name
Function
To detect toner level in the Buffer(To avoid oversupply to

the Buffer)
TS3 Buffer Toner Sensor 2
To detect toner level in the Buffer (to detect absence of
toner in the Buffer)
PS54 Toner Replacement Cover Sensor To detect whether the Toner Replacement Cover is
opened/closed.
PS54
Buffer Toner Sensor 1
T-2-29
M10
M28
CL5
TS3
TS2
F-2-68
Code
M10
M28
CL5
Parts name
Function
Hopper Toner Supply Motor
To drive the Toner Stirring Plate (to supply toner to the

Buffer)
Buffer Toner Feed Motor
To drive the Toner Feed Screw and the Toner Stirring
Plate (to feed toner)
Developing Assembly Toner Supply To drive the Magnet Roller (to supply toner to the
Clutch
Developing Assembly)
2-51
Technology > Image Formation System > Overview > Print Process
2-52
Print Process
Block
M2
Static formation
block
M43
SW5
Developing
block
Transfer block
Fixing block
ETB cleaning
block
Drum cleaning
block
Code
M43
SW5
Parts name
Overview
Light emission from the Pre-exposure LED removes residual

potential on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum to prevent
density unevenness.
2 Primary
The surface of the Photosensitive Drum is charged to make
charging
a uniform positive potential. This machine uses the Primary
Charging Assembly which indirectly gives potential from the
Charging Wire to the Photosensitive Drum.
3 Laser
Emission of the laser beam forms a static latent image on the
exposure
surface of the Photosensitive Drum. When the laser beam is
applied on the surface of the positively charged Photosensitive
Drum, the potential at the emitted part is reduced.
4 Developing With the magnetic, 1-component toner projection developing
method, toner that has been negatively charged by the
Developing Cylinder is attached to the latent image on the
surface of the Photosensitive Drum to make it visible.
5 Pre-transfer Toner on the Photosensitive Drum is made to be a uniform
charging
potential.
6 Transfer
Positive potential is applied to the Transfer Roller so that the
toner on the Photosensitive Drum is transferred on a paper.
7 Separation With the curvature separation method and the static eliminator,
the paper is separated from the Photosensitive Drum and the
ETB.
8 Fixing
The toner on the paper is fused on the paper by heat and
pressure.
9 ETB
The Cleaning Blade removes the residual toner attached on the
cleaning
ETB.
10 Drum
The Cleaning Blade removes the residual toner attached on the
cleaning
Photosensitive Drum.
T-2-31
F-2-69
M2
Step
1 Exposure
Function
Developing Motor
To drive the Waste Toner Feed Screw(Drum Cleaning

Unit)
ETB Motor
To drive the Waste Toner Feed Screw(ETB Cleaning
Unit)
Waste Toner Lock Detection Switch To detect lock of the Waste Toner Feed Screw
T-2-30
2-52
2-53
1.Electrostatic latent image formation Block

2.Primary Charging
1.Pre-exposure
3.Laser exposure
6.Drum cleaning Block

10.Drum Cleaning
4.Fixing Block
Delivery
8.Fixing
9.ETB cleaning
5. ETB cleaning Block
Photosensitive
Drum
3.Transfer
Block
4.Development
2.Development
Block
5.Pre-transfer Charging
7.Separation 6.Transfer
Registration
MP Pickup Tray
ETB Unit
Deck/Cassette
Rotation of photosensitive drum and ETB
Flow of paper
F-2-70
2-53
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls
2-54
Controls
Control name
Exposure
-Pre-exposure control
Separation
-Separation control
-Separation claw bias control
Exposure
Pre-exposure control
Primary Charging
-Primary charging bias control
-Primary charging wire cleaning control
-Primary charging shutter control
Drum Cleaning
-Drum cleaning exposure
Transfer
-Pre-transfer charging bias control
-Pre-transfer charging wire
cleaning control
-Pre-transfer charging
shutter control
-Transfer bias control
-Transfer belt cleaning control
-Transfer belt engage/disengage
control
Image Stabilization Control

-Potential control
-Laser APC control
-PASCAL control
-Two dimension shading control
Other Control
-Laser APC control
-Startup Contrast Potential
Correction
-Blank Band Control
-Black Band Control
-Low Duty Discharge Control
Primary charging
Primary charging wire bias
control
Primary charging wire
cleaning control
Primary charging shutter
control
Developing
Developing bias control
Toner Supply
-Toner level detection
-Toner supply control
-Toner container detection
Development
-Developing bias control
-Dust-collecting bias control
Drum Control
-Drum cleaning exposure
-Separation claw bias control
Waste toner feed

-Waste toner full detection
-Waste toner screw lock detection
-Waste toner container detection
F-2-71
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls
Description
To apply the light of the Pre-exposure LED on the surface of the
To apply the positive potential to the Primary Charging Wire and
the Primary Grid Plate.
To clean the Primary Charging Wire.
To prevent image failure caused by ozone generated from the
Primary Charging Wire.
To apply positive potential to the Developing Cylinder so that the

toner on the Developing Cylinder is attached on the surface of the
Dust-collection bias
To collect the scattered toner to prevent toner that scatters during
control
developing process from being attached to the Photosensitive
Drum.
Toner collection sheet bias To apply negative potential to the Toner Collection Sheet.
control
Transfer
Pre-transfer charging bias To charge toner negatively and evenly to ensure stability of
control
transfer performance.
Pre-transfer charging wire To clean the Pre-transfer Charging Wire to prevent the Charging
cleaning control
Wire failure that is caused by soil of the Pre-transfer Charging
Wire.
Pre-transfer charging
To prevent image failure caused by ozone generated from the
shutter control
Pre-transfer Charging Wire.
Transfer bias control
To apply positive potential to the Transfer Roller so that the toner
on the Photosensitive Drum is transferred on the paper.
Transfer belt cleaning
To remove the residual toner on the Transfer Belt to prevent image
control
failure that is caused by toner soil on the belt.
Transfer belt engagement/ To engage/disengage the Transfer Belt with the Photosensitive
disengagement control
Drum.
Separation
Separation control
To separate paper from the Photosensitive Drum and the Transfer
Belt.
Separation bias control
To remove toner attached to the Drum Separation Claw.
Drum cleaning
Drum cleaning control
To remove residual toner on the Photosensitive Drum.
Drum control
Drum home position
To detect home position of the Photosensitive Drum.
detection
Drum heater control
To keep constant temperature of the Photosensitive Drum.
2-54
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Exposure
Control name
2-55
Exposure
Description
Toner supply
Toner level detection
Toner supply control
To detect toner level in the Developing Unit and the Buffer Unit.
To supply toner from the Toner Container to the Developing
Assembly.
Toner container detection To detect whether the Toner Container is attached to the host
machine.
Waste toner feeding
Waste toner full level
To detect whether the Waste Toner Container is full.
detection
Waste toner screw lock
To detect whether the Waste Toner Screw is locked.
detection
Waste toner container
To detect whether the Waste Toner Container is attached to the
detection
host machine.
Image stabilization control
Potential control
To determine primary current (VD), laser power (VL) and
developing bias (Vdc) according to the deterioration level of the
Photosensitive Drum and the environmental change.
PASCAL control
To determine gradation adjustment value based on the image
density scanned by the Reader.
2D shading control
To correct uneven potential on the Photosensitive Drum by laser
exposure.
Other Control
Startup Contrast Potential To adjust the contrast potential (Vcont) at startup in order to
maintain the density consistently.
Laser APC control
To correct the laser output control value to prevent changes in
surface potential by the laser output.
Blank Band Control
To blow off the reversely-charged toner on the Developing Sleeve
forcibly to the Drum surface in order to collect the toner into the
Drum Cleaning Unit.
Black Band Control
To supply toner thoroughly to the ends of the Cleaning Blade and
prevent the blade from everting by forming the toner band at the
Drum ends.
Low Duty Discharge
To forcibly eject toner by forming the toner band at the Drum ends
Control
in order to avoid toner deterioration in case low duty images are
continuously output.
Pre-exposure Control
To prevent uneven density with the print image, residual potential on the Photosensitive Drum
is removed before the primary charging.
With the command by the DC Controller PCB, the Pre-exposure LED (LED 1) is emitted. By
emitting the LED on the Photosensitive Drum, remove residual potential on the drum.
Main Driver PCB(PCB2)

Pre-exposure LED(LE1)
Photosensitive Drum
F-2-72
T-2-32
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Exposure
2-55
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Primary Charging
2-56
Primary Charging
Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Control

To prevent charging failure caused by soil of the Primary Charging Wire.
Primary Charging Bias Control
<Execution timing>
To make the surface of the Photosensitive Drum evenly and positively charged.
The primary charging bias (DC positive), which has been generated by the Primary Charging
High Voltage PCB (PCB11), is applied to the Primary Charging Wire and the Grid Plate.
Primary charging DC bias: the bias to be applied to the Primary Charging Wire
Interruption at every 2000 sheets of continuous print (the value can be changed in service
mode: 100 to 2000 sheets)
After last rotation which is performed on the 1500th sheet and later since the last cleaning
(1-roundtrip)
Grid DC bias: the bias to be applied to the Grid Plate
In the case of executing Clean Wire in user mode (1-roundtrip)
The primary charging bias value is specified by the potential control.
In the case of executing the wire cleaning in service mode (1-roundtrip or 3-roundtrip)
The grid bias is specified based on the estimated life and the environment.
The drive of the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M6) makes the Cleaner Screw rotate
Primary Charging High Voltage PCB(PCB11)
clockwise/counterclockwise, which moves the Cleaning Pad back and forth to clean the
DC positive
Position detection of the Cleaning Pad is not performed.
Primary Charging Wire.
DC positive
Screw
Grid Wire
Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor
Photosensitive Drum
Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad

F-2-73
F-2-74
<Related service modes>

To clean the Charging Wire (3-roundtrip)
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRE-CLN
To check operation of the Charging Wire Cleaning (1-roundtrip)
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRE-EX
To specify cleaning interval of the Last Rotation Charging Wire ((Default: every 2000 sheets
(the interval can be changed within the range between 1000 and 5000 sheets))COPIER >
OPTION > CLEANING > W-CLN-P
2-56
2-57
Primary Charging Shutter Control
Shutter Open/Close Operation Sequence
To prevent uneven potential on the Photosensitive Drum caused by discharge products

(nitrogen oxide) accumulated on the Primary Charging Assembly.
NOTE:
In the environment which moisture content is lower than the one in power saving
environment (temperature: 22 deg C, humidity: 75%, moisture content: 12.41g),
set the Drum Heater to OFF in the sleep mode after a specified time passes.
Discharge product (nitrogen compound) which is generated at the Charging
Assembly when image is formed is deposited on the Drum when the time passes.
When the Drum Heater is OFF, the discharge product (nitrogen compound) has a
chemical reaction with the moisture in the air and generates nitric acid. This nitric
acid deteriorates the surface of the Drum and causes the image failure.
Elapsing time
Operation
Image formation is
completed.
or
Standby mode starts.
1. Calculate the moisture content. (Environment Heater) Refer to the table.

2. Based on the moisture content, determine the time until the Charging
Shutter is closed.
3. Set the DC Controller startup time (DCON alarm).
Sleep mode starts.

(Min. 10 sec.,
Max. 240 min.)
1. Calculate the moisture content. (Environment Heater) Refer to the table.

2. Determine whether the Drum Heater is ON or OFF during sleep mode.
DC Controller starts.
(DCON alarm)
(240 min. to 300 min.)
1. DC Controller checks whether the Drum Heater is ON or OFF.
Drum Heater is ON or OFF.
<Execution timing>
ON
When the Drum Heater is turned OFF
Charging Shutter is not closed.
During sleep mode
OFF
Charging Shutter is closed.
Sleep mode restarts.
<Execution timing>
After 4 or 5 hours since the drum was stopped*
*The time is determined by the environment (moisture content) when the drum operation
1. Charging Shutter is opened or closed.

2. Drum Heater is ON or OFF.
3. Two dimensional shading is ON or OFF.
Recovery starts.
was stopped
Environment
1
2
3
4
Energy save
5
6
7
Moisture content Temperature/Humidity Drum Heater

to 0.86
to 1.73
to 5.8
to 8.9
to 12.41
to 15
to 18
to 12.41
23 deg C 5%
23 deg C 10%
23 deg C 30%
23 deg C 50%
22 deg C 75%
23 deg C 70%
27 deg C 80%
30 deg C 80%
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Charging Shutter is
opened.
Drum Heater is ON.
Charging Shutter is closed. Two dimensional
Drum Heater is OFF.
shading is OFF.
Time
300 min.
285 min.
270 min.
255 min.
240 min.
Not close
Not close
Not close
T-2-33
1. Operation of Charging
Shutter opening
2. Fixing warm-up
1. Drum Heater is changed

from ON to OFF.
2. Fixing warm-up
Charging Shutter is
opened.
Drum Heater is ON.
Two dimensional
shading is ON.
1. Drum Heater is OFF .

2. Fixing warm-up
Startup sequence
Drum Heater is ON.
Image formation starts.
F-2-75
2-57
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Developing
2-58
The shutter is open or closed by the cleaning mechanism of the Primary Charging Wire.
The Primary Charging Shutter is made of fiber and usually taken up by the bobbin.
The drive of the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M6) moves the Cleaning Pad to the
rear and the shutter taken up by the bobbin becomes extended to make the Shutter closed.
Because the Shutter comes between the Grid Wire and the Photosensitive Drum, discharge
products from the Primary Charging Assembly do not reach the Photosensitive Drum.
The Primary Charging Shutter Position Sensor (PS94) detects opening/close of the shutter.
Developing
Developing Bias Control
To form a toner image on the Photosensitive Drum by charging toner on the Developing
Cylinder.
The developing bias (AC, DC positive), which has been generated on the Develop High
Voltage PCB (PCB12), is applied to the Developing Cylinder.
Developing DC bias
Grid Wire
The bias to generate potential difference with the Photosensitive Drum.

The bias value is determined based on the environment and the estimated life.
Screw
Developing AC bias
The bias to improve image quality.
The bias value is fixed.
Primary Charging
Shutter Sensor(PS94)
Cleaning Motor(M6)
Developing High Voltage PCB(PCB12)

AC+DC positive
Grid Wire
Charging Shutter
Photosensitive Drum
Photosensitive Drum
Charging Shutter
F-2-76
<Related error code>

E060-0001 Primary Charging Shutter HP open error
E060-0002 Primary Charging Shutter HP close error
Developing Cylinder
F-2-77
2-58
2-59
Dust-collection Bias Control
Developing Supply Shutter Opening/Closing Mechanism
To collect toner which floats over the Photosensitive Drum during developing process.
There are shutters at the Supply Mouths of the Developing Assembly and the Buffer Unit to
prevent toner scattering.
The Developing Shutter and Buffer Shutter is opened/closed in conjunction with push-in and
The dust-collection bias (DC negative), which has been generated on the Develop High
pull-out of the Developing Assembly.
Voltage PCB (PCB12), is applied to the Dust-collection Roller.

<Opening and Closing Operations of the Developing Shutter>

By pushing the Developing Assembly in the main body, the Developing Shutter comes in
contact with the Buffer Unit.
By pushing the assembly in farther, the Developing Shutter opens along the side of the Buffer
Unit. By pulling the Developing Assembly out from the main body, the Developing Shutter
DC negative
closes by its own weight so the Supply Mouth is closed

Buffer Assembly
Developing Assembly
Shutter
Developing Assembly
Developing Assembly
Shutter Open
Photosensitive Drum
Push
Toner
Buffer Assembly
Dust Collecting Roller

F-2-78
Developing Assembly
Shutter
Developing Assembly
F-2-79
2-59
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Transfer
2-60
<Opening and Closing Operations of the Buffer Shutter>

By pushing the Developing Assembly in the main body, edge of the Supply Mouth on the
assembly hits to leading edge of the Buffer Shutter.
By pushing the assembly in farther, the Buffer Shutter moves to the rear so the Supply Mouth
is opened.
The Shutter Arm goes down by spring pressure, and it interlocks with the protrusion on the
Developing Shutter.
Transfer
Pre-transfer Charging Bias Control
To make the charging amount of toner on the Photosensitive Drum appropriate to improve
transfer performance.
The pre-transfer charging bias (AC + DC negative), which has been generated on the Pretransfer Charging PCB (PCB26), is applied to the Pre-transfer Charging Wire.
By pulling the Developing Assembly out, the Shutter Arm is pushed by the protrusion on the
Pre-transfer Charging PCB(PCB26)
Developing Shutter, so the Buffer Shutter is closed followed by the Supply Mouth. The Shutter
Arm lifts up by hitting to the bottom of the Hopper.
AC+DC negative
Buffer Assembly Shutter Open
Buffer Assembly
Buffer Assembly Shutter
Developing Assembly
Push
Toner
Photosensitive Drum
Buffer Assembly

F-2-81
Spring
Projection
Developing Assembly
Buffer Assembly Shutter

F-2-80
2-60
2-61
Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Control
Pre-transfer Charging Shutter Control
To prevent charging failure caused by soil of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire.
To prevent uneven potential on the Photosensitive Drum caused by discharge products

(nitrogen oxide) accumulated on the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly.
<Execution timing>
To be executed together with the primary charging wire cleaning control at the same time.
<Execution timing>
To be executed together with the Pre-transfer charging wire cleaning control at the same
time.
The drive of the Pre-Transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M7) makes the Cleaner Screw
rotate clockwise/counterclockwise, which moves the Cleaning Pad back and forth to clean the
Pre-transfer Charging Wire.
The shutter is opened or closed by the cleaning mechanism of the Pre-transfer Charging
The Pre-transfer Charging Shutter Position Sensor ( ) detects position of the Cleaning Pad.
Wire.
The Pre-transfer Charging Shutter is made of fiber and usually taken up by the bobbin.
The drive of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor (M7) moves the Cleaning Pad
to the rear and the shutter taken up by the bobbin becomes extended to make the Shutter
closed.
Because the Shutter comes between the Pre-transfer Charging Wire and the Photosensitive
Screw
Drum, discharge products from the Primary Charging Assembly do not reach the
Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad
Pre-transfer Charging
Wire Cleaning Motor(M7)
The Pre-transfer Charging Shutter Position Sensor (PS95) detects opening/close of the
shutter.
Screw
F-2-82

Cleaning Motor(M7)
Shutter Flag
To clean the Charging Wire (5-roundtrip)

COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRE-CLN
To check operation of the charging wire cleaning (1-roundtrip)
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > WIRE-EX
Photosensitive
Drum
To specify cleaning interval of the last rotation charging wire (Default: every 2000 sheets (the
interval can be changed within the range between 1000 and 5000 sheets))
COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING > W-CLN-P
Charging Shutter
Pre-transfer
Charging Wire
Charging Shutter
Pre-transfer Charging Shutter Sensor(PS95)
F-2-83
2-61
2-62
Transfer Bias Control
ETB Cleaning Control
To transfer toner on the Photosensitive Drum to a paper.
To prevent image failure caused by toner soil on the ETB, the residual toner on the Transfer
The transfer bias (DC positive), which has been generated on the Transfer High Voltage PCB
Belt is removed.
(PCB13), is applied to the Transfer Roller.

Following shows the 3 types of transfer bias:
Print bias: the bias to be applied during printing
1) The ETB Cleaning Blade scrapes toner on the ETB.
Paper leading edge weak bias: the bias to be applied to the leading edge of the paper (to
2) The scraped toner is fed to the Waste Toner Container.
prevent failure in paper separation)

Paper interval bias: the bias to be applied between sheets
The bias value is determined by the environment, the paper type and the mode table.
Drive Roller
Brush Roller
Transfer High Voltage PCB(PCB13)

DC positive
Photosensitive Drum
Cleaning Shaft
ETB cleaning Unit
Transfer Roller
Cleaning Blade
F-2-85
<Related service mode>

To clean the ETB (3-round idle rotation of the ETB)
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING > TBLT-CLN
F-2-84
2-62
2-63
ETB Engagement/Disengagement Control

To prevent image failure caused by toner soil on the ETB, the ETB is engaged or disengaged
Transfer Belt
with the Photosensitive Drum.
Disengagement
Engagement
<Execution timing>
To make the belt engaged: during printing
To make the belt disengaged: any timing other than the above
1) Reverse rotation of the Duplex Feed Left Motor (M19) makes the Disengagement Cam
Engagement Arm
rotate.
2) Rotation of the Disengagement Cam moves the Disengagement Arm up and down to make
the Transfer Belt engaged/disengaged with the Photosensitive Drum.
Flag
M19
Transfer Belt Engage

Sensor(PS55)
3) Following 2 sensors detect position of the Transfer Belt.

Transfer Belt Engage Sensor (PS55): to detect engagement of the Transfer Belt
Transfer Belt Disengage Sensor (PS56): to detect disengagement (home position) of
Engagement Arm
Engagement Cam
the Transfer Belt.

Engagement
Cam
Transfer Belt Disengage Sensor(PS56)
Engagement
Disengagement
Photosensitive
Drum
Transfer Belt
Engagement Cam
Engagement Arm
F-2-86
2-63
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Separation
2-64
Separation
Separation Control
<Separation from the Drum>
Separation is performed using the curvature separation method.
Photosensitive Drum
Paper
Separation Claw
F-2-87
NOTE:
The Separation Claw separates sheets before entering the Drum Cleaning Unit.
This effectively avoids failure in paper feed (double feed, etc.)
Paper
Separation Claw
F-2-88
2-64
2-65
<Separation from the ETB>
Separation Claw Reciprocation Control
Separation is performed using the curvature separation method and the Static Eliminator.
By moving the Separation Claw back and forth (reciprocation), scar on the drum caused by
There is no bias for separation.
the Separation Claw can be prevented.
Static Eliminator
Separation Guide
<Execution Timing>
Transfer Belt
During printing (while the Developing Motor is driving)

Making the Separation Claw move back and forth by transmitting the rotation force of the
Developing Motor Drive via the cam and Gear Unit.
Reciprocation width: +/-25mm
1) The drive of the Developing Drive Motor makes the cam rotate.
2) The Drive Lever moves in a pendulum motion by the rotation of the cam, which make
the Drive Shaft rotates. (With the one-way bearing, the Drive Shaft rotates in only one
direction.)
3) Making the Lack move back and forth by transmitting the rotating motion of the Drive Shaft
via the Gear Unit. The Separation Mounting Base linked with the Lack moves back and
forth.
Drive Shaft
Paper
Gear Unit
Separation Guide
Static Eliminator
Transfer Belt
M1
Lack
M1
Drive Lever
Cam
F-2-89
Separation Claw Mounting Base
2-65
F-2-90
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum Cleaning
Drum Cleaning
2-66
Separation Bias Control
To prevent image soil caused by toner accumulated on the Drum Separation Claw, this
Drum Cleaning Control

The blade, which is in contact with the Drum, removes residual toner and paper dust on the
control prevents attachment of toner on the Photosensitive Drum with the Drum Separation
Claw.
<Execution timing>
When the developing bias is applied
1) The drive of the Main Motor (M2) makes the Magnet Roller rotate.
2) The Magnet Roller forms a thin toner coating layer on the surface of the Photosensitive
Drum.
3) The Drum Cleaning Blade scrapes residual toner on the surface of the Drum.
4) The Toner Collection Feeding Screw feeds the scraped waste toner to the Waste Toner
Container.
The separation claw bias (AC), which has been generated on the Develop High Voltage PCB
(PCB12), is applied to the Separation Claw so that vibration is given to the Separation Claw
to prevent toner attachment.
Drum Cleaning Unit
AC
Drum Cleaning Blade
Photosensitive Drum
Photosensitive Drum
Separation Claw
F-2-92
Auxiliary Roller
Magnet Roller
F-2-91
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum Cleaning
2-66
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Drum-related Issues
Drum-related Issues
2-67
Drum Heater Control
To make potential characteristic for charging or exposure stable by keeping the specified
Drum HP Detection
temperature of the Photosensitive Drum.
To detect home position of the Photosensitive Drum.

There is a flag for HP detection on the shaft of the Photosensitive Drum. Once the
Photosensitive Drum starts rotating, the flag passes through the Drum HP Sensor (PS61) and
the home position of the Photosensitive Drum is detected.
The Drum Heater is the flat heater located inside the Photosensitive Drum to keep moisture
content on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum constant by turning ON the heater.
NOTE:
Temperature of the drum is detected by the Thermistor in the Drum Control PCB, and
is controlled by turning ON/OFF the Drum Heater to make it 42 degC
This control is used during the 2D shading control.
Photosensitive Drum
Photosensitive Drum
Drum Heater
Flag
Drum Home Position Sensor(PS61)

F-2-93
Environment
Heater
Switch
Environment Sensor
F-2-94
2-67
2-68
<Operating condition>
Operating condition of the heater differs according to the status of the Environment Switch and the host machine.
A.2-dimensional shading OFF(defolt*1)
<Environment Switch: OFF>
Main Power
OFF
Mode
Main SW
Switch
Heater
OFF
sleep mode (low energy

consumption)*3
sleep mode (high energy

consumption)*3
WarmUp(Recovery)
Standby/Energy Saver
Copy/Print
ON
Cassette SW
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Drum
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Cassette
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Reader
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Environment Environment
control
control
*1
*1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
T-2-34
<Environment Switch: ON>

Mode
Switch
Main SW
Cassette SW
Drum
Heater
Main Power
OFF
Cassette
Reader

consumption)*3

consumption)*3
WarmUp(Recovery)
OFF
Copy/Print
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Environment Environment Environment Environment Environment Environment
control
control
control
control
control
control
*1
*1
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
control
control
*1
*1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
T-2-35
2-68
2-69
B.2-dimensional shading ON *1]

Mode
Main SW
Switch
Heater
Main Power
OFF
OFF

consumption)*3

consumption)*3
WarmUp(Recovery)
Copy/Print
ON
Cassette SW
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Drum
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
*1
ON
*1
ON
ON
Cassette
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Reader
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
T-2-36

Mode
Switch
Heater
Main Power
OFF
Main SW

consumption)*3

consumption)*3
WarmUp(Recovery)
OFF
Copy/Print
ON
Cassette SW
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Drum
ON
*1
ON
*1
ON
*1
ON
*1
ON
*1
ON
*1
Cassette
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Reader
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
*1
ON
*1
ON
ON
T-2-37
*1 It can be switched by COPIR > OPTION > IMG-MCON > 2D-SHADE..

*2 It can be switched by COPIR > OPTION > IMG-MCON > DRM-H-SW.
*3 When sleep mode (high energy consumption) is set, the Cassette Heater/Reader Heater cannot be turned ON although the Environment Switch and the Cassette Heater Switch are ON.
When using the Cassette Heater and the Reader Heater at sleep state, set the sleep mode (low energy consumption). Settings/Registration > Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Sleep
Mode Energy Use > High/Low
2-69
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Toner Supply Area
2-70
<Environment Control>
Environment control 1: The condition of the heater at the time of turning OFF the main
power continues.
Environment control 2: Whether to turn ON or OFF the heater is determined by the
environment (moisture content) right before moving to sleep state, and the condition
continues while the power is OFF or the machine is at sleep state.
Environment
Moisture content
Temperature/Humidity
Drum Heater
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0.86
1.73
5.8
8.9
15
18
12.41
23 deg C 5%
23deg C 10%
23 deg C 30%
23 deg C 50%
23 deg C 70%
27 deg C 80%
30 deg C 80%
OFF
Toner Supply Area

Toner Container Detection
Toner Container detection is not performed with this machine.
Toner Level Detection/Toner Supply Control

Toner Supply Control
To supply toner in the Toner Container to the Developing Assembly.
The Magnet Roller helps toner supplied to the Developing Assembly uniformly in the
longitudinal direction to form an even toner layer in the Developing Cylinder
ON
Hopper Unit
Toner Feed Screw

Toner Container
Magnet Roller
T-2-38
Environment control 3: Basically the heater is ON. ON or OFF of the heater can be
switched depending on the moisture contents when the duration time of standby mode/
energy saving mode is long (4 hours at minimum).
Toner Supply Motor

M10
Sub Hopper
Toner Stirrer

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON > DRM-H-SW: To set ON/OFF of the Drum Heater.
0: Normal mode (ON/OFF of the Drum Heater is determined when moving to sleep 1.)
(Default)
Buffer Unit
Toner Feed Motor
M28
CL5
1: Drum Heater ON mode *(The Drum Heater must be turned ON when moving to sleep 1
while the 2-dimensional shading-related control is OFF.)
Toner Excess Supply Sensor

(TS2)
2: Energy saving mode (The Drum Heater is OFF when moving to sleep 1.)
* The mode differs from 2-dimensional shading ON (image priority mode). This mode is for

(TS1)
users who just want to turn ON the Drum Heater when startup time is delayed because of
the increase of controls due to 2-dimensional shading ON.
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR > 2D-SHADE: Image priority mode (2-dimensional
shading).

(TS3)
Developing Assembly
F-2-95
Title
Description
Supply timing
Operation of the host

machine
Supply to the
Hopper
ON/OFF
0: 2-dimensional shading OFF (Default)
1: 2-dimensional shading ON (The Drum Heater is turned ON at first time for the day, sleep,
standby/energy saving, potential control, and 2-dimensional shading.)
Toner in the Toner When the Buffer Toner Sensor To drive the Toner Supply
Container is supplied
(TS3) detects absence of
Motor (M10).
to the Buffer Unit.
toner
To be executed until TS3
detects presence of toner.
Supply to the Developer in the Buffer
When the Developing
To drive the Toner Feed
Developing
Unit is supplied to the Toner Sensor (TS1) detects
Motor (M28).
Assembly
Developing Assembly.
absence of toner
To be executed until TS1
detects presence of toner.
T-2-39
2-70
NOTE:
The Toner Excess Supply Sensor (TS2) detects amount of toner around the Buffer
Inlet. If toner is supplied excessively from the Sub Hopper to the Buffer Unit (if
there are toner clusters), toner in the Buffer may overflow.
If TS2 detects presence of toner, regardless of presence/absence detection of
toner by TS3, the Toner Supply Motor (M10) is stopped so that toner supply to the
Buffer is stopped to prevent toner leak
2-71
Toner Level Detection:
Toner Container
Sub Hopper
TS2
Buffer
TS3
E020-0000 : Developing Assembly toner absent error

E020-0001 : Error in Developing Toner Sensor connection detection
TS1
E020-0002 : Error in Buffer Toner Sensor connection detection

E020-0003 : Error in the Toner Excess Supply Sensor connection detection
Developing Assembly
E020-0004 : Error in Magnet Roller Clutch connection detection

E020-0020 : Error in Developing Assembly Toner Sensor Cleaning Scraper displacement
(toner absence)
E020-0021 : Error in Developing Assembly Toner Sensor Cleaning Scraper displacement
F-2-96
Toner level
Status
Message
100 to 25%
No
(toner presence)
TS2
TS3
25 to 10%
No
TS1
10 to 5%
TS2
TS1
TS3
Replace the toner

cartridge.
(Continuous
printing is
enabled.)
Operation
When TS3 detects absence of toner, the
Toner Supply Motor (M10) is driven.
Once TS3 detects presence of toner, M10
is stopped (to prevent toner leak).
When TS3 detects absence of toner, the
Toner Supply Motor (M10) is driven.
Once TS3 detects presence of toner, M10
is stopped (to prevent toner leak).
In the case that toner presence failed to

be detected 90 sec after the drive of M10
has been started, a message is displayed
in the bottom of Control Panel because
the system determines that there is
no toner in the Toner Container. This
state continues during printing and the
Toner Container can be replaced during
printing.
After the Toner Container is replaced, the
toner level returns to 100%.
2-71
2
Toner level
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Waste Toner Feeding Area
Status
Message
5% or less
TS2
TS1
TS3
Operation
Replace the toner After "Replace the toner cartridge."

cartridge.
message is displayed, and approx. 900
(Job is stopped.) sheets *) are printed, toner stops to be
supplied to the Developing Assembly
and the message prompting to replace
the Toner Container is displayed on the
whole screen of Control Panel. After the
Toner Container is replaced, the toner
level returns to 100%.
T-2-40
2-72
Waste Toner Full Level Detection
The waste toner of the Drum Cleaning Unit and the ETB Unit is fed to the Waste Toner
Container. There is no sensor to detect toner level in the Waste Toner Container and the toner
level is detected by the video count (1-count per 1 sheet with 6% image).
M2
Drum Cleaning Unit
*) The number 900 sheets is a logical value derived from calculation; thus, it varies approx.
30%. In addition, with Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > T-RUN-LV, approx.
140 sheets can be printed (with 30% of variation).
ETB cleaning
Unit
Waste Toner
Container
Waste Toner
F-2-97
2-72
Waste Toner Feed Screw Lock Detection
This machine performs black band control in order to maintain the drum cleaning
performance.
Therefore the criterion of the full Waste Toner Container varies according to the environment
and the image duty as shown in the following table.
Temperature/
Humidity
Moisture
content
23 deg C / 5%
23 deg C / 10%
23 deg C / 30%
23 deg C / 50%
27 deg C / 70%
28 deg C / 75%
30 deg C / 80%
0.86
1.73
5.8
8.9
15
18
21.6
0 to less
than 1.0
1.0 to
less
than 2.0
700,000
pages
600,000
pages
800,000
pages
4.0 to 5.0 to 6.0

less
than 5.0
700,000
pages
600,000
pages
500,000 to 550,000 pages

T-2-41
Status
To detect lock state of the Waste Toner Feed Screw.

The drive by the Developing Motor (M2) is transmitted to the Screw Gear, which makes
the Waste Toner Screw rotate. When this Screw Gear becomes unable to rotate, it slides
Image duty (%)

2.0 to
3.0 to
less
less
than 3.0 than 4.0
1,000,000 pages
750,000
pages
2-73
Waste toner level
sideways by the transmitted drive force.

The Screw Gear fails to rotate once the Waste Toner Screw is locked; therefore, the
transmitted drive force makes the Screw Gear slide sideways. The Waste Toner Lock
Detection Switch (SW5) is placed by the side of the Screw Gear and SW5 is pressed when
the Screw Gear is moved. With this mechanism, it is detected that the Waste Toner Screw is
locked.
E013-0001 Error in Waste Toner Lock Detection Connector disconnection
E013-0002 Error in Waste Toner Feed Screw Lock detection
Operation
Warning for full level of waste toner Approx. 83% of the full criterion Printing can be continued
Host machine is
Full level of waste toner
Full criterion
stopped(error display)
Waste Toner Container Detection

The Waste Toner Container detection is not performed with this machine.
T-2-42
The Drive Gear escapes when a certain load is applied to the Waste Toner Feeding Screw
and an error is displayed after the Host Machine has been stopped.
2-73
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Image Stabilization Control
2-74
Image Stabilization Control

Overview
This control prevents image failure due to change of the environment or deterioration of the
Photosensitive Drum to ensure stabilized print.
Laser Power(Lp)
Primary current (Ip)
Primary
Charging
Wire
Laser Power(Lp)
Laser
Potential Sensor
Developing Cylinder
Drum
surface
potential
Potential
control
Developing
bias
(Vdc)
Laser APC
control
DC Controller PCB
Reader
PASCAL
PASCAL
LUT
Main Controller PCB2

F-2-98
2-74
2-75
Execution Timing
Execution items for image stabilization control differ according to the environment and condition of image formation parts. Following shows the control items at each sequence.
Illustration.*70 deg C or lower in the fixing temperature,** 30 sec.70 deg C or lower in the fixing temperature,***Fixing temperature remaining high at power OFF/ON
Control
Standard
Warm-up rotation
duration
Normal power
(second)
At
Door
Jam
Approx. startup* startup OFF/
open recovery
**
ON***
Timing
Initial
Paper
rotation interval
Full Potential
Control
APC Correction
at Paper Interval
APC Control
at Warm-up
Rotation
APC Correction
at Last Rotation
Drum Idle
Rotation at First
in the Day
Charging Wire
Cleaning
LED Intensity
Correction / Belt
Background
Correction
Idle Rotation at
First in the Day
Low Duty
Ejection
Blank Band
Control
Interruption
Last
rotation
Arbitrary
Forcible
PASCAL PASCAL
interruption Low duty
Normal
(Full
(Quick
at 2,000 ejection
correction) correction)
sheets
( )
()*1
0.2
*5
()*6
()*7
60.0
30
()*8
()*8
3.5
15 to 30
*11
Remarks
*1 Operation Criteria
Last rotation after the first job right after startup first time
for the day takes 10 minutes or longer
Last rotation after processing 1,500 sheets or more
following the last potential control execution
Last rotation after the first job following 90 minutes or
more elapsed from the last potential control executio
*5 At every 20-sheet interval
Initial rotation after the first job following 60 minutes or
more elapsed from the last job completion
Last rotation after the first job following 30 minutes or
more elapsed from the last job completion
Last rotation after 1,500 sheets or more processed
following the last Charging Wire cleaning execution
Forcibly interruption at 2,000 sheets or more processed
following the last Charging Wire cleaning execution
To stabilize toner toribology after long idle time

- To prevent toner deterioration during continuous Low DUTY
image printing
*11
When the predefined sheets were printed
2-75
Control
Idle Rotation
at First in
the Day (H/H
environment)
Contrast
Potential
Correction at
Startup
Disengagement
of Transfer Unit
Standard
Warm-up rotation
duration
Normal power
(second)
At
Door
Jam
Approx. startup* startup OFF/
open recovery
**
ON***
Timing
Initial
Paper
rotation interval
2-76
Interruption
Last
rotation
Arbitrary
Forcible
PASCAL PASCAL
interruption Low duty
Normal
(Full
(Quick
at 2,000 ejection
correction) correction)
sheets
15(30)
()*12
Weak Bias
Control at
Leading Edge
Black Band
Control
10
*13
*14
Remarks
*12 Only when the environment is in high temperature /

humidity
At jam recovery / after patch generation / at job completion
*13 At last rotation after the predefined sheets processed

following the last black band control execution (2,000 sheets
in default)
*14 If the operation criteria are met during low duty ejection
control, the control is synchronized to also perform this
control.
T-2-43
2-76
Potential Control
Perform the following controls according to the deterioration level of the Photosensitive Drum
and the environmental change.
1. VD control
The primary current value (Ip) is determined to become the target dark area potential (VD).
2. VL control
The laser power (LP) is determined to become the target bright area potential (VL).
3. Vdc control
Developing bias is determined by adding the "fogging removal potential (Vback)" (based on
the environment) to the bright area potential (VL).
Execution timing
Last rotation after the first job right after startup first time for the day takes 10 minutes or
longer
Last rotation after processing 1,500 sheets or more following the last potential control
execution
Last rotation after the first job following 90 minutes or more elapsed from the last potential
2-77
1. VD control
1) The primary current (Ip_Target_Pre), which has been determined in the last potential
control*1, is applied and the Potential Sensor measures drum surface potential (VD_Pre).
*1: At the time of installation, the primary current adjusted in the factory is applied.
2) The drum surface potential (VD_Pre) and the target potential (VD_Target) are compared to
apply the primary current ( x Ip_Target_Pre), which makes the target potential (VD_Target)
to be in range between the drum surface potential (VD_Pre) and the drum surface potential
(VD_Pre), and then the drum surface potential (VD_Pre) at that moment is read.
3) The 2 points of measured dark area potentials are connected with a straight line to
calculate dark area potential characteristics.
4) Based on the obtained dark area potential characteristics, the primary current (Ip_Target) is
calculated, which can obtain the target potential (VD_Target).
5) The calculated primary current is applied and this operation is repeated until the drum
surface potential (VDm) is within the range of the target potential +/- 5V. Potential
measurement is executed up to 8 times and correction is executed up to 8 times.
Voltage(V)
Voltage(V)
control execution
VD _Pre
NOTE:
At normal startup mode (30 sec. startup), simple potential control is executed to shorten
the startup time (see Auxiliary Control > Simple Potential Control)
VD_Target
4)
VD_Target5V VDm
5)
3)
VD_Pre
1)
2)
Current(A)
Ip_Target_Pre
Ip_Target_Pre
Ip_Target
Current(A)
Ip_Target
F-2-99
[When the drum surface potential (VDm) is not as follows: -5V <= target potential <= +5V ]
Potential control error (VD) "E061-0101" occurs.
2-77
2. VL control
2-78
[When the drum surface potential is not as follows: -10V <= target potential <= +10V ]
1) The laser power (LP_Target_Pre), which has been determined in the last bright area
When the drum surface potential is as follows: -10V > target potential > -30V or +10V
potential control*1, is applied and the Potential Sensor measures the drum surface potential
< target potential < +30V
(VL_Pre).
The laser power (LP) when the previous potential control was succeeded (within +/-
*1: At the time of installation, the primary current adjusted in the factory is applied.
10V target potential) is applied. Refer to the alarm code "32-0002" for the processing
2) The drum surface potential (VL_Pre) and the target potential (VL_Target) are compared to
apply the primary current ( x EPC_LP_Target_Pre), which makes the target potential (VL_
when the image is influenced.

When the target potential is as follows: target potential <= -30V or target potential >=
Target) to be in range between the drum surface potential (VL_Pre) and the drum surface
+30V
potential (VL_Pre), and then the drum surface potential (VL_Pre) at that moment is read.
Potential control error (VL) "E061-0001" occurs.
3) The 2 points of measured bright area potentials are connected with a straight line to
calculate the bright area potential characteristics.
4) Based on the obtained bright area potential characteristics, the laser power (EPC_LP_
Target) is calculated, which can obtain the target potential (VL_Target).
5) The Drum is exposed with the calculated laser power and this operation is repeated until
NOTE:
With this machine, laser APC control is executed to correct the bright area potential
between sheets and jobs (see Auxiliary Control > Laser APC Control)
the drum surface potential (VLm) is within the range of the target potential +/- 10V. Potential
measurement is executed up to 8 times and correction is executed up to 8 times.
Lp is actually calculated by the laser power (LP) and the bright area potential characteristics
that were obtained in the last VL control because executing VL control each time takes time.
VI(V)
VL_Pre
VL_Target
VL_Pre
When the bright area potential measured value fails to be within the range of the target
3)
potential +/- 10V, follow the workflow as described below to obtain bright area potential
5)
4)
characteristics by the foregoing VL control to calculate LP.
VL_Target10V VLm
2)
1)
EPC_LP_Target
EPC_LP_Target_Pre
EPC_LP_Target
LP_Target_Pre
Laser power relative value(%)

F-2-100
2-78
2-79
3. Determination of developing bias (Vdc)
Start of VI potential
control
Developing bias is determined by adding the Vback value (based on the environment table)
to VL (bright area potential) determined in the foregoing control.
Irradiate laser power defined in the previous

potential control and measure
the potential (VI_Pre) in the light area.
Developing bias (Vdc) = VL+Vback

VL: measured bright area potential determined by the potential control
Vback: the potential to remove foggy image that was determined in the environment
table
Vl_Pre=Vl_Target10
Y
Potential changes depending
on laser emission
N
Converging potential control
with previous function (gradient)
Vd
Vl_Pre=Vl_Target10
Vcont
Vdc
Vback
Y
Potential control
(linear interpolation)
Vl_Pre=Vl_Target10
Vd : Dark area potential

VL : Light area potential
Vdc : Developing DC potential
Vcont : Contrast potential
Vback : Fogging removal potential
VL
F-2-102
Related error codes
E061: error in potential control
N
Converging potential
control (up to 20 times)
Vl_Pre=Vl_Target10
N
Abend of potential control
F061 Error
Normal end of
potential control
F-2-101
2-79
PASCAL Control
This control stabilizes gradation density characteristics on the image.
This control is executed when the following is selected in user mode: Auto Adjust Gradation >
Full Adjust
Patch pattern on the test print is scanned by the Reader to create a gradation table
(PASCALLUT).
Execution timing
2-80
NOTE:
Since Inbox images are binary, gradation adjustment cannot be performed after being
stored in Inbox. Gradation adjustment is performed on the rasterized data before they
are stored in Inbox.
When the stored image is output after a long time, gradation adjustment is not
performed on the basis of the environment at the time of output, so appropriate printing
results may not be able to be obtained.
If the environment changes with time, it is advisable to store the data into Inbox just
before output.
During execution of Full Adjust: User mode > Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance
> Adjust Image Quality > Image Stabilization Control > Full Adjust
Full adjustment execution of
auto gradation adjustment
Potential control
DC Controller PCB
Send data of test print
Output test print
DC Controller PCB
Read test print
Reader
Density data output
Generate gradation table
( PASCALLUT )
NO
3-sheet output
for test print?
YES
End
F-2-103
2-80
Technology > Image Formation System > Controls > Auxiliary Control
2-81
Auxiliary Control
Laser APC Control

This control corrects laser output control value to prevent change of surface potential by laser
Startup Contrast Potential (Vcont) Correction

Contrast potential (Vcont) is corrected to keep a constant density and prevent light image
caused by reduced toner charging amount in an energy-saving environment.
output.
Correction type
NOTE:
Temperature in the Developing Assembly is reduced because the Drum Heater is turned
OFF at sleep state in an energy-saving environment. This operation increases moisture
content in the Developing Assembly and reduces toner charging amount.
A. Between-sheet APC control: to keep constant bright area potential (VL) without reducing
productivity during continuous jobs.
B. Initial rotation APC to determine VL according to the laser and drum temperature
characteristics.
C. Last rotation APC control: to determine VL according to the laser and drum temperature
characteristics.
Execution timing
At the time of the normal startup mode (in the case that the two dimension shading control is
OFF)
Execution timing
A. Between-sheet APC control: at every paper interval of a job.
NOTE:
This control is not executed when the two dimension shading control is ON because the
Drum Heater is turned ON.
B. Initial rotation APC control: to be executed during initial rotation of the first job after the
machine has been left unattached for 60 minutes or more since execution of the last job.
C. Last rotation APC control: to be executed during last rotation of the first job after the
machine has been left unattached for 30 minutes or more since execution of the last job.
Control description
Control description
1) At the time of normal image formation, contrast potential (Vcont) based on the
A. Between-sheet APC control
environment table is added to the developing bias (Vdc (full potential control value))
1) Bright area potential is measured at every sheet interval by the Potential Sensor.
determined by the full potential control to correct developing bias.
2) Average sheet interval VL_ave of the measured paper interval VL potential (for 20 sheet
Vdc=Vdc (potential control value) Vcont
intervals) is calculated.
2) The corrected contrast potential (Vcont) is reset (making Vcont 0) when the next full
3) Laser power correction value is determined by the difference between the measured
potential correction is executed.
potential VL (measured at the time of potential control) and the average paper interval VL_
ave in addition to the last bright area potential characteristics (gradient ()).
Potential changes depending

on laser emission
Correction formula
LP_after=LP_before- (VL-Vl_ave)
Vd
Vdc
(Full Potential
Control)
Vcont
Vd : Dark area potential

VL : Light area potential
Vdc : Developing DC potential
Vcont : Contrast potential
Vback : Fogging removal potential
LP_before: laser power before correction

VL: measured VL determined at the time of potential control
VL_ave: average paper interval VL_ave
: gradient (control coefficient): gradient reciprocal of LP_VI straight line in the range including
Vcont
Vdc
LP_after: laser power after correction
VL target
Vback
VL
F-2-104
2-81
2-82
Two Dimension Shading Control
Bright area potential

characteristics( )
Uneven potential on the Photosensitive Drum is corrected by laser exposure.
VL (V)
Execution timing
VL0re
Procedure 3)
VL
At the time of laser exposure (only when the two dimension shading control is ON. Default:
OFF)
Control description
1) Potential data on the Drum surface is saved in EEPROM on the DC Controller PCB
Procedure 1), 2)
in the format supporting two-dimension coordinate (measured when the Drum was
manufactured).
Lp_before
2) When the power is turned ON, EEPROM data is compared to RAM data. If there is any
Lp_after
F-2-105
B. Initial rotation APC control

1) Bright area potential VL is measured during initial rotation to correct laser power. The
primary current value and developing bias value are fi
2) Correction is executed by following the same way as between-sheet APC control.
C. Last rotation APC control
difference in the data, the EEPROM data is stored in the backup RAM.
NOTE:
Whether the control is enabled can be checked with COPIER>DISPLAY>2D-SHD>2DSTS.
If 0 is displayed, check DRM-LOT number. When 0 is displayed, it means that the drum
has not been registered; thus, execute FUNCTION/2D-SHADE/2D-READ to register
the drum.
This correction follows the same way as initial rotation APC control
3) Potential data on the Drum surface is sent to the image ASIC and the image data is
synchronized with the Drum home position, and then the uneven potential data is converted
into light intensity to be sent to the Laser Driver PCB.
4) The Laser Driver PCB is exposed to remove uneven potential on the Drum.
NOTE:
For Drum provided as a service part, EEPROM which stores potential unevenness data
is included. Therefore, the EEPROM needs to be replaced when the Drum is replaced.
As the life of the Drum advances, uneven density can occur when the halftone image
is output despite correction of the drum uneven potential. In such a case, uneven
density can be corrected by specifying a particular position in service mode. See
Troubleshooting for procedure.
FCOT (First Copy Time) is reduced to detect home position of the Drum by turning ON
the two dimension shading.
2-82
2-83
White Band Control
DC Controller PCB
Oppositely-charged toner on the Developing Sleeve is forcibly applied on the Drum and
CPU
collected by the Cleaning Unit.

NOTE:
Large-grained toner is less likely to be charged compared to small-grained toner and
can be positively charged (opposite charging) in rare cases. Such oppositely-charged
toner fails to be developed but remains on the Developing Sleeve, which causes image
failure.
Calculation
EEPROM
Drum potential
uneven data
Backup
RAM
Image
ASIC
Execution timing
Last rotation after every job
Adjusted
value
Control description
Developing bias Vdc is increased once the image trailing edge passes through the developing
Laser Driver PCB
position.
Vback is increased and the oppositely-charged toner on the Developing Cylinder is moved
Service Mode
onto the Drum.

Related service modes
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>WB : Reverse toner forcible eject: blank band
COPIER>ADJUST>MISC>TBSIS-WB : Setting of blank band ejection time
Drum Home Position Sensor
Drum
F-2-106

COPIER>DISPLAY>2D-SHD>2D-STS : Display of 2D shading ON/OFF
COPIER>DISPLAY>2D-SHD>DRM-LOT : Display of Drum Lot number
COPIER>DISPLAY>2D-SHD>CHK-SUM : Display of checksum calculation result
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>M-LINE1/LINE2 : 2D shading horizontal scan correction
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>S-LINE1-4 : 2D shading vertical scan correction
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>SHD-P1-3 : 2D shading pattern output
COPIER>OPTION>IMG-LSR>2D-SW : Read 2D shading ROM
2-83
Black Band Control
2-84
Control description
This control maintains the cleaning performance by providing sufficient amount of toner to the
edge of the Cleaning Blade.
1) Black band described below is created on the Drum.

2) Black band is scraped by the Drum Cleaning Blade and toner is properly applied on the
Cleaning Blade at that moment.
NOTE:
Friction coefficient between the Blade and the Drum is increased unless sufficient
amount of toner is applied on the Drum Cleaning Blade, which causes ride-up of the
Blade. Although toner is properly applied to the center of the Blade by normal cleaning
operation, toner is supplied insufficiently to the edge of the Blade.
3) This control turns off the transfer high voltage and makes the Transfer Belt disengaged so
that image is not applied on the Transfer Belt.
72 mm
152 mm
Execution timing
*1
Last rotation after the specified number of sheets has been fed since execution of the last
black band control.
When low duty discharge control is executed.
Moisture content
Drum
Black Band
152 mm
*1: This value can be changed in service mode.

12g or more
Center
Interval (sheets)
2,000
2098mm: iR-ADV 6075 / 6065
2570mm : iR-ADV 6055
T-2-44
72 mm
F-2-107

COPIER>OPTION>IMG-DEV>BB-CNT:Set Bk band output intvl: Cleaning Blade
COPIER>OPTION>CLEANING>CLN-ADJ:ON/OFF of cleaning black band sequence
COPIER>OPTION>CLEANING>CLN-SW:ON/OFF of cleaning black band sequencel
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>BB : Toner forcible eject (black band)
2-84
2-85
Low Duty Discharge Control

In the case of continuous output of low duty image, this control consumes toner at non-image
area to maintain the density stability.
Execution timing
While the video count for every page is accumulated, in the case that the average image duty
is less than the threshold*1, the ongoing job is interrupted at the time of last rotation of a job or
the ongoing job is interrupting in the middle of the job to discharge the toner according to the
average image duty.
*1: Threshold is determined by the following environment table. The value can be changed in
service mode
Moisture content
0.86
23deg C/5%
Threshold
1%
1.73
23deg C/10%
1%
5.8
23deg C/30%
1%
8.9
23deg C/50%
1%
15
23deg C/70%
2%
18
28deg C/80%
2.5%
21.6
30deg C/80%
3%
T-2-45
Control description
1) Video count on every page is retrieved.
2) The obtained video count is converted into A4 size and the value is accumulated.
3) Once the accumulated value reaches the threshold, the following patch is created on the
Drum to discharge deteriorated toner.
COPIER>OPTION>IMG-DEV>LWDTY-SW ON/OFF of low duty ejection Default OFF
COPIER>OPTION>IMG-DEV>LWDTYADJ Set low duty ejection threshold value
2-85
2-86
2-86
2-87
2-87
Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Periodical Servicing List
Servicing
2-88

Parts Name
Parts/Area Name
Parts Nunber Piece

cleaner
cleaner holder
Grid Wire
cleaner
cleaner holder
Expected
life*
COUNTER
(PRDC-1)
FB4-3687
50**
PRM-WIRE
FL2-0462
50**
PRM-CLN
FL2-2720
50**
PRM-CLN
FY1-0883
AR
50
PRM-GRID
FB4-3687
50**
PO-WIRE
FL2-0462
50**
PO-CLN
FL2-2720
50**
PO-CLN
Remarks
Toner Receptacle Tray

Primary Charging Assembly Grid
Wire
Primary Charging Assembly
Shield Plate
With spring
FL3-4558
Pre-transfer Charging Assembly

Shield Plate
Drum Cleaning Unit Plate
With spring
FL3-4559
Pre-exposure Scraper
Drum Cleaning Unit Toner
collection area
Drum
T-2-46
*Unit: 10,000 sheets
Drum Surface
**: In a high temperature/humidity environment (30 deg C/80%), it is 250000 sheets
Drum Edge
Consumable Parts
Parts Name
Drum Cleaning Blade
Drum Front Side Seal/Drum Rear

Side Seal
Drum Separation Claw
Developing Cylinder
Developing Roller
ETB
Transfer Roller
Brush Roller
ETB Cleaning Blade
Parts Nunber Piece

FM3-7288
FM3-7297
FC9-9153
FL3-5187
1
1
2
Expected
life
150
150
50
60
FC8-7086
1each
50
FB4-8018
FM4-5438
FB6-6559
FC8-7160
FC8-7159
FC6-1647
FC8-7175
3
1
2
1
1
1
1
50
100**
100
50
50
50
50
COUNTER
(DRBL-1)
Remarks
PRM-UNIT
PO-UNIT
EXP-SCRP
CLN-BLD
Use by
reversing at
every 300
thousand
sheets
BS-SL-F
BS-SL-R
SP-CLAW
DVG-CYL
DVG-ROLL
TR-BLT
TR-ROLL
T-CN-BRU
T-CLN-BD
Expected
life*
Remarks
As
Remove toner on the tray.
needed
50
Clean with lint-free paper moistened with water.
50
50
50
Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
As
needed
50
As
needed
As
needed
As
needed
50
Crumb toner clusters.

Apply lubricant at the Drum Sliding Assembly when
abnormal sound is heard at the time of operation.
Using lint-free paper, clean the drum with the drum
cleaning powder (FY9-6024).
Clean with lint-free paper moistened
Process Unit Rear Guide
50
Developing Roller
50
50
As
needed
50

Remove toner which was scattered at removal of
Developing Assembly.
ETB Idler Roller
50
Waste Toner Container
50
Clean when the message is displayed.
Lower side of Cylinder.

The host machine surface below
the Developing Assembly
ETB Drive Roller
T-2-48
T-2-47

**: In a high temperature/humidity environment (30 deg C/80%), it is 500000 sheets
Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Periodical Servicing List
2-88
Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > When Replacing Parts

When replacing the Periodically Replaced Parts and Consumable Parts, be sure to clear the
Parts Counter (COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1/DRBL-1)
2-89
CAUTION:
Be sure to adjust the dark side (density of the test print image) to be the light side.

see "Replacing the Primary Charging Wire," on p. 4-103.
1) Clear the parts counter. (COPIER>COUNTER>PRDC-1>PRM-WIRE)
2) Clean the Charging Wire. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>WIRE-CLN)
3) Init of Primary Charging Wire current VL(COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>PRI-GRID)
4) Execute the potential control (COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>DPC). Turn OFF and then ON
the main power. (The potential control is executed at startup.)
5) Execute the potential control. (COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>DPC)
6) Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch.

see "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly," on p. 4-96.
1) Output a halftone image using the service mode.
TEST > PG > TYPE : 5
2) Execute the following procedure according to the density difference on the front and rear
sides of the test print image.
When the front side test print image is dark, execute step 3.
When the rear side test print image is dark, execute step 4.
When there is no uneven density, execute step 5 and the following.
When the front side test print image is dark
NOTE:
When the front side test print image is dark [1], execute step 3 until the density
becomes even. When the density becomes even, execute step 5 and the following.
When the adjustment screw is turned clockwise, the Charging Wire goes down and
up (gap between grid and Charging Wire becomes narrow and wide). As a result, the
density of output image becomes light.
2-89
2
3)
Make the resin screws [A] and [C] a full turn clockwise. While referring to the
2-90
When the rear side test print image is dark
replacement procedure of the Primary Charging Assembly, install it to the main body, output
NOTE:
a test print and check the image.

CAUTION:
Since uneven density might occur, be sure to adjust by turning the 2 adjustment
screws with the same amount.
When the rear side test print image is dark [2], execute step 4 until the density
[1]
CAUTION:
4) Make the resin screws [B] and [D] a full turn clockwise. While referring to the replacement
procedure of the Primary Charging Assembly, install it to the main body, output a test print
and check the image.
[C]
[A]
F-2-108
2-90
2-91
CAUTION:

see "Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly," on p. 4-107.
1) Clear the parts counter. (COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1>PO-UNIT)
[2]

see "Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire," on p. 4-111.
1) Clear the parts counter. (COPIER>COUNTER>PRDC-1>PO-WIRE)
[D]
[B]
F-2-109
5) Clean the Charging Wire using the service mode.

(FUNCTION > CLAENING > WIRE-CLN) Time required: Approx. 30 sec.
7) Execute the potential control. (COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>DPC
8) Execute the density correction using the user mode.
("Settings/Registration" > "Adjustment/Maintenance" > "Adjust Image Quality" > "Correct
Density")
2-91
Drum
2-92
4) Affix the ID Label included in the drum to the inside of the Front Cover.

see "Removing the Photosensitive Drum," on p. 4-122.
1) Remove the EEROM.
1 Screw
1 Connector
F-2-111
5) Activate the drum replacement mode. (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>DRM-INIT)

6) Check the 2-dimensional shading ROM. (COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>2D-READ)
6) Execute Auto Adjust Gradation.
F-2-110
3) Replace the ROM connected to the host machine with the drum ROM included in the drum.
CAUTION:
If the ROM is not replaced, the replaced drum and the drum-unique data stored in the
ROM are not matched. As a result, the 2D shading is not functioned normally.
2-92
Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Major Adjustments
2-93
Drum Side Seals(Front and Rear)
ETB
see "Removing the Side Seal," on p. 4-127.
see "Removing the ETB Unit," on p. 4-137.
see "Removing the ETB," on p. 4-139.
1) Applying Tospearl
Apply Tospearl on the surfaces of the Drum Side Seals (Front and Rear) and adhere it
uniformly with lint-free paper. In order to reduce adhesion of toner at both ends of the
1) Clear the ETB control counter. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>TR-BLT)

Parts counter (COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1>TR-BLT) is also cleared coincidentally.
Photosensitive Drum
Tospearl

see "Removing the Waste Toner Container," on p. 4-145.
1) Set the new Waste Toner Container.
2) Clear the waste toner counter. (COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>WST-TNR)
Major Adjustments
None
Sheet
lint-free paper
F-2-112
Developing Assembly, Developing Cylinder

see "Removing the Developing Assembly," on p. 4-128.
1) Clear the parts counter. (COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1>DVG-CYL)
2) Supplying Developing Assembly toner. (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>TONER-S)
Potential Control PCB Unit

see "Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit," on p. 4-166.
1) Adjust the Potential Sensor offset. (COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > OFST)
Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Major Adjustments
2-93
Technology > Image Formation System > Servicing > Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Trailing Edge Shock Imaget
2-94
[Image Sample]
Feed direction
<Shock image located approx. 63mm

from the trailing edge>
[Location]
ETB
55mm
[Cause]
Lines occur on the image due to shock when distortion on the belt is released while rotation
speed between the ETB and drum differs
[Condition]
When replacing the ETB
[Field Remedy]
1) Output a halftone image with the following conditions and check the output image
COPIER>TEST>PG>TYPE 6
Select the cassette which the following paper is set: COPIER>TEST>PG>PG-PICK A3
(LDR) or larger.

63mm
With shock image: go to step 2

Without shock image: End
2) Measure a distance from the trailing edge of the shock image.
3) Adjust using the following service mode. COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > TBLT-SPD:
Adjust the Transfer Belt speed
Shock image is located approx. 55mm from the trailing edge: Adjust the value by +10
gradually.
Shock image is located approx. 63mm from the trailing edge: Adjust the value by -10
gradually
F-2-113
4) Output a halftone image with the condition described in step 1 again and check the image.
With shock image: go to step 3.
2-94
Uneven density correction by 2D shading

To correct uneven image density caused by uneven potential on the surface of the Drum.
NOTE:
This machine performs two dimensional shading which replaces uneven potential of
the Photosensitive Drum to the exposure amount to correct. (Default: two dimensional
shading is disabled.) As the data of Drums uneven potential, the data measured at the
shipment of the Drum is used.
2-95
3) Output a halftone image with the following conditions and check if uneven density occurs.
(LDR) or larger.
When uneven density is seen: Go to step 4.
When uneven density is not seen: Procedure is ended.
CAUTION:
This adjustment is executed when the preferred image is not output even if the Primary
Charging Wire height adjustment and secure watermark adjustment * are performed.
* Secure watermark adjustment: Function Settings>Common>Print Settings>Secure
Watermark Settings>Adjust Background/Character Contrast
1) Check that the two dimensional shading is enabled.

COPIER>OPTION>IMG-LSR>2D-SHADE 1: Enabled
F-2-114
4) Output a test pattern for two dimensional shading.

COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>SHD-P1
CAUTION:
Be sure to turn OFF and then ON the main power switch after step 1. Uneven density
may be reduced by the two dimensional shading correction at the startup.
4-1) Set the cassette.Select the cassette which A3 (LDR) or larger paper is set.
Select "SHD-P1" and cassette using "numeric keypad".
4-2) Output 3 sheets of the test pattern.
F-2-115
2-95
2-96
5) Check (T-shaped) halftone area of the output test print visually and adjust the area of
CAUTION:
It is difficult to judge whether uneven potential of the Photosensitive Drum causes
uneven density of the output image, so output 3 sheets of the test print and adjust the
area where all 3 sheets have the same symptom.
(If the same symptom is seen on the same spot of all 3 sheets, it is possibly caused
from the Drum.)
uneven density.
5-1) Take a note to write down the values of the following service mode.
When the adjustment cannot be performed appropriately, these values are required to
return to the initial values.
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>M-LINE1 (Level 2)
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>S-LINE1 (Level 2)
<Test pattern>
5-2) Adjust the target horizontal scanning direction (A to O) which uneven density is seen.
After selecting "M-LINE1/M-LINE2", select the target horizontal scanning window (A to
O), and enter the numerical value using "numerical keypad".
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>M-LINE1 (Level 2) Horizontal scanning direction A
to H
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>M-LINE2 (Level 2) Horizontal scanning direction I
to O
CAUTION:
Be sure to switch the screen after entering the value. Unless the screen is switched,
the numerical value is not reflected. (Actually, the value is not reflected on the
screen, but it is retained internally.)
When the horizontal scanning direction (H line) is adjusted, the adjustment value of
the vertical scanning direction (1 to 27) is also changed.
As the value is larger, the density becomes lighter. As the value is smaller, the
density becomes darker.
Enter the adjustment value in a unit of +/- 30 gradually, output the test pattern
and make adjustment while checking the test pattern. If the value is changed
dramatically, the image error (while line) may occur.
F-2-116
NOTE:
For the test print, the following 3 types can be output, but basically set SHD-P1 to
output. The following shows the use case of each test print.
: When the image which uneven density occurs is the halftone image with light density
: When the image which uneven density occurs is the halftone image with dark density
: In case of the secure watermark image with uneven density
Be sure to make adjustment in order of horizontal and vertical scanning directions. If

the adjustment is executed in the inverse order, it may not be executed correctly.
Entering 96 or larger value can generate an error in potential control (E061).
In the case of an error, adjust the setting value between 0 and 95
2-96
2-97
5-3) After the adjustment, output a test print and check the image.
5-4) Adjust the target vertical scanning direction (1 to 27) which uneven density is seen.
When uneven density is seen: Go to 5-3).
After selecting "S-LINE1 to 4", select the target vertical scanning window (1 to 27),
and enter the numerical value using "numerical keypad".

COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>S-LINE1 (Level 2) Vertical scanning direction 1 to
8
16
24
32
CAUTION:
Be sure to switch the screen after entering the value. Unless the screen is switched,
the numerical value is not reflected. (Actually, the value is not reflected on the
screen, but it is retained internally.)
When the vertical scanning direction (25 and 26 lines) is adjusted, the adjustment
value of the horizontal scanning direction (A to P) is also changed.
As the value is larger, the density becomes lighter. As the value is smaller, the density
becomes darker.
Enter the adjustment value in a unit of +/- 30 gradually, output the test pattern and
Not Use
make adjustment while checking the test pattern. If the value is changed dramatically,
the image error (while line) may occur.
F-2-117
2-97
2-98
Separation Failure Jam due to Deformation of Separation Claw
5-5) After the adjustment, output a test print and check the image to complete the
procedure.
[Location]
CAUTION:
If the image cannot be adjusted correctly even with this adjustment procedure, reenter
the values written in step 5-1.
[Cause]
When the paper enters to the drum at separation failure, the Separation Claw may be
deformed. When the Separation Claw is deformed, the paper is easily caught by the leading
edge of the Separation Claw when the paper (especially curled paper) is fed, and a jam (Jam
Code: 0205) is likely to occur.
F-2-119
[Condition]
Job after a jam which occurs when the paper enters to the drum
When using curled paper (when using backside of printed paper, etc.)
[Field Remedy]
Replace the Separation Claw.
Not Use
NOTE:
Replace the Separation Claw when a separation failure jam occurs even once..
F-2-118
2-98
2-99
Uneven density
[Cause]
OR
Uneven density occurs on the image because of uneven developing performance or change
Feed Direction
in drum characteristics due to wear.
F-2-121
[Field Remedy]
In the case of dark/light image at either the left or right side on the image in horizontal
direction, adjust height of the Primary Charging Wire and check the output result. When
Start the field remedy
Is it straight uneven density?
making adjustment, execute the work while keeping the wire at dark area apart.
YES
OR
NO
Adjust developing bias
COPIER > ADJUST > VCONT > DE-OFST
Feed Direction
Adjust height of the Primary Charging Wire
(Set the dark area apart)
F-2-122
If it is not a straight uneven density, change the value of the following service mode in
decrement of -10 and check the output result.
Is it fixed?
(Setting value: default 0, -10, -20, -50)
YES
NO
CAUTION :
Enable 2D shading
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR > 2D-SHADE; ON
Is it fixed?
Executing the above setting can generate smeared image or foggy image.
After switching the mode to enable 2D shading in the following service mode, turn OFF/ON
YES
the main power and check the output result.

(For detailed procedure, see Troubleshooting > Uneven density correction by 2D shading >
NO
Step 1) to 3) (Refer to page 6-7)

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR > 2D-SHADE Setting value: 1 (ON)
Execute 2D shading individual correction
Output the test pattern for 2D shading and adjust the uneven density area individually.
Field remedy is complete
F-2-120
2-99
2-100
Smeared image
[Image]
[Cause]
Feed Direction
Excess toner is transferred on the paper that causes toner collapse at the time of fixing, which
can generate smeared image on the image. The following are assumed causes of smeared
image:
< Smeared Image >
When the paper type is changed

Toner deterioration
Rapid change in environment (High temperature <- -> Low temperature)
[Field Remedy]
Side Line
Execute Auto Adjust Gradation
Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance >
Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation
Is it fixed?
F-2-124
Select the following: Settings/Registration > Adjustment Maintenance > Adjust Image > Auto
Adjust Gradation; and check the output result.
1) COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT > VL-OFST; set the value of VL-OFST to 10
YES
2) Select the following: COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC; execute DPC and then check the
output result.
NO
3) If the symptom is not improved, further increase the value in step 1) to 20, 30and then
Reduce the density

COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT>VL-OFST; reduce the value of VL-OFST
COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC; Execute DPC
execute step 2).

CAUTION :
Changing the above setting can cause reduced density or thinner line
Is the density/line width fixed

within the acceptable range?
YES
If the smeared image is not improved within the acceptable range for density and line width,
execute skipping process in the following procedure:
NO
1) COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > RAG-SW; change the value to 1
2) COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > RAG-CONT; change to 1 and check the output result.
Execute skipping processing (within the acceptable range for density/line width)
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > RAG-SW; set 1
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > RAG-CONT; set 1 to 3
Check the image
3) If the symptom is not improved, change the value in step 2) to 2, 3and check the output
result.
CAUTION :
Complete
Changing the above setting can cause minor skipping in the text part.
F-2-123
2-100
2-101
2-101
Technology > Fixing > Overview > Characteristics
2-102
Fixing
<IH (Induction Heating) method>

Supplying high frequency current to the coil inside the Heater Unit generates a high
frequency magnetic field around the coil. By this magnetic field, an eddy current (induction
Overview
current) runs through the Fixing Roller and the Fixing Roller generates electricity by itself.
Characteristics
Flux
High-frequency
current
1) IH heating method
This machine uses the IH heating method. This method enables to shorten the warm-up
Magnetic material
(Ferrite Core)
time and high-speed printing.

Coil
Fixing Roller
Exciting Coil
Metal
Exothermic
heat
Core
Eddy current
F-2-126
2) Making the Fixing Assembly as a unitt

Maintenance performance has been improved by separating the Fixing Unit from the Host
Paper
Machine to be assigned as a unit.

3) Saving energy
Pressure roller
Improved toner allows reduction of fixing temperature that enables less energy
consumption.
F-2-125
Technology > Fixing > Overview > Characteristics
2-102
Technology > Fixing > Overview > Parts configuration
2-103
Specifications
Item
Parts configuration
Function/method
Fixing method
Fixing Heater
Fixing Roller
Pressure Roller
Control temperature
IH fixing method
IH heater
O/D: 40mm
O/D: 38mm
(Japanese model)
imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075/6065:
To be reduced accordingly from 185 deg C (17 deg or more of
environment temperature at standby)
To be reduced accordingly from 190 deg C (less than 17 deg C of
imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6055:
(Non-Japanese model)
Switching the print speed and warm-up speed (low speed)
Fixing drive control
Thermistor
Main Thermistor (contact type)
The center of the Fixing Roller, Reciprocating width: 12mm
Temperature control, Failure detection
Sub Thermistor (contact type)The rear of the Fixing Roller, No reciprocation
Failure detection
Shutter Thermistor(contact type)
The rear of the Fixing Roller, No reciprocation
Failure detection,Shutter Control
Thermal Switch
1 pc. (non-contact type)
Protective function
Yes (detection by the Thermistor and the Thermal Switch)
Separation mechanism Upper Separation Claw: contact type, Reciprocating width: 3mm
Static Eliminator
Fixing Roller/ Pressure Roller/Shutter
Cleaning mechanism Fixing Cleaning Web
Inlet guide height
No
control
Bias application
No
Control to prevent
control of heating area by flux blocking plate (shutter)
temperature rise at the
edge
Disengagement
No
mechanism
idle rotation during
Yes
standby
Other controls
See Controls described later.
T-2-49
Technology > Fixing > Overview > Parts configuration
Cross-section view
Fixing Cleaning
Web takeup roller
Fixing Cleaning
Web feed roller
Fixing Cleaning Web
Fixing Cleaning
Web roller
Heater Unit
Fixing Roller
Static eliminator
Shutter Static
eliminator2
Shutter Static
eliminator1
Upper
separation claw
coil, core
Fixing Roller
Fixing inlet guide
Pressure roller
Static eliminator
Pressure roller
F-2-127
Parts name
Fixing Roller
Pressure Roller
Heater Unit
Coil Core
Fixing Cleaning Web
Fixing Cleaning Web Roller
Fixing Cleaning Web Take-up
Roller
Fixing Cleaning Web Feed Roller
Upper Separation Claw
Fixing Inlet Guide

Fixing Roller Static Eliminator
Pressure Roller Static Eliminator
Shutter Static Eliminator
Function/method
Heating toner and paper
Pressing and feeding paper
IH Heater
To heat the Fixing Roller
To remove residual toner on the surface of the Fixing Roller
To separate paper from the Fixing Roller (to prevent paperwrapping)

Reciprocating width: 3mm
Paper Feed Guide to the Fixing Assembly
To prevent leak, static offset and noise
T-2-50
2-103
Technology > Fixing > Overview > Drive configuration
2-104
Drive configuration
Thermistor, Thermal Switch

Flux blocking plate
(Shutter)
Fixing Cleaning Web

Level Sensor(PS45)
Fixing Cleaning
Web Drive Solenoid
SL9
M15
Fixing Sub Thermistor 1
(THM2)
M3
Fixing Shutter Motor
Fixing Motor

(THM3)
Shutter Gear
Fixing Inlet
Sensor(PS51)
Fixing Shutter
Home Position
Sensor(PS53)
Fixing Toenail
Jam Sensor(PS4)
Thermal Switch1(TP1)
Fixing Main
Thermistor(THM1)
Fixing Outlet
Sensor(PS52)
Fixing Roller
F-2-129
Fixing Shutter
Home Position
Sensor(PS53)
F-2-128
Code
Parts name
THM1
Fixing Main Thermistor
THM2
THM03 Fixing Sub Thermistor 2

TP1
Thermal Switch1
PS53
Fixing Shutter Home

Position Sensor
Function/method
Contact type
temperature control, failure detection
Contact type
failure detection,Shutter operation temperature detection
Contact type
failure detection,Shutter operation temperature detection
Non-Contact type (200 -/+ 5 deg C)
To prevent abnormal temperature rise
to detect shutter position
Fixing Outlet
Fixing Toenail Sensor(PS52)
Jam Sensor(PS4)
Fixing Cleaning Web Drive
Solenoid(SL9)
Fixing Shutter
Motor(M15)
Fixing Motor
(M3)
T-2-51
Fixing Inlet
Sensor(PS51)
Fixing Cleaning Web
Level Sensor(PS45)
Fixing Shutter
Home Position
Sensor(PS53)
F-2-130
2-104
2
Code
Parts name
Function/method
M3
Fixing Motor
To control drive of the Fixing Motor
M15
SL9

Fixing Cleaning Web Drive
Solenoid
Fixing Toenail Jam Sensor
To control drive of the Shutter

To control drive of the Cleaning Web
PS4
PS45
PS51
Fixing Cleaning Web Level

Sensor
Fixing Inlet Sensor
PS52
Fixing Outlet Sensor
PS53
Fixing Shutter Home Position

Sensor
2-105
To prevent scratches on Fixing Roller due to jam

To detect length of the Cleaning Web
To detect paper wrapping and stationary
to detect shutter position
T-2-52
2-105
Technology > Fixing > Controls > Fixing temperature control
2-106
Controls
Fixing temperature control

Overview
Overview
To prevent fixing failure, temperature control of the Fixing Roller is executed with the following
timing.
Cleaning Web
length detection
NO
Cleaning Web
drive control
Temperature control
Temperature control during

startup

standby
printing
Other temperature
adjustments
Thermistor
reciprocating control
Fixing temperature
control

The control to prevent

temperature rise
at the edge
(Shutter Control)
Overview
To control temperature to reach the standby temperature.
To be switched from the following 4 modes according to the
environment temperature/ humidity and the temperature of
the Fixing Roller:
Normal startup mode
Low temperature environment startup mode
High humidity environment startup mode
Recovery mode
To control temperature so that printing can be performed
immediately after receiving the print request signal
To control temperature by the temperature table according
to the paper type and the paper basis weight.
Following shows other temperature adjustments
To control temperature for reducing power consumption.
T-2-54
Control to prevent
paper-wrapping
Down sequence
control
Protective function
F-2-131
NO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Control/Function
Overview
Fixing temperature control
To control temperature of the Fixing Roller to prevent fixing

failure
Down sequence control
In the case of large difference between the target temperature
and the detected temperature, this control drops productivity
to prevent fixing failure and image failure.
Paper anti-wrapping control
To prevent failure of the Fixing Assembly caused by wrapping
of paper around the Fixing Roller and the Pressure Roller.
Shutter Control
To control the shutter position in order to prevent the
temperature rising at the edge.
Thermistor reciprocating
To prevent scar on the Fixing Roller by the Main Thermistor,
control
this control moves the Main Thermistor back and forth.
To prevent scar on the Fixing Roller by the Upper Separation
Claw, this control moves the Upper Separation Claw back and
forth.
Cleaning Web drive control
To prevent fixing offset, this control removes residual toner on
the surface of the Fixing Roller.
Cleaning Web level detection To detect level of the Cleaning Web.
Protective function
To detect error by Thermistor.
To detect error by Thermoswitch.
T-2-53
2-106
2-107
Temperature control during startup
<Low temperature environment startup mode>

After it reaches the target temperature, the target temperature is maintained until
Temperature is controlled to reach the standby temperature.
completion of the potential control, and then the machine enters ready state.
80
High humidity environment

startup mode
Environment humidity(%)
70
Conditions
Environment humidity
Environment
temperature
Less than 17
deg C
60
Fixing Roller
temperature
Target
temperature
70 deg C or less 195 deg C
Target
temperature
reaching time
75 sec
(reference value)
T-2-56
50
<High humidity environment startup mode>
Low temperature environment

startup mode
40
After it reaches the target temperature, the target temperature is maintained until
Normal startup mode
completion of developing idle rotation as well as completion of the potential control, and
30
then the machine enters ready state.
20
10
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
Environment temperature (deg C)
Conditions
Environment humidity
Environment
temperature
-
High humidity
environment(13g or more
of absolute moisture
content)
F-2-132
<Normal startup mode>

In the case of reaching the target temperature within 30 seconds due to quick temperature
rise of the Fixing Roller, the target temperature is maintained to be shifted to the ready
17 deg C or
more
Conditions
Environment
humidity
Low humidity
environment(within
13g of absolute
moisture content)
Fixing Roller
temperature
70 deg C or
less
Target
temperature
reaching time
70 deg C or less 185 deg C

75sec
<imageRUNNER (reference value)
ADVANCE
6055 Japanese
model:180 deg
C>
<Recovery mode>
Target
temperature
Japanese model
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
6055: 180 deg C
Target
temperature
reaching
time
30 sec
NOTE:
In the case of selecting the fixing improvement mode in the following service mode, the
machine does not enter the startup state for 30 seconds and waits until the specified
time.
COPIER> OPTION> BODY> FSPD-S1 :Selection of fixing improvement mode
The machine enters ready state once it reaches the target temperature.
Environment
temperature
-
T-2-55
Target
temperature
T-2-57
state once the potential control is completed.

Environment
temperature
Fixing Roller
temperature
Conditions
Environment
humidity
-
Target temperature
Fixing Roller
temperature
70 deg C or
more
Environment Temperature: 17
deg C or more
Japanese: 180 deg C
(imageRUNNER ADVANCE
6055: 175 deg C)
Non Japanese: 185 deg C
Target
temperature
reaching time
30 sec or less
Environment Temperature: less

than 17 deg C
Japanese: 190 deg C
Non Japanese: 195 deg C
T-2-58
2-107
2-108
Temperature Control for Standby
The control temperature depends on the environment temperature/country. The details on the
control temperature are shown below.
To provide measures against temperature rise of the coil/Main Body and save energy
consumption, the target temperature is reduced step by step on a specified time basis until it
reaches a certain temperature.
Normal environment 17 degC or higher

Destination
Fixing Roller
temperature(deg C)
Model
0 to 1
Japanese

mageRUNNER ADVANCE 6065
Non Japanese imageRUNNER ADVANCE
6075/6065/6055
190
185
185
180
190
Time (minute)
1 to 5
5 to 10
180
180
175
185
175
175
170
180
10 and
longer
170
170
170
175
T-2-59
185
Low temperature environment Lower than 17 degC
180
Destination
Model
0 to 5
Time (minute)
5 to 10
10 to 20
20 and
longer
Japanese
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
6075/6065/6055
190
185
180
175
Non Japanese
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
6075/6065/6055
195
190
185
180
T-2-60
10
Time(min)
F-2-133
NOTE:
When restoring from the recovery mode, temperature control is conducted from the
2nd line of temperature control table.
2-108
2-109
Temperature control during printing
Normal environment 17 degC or higher

Time (minute)
The target temperature is reduced step by step on a specified time basis until it reaches a
Destination
certain temperature.
This control reduces energy consumption to prevent temperature rise of the Fixing Roller.
Fixing Roller
temperature(deg C)
Japanese
Model
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
6075/6065
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE 6055
195
190
Non Japanese imageRUNNER

ADVANCE 6075
185

ADVANCE
6065/6055
Paper Type
Plain paper
Heavy paper
Bond paper
Thin paper
Plain paper
Heavy paper
Bond paper
Thin paper
Plain paper
Heavy paper
Bond paper
Thin paper
Plain paper
Heavy paper
Bond paper
Thin paper
0 to 1
1 to 5
5 to 10
10 and
longer
190
195
205
160
185
190
205
160
198
198
208
163
198
193
208
163
185
195
205
160
180
190
205
160
193
198
208
163
193
193
208
163
180
195
205
160
175
190
205
160
188
198
208
163
188
193
208
163
175
195
205
160
175
190
205
160
183
193
208
163
183
193
208
163
T-2-62
Low temperature environment Lower than 17 degC

Time (minute)
Destination
10
Time(min)
F-2-134
The control temperature depends on the environment temperature/country/paper type. The
Japanese
Model
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE 6075
details on the control temperature are shown below.

imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
6065/6055
NOTE:
The following is the details of paper types shown in the following tables.
Paper type
A
Detail
Paper weight (g/m2)
Plain paper, recycled paper, color paper, pre-punched

64 to 90
paper
Heavy paper (plain paper, recycled paper, color paper,
91 to 256
pre-punched paper)
Transparency, label paper, tracing paper, tab paper,
All paper weight
postcard
Bond paper
All paper weight
Thin paper (plain paper, recycled paper, color paper,
52 to 63
pre-punched paper)
C
D

ADVANCE 6075
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
6065/6055
Paper Type
Plain paper
Heavy paper
Bond pape
Thin paper
Plain paper
Heavy paper
Bond paper
Thin paper
Plain paper
Heavy paper
Bond pape
Thin paper
Plain paper
Heavy paper
Bond paper
Thin paper
0 to 5
5 to 10
10 to 20
20 and
longer
195
200
210
170
195
195
210
170
203
203
213
173
203
198
213
173
190
200
210
170
190
195
210
170
198
203
213
173
198
198
213
173
185
200
210
170
185
195
210
170
193
203
213
173
193
198
213
173
180
195
210
170
180
195
210
170
188
198
213
173
188
198
213
173
T-2-63
T-2-61
2-109
2-110
Other temperature adjustments
Related Error Code
<Energy Saver mode>
E000: Fixing Assembly low temperature error
By pressing the energy saver key on the Control Panel, energy consumption is reduced by
E001: Fixing Assembly high temperature error
reducing the control temperature when the Fixing Unit is at standby state according to the
E002: Fixing Assembly temperature rise error
energy saving rate.
E003: Fixing Assembly temperature decrease error

E004: Fixing Power Supply error
NOTE:
To be recovered to the normal mode according to the recovery mode.
CAUTION:
NOTE:
The energy saving rate can be changed from "Settings/Registration > Preferences >
Timer/Energy Settings > Change Energy Saver Mode".
(Default: -10%)
When any of the above Error Codes, E000 to E0004, is displayed, the error code
display will not be cleared even though the Main Power Switch is turned OFF. In
such a case, cancel the error by the following service mode and turn OFF and then
ON the power.
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR:Clear of error code
<Low power mode>

To save energy, in the case that no operation has been executed for a certain period of time,
this machine is automatically to be in Low Energy Mode. Power distribution to the Fixing Unit
is turned OFF in Low Energy Mode.
NOTE:
To be recovered to the normal mode according to the temperature control at warm-up.
Related Service Mode

Selection of fixing improvement mode
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FX> FSPD-S1
Setting of paper wrinkle prevention mode
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> FX-WNKL
NOTE:
The time to change to the low power mode can be changed from "Settings/Registration
> Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Auto Sleep Time".
(Default: 1 min.)
2-110
Technology > Fixing > Controls > Down sequence control
Down sequence control
2-111
Control description
This control has the 3 types of down sequences according to the execution timing.
Overview
In the case of great difference between the target temperature and the detected temperature
at the start of printing or during printing, productivity is dropped to prevent fixing failure or
image failure.
1) In the case of decrease in fixing temperature (during printing)

When the fixing temperature drops during the job, the productivity is dropped or the job is
stopped to prevent fixing failure.
<Plain Paper>
Execution timing
During printing
At the start of printing and when the paper type is switched
When the environment temperature is 17 deg C or higher, the fixing temperature of

100% productivity remains, so the down sequence does not start. When the environment
temperature is lower than 17 deg C, it may start down sequence.
NOTE:
When the print temperature is reduced by the service mode although the environment
temperature is 17 deg C or higher, the down sequence may be started.
<Heavy paper>
Right after the startup (including restoration from the sleep mode), a whole Fixing Assembly
is not warm enough, so the down sequence may be started. However, as printing continues
sequentially, the temperature of the Fixing Assembly is increased and reaches to the
temperature of the 100% productivity
Productivity(%)
Reference value
100%
Heavy paper
85%
Plain paper
70%
Stop
50
150
Sheets
F-2-135
2-111
2-112
2) When printing is started and the paper type is switched

Because fixing temperature differs according to the paper type, switching the paper type
causes downtime.
Up to 60 seconds downtime is expected with this machine (switching from heavy paper to
thin paper). The following shows estimated downtime.
pattern of paper type
switching
downtime
(reference
value)
Plain paper -> Heavy paper

Thin paper -> Heavy paper
Heavy paper -> Plain paper
5 sec
10 sec
-
Heavy paper -> Thin paper

Bond paper -> Heavy paper
Bond paper -> Plain paper
60 sec
-
Bond paper -> Thin paper

Thin paper -> Bond paper
Plain paper -> Bond paper
Heavy paper -> Bond paper
60 sec
80 sec
30 sec
10 sec

To change temperature threshold of down sequence with special paper
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FX> FIX-TEMP
0 : Fixing priority, 1: Normal, 2: Productivity priority
Set fixing/productivity: Plain paper A3+
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FX>FIX-TMP2
Remarks
Set fixing/productivity: Spcl ppr A3+
Switching the temperature control is conducted,

but print operation continues, so downtime does
not occur.
Switching the temperature control is conducted,
but print operation continues, so downtime does
not occur.
-
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FX>FIX-TMP3

Curl reduction modes
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FX> TEMP-TBL2: to change control temperature for thin paper
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FX> TEMP-TBL: to change control temperature for plain paper
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FX> TEMP-TBL3: to change control temperature for heavy paper
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FX> TEMP-TBL4: to change control temperature for bond paper
T-2-64
2-112
Technology > Fixing > Controls > Shutter Control
2-113
Shutter Control
The shutter is set in the home position when printing is completed.

< Home Position (HP)>
Overview
To prevent image failure and reduction in productivity caused by temperature rise at the edge,
this machine introduces the Shutter (to shield magnetic flux; nonmagnetic substance), so that
Shutter
position of the Shutter is controlled according to the detected temperature of the edge.
Execution timing
When reaching the detection temperature of Sub Thermistor (THM2) and Shutter
Thermistor (THM3) to the Shutter operation temperature
When printing is completed
Control description
By rotating the Shutter Motor (M15) for the specified amount, the Shutter is set in the
specified position. There are cut-offs on the circumference of the Shutter Drive Gear (front)
which is engaged with the Shutter. Detection of this cut-offs by the Shutter HP Sensor (PS53)
F-2-137
< Position for middle paper size>

Shutter
determines whether the Shutter is set in the specified position.

Shutter drive gear (rear)
Drive axis
Shutter
Fixing Shutter Motor(M15)
Shutter drive gear (front)
Cut-off
(for medium-size
paper detection)
Shutter drive
gear (front)
F-2-138
<Position for small paper size>

Shutter
Fixing Shutter
Home Position
Sensor(PS53)
Cut-off
(for HP detection)
Cut-off
(for small-size
paper detection)
Fixing Shutter Home Position Sensor(PS53)

F-2-136
The shutter is set in any of the specified positions during printing according to the paper size
and detected temperature of the Thermistor.
F-2-139
Technology > Fixing > Controls > Shutter Control
2-113
Technology > Fixing > Controls > Paper Anti-wrapping Control
Related Error Code

IH Shutter Motor error
E840-0001: When the Shutter failed to be moved to the specified position (failed to be at
normal state) despite 3-times retry operation
2-114
Paper Anti-wrapping Control
Overview
With this control, failure of the Fixing Assembly caused by paper wrapping around the Fixing
Roller and the Pressure Roller is prevented.
Paper
Fixing Roller
Fixing Outlet Sensor(PS52)
Fixing Inlet Sensor(PS51)
F-2-140
Technology > Fixing > Controls > Paper Anti-wrapping Control
2-114
Technology > Fixing > Controls > Thermistor reciprocating control
Control description
In the case of delay jam at the fixing outlet, the DC Controller determines paper wrapping if
the paper remains in the Fixing Assembly and executes the following.
The brake is applied to the Fixing Motor to immediately stop operation of the Fixing Motor (to
minimize the paper wrapping level)
Power distribution to the coil is stopped (to ensure safety).
A jam is displayed.(Jam Code:0111)
Cleaning of the Fixing Roller is executed (5 times of web cleaning)
2-115
Thermistor reciprocating control
To prevent scar on the Fixing Roller detected by the Fixing Main Thermistor (THM01) and
Fixing Sub Thermistror2 (THM3),
the Fixing Main Thermistor and Fixing Sub Thermistror2 are moved back and forth by 12mm
in the shaft direction of the Fixing Roller.
The drive of the Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid (SL09) is transmitted to the
Reciprocating Cam.
Fixing Cleaning
Web Drive SL9
Solenoid
NOTE:
Paper presence in the Fixing Assembly is determined by the paper detection log with
the Fixing Inlet Sensor (to see whether the paper passes through the Sensor).

(THM1)
(THM3)
mm
12
mm
12
Fixing Roller
F-2-141
Technology > Fixing > Controls > Thermistor reciprocating control
2-115
Technology > Fixing > Controls > Cleaning web drive control
2-116
Upper separation claw reciprocating control
Cleaning web drive control
To prevent scar on the Fixing Roller by the Upper Separation Claw, the Upper Separation
To prevent fixing offset, the residual toner on the surface of the Fixing Roller is removed with
Claw is moved back and forth by 3mm in the direction of the Fixing Roller.
the Cleaning Web.

Cleaning Web
mm
Fixing Cleaning
Web roller
Fixing Cleaning
Web feed roller
SL9
Fixing Cleaning
Web Drive Solenoid
M3
Fixing Motor
Upper separation claw Unit

Upper separation claw
Fixing Cleaning
Web takeup roller
F-2-142
F-2-143
The take-up length of the Cleaning Web is determined by the paper size and the number of
sheets (in 1 job).
Paper size
1st sheet
Small
1-time
The size with less than 220mm length in
feeding direction (LTR or less)
Middle
1-time
The size between 237mm and 364mm in
feeding direction (B5R to LGL/B4)
Large
2-time
The size with 220mm or more length in
feeding direction (B5R or more)
2nd sheet
3rd sheet
1-time
0-time
1-time
1-time
1-time
1-time
4th sheet or
later
Repeat
wrapping
amount of the
1st to the 3rd
sheet
T-2-65
When the paper is stationed in the Fixing Unit due to a jam or an error, the Fixing Web Drive
Solenoid is turned ON for 5 times at the time of recovery.
Technology > Fixing > Controls > Cleaning web drive control
2-116
Technology > Fixing > Controls > Cleaning web length detection
Related Error Code

Error in connection of the Fixing Web Solenoid
005-0001

To switch the number of times to turn ON the Fixing Web Drive Solenoid
COPIER > OPTION > BODY > CBLTINVL
2-117
Cleaning web length detection
When the length of the Cleaning Web is reduced, the Web Level Detection Arm is moved in
the direction of the arrow to block the light path of the Fixing Cleaning Web Level Detection
Sensor (PS45). When the Fixing Web Drive Solenoid has been turned ON for 4 times after
the detection by this sensor, a fixing web length warning message is displayed on the Control
Panel.
0: Normal [default]
1: 1.5 times of the normal mode
Web length detecting arm
Fixing Cleaning Web takeup roller

Fixing Cleaning Web Level Sensor(PS45)
F-2-144
After the display of the fixing web length warning message, the number of turning ON the
Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid is to be counted.
The Error Code E005-0000 is displayed once the counter value reaches 2000 (3000 sheets
of copy/print in A4 size)
In the case of replacing the Fixing Cleaning Web, be sure to clear the Fixing Web
Counter by the following Service Mode
Fixing Cleaning Web take-up counter after the level warning
COPIER >COUNTER >MISC >FIX-WEB
Fixing Cleaning Web take-up counter
COPIER >COUNTER >DRBL-1>FX-WEB
Related Error Code

Error in absence of the Fixing Web
E005-0000:After the advance notice detection for the absence of the Fixing Web, the
web has continued to be pulled for 2000 times.
Technology > Fixing > Controls > Cleaning web length detection
2-117
Technology > Fixing > Controls > Protective function
2-118
Protective function
Detecting an Error Using the Thermistor
In the event of the following, the machine will set the DC power (12 V) used to drive the AC
relay (found on the fixing heater power supply PCB), thereby stopping
the AC power to the fixing heater.
the main thermistor (THM1)/sub thermistor2 (THM3) has detected overheating.
the difference between temperature of each thermistors has deviated from a specific value.
Detecting an Error Using the Thermal Switch

In response to a deviation in temperature (200 +/-5 deg C), bimetal contact of the thermal
switch (TP1; non-contact type) will open to cut the power supply line
(12 V) used to drive the AC relay on the fixing heater power supply PCB, thereby stopping the
AC power to the fixing heater.
Technology > Fixing > Controls > Protective function
2-118
Technology > Fixing > Servicing > Periodical Servicing List
2-119
Servicing

Parts/Area
Name

No
1
2
Parts name
Main Thermistor
Unit
Sub Thermistor
Parts Number
Piece
FK2-7692-000
FK2-7693-000
Expected
life
500,000
sheets
500,000
sheets
Remarks
Main Thermistor + Sub
Thermistor2
T-2-66
Consumable Parts
No
1
2
3
4
5
6
Parts name
Fixing Cleaning
Web
Fixing Roller
Fixing Roller
Insulating Bush
Pressure Roller
Pressure Roller
Static Eliminator
Fixing Roller
Thurust Retainer
Upper separation
claw
Parts Number
Piece
FY1-1157-000
FC9-9163-000
FC9-8069-000
FM4-3160
FC7-4287-000
FC6-3501-000
FB5-3625-000
Expected
life
500,000
sheets
500,000
sheets
500,000
sheets
500,000
sheets
500,000
sheets
500,000
sheets
Remarks
Fixing inlet guide

Fixing Right Stay
Dowel
Dowel Holder
Fixing oil pan
Fixing Cleaning
Web guide
Upper separation
claw
Fixing inlet
Sensor Flag
Inner Delivery
Roller
Piece
Operation
Interval
1
1
4
4
1
1
Remarks
Dry wipe
500,000
sheets
Dry wipe

T-2-68
When the fixing roller thrust

retainer replaced, the fixing
roller must be replaced, as
well.
500,000
sheets
T-2-67
Technology > Fixing > Servicing > Periodical Servicing List
2-119
Technology > Fixing > Servicing > When Replacing Parts
2-120

Fixing Roller
see "Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper," on p. 4-186.
1) Grease Application
Apply approx. 20mg of grease (MOLYKOTE HP-300; CK-8012) to inner circumference and
outer circumference of the Bushing so that all circumferences are covered with white film;
otherwise, abnormal noise can occur (squeaking).
2) Clear the counter
COPIER >COUNTER > DRBL-1 > FX-UP-RL
Main Thermistor, Sub Thermistor2

Clear the counter
COPIER >COUNTER > PRDC-1 >FIX-TH1
Sub Thermistor1
Clear the counter
COPIER >COUNTER > PRDC-1 >FIX-TH2
Technology > Fixing > Servicing > When Replacing Parts
2-120
Technology > Fixing > Servicing > Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Paper wrinkle
<Location>
Fixing Roller, Pressure Roller
<Cause>
Right after the startup, temperature is different between the center and the edge of the
Fixing Roller (temperature: center > edge).
Because a slippery solid black image does not match to the nip shape when it is fed, the
center of paper is pulled toward the feeding direction, causing paper wrinkle.
<Condition>
Timing: Approx. 20 sheets immediately after the startup first time for the day
Paper size: Paper size larger than B4
<Field Remedy>
If 2 is set, control temperature is increased by performing idle rotation when printing to
A3/LDR or larger size paper at the start of printing in a normal humidity/high humidity
environment. Paper wrinkle which occurs at this time can be decreased, but first copy time
becomes longer. In other cases, idle rotation is not performed.
2-121
Checking nip width
In the case of paper wrinkle or fixing failure, check that the fixing nip width is within the
specified range. Note that the fixing nip width of this equipment cannot be adjusted in the
field.
1) Print approx. 20 sheets of A4 size paper.
2) Set A4 size plain paper/recycled paper on the Multi-purpose Tray.
3) COPIER > Function > FIXING > NIP-CHK
A sheet is stopped once in a state held by the Fixing Nip area, and is delivered approx. 20
seconds later.
4) Measure the nip width of delivered sheet.
If the nip widths are as follow it is judged as normal: 5.0 to 6.0 mm at the center (b), and
difference between front (a) and rear (b) is within 0.5 mm.
In the case of failure, check if there are any damaged parts (*), and replace the damaged
parts (if any).
* Gear, Bearing, Fixing Roller, Pressure Roller and Fixing Assembly
Nip width
If paper wrinkle occurs on paper larger than B4, increase the setting value from 2 in
increments of 1 until paper wrinkle is alleviated.
Edge
If paper wrinkle occurs on B4 size paper, increase the setting value from 4 in increments of
1 until paper wrinkle is alleviated.

COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FX-WNKL
[Setting values]
0: OFF
1: OFF (Default)
2: When paper is A3/LDR or larger size paper in a normal humidity/high humidity
environment, idle rotation is performed for up to 10 seconds.
Center

4: When paper is B4 or larger size paper in all environments, idle rotation is
performed for up to 10 seconds.
Edge
c
Paper feed direction
F-2-145
Technology > Fixing > Servicing > Troubleshooting
2-121
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Overview
2-122
Pickup / Feed System

Overview
Overview
: Forced Paper
Feed Control
: Paper path
: One Unit
Supported media (heavy paper) (52g/m2 -> 256g/m2)

This feature is enabled by making gentler curve of the pre-registration path, reverse path
and duplex merging path.
Improved jam processing performance
This feature is enabled by making the Fixing/Feed Assembly and the Duplex Assembly as
one unit as well as making the Delivery Unit and the Door of the Fixing Assembly as one
unit.
This feature is enabled by using forcible paper feed control that feeds paper to the position
where the jammed paper is easily removed in the case of paper jam.
Increased pickup capacity of the Multi-purpose Tray (50 sheets -> 100 sheets)
Simple retard method is used for pickup.
Stacking capacity has increased from 50 sheets to 100 sheets thanks to the pickup tray
that moves up and down.
Reduced noise
This feature is enabled by using a belt-type motor.
F-2-146
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Overview
2-122
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Specifications
2-123
Specifications
Item
Function/Method
Paper Storage
Method
Front Loading Method
Pickup Method
Separation Retard Method
Paper Feed Standard
Center
Paper Loading
Capacity
Left/Right Deck
1500 sheets (80 g/m2)
Cassette 3/4
550 sheets (80 g/m2)
Multi-purpose
Tray
100 sheets (80 g/m2)
Left/Right Deck
A4,B5,LTR
Cassette 3/4
A3,B4,A4,A4R,B5,B5R,A5R,8K(270.0 x
390.0mm),16K(270.0 x 195.0mm),LDR(279.4 x
431.8mm),LGL(215.9 x 355.6mm),LTR(279.4 x
215.9mm),LTRR(215.9 x 279.4mm),STMTR(139.7 x
215.9mm),EXE(267.0 x 184.0mm)
Multi-purpose
Tray
Size that can be loaded to cassette, Postcard, Reply

Postcard, 4 On 1 Postcard, Envelope,
Irregular size (100 x 148 mm to 330.2 x 431.8 mm)
Paper Size
Paper Grammage
Paper Size Switching
Left/Right Deck
52g/m2-220g/m2
Cassette 3/4
52g/m2-220g/m2
Multi-purpose
Tray
52g/m2-256g/m2 (Duplex printing 52g/m2-220g/m2)
Left/Right Deck
Service Switching
Cassette 3/4
Auto size detection
Multi-purpose
Tray
Depends on user
Paper Size Switching
Through path
Transparency
detection
Available
T-2-69
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Specifications
2-123
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Parts configuration
2-124
Parts configuration
PS52
PS No.
PS51
PS10 PS20 PS67 PS47 PS29 PS64 PS7
PS36
PS35
PS28
PS4
PS65
PS23
PS31
PS6
PS24
PS66
PS19
PS12
PS11
PS32
PS49
PS8
PS50
PS48
PS25
PS17
PS21
PS26
PS68
PS18
SW7
PS33
SW9
PS22
PS27
SW8
PS71
SW10
PS69
PS70 PS72
PS73 PS14 PS13

F-2-147
PS2
PS3
PS4
PS6
PS7
PS8
PS10
PS11
PS12
PS13/14
PS17/18
PS19
PS20
PS21
PS22
PS23
PS24*/PS25
PS26
PS27
PS28*
PS29*
PS31
PS32/PS33
PS35
PS36
PS47/48
PS49/50
PS51/PS52
PS64*
PS65*
PS66*
PS67*
PS68
PS69
PS70
PS71
PS72
PS73
SW7
SW8
SW9
SW10
Sensor No.
Vertical Path Cover Open/Close Sensor
Right Deck Paper Height Sensor
Right Deck Paper Sensor
Right Deck Upper Limit Sensor
Left Deck Paper Height Sensor
Left Deck Paper Sensor
Cassette 3 Paper Sensor / Cassette 4 Paper Sensor
Cassette 3 Paper Height Sensor / Cassette 4 Paper Height
Sensor
Right Deck Pull Out Sensor
Left Deck Pickup Sensor 2
Vertical Path Sensor3
Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor
Vertical Path Sensor1/Vertical Path Sensor2
Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor
Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor
Writing Gudging Sensor
Registration Sensor
Side Registration Sensor
Right Deck Pickup Sensor/Left Deck Pull Out Sensor
Inner Delivery Sensor
Outer Delivery Sensor
Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1/2
Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1/2
Fixing Inlet Sensor/Fixing Outlet Sensor
Duplex Outlet Sensor
Reverse Vertical Path Sensor
Duplex Left Sensor
Duplex Merging Sensor
Cassette 3 Upper Limit Sensor
Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 1
Cassette 3 Paper Width Detection Switch
Cassette 3 Paper Length Detection Switch
T-2-70
*Scanner Sensor
2-124
2-125
Roller
Fixing Roller
Duplex Merging Roller
Multi-purpose Tray Separation/Feed Roller
Registration Roller
Outer Delivery Roller

Reverse Inlet Roller
Inner Delivery Roller
Pressure roller
Reverse Upper Roller
Duplex Inlet Roller
Reverse Lower Roller
Duplex Left Roller
Left Deck Pickup Roller
Left Deck Feed Roller
Left Deck Separation Roller
Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller

Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller
Registration Front Roller
Duplex Right Roller
Duplex Outlet Roller
Vertical Path Roller1
Right Deck Feed Roller
Right Deck Separation Roller
Right Deck Pickup Roller

Cassette 3 Feed Roller
Cassette 3 Separation Roller
Cassette 3 Pickup Roller
F-2-148
2-125
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Drive Configuration
2-126
Drive Configuration
No.
SL5
M3 M19 M43 M32
M34
Fixing Motor
M4
Right Deck Lifter Motor
M5
Left Deck Lifter Motor
M11
Right Deck Pickup Motor
M12
Cassette3/4 Pickup Motor
M13
Delivery Motor
M14
Reverse Motor
M33
M18
Duplex Feed Right Motor
M19
M18
M20
Cassette3 Lifter Motor
M21
M24
Left Deck Pickup Motor
M26
Vertical Path Upper Motor
M27
Vertical Path Lower Motor
M31
Vertical Path Middle Motor
M32
Duplex Feed Merging Motor
M33
Multi-purpose Registration Front Motor
M34
Registration Motor
M43
ETB Motor
SL3
Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid
SL4
SL5
Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid
SL6
Right Deck Pickup Solenoid
SL7
Left Deck Pickup Solenoid
M13
M14
M26
SL7
M24
M31
SL11
M11
SL6
M5
M4
SL3
Name
M3
M27
M20
SL4
M21
M12
SL11 Left Deck Merging Solenoid

T-2-71
F-2-149
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Drive Configuration
2-126
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Paper path
2-127
Paper path
Feeding path
Delivery Flapper
[1]
Multi Tray
[4]
[2]
Reverse
Flapper
[3]
Duplex
Flapper
[3],[4]
Left Deck Pigkup
Right Deck Pigkup
Option Pickup
Cassette 3 Pickup
Cassette 4 Pickup
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
1-side face-up delivery, duplex face-down delivery

1-side face-down delivery, duplex printing
Duplex printing
1-side face-down delivery
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Paper path
F-2-150
2-127
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Interval speed
2-128
Interval speed
Model
[ppm]
:Pickup Speed
:Vertical path/duplex speed
:Pre-registration speed
75
500
Vertical path/duplex speed
500
55
350
Post-registration speed
:Process speed
65
Pickup speed
Pre-registration speed
:Post-registration speed
ImageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075/6065/6055 [mm/s]
290
500
:Delivery speed
Process speed
350
290
:Delivery/reverse speed
Delivery speed
350*/750(ACC)
290*/750(ACC)
Delivery/Reverse speed
350*/750(ACC)
T-2-72
* The delivery speed is slowed down to prevent the paper from being fallen out of the Delivery
Tray (the delivery speed)
F-2-151
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Interval speed
2-128
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Various types of control
2-129
Various types of control

Fixing Assembly
Unit
Secondary Transfer Unit
Contorol
Basic Movement
Registration Unit
Deck/Cassette detection
Paper Size Detection
Deck/cassette pickup unit
Paper Level Detection

Paper Detection
Pickup Retry Control
Multi-purpose pickup tray unit

Delivery Reverse
Unit
Multi-purpose
Tray Pickup Unit
Basic Movement
Paper Detection
Pre-registration Control
Pre-registration/Registration Unit
Basic Movement
Registration Deceleration Control
Registration Acceleration Control
Face-up Delivery
Face-down Delivery
Duplex Unit
Delivery unit/Duplex unit
Basic Movement
Side Registration Control
Circulation quantity and limit
Deck/Cassette
Pickup Unit
Jam detection
Jam Code List

Forced Paper Feed Control
T-2-73
F-2-152
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Overview > Various types of control
2-129
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Basic Movement
Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit
2-130
Cassette
Basic Movement
Cassette Pickup
Roller
When Deck/Cassette is installed, Motor drives to maintain the height which paper surface
attaches to Pickup Roller (This is the height of Pickup Roller when Pickup Solenoid is OFF).
M12
Cassette Feed
Roller
PS21
/PS22
If the Pickup Motor (M11/M12/M24) is turned ON, the Pickup Roller will rotate and the paper
will be fed.
When the Pickup Sensor (PS19/PS20/PS21/PS22) detects paper, the Pickup Solenoid (SL3/
SL4/SL6/SL7) will turn ON, and Pickup Roller will draw away from paper surface. Only 1
sheet of paper is sent to feed path by the Feed Roller and the Separation Roller, and fed to
Vertical Path Roller.
M11
/M24
Cassette Separation
Roller
F-2-154
Deck Feed Roller

PS19
/PS20
NOTE:
The same single motor is used as a pickup motor for both Cassette 3 and Cassette 4.
The drive is transmitted to Cassette 3 when the motor is in normal rotation and the drive
is transmitted to Cassette 4 when the motor is in reverse rotation. The drive is switched
by the One-way Clutch.
SL6
/SL7
Deck Lifter
Cassette Liter
SL3
/SL4
Deck
M4
/M5
M20
/M21
Deck Separation
Roller
Deck Pickup Roller
NOTE:Service Mode
(Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW
DK1-TURN (ON/OFF of Pickup Roller Post-Rotation on Right Deck)
DK2-TURN (ON/OFF of Pickup Roller Post-Rotation on Left Deck)
DK3-TURN (ON/OFF of Pickup Roller Post-Rotation on Cassette3)
DK4-TURN (ON/OFF of Pickup Roller Post-Rotation on Cassette4)
Setting Value 0: OFF (Default), 1: ON
F-2-153
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Basic Movement
2-130
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Deck/Cassette detection
Deck/Cassette detection
2-131
Cassette
Cassette is detected by Paper Size Detection Switch. When all actuators of the Paper Size
Whether Deck/Cassette is installed is detected
Detection Switch (SW14/SW16) are not pressed, it is detected as no cassette installed
Deck
Deck is detected by Paper Level Sensor. When light from 2 Paper Level Sensors is not
blocked, it is detected as no deck installed
Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS47)
Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS49)
Cassette 3 Size Detection

Switch 1 (SW7)
Switch 1 (SW8)
Paper Size Detection Lever

Side Slide Guide
Paper Level
detection lever 1
Deck
detection lever
Projection
Circular Plate
Trailing Edge Slide Guide
F-2-156
Deck
F-2-155
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Deck/Cassette detection
2-131
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Size Detection
2-132
Cassette
Paper size in cassette 3/4 is each detected by 2 paper size detection switches.
Deck
Set in Service Mode.
There is no mechanism to detect paper size.
NOTE:Service Mode
(Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > CST > P-SZ-C1 (Right Deck Paper
setting)
(Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > CST > P-SZ-C2 (Left Deck Paper setting)
Setting Value
0: A4 (default), 1: B5, 2: LTR
ON/OFF of 4-actuator in the Host Machine changes according to the Paper Size Detection Circular Plate/
Lever Position linked to Trailing Edge/Side Slide Guide. Paper size is detected by two 4-actuator ON/OFF
combinations. And, if all 4-actuator are OFF is detected, it means no-cassette.
Switch 1 (SW7)
Switch 1 (SW8)
Paper Size Detection Lever

Side Slide Guide

Switch 2 (SW9)
Switch 2 (SW10)

Circular Plate
Trailing Edge Slide Guide
F-2-157
2-132
2-133
Paper size detection Switch

Paper
Size
Width
(mm)
Length
(mm)
B5
EXEC
16K
A5-R
A4
STMT-R
LTR
B5-R
257.0
267.0
270.0
148.5
297.0
139.7
279.4
182.0
182.0
184.0
195.0
210.0
210.0
215.9
215.9
257.0
16K-R
195.0
270.0
LTR-R
215.9
279.4
A4-R
LGL
B4
8K
A3
LDR
SRA3
12 x 18
13 x 19
K_LGL
K_LGL-R
G_LTR
G_LTR-R
G_LGL
OFI
E_OFI
M_OFI
B_OFI
A_OFI
FOLIO
FLSP
A_FLSP
A_LTR
A_LTR-R
A_LGL
FA4
FB4
210.0
215.9
257.0
270.0
297.0
279.4
320.0
304.8
330.2
268.0
190.0
267.0
203.0
203.2
216.0
220.0
216.0
216.0
220.0
216.0
216.0
206.0
280.0
220.0
220.0
216.0
216.0
297.0
355.6
364.0
390.0
420.0
431.8
450.0
457.2
483.0
190.0
268.0
203.0
267.0
330.2
317.0
320.0
341.0
355.0
340.0
330.0
330.0
337.0
220.0
280.0
340.0
343.0
330.0
Width SW7/SW8
1-A
1-B
1-C
1-D
Length SW9/SW10
2-A
2-B
2-C
2-D
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
-
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
-
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
-
SW7/SW8
1-D
1-C
1-B
1-A
SW9/SW10
2-A
2-B
2-D
2-C
F-2-158
NOTE:
Settings/registration (Top) > Preferences > Paper Settings > A5R/STMTR Original
Selection
Setting value Cassette3: A5R, STMTR Cassette4: A5R, STMTR
Settings/registration (Top) > Preferences > Paper Settings > B5/EXEC Original
Selection
Setting value Cassette3: B5, EXEC Cassette4: B5, EXEC
Settings/registration (Top) > Preferences > Paper Settings > Register Custom Size
Setting value X: 148.0 to 431.4 mm, Y: 100.0 to 297.4 mm (Maximum 5 pieces)
(Lv.1) COPIER > OPTION > CST
CST3-P1 (Cassette3 paper size setting (A5R/STMTR))
CST4-P1 (Cassette4 paper size setting (A5R/STMTR))
Setting value 0: A5R, 1: STMTR
CST3-P2 (Cassette3 paper size setting (B5/EXEC))
CST4-P2 (Cassette4 paper size setting (B5/EXEC))
Setting value 0: B5, 1: EXEC
T-2-74
2-133
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Level Detection
Paper Level Detection

Paper level is detected by two Paper Level sensors in each cassette
Deck
Right Deck Paper
Level Sensor 1 (PS47)
Left Deck Paper Level
Sensor 1 (PS49)
ight Deck Paper

Level Sensor 2
(PS48)
Left Deck Paper
Level Sensor 2
(PS50)
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
Full
(100%~50%)
Half
(50%~25%)
Few
(25% or less)

Paper Level
Detection Lever 1
Control
Panel
Screen
Display
2-134
Full
(100%~50%)
Deck Detection Lever
ON
OFF
Right Deck Paper Level

Sensor 2 (PS48)
Left Deck Paper Level
Sensor 2 (PS50)
Paper Level
Detection Lever 2
Deck Lifter
T-2-75
F-2-159
Paper
Half (50%~25%)
ON
Few (25% or less)

ON
OFF
Paper
ON
Paper
F-2-161
F-2-160
F-2-162
2-134
Cassette
2-135
Full (100%~50%)
Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 1 (PS69)

Paper Level
Detection Lever

Paper
Cassette 3 Paper
Cassette 4 Paper
Cassette Lifter

OFF
OFF
Paper Level Detection Lever
Holding Plate
F-2-164
Half (50%~25%)
F-2-163
Full
(100%~50%)
Half
(50%~25%)
Few
(25% or less)
Cassette 3 Paper
Level Sensor 1
(PS69)
Cassette 4 Paper
Level Sensor 1
(PS72)
Cassette 3 Paper
Level Sensor 2
(PS70)
Cassette 4 Paper
Level Sensor 2
(PS73)
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Paper
OFF
ON
Control Panel
Screen Display
F-2-165
Few (25% or less)

Paper
ON
ON
T-2-76
F-2-166
2-135
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Detection
Paper Detection
2-136
Cassette
If paper is present, the Detection Lever is pushed upward when lifter ascends, and Paper
Cassette 3 Paper Sensor (PS13)

Cassette 4 Paper Sensor (PS14)
Sensor is turned OFF.

If paper finishes, the Detection Lever enters lifter hole, and Paper Sensor is turned ON
Cassette Lifter
Paper Detection Lever
Deck
Right Deck Paper Sensor (PS7)
Left Deck Paper Sensor (PS11)
Paper Detection Lever
Deck Lifter
Holding Plate
F-2-168
F-2-167
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Paper Detection
2-136
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Lifter Control
2-137
Lifter Control
Cassette
Paper is lifted to the pickup position by the Lifter.
Cassette 3 Upper Limit Sensor(PS68)

Cassette 4 Upper Limit Sensor(PS71)
In the machine configuration with the Deck / Cassette set, the Pickup Motor is driven to raise
the Lifter to fit the paper level to the height of the pickup position. The Lifter is also raised
when the Paper Level Sensor went OFF during the pickup operation.
Cassette3 Lifter Motor(M20)

Cassette4 Lifter Motor(M21)
Cassette 3 Paper Height Sensor (PS17)

Cassette 4 Paper Height Sensor (PS18)
Deck
Left Deck Pickup Motor(M24)
Right Deck Upper Limit Sensor(PS8)

Left Deck Paper Height Sensor (PS12)
Cassette Lifter
Right Deck Paper Height Sensor (PS6)
Left Deck Paper Height Sensor (PS10)
Lifter Wire
Middle Plate
Deck Lifter
F-2-170
Lifter Wire
F-2-169
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Lifter Control
2-137
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Pickup Retry Control
2-138
Lifter Error Detection

In case due to some reason the lifter keep ascending even the Paper Surface Height Sensor
is turned ON, the Upper Limit Sensor is provided to prevent damage in this equipment due to
the error in ascending.
And, if the lifter starts ascending, but not detected by the Paper Surface Sensor and the
Upper Limit Sensor within 3 minutes, the alarm corresponds to the concerned Pickup
Cassette will be triggered. The alarm will release if the corresponding deck/cassette is open
or closed, or the power is turned OFF/ON.

If paper leading edge is not detected by Pickup sensor within the specified time after pickup
movement starts, it is not immediately determined as jam, and re-pickup movement will be
executed.
During pickup retry, the Pickup Motor will be repeatedly turned ON/OFF with the Pickup Roller
is in descended condition.
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit > Pickup Retry Control
2-138
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit > Basic Movement
Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit
3) When the Pre-registration Multi-purpose Tray Drive Motor drives, the Multi-purpose Pull
Out Roller and the Multi-purpose Feed Roller/Multi-purpose Separation Roller will rotate,
Basic Movement
and only 1 sheet of paper will be picked up/fed.
1) If the Multi-purpose Pickup Solenoid (SL2) is turned ON, the semi-toothed gear will rotate.
2) The holding plate Fixing Members will be released and the holding plate will ascend.
Multi-purpose Tray
feed roller
2-139
M33
Multi-purpose Tray
feed roller
Multi-purpose Tray
holding plate
Semi-toothed
gear
Multi-purpose
Tray pull-out
roller
SL2
Multi-purpose Tray
pull-out roller
Spring
Multi-purpose Tray
separation roller
F-2-172
Multi-purpose Tray
separation roller
F-2-171
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit > Basic Movement
2-139
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit > Paper Detection
2-140
Paper Detection
The setting is performed the Side Guide Plate and size code setting (or irregular size setting
When paper is set, Paper Presence Detection Lever will be pushed, and the Multi-purpose
assignment) by and the Control Panel Unit.
Tray Paper Sensor (PS23) will turn ON.
Paper width is detected by the outputted value from the Variable Resistor Assembly (Multipurpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB (UN13)) which is linked to movement of the Side
Guide Plate.
Setting of the Side Guide Plate on the Multi-purpose Pickup Tray is executed by users after
paper is set.
Paper
Multi-purpose Tray Paper

Width Detection PCB (UN13)
Side Guide
Multi-purpose Tray
Detection Lever
Paper Sensor (PS23)
F-2-174
Side Guide
F-2-173
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit > Paper Detection
2-140
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Registration Unit > Pre-registration Control
2-141
Registration Unit
Pre-registration Control
Stop position name
Pickup processing time can vary depending on the paper type and paper size in use as well
as the environment. Therefore, the machine executes pre-registration control to ease such
variation.
Pickup
Assembly
Paper size
Reference sensor
Pre-registration stop Right Deck Size LTR (215.9mm) Vertical Path

position 1
Sensor1(PS24)
Cassette3
Stop position
Vertical Path Roller 1
Downstream 10mm
Cassette4
After the paper is picked up from the pickup cassette, the following reference sensor is used
as a reference to feed the paper for a specified distance, and then the paper is stopped at the
pre-registration position.
Pre-registration Pre-registration
stop position8 stop position6
Pre-registration
stop position7
Pre-registration stop Cassette3 LTRR=< Size =<

position 2
Cassette4 A4R
Vertical Path
Sensor2(PS25)

Downstream 10mm
Pre-registration stop Cassette3 LTRR(279.4mm)<

position 3
Size
Vertical Path
Sensor3(PS26)

Downstream 10mm
Pre-registration stop Cassette4 LDRR < Size

position 4
Vertical Path
Sensor4(PS27)

Downstream 10mm
Pre-registration stop OP Deck

position 5
All Size
Option Deck Pull

Out Sensor
Vertical Path Upper

Roller 1
Downstream 10mm
Pre-registration stop Left Deck

position 6
Size =< LTR
Left Deck Pull Out

Sensor(PS33)
Duplex Merging
Roller
Downstream 10mm
Pre-registration stop Lrft Deck

position 7
Size =< LTR
Duplex Outlet
Sensor(PS64)
Duplex Outlet
Sensor(PS64)
Downstream 10mm
Pre-registration stop position 8
Size =< LTR
Duplex Left
Sensor(PS66)
Duplex Merging
Roller
Upstream 20mm
Cassette3 Size =< LTR

Cassette4 LTTR < Size <
LDRR(431.8mm)
Pre-registration
stop position 5
Pre-registration
stop position 1
Vertical Path
Sensor 1
Right Deck Pull
Out Sensor
Pre-registration
stop position 2
Vertical Path
Sensor 2
Pre-registration
stop position 3
T-2-77
Vertical Path
Sensor 3
Pre-registration
stop position 4
Vertical Path
Sensor 4
Duplex Left Sensor Left Deck Pull Out Sensor

F-2-175
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Registration Unit > Pre-registration Control
2-141
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Registration Unit > Registration Deceleration Control
Registration Control
2-142
Registration Deceleration Control
The Registration Motor (M34) is rotated to make the image on the drum and the paper to be
This control reduces speed of Multi-purpose Tray Registration Front Motor (M33) (Registration
aligned at the specified position and feeds the paper to the Transfer Assembly. The rotating
feed speed) by using Registration Sensor (PS29) as a reference and pushes the paper
speed of the Registration Motor (M34) is increased to be higher than the process speed and
against the Registration Roller to reduce hitting noise.
then reduced to meet the process speed.

Transfer Roller
Registration Roller
Registration Sensor
Registration Roller
M33
M33

F-2-177
Vertical path speed
M34
F-2-176
Pre-registration speed
Registration arch volume
5mm
Stop point
start point of deceleration

Registration Sensor
3mm
Registration Roller
F-2-178
Model
PPM
Vertical path speed
Registration feed speed
stop point
ImageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075/6065/6055

75
65
500[mm/s]
55
350[mm/s]
290[mm/s]
7.6[mm]
5.3[mm]
23[mm] (20mm (distance between the Registration Sensor and the
Registration Roller) +3mm (registration arch volume
T-2-78
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Registration Unit > Registration Deceleration Control
2-142
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Transfer > Post-transfer Guide Attraction Control
2-143
Transfer
Registration Acceleration Control

The Registration Motor (M34) is rotated to make the image on the drum and the paper to be
aligned at the specified position and feeds the paper to the Transfer Assembly. The rotating
speed of the Registration Motor (M34) is increased to be higher than the process speed and
then reduced to meet the process speed.
Post-transfer Guide Attraction Control

With this machine, paper is attracted to the Post-transfer Guide by exhaust from the Image
Formation System Exhaust Fan (FM3). Therefore, behavior of papers between transfer and
fixing becomes stable, which increase the paper feed capabilities.
Process speed
Speed of Registration Roller
Post-transfer Guide
Start point of
deceleration
Registration Roller point
Paper
10mm
Transfer point
F-2-179
Model
PPM
ImageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075/6065/6055

75
65
55
500[mm/s]
Process speed
350[mm/s]
290[mm/s]
48.6[mm]
46.4[mm]
T-2-79
Duct
Paper
Post-transfer Guide
Duct
F-2-180
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Transfer > Post-transfer Guide Attraction Control
2-143
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Delivery/Reverse Unit > Basic Operation
2-144
Delivery/Reverse Unit
Speed after Fixing Roller
Basic Operation
Delivery
speed
Process speed
Face-up Delivery
Delivery Motor(M13)
Process
speed
1) The Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid (SL5) is turned ON to switch the feeding path to the
Delivery Assembly side.
2) Rotating speed of the Delivery Motor (M13) is increased once the papers trailing edge
Reverse Upper Flapper

Solenoid(SL5)
60 mm before Fixing Roller
(Based on Registration Sensor)
passes through the Fixing Roller (fixing-through speed)

3) Feeding speed is reduced to meet the delivery speed once the papers trailing edge
20 mm before Outer Delivery Roller

(Based on Outer-Delivery-Roller ON)
20 mm after Fixing Roller

(Based on Inner Delivery Sensor)
reaches the specified position.

NOTE:
Delivery speed is changed according to the paper size. Delivery speed remains
the same if no delivery option is connected.
20 mm after Outer Delivery

Roller
(Based on Outer-Delivery
-Roller OFF)
F-2-182
Model
PPM
Process speed

Outer Delivery Sensor(PS36)
Outer Delivery Front Roller

75
65
55
350
290
Speed after Fixing Roller
350/750(ACC)
290/750(ACC)
Delivery speed
350/750(ACC)
290/750(ACC)
T-2-80

Inner Delivery Sensor(PS35)
M13
SL5
F-2-181
2-144
2-145
Face-down Delivery
1) The Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid (SL5) is turned OFF to switch the feeding path to the
Delivery Assembly side.
2) Rotating speed of the Reverse Motor (M14) is increased (reverse feed speed) once the
Delivery
speed
Delivery Motor
(M13)
Reverse feed
speed
trailing edge of the preceding paper passes through the Fixing Roller to make the paper
stopped/rotate reversely at the reverse position (reverse delivery speed)
3) Succeeding paper is fed to the reverse path to make the Reverse Motor (M14) stopped/
rotate normally.
4) Succeeding paper is fed to the reverse stop position.
5) Once the trailing edge of the preceding paper reaches the specified position, rotating
Reverse delivery
speed
Reverse delivery speed
Reverse Motor
(M14)
Process
speed
Reverse Upper
Flapper Solenoid
(SL5)
(Based on Registration Sensor )
Reverse delivery
speed
50ms
20 mm before Outer Delivery Roller

(Based on Outer-Delivery-Roller ON)

(Based on Inner Delivery Sensor)
speed of the Delivery Motor (M13) is reduced.
Process
speed
Stop
20 mm after Outer Delivery Roller

(Based on Outer-Delivery-Roller OFF)
F-2-184
NOTE:
Delivery speed is changed according to the paper size. Delivery speed remains
the same if no delivery option is connected.

M13
Model
ImageRUNNER ADVANCE6075/6065/6055 [mm/s]
PPM
75
Process speed
350
65
Reverse feed speed
750
Reverse delivery speed
750
Delivery speed
55
290
350/750(ACC)
T-2-81
SL5
Reverse Vertical
Path Sensor
(PS65)
M14
Reverse Upper Roller
Reverse Lower Roller

F-2-183
2-145
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Basic Operation
2-146
Duplex Unit
Duplex reverse speed

Duplex reverse speed
Basic Operation
Process speed
1) The Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid (SL5) is turned OFF to switch the feeding path to the
Reverse Assembly side.
Stop
Reverse Motor
(M14)
Stop
50ms
2) When the papers trailing edge passes through the Fixing Roller, rotating speed of the
Reverse Motor (M14) is increased (duplex pull-in speed) to make the paper stopped at the
duplex reverse position.
3) The Reverse Motor is driven by the duplex pull-in speed to feed the paper to the Duplex
Assembly (the flapper feeds the paper to the Duplex Assembly). Then, the Duplex Left
Sensor (P66) detects the paper's leading edge, and the paper is fed for a specified distance
to stop at the position of Duplex Left Roller.
Reverse Vertical
Path Sensor
(PS65)
Duplex Left Sensor
(PS66)
Reverse Upper
Flapper Solenoid
(SL5)
(Based on Registration Sensor )
20 mm before Reverse
Vertical Path Sensor

(Based on Reverse Vertical Path Sensor)
Duplex Left Roller

(Based on Duplex Left Sensor)
F-2-186
Model
SL5
Reverse Vertical
Path Sensor
(PS65)
Reverse Upper
Roller
M14
Duplex Flapper
PPM
75
Process speed
350
65
55
290
Duplex feed speed
500
Duplex reserve speed
500
Duplex delivery spped
500
T-2-82
M19
Duplex reverse
point
Reverse Lower
Roller
Duplex Left Sensor

(PS66)
Duplex reverse
standby point
F-2-185
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Basic Operation
2-146
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Side Registration Control
2-147
Side Registration Control

Side Registration Motor(M16)
In the case of printing the 2nd side of the 2-sided print, side registration displacement level is
measured to adjust the write start timing and correct side registration.
<Execution timing>
Duplex Left Roller
When the paper is stopped at the duplex standby position

Side Registration Sensor (PS31) detects side registration.
The side registration control executes detection of the home position as well as operation and
Side Registration
Sensor(PS31)
Paper
detection of the standby position.

1.Home position operation
Side Registration Unit is moved to the home position.
Home position: at 13mm from the nominal dimension of A4 size
Timing
- When the main power is turned ON/when the Front Cover is closed/at the recovery from
JAM process/at job completion
Front
2.Standby position operation

The unit is moved to the side registration standby position (10 mm front) corresponding the
paper size.
3. Detection operation
The Side Registration Motor (M16) is driven until Side Registration Sensor(PS31) is turned
OFF to detect side registration displacement level from the travel distance.
Standby point
Detecting point
About 10 mm
4. The displacement level measured for side registration correction is converted into pixels to
adjust the laser write start timing according to the displaced direction.
The write start timing is pushed forward when the paper is displaced to the front.
The write start timing is pushed back when the paper is displaced to the rear.
Paper
F-2-187
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Side Registration Control
2-147
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Duplex Unit > Circulation quantity and limit
2-148
Circulation quantity and limit

The numbers in white background and the numbers in black background show each the first page and second page.
Less than 314 mm in size/5 sheets in circulation (B5 to A4R)
Registration stop position
Pre-registration
stop position 4
Duplex reverse
stop position
Pre-registration
stop position 1
Pre-registration
stop position 4
Pre-registration
stop position 1
Pre-registration
stop position 1
Pre-registration
stop position 4
Pre-registration
stop position 4
Pre-registration
stop position7
Pre-registration
stop position 1
Pre-registration
stop position 1
Pre-registration
stop position 4
Pre-registration
stop position 4
F-2-188
2-148
Pre-registration
stop position7
2-149
Duplex reverse
stop position
F-2-189
2-149
2-150
Exceeds 314 mm in size/3 sheets in circulation (B4 to LDR inch(431.8))

Duplex stop position
Pre-registration
stop position 4
Pre-registration
stop position 4
Pre-registration
stop position 4
Pre-registration
stop position7
Duplex stop position
Pre-registration
stop position 4
F-2-190
2-150
2-151
F-2-191
2-151
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Jam Detection > Jam Code List
2-152
Jam Detection
Jam Code List
SW2
PS52
PS20 PS67
PS29 PS64
PS28
PS3
PS36
PS35
PS4
PS65
PS24
PS66
PS19
PS32
PS2
PS25
PS21
PS26
PS33
PS22
PS27
F-2-192
2-152
2-153
Jam in Feed System
Other Jams
xx = 01: Delay, 02: Stationary, 0A: Residue
Sensor
No.
Yes: Detects, -: Does not detect

Sensor
No.
xx01
xx02
Sensor name
PS19 Right Deck Pickup Sensor 1
PS32 Right Deck Pull Out Sensor
Sensor name
Jam type
Jam type
0B01
SW2 Front Door Open Detection Switch
Door Open jam
Delay Stationary Residue
0B02
PS3
Door Open jam
0B03
PS2
Multi-purpose Cover Open/Close Sensor Door Open jam
Yes
0CA1
FeedSts time out jam
REFEED command is not received.

(Former: E240-0001)
0CA2
RefeedStart time out jam
RefeedStart command is not received.

(Former: E240-0002)
0CA3
ImageSet time out jam
ImageSet command is not received.

(Former: E240-0003)
PageComplete time out jam
PageCompletecommand is not received.

(Former: E240-0004)
Fixing temperature control time out jam
Fixing Toenail Jam
Yes
Yes
Yes
xx03
PS24 Vertical Path Sensor1
Yes
Yes
Yes
xx04
PS28 Multi-purpose Paper Last paper Sensor
Yes
Yes
Yes
xx05
PS29 Registration Sensor
Yes
Yes
Yes
xx06
PS20 Left Deck Pickup Sensor 2
Yes
xx07
PS33 Left Deck Pull Out Sensor
Yes
Yes
Yes
xx08
PS67 Duplex Merging Sensor
Yes
Yes
Yes
xx09
PS64 Duplex Outlet Sensor
Yes
Yes
Yes
0CA5
0C10
PS4
xx0A
PS21 Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor 1
Yes
xx0B
Yes
Yes
Yes
xx0C
Yes
Yes
Yes
xx0D
PS22 Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor 1
Yes
xx0E
Yes
Yes
Yes
xx11
PS52 Fixing Outlet Sensor
Yes
Yes
Yes
xx12
PS35 Inner Delivery Sensor
Yes
Yes
Yes
xx13
PS36 Outer Delivery Sensor
Yes
Yes
Yes
xx14
PS65 Reverse Vertical Path Sensor
Yes
Yes
Yes
xx15
PS66 Duplex Left Sensor
Yes
Yes
Yes
xx17
PS1
Deck Pickup Roller
Paer Deck / POD Deck
Yes
xx18
PS6
Deck Pull Out Sensor
Paer Deck / POD Deck
Yes
Yes
Yes
0305
PS29 Registration Sensor
0CA4
T-2-84
early timing jam

T-2-83
2-153
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Jam Detection > Forced Paper Feed Control
2-154
Forced Paper Feed Control

If there is paper in the following place after jam is detected, the paper will be forcedly fed to
downstream direction.This control suppresses paper damage during jam handling.
:Forced Paper
Feed Control
F-2-193
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Jam Detection > Forced Paper Feed Control
2-154
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Servicing > Troubleshooting
2-155
Servicing
Parts/Area Name
None
Consumable Parts
Parts
Number
Piece
Expected
life*
FC5-2524
50
C1-PU-RL
FC5-2526
50
C2-PU-RL
FC5-2528
50
C1-FD-RL
FC5-2524
50
C2-FD-RL
FC5-2526
50
C1-SP-RL
FC5-2528
50
C2-SP-RL
FC5-2524
50
C3-PU-RL
FC5-2526
50
C3-FD-RL
FC5-2528
50
C3-SP-RL
Parts Name
COUNTER
Remarks
(DRBL-1)
FC5-2524
50
C4-PU-RL
FC5-2526
50
C4-FD-RL
FC5-2528
50
C4-SP-RL
FB1-8581
12
M-FD-RL
Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller
FC6-6661
12
M-SP-RL
Remarks
Feed Guide
50
Remove paper lint with lint-free paper and cleaning

tool.
Pre-registration Guide
50
Rollers/wheels
50
Separation Static Eliminator
50
Remove paper lint (toner) with Blower.
Duplex Unit Cleaning Brush
50
Using Blower, remove paper lint which was collected

by Cleaning Brush.
Registration Unit Magnet
50
Scanner Sensor(Pickup
Assembly)
100*
sing Blower, remove paper lint

Left Deck Pickup Sensor 2 (PS20),Right Deck
Pickup Sensor 2 (PS19) ,Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor 2
(PS21),Cassette 4 Pickup Sensor 1 (PS22)
* when replacing Separation Roller
Scanner Sensor(Feeding
Assembly)
100
Using Blower, remove paper lint

Vertical Path Sensor 1 (PS24) ,the Multi-purpose Tray
Last Paper Sensor (PS28),the Registration Sensor
(PS29),Reverse Vertical Path Sensor (PS65),Duplex
Outlet Sensor (PS64), Duplex Merge Sensor (PS67),
and Duplex Left Sensor (PS66)
T-2-86

T-2-85
Expected
life*

When replacing the Periodically Replaced Parts and Consumable Parts, be sure to clear the
Parts Counter (COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1/DRBL-1)
Major Adjustments
None
Troubleshooting
None
Technology > Pickup / Feed System > Servicing > Troubleshooting
2-155
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Overview > Power Supply Configuration
2-156
External Auxiliary System

Overview
Power Supply Configuration
Power Supply Configuration inside the Host Machine
3.3V

3.3V
3.3V
Main Power Switch
3.3V
Leakage
Breaker
12V
Front Door Open

Detection Switch
Multi Door
Switch
12V
3.3V
Noise
Filter
All-night Power
Supply PCB
Fixing Power
Supply PCB
AC Driver PCB
12V
24V
3.3V
DC Power Supply
PCB(12V)
12V
DC Power Supply
PCB(24V)
24V
DC Power Supply
PCB B(24V)
24V
Reader
12V
24V
DC Controller PCB
12V
Control Panel
Relay PCB
12V
IH Coil
24V
Reader Heater
Drum Heater
Driver PCB
Drum
Heater
24V
Cassette Heater
24V
Deck Heater
24V
12V
12V
Environment
Heater
Switch
Developing Motor
Drum Motor
High Voltage PCB
Primary Charging High Voltage PCB
3.3V
Cassette
Heater
Switch
Feed Driver PCB
Main
Driver
PCB
24V
Develop High Voltage PCB
24V
Transfer High Voltage PCB

Option
- Finisher
- Paper Deck
12V
24V
24V
Duplex Driver
PCB
Fixing Motor
24V
Transfer
High
Voltage
PCB
F-2-194
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Overview > Power Supply Configuration
2-156
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Power supply control
2-157
Controls
Power Configuration of the Reader Unit

24V
24V
5V
24V
Printer
12V
Reader
Controller
PCB
Power supply control
Motor
Fan
Electric Power Management

<Over View>
Sensor
Electric power shortage is prevented by equating the electric power in the machine.
24V
6V
4.5V
CMOS PCB
Reader
24V
LED Lamp
Unit
24V
6V
4.5V
CMOS PCB
DADF
24V
LED Lamp
Unit
24V
5V
Capacitor for preventing the electric power shortage which is applied to the conventional
models (iR5075/5065/5055) is discontinued on this machine.
Without power management
With power management
Maximum power consumption
DADF driver PCB

F-2-195
Power wire connection from the Host Machine to the Options
Other than fixing
Fixing
ADF Unit
Equation
Other than fixing
Fixing
F-2-197
Paper Deck Unit-A1/

Paper Deck Unit-D1
Staple Finisher-E1/
Booklet Finisher-E1
F-2-196
2-157
2-158
display on the Control Panel is OFF.
This machine executes electric power management to prevent temporary power shortage.
The electric power management detects current value of the entire product with the Current
Energy Saver
Sensor. In the case that the current value is likely to exceed the electric power reference
The mode to reduce energy consumption by reducing the control temperature when the
value, the DC Controller temporarily reduces electric power supply to the fixing area to
Fixing Unit is at standby state according to the energy saving rate (this mode can be
compensate for power shortage.
changed in Settings/registration Change Energy Saver Mode Default: -10%).

Deep Sleep
Electric Power
AC Driver PCB
AC
The state that only 3.3V on the All-night Power Supply PCB is supplied. To be shifted to the
Signal:
Current Sensor
standby mode when the next job is generated.

Print job
others
Detection of
Total current value
Pressing the power key on the Control Panel
Power
Fixing Electric Power
If you set the network as a loop, data keeps staying in this loop and efficiency of data transfer
Fixing Power Supply PCB
ASIC
Determination of fixing
electric power value
Electric Power
Fixing Assembly
Effects of Spanning Tree-supported Hub
DC Controller PCB
might be decreased. In order to prevent this symptom, some hubs have the function called
spanning tree. If this function is enabled, the device newly connected to the hub can make
data communication with network 10 to 50 seconds (time changes due to the conditions)
Temperature
after the connection. When the machine enters Deep sleep mode and restores from the sleep
IH Coil
mode, the machine electrically disconnects with the network once. Therefore, if the machine
Total current flow
F-2-198
Current Sensor : Converts the flux occurred by current to the voltage.
connects with the spanning tree-installed hub, the machine cannot communicate with network
for approximately 1 minute at a maximum after restoring from the Deep sleep mode.
For this reason, right after restoring from the Deep sleep mode, the following symptoms might
occur: Device status cannot be collected, printing cannot be made, and login using a login
Energy saver function
application cannot be made. If such symptoms become any problems, perform the following
Deep Sleep
Shifting time
(specified in User
Mode) has passed
operations.
PDL job occurs
Using user mode, set not to enter the Deep sleep mode.
Press power-save Press power-save

switch
switch
PDL job is complete
Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Sleep Mode Energy Use > High
Disable the spanning tree function of hub.
SLEEP-STNDBY
STANDBY
PDL job is complete
Press power-save
switch
Power-saving
Request users to use the hub which supports Rapid Spanning-Tree

Protocol (RSTP) that resolved such problems.
PDL job occurs

F-2-199
Sleep standby
The mode that can start operation immediately. All power is supplied in this mode, but
2-158
2-159
Distribution of Power and the Switches

The power of this machine is supplied to each load side by linking with the following switches, etc.
A. 2-dimensional shading OFF(defolt*1)
Main Power
OFF
Mode
Main SW
Switch
Heater
OFF

consumption)*3

consumption)*3
WarmUp(Recovery)
Copy/Print
ON
Cassette SW
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Drum
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Cassette
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Reader
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
control
control
*1
*1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
T-2-87

Mode
Switch
Main SW
Cassette SW
Drum
Heater
Main Power
OFF
Cassette
Reader

consumption)*3

consumption)*3
WarmUp(Recovery)
OFF
Copy/Print
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Environment Environment Environment Environment Environment Environment
control
control
control
control
control
control
*1
*1
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
*1*2
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
control
control
*1
*1
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
T-2-88
2-159
2-160
B. 2-dimensional shading ON *1]

Mode
Main SW
Switch
Heater
Main Power
OFF
OFF

consumption)*3

consumption)*3
WarmUp(Recovery)
Copy/Print
ON
Cassette SW
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Drum
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
*1
ON
*1
ON
ON
Cassette
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Reader
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
T-2-89

Mode
Switch
Heater
Main Power
OFF
Main SW

consumption)*3

consumption)*3
WarmUp(Recovery)
OFF
Copy/Print
ON
Cassette SW
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Drum
ON
*1
ON
*1
ON
*1
ON
*1
ON
*1
ON
*1
Cassette
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Reader
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
*1
ON
*1
ON
ON
T-2-90
*1 It can be switched by COPIR > OPTION > IMG-MCON > 2D-SHADE..

*2 It can be switched by COPIR > OPTION > IMG-MCON > DRM-H-SW.
*3 When sleep mode (high energy consumption) is set, the Cassette Heater/Reader Heater cannot be turned ON although the Environment Switch and the Cassette Heater Switch are ON.
When using the Cassette Heater and the Reader Heater at sleep state, set the sleep mode (low energy consumption). Settings/Registration > Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Sleep
Mode Energy Use > High/Low
2-160
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Quick Startup
2-161
<Environment Control>
Environment control 1: The condition of the heater at the time of turning OFF the main
power continues.
Environment control 2: Whether to turn ON or OFF the heater is determined by the
environment (moisture content) right before moving to sleep state, and the condition
continues while the power is OFF or the machine is at sleep state.
Environment
Moisture content
Drum Heater
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0.86
1.73
5.8
8.9
15
18
12.41
23 deg C 5%
23deg C 10%
23 deg C 30%
23 deg C 50%
23 deg C 70%
27 deg C 80%
30 deg C 80%
OFF
Quick Startup
To realize faster startup, power configuration has been changed to always supply power to
the All-night Power Supply PCB. Thereby, the main menu can be displayed after 30 seconds
from turning ON the Main Power Supply Switch.
Although when the Main Power Supply Switch is OFF, power is supplied to the following
PCBs.
AC Driver PCB
All-night Power Supply PCB
Relay PCB
ON
T-2-91
Image of
existing power supply
Main SW
Environment control 3: Basically the heater is ON. ON or OFF of the heater can be
switched depending on the moisture contents when the duration time of standby mode/
energy saving mode is long (4 hours at minimum).
All-night
Power Supply
Breaker
Relay

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON > DRM-H-SW: To set ON/OFF of the Drum Heater.
AC Driver PCB
0: Normal mode (ON/OFF of the Drum Heater is determined when moving to sleep 1.)
(Default)
1: Drum Heater ON mode *(The Drum Heater must be turned ON when moving to sleep 1
By turning OFF the Main Switch,

all power turns OFF
NOT All-night
Power Supply
All-night
Circuit
Relay
PCB
Main Controller
PCB 1
Energized area when

the Main Switch is OFF
while the 2-dimensional shading-related control is OFF.)

2: Energy saving mode (The Drum Heater is OFF when moving to sleep 1.)
* The mode differs from 2-dimensional shading ON (image priority mode). This mode is for
Image of
power supply for iR-ADV C5255
users who just want to turn ON the Drum Heater when startup time is delayed because of
the increase of controls due to 2-dimensional shading ON.
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR > 2D-SHADE: Image priority mode (2-dimensional
shading). ON/OFF
0: 2-dimensional shading OFF (Default)
1: 2-dimensional shading ON (The Drum Heater is turned ON at first time for the day, sleep,
standby/energy saving, potential control, and 2-dimensional shading.)
Power is supplied to the All-night Power Supply

even if the Main Switch is turned OFF
All-night
Power Supply
Breaker
Relay
NOT All-night
Power Supply
AC
Driver PCB
All-night
Circuit
Relay
PCB
Main Controller
PCB 1
Main SW
F-2-200
Disconnect the plug from outlet or turn OFF the Breaker when performing work with the
2-161
possibility to come in contact with the PCBs above. PCBs may get damage. If a conductive
material comes in contact with the PCB, short circuit may occur in the PCB, and may cause
damage on it.
The following illustration is used at the place where attention needs. When the following label
is affixed, be sure to disconnect the plug from outlet or turn OFF the Breaker.
Quick Start
Plug Off
F-2-201
In addition, quick startup is not performed under the following conditions.

At first startup after the AC Power Plug is connected to the outlet
Under the following conditions (settings), the machine always starts up normally (even quick startup
is ON).
When any of the following devices is connected.
EFI Controller
Serial Interface Coin Vendor
Wireless LAN
When any of the following network settings is set to "ON".
RARP
BOOTP
IPsec
IPv6
NetWare
AppleTalk
2-162
As for startup right after shutting down of the machine under any of the following conditions, it starts
up normally (even quick startup is ON).
FAX
There is a fax transmission reservation.
Within a specified period of time (10 seconds) from disconnection of a fax line
Within a specified period of time (10 seconds) from non-detection of reception from a fax
line
Within a specified period of time (10 seconds) from putting down the fax sub device or
handset
MEAP
During execution of MEAP application which prohibits moving to Deep Sleep
A scheduled processing is reserved on MEAP.
Job processing
During print/scan job processing
During SEND job processing
During I-Fax communication/job processing
During report job processing
During forwarding transmission job/reception job processing
During processing of data storage to Advanced Box
During fax communication/phone communication
During distribution of device information
During Box backup
During export/import by RUI
During opening/reading/writing file of Advanced Box (common with SMR/WebDAV)
During rebuilding with the HDD Data Encryption/Mirroring Board installed
Others
When the machine state remains unchanged for more than 110 hours after turning ON the
power as quick startup or turning OFF the power.
-> At the time of shutdown, it will be normal shutdown.
* This is to prevent a risk of UI freeze caused by memory leak.
Within a specified period of time (20 seconds) from turning OFF the Main Power Supply
Switch
-> In such a case, the machine reboots and then starts up normally at startup. Therefore, it will
take a few more seconds compared with the normal startup.
* This is for starting up the machine normally at the time of failure (UI freeze, etc.).
After moving to the Settings/Registration screen of service mode or RUI
After changing the user mode that requires restart
The machine is shut down from RUI
When an error occurs
When resource downloader is active
In printer/scanner limited functions mode
When a login application is switched by SMS
A license has been registered.
Startup by pressing the Control Panel Key
T-2-92
2-162
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Fan Control
2-163
Fan Control
Location of Fans
Airflow
FM17
FM7
FM17
FM16
FM33
FM2
IH power supply unit

FM8
FM31
FM30
FM32
FM41
Developing Assembly
FM33
FM31
FM4
FM30
FM7
FM42
FM2
Power Supply
FM32
FM41
FM42
FM8
FM5
FM5
FM40
FM3
FM14
FM15
F-2-203
F-2-202
Circuit
code
FM2
FM3
FM4
FM5
FM7
FM8
FM14
FM15
FM16
FM17
FM30
FM31
FM32
FM33
FM40
FM41
FM42
Name
Primary Charging Air-supply Fan
Making Image Exhaust Fan
Main Controller Cooling Fan
Paper Cooling Fan
Fixing Power Supply Cooling Fan
Transfer Cleaner Cooling Fan
Power Supply Cooling Fan 1
Laser Scanner Cooling Fan
Primary Charging Exhaust Fan
Developer Lower Cooling Fan
Developer Upper Cooling Fan
Pre-transfer Charging Unit Air-supply Fan
Pre-transfer Charging Unit Exhaust Fan
Feed Driver Cooling Fan
Duplex Driver Cooling Fan
Registration Motor/Duplex Motor Cooling Fan
Function
To intake air around the Primary Charging Assembly
To exhaust air in the image formation area
To cool the Main Controller PCB
To cool the paper passing through the delivery area
To cool the fixing power supply
To cool the Transfer Cleaner / To cool the Duplex Feed Guide
To cool the power supply
To cool the power supply
To cool the Laser Scanner
To exhaust air around the Primary Charging Assembly
To cool the Developing Unit
To cool the Developing Unit
To intake air around the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
To exhaust air around the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
To cool the Feed Driver
To cool the Duplex Driver
To cool the Duplex Motor and the Registration Motor
Error/Alarm code
E824-0000
E806-0000
E880-0001
33-0001
E804-0001
E820-0002
E804-0000
FM16
FM4
Power Supply
E121-0001
33-0027
E820-0000
E820-0001
33-0026
FM40
FM15
33-0013
33-0028
33-0002
T-2-93
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Fan Control
FM14
FM3
F-2-204
2-163
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Controls > Counter control
2-164
Counter control
Fan Sequence
NO.
NAME
FM2
Primary Charging
Air-supply Fan
FM3
FM4
FM5
FM7
Paper Cooling Fan

Fixing Power Supply
Cooling Fan
FM8
WAIT
UP
INTR
STBY
PRINT
LSTR
JAM
ERR
Power
saving
DEEP
Sleep
Count-up timing differs according to the following.

Print mode (1-sided page, 2nd side of 2-sided page, 1st side of 2-sided page)
Delivery position (Finisher).
Controller control
Print mode
1-sided print/2nd
side of 2-sided print
Delivery position
Count-up timing
FM14 Power Supply Cooling Fan 1
1 In the case of the Host

Machine only
FM15 Power Supply Cooling Fan 2
Reference Sensor:
External Delivery
Sensor (PS36)
FM16 Laser Scanner Cooling Fan
2 Staple Finisher / Tray A

Reference Sensor:
Booklet Finisher (Upper Tray) Feed Path Sensor
(S102)
Tray B
FM17 Primary Charging Exhaust Fan

FM30 Developer Lower Cooling Fan
FM31 Developer Upper Cooling Fan
Pre-transfer Charging Unit
FM32 Air-supply Fan
Pre-transfer Charging Unit
FM33 Exhaust Fan
(Lower Tray)
Saddle area Reference Sensor:

Saddle inlet sensor
(S201)
FM40 Feed Driver Cooling Fan
R-configuration (when the length

exceeds LTR up to A4R) -> Duplex
Merger Sensor (PPS67)
Large (when the length is A4R or more)
-> Reverse Vertical Path Sensor (PS65)
Default counters for each country (model) are listed below.
:Full speed
:half speed
Target
F-2-205
100V Japan
model
Type 1
(Conventional
method)
100V Japan
model
(New method)
120V Taiwan
model
120V UL model
Type 1
(Conventional
method)
120V UL model
Type 2
(New method)
Reference Sensor:
Small (when the length is up to LTR) ->
Duplex Left Sensor (PS66)
T-2-94
FM41 Duplex Driver Cooling Fan

Registration Motor/
FM42 Duplex Motor Cooling Fan
1st side of the 2-sided print
Display number of each counter (in service mode) / item

Country
Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Counter 6 code
Total 1
101
Total 2
102
Total 1
101
Total 1
101
Total 2
102
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
Copy
(Total 2)
202
Total
(Large)
103
Total
(Large)
103
Total A2
*1
*1
*1
127
Copy
(Total 1)
201
Copy
(Total 1)
201
0
Copy
(Large)
203
Copy
(Large)
203
*1
*1
*1
*1
Copy
(Total 2)
202
*1
0
*1
*1
JP
JP
TW
0
*1
US
US
2-164
2
Target
230V General
model
240V UK model
Type 1
(Conventional
method)
240V UK model
Type 2
(New method)
240V CA model
230V FRN model

Type 1
(Conventional
method)
230V FRN model
Type 2
(New method)
230V GER model
Type 1
(Conventional
method)
230V GER model
Type 2
(New method)
230V AMS model
Type 1
(Conventional
method)
2-165

Country
Total 1
101
Total
(Black/
Large)
112
Total 1
101
Total 1
101
Total
(Black/
Large)
112
Total 1
101
Total
(Black/
Large)
112
Total 1
101
Total
(Black/
Large)
112
*1
*1
Total
(Large)
103
Total
(Black/
Small)
113
Copy
(Total 1)
201
Scan
(Total 1)
Copy
(Large)
203
Print
(Total 1)
501
301
Total
(Large)
103
Total
(Black/
Small)
113
Copy
(Total 1)
201
Scan
(Total 1)
Copy
(Large)
203
Print
(Total 1)
*1
*1
501
301
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
0
*1
*1
*1
*1
Total
(Black/
Small)
113
Scan
(Total 1)
Print
(Total 1)
*1
*1
501
301
0
Total
(Black/
Small)
113
*1
*1

Country
230V AMS model

Type 2
(New method)
Total 1
101
230V ITA model

Type 1
(Conventional
method)
230V ITA model
Type 2
(New method)
Total
(Black/
Large)
112
Total 1
101
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
Total
(Black/
Small)
113
Scan
(Total 1)
Print
(Total 1)
*1
*1
501
301
GB
GB
AU
FR
*1
SG/KO/
CN
Target
FR
DE
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
ES/SE/
PT/NO/
DK/FI/
PL/HU/
CZ/SI/
GR/EE/
RU/NL/
SK/RO/
HR/BG/
TR
IT
IT
T-2-95
<Explanation of the list>

Large: Large size paper (when paper length exceeds 364 mm in paper feed direction)
Small: Small size paper (when paper length is 364 mm or less in paper feed direction)
Total: Copy + Print; 1 count up
*1
*1
Scan
(Total 1)
Print
(Total 1)
*1
*1
501
301
DE
2-Sided: 1 count up when auto 2-sided copy

Country code change of CONFIG is executed from COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW >
CONFIG.
ES/SE/
PT/NO/
DK/FI/
PL/HU/
CZ/SI/
GR/EE/
RU/NL/
SK/RO/
HR/BG/
TR
Three-digit number in the counter column shows the setting value of the following service
mode items.
COPIER > OPTION > USER > COUNTER 1 to 8
COUNTER2 to 8 can be changed from the service mode (COPIER > OPTION > USER).
*1: Nothing is displayed as default. However, you can change this setting from the service
mode.
2-165
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Servicing > When Replacing Parts
2-166
Servicing

DC Controller PCB

No
Parts name
Parts Number
Piece
Expected life
Ozone Filter
FL3-2134-000
6000,000 sheets
Dustproof Filter
FC8-9564-000
1000,000 sheets
Remarks
None
of the Front Cover.

T-2-96
Consumable Parts
Get in service mode to enter all the latest service mode values written on the label at the back
see "Removing the DC Controller PCB," on p. 4-231.

1. Before Replacing
1)Backup of the Service Mode data
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DSRAMBUP
Periodical Servicing
2. After Replacing
1)Restoring the backup data
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DSRAMRES
None
2)Switch OFF and then ON the main power.

3)Execute auto gradation adjustment.
4)Test print
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Servicing > When Replacing Parts
2-166
Technology > External Auxiliary System > Servicing > Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
2-167
1) Open the DADF and loosen the 2 Fixation Screws securing the Arm Rotation Adjustment
Ring.
Adjusting rotation of the Upright Control Panel Arm

If rotation of the Upright Control Panel Arm has become loose, retighten the Fixation Screws
securing the Arm Rotation Adjustment Ring according to the following procedure.
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Shaft Support Cover (Left) and the Shaft Support Cover (Right).
2) Open the DADF and retighten the 2 Fixation Screws securing the Arm Rotation Adjustment
Ring.
F-2-207
2) Remove the 3 Stepped Screws securing the Arm Shaft.
x3
F-2-206
NOTE:
If rotation of the arm is still loose after retightening the Fixation Screws according to
Adjusting rotation of the Upright Control Panel Arm, change the phase difference
between the Arm Rotation Adjustment Ring and the Fixation Screws according to the
following procedure.
F-2-208
2-167
2-168
3) Pull out the Upright Control Panel and the Arm Shaft, and rotate the Arm Rotation
Adjustment Ring to change the phase so that the Fixation Screws do not contact with the
dents formed by tightening the screws.
F-2-209
4) Insert the Upright Control Panel and the Arm Shaft, and retighten the 2 screws loosened in
step 3.
2-168
Technology > MEAP > Changes > LDAP Authentication (SSO-H Server Authentication)
MEAP
2-169
An example of the LDAP server management screen
Changes
LDAP Authentication (SSO-H Server Authentication)
LDAP authentication has been added to the server authentication method using Single SignOn H (hereinafter referred to as SSO-H).
LDAP authentication is a user authentication performed by using an LDAP server on the
network linked with the device.
iR Device
LDAP Server
F-2-212
Local user
An example of the screen for adding an LDAP server
Remote user
F-2-210
Accordingly, the following item and setting screens have been added to the SSO-H
management screen of the remote UI.
Drop-down list for selecting the LDAP server as the authentication server
The LDAP server management screen (when [LDAP Server] is selected from the foregoing
drop-down list)
The screen for adding an LDAP server
An example of the screen showing the drop-down list for selecting LDAP Server
F-2-213
For details, refer to "Server authentication (Active Directory authentication)" in this chapter.
F-2-211
Technology > MEAP > Changes > LDAP Authentication (SSO-H Server Authentication)
2-169
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SSO-H > Server authentication management
2-170
Preparation for Using SSO-H
Integrated Authentication Disabling Setting Screen

A user setting screen has been added to the integrated authentication function which allows
the authentication information used for logging into the machine to be shared between MEAP
Outline
applications.
When using Single Sign-On H (hereinafter referred to as SSO-H) for the login service,
From a security standpoint, the setting screen for disabling the function to allow authentication
authentication.
required system environments are different in server authentication or local device
information (Volatile Credential), whose registered information is discarded at the time of

logout or shutdown of the device, to be used has conventionally been included in service
mode.
In addition to this service mode, a screen that allows even users to make the setting has
been added to the remote UI.
This screen can be also used to disable the integrated authentication function for each
authentication protocol.
For details, refer to "Integrated Authentication Function" in this chapter.
See the following for system requirements in each of authentication methods:
Server authentication management

The system requirements necessary when using server authentication by SSO-H vary
depending on the authentication server.
The system requirements for using each authentication server are shown below.
Active Directory authentication

In order to use Active Directory authentication in SSO-H, the following system environments
are required.
1) Authentication server (Active Directory : Windows server )
Active Directory and Domain Name System (DNS) should be installed.
A group named "Canon Peripheral Admins" should be created on the Active Directory.
The OS should be one of the followings.
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 SP2 *
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 SP2 *
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 SP2 *
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1
* 64-bit version is not supported.
2) Users accessing the authentication server (Active Directory: Windows Server)
F-2-214
The user should belong to the "Canon Peripheral Admins" group on the Active Directory.
The user name should contain only single-byte alphanumeric characters, - (hyphen), _ (low
line), and % (percent).
Note:
The difference in time setting between the authentication server (Active Directory) and
the machine (and the computer for login) should be within 5 minutes. (If the difference in
time setting is 5 minutes or longer, an error will occur at the time of login for the server
authentication.)
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SSO-H > Server authentication management
2-170
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SSO-H > PC Environment of Administrator Users and General Users
Note:
As for the user name for logging into the machine, use the name registered as "User
logon name (pre-Windows 2000)" in the Active Directory.
An example of the user registration screen (Windows Server 2003)
PC Environment of Administrator Users and General Users

The following environment is required to use this machine (managed by SSO-H) from a PC
on the network.
OS of the PC and Other Environments

Classification
Client OS
Server OS
F-2-215
LDAP authentication
Mac OS
When using LDAP authentication by SSO-H, the following conditions need to be satisfied.
1) LDAP server
Novell eDirectory V8.8 SP6 for Windows
Lotus Domino V8.5 for Windows
2) OS where the LDAP server runs
It should comply with the specifications of the LDAP server product.
Operation check has been conducted for the following OS.
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise SP2
Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Enterprise
2-171
Operating System
Supported browser
Windows XP Professional SP3 Internet Explorer 7

Internet Explorer 8
Windows Vista SP2
Internet Explorer 7
Internet Explorer 8
Internet Explorer 9
Windows 7 SP1
Internet Explorer 8
Internet Explorer 9
Windows Server 2003 SP2
Internet Explorer 7
Windows Server 2003 R2 SP2 Internet Explorer 8
Windows Server 2008 SP2
Internet Explorer 7
Internet Explorer 8
Internet Explorer 9
Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1 Internet Explorer 8
Internet Explorer 9
Mac OS X v10.5
Safari 4.0.5
Safari 5.0.5
Mac OS X v10.6
Safari 4.0.5
Safari 5.0.5
Safari 5.1
Mac OS X v10.7
Safari 5.1
JRE : Java Runtime Environment
Supported JRE
JRE 1.5 or later *1 *3
J2SE 5.0 *1 *3
T-2-97
J2SE : Java 2 Platform Standard Edition

Note:
*1 Excluding JRE6 update4/5
*2 In order to use JRE1.6 with Internet Explorer 9, JRE1.6.0.24 or later is required.
*3 Refer to the website of JAVA (http://java.com/) for how to obtain the Java
environment.
Note:
When an LDAP server other than the server shown above is used, SSO-H may not
work properly.
Windows Active Directory works also as an LDAP server, but is not supported.
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SSO-H > PC Environment of Administrator Users and General Users
2-171
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Preparation of PC for Accessing SMS
2-172
Preparation for Using SMS
Note:
The ActiveX plug-in should be enabled in Internet Explorer.

In Internet Explorer, if [Run ActiveX controls and plug-ins] is disabled in [Internet Options]
> [Security] > [Custom level...], a warning message that JRE has not yet been installed is
displayed.
JavaScript should be enabled in all the browsers.
In the case of an IP v6 environment, JRE1.5 or later is required.
When using Windows XP in an IP v6 environment, IP v6 may need to be installed
manually in some cases.
To use SMS, a PC and browser used to access SMS are required, and the network settings
need to be set up on the device.
Preparation of PC for Accessing SMS

Checking of operation environment
In order to access SMS using password authentication, the PC and browser need to comply
with the following system environment.
Network ports used

Port No.
Connecting
Listening
53
88
1-65535
( default:389)
10000 - 10100
Combination of the Browser and the OS

Application
Communication with DNS server (fixed)

Kerberos authentication with KDC (Key Distribution Center)
Communication with directory service using LDAP (default is 389,
may be changed to any port on LDAP service side)
T-2-98
Operating System
Windows XP Professional SP3
Windows Vista SP2
Windows 7 SP1
Mac OS X v10.5
Mac OS X v10.6
Mac OS X Lion
Supported browser
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7
Safari 4.0.5
Safari 5.0.5
Safari 4.0.5
Safari 5.0.5
Safari 5.1
Safari 5.1
T-2-99
In order to access SMS using RLS authentication, the environment should comply with the
environment for using SSO-H as the login service. (For details, refer to "PC Environment of
Administrator Users and General Users".)
PC and Browser Settings

The PC and browser used to access SMS need to satisfy the following conditions.
The supported browser language should be the same with the language of the OS.
Java Script should be enabled.
The supported screen size should be 800 x 600 or larger (recommended size: 1024 x 768).
Session cookie should be enabled.
Only alphanumeric characters and some of the symbols ("-" or ".") should be used as the
machine domain name and host name.
If an invalid character string such as a low line ("_") is included in the host name, cookies
cannot be enabled.
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Preparation of PC for Accessing SMS
2-172
Technology > MEAP > Preparation for Using SMS > Settings on the Device Side
Settings on the Device Side

Network configuration process
In order to provide support for the machine via network such as SMS, the network settings
need to be made from the touch panel of the machine. (this setting is [ON] by default).
1) Press [Settings/Registration] button, select [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] >
[Use HTTP] and press [On] button.
2-173
Note:
When using SSL, press [Settings/ Registration] button, select [Management
Settings]>[License / Other] > [MEAP Settings] > [SSL Settings] and press [On] button.
(This setting is applied to SSL setting on RUI. Vice versa, [On] set for SSL on RUI is
also applied to the touch panel.)
When [Use SSL] is set to On, the message dialog, [The Default Key is not set. Check
the Key and Certificate List settings in Certificate Setting.], is shown. Press [OK] button
for this message.
F-2-218
2) Press [OK] button to return to Main Menu screen.

3) Restart this device.
CAUTION:
F-2-216
Note:
In iR-ADV series, the System Manager ID and the System PIN are configured by
default, so Network and the items that follow are grayed out and cannot be selected.
Return to the top screen, press Login button at the lower left of the screen, login as
the system manager, and configure the settings.
The default setting for the System Manager ID is 7654321, and the password is
7654321.
The setting [ Use HTTP ] is not actually enabled/disabled until you have restarted the
device.
You cannot make a connection through a proxy server. If a proxy server is in use,
enter the IP address of the MEAP device in the Exceptions field for the browser.
Open Internet Options dialog of Internet Explorer and select Connections tab, LAN
Settings button, Use a proxy server option, and Advanced button of Proxy server
group. Proxy Settings dialog will opens. The Exceptions field is in the dialog. As
network settings vary among environments, consult the network administrator.
If Cookie and JavaScript are not enabled in the Web browser, you will not be able to
use SMS.
To type text using the Web browser, use the characters compatible with the MEAP
devices touch panel display. The MEAP device may not properly recognize some
characters.
When [Use SSL] is made available, it is necessary to set the key and the certificate
necessary for the SSL communication. Set the key and the certificate by SSL with
[SSL Settings] that exists in [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [SSL
Settings] on the iR device.
F-2-217
2-173
Key Pair and Server Certificate when Using Encrypted SSL

Communication
2-174
2) Click [ Management Settings ] > [ Device Management ] > [ Certificate Settings ] > [ Key
and Certificate Settings ].
To use SMS via SSL connection, it is required to specify a key pair and server certificate as
the key to be used.
Since a key (default key) that can be used for encrypted SSL communication is installed as
standard on the device, advance setting of the key pair and server certificate is not required.
In order to use an encryption key other than the default key, follow the procedure "Generating
a key pair" shown below to make settings for the key pair and server certificate necessary for
encrypted SSL communication.
Note:
MFP has a server certificate registered as standard.

For detailed procedures of the Default Key setting, refer to [e-Manual > Security].
As for SMS, by setting a Default Key, encrypted SSL communication is always executed
regardless of the following setting: [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings]
(Settings/Registration) > [MEAP Settings] > [SSL Settings]: ON/OFF.
F-2-220
Generating a key pair

1) From a PC on the same network as the device, use a web browser to access the remote
3) Click [ Generate Key... ] button.
UI's portal page. Then, select [ Settings/Registration ] from the menu on the right side of
the screen.
URL to access: http://<device's IP address>:8000/
F-2-221
4) Click [ Network Communication ]
F-2-222
F-2-219
2-174
5) Enter the necessary information, and then click the [ OK ] button.
2-175
6) Check to see that the generated key appears in [ Registered Key and Certificate ].
F-2-224
Default Key Settings

1) Click [ Preferences ] > [ Network Settings ] > [TCP/IP Settings ] > [ SSL Settings ].
F-2-223
Input example
Item name
Type
Key Settings
Key Name
Signature Algorithm
Key Algorithm
Certificate Settings
Validity Start Date
Validity End Date
Country/Region
State
City
Organization
Organization Unit
Common Name
Content
Entry
Compulsory An arbitrary character string

Default Key
Compulsory Selected from:SHA1/SHA256/SHA384/SHA512 RSA
Compulsory Selected from:512/1024/2048/4096
512
Compulsory
Compulsory
Compulsory
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
Arbitrary
Date
Date
Country or region name
State name
City name
Organization name
Organization unit
Common Name*
15/4/2012
15/4/2036
US
-
F-2-225
T-2-100
Note:
When the IP address of the device has been entered in the [Common Name] entry
field, if you install a server certificate to the browser ( see "Installing a server certificate
(reference information)" ), the message "Certificate Error" that usually appears when
access is made from Internet Explorer 7 or later will not be displayed.
2-175
2) Click [ Key and Certificate...] button.
2-176
Installing a server certificate (reference information)
When you access a device where the key installed as standard [default key] is set as the key
for SSL, "Certificate Error" appears if the version of Internet Explorer (IE) is Version 7 or later.
Error display example
F-2-229
To disable display of "Certificate Error", use the following procedure (for IE8) to set the key
generated in "Key Pair and Server Certificate when Using Encrypted SSL Communication" (i.e.
the key with the IP address of the device specified as the shared name) as an SSL key.
1) Access SMS from the browser, and then click "Certificate Error" in the URL entry field.
F-2-226
3) Select the generated key, and then click the [ Default Key Settings ] button.
F-2-230
2) Click [ View certificates ].
F-2-227
4) Check that [ SSL ] is displayed in the [ Key Usage ] entry field.
F-2-231
F-2-228
5) Log out from the remote UI, and then restart the device.
2-176
3) Click the [ Install Certificate... ] button on the [ General ] tab.
2-177
5) In [ Certificate Store ], select the [ Place all certificates in the following store ] option, and
then click the [ Browse ] button.
F-2-232
4) [ Certificate Import Wizard ] will appear. Click the [ Next ] button.
F-2-234
6) In [ Select Certificate Store ], select [ Trusted Root Certification Authorities ], and then click
the [ OK ] button.
F-2-235
F-2-233
2-177
7) You will return to the [ Certificate Store ] dialog. Check that "Trusted Root Certification
Authorities" appears in [ Certificate ], and then click the [ Next ] button.
F-2-236
8) [ Completing the Certificate Import Wizard ] will appear. Click the [ Finish ] button.
2-178
9) If the [Security Warning] appears, click the [Yes] button. (It does not appear when installing
the same certificate again.)
F-2-238
10)
A message will appear to indicate that import has been completed successfully. Click
the [ OK ] button.
F-2-239
F-2-237
2-178
Network Port Settings
2-179
4) Press the port number to specify on the control panel (the numerical value input in the field
The default port of the HTTP server used for MEAP and MEAP applications to provide the
is displayed), and press [OK] button.
servlet function is 8000, and the HTTPS server's default port is 8443. In the case that these
ports have already used by the customer who is to introduce this application, the MEAP
application cannot use the HTTP (or HTTPS) server(s).
By changing the following ports to use, however, the MEAP application can be used as well
as the existing system.
1) Start [SERVICE MODE] in Level 2.
2) Press [COPIER] > [Option] > [NETWORK] buttons.
F-2-242
Note:
A port number can be any integer from 0 to 65535. To avoid port numbers that are
frequently used, do not use any integer from 0 to 1023.
Server
HTTP Server
HTTPS Server
Setting value
Default value / Value after RAM clear
1024 to 65535
1024 to 65535
8000
8443
T-2-101
F-2-240
3) To set up the HTTP server port, select [ MEAP-PN ]. To set up the HTTPS server port,
select [MEAP-SSL ].
Note:
If PS Print Server Unit is connected, do not specify port 8080.
If port 8080 is specified, it is not possible to access the remote UI of the device where
the MEAP authentication application is running. (Port 8080 is reserved to allow the PS
Print Server Unit to redirect to the iR device.)
5) Restart the device if the port number is set.
F-2-241
F-2-243
2-179
Technology > MEAP > Login to SMS > Outline
2-180
Login to SMS
How to Check the Serial Number

When performing MEAP device support, the serial number of the device is necessary in some
cases.
Outline
SMS login may be done by entering a password for authentication, or by authentication via
the Remote Login Service (RLS) login window (RLS authentication). Settings can be changed
Examples of where the serial number is necessary
to allow either only one of these methods or both of them.
When initializing SMS login password (obtaining a switch license)

When obtaining a MEAP application license from LMS
SMS login window (password auth) RLS login window (user name/ password auth)
When obtaining a transfer license of MEAP application

When obtaining a special license for reinstalling MEAP application
If a problem occurs in the MEAP device and you want to contact the support department of
the sales company, you need to provide the serial number. Perform the following procedure to
get the serial number.
Checking from the PC browser

The serial number of the device is displayed on the SMS login screen, SMS screen, and
remote UI portal screen.
F-2-246
Login method
F-2-244
Checking from the device's Touch Panel
Authentication
method
Authentication service name
Users who may log in
Password
authentication
Password
authentication
SMS Installer Service (Password Users who know the SMS

Authentication)
login password
RLS login
SSO-H
SMS Installer Service (Remote

Login Service Authentication)
Users registered as
administrators with SSO-H
T-2-102
You can see the number by pressing the counter key on the Control Panel of the machine.
Note:
If Default Authentication is selected as the device authentication method, RLS
Authentication is not selectable as SMS Login method. Also, if RLS Authentication is
selected, the device authentication method (Default Authentication, SDL, SSO) cannot
be changed.
F-2-245
Technology > MEAP > Login to SMS > Outline
2-180
Technology > MEAP > Login to SMS > When SMS Cannot Be Accessed
When SMS Cannot Be Accessed
2-181
If login is not possible due to exclusive control
If you forgot the password (SMS login password initialization)

After changing the default SMS login password, if you forgot the new password and cannot
log in to SMS, you can use a switch license for password initialization to change the password
back to the default value "MeapSmsLogin".
Since access to SMS is under exclusive control, you cannot log in if another user has already
logged into the SMS of the same iR device.
An example of the exclusive control message
Note that there is no special password for service.

1) Obtain a switch license file for password initialization.
Contact the person in charge of support at the sales company, give the device's serial
number, and have a switch license file for password initialization issued.
2) Load the switch license file.
With nothing entered, click the [ Log in ] button to display the area for specifying a switch
license file for password initialization.
F-2-248
If you cannot log in due to exclusive control, you need to ask the other user to log out before
you can try again.
Note:
If you close the browser without logging out, the session remains active. In that case,
you cannot log in again.
If this problem occurs, you can wait for 5 minutes so that the session is disconnected.
Or, you can restart the device to force the session to disconnect.
F-2-247
3) Specify the switch license file.

Click the [ Browse ] button and specify the switch license file.
4) Initialize the login password.
Click the [ Initialize ] button to display an initialization confirmation page, and click the [ OK
] button.
Note:
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. (The password is case-sensitive.)
If you click [Cancel] button, the Login page opens without initializing the password.
Technology > MEAP > Login to SMS > When SMS Cannot Be Accessed
2-181
Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Outline
If [Key and Certificate Settings] is not set

If [Key and Certificate Settings] is not set correctly, you cannot access the URL for SMS
(https://<device's IP address>:8443/sms/). In that case, perform the following procedure.
1) Go to http://<device's IP address>:8000/sms/, and check to see that "HTTP 500 Internal
Server Error" appears.
2-182
Installing an MEAP Application

Outline
From the MEAP application installation screen, you can install the MEAP application as well
as the license file.
2) If it appears, perform the procedure "Key Pair and Server Certificate when Using Encrypted
SSL Communication" in this chapter.
Note:
In the case of SMS, by setting the key to be used, encrypted SSL communication
is always executed regardless of the following setting: [Settings/Registration] >
Management Settings > License/Other > MEAP Settings > [Use SSL] > ON/
OFF.
How to Deal with a Message "Certificate Error" That Appears at

the Time of Access
When accessing from the browser to SMS, a message "Certificate Error" appears in
some cases. In that case, perform the procedure "Installing a server certificate (reference
information)" in this chapter.
F-2-249
Before installing the MEAP application, be sure to check the following items.
Device compatibility with the MEAP application

To find out whether the device is compatible with the MEAP application, check the devices
supported by the MEAP application. Depending on the application, the device's firmware may
require version upgrade.
Resources availability (remaining amount)

The necessary resources (free storage space and free memory available) must be secured
for an MEAP application to run; otherwise, you cannot install the MEAP application.
To check the resource information, see "Device's resources" in this manual.
Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Outline
2-182
Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Procedure to install applications
Procedure to install applications
2-183
CAUTION:
1) Long on to SMS.
You cannot install only the license.
2) Click [ Install MEAP Application ] on the menu.
You will not be able to install the application without using the appropriate license.
Be sure to select its license file.
If you are adding a license to an existing application, see "Procedure adding a
license file".
If you are updating an existing application, stop the application; then, install the new
application or its license file. You will not be able to update an application while it is
running.
F-2-250
3) Check [ Install MEAP Application/License ]page appears.

4) Click [ Browse.. ] button, and select the application file and the license file of the application;
then, click [ Install ] button.
Note:
The license file is provided in text file format, enabling to view in a text editor. The
application ID and device serial number shown in the file allow users to confirm which
device to install with the license file.
Note that any changes added to the license file may disable installation. Cares should
be taken when confirming the contents of the license file.
Sample file
License File ID
Note:
Application File: identified by the extension jar.
License File: identified by the extension lic.
Application ID
Serial Number
Validated Period
Counter informations
F-2-252
F-2-251
2-183
5) Check the contents of the Confirm page; then, click [ OK ] button.
2-184
Note:
There are two ways to install an MEAP application. You can install using SMS, or install
using the [Register/Update Software] screen of the remote UI.
Screen example
F-2-253
6) Some applications show a screen to indicate the terms of agreement. Read the terms, and
click [ OK ].
7) Check the message "Installing...Please wait." appears, beginning the installation.
F-2-257
[Register/Update Software] provides two types of installations. One is [Manual

Installation] where you specify a jar file and a license file and then install. The other is
[Delivered Installation] where you enter a license access number.
For details of the procedures, please refer to the e-Manual.
F-2-254
8) Upon installation completed, click [ To MEAP Application Management ] button shown on

the screen to view MEAP Application Management page.
F-2-255
Note:
As for an application that has just been installed, the status is "Installed". In order to use
the application, it is necessary to click the [Start] button to change the status to [Started].
F-2-256
2-184
Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Resource Information
Resource Information
2-185
Device's resources
When 1 MEAP application operates, the resource volume allocated to each device is as
Outline
Application Management page shows [ resource information ] for information of the whole
device resources including Amount Used, Remaining, and Percent Used.
This function enables users to judge the remaining resources before installing the additional
application. Such resource information is shown based on the manifest header stated at the
top of each application, which declares the resources required in the application. Therefore,
the information does not necessarily show the resources actually in use.
follows (loaded resource list). Since the following value is an estimate, when installing the
MEAP applications, it needs to check the available resource of SMS.
Since the indication of SMS resource volume fluctuates by the login service (authentication
function) and configuration (future model), which the user selected, it may show a bigger
value than the following values.
List of Available Resources
The following resource information is shown:
Product Name
Storage
Memory
Thread
Socket
File Descriptor
If the hard disk does not have enough free space for the application, the application cannot
be installed.
Moreover, if the free space of any of the resources (Memory, Thread, Socket, and File
Descriptor) is insufficient, the application cannot be started.
iR-ADV C5051 series

iR-ADV C9075 series
iR-ADV 6075 series
iR-ADV 8105 PRO series
iR-ADV C2030/C2020 series Flash model
HDD model
iR-ADV 4045 series
iR-ADV C5255 series
iR-ADV C9280 PRO series
iR-ADV 6275 series
iR-ADV 8205 PRO series
Storage Memory Thread Socket File Description

1024MB
1024MB
1024MB
1024MB
220MB
1024MB
1024MB
1024MB
1024MB
1024MB
1024MB
128MB
128MB
128MB
128MB
32MB
128MB
128MB
128MB
128MB
128MB
128MB
256
256
256
256
162
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
128
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
256
128
256
256
256
256
256
256
T-2-103
The following procedure shows how to check the resource information.

Note:
1) Log in to SMS.
Among the resources, the free space of Storage is checked when installing an application.
For other resources, the free space is checked when the application is started.
Some applications call for a specific set of conditions for installation. For details, see the
Users Guide that comes with the individual applications.
Maximum installable application is up to 20 even if the remaining resource is adequate.
(However, the Send function consumes 1, it must be 19 in practice.) Authentication
application is not included in this number.
The MEAP application, which can be started simultaneously, is up to 19. (Authentication
application is not included in this number.)
2) Click [ MEAP Application Management ].

3) Check [ Resource Information ] for information of the whole device resources.
CAUTION:
To install an application, the user needs to use the following URL when accessing the
license control system to obtain a license file. In doing so, he/she needs to register the
license access number of the application and the serial number of the device.

http://www.canon.com/lms/license/
F-2-258
Technology > MEAP > Installing an MEAP Application > Resource Information
2-185
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Specifications > What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)?
MEAP Specifications
Declaration of multiple Device Specification IDs means that the application is operable
in all the environments declared. Upon installation of MEAP application in SMS or MEAP
What is MEAP Specifications (MEAP Spec Version)?
Enterprise Service Manager, matching of MEAP Specifications is executed on the side of
MEAP Specifications is one of the information required to judge whether MEAP applications
can be operated or not. With MEAP Specifications, you can prevent an application that uses
a specific function of device from being installed onto the device that does not have the
MEAP platform machine. The machine which doesn't support the version declared by the
application rejects installation of such an application.
MEAP Specifications for each model
function.
Product Name
About Name
The displayed name for Meap Specifications differs depending on the screen or the location
where the name is displayed.
iR-ADV C5051
iR-ADV C5045
iR-ADV C5035
iR-ADV C5030
In this document, it is referred to as "Meap Specifications".

The location where the name is displayed/shown
2-186
Initial MEAP SpecVer

5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13,
14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32,
33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45
Displayed name
Platform Information : SMS > [ System Management] > [ System Information MEAP Specifications
] > [ Platform Information]
System Information Print : Local UI [ Settings/Registration ] > [ Management
Settings ] > [ License/Other ] > [ MEAP Settings ] > [ System Information
Print]
Manifest file of the MEAP application
MeapSpecVersion
SDK documents
Ver.65.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29,
30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45,
46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 74
Mechanism
MEAP platform judges whether MEAP applications can be operated on it using on the 2
Device Specification ID
MEAP Specifications
Device Specification ID shows information such as the original functions of MFP (including
print, scan, and copy), and one that differs by model such as maximum copy number,
Ver.38.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29,
30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44,
45, 46, 49
Ver.50.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29,
30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44,
45, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59
T-2-104
information below:
Remarks
Ver.37.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29,
30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44,
45, 46
iR-ADV C9075
iR-ADV C9070
iR-ADV C9065
iR-ADV C9060
iR-ADV C7065
iR-ADV C7055
thus each model has a different ID. (It is easy to determine the IDs for this reason.) MEAP
application declares 1 or more Device Specification ID required for its execution. Declaration
of multiple Device Specification IDs means that the application is operable in all the models
declared. Upon installation of MEAP application in (using) SMS or MEAP Enterprise Service
Manager, matching of Device Specification ID is executed on the side of MEAP platform
machine. The machine which doesn't support the ID declared by the application rejects
installation of such an application.
Meanwhile, MEAP Specifications shows other information than defined by Device
Specification ID above, including network and security. Thus each model does not always
have the same version.
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13,

14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32,
33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45
Ver.37.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29,
30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44,
45, 46
Ver.38.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29,
30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44,
45, 46, 49
Ver.50.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29,
30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44,
45, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59
Ver.65.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29,
30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45,
46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 74
MEAP application declares 1 or more MEAP Specifications required for its execution.
2-186
2
Product Name
iR-ADV 6075
iR-ADV 6065
iR-ADV 6055

5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13,
14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32,
33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
39, 40, 41, 44, 45, 46,
49
iR-ADV 8105 PRO 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13,

iR-ADV 8095 PRO 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
iR-ADV 8085 PRO 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32,
33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
39, 40, 41, 44, 45, 46,
49
iR-ADV C2030
iR-ADV C2025
iR-ADV C2020
iR-ADV 4045
iR-ADV 4035
iR-ADV 4025
iR-ADV C5255
iR-ADV C5250
iR-ADV C5240
iR-ADV C5235
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13,

14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32,
33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45,
46, 47, 48, 49
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13,

14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32,
33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45,
46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52,
53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58,
59
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13,
14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32,
33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45,
46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52,
53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58,
59, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68,
69, 70, 71, 72, 74, 78,
80
Remarks
Product Name
Ver.20.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29,
30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 44, 45,
46, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59
iR-ADV C9280 PRO

iR-ADV C9270 PRO
iR-ADV C7280
iR-ADV C7270
iR-ADV C7260
Ver.42.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29,
30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44,
45, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59,
74
Ver.20.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 1, 32, 33,
34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40 , 41, 44, 45, 46, 49, 50, 51,
52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59
Ver.42.xxor later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25 ,26, 27, 29,
30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44,
45, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59,
74
Ver.10.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19,25,
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40,
41, 42, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 53
Ver.32.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29,
30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44,
45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 53, 74
Ver.11.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25, 26, 27, 29,
30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44,
45, 46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59,
74
2-187
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13,

14, 15, 17, 18, 19,
25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31,
32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37,
38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44,
45,46,47, 49, 50, 51,
52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57,
58, 59, 64, 65, 66, 67,
68, 69, 70, 71, 72 ,74
,78 ,80 ,82
iR-ADV 6275
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13,
iR-ADV 6265
14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
iR-ADV 6255
26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32,
33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45,
46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52,
53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58,
59, 64, 65, 66, 67, 69,
70, 72, 74, 78, 79, 80,
82
iR-ADV 8205 PRO 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13,
iR-ADV 8295 PRO 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, 25,
iR-ADV 8285 PRO 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32,
33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38,
39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45,
46, 47, 49, 50, 51, 52,
53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58,
59, 64, 65, 66, 67, 69,
70, 72, 74, 78, 79, 80,
82
Remarks
-
T-2-105
2-187
MEAP Specifications List

Ver
Ver
Description
MEAP basic function
MEAP Spec Version 1 function and SSL/TSL + Proxy
MEAP Spec Version 1 function and CPCA V2 + ERS (Error Recovery Service) + New SSL/TSL
6
7
Reserved
MEAP Spec Version 5 function and Compact PDF + OCR PDF (Text Searchable) + USB Host
(Buffering of Interrupt Transfer)
Reserved
MEAP Spec Version 5 function and USB-Host (Exception + Clear Feature + Set Feature+ Hot
Plug) + WINS address acquisition using MIB Agent + Timer Service + SSL client authentication
MEAP Spec Version 5 function and AMS
9
10
11
13
14
MEAP Spec Version 5 function and J2ME1.1 Support + Encrypted PDF + Trace and smooth
PDF + CTK2.0
Device signature PDF
15
IMI + ERS (API addition for IMI) , IPv6, Extended encryption function (AES/RC4)
17
Acquiring images of JBIG format
18
Parsing XML documents (XML parser)
19
Enhancement of IMI function (IMI Version1.2 series)
21
25
Reserved
API to access the HID/Mass Storage class devices.
26
MEAP driver preference function
27
Symbols that can be used with MibAgent added. (symbols for IPv6 address acquisition)
29
IMI API added (IMI version 1.2.1 enabled)
30
Extended address book function. (e-mail/group/i-FAX/file)
31
Integrated ERS function
32
Extended Imaging function (function to generate PDF/OOXML (PowerPoint) with visible

signature)
Extended function for imageRUNNER / iR ADVANCE series (API for address book/ CTK/
TopMenu)
Extended IMI Box function (v1.3.0)
33
34
35
2-188
Description
36
Extended SIS function (function to check the network cable status, function to check PS print
server unit status)
Reserved
37
CLS (Contextual Login Service) Supporting API Added
38
imageRUNNER / iR ADVANCE Series administrative privileges supported
39
MEAP Specifications added according to Jcrypto API Specification Change
40
ImagingAPI (Creation API of Visible Signature PDF) added
41
42
44
45
Reserved
Reserved
imageRUNNER / iR ADVANCE Series Remote Address Book Supported, RemoteFAX
Supported
Addition of API that allows acquisition of the HID installation status
46
Multilingualization of the USB keyboard of the System Driver
47
48
Addition of API which executes a print order from the MEAP application of the IMI encryption
PDF document
ID expressing the scan function for iR-ADV C2030/C2025/C2020 series
49
50
Reserved
SecurityOptionalPackage
51
IMI function expansion of iR-ADV C5051 series (Ver.50.xx or later) or later
52
53
(iR-ADV C5051 series (Ver.50.xx or later)) Addition of registered API to enable SSL
communication setting (On/Off) for each URL
Disclosure of registration/deletion function to/from Quick Menu
54
Function to notify an event to the application at recovery from the sleep mode.
55
System account release function
56
MEAP User Preference Service
57
MEAP Application Configuration Service
58
MEAP Application Log Service
59
Integrated authentication service
2-188
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application
Ver
2-189
MEAP Application Management
Description
60
SFP basic functions
61
AVS (Lightweight Applet Viewer Service) for LBP
62
SIS (Lightweight System Interface Service) for LBP
63
LDT
Starting, Stopping, or Uninstalling the MEAP Application
64
IMI customization
Procedure to start and stop a MEAP application
65
Extension of MEAP User Preference Service (Ver56) (preference shared among applications)
1) Log in to the SMS. (Refer to "Login to SMS" in this manual.)
66
68
Reserved
Addition of Office Open XML's Word creation API
69
Extension of the encryption PDF function (AES 128-bit/256-bit)
70
Addition of 3 formats (uncompressed searchable PDF, XPS, and linearized searchable PDF)
71
72
73
74
Reserved
Reserved
IMI: API that supports A4 scanners and allows for specifying of the direction of the original
image
SSL: Support for addition of the CN validation function
75
Reserved
76
Addition of the SFP ExtendedTextInputView class
77
78
79
80
81
82
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
API to recover from Sleep 1
Outline
You can use the MEAP application management screen to perform basic management tasks
of the MEAP application (start, stop, uninstall), or check the device's resource information.
2) Click [ Application List ]. (If the Application List is already being displayed, this operation is
not necessary.)
3) Click [ Start ] or [ Stop ] button shown for the MEAP application to be started or stopped.
F-2-259
T-2-106
2-189
4) Check to see that the status of the MEAP application in question is either [ Started ] or [
Stopped ].
2-190
Procedure to uninstall the MEAP application

Before uninstalling the MEAP application, check that the following conditions are met.
The MEAP application has stopped.
The license has been disabled or deleted. (The status is "Not Installed".)
F-2-261
For information on the procedure to stop the MEAP application, see the previous section
"Procedure to start and stop a MEAP application".
For information on the procedure to delete the license file, see the following section
"Managing the License File".
F-2-260
If the MEAP application cannot be started
Note:
When a user tries to uninstall an application before deleting the license, the following
message is shown.
If the conditions to start the MEAP application are not satisfied, the MEAP application cannot
be started.
If the MEAP application cannot be started, check the following items.
Is a valid license installed?
If the license has expired, you cannot start the application. If the license has already expired,
obtain a new license and then update the license. ( See "Managing the License File" in this
manual.)
F-2-262
If the license file of the selected application cannot be deleted, the [Uninstall] button is
grayed out and therefore the application cannot be uninstalled.
Are the necessary resources available?

If the resources such as memory capacity or number of threads are not sufficient, the
application also cannot be started.
Delete any unnecessary data to secure sufficient resources.
If the application still cannot be started after checking the foregoing conditions, contact the
support department of the sales company.
CAUTION:
If the application you are uninstalling is associated with another application, a message
will appear to indicate that the package exported by the application will no loner be
available. Uninstalling such an application may also disable its associated applications.
2-190
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Managing the License File
1) Log in to SMS to click [ MEAP Application Management ] on the menu.

2) Check that the status of the application you want to uninstall is [ Stop ] and the license has
been disabled. (The status is "Not Installed".)
2-191
Managing the License File
Outline
The license file management functions allow you to perform the following operations related
to the license file necessary for the MEAP application to run.
Update the license which has already expired.
Disable or delete the license file in order to uninstall the MEAP application.
These license management functions can be performed from the [ MEAP Application
Management ] screen.
F-2-263
3) Click [ Uninstall ] button for the application to be uninstalled.
The main license management functions are as follows:

Adding a license
When the license has expired, you can add a license file.
Disabling a License File
Before uninstalling the MEAP application, the license needs to be deleted. In that case, you
must first disable the license file because a license file which has not been disabled cannot
be downloaded or deleted.
Downloading / Removing an Invalidated License File
Before uninstalling the MEAP application, you need to delete its license file which has already
been disabled.
By downloading the license file to your PC before it is deleted, you can use it when installing
the application again to the same device.
F-2-264
4) Check the application name to be uninstalled shown on the screen to click [ Yes ] button.
WARNING:
After deleting the license file which has been disabled, you can no longer download the
Upon [ Yes ] button clicked, uninstallation process is started.
license file.
F-2-265
2-191
Procedure adding a license file
2-192
4) Click [ Browse ] button, and select the license file you want to install.
1) Log on to SMS.
2) On MEAP Application Management, click the name of the application to which you want to
add a license file.
F-2-268
F-2-266
3) In [ Application / License Information ] page shown on the screen, click [ License
5) Click [ Install ] button.
Management ] button.
F-2-269
F-2-267
6) Check the content of the confirmation page, and click [ OK ] button.
2-192
Procedure disabling a license file (suspending a license)
2-193
2) Click the name of the application that you want to disable.
CAUTION:
Since the license file cannot be disabled when the application is still running, the
application needs to be stopped before disabling the license file.
Once suspended, the status of the license will be Not Installed, and its application
will no longer be available for use.
You can later restore a suspended license file as long as you are doing so on the
same iR, the device with the same device serial number.
If the machine needs to be replaced due to a device failure, use the transfer license
during the replacement. (See "License for forwarding")
1) Stop the application you want to uninstall on MEAP Application Management page.
F-2-271
3) On Application/ License Information page, click [ License Management ] button.
F-2-272
F-2-270
2-193
2-194
Procedure downloading / removing an invalidated license file
4) License Management page appears. Click [ Disable ] button.
Note:
The downloaded license file can be used for reinstallation only in the same iR device
(with the same device serial number).
1) Login to SMS. (See Chapter 2, "Login to SMS.")
2) Application List page appears. On MEAP Application Management page , click the name of
the application you want.
F-2-273
5) Click [ Yes ].
F-2-275
3) Check Application/ License Information page appears.

4) On Application / License Information page, click [ License Management ] button.
F-2-274
F-2-276
2-194
5) License Management page appears. To download, click [ Download ] button.
2-195
7) To delete, click [ Delete ] button.
F-2-278
F-2-277
6) When you have selected [ Download ] button, specify where you want to store the file by
following the instructions on the screen.
8) When the dialog to confirm deletion is shown, click [ Yes ] button.
F-2-279
WARNING:
Without the license file, an application cannot be reinstalled even to the MEAP de-vice
that the application had been installed last time. Download and save the license file
before deleting the application.
2-195
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Management > Other License File Management Functions
Other License File Management Functions
2-196
2) Move to the download page of license forwarded for the device as sender (https:// IP
address of device: 8443/sms/ForwardLicense).
Reusable license
When reinstalling, Disable License file should be downloaded (see Chapter 0, Disabling a
License File . and see Chapter 0, Downloading / Removing an Invalidated License File. in
this manual) or a license for reinstallation should be obtained from LMS, before reinstallation.
This specification aims to prevent misuse of applications.
To increase convenience of users, only application with unlimited validity date and application
counter (e.g. Portal Service, SDL, SSO) has been made to be able to install as many times
as needed by the same license file. This kind of license is called 'Reusable license'.
F-2-281
3) Specify the application to be forwarded.
License for forwarding

If the machine needs to be replaced due to a device failure, you can transfer the license
information used in the MEAP application to the new machine and continue its usage. Service
engineers are responsible for license transfer as this task requires the SMS hidden page (not
open to users).
The procedure is shown below.
1) Log in to SMS, stop the application to be forwarded (see Chapter 0, Starting and Stopping
a MEAP Application. in this manual).
F-2-282
4) Click [ Disable ] button on the [ Disable License File ].
F-2-280
F-2-283
2-196
5) The window to confirm whether to create a transfer licence will be displayed. Click [ Yes ].
2-197
8) Specify the download destination, click [ Save ].
F-2-287
F-2-284
6) When [Download] button on the [ Download / Delete Transfer License File ] becomes
9) After downloading the license file for forwarding, click [ Delete ] to display the confirmation
screen and click [ Yes ] to delete the file (in consideration of breakage of license for
effective, click [Download] button.
forwarding, deleting disabled license can be executed after all steps have been completed).
F-2-288
10)
Log out of SMS.
11)
Since this downloaded transfer license is the file only to prove the license invalidation,
it cannot be used for installation to the other device as it is. Send the transfer license to
the service support contact of your nearest sales company to request issuance of the new
license for installation in the new device.
F-2-285
7) The dialogue [ File Download ] is displayed. Click [ Save ].
Note:
When requesting issuance of license for forwarding, inform the sales company of the
name of product name and serial No. of the device as sender, and of the name of
product name and serial No. of the forwarding destination.
12)
Install application using the license for forwarding issued by the sales company.
F-2-286
2-197
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview
Enhanced System Application Management
2-198
About Login Service

The login service is started up to authenticate the user when MEAP-enabled iR device is
Outline
[ Enhanced System Application Management ] mainly manages the login services for logging
in to devices.
Installing and uninstalling Enhanced System Application Management (login services, etc.)
Switching login services (switching the method to log in to devices)
Checking installation status of other System Applications
booted up. Login service changes and install/ uninstall are carried out from the [ System
Management ] page.
The preinstalled login applications are Default Authentication and Single Sign On-H, and
Default Authentication is enabled by default.
CAUTION:
This device does not support SDL, conventional SSO and Security Agent.
Default Authentication overview

This login service is selected when the department ID management is enabled or no
authentication function is set. Set the department ID management to [ON] on Setting /
Registration (Additional Functions mode) of this device and register 7-digit ID and PIN by
department. This setting restricts the use of this device only to users keying the registered
ID and PIN. Department IDs/ and PINs can be registered on the touch panel of this device or
Remote UI.
SSO-H (Single Sign-On-H) overview

This is a merger of the existing SDL and SSO login services and has the following features.
F-2-289
The following three authentication methods may be selected from.

Server authentication
Server authentication and local authentication
Local device authentication
Active Directory or LDAP can be used as the server for server authentication.
It is not necessary to prepare a server for Security Agent (SA). (In the case of SSO, SA is
necessary.)
2-198
Environment confirmation
Differences from conventional SSO

Domain B
Domain C
DC
2-199
Domain B
DC
DC
DC
Refer to the section of "Preparation for Using SSO-H" of this manual for system requirements
Domain C
needed in each login service.

DC
Specification of SSO-H
DC
Item
SA
Device
Domain A
SSO
No. of local device users
Up to 5000
Maximum number of domains
Active Directory : 200 domains (this device not included)
IPv6
Authentication provided in IPv6 supports AD/KDC/DNS of

Windows Server 2008 only)
Resource used
Memory : 3584KB
Storage : 25000KB
File Description : 27
Thread : 33
Socket : 33
Device
Domain A
SSO-H
F-2-290
Network ports
used
CAUTION:
When the setting is SSO-H, the card reader for the option controller card cannot be
used.
When the setting is SSO-H, start up takes a little longer when compared to Default
Authentication (because of the time required for object initialization).
To use the SEND function when the setting is for SSO-H, when sending email, mail
addresses need to be programmed against each user. If they are not, email cannot
be sent. Note, however, that when sending i-Fax, the mail addresses set in the
device are used.
The system configuration is different from previous SSO, so individual management
is required.
Data porting of user information that was being used with the earlier SSO local
device authentication and SDL can be done by exporting/ importing. However,
application settings information cannot be ported.
Specification
Connecting
88 KDC
53 DNS
1 - 65535 ( Default : 389) : LDAP
Listening
10000 - 10100
Supported authentication server Active Directory

Windows 2000 Server SP4/ Windows Server 2003 SP1 * /
Windows Server 2003 R2 * / Windows 2008 Server *
*64-bit OS is not supported.
LDAP
Novell eDirectory V8.8 SP6 for Windows
Lotus Domino V8.5 for Window
Supported Active Directory
Windows 2000 Server SP4/ Windows Server 2003 SP1/Windows

Server 2003 R2/ Windows 2008 Server(64BitOS not supported)
Availability of Department
Management Linkage
Available only in local authentication

T-2-107
SSO/SDL handling
This model does not support older versions of SSO or SDL released in the past.
2-199
2-200
Setting the Authentication Method
Using an Accounting Product When SSO-H Is Used
In the case of SSO-H, it is possible to use a combination of multiple authentication methods.
SSO-H has collaborative linkage with NetSpot Accountant, imageWARE / iW Accounting
The combination can be changed from the SSO-H setting screen. (For details, refer to
Manager, imageWARE Enterprise Management Console / iW Management Console Access
e-Manual > MEAP > Menu for Administrators > Setting the SSO-H > "Setting the User
Management Plug-in, imageWARE Enterprise Management Console / iW Management
Authentication System".)
Console Accounting Management Plug-in.

For details on the combination, refer to the User's Manual or Service Manual of the product.
Conducting Department ID Management When SSO-H Is Used

Department ID Management can be conducted also when SSO-H is used for login service.
Usage Conditions
In order to allow coexistence of SSO-H and Department ID management, the following
conditions need to be satisfied.
F-2-291
Note:
The default settings are shown below.
User authentication method : "Server Authentication + Local Device Authentication"

Type of authentication : "Active Directory"
Only "Local Device Authentication" can be used as the user authentication method.
The department ID and password have been already set for the SSO-H login user before
enabling department ID management.
The information (the department ID and password) set for the login user coincides with the
information registered in Department ID Management.
Setting Procedure
CAUTION:
In order to allow coexistence of SSO-H and Department ID management, the following
To ensure the security, it is recommended to change the password and the user
name of the Local Device Authentication administrator from those at the time of
shipment immediately after you have started using SSO-H.
1) Change the authentication method to DA (Default Authentication).
Since department ID and password are not assigned to domain users, distributing
setting information where the department ID is enabled to a device where the server
authentication is enabled may make the device unable to be logged in. If the device
has become unable to be logged in, follow "Remedy to Be Performed When the
Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in" in this manual.
procedure needs to be performed to enable the setting.

Access SMS, and select [Default Authentication] in [Enhanced System Application
Management] > [Login Service]. (How to log in to SMS can be found in "Login to SMS".)
2-200
F-2-292
2) Restart the device.
2-201
Restart the device in order to reflect the changes in login service.
3) Disable Depart ID Management.
6) Change the user registration information of SSO-H.
In user mode ([Settings/Registration]), select [Management Settings] > [User Management]
Access the URL shown below, and change the content to the information registered in
> [Department ID Management] > [OFF]. In the case of remote UI, access [Settings/
Department ID Management.
Registration] > [Management Settings] > [User Management] > [Department ID
Or, import the setting file whose content you want to use.
Management] > [Department ID Management Settings], and deselect [Enable Department

ID Management].
SSO-H user registration information edition screen

(SSO management screen [Main Menu] > [User Management] > [Edit User Information] or
https://<IP address>:8443/sso/Edit).
F-2-293
4) Change the authentication method back to SSO-H authentication.

Access SMS, and select [Single Sign-On H] in [Enhanced System Application Management]
> [Login Service]. (How to log in to SMS can be found in "Login to SMS". )
F-2-295
F-2-294
2-201
SSO-H user registration information import screen
2-202
8) Check that the device can be logged in.
(SSO management screen [Main Menu] > [User Management] > [Import User Information]
Log off and then log on to check that the device can be logged in with an environment
or (https://<IP address>:8443/sso/Import).
where Local Device Authentication and Department ID Management are enabled.
F-2-298
F-2-296
7) Enable Depart ID Management.

> [Department ID Management] > [ON]. In the case of remote UI, access [Settings/
Note:
In the case of conventional SSO, department management can be conducted also
when server authentication is used provided that iWAM/iW EMC account management
is used, which is not supported by SSO-H.

Management] > [Department ID Management Settings], and select [Enable Department ID
Management].
F-2-297
2-202
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Local device authentication
2-203
Local device authentication
Setting the Administrator for Server Authentication

When using Server Authentication, the user who satisfies the specified conditions (user
attribute and its match criteria) becomes the administrator (the device administrator and the
SSO-H administrator).
It is one of the user authentication methods using SSO-H, and is used for an iR device on a
stand-alone basis.
The default user attribute and whether the setting value can be changed or not are shown
iR device
below.
Item
Search Criteria:
User Attribute:
Character String:
Default value
Active Directory
LDAP
Exact Match
memberOf
Canon Peripheral Admins
Not Available
Not Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
Local user
Remote user
T-2-108
The settings of the administrator can be changed on the following screen: remote UI > Single
F-2-300
Sign-On H > Configuration (http://device's IP address:8000/sso/ActionSet)
Register the user to be authenticated on the database in the device.

User management can be performed from the User Management screen (http://device's IP
address:8000/sso/) or imageWARE Enterprise Management Console. The login destination is
[This device].
F-2-299
User Management screen
System Manager Linkage (automatic ID allocation to

SystemManagers)
SSO provided the automated function conventionally on Security Agent (hereinafter SA) to
authenticate System Manager by allocating IDs set on SA to domain authentication managers
(users belonging to Canon Peripheral Admins group). However, SSO-H does not support this
function.
F-2-301
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Local device authentication
2-203
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server authentication (Active Directory authentication)
Server authentication (Active Directory authentication)
2-204
CAUTION:
Outline
It is one of the user authentication methods using SSO-H. User authentication is performed
with the device linked with a domain controller on the network in an Active Directory
environment. It is a user authentication where the user is authenticated by the domain on the
network when the user logs into the device. In addition to users belonging to the domain that
authentication is enabled may make the device unable to be logged in. If the device has
become unable to be logged in, follow "Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has
Become Unable to Be Logged in" in this manual.
includes the iR device, users belonging to domains that have a reliable relationship with the
domain (multi-domain) can also be authenticated. The domain name of the login destination
can be selected by the users themselves upon login.
Using one of the options (Net Spot Accountant, imageWARE Accounting Manager, or
imageWARE EMC Accounting Management Plug-in) makes it possible to analyze/manage
the iR device usage.
Dmain A
Domain B
Domain controller
Active Directory
With SSO-H, access to Active Directory within site can be prioritized or restricted, so there
is a setting called 'Access Mode in Sites'. Sites programmed in Active Directory comprise
multiple subnets. In this mode, SSO-H uses site information to access the same site as the
device, or the subnet Active Directory.
The SSO-H default setting is with the site internal access mode OFF.
Access Active Directory within same site only.
Domain controller
Active Directory
Trusting
Access Mode in Sites
If there is no Active Directory within the same site, or if connection fails, there will be an
relationship
authentication error.
Access another site if Active Directory within the same site cannot be located.
If there is no Active Directory within the same site, or if connection fails, an Active Directory
external to the site will be accessed.
If all attempts to access Active Directory fail, there will be an authentication error.
Available
Domain A user
iR Device
Domain B user
The operating specifications of the site internal access mode are as described below.
F-2-302
The protocol used is as follows.
When first logging in to the login service after booting iR, the domain controller (DC) is
obtained from the site list.
Kerberos:LLS/RLS/ILS
However, upon the first login, even if the site functionality is active, connection to DC is
NTLMV2:WLS(Web Service Login Service)
random. (This is because, if connection to DC should fail, the site to which the device belongs
User information acquisition is done by LDAP, so the Active Directory LDAP port needs to be
cannot be ascertained.)
made accessible. If LDAP connection fails, the authentication will end in error.
If the device IP address or the domain name are changed, the site settings are acquired once
No. of supported domains: 200 (unchanged from SSO) Site access supported.
more.
CAUTION:
In this mode, at the first login (first authentication of domain to which the device belongs)
In the case of using Server Authentication (Active Directory authentication), it is

necessary to synchronize the time settings of the Active Directory server and the
machine (and the PC for login). If the difference in time setting is 5 minutes or longer,
an error will occur at the time of login. (The setting of the allowable difference in time
can be changed.)
LDAP-Bind is performed directly to DC and site information acquired by LDAP from DC.
From the acquired site list, the site to which the device subnet belongs is extracted and this
becomes the site to which device belongs. Active Directory address is acquired (retrieved
from DNS)
2-204
2-205
Settings for access mode in sites
Note:

The Active Directory subnet is assumed to be the same subnet as the device sub-net.
In the Active Directory addresses, the Active Directories of the same site are listed.
Active Directories of the same subnet as the device are listed first.
If there is no Active Directory with the same subnet as the device, Active Directories
belonging to different subnets than the device are listed.
The Active Directories within the same site are accessed in order. Note, however, that
where there are multiple Active Directories within the same site, access to those Active
Directories will be in the order in which the address list was obtained.
If there is no Active Directory within the same site, if access outside of the site is
programmed, Active Directories outside of the site will be accessed in the order in which
the address list was obtained.
Switching between site internal access mode/ non site internal access mode, as well as
detailed mode settings, are done via DMS or iWEMC.
Site internal access mode settings window (DMS)
Site list acquisition
specified. In other words, if there is no site list, which site's Active Directory is accessed
depends upon the order of the Active Directory addresses returned by DNS. Therefore, when
acquiring the site list, LDAP may access the Active Di rectory of a different site. Therefore, in
such cases, it is sometimes necessary to access across sites or subnets, which means that
DNS Server A
records:
AD 192.168.1.2
AD 172.24.12.2
AD 172.24.35.2
AD 211.111.1.30
SSO-Tokyo 172.24.12.80
SSO-Osaka 192.168.1.90
SSO-Hakata 211.111.1.3
LDAP protocol needs to have continuity across sites (subnets) (normally, LDAP is port No.
389). Further, if connection with Active Directory fails when acquiring site information, another
Active Directory will be accessed.
Site information, once it has been acquired, is cached within the device. The life settings of
4.Access Active
Directory of same
site
DC-Tokyo/DNS
172.24.12.2
n
In SSO-H, the Active Directory to be accessed when acquiring the site list cannot be
Domain X
io
the site list will be acquired again from Active Directory upon the next login.
at
authentication by Active Directory should fail, an authentication error will be generated and
Sample of Processing Access Mode in Sites
lic
needs to be accessed in LDAP, so SASL-Kerberos-Bind is used by the login user account. If
pl
Active Directory. In order to obtain the site list from the Active Directory, Active Directory
F-2-303
The figure below shows a sample of processing Access Mode in Sites.
Re
After booting up, upon the first login by LLS or ILS/ RLS, the site list is obtained from the
2.Get Active
Directory list
N
WA3. Access Active
Directory of same
subnet
DC-Osaka/DNS
172.168.1.2
Site:Tokyo::
172.24.12.0/24
172.24.35.0/24
Repllic
ation
1. When making initial

settings, obtain site list
and ascertain which
site the device
belongs to.
SSO-Tokyo
172.24.12.80 WAN
Site:Tokyo
172.12.12.0/24
172.24.35.0/24
Site:Osaka::
192.168.1.0/24
Site:Hakata::
211.111.1.0/24
DC-Hakata/DNS
211.111.1.30
the cache can be set so that site information in the cache is updated upon the first login after
the device boots up, or so that the cache is not updated once acquired.
Site:Osaka
192.168.1.0/24
SSO-Tokyo
192.168.1.90
SSO-Tokyo
Site:Hakata
211.111.1.0/24
211.111.1.3
F-2-304
2-205
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server Authentication (LDAP Authentication)
1) SSO-Tokyo acquires site lists from Active Directories.

Note, however, that the Active Directories accessed in order to acquire site lists are in the
order in which they were returned by DNS, so there is no guarantee that the same Active
Directory will be accessed as in the initial settings (upon device settings or changes to NW
2-206
Server Authentication (LDAP Authentication)

It is one of the user authentication methods using SSO-H. User authentication is performed
with the device linked with the LDAP Server on the network in an LDAP environment.
settings, etc.).
iR Device
LDAP Server
[Site subnet list]

Site: Tokyo: = 172.24.12.0/24, 172.24.35.0/24
Local user
Site: Osaka: = 192.168.1.0/24

Site: Hakata: = 211.111.1.0/24
As a result, since SSO-Tokyo is 172.24.12.80, the subnet is 172.24.12.0/24, and is judged
as belonging to site Tokyo.
2) The DNS server obtains its Active Directory list from the primary or secondary DNS, as set
Remote user
in the device.
[Active Directory]
172.24.12.2, 172.24.35.2, 192.168.1.2, 211.111.1.30
3) Of the Active Directories in 2), above, the ones that belong to the same site (Tokyo) are
172.24.12.2 and 172.24.35.2.
Of these, the Active Directory that is the same subnet as SS-Tokyo is 172.24.12.2.
Therefore, this one will be accessed.
4) If access fails at step 3), above, the other Active Directory of the same site, 172.24.35.2,
will be accessed.
5) If access fails at step 4), above, also, SSO-Osaka and SSO-Hakata will be accessed (the
order will depend on the order of the Active Directories in DNS). Note, however, that this is
an optional operation.
Logging into other domains at multi-domain
At multi-domain, if another domain is logged into, based on the site/ subnet information
retrieved in the home domain, the Active Directories of the login destination domain/ KDC
address list are computed. In the event that the domain controller IP addresses of other
domains are outside of the site access range, and only the domain controller within the site
is programmed for access, an error message will be displayed to the effect that the site
information is incorrect.
F-2-305
LDAP server authentication can be used for devices that support MEAP User Preference
Service (MEAP Specification Ver.56) and MEAP Application Setting Information Management
(MEAP Specification Ver.57).
As for models that do not support MEAP User Preference Service and MEAP Application
Setting Information Management , [LDAP Server] cannot be selected as the type of the
authentication server on the SSO-H Configuration page. Moreover, it is not possible to access
the LDAP Server Management screen and the Add Server screen.
Simple bind (a method where the password is not encrypted) is used as the bind
(authentication) between SSO-H and LDAP server. It is therefore strongly recommended to
always use SSL connection from a security standpoint.
As for the version of LDAP, only Ver.3 is supported.
ON/OFF of SSL connection can be changed on the LDAP Server Management page.
The time-out value of connection is 60 seconds.
In the case of using LDAP server authentication, the characters entered as the user name are
not case-sensitive, but the characters entered as the password are case-sensitive.
In the case of SSO-H, authentication is not allowed when the user name includes "* (asterisk)".
If authentication is performed with "* (asterisk)" used in the user name, an authentication error
occurs.
CAUTION:
authentication is enabled may make the device unable to be logged in. If the device has
become unable to be logged in, follow "Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has
Become Unable to Be Logged in" in this manual.
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Server Authentication (LDAP Authentication)
2-206
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Steps to Change Login Services
Server authentication and local device authentication
2-207
2) A page will appear showing the various selections you can make for the login service. Click
It is a user authentication method provided with both the "server authentication" function and
[SWITCH] button for the login service to be used.
the "local device authentication" function.

It is possible to use server authentication to authenticate the users registered on the
authentication server under normal conditions and use local device authentication when a
user who cannot be added to the authentication server needs to be temporarily authenticated.
If a trouble occurs in the authentication server, local device authentication can be used as an
emergency measure until recovery from the trouble.
Local user
Server authentication
Local
device authentication
F-2-308
Remote user
3) When login service application you have selected turns to Start after Restart, restart the
F-2-306
device.
Steps to Change Login Services

1) Click [ Enhanced System Application Management] on [System Management ].
F-2-309
F-2-307
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Steps to Change Login Services
2-207
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Login Service Installation Procedure
2-208
Login Service Installation Procedure
CAUTION:
In case that the login method to a device is set to SSO-H, if you log in SMS with RLS
authentication, no selection is displayed although it is the screen to change the login
method.
Follow the procedure show below to install login services.

1) Access SMS, and select [System Management] > [Enhanced System Application
Management].
F-2-310
This is the specification to prevent the inconsistent setting which enables to stop SMS
Installer Service (Password Authentication) by changing the login method to Default
Authentication.
When you want to change the login method to a device, log in the SMS with the
password authentication.
F-2-311
2) Click the [Browse] button, and specify the enhanced system application file and license file.
F-2-312
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Login Service Installation Procedure
2-208
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Login Service Uninstallation Procedure
2-209
Login Service Uninstallation Procedure
3) Click [ Install] button.
Follow the procedure show below to uninstall login services.

In order to uninstall a login service, the service needs to be stopped ("Installed" status).
Default Authentication cannot be uninstalled even when the service is stopped.
1) Access SMS, and select [System Management] > [Enhanced System Application
Management].
F-2-313
F-2-314
2) Click the [Uninstall] button of the login service you want to uninstall.
F-2-315
Technology > MEAP > Enhanced System Application Management > Login Service Uninstallation Procedure
2-209
Technology > MEAP > System Application Management > Password authentication
System Application Management

This function manages the login services for logging in to SMS.
There are two login methods: one is "password authentication" where you enter the password
2-210
Note:
If you want to change the display language, select the language from the drop-down list
of [Language] at the upper right of the login screen, and click the update button.
for SMS on the SMS login screen and log in, and the other is "RLS authentication" where you
do not use the SMS login screen but enter the user ID and password on the RLS (Remote
Login Service) screen for authentication.
F-2-317
Password authentication
Enter the password on the SMS login screen for authentication. Only one password can be
set for SMS.
The login procedure is shown below.
Note:
If the wrong password is entered, the following window is displayed. The user's system
administrator may have changed the password, so confirm the password with the
system administrator. Note that there is no special password for service.
1) Access SMS from the browser of a PC on the same network as the MEAP device. The URL
is as follows.
URL: https://<IP address of MEAP device>:8443/sms/
Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/
Note:
To encrypt the password information input when logging in, SSL of the login screen
was made effective. However, it is redirected to new URL (effective SSL) even when
accessing with URL (non-SSL) before.
2) Enter the password in the password entry field, and click the [Log In] button. The default
password is MeapSmsLogin. (The password is case-sensitive.)
F-2-318
F-2-316
Technology > MEAP > System Application Management > Password authentication
2-210
Technology > MEAP > System Application Management > RLS Authentication
RLS Authentication
Login without using the SMS login window but by entering the user ID and password for
authentication in the RLS (Remote Login Service) window. The user information (user name
and password) used is the information for server authentication or local device authentication.
The login procedures are as follows.
2-211
Note:
Only the following users may us SMS via RLS.
For local device authentication, users with Administrator or Device Admin authority.
In the case of server authentication, the users who belong to the group (default: Canon
Peripheral Admins) specified as the device administrator on the SSO-H Configuration
screen.
1) Access SMS by RLS Authentication from the PC browser on the same network as the
MEAP device.
URL: https://<IP address of MEAP device>:8443/sms/rls/
Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/rls/
Note:
To encrypt the password information input when logging in, SSL of the login screen was
made effective. However, it is redirected to new URL (effective SSL) even when accessing
with URL (non-SSL) before.
F-2-320
F-2-319
Note:
When the device authentication method used is server authentication, enter the user
name, password and login destination registered with authentication server and then click
Log In.
If the authentication method used is local device authentication, enter the user name,
password and login destination registered in the device and click Log In button.
The user information is set as below for local device authentication by default. Both are
case sensitive.
User Name: Administrator
Password: password
2-211
Note:
SMS Access can be gained also from Remote UI.
Access Remote UI and click on SMS shortcut shown on the lower right of the screen to
gain access to SMS.
When only the password authentication is enabled, the password authentication screen
is shown.
When only the RLS authentication is enabled, no further authentication is needed to
access SMS. This is because users have already authorized upon accessing to Remote
UI.
2-212
CAUTION:
method.
F-2-322
Authentication.
F-2-321
2-212
Technology > MEAP > Setting the method to login to SMS > Outline
2-213
Setting the method to login to SMS
Setting for login by Password Authentication

The procedures for changing the password authentication Start/ stop settings are as follows.
Outline
1) Access SMS login screen by RLS Authentication from the PC browser on the same network
The method to log into SMS can be specified by one of the following methods.
If you want to change the password authentication settings: Use RLS authentication
to log in, and change the settings.
If you want to change the RLS authentication settings: Use password authentication
to log in, and change the settings.

Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/rls
2) Enter the user name and the password of the user registered as an administrator, select
The following table shows the start/stop combinations of the two login methods.
the login destination, and then click the [Log In] button.
Combination of Login Methods

Start RLS Authentication
as the MEAP device.
Stop RLS Authentication
Start Password Authentication
Login available with either method
Login available only with
Stop Password Authentication
Login available only with RLS

Authentication
Setting unavailable
Login screen (In case authentication method is SSO-H)
T-2-109
CAUTION:
If only login via RLS is programmed, login may be disabled for the following reasons.
Authentication server is down
Network problem, no communication with authentication server
In the event of either of these cases, try the following.
1. If local device authentication is active, try logging in with local device
authentication.
F-2-323
3) Select [System Application Management]
2. If only server authentication is active, launch in MEAP safe mode from the device
service mode.
After launching in MEAP safe mode, the Default Authentication will become active, and
you will be able to login to SMS with password authentication. After logging into SMS,
set the password authentication login to ON (active) and restore the device from MEAP
safe mode to normal mode. Until the problem blocking authentication is resolved, log
into SMS with password authentication.
F-2-324
2-213
2-214
4) Click [Start] or [Stop] button shown in Status field of SMS Installer Service (Password
Authentication) to check if the status is changed.
Setting for login by RLS Authentication

The procedures for changing the RLS authentication Start/ Stop settings are as follows.
1) Access the SMS login screen using the normal method (password authentication). The
URL is shown below.
Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/rls
2) Enter the password in the password entry field, and click the [Log In] button. The default
password is "MeapSmsLogin". (Case sensitive)
Login screen by Password Authentication
F-2-325
5) Logout once and login again to check to see that the setting is applied properly.
When clicking [Stop] to change the status to [Start], another password authentication login
screen is firstly shown. When trying to access the password authentication screen after
clicking [Start] to change the status to [Stop], the user is automatically redirected to RLS
authentication screen.
Password authentication started screen and Password authentication stopped screen
F-2-327
3) Select [System Application Management] on System Management menu.
F-2-326
F-2-328
2-214
2-215
4) Click on [Start] or [Stop] button shown on Status field of SMS Installer Service (Remote
Login Service Authentication) to check if the status is changed.
CAUTION:
method.
F-2-329
5) Log out and then log in again and access via the RLS authentication login window.
When RLS authentication is set to [Start], another RLS login screen is firstly shown. When
accessing to RLS status screen with the setting of [Stop], the user will be redirected to the
password authentication screen.
F-2-331
Authentication.
RLS authentication started screen and RLS authentication stopped screen
F-2-330
2-215
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Checking the System Information
MEAP Application System Information
Initial Display Languages of SMS

SMS supports English and Japanese. Display language can be changed with selecting by the
drop down list on a login page.
information.
Start
No
Refer to the setting of the
Accept-Language header,
which a browser sends out.
Checking the System Information
Refer to the value of

portalLang stored in
Cookie.
Yes
Outline
You can check the device's platform information and the MEAP application's system
The initial display language at the time of accessing SMS depends on the setting.
Logged in by RLS
authentication.
2-216
System information that can be checked from the screen

MEAP Specifications version (MEAP Spec Ver)
Remote UI display English or Japanese

setup language
MEAP Contents version

Java Virtual Machine version
System application information
Except English or Japanese
The name of the installed system application
English or Japanese
Language
priority setting of a
browser
Refer to the setting of a language
displaying in registration/initial
setting [Additional Function].
English or Japanese
Display setting
of a device
The installation date of the installed system application

Application ID of the installed system application
The status of the installed system application
The checking procedure is shown below.

Display in English.
Display in the
language configured.
F-2-332
1) Log in to SMS.
2) Select [System Management] > [System Information] on System Management menu.
When accessing by SMS Installer Service (Password Authentication)

It is referred in order of the language priority (setting of the Accept-Language header which a
browser sends out) and the display-language setting in the "user mode". When the language
setup is other than English or Japanese, it is displayed in English.
When accessing by SMS Installer Service (Remote Login Service

Authentication).
Initial display language is set by the language setting (value of portalLang storing in Cookie)
selected by the remote UI screen. When the setting is other than English or Japanese,
Selection of display language is performed in a similar way with the SMS Installer Service
(Password Authentication) mentioned above.
F-2-333
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Checking the System Information
2-216
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application
Display of System Information Details
2-217
Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application
The system information details can be displayed to check more than one pieces of information
MEAP system information can be printed out with iR device for confirmation.
all at the same time: platform information, system application information, information on the
Note:
The system information of the MEAP application that you checked in the previous
section is exactly the same as the system information of the MEAP application that is
output.
installed MEAP applications, etc.

1) Log in to SMS.
2) Select [System Info] on System Management menu.
3) Click [Display Details] button.
Follow the steps below when confirming information:

1) Select [ Settings/ Registration] > [ Management Settings] > [ License/ Other] > [MEAP
Settings] > [ Print System Information] .
Note:
When System Manager ID and PIN are set, go to Top screen and log in as System
Manager to continue jobs.
2) Press[ Yes] button.
F-2-334
4) System information of each application (including system applications) is shown in an

additional window. Copy and paste all the information in a file to attach to AR reports as
text information. This function is useful to check status information of each application.
F-2-336
Note:
MEAP system information was printed out in PDL format conventionally. However,
the information has been printed out in text format instead of PDL format, enabling iR
devices without PDL installation to print out information (iR C3220 and later).
F-2-335
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application System Information > Printing the System Information of a MEAP Application
2-217
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Information > Procedure to Check MEAP Application Information
MEAP Application Information
Content of MEAP system information

Application System Information
Outline
Application Name: C-Cabinet Gateway for MEAP

Application ID/System Application Name: 03a46668-63e4-4636-9cbb-492b6cef05d5
Application Version: 1.0.0
Status: Resolved
Installed on: Tue Oct 21 14:00:11 GMT+09:00 2003
Vendor : Canon Inc.
License Status : Installed
Maximum Memory Usage : 1024
Registered Service :
item
2-218
You can check the MEAP application installed on the device.

The following information can be checked on the MEAP application information screen.
Application Information

content
It is the name (bundle-name) declared in a statement within the application

program. It may not necessarily be identical to the name of the program.
Application ID/System Application ID (application-id) items which are declared on the declaration
Application Name
statement in the application program are printed.
Application Version
It is the version of the application (bundle-version) declared in a statement
within the application program.
Status
It indicates the status of the application in question; specifically,
Installed: the application has been installed.
Active: the application is being in use.
Resolved: the application is at rest.
Installed On
It indicates the date on which the application was installed.
Vendor
It is the name of the vendor that developed the application, and is the name
(bundle-vendor) declared in a statement within the application program.
License Status
It indicates the status of the license; specifically,
None: no license is needed.
Not Installed: no license has been installed.
Installed: the appropriate license has been installed.
Invalid: the license has been invalidated.
Overlimt: the license has been used beyond its permitted limit.
License Expires After It indicates the date after which the license expires. If the status of the
license is 'none', this item will not be printed.
License Upper Limit It indicates the limit imposed on individual counter readings. If the status of
the license is 'none', this item will not be printed.
Counter Value
It is the current counter reading of a specific counter. If the status of the
license is 'none', this item will not be printed.
Maximum Memory
It indicates the maximum amount of memory that the application uses. It is
Usage
the amount (maximum memory usage) declared in a statement within the
application program, and is expressed in kilobytes.
Registered Service
It is a list of services that have been registered by the application with the
MEAP framework.Some services may not have printable data.
Application Name
Description
Version

Application ID
Manufacturer
Copyright

Installed on
ContactAddress
Applet-Name

Applet Number
Category
URL

Resources Used (Storage, Memory, Threads, Sockets, File Descriptors)
Export Package
Export Service
Import Package
Import Service
Application Name
License Information
Status
Serial Number
Expires after
Procedure to Check MEAP Application Information

1) Log in to SMS.
2) Select [System Management] > [MEAP Application Information] on System Management
menu.
F-2-337
T-2-110
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Information > Procedure to Check MEAP Application Information
2-218
Technology > MEAP > Check License > Procedure to Check the License File
3) The MEAP application information screen appears. Scroll the screen and check the
information of the target application.
2-219
Check License
Outline
You can check the contents of the license file.
Procedure to Check the License File

1) Log in to SMS.
2) Select [System Management] > [Check License] on System Management menu.
F-2-339
3) Click the [Browse..] button, specify a license file, and click the [Check] button.
F-2-338
F-2-340
Technology > MEAP > Check License > Procedure to Check the License File
2-219
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > Outline
Changing SMS Login Password
2-220
MEAP Application Setting Information Management

and Log Management
Outline
Outline
You can change the password for logging into SMS.

If you forgot the login password and you want to change the password back to the default
value (MeapSmsLogin), see "If you forgot the password (SMS login password initialization)"
in this chapter.
The MEAP Application Setting Information Management page and the MEAP Application Log
Management page provide menu related to "MEAP Application Configuration Service" for
managing MEAP application setting information and menu related to "MEAP Application Log
Service" for managing log information respectively.
Procedure to Change the SMS Login Password

1) Log in to SMS.
2) Select [System Management] > [Chage Password] on System Management menu.
F-2-343
MEAP Application Configuration Service

This service is used to manage the MEAP application setting information. It has functions
F-2-341
3) Enter the current password and a new password, and then click the [Change] button.
such as saving setting information to the MEAP area. Ver 57 of MEAP Specifications supports
this service.
MEAP Application Log Service

This service is used to collect MEAP application logs (debug logs and authentication logs).
Ver 58 of MEAP Specifications supports this service.
The collected logs can be downloaded or deleted in user mode.
The settings such as the log level to be saved cannot be made from SMS.
F-2-342
These settings depend on the MEAP application. For detailed information, refer to the manual
for the application.
Note:
The [Reset] button on the [Change Password] screen is used to clear the value entered
in the text field. It is not a button for changing the SMS login password back to the
default value.
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > Outline
2-220
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > MEAP Application Setting Information Management
Advantages Obtained When Using the Services
2-221
MEAP Application Setting Information Management
By using MEAP Application Setting Information Management and MEAP Application Log
The setting data (stored on the device) of the MEAP applications which support MEAP
Service, as long as the MEAP application supports these services, you can collectively
Application Setting Information Management can be deleted. The procedure is shown below.
perform data management tasks.

1) Log in to SMS.
Devices and MEAP applications which do not support new functions

App1
Dedicated management tool
App2
Dedicated management tool
Setting and reference
App1
App2
Config data
(App1 format)
Pref data
(App1 format)
Log data
(App1 format)
2) Select [System Management] > [MEAP Application Setting Information Management] on

System Management menu.
Device
Config data
(App2 format)
Pref data
(App2 format)
Log data
(App2 format)
F-2-344
As for devices and MEAP applications that do not support the service, the setting information
and log data are managed on an application-by-application basis.
F-2-346
3) Select an application you want to delete, and click the [Delete] button.
Devices and MEAP applications which support new functions

General-purpose management tool
App1
Configuration
management service
App2
Preference
management service
Device
Log
management service
Config data
Preference data
Log data
(common format)
(common format)
(common format)
Platform
F-2-347
F-2-345
As for devices and MEAP applications that support the service, information can be collectively
managed.
Note:
If a MEAP application that contains setting data which can be shared (not dedicated
to the application) is installed, the application name [Shared Setting Information of
Applications] is displayed.
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > MEAP Application Setting Information Management
2-221
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > MEAP Application Log Management
MEAP Application Log Management
2-222
4) To download the logs
The log data (stored on the device) of the MEAP applications which support MEAP
The file save dialog for the log file will appear. Specify the destination and save the file.
Application Log Service can be downloaded or deleted. The procedure is shown below.
1) Log in to SMS.
2) Select [System Management] > [MEAP Application Log Management] on System
Management menu.
F-2-350
5) To delete the logs

The confirmation screen will appear to prompt you to delete the logs. Click the [Yes] button
to delete the logs.
F-2-348
3) Select [Download Application Logs] or [Delete Application Logs].
F-2-351
F-2-349
Technology > MEAP > MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log Management > MEAP Application Log Management
2-222
Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST
Maintenance
Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the
Backup Data Using SST
Outline
2-223
Backup Item Automatically Copied

The following data are backed up using SST:
The following data are backed up (saved as Meapbackup.bin) using SST.
MEAP applications.
Setup data generated by MEAP applications (Note that image data stored in BOX will not
be saved for MEAP applications using BOX function).
When replacing or formatting the HDD, the data in the MEAP application area needs to be
User information data registered for local device authentication in SSO-H
temporarily saved to your PC.
SMS password
This chapter describes information on backing up the data in the MEAP application area and
recovering the backup data.
CAUTION:
In the case of MEAP-installed devices, the application is license-managed, so the application
Do not execute [Initialize All Data/Settings] in user mode during the period from backup
using SST to recovery of the data.
needs to be reinstalled and reconfigured when replacing or formatting the HDD.

In that case, a license for reinstallation needs to be downloaded and the customer data and
configuration information need to be recovered, and these procedures pose heavy burdens
on the service technician.
The area used for the MEAP application can be easily saved/recovered by using the backup
function of SST (Service Support Tool).
This greatly reduces the work burden on the service technician.
Please note that the application cannot be illegally copied because the backup data can be
recovered only when the iR device has the same serial number.
WARNING:
F-2-352
You must not perform any other work (including checking operation) until the HDD has
been backed up. This arrangement is to prevent a mismatch of MEAP counter readings
and the HDD contents, and any fault in operation arising as the result of failure to
observe this will not be covered by the guarantee of operation.
Note:
The application that is installed with a reusable license can be reinstalled by using the
same license.
When [Initialize All Data/Settings] is executed, the key used to combine encrypted
backup data (SMS password, etc.) is initialized, which makes it impossible to combine
the data.
It means that SMS cannot be accessed even when the backup data has been
recovered using SST.
If you inadvertently executed [Initialize All Data/Settings] and can no longer access
SMS, the SMS login password needs to be initialized by following the procedure shown
in "When SMS Cannot Be Accessed" in "Login to SMS" in this manual.
Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Backup of the MEAP Application Area and Recovery of the Backup Data Using SST
2-223
Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST
2-224
Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST
Data backed up using SST in the case of iR-ADV devices

In the case of iR-ADV devices, menus are implemented as MEAP application. Therefore the
following items can be also backed up (stored as Meapbackup.bin).
1) Switching Login Service / Backup of Login User Information

If SSO-H is used for the login service, switch to default authentication before backing
Setting items of each menu in the main menu ( Copy, Scan and Send, Fax, Scan and
up the user information. Although SST will back up local device user information, it is
Store, Access Stored Files, Fax/I-Fax Inbox, ).
recommended to export the user information just in case. For local device user information
Favorite settings
backup, go to User Management page of SSO-H site and export the data. (The SSO-H
Default settings
login page opens with the URL "https://<device IP address>:8443/sso/").
Settings of option shortcuts

Previous settings
CAUTION:
Settings of quick menu
If a HDD of a system that uses SSO-H is formatted without changing the login
service to the default authentication, the error message The login service must be
set again with SMS appears and the system cannot start up when you attempt to
restart the system after formatting.
Button size information

Wallpaper settings
Quick menu button information
Restrict quick menu use
If this problem occurs, change the login service to SSO-H with SMS. If you cannot
access to SMS since you do not have the IP address of the device, start the system
with FIXIP mode -hold down the numeric keys 1 and 7 and turn the power switch on.
The IP address 172.16.1.100 will be automatically assigned for the device. Then
log in to SMS specifying the address.
Requirements for Backup Using the SST

The following conditions must be met for use of the function:
1) Device Firmware Version
Device Firmware Version for SST (Ver4.2x)
Boot ROM
iR-ADV C2030/C2020 series
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
series other than iR-ADV
C2030/C2020 series
System
2) Starting the device in Download Mode
SST
Boot ROM is not

equipped.
Already supported
since the 1st
version.
The version supporting

the corresponding
devices.
Already supported
since the 1st
version.
Already supported
since the 1st
version.
The version supporting

the corresponding
devices.
T-2-111
Press [2] and [8] buttons at the same time on the control panel and turn on the main power
switch to start the device in Download Mode. Note that SST backup function is enabled
only in Download Mode.
3) Connecting the main unit to the PC to start SST
Connect the main unit to the PC with SST installed using the crossing cable and the like to
start SST on the PC.
2) SST Version
Version 4.2.x or later. An earlier version will not permit the use of the function. If needed,
upgrade the SST.
3) Space for backup
To back up the HDD of the iR, the PC must have approx 1024MB of free space at
maximum. Sizes of backup files depend on actual data capacities to be backed up.
2-224
4) Connecting the device using SST
2-225
6) Saving backup data
When starting SST, select the target device type as Single and click [Start] button.
Upon the backup data transferred to the PC, enter an appropriate file name and click [OK]
to save the backup data on the PC.
F-2-355
When the file is successfully saved, click [OK] button, and then click [Return to Menu]
button.
F-2-353
5) Generating backup data to transfer it to the PC (uploading)

Click [Upload Data] button of SST and select Meapback.bin as the item to be backed up
to click [ Start ] button.
F-2-356
F-2-354
2-225
Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedures to Restore Backup Data
2-226
Procedures to Restore Backup Data
CAUTION:
Do not execute [Initialize All Data/Settings] in user mode during the period from backup
using SST to recovery of the data.
1) Connecting to the device

Connect the device using SST by following step 1 to step 4 of the Procedure for backing up
the MEAP application area using SST.
2) Restoring backup file
Click [Download Data] button and select the data backed up in the previous step (Meapback.
bin) to click [Start Restoring Data]. Note that the data backed up in a different version
cannot be restored.
F-2-357
When [Initialize All Data/Settings] is executed, the key used to combine encrypted
backup data (SMS password, etc.) is initialized, which makes it impossible to combine
the data.
It means that SMS cannot be accessed even when the backup data has been
recovered using SST.
F-2-358
3) Transferring Data
When the data is successfully transferred, click the [OK] button shown on the screen. To
continue other jobs, click [Return to Menu] button.
If you inadvertently executed [Initialize All Data/Settings] and can no longer access
SMS, the SMS login password needs to be initialized by following the procedure shown
in "When SMS Cannot Be Accessed" in "Login to SMS" in this manual.
F-2-359
4) Turn off and on the main power switch of the device to gain access in SMS to check that
MEAP applications are surely restored.
5) Restore the backup data and setting saved. Note that the user information of the local
device is included in the backup data, thus does not need to be restored.
Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Procedures to Restore Backup Data
2-226
Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Formatting and Replacing the HDD
Formatting and Replacing the HDD
2-227
Formatting the HDD
Procedure to format the hard disk
Outline
If the HDD is broken or does not function correctly due to failure of the system (excluding the
MEAP application), it needs to be formatted or replaced.
When the HDD is formatted or replaced, the files of the MEAP application stored in it will be
lost, so make a backup of the MEAP application area according to Procedure for backing up
the MEAP application area using SST if possible. If a backup cannot be made, the MEAP
application and the license files need to be reinstalled.
As for the MEAP counter information, it will not be lost because it is backed up just like the
conventional counter.
If a backup cannot be made, a special license file (a license file for installation with the
expiration date carried over from the current counter value) is required to reinstall the MEAP
Follow the following procedure to format the HDD.

1) Connecting to the device
Connect the device using SST by following step 1 to step 4 of "Procedure for backing up
the MEAP application area using SST".
2) Formatting the HDD
Select Format HDD from SST menu to format the HDD.
Note:
HDD can be formatted also by starting Download mode using the USB memory and
executing formatting from the displayed menu.
application. This special license file is treated as a service tool and cannot be obtained by a
general user.
In order to obtain a special license file, a service technician needs to contact a person in
charge of support of a sales company.
When contacting the person in charge of support, the service technician also needs to
provide the serial number of the device and the name of the MEAP application installed.
In the support departments of regional headquarters of Canon, all license files of the
applications that have been issued are filed according to device serial numbers, enabling you
to obtain a series of license files through a single screen as long as you can identify the serial
number of the device in question.
Note:
The application that is installed with a reusable license can be reinstalled by using the
same license.
2-227
2-228
HDD replacement procedure
If the MEAP application area can be backed up
Outline
If the MEAP application area can be backed up, it can be recovered after replacing the HDD,
The procedure for replacing the HDD differs according to whether the HDD functions normally
so it is not necessary to prepare the special licenses for reinstallation.
or not.
1) Preparation for replacement
If the MEAP application area cannot be backed up
If the HDD does not function correctly due to failure or for other reason, the MEAP application
area cannot be backed up. It is therefore necessary to reinstall the application after replacing
the HDD. The procedure is shown below.
1) Preparation for replacement
Copy a set of license files for reinstalling the MEAP application (special licenses and
reusable licenses) to a laptop for service operation.
Register a set of system files of a target product to SST. Or, prepare USB thumb drive of
the System file transfer settlement.
2) Replacing the drive
Prepare the necessary service parts of the HDD, and replace the drive.
Back up the MEAP application area of the device according to the procedure for backing up
the MEAP application area using SST.
2) Replacing the drive
Prepare the necessary service parts of the HDD, and replace the drive.
3) Formatting HDD
Format the HDD referring to Procedure to format the hard disk.
4) Restorering the backup file
Restore the backup data referring to the Procedures to Restore Backup Data.
5) Importing user information
As necessary, make login service selections and import user information.
3) Formatting HDD
Format the HDD referring to Procedure to format the hard disk.
4) Reinstalling the MEAP application
When the device has started normally, obtain the jar files of the MEAP applications from the
user, and install them using the license files for reinstallation.
Installation method is the same as normal installation.
5) Importing user information
As necessary, make login service selections and import user information.
Note:
When you replace the HDD without uninstalling MEAP applications, make sure to
reinstall the previously installed applications. Unless reinstalling them, MEAP counter
will not be released and the message The number of applications that can be installed
has exceeded the limit. Try to install this application after uninstalling other applications.
is displayed so that the installation of new applications may not be accepted. If you
want to install new applications in this case, once reinstall the applications in-stalled
before formatting and uninstall unnecessary applications.
2-228
Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > MEAP Safe Mode (level 2)
2-229
MEAP Safe Mode (level 2)
3) Press
or
button for several times until [MEAPSAFE] button is shown. Click
[MEAPSAFE] button.
Outline
Use safe mode if you need to start up the system without worrying about extra applications. It
will start up only those system software files (including SMS) that normally start up as default
files while preventing MEAP applications and the like from starting up.
When you have made changes and restart the device, the control panel will indicate 'MPSF'
in its lower right corner. The MEAP applications that may have been active before you shut
down the equipment will not start up on their own. Make use of safe mode when restoring
the system software as when MEAP applications or services cause a fault as the result of a
conflict or wrong sequence of registration/use. You can access to SMS in this condition so
that you can take necessary measures, for example, you can stop application that may cause
the trouble.
F-2-361
If default authentication has been selected, the mode of authentication remains valid;
otherwise, the message "The login service must be set again with SMS" ap pears. Change
4) Press the 1 key on the control panel keypad to change the setting to '1'; then, click [OK]
button.
the login service as necessary.
Starting in Safe Mode

1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] in level 2.
2) Press [COPIER] >[Option] > [USER] buttons.
F-2-362
5) Check that the notation MPSF has appeared in the upper left corner of the screen; then,
restart the device.
F-2-360
F-2-363
2-229
2-230
Note:
If accessed to SMS in MEAP SAFE mode, the device started mode is shown on the title
bar of the browser.
How to cancel MEAP SAFE mode

1) Startup [SERVICE MODE] in level 2.
2) Press [COPIER] >[Option] > [USER] buttons.
An example of the title bar displayed at the time of startup in MEAP SAFE mode
Service Management Service : <Device Name>:<Product Name>: Safe Mode
F-2-364
CAUTION:
F-2-366
If the device has been started in MEAP SAFE mode, all the MEAP applications stop
and the status becomes "Installed".
3) Press
or
button for several times until [MEAPSAFE] button is shown. Click
[MEAPSAFE] button.
This status remains unchanged even if the MEAP SAFE mode is canceled and the
device is started again in normal mode. It is therefore necessary to access SMS after
normal startup and start the MEAP application.
F-2-367
F-2-365
2-230
Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Collection of MEAP Console Logs
4) Press the 0 key on the control panel keypad to change the setting to '0'; then, press [OK]
button.
2-231
Collection of MEAP Console Logs
Overview
When debugging a MEAP application, console logs need to be collected in some cases.
The following shows how to collect MEAP console logs using commercially available terminal
software and service mode.
What to Prepare
PC connected with the same network as the device
Commercially available terminal software
F-2-368
Note:
In the procedure shown in this manual, "Tera Term Pro" and "Hyper Terminal" are used
as the terminal software.
5) Start service mode again after rebooting the device, and check that the displayed setting
value has changed to "0" and that [MPSF] is no longer displayed at the upper left of the
Work Procedure
screen.
Device Setting Procedure

1) Start [ SERVICE MODE ] in Level 1.
2) Press [ COPIER ] > [ Option ] > [ DSPLY-SW ] buttons.
F-2-369
F-2-370
2-231
3) Press [ RMT-CNSL] button.
2-232
PC setting procedure (when Tera Term is used)
1) Install the terminal software on the PC.
2) Start the terminal software, make the following settings, and then click the "OK" button.
F-2-371
4) Press either 1 (activate remote console function) on control panel (the numerical value
input in the field is displayed), and press [ OK ] button.
F-2-374
Connection
Host
Service
TCP port#
: Select [TCP/IP] (Default)

: Device Host Name or IP Address
: Select "Telnet"
: Enter 19001
3) The connection window will open. Select [Terminal] from the [Setup] menu.
F-2-372
5) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and restart the device.
F-2-375
F-2-373
2-232
4) The terminal setting screen will appear. Make the following settings, and then click the
"OK" button.
2-233
6) The dialog for specifying the save destination of the log file will appear. Set the save
destination path and the file name, and then click the [Save] button.
F-2-376
Terminal ID
New-line Receive
: VT100
: LF
F-2-378
7) Perform the operation whose log you want to collect.
5) Select [Log...] from the [File] menu.
F-2-379
8) Click the [Close] button in the log dialog.
F-2-377
F-2-380
Note:
To suspend log collection, click the [Pause] button.
2-233
2-234
9) Open the file saved in the save destination, and check that the logs are stored correctly.
Note:
While collecting logs, the following operations are available from the [File] menu.
Comment to Log... :
You can add a comment to the log being collected. The added comment is reflected in
the log file.
F-2-384
Note:
Depending on the MEAP application, the log output setting needs to be made in order
to collect logs.
CAUTION:
F-2-381
Show Log dialog... :

The logs that have been collected are pasted on Notepad and displayed.
After collecting logs, the remote console function of the device needs to be disabled
(select [SERVICE MODE] LEVEL1 > [COPIER] > [Option] > [DSPLY-SW] > [RMT-CNSL]
> 0, and restart the device).
F-2-382
Change directory... :
The preliminarily set save destination of the log file can be changed.
F-2-383
2-234
PC setting procedure (when Hyper Terminal is used)
2-235
4) Click the "Properties" icon on the Hyper Terminal screen.
1) Start Hyper Terminal, set the connection name in the [Connect Description] dialog that
appears on the screen, and then click the OK button.
F-2-388
5) The [Console Properties] dialog will appear. Select the [Settings] tab, select [VT100] for
[Emulation], and then click the [OK] button.
F-2-385
2) Set [TCP/IP(Winsock)] for [Connect using].

F-2-389
6) Return to the Hyper Terminal window, and select [Transfer] > [Capture Text...] from the
menu.
F-2-386
3) Enter the IP address of the target device in [Host address], and enter "19001" (fixed) in [Port
number].
F-2-390
7) The dialog for specifying the save destination of the log file will appear. Specify the save
destination.
F-2-391
F-2-387
2-235
Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Using USB Devices
2-236
Using USB Devices
8) Perform the operation whose log you want to collect.
USB Driver
Two types of USB drivers
While the USB driver that can be used in iR series is only the USB driver designed exclusively
for MEAP application (hereinafter referred to as MEAP driver), not only MEAP driver but
also USB system driver (hereinafter referred to as system driver) can be used in iR-ADV
series.
System driver and MEAP driver cannot be used together. When either of them is used, the
other driver cannot be used.
USB driver setting (iR-ADV series):
System driver is active by default in iR-ADV series.
F-2-392
9) Select [Transfer] > [Capture Text...] > [Stop] from the menu.
The driver can be changed in Settings/Registration (user mode).

Usually, It is not necessary to change the setting because it is specified in the MEAP
application side.
Only in the case of a special MEAP application, it is necessary to change the USB driver
setting.
For details, refer to specifications of MEAP application side.
F-2-393
10) Open the file saved in the save destination, and check that the logs are stored correctly.
F-2-394
Note:
Depending on the MEAP application, the log output setting needs to be made in order
to collect logs.
F-2-395
CAUTION:
After collecting logs, the remote console function of the device needs to be disabled
(select [SERVICE MODE] LEVEL1 > [COPIER] > [Option] > [DSPLY-SW] > [RMT-CNSL]
> 0, and restart the device).
2-236
Operating mode
Conventional USB
settings [Use MEAP
keyboard enabled MEAP
driver as USB input
application
device]
ON
* MEAP driver
(conventional
compatibility mode)
OFF (*default)
* Native driver
Can use USB keyboard.

Can work only on the
conventional applications
that support the MEAP
application driver.
Cannot use USB
keyboards. (Device cannot
be detected.)
Software keyboard
application
(System Driver/
MEAP Driver)
2-237
System driver
supported MEAP
application
Cannot use USB

keyboards. (Device
cannot be detected.)
Cannot use USB

keyboards.
Can use USB

keyboards.
Can use USB

keyboards. Via software
keyboards only.
Note:
You can display/check the used driver setting at USB device report print described
below regardless of whether it is registered from a manifest file or is registered from
API.
Availability for MEAP application of the USB device A (either HID keyboard or Mass Storage)
plugged to iR device
T-2-112
Note:
When any settings changes are made, the device must be restarted.
Setting the USB driver for each USB device (MEAP driver preference registration)
If it is set to use the system driver, the conventional applications that support the MEAP
application driver cannot use the USB input device.
Therefore, for the USB drivers used by USB devices/MEAP applications, there is setting
function (MEAP driver preference registration) to give priority to the MEAP driver.
If you register the ID of the USB device by using this function, the USB device can use the
MEAP driver despite the Additional Function settings.
Using this function requires the conditions below:
Supported MEAP SpecVer: 26
Describe the idVendeor(VID) and idProdutc(PID) of USB device in the manifest or activate/
deactivate the VID and PID by calling API from MEAP applications.
The driver setting that is used in a manifest file is reflected in the following timing.
Registration
status of
USB device
A
Not
registered
Registered
restarted.
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
T-2-113
NO: USB device not available
Storage) plugged to iR device

Setting to use
MEAP application
Registration
System
System driver
Application
MEAP driver
status of
USB
Native
driver
not supported with VID/PID
(Additional
USB device
device application
supported / conventional
declared in
Functions
B
application
application
Manifest for B
mode)
Registered
Not
registered
Not used
(Native driver to
be used)
To be used
Not used
(Native driver to
be used)
To be used
YES: USB device available
YES
NO
NO
NO
Availability for MEAP applications of USB devices B and C (either HID keyboard or Mass
The registration will be enabled when an application is activated and device is

The registration will be disabled when an application is stopped and device is
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
YES: USB device available
When registering from a manifest file.

restarted.
When the HID keyboard is

MEAP application
installed > USB Settings:
Application
[Use MEAP Driver for USB
System System driver with VID/
Input Device]
Native
driver
not supported/
PID
When the Mass Storage is application
supported conventional declared
installed > USB Settings:
application application in Manifest
[Use MEAP Driver for
for x
External USB Device]
B
C
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
C
B
C
NO
NO
YES
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
B
C
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO: USB device not available
T-2-114
2-237
Specifications for the use of USB keyboards

Characters that could be entered on the software keyboard displayed on the conventional
control panel can be entered using a USB connected keyboard.
When the software keyboard window is displayed, characters can be entered from the USB
keyboard (in-line entry not possible).
When the software keyboard window is not displayed, entered characters will not be
remembered.
The characters, which can be entered from a USB keyboard, is only a character, which can
2-238
Initialization of MEAP driver priority registration
When any trouble occurs regarding USB driver settings and it is necessary to reset the setting
information, you can reset the MEAP driver preference registration by using service mode.
Steps to initialize preference use registration
2) Press [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > buttons.
be entered from the software keyboard.

Even if characters are entered from the USB keyboard, the software keyboard window will
not change (the corresponding key does not invert or change color).
Input from the USB keyboard can be accepted at the same time as input from the software
keyboard or numeric keys.
Since the device supports Plug and Play, the USB keyboard can be disconnected/
connected freely. However, do not disconnect and connect during in deep sleep (when
in sleep with setting "low" at "the power consumption in sleep"). It is out of an operation
guarantee to disconnect and connect the USB keyboard in deep sleep.
When USB device is attached to iR device, iR devices do not shift to deep sleep mode.
Keyboard layout changes according to the keyboard layout settings in the Settings/
Registration screen. In addition, function keys and ten keys which are not displayed in the
software keyboard cannot be used. (Keyboard which the operation check was conducted
is 84-key Keyboard, but this does not mean that the operation of all 84-key Keyboards is
F-2-396
3) Press
or
button for several times until [USBM-CLR] is shown on the screen.
Press [USBM-CLR] button.
guaranteed.)
Note:
The factory shipment default setting is to enable the use of native (main unit
functionality) USB keyboards. Therefore, in order to use MEAP application keyboards,
[Use MEAP driver for USB input device] under [System management settings (initial
settings/ registration)] needs to be set to ON (factory shipment setting is OFF).
Operations change as described below in accordance with ON/ OFF settings.
ON: when using MEAP application keyboard
OFF: when using native (main unit functionality) keyboard (factory shipment default)
F-2-397
2-238
2-239
4) Press [OK] button to restart this device.
3) Press
or
button for several times until [USBH-PRT] is shown. Press [USBH-PRT]
button.
F-2-400
4) When pressing [OK] button, [ACTIVE] blinks on the status field.

F-2-398
USB Device report print

To check the vendor IDs (idVendor) and the product IDs (idProduct) registered in this device
by means of declaration in Manifest file of MEAP applications, output the USB Device repot
report print.
Steps to output the USB Device report print
2) Press [COPIER] > [Function] > [MISC-P] > buttons.
F-2-401
5) When [OK] is shown on the status field, the status print is output. Check the contents of the
print.
F-2-399
F-2-402
2-239
2-240
Example of output result
C : Configure
The configuration information of a USB device is shown. * mark is to know whether it is
********************************
*** USB Device report print ***
********************************
active.
I : Interface
The interface information of a USB device is shown. Interface class and the driver to handle
USB device information
can be recognized.
T: Bus=01 Lev=02 Prnt=03 Port=01 Cnt=01 Dev#= 5 Spd=480 MxCh= 0

D: Ver=2.00 Cls=00(>ifc) Sub=00 Prot=00 MxPS=64 #Cfgs= 1
P: Vendor=066f ProdID=4210 Rev=10.02
S: Manifacturer=SigmaTel, Inc.
S: Product=STIr42xx
S: SerialNumber=0002F0F7261287A5
C:* #Ifs= 1 Cfg#= 1 Atr=80 MxPwr=100mA
I: If#= 0 Alt= 0 #EPs= 2 Cls=fe(app.) Sub=02 Prot=00 Driver=irda-usb
E: Ad=81(I) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS=512 Ivl=0ms
E: Ad=01(O) Atr=02(Bulk) MxPS=512 Ivl=0ms
The value and the content of Driver are as follows.

Labeling
It is displayed when the USB system driver is assigned to the input device
connected.
usb-storage
It is displayed when storage devices (USB memory storage etc.) are

connected.
irda-usb IrDA
It is displayed when the dongle is connected.
hub
It is displayed when HUB is connected.
gpusb
It is displayed when the USB driver only for MEAP application is assigned
to the input device connected.
gpusbex
It is displayed when a USB device, which specific vendor ID/ Product ID are
preferentially registered using a manifest and MEAP API, is connected and
the USB driver only for MEAP application is assigned.
F-2-403
USB device information Content

Display the information of the USB device, which the device recognized.
If not displayed, there may be some fault occurred.
Some of standard optional devices are not displayed on a report.
The details of each item are as follows.
T : Topology
Internal hierarchical structure, which a USB device is connected, is shown. The number of
Content
usbhid
T-2-115
E:Endpoint
The Endpoint information of a USB device is shown.
Right or wrong of report output
Connecting device
a connected bus, the hierarchical structure and connection speed can be indicated.
HID
D : Device
Storage
Information of USB devices is shown.
Product information of USB devices is shown. Vendor ID and Product ID can be recognized
here.
S : String
The character string embedded in a USB device is shown. A manufacture name and a
product name can be recognized here.
Report printing
Available
Yes
Available
Yes
Not available
No
IrDA
Not available
Yes
Multimedia Card Reader
Not available
Yes
Not available
Yes
FAX
USB Device Port
P : Product
User installation
IC Card Reader
Image Data Analyzer Board-A1
Not available
No
Hub
Internal Hub*
Not available
No
External Hub
Available
Yes
* USB Device Port-B1 Hub for device ports installed at the introduction
T-2-116
2-240
Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Integrated Authentication Function
The content of MEAP preferred device information

Display the information of the application or a USB device, which preferentially registered with
MEAP application.
By seeing this information, it can check which Application ID of the MEAP application is in the
status using a specific USB device.
2-241
Integrated Authentication Function
Sharing the Authentication Information
Separately managing the authentication information at login and the authentication
information for MEAP applications creates inconveniences such as that the authentication
process is executed many times.
In order to solve this problem, the device has an integrated authentication function. This
AppID : Application ID
function allows authentication information to be shared between MEAP applications in a
VID : Vendor ID
MEAP environment.
PID : Product ID
The supported version of MEAP Specifications is Ver.59, which needs to be supported by
Note:
By starting, stopping or uninstalling a MEAP application, the driver settings of the
USB device may be changed. If the device needs to be restarted following this setting
change, a message prompting the user to restart the device is displayed.
both the device and the MEAP application in order to use this function.
There are 2 types of authentication information that can be shared: Volatile Credential whose
registered information is discarded at the time of logout or shutdown of the device and
Persistent Credential whose registered information is not discarded at the time of logout.
Volatile Credential
Volatile Credential is used in cases where the authentication information is shared between
applications which use the same security domain for authentication.
The credential is registered mainly by the login application, therefore the applications which
access the security domain that was used for authentication by the login application can use
the credential.
Persistent Credential
Persistent Credential is used to help entry of authentication information when accessing a
different security domain for authentication.
The credential is registered mainly by general MEAP applications, and the authentication
information can be reused when the same user logs in for the second time or later.
F-2-404
2-241
2-242
Comparison of Functions
Select the item you want to disable, and click the [Update] button.
Volatile Credential
Registered
Character strings and arbitrary
information
Java objects
Lifetime Registration At login (the login application), and
at any timing of registration by an
application
Deletion
Can be used until logout/shutdown.
Encryption of
credential data
Store (Save) to
Persistent Credential
Character strings only User ID/Password/
Domain/Arbitrary character strings
At any timing of registration by an
application
Not supported
Can be used until deletion by the

application or management tool.
Data retained on the HDD is encrypted.
Memory in the device
HDD in the device

T-2-117
Disabling the Integrated Authentication Function

If you do not want Volatile Credential to be used from a security standpoint, the function can
be disabled.
F-2-406
[Disable integrated authentication]: The integrated authentication function is disabled
The function can be disabled from remote UI or service mode.
regardless of the authentication method.
Persistent Credential cannot be disabled.

On the setting screen of remote UI, the function can be disabled on a protocol-by-protocol
[Disable integrated authentication using credentials for local device authentication]: The
integrated authentication function is disabled only at the time of local device authentication.
basis.
[Disable integrated authentication using credentials for LDAP server authentication]:

Remote UI
The integrated authentication function is disabled only at the time of LDAP server
You can access the setting screen on remote UI for disabling integrated authentication as
authentication.
shown below.
Service mode
The location of the service mode setting for disabling integrated authentication:
Setting value: 0 = Enabled, 1 = Disabled
F-2-405
F-2-407
2-242
Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Points to Note When Enabling the [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] Setting
Points to Note When Enabling the [Quick Startup Settings for

Main Power] Setting
2-243
In the case of "Schedule: Execute the task every 24 hours"

A schedule is set to start the specified task at the specified time and repeat "fixed-delay
execution".
If some of the MEAP applications are running on the device, the following problems will occur.
If execution is delayed for some reason, the delay time is ignored.
The [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] setting cannot be

enabled.
only once.
If a MEAP application that restricts the device from shifting to deep sleep mode is running,
Problem: If 24 hours have passed since the last execution of the task, the task is executed
=> The task may be executed at a timing other than the time the user expects it to be
executed.
31/Dec
even when the setting of [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] is enabled (On), the device
1/Jan
2/Jan
3/Jan
4/Jan
5/Jan
starts normally instead of quick startup.

In that case, it does not affect the behavior of the MEAP application.
Changes made in the settings of a MEAP application are not

reflected.
Starting
Stopped
(Quick startup standby)
If the startup setting [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] is enabled (On), even when the
The timing the task is expected to be executed

The timing the task was actually executed
Main Power Supply Switch of the machine is turned OFF, a shutdown process is not executed
internally.
F-2-408
Therefore, in the case of a MEAP application where changes in settings are enabled when
the device is restarted, changes in settings are not reflected just by changing the settings.
Follow either of the restart procedures shown below to enable the changes made in the
settings.
Execute restart from remote UI.
Turn OFF the Main Switch, and then turn it ON within 20 seconds.
In the case of "Schedule: Execute the task at 00:00 every day"

A schedule is set to start the specified task at the specified time and repeat "fixed-rate
execution".
If execution was delayed for some reason, two or more tasks are continuously executed to
"make up for the delay".
Problem: The tasks of Jan. 1, Jan. 2, and Jan. 3 are executed after quick startup.
After recovery from quick startup, MEAP applications do not work

properly.
MEAP applications that are scheduled to execute processes at specified times may not work
properly after recovery from quick restart.
Unexpected problems such as that the application executes a task at an unexpected timing
may occur.
Problems may occur in the following two cases.
31/Dec
1/Jan
2/Jan
3/Jan
4/Jan
5/Jan
Starting
Stopped
(Quick startup standby)
The timing the task is expected to be executed
The timing the task was actually executed
F-2-409
Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Points to Note When Enabling the [Quick Startup Settings for Main Power] Setting
2-243
Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become Unable to Be Logged in
Remedy to Be Performed When the Device Has Become
2-244
The user information of SSO-H does not coincide with the user information of Department ID
Management in the following cases:
Unable to Be Logged in
The user information of SSO-H was different from that of Department ID Management
when Department ID Management was enabled.
Overview
Department ID Management was enabled before changing the department ID and
Department ID Management and SSO-H (Local Device Authentication) manage user
password registered in SSO-H to match with the information of Department ID
information separately. Therefore, in order to allow coexistence of Department ID

Management and SSO-H, it is necessary that the information of SSO-H and the information
Management.
SSO-H user management information
of Department ID Management are the same.
User name
(1)
User name
Password
Authentication
(6)
Dept. ID Password
7654321
1111
2222
(5)
Dept. ID Password
O K
7654321
1111
2222
7654321
1111
2222
Dept. ID Password
Mismatch
User name
Password
Administrator
Administrator
Administrator
Dept. ID Password
7654321
1234
5678
7654321
1234
5678
Dept. ID Password
Match
7654321
1234
5678
7654321
1234
5678
Only the SSO-H user

information was updated
Dept. ID Management info
Verification
USer name
Password
Role
Administrator Password
CANONTARO pass
CMJTARO
Makuhari
F-2-410
1) The user enters the ID and password of SSO-H to a device where both SSO-H and
Department ID Management are enabled.
2) SSO-H checks the entered ID and password with the SSO-H user information table.
3) SSO-H sends the department ID and password which correspond to the entered ID and
Administrator
Administrator
Administrator
Dept. ID Password
1234567
9999
8888
1234567
9999
8888
Dept. ID Password
Mismatch
F-2-412
Only the Department ID Management information was changed in "Import All Function",
resulting in mismatch. (The SSO-H user information cannot be changed in Import All
Function.)
Device A
4) The department ID management function checks the department ID and password sent
Dept. ID Management Info

Dept. ID Password
1111
2222
3333
from SSO-H with the user information table.

5) The user is elevated to the corresponding privilege.
coincide with the department ID and password registered in the Department ID Management,
User name
PAssword
CANONTARO pass
CMJTARO
Makuhari
Role
Administrator
Administrator
Administrator
1111
2222
3333
Import All Function (Only the Department

ID Management information was updated.)
Device B
6) The user is authenticated.

If the department ID and password registered in the user information of SSO-H do not
7654321
1234
5678
7654321
1234
5678
Only the information of Department ID Management was updated, resulting in mismatch.
password to the department ID management function.
1111
2222
3333

Role
(4)
the authentication ends in failure and the user can no longer log in to the device.
1111
2222
3333
F-2-411
SSO-H
7654321
1234
5678
Management were changed.
CANONTARO pass
CMJTARO
Makuhari
Dept. ID Management
7654321
1234
5678
Only the department ID and password registered in SSO-H or those in Department ID
(3)
Privilege
elevation
Administrator
Administrator
Administrator
Dept. ID Password
Only one of information was updated, resulting in mismatch.
7654321
1111
2222
ID : 1111
Password : 1111
(2)
Role
Administrator
Administrator
Administrator
Role
CANONTARO pass
CMJTARO
Makuhari
CANONTARO pass
User : CANONTARO CMJTARO
Makuhari
Password : pass
Password

Dept. ID Password
1234567
9999
8888
1234567
9999
8888
Dept. ID PAssword
Mismatch
1111
2222
3333
1111
2222
3333
F-2-413
2-244
Remedy
2-245
3) Disable Depart ID Management.
If the device became unable to be logged in due to mismatch of the department ID/password,
perform the following remedy.
> [Department ID Management] > [OFF]. In the case of remote UI, access [Settings/
Procedure
Management] > [Department ID Management Settings], and deselect [Enable Department

ID Management].
1) Change the authentication method to DA (Default Authentication).

Access SMS, and select [Default Authentication] in [Enhanced System Application
Management] > [Login Service]. (How to log in to SMS can be found in "Login to SMS".)
F-2-415
4) Change the authentication method back to SSO-H authentication.

Access SMS, and select [Single Sign-On H] in [Enhanced System Application Management]
> [Login Service]. (How to log in to SMS can be found in "Login to SMS".)
F-2-414

F-2-416

2-245
6) Change the user registration information of SSO-H.
2-246
7) Enable Depart ID Management.
Access the URL shown below, and change the content to the information registered in
Department ID Management.
> [Department ID Management] > [ON]. In the case of remote UI, access [Settings/
Or, import the setting file whose content you want to use.

Management] > [Department ID Management Settings], and select [Enable Department ID
Management].
SSO-H user registration information edition screen:

(SSO management screen [Main Menu] > [User Management] > [Edit User Information] or
https://<IP address>:8443/sso/Edit).
F-2-419
8) Check that the device can be logged in.

Log off and then log on to check that the device can be logged in with an environment
where Local Device Authentication and Department ID Management are enabled.
F-2-417
SSO-H user registration information import screen:

(SSO management screen [Main Menu] > [User Management] > [Import User Information]
or (https://<IP address>:8443/sso/Import).
F-2-420
F-2-418
2-246
Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Reference material
Reference material
Terms & Acronyms
Glossary
Terms & Acronyms
2-247
Definitions and Explanations
Application
A program unit to provide users with solutions.
Application ID
An identifier assigned to each application.

A unique ID is assigned to each MEAP application.
Applet (Applet Type

Application)
A MEAP application type created in Java.

This type of applications show buttons on the touch panel display.
Code Sign
Information to check if an application is genuine. An application marketed

in the normal procedure has a code sign assigned by LMS. MEAP platform
rejects applications without Canon code signs for being installed or
executed on the device.
CPCA
(Common Peripheral
Controlling
Architecture)
Common Peripheral Controlling Architecture. CPCA defines an object

model of peripheral deices. A client can control a device by creating or
modifying objects in the device.
CPCA Java CL
(Class Library)
CPCA Java Class Library. A Java class library, which is used to control a
device.
Default Authentication The login service used when the department ID control is used but other
-Department ID
authentication controls are not used. When the Department ID control is
Management
turned on, the login dialog prompts the users to enter the department ID
and password. The dialog appears the initial screen of both the control
panel on the MEAP device and Remote UI
J2ME
Java 2 Platform Micro Edition. One of Java Platforms licensed by Sun
(Java2 Platform Micro Microsystems, Inc. It is applied for MEAP. Other devices such as cellular
Edition)
phones and PDA.
J2RE
(Java 2 Runtime
Environment)
A set of basic programs to run applications developed in the programming

language of Java2. This set includes Java virtual machine providing
runtime environment for Java applications among others. Java applets do
not require J2RE since these are executed on Web browsers using Java
runtime environment provided on browsers. However, standalone Java
applications require Java runtime environment such as J2RE for execution.
Runtime environments can be downloaded for free of charge from the Web
site of Sun Microsystems, the Java developer.
Java
A programming language developed by Sun Microsystems, in the U. S. A.

Low dependent on models and OSes and runs on various platforms. Taking
advantage of this feature, many applications that runs on web servers uses
Java. The MEAP platform uses J2ME - a type of Java.
JavaScript
A script language developed by Netscape Communications, in the U.S. A.,

runs on web browsers such as Netscape Navigator and Internet Explorer.
Allows web designers to create interactive pages with HTML files such as
animated buttons and display of timetables.
Java VM
JAVA Virtual Machine. The Java byte code interpreter. The Virtual Machine
(Java Virtual Machine) acts as an interpreter for processing the byte code using the native
instruction set.
License Access
Number
A number issued for accessing license file. The Licensing server requires
entries of application ID, expiration date/times information, and the number
of access numbers, to issue license access numbers
A software manufacture of a MEAP application provides the users with the
license files. Specifies the terms of agreement that a user concludes with
the manufacturer. Required for installing a MEAP application.
Device Specification
ID
ID allocated to each device type. This represents CPCA API specification

and the version number to use MFP generic functions or obtain information
including maximum allowable copies.
Licensae File
Esplet
(Esplet Type
Application)
A MEAP application type created in Java. This type of applications do

not show user interfaces either on Local UI or Web. Esplet is a coined
word created by Canon, consisting of [Espresso] or Italian coffee and [let]
derived from Applet/Service.
LMS
The license is required for installing a MEAP application in a MEAPenabled
(License Management iR device. LMS is the server issuing [License Files] as well as license
System)
access numbers.
File Description
An identifier for the OS to identify the destination file requested by a

program. A program descriptor includes an identifier and information such
as a file name and size, which helps OS to judge the file to be edited.
HID class
HID stands for Human Interface Device, representing man-machine

interfaces of PC components and peripheral devices. HID class means
USB class classified as HID.
iR Native application
The functionalities that existing imageRUNNER has such as Copy,

Universal Send and Mailbox.
ISV
(Independent
Software Vendor)
Independent Software Vender. Software manufacturer who develops and/or

sells applications and tools but does not entire computer systems. Refers
application developer in this document.
Login Service
Manages user information of MEAP device. Authenticates users with user

names and passwords. Three login services are available for MEAP device
- Default Authentication, which provides department ID control, SDL (Simple
Device Login) and SSO (Single Sign-On).
Mass Storage class
Mass Storage means a storage device with large capacity, generally

secondary storage devices. Mass Storage class means USB class
classified in the secondary storage device group.
MEAP (Multifunction
Multifunctional Embedded Application Platform. Provides an environment
Embedded Application for executing application programs on a peripheral device. Uses the Java
Platform)
platform (J2ME - Java 2 platform Micro Edition) to run Java application for
MEAP.
MEAP Contents
Required to install an MEAP application to a MEAP device.
2-247
Terms & Acronyms
2-248
Terms & Acronyms
MEAP Specifications MEAP Spec Version, the term used for the SDK. The version number that
(MEAP Spec Version) shows the APIs of the MEAP platform other than CPCA, such as network
and security. The version number is not assigned for each device model.
MEAP Application Runs on MEAP platform. Consists of application files
(*.jar) and the license file (*.lic).
SDK
(Software
Development Kit)
The kit containing information and tools required for software development.
Service
MEAP-enabled iR
device
imageRUNNER (iR) devices with built-in MEAP platform.
A functional unit or an application program working on MEAP platform.

[Applications] are generally termed [Services] in Java world.
MFP
(Multi Function
Peripheral)
Multi Function Peripheral. Peripheral device that supports more than one
function, such as digital copier, printer, scanner, and fax.
Servlet
(Servlet Type
Application)
A MEAP application type created in Java. This type of applications is

designed to show user interface on the Web browser.
OSGi
(Open Service
Gateway Initiative)
Open Service Gateway Initiative. See "http://www.osgi.org/".
Portal Service
The web portal to gain access to a MEAP-enabled device. This service has
been integrated in Remote UI top page in iR ADVANCE series.
Protocol
A set of rules applied to data transmission procedures over network. Major

communication protocols include:
FTP: File Transfer Protocol. This is a communication protocol or
protocolimplemented commands to provide file transfer between a host
and clients over TCP/IP network.
DHCP: An upward compatible protocol of BOOTP. This communication
protocol allocates a dynamic IP address to each client machine upon
communication startup on TCP/IP network and collects the allocated IP
address when communication is completed. The server allocates one of
multiple IP addresses and notifies the setup information to a client.
BOOTP: A communication protocol to automatically load setup
information including IP address and a domain name from the server to a
client on TCP/IP network.
RARP: A communication protocol to request IP address information via
the network adaptor address (MAC address) of a client.
IPP: A communication protocol to execute remote printing between the
print server and clients via Internet.
TCP/IP: A standard communication protocol required to access to
Internet and other large-scale network.
Proxy Server
Provides functions to store data fetched from remote servers. When a

user request to display a web page that has been displayed and stored
in the proxy, the proxy server read the stored data but does not access
the remote server where the original page is present, for efficient access
services. When a proxy server receives a URL from a PC, it searches the
file in the cache and sends it to the PC if the requested file is found. If the
requested file is not stored in the cache, it accesses the remote server of
the URL to acquire the file and, at the same time, stores the acquired file
in the cache so that the proxy server can quickly send the file at the next
request.
SMS
The web-base service to provide user interfaces for application life cycle
(Service Management management.
Service)
Socket
A virtual interface of an application for network communication. A user

only needs to specify a socket as a unit of an address and a port from an
application. This establishes the network connection for data transmission,
eliminating complication related to detailed communication procedures.
SSO-H (Single SignOn H)
Login service providing features of both local device authentication

and domain authentication. The former is the method that iR device
independently authorizes users; whereas the latter is that iR device links to
the domain controller on the network in the Active Directory environment to
authorize users.
Thread
A unit for program execution. A multi-task system allowing multiple

programs to run concurrently assigns a memory space and other resources
independently to each program, providing users with a feel as if only a
program is running. At least one thread is generated upon a program
generated.
URL
(Uniform Resource
Locator)
The method to denote Web page locations on Internet and the like. For
instance, a URL on the Web is denoted as [http://www.w3.org/default. html].
[http] at the beginning means that an address following this is in a web
page on the Internet.
USB
Abbreviation of Universal Serial Bus. This is the interface standard to link

between information devices.
USB system driver
The general-purpose driver that control the behavior of the device, there
are HID class driver, Mass Storage class driver and so on.
T-2-118
Redistribution module A built-in module of an application created with SDK. Applications without
this module cannot work on MEAP platform.
2-248
Technology > MEAP > Maintenance > Option for exclusive individual measure
Option for exclusive individual measure
2-249
4) Press either 0 (hide) or 1 (display) on control panel (the numerical value input in the field is
displayed), and press [OK] button.
Display Setting of Copy Icon (level2)

Make a setting as to whether to display/hide the copy screen (copy tab) on the control panel.
This is the specification for users who want to customize hiding it on control panel.
Default value
1: display
Setting range, item
0: hide 1: display
Setting Procedure
2) Press [COPIER] > [Option] > [DSPLY-SW] buttons.
F-2-423
F-2-421
3) Press [UI-COPY] button.
F-2-422
2-249
Error at starting up the MEAP application/Setting to hide JAM screen

(level 2)
2-250
3) Press [ANIM-SW] button.
In the case that operation is restricted by MEAP application, hide the warning screen of error/
JAM (such as JAM screen, door opening, no-toner). In the case that these errors occur, there
will be a display indicating 'call the service personnel' etc.
Note:
Part of the warning screens is displayed if shifting to the device screen.
As for the screens for jam and no-toner, the warning screen (animation) can be displayed
by pressing the followings: [Device Screen] > [Recovery Procedure]
As for the screen for door opening, the warning screen cannot be displayed because
there is no display for [[Device Screen] > [Recovery Procedure]
F-2-425
4) Press either 0 (display warning screen) or 1 (hide warning screen) on control panel (the
Default value
numerical value input in the field is displayed), and press [OK] button.
1: No activation of warning display

Setting range, item
0: display warning screen 1: hide warning screen
Setting Procedure
2) Press [COPIER] > [Option] > [DSPLY-SW] buttons.
F-2-426
F-2-424
2-250
Technology > Embedded RDS > Product Overview > Major Functions
2-251
Embedded RDS
Features and benefits

E-RDS embedded with a network module in advance can realize a front-end processing
Product Overview
of e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system without attaching any extra hardware

equipment.
Overview
Embedded RDS (hereinafter referred to as E-RDS) is a monitoring program that runs on the
host machine. When the monitoring option is enabled by making the setting on this machine,
information such as the status change of the machine, counter information, and failure
information are collected. The collected device information is sent to a remote maintenance
server called UGW (Universal Gateway Server) via Internet, thus allowing for e-Maintenance/
imageWARE Remote (Remote Diagnosis System).
Major Functions
Service Call Button
If a user touches service call button on the touch panel display when corrupt image, paper
jams, or/ and other problem has occurred, E-RDS generates an alarm and notifies it to UGW.
Moreover, E-RDS also notifies cancellation and the completion of the request
Service Browser
The following device information/ status can be monitored.

Billing counts
Service browser is a web browsing functionality only for service technicians in charge, and is
Parts counter
used for referring to the FAQ contents which is connected to UGW.
Firmware info
In order to grasp on which devices the service browser is enabled, when the status of the
Service call error log
service browser is changed from disabled (0: OFF) to enabled, E-RDS sends the browser
Jam log
information to the UGW.
Alarm log
Status changes (Toner low/ out, etc.)
Service mode menu Transmission

E-RDS sends the target service mode menu data to UGW in the following cases:
Since high confidentiality is required for the information shown above, it performs
When a specific alarm and service call error are detected
communication between this machine and the UGW using HTTPS/ SOAP protocol.
Customer
Environment
When the setting is changed in service mode

The following shows the transmission timing and the target data for transmission in service
UGW
mode menu:
This machine
Transmission timing
Internet
When the following alarm is detected.
Firewall
Sales Company
DNS Server
Proxy Server
Administrator
The e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system configuration

F-2-427
Technology > Embedded RDS > Product Overview > Major Functions
Alarm codes for transmission:

0x060002,// Fixing
0x060004 - 0x069999,// Fixing
0x090005 - 0x099999,// Dram
0x100006 - 0016, 0x100022 - 0099,
0x100101 - 9900,// Development
0x300001 - 0x309999// High voltage
Transmitting data
COPIER
Display
Error retry
ANALOG
No
HV-STS
CCD
DPOT
DENS
FIXING
SENSOR
MISC
HT-C
HV-TR
P-PASCAL
2-251
Technology > Embedded RDS > Limitations > Service Mode Menu Transmission Function
Transmission timing
Transmitting data
When the following service call error is detected. COPIER
Display
Error codes for transmission:

E000 - E00F,// Fixing
E020,// Development ATR
E060 - E06F// High voltage
When a value is set to [COPIER - Adjust]

subordinates Service mode menu.
(Transmission will be done at 60 min, later of
setting)
COPIER
When the first communication test is done.

(For transmission process, 5 minutes after the
execution)
COPIER
Adjust
Error retry
ANALOG
No
HV-STS
CCD
DPOT
DENS
FIXING
SENSOR
MISC
HT-C
HV-TR
P-PASCAL
Yes
2-252
Limitations
Service Mode Menu Transmission Function
1) In the following cases, service mode menu data is not transmitted.
When an unsent alarm log or service call log has been detected by E-RDS at poweron
When an alarm log or service call log to be resent due to a transmission failure is
detected
When transmission of service mode menu executed at the time of detection of an
alarm or a service call error ended in failure
If a new alarm or service call error occurs while service mode menu data is being
obtained after detection of an alarm or a service call error, the data being obtained is
not sent.
Display
ANALOG Yes
HV-STS
CCD
DPOT
DENS
FIXING
SENSOR
MISC
HT-C
HV-TR
P-PASCAL
2) If alarms/service call errors successively occur, and if the time of the host machine is
corrected or changed while the log is being sent, service mode menu data may not be
properly sent. It is because a Link No.* may be applied to the old log although it should be
applied to the new log.
* Link No.:
A common number for linking the service mode menu data with the alarm log/service
call log data to be sent
After completion of log transmission, the service mode menu data is obtained, and is
sent with this number attached.
Adjust
T-2-119
NOTE:
Target transmission data are only the items under LEVEL1 and 2 in the service mode.
3) Transmission of the data of changes made in service mode menu settings is not performed
instantly, but performed when a specified period of 60 minutes elapse after the change of
service mode menu settings is detected or when a communication test is performed at the
time of power-on. (There is a time lag.)
4) When service mode menu settings ([COPIER] > [Adjust]) are made, transmission is
performed even when no change is made in the target data to be transmitted.
Transmission of service mode data is also performed when changes are made in the
service mode setting value not subject to transmission (items other than Level 1, 2) or
when settlement of a value is performed without changing the setting value.
Technology > Embedded RDS > Limitations > Service Mode Menu Transmission Function
2-252
Technology > Embedded RDS > Service cautions
Service cautions
1) After clearing RAM of the Main Controller PCB SRAM Board, initialization of the E-RDS
setting (ERDS-DAT) and a communication test (COM-TEST) need to be performed.
Failure to do so will result that the counter transmitting value to the UGW may become
2-253
NOTE:
*The user can conduct a communication test and seen the communication test result.
If the communication results in failure, an error code (a hexadecimal number, 8 digits)
appears on the touch panel display.
unusual.
Also, after replacing the main controller board, all settings must be reprogrammed.
2) The following settings in service mode must not be change unless there are specific
instructions to do so. Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW.
Set port number of UGW
[SERVICE MODE] > [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [RGW-PORT]
Default : 443
URL setting of UGW
[SERVICE MODE] > [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [RGW-ADR]
Default : https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010
3) If the e-Maintenance/imageWARE Remote contract of the device is invalid, be sure to turn
OFF the E-RDS setting (E-RDS : 0).
4) Communication tests can be conducted in user mode.* When conducting a communication
test in user mode, pay attention on the following points:
During a communication test in user mode, do not take any actions such as pressing
a key. Actions are not accepted until the communication test is completed (actions are
ignored).
When a communication test is being conducted from service mode or user mode,
do not conduct a communication test from the other. These operations are not
guaranteed.
Technology > Embedded RDS > Service cautions
2-253
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Confirmation and preparation in advance
E-RDS Setup
Confirmation and preparation in advance
To monitor this machine with e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote, the following settings are
required.
2-254
(3) Network settings
Based on the results of the information obtained in (2) Advance preparations, make this
machine network related settings.
See Users Guide for detailed procedures.
CAUTION:
(1) Advance confirmation

Confirm with the UGW administrator that the device to be monitored with e-Maintenance/
When changes are made to the above-mentioned network settings, be sure to reboot
this machine.
imageWARE Remote is registered in the UGW.
(2) Advance preparations

The following network-related information needs to be obtained from the user's system
administrator in advance.
Information item 1
IP address settings
Automatic setting : DHCP, RARP, BOOTP
Manual setting : IP address, subnet mask and gateway address to be set
Information item 2
Is there a DNS server in use?
If there is a DNS server in use, find out the following.
Primary DNS server address
Secondary DNS server address
Information item 3
Is there a proxy server?
If there is a proxy server in use, find out the following.
Proxy server address
Port No. for proxy server
Information item 4
Is proxy server authentication required?
If proxy server authentication is required, find out the following.
User name and password required for proxy authentication
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Confirmation and preparation in advance
2-254
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to E-RDS settings
Steps to E-RDS settings
2-255
(2) Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [CA-KEY] and touch the [OK] button.
1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.

2. Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [ERDS-DAT] and touch the [OK] button.
NOTE:
This operation initializes the E-RDS settings to factory setting values.
For the setting values to be initialized, see the section of "Initializing E-RDS settings".
F-2-429
"OK!" is displayed if the CA certificate is initialized. When "NG!" is displayed, see the
section of "Troubleshooting" to execute the remedy, and then perform initialization of the
CA certificate again and check to see if the CA certificate is initialized.
F-2-428
3. Perform installation or deletion of the CA certificate if necessary, and reboot this machine.
Installation of the CA certificate: Perform installation from SST or Remote UI.
Deletion of the CA certificate: When the following operation is performed, the CA certificate
in the factory setting is automatically installed.
CAUTION:
After following procedure, the registered key and CA certificate are deleted, and only
the CA certificate installed at the time of shipment is registered.
It is therefore necessary to check with the user in advance.
F-2-430
(3) Reboot this machine.

(1) Start [Service Mode] at Level 2.
CAUTION:
If a key and a CA certificate have been registered in order to use a function other than
E-RDS, it is necessary to register again from SST or Remote UI.
2-255
2-256
CAUTION:
5. Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [E-RDS].
The following settings i.e. RGW-PORT and RGW-ADR in Service mode must not be
change unless there are specific instructions to do so.
Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW.
F-2-431
6. Touch the numeric button [1] on the control panel (the setting value is changed to 1) and
touch the [OK] button. (The data is reflected to the setting value field.)
7. Select [COM-TEST] and then touch [OK].
NOTE:
This operation enables the communication function with UGW.
NOTE:
This initiates the communication test between the device and the UGW.
F-2-432
F-2-433
2-256
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Call button settings
If the communication is successful, "OK!" is displayed. If "NG!" (failed) appears, refer to the
"Troubleshooting" and repeat until "OK!" is displayed.
2-257
Steps to Service Call button settings
Steps for settings to display the service call button
In order to use the "Service Call" button, follow the procedure shown below to display the
"Service Call" button.
2. Select [COPIER] > [Option] > [USER] > [SCALL-SW].
F-2-434
NOTE:
The communication results with UGW can be distinguished by referring to the COMLOG. By performing the communication test with UGW, E-RDS acquires schedule
information and starts monitoring and meter reads operation.
F-2-435
3. Touch the numeric button [1] on the control panel (the setting value is changed to 1) and
touch the [OK] button. (The data is reflected to the setting value field.)
F-2-436
2-257
NOTE:
When the function is enabled, the [Service Call] button is displayed on the Monitoring
Service screen by touching the [Monitoring Service] button on the Check Counter
screen.
2-258
3. Touch the numeric button [1] or [0] on the control panel (the setting value is changed to 1
or 0) and touch the [OK] button. (The data is reflected to the setting value field.)
NOTE:
E-RDS generates an alarm of service call completion at this timing, and sends the
alarm to UGW.
F-2-438
Steps for settings of service call completion

When the service technician completes the work for the service call, follow the instruction as
described below to execute the service call completion work.
NOTE:
In the current condition, touching the [OK] button completes the service call regardless
of whether 0 or 1 is set.

2. Select [COPIER] > [Option] > [USER] > [SCALLCMP].
F-2-437
2-258
Steps for service call request
2-259
4. Select the request details and touch the [Request] button.
Users should follow the instructions as described below to request a service call.
1. Touch the [Counter Check] button on the control panel to display the Check Counter
screen.
NOTE:
E-RDS generates an alarm of service call request at this timing, and sends the alarm to
UGW.
2. Touch the [Monitoring Service] button, and touch the [Service Call] button on the Monitoring
Service screen.
F-2-439
3. Touch the [New Request] button on the Service Call screen.
F-2-441
5. If the service call request is successful, "The service call request has been sent."
is displayed. If "Could not send the service call request." appears, refer to the
"Troubleshooting" and repeat until "The service call request has been sent." is displayed.
F-2-440
CAUTION:
When a service call has been already requested, another service call cannot be sent.
The previous service call needs to be canceled, or a service technician needs to
F-2-442
perform processing for service call completion.
2-259
Steps for service call cancellation
2-260
4. "The request has been canceled." is displayed.
To cancel the service call, follow the instructions as described below.

1. Touch the [Counter Check] button on the control panel to display the Check Counter
screen.
2. Touch the [Monitoring Service] button, and touch the [Service Call] button on the Monitoring
Service screen.
F-2-445
F-2-443
3. Touch the [Cancel] button, and touch the [Yes] button in the check screen.
NOTE:
E-RDS generates an alarm of service call cancellation at this timing, and sends the
alarm to UGW.
F-2-444
2-260
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Browser settings
Steps to Service Browser settings
2-261
3. Reboot this machine.

2. Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [BRWS-ACT] and then touch [OK].
4. Make sure that "1 (: ACTIVE)" is set under [COPIER] > [Display] > [USER] > [BRWS-STS].
NOTE:
When the status of the function is changed from disabled to enabled, E-RDS sends the
browser information to the UGW.
F-2-448
5. When the above-shown setting values are enabled, [Service Browser] is displayed in the
Service Mode screen.
F-2-446
If the connection is established with UGW successfully, "OK!" is displayed. When "NG!" is
displayed, perform the steps referring to "Troubleshooting" until connection is established
with UGW.
F-2-449
NOTE:
Generally, once service browsing is enabled (BRWS-STS : 1), it cannot be disabled
(BRWS-STS : 0) again*. To disable service browsing, clear SRAM.
* The function is disabled (BRWS-STS: 2) by executing BRWS-ACT again.
F-2-447
Technology > Embedded RDS > E-RDS Setup > Steps to Service Browser settings
2-261
Technology > Embedded RDS > FAQ
2-262
FAQ
Initializing E-RDS settings

It is possible to clear the SRAM data of E-RDS and change the E-RDS setting back to the
default value.
No.1
Q: In what case does a communication test with UGW fail?
A: The following cases can be considered in the becoming "NG!" case.
Initialization procedure
1. Name resolution was failed due to an incorrect host name or DNS server has been
halted.
2. Network cable is blocked off.
2. Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [ERDS-DAT] and then touch [OK].
3. Proxy server settings is not correct.

No.2
Q: When does E-RDS send counter information to UGW? How many data is sent?
A: The schedule of data transmitting, the start time are determined by settings in the UGW
side. The send time cannot be specified on the E-RDS side. Data is sent once every 16
hours.
The data size of counter information is approx. 285 KB.
No.3
Q: Will data which failed to be sent due to an error in communication with UGW be resent?
A: Data shown below will be resent.
Jam log
F-2-450
Setting values and data to be initialized

The following E-RDS settings, internal data, and Alarm filtering information are initialized.
COPIER > Function > INSTALL > E-RDS
COPIER > Function > INSTALL > RGW-ADR
COPIER > Function > INSTALL > RGW-PORT
COPIER > Function > INSTALL > COM-LOG
Alarm log
Service mode menu
The newest data is resent only when the settings are changed in service mode.
Browser information
It is resent only when the web browser option is enabled.
Data is resent endlessly (after 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, and 30 minutes since the occurrence of
communication error; once 30 minutes have passed, it is resent at 30-minute intervals) until it
is sent successfully. Resend continues even if the power is turned OFF and then ON.
CAUTION:
In case of replacing the CA certificate file, even if initialization of E-RDS is executed, the
status is not returned to the factory default.
When installing the certificate file other than the factory default CA certificate file, it is
required to delete the certificate file after E-RDS initialization and install the factory
default CA certificate file.
For detailed procedures, see "Steps to E-RDS settings - step 3.".
Service call log
No.4
Q: What is the upper limit of the number of COM-LOGs? What is the upper limit of the number
of characters of error information displayed in a COM-LOG?
A: Up to 30 log data can be saved. The data size of error information is maximum 128
characters.
2-262
2-263
No.5
No.10
Q: Although Microsoft ISA as a proxy server is introduced, the authentication check is failed.
Q: Is there any setting to be made on the device side to enable the service mode menu
Can E-RDS adopt with Microsoft ISA?

A: E-RDS must comply with "Basic" while "Integrated" authentication is used for Microsoft ISA
(as default); therefore, authentication with E-RDS is available if you change the setting to
"Basic" authentication on the server.
transmission function? Moreover, what is Service mode menu set as the object of
transmission?
A: No steps peculiar to Transmitting Service mode menu. As for the data that applies to
transmission of the service mode, see the "Service mode menu Transmission".
No.6
No.11
Q: Can I turn this machine power off during the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system
Q: What service browser data is transmitted to UGW by E-RDS in what timing?

A: The service browser data to be transmitted and the transmission timing are shown below.
operation?
A: While operating the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system, the power of the device
must be ON. If power OFF is needed, do not leave the device power OFF for long time.
It will become "Device is busy, try later" errors if the power supply of network equipment
such as HUB is made prolonged OFF.
No.7
Q: Although a Service call error may not be notified to UGW, the reason is what?
A: If a service technician in charge turns off the power supply of this machine immediately
after error occurred once, It may be unable to notify to UGW because data processing does
not take a time from the controller of this machine to NIC though, the data will be saved on
the RAM.
If the power supply is blocked off while starting up, the data will be inevitably deleted.
Transmission timing
Detailed procedure
When the service browser 1) Specify the service browser

is enabled from the
setting in the service mode
disabled state [OFF]
menu.
2) Send browser information to
UGW.
3) Once obtaining OK
response from UGW, enable
the service browser mode
[ACTIVE].
(To use the setting, it is
necessary to reboot this
machine)
Transmission
information
Error occurs
Service browser mode: Retransmission

[Register]
is not performed.
WEB browser option: ("Disabling
[ON] or [OFF] according [OFF]" continues
to the license status
to be set.)
T-2-120
No.8
No.12
Q: How does E-RDS operate while this machine is placed in the sleep mode?
Q: Can I make another service call request when I have already requested a service call?
A: While being in Real Deep Sleep, and if data to be sent is in E-RDS, the system wakes up
A: No, you cannot make another service call request if you have already made a service call
asleep, then starts to send the data to the UGW. The system also waits for completion of
request.
data transmission and let the device to shift to asleep status again.
Touch the [Cancel] button to cancel the service call which youd made. Or the service
However, transition time to the Real Deep Sleep depends on the device, and the transition
technician performs a service call completion process.
to sleep wont be done if the next data transmission will be done within 10 minutes.
No.13
No.9
Q: Is the "Requesting" status cancelled when this machine is rebooted?
Q: Is E-RDS compatible with Department counter?
A: The requesting status is not cancelled even if the device is rebooted. The information
A: No, E-RDS does not support Department counter.
of the notified service call request (the time that the request was made, the service call
request description) is also retained during the "Requesting" status.
2-263
Technology > Embedded RDS > Troubleshooting
2-264
Troubleshooting
No.14
Q: Counter information could not be sent at the scheduled send time due to the power of this
machine being turned OFF. Will the counter information be sent later when the power of
this machine is turned ON?
A: Yes. When a scheduled send such as that for counter could not be executed due to the
power of this machine being turned OFF, etc., and the scheduled send time has already
passed at power-on, the send is executed immediately.
Scheduled send
Immediate send
(Service call log / Alarm log / Jam log)
Cause: Initial settings or network conditions is incomplete.

Remedy 1: Check and take actions mentioned below.
1) Check network connections
YES: Proceed to Step 2).
Status of this machine

Power OFF
Sent
Not sent*1
Sleep
Sent
Sent*2
Power ON
Symptom: A communication test (COM-TEST) results NG!
Is the status indicator LED for the HUB port to which this machine is connected ON?
The following shows data send according to the status of this machine.
Send types
No.1
NO: Check that the network cable is properly connected.
Sent*2
2) Confirm loop back address (* In case of IPv4 )

Select [Settings/Registration (User Mode)] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings]
T-2-121
> [IPv4 Settings] > [PING Command], enter "127.0.0.1", and touch the [Start] button.
*1: Immediately sent if the send time has already passed at power-on.
*2: Sent after recovery from sleep mode.
No.15
Q: Some part of information seems to be suppressed as screens passes: Settings/
Registration > Preferences > Network > TCP/ IP Settings, when the device is connected
with a PS server unit. How the authentication information such as CA certificate is dealt?
A: The certificate-related items are displayed. Even when the device is connected with a PS
Server Unit, E-RDS functions.
F-2-451
Does the screen display "Response from the host."? (See the next figure.)
NO: There is a possibility that this machines network settings are wrong. Check the
details of the IPv4 settings once more.
2-264
2-265
(b) Touch the [Up] button.
F-2-452
F-2-454
3) Confirmation from another PC connected to same network.

Request the user to ping this machine from a PC connected to same network.
Does this machine respond?
(c) Select [IPv4 Settings] > [PING Command], enter the primary DNS server noted down
in step a) as the IP address, and touch the [Start] button.

NO: Confirm the details of this machines IP address and subnet mask settings.
Does the screen display "Response from the host."?

YES: Proceed to Remedy 2.
4) Confirm DNS connection

(a) Select [Settings/Registration (User Mode)] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP
Settings] > [DNS Settings] > [DNS Server Address Settings], write down the primary
and secondary addresses of the DNS server, and touch the [Cancel] button.
NO: Enter the secondary DNS server noted down in step a) as the IP address,
and then touch the [Start] button.
Does the screen display "Response from the host."?
YES: Proceed to Remedy 2.
NO: There is a possibility that the DNS server address is wrong. Reconfirm the
address with the users system administrator.
F-2-453
2-265
2-266
Remedy 2: Troubleshooting using communication error log (COM-LOG)

1) Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.
3) When each line is selected, the communication error log detailed screen is displayed as
shown in the figure below. (Example: No. 02)
2) Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [COM-LOG] and touch the blank field on the
right side. The communication error log list screen is displayed.
F-2-456
NOTE:
A detailed description of the error appears below 'Information'. (Max 128 characters)
Touch the [OK] button to return to the communication error log list screen.
4) When a message is displayed, take an appropriate action referring to "Error code and
strings".
No.2
Symptom: A communication test results NG! even if network setting is set properly.
Cause: The network environment is inappropriate, or RGW-ADR or RGW-PORT settings for
F-2-455
1) Check network conditions such as proxy server settings and so on.
NOTE:
Only the initial part of error information is displayed in the communication error log list
screen.
"*" is added to the top of the error text in the case of an error in communication test (method
name: getConfiguration or communicationTest) only.
E-RDS have been changed.

Remedy: The following points should be checked.
2) Check the E-RDS setting values.

Check the communication error log from COM-LOG.
Check whether RGW-ADR or RGW-PORT settings has changed. If RGW-ADR or RGWPORT settings has changed, restore initial values. For initial values, see "Service cautions".
2-266
2-267
No.3
No.7
Symptom: There was a log, indicating "Device is not ready, try later" in error details of COM-
Symptom: A service call request cannot be made because the [New Request] button is
grayed out.
LOG list.
Cause: A certain problem occurred in networking.
Remedy: Check and take actions mentioned below.
1) Check networking conditions and connections.
2) Turn on the power supply of this machine and perform a communication test about 60
seconds later.
No.4
Symptom: "Unknown error" is displayed though a communication test (COM-TEST) has done
successfully.
Cause: It could be a problem at the UGW side or the network load is temporarily faulty.
Remedy: Try again after a period of time. If the same error persists, check the UGW status
with a network and UGW administrator.
F-2-457
No.5
Symptom: Enabling Service Browser (BRWS-ACT) results NG!
Cause: A communication test with UGW has not been performed, or a communication test
result is NG!
Remedy: Perform a communication test, and check that the test with UGW finishes
successfully.
Cause: There has been already a service call request.

Remedy: Perform either of the following remedy works:
Touch the [Cancel] button to cancel the service call request that has been made.
A service technician performs a complete processing for the service call request that has
been made.
No.8
No.6
Symptom: The display indicates that the service browser is enabled (BRWS-STS: 1), but the
service browser fails to be activated.
Cause: The main power switch of this machine has not been turned OFF and then ON. ON/
OFF of the service browser is enabled after reboot.
Remedy: Turn OFF and then ON the main power of this machine.
Symptom: Initializing the CA certificate (CA-KEY) results in NG!

Cause: Initialization process of the CA certificate has completed abnormally.
Remedy: Initialize the HDD.
No.9
Symptom: A service call request is failed, and a message "Could not send the service call
request" is displayed.
Cause: A communication test with UGW has not been performed, or a communication test
result is NG!
Remedy: Perform a communication test, and check that the test with UGW finishes
successfully.
2-267
Technology > Embedded RDS > Error code and strings
2-268
Error code and strings
No.10
Symptom: When a communication test (COM-TEST) is repeatedly executed, an error occurs.
Cause: During communication conducted after execution of a COM-TEST, another COMTEST was executed again.
Remedy: When repeatedly executing COM-TEST, execute COM-TEST at intervals of 5
minutes or more.
The following error information is displayed on the communication error log details screen.
(Here, "server" means UGW.)
The error information are displayed in the following form.
[*] [Error strings] [Method name] [Error details provided by UGW]
NOTE:
"*" is added to the top of the error text in the case of an error in communication test
(method name: getConfiguration or communicationTest) only.
No.
1
0xxx 0003
0xxx 0003
84xx 0003
8600 0002
8600 0003
8600 0101
8600 0201
8600 0305
8600 0306
8600 0401
8600 0403
8600 0414
8600 0415
8700 0306 SRAM version
unmatch!
Error strings
Code
0000 0000 SUSPEND: mode

changed.
0500 0003 SUSPEND:
Communication test
is not performed.
Cause
Unmatched Operation Mode
Remedy
Initialize the E-RDS setting
(ERDS-DAT).
Perform a communication test
(COM-TEST).
Rebooting the device while

the communication test had
not been performed although
E-RDS is enabled.
Server schedule is Blank schedule data have
Perform and complete a
not exist
been received from UGW.
communication test (COMTEST).
Communication test Communication test has not Perform and complete a
is not performed
completed.
E-RDS switch is
A communication test has
Set E-RDS switch (E-RDS)
setted OFF
been attempted with the
to 1, and then perform a
E-RDS switch being OFF.
Event Registration Processing (event processing) Turn the device OFF/ ON.
is Failed
within the device has failed.
If the error persists, replace
the device system software.
(Upgrade)
8700 0306 SRAM AeRDS

version unmatch!
Improper value is written

in at the head of the Main
Controller PCB 2 SRAM
domain of E-RDS.
Improper value is written
in at the head of the Main
Controller PCB 2 SRAM
domain of Ae-RDS.
Turn the device OFF/ ON.
2-268
2
No.
Code
Error strings
8xxx 0004 Operation is not

supported
10 8xxx 0101 Server response
error (NULL)
11
8xxx 0201
8xxx 0202
8xxx 0203
8xxx 0204
8xxx 0206
Cause
Method which E-RDS is not

supporting attempted.
Communication with UGW has
been successful, but an error
of some sort has prevented
UGW from responding.
When (Null) is displayed
at the end of the message,
this indicates that there has
been an error in the HTTPS
communication method.
Server schedule is During the communication
invalid
test, there has been some
kind of error in the schedule
values passed from UGW.
2-269
Remedy
Contact help desk
Code
Error strings
Cause
Communication attempted
without confirming network
connection, just after booting
up a device in which the
network preparations are not
ready.

error
([Hexadecimal])
[Error detailed in
UGW]*1
22 8xxx 200A Server connection
error
Communication with UGW has

been successful, but an error
of some sort has prevented
UGW from responding.
23 8xxx 200B Server address

resolution error
Server address name

resolution has failed.

When the error occurs, report

the details to the support
section.
After the UGW side
has responded, try the
communication test again.
12 8xxx 0207 Internal Schedule is The schedule data in the
8xxx 0208 broken
inside of E-RDS is not right. (COM-TEST).
13 8xxx 0221 Server specified list Alarm/Alert filtering error: The Alert filtering is not supported
is too big
number of elements of the list by UGW.
specified by the server is over
restriction value.
14 8xxx 0222 Server specified list Alarm filtering error: Unjust
Alert filtering is not supported
is wrong
value is included in the
by UGW.
element of the list specified by
the server.
15 8xxx 0304 Device is busy, try The semaphore consumption Try again a communication test
later
error at the time of a
after a period of time.
communication test.
16 8xxx 0709 Tracking ID is not When upgrading firmware, the Obtain the sublog, and contact
match
TrackingID notified by Updater the support department of the
differs from the thing of UGW sales company.
designates.
17 8xxx 2000 Unknown error
Some other kind of
communication error has
communication test (COMoccurred.
TEST).
18 8xxx 2001 URL Scheme
The header of the URL of the Check that the value of URL of
error(not https)
registered UGW is not in https UGW (RGW-ADR) is https://
format.
a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/
agentif010.
19 8xxx 2002 URL server
A URL different to that
Check that the value of URL of
specified is illegal specified by the UGW has
UGW (RGW-ADR) is https://
been set.
agentif010.
No.
20 8xxx 2003 Network is not

ready, try later
24 8xxx 2014 Proxy connection

error
TCP/IP communication fault

The IP address of device is
not set.
Remedy
Check the network
connection, as per the initial
procedures described in the
troubleshooting.
(COM-TEST) about 60 seconds
later, after turn on the device.
Try again after a period of time.
Check detailed error code
(Hexadecimal) and [Error
details in UGW] from UGW
displayed after the message.
Check the network
troubleshooting.
When proxy is used, make
the settings for proxy, and
check the status of the proxy
server.
Check that the value of URL
of UGW (RGW-ADR) is
https://a01.ugwdevice.net/
ugw/agentif010.
Check that Internet
connection is available in the
environment.
Check proxy server address /
port and re-enter as needed.
Could not connect to proxy

server due to improper
address.
25 8xxx 2015 Proxy address
Could not connect to proxy
Check that the proxy
server name is correct. If
resolution error
server due to name resolution
the proxy server name is
error of proxy address.
correct, check the DNS
troubleshooting.
Specify the IP address as the
proxy server name.
26 8xxx 201E Proxy
Proxy authentication is failed. Check the user name and
authentication error
password required in order to
login to the proxy, and re-enter
as needed.
2-269
2
No.
Code
Error strings
27 8xxx 2028 Server certificate

error

verify error

expired

time out
31 8xxx 2048 Service not found
Cause
No route certificate installed
in device.
Certificate other than
that initially registered
in the user's operating
environment is being used,
but has not been registered
with the device.
The date and time of the
device is not correct.
The server certificate
verification error occurred.
The route certificate

registered with the device
has expired.
Certificate other than
that initially registered
in the users operating
environment is being used,
but has not been registered
with the device.
The device time and date
is outside of the certificated
period.
Due to network congestion,
etc., the response from UGW
does not come within the
specified time. (HTTPS level
time out)
There is a mistake in the
UGW URL, and UGW cannot
be accessed. (Path is wrong)
32 8xxx 2052 URL error
The data which is not URL is

inputted into URL field.
33 8xxx 2058 Unknown error
SOAP Client fails to obtain

SOAP Response.
Possibility of a problem in
UGW or of a temporary
problem in the network load.
SOAP communication error
has occurred.
34 8xxx 2063 SOAP Fault
2-270
Remedy
Install the latest device

system software. (Upgrade)
Correctly set the date and
time of the device.
Execute CLEAR > CAKEY, and turn OFF and
then ON the device. (The
CA certificate at the time of
shipment is automatically
installed.)
agentif010.
Check that the device time and
date are correctly set.
If the device time and date are
correct, upgrade to the latest
system software.
No.
Code
Error strings
35 xxxx xxxx Device internal

error
36 xxxx xxxx SUSPEND:

Initialize Failure!
Cause
An internal error, such as
memory unavailable, etc.,
has occurred during a device
internal error phase.
Internal error occurred at the
initiating E-RDS.
Remedy
Or replace the device system
software. (Upgrade)
T-2-122
*1: [Hexadecimal]: indicates an error code returned from UGW.

[Error details in UGW]: indicates error details returned from UGW.
If this error occurs when the

communication test is being run
or Service Browser is being set,
try again after a period of time.
agentif010.
agentif010.
Check that the value of port

number of UGW (RGW-PORT)
is 443.
2-270
Technology > Updater > Installing Firmware
2-271
Updater
a. UGW-linked Download and Update (Full-Remote Update)

If the device is linked to UGW and the distribution schedule and update setting
are registered on UGW in advance, full remote firmware update is available on an
Overview
imageRUNNER ADVANCE-series device. Upon downloaded from CDS, the firmware is
Updater provides functions that enable network communication with Content Delivery System
updated on the device.
(hereinafter CDS) to install firmware, MEAP applications and system options.

3) Give a firmware distribution
command to e-ROS.
Firmware Installation
1) Set up customers,
device types, distribution
schedule and the
command for download
UGW
Sales Company
/ Partner
UGW Operator
Updater function enables users to distribute firmware through CDS via Internet. Particularly
on e-Maintenance/UGW (called NETEYE in Japan)-enabled devices, firmware can be
updated remotely, which effectively slashes costs incurred in field services.
2) Notify distribution
information to CDS.
e-RDS
4) Download
firmware
MEAP Application/System Option Installation

By linking devices to CDS and License Management System (providing the function to
CDS
Updater
Firmware Upload
Firmware
manage licenses; hereinafter LMS), applications can be installed in devices via Updater,
regardless of those not embedded (MEAP application) or embedded (system options) in
devices.
Canon Inc.
imageRUNNER 5) Writing process is

ADVANCE
automatically started upon
download completed.
F-2-477
b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution / Update)
Installing Firmware
If the device is linked to UGW and the distribution schedule is registered on UGW in
With link to Updater, service technicians provide firmware install services in the following 3
advance, firmware can be distributed to an imageRUNNER ADVANCE-series device before
methods.
a service technician actually visits the customer site. This allows the service technician to
Distribution Method
a. UGW-linked Download / Update
(Full-remote update)
b. UGW-linked Download
(Remote Distribution / Update)
c. Manual Download / Update
(On-site Update via Service mode)
Download
Downloadable Firmware Versions
Update
Previous
Current
Newer
Commanded
Timing
Ver
Ver
Ver
by:
UGW
Auto
No
Yes
Yes*1
UGW
Manual
Yes
Yes
Yes
Local UI
Auto
Manual
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes*1
Yes
*1:You can select the version allowed Remote Update.
update the firmware manually immediately after completing device inspection.

3) Give a firmware distribution
command to e-ROS.
UGW
1) Set up customers,
device types, distribution
schedule and the
command for download
Sales Company
/ Partner
UGW Operator
2) Notify distribution
information to CDS.
e-RDS
4) Download
firmware
T-2-127
Updater
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
Service
Technician
CDS
Firmware
Firmware Upload
Canon Inc.
5) Writing process is started by

manually executing Updater.
F-2-478
Technology > Updater > Installing Firmware
2-271
Technology > Updater > Installing MEAP Application/System Option
2-272
c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update via Service Mode)

If an imageRUNNER ADVANCE-series device has connection with the external network,
a service technician can gain access to CDS via Service mode to download and update
firmware. This allows service technicians to update the firmware as needed on the
customer site even without PCs.
1) Manually execute
Updater.
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
The following is the installation method of MEAP application/system option which is enabled
by applying CDS.
a. LMS-linked MEAP Application/System Option Installation
CDS
Updater
Installing MEAP Application/System Option
If an imageRUNNER ADVANCE-series device is connected to the external network, user or

Firmware
Firmware Upload
Canon Inc.
service technician can gain access to CDS from User mode to install a MEAP application
or a system option.
Installing MEAP Application
Service
2) Firmware distribution
Technician
LAN
F-2-479
NOTE:
External network here means the network connecting the device to CDS via Internet.
User
Download
Distribution Method Commanded
by
Manual download/
update via Local UI
Manual download/
upload via Remote UI
Special download/
upload via Remote UI
Periodical update via
Local UI
Local UI
Remote UI
Update
Timing
Auto
Manual
Auto
Manual
Remote UI
Local UI
Auto
Downloadable Firmware Versions

Previous Ver Current Ver Newer Ver
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Specific version only
(Obtain it separately)
No
Yes *1
Yes *1
Yes *1
Yes *1
5) Manuals, etc.
LAN
NOTE:
Users are able to gain firmware distribution in the following 4 methods by introducing
CDS. See User Manual for detailed information.
LAN
Sales
Company
LMS
2) License
Authentication
CDS
1) Enter LAN
MEAP
Application
3) Create LF
Manual
Upload
Application
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
4) Transmit MEAP
Application/LF
If a customer enters LAN

purchased from the sales company
to an imageRUNNERADVANCEseries device, MEAP application/LF
can be installed.
Canon Inc.
LAN: License Access Number

LF: License File
(DSN: Device Serial Number,
automatically sent to CDS upon LAN
entered.)
F-2-480
Yes *1
T-2-128
*1: Only the latest version of Remote update-enabled version is downloadable.
Technology > Updater > Installing MEAP Application/System Option
2-272
Technology > Updater > System Configuration
2-273
System Configuration
Installing System Option

LAN
LAN
Sales
Company
The figure below schematically shows the system configuration.
LMS
User
5) Manuals, etc.
LAN
2) License
Authentication
CDS
1) Enter LAN
Manual
Upload
Updater
LAN: License Access Number

LF: License File
(DSN: Device Serial Number,
automatically sent to CDS upon LAN
entered.)
Firmware
eRDS
Canon Inc.
4) Transmit LF
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
LMS
Application/License
Application
If a customer enters LAN

purchased from the sales company
to an imageRUNNERADVANCEseries device, a LF can be installed.
Manual
Readme
License
Access No.
3) Create LF
Dealer
MEAP application
Manual
Internet
User
Sales
Company
CDS
Application
Firmware
Business
Group
UGW
Service
Technician
Command for Firmware Distribution
QA
Canon Inc.
F-2-482
F-2-481
Technology > Updater > System Configuration
2-273
Technology > Updater > Distribution Flow > Firmware Installation Flow
2-274
List of Functions
Distribution Flow
Firmware Installation Flow
The matrix below shows the list of functions provided by Updater.

Category
Function
Firmware
MEAP application/
system option
System
Management
Internal system
error notification
Checking firmware compatibility

Checking special firmware
Checking latest firmware
version
Registering/deleting firmware
distribution schedule
Confirming and downloading
firmware
Updating downloaded firmware
Cancelling downloaded
firmware
Acquiring firmware distribution
information registered from
UGW
Notifying firmware version
information
Periodical update*
Inquiring license for MEAP
application/system option
Installing MEAP application /
system option
Settings
Testing communications
Displaying update logs
Displaying system logs
Notifying internal system error
occurrence to distribution server
Service
Mode
User
Mode
Remote
UI
UGWlinked
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-2-129
Service technicians provide firmware install services in the following 4 methods.

a: UGW-linked download and update
b: UGW-linked download
c: Manual download and update
d: Update via SST
: Operator of each company
: User operation
Firmware
Market Release
Distribution
Setting to UGW
(UGW-linked)
Automatic download
Automatic update
d
b
Firmware acquisition
Distribution setting &

Download
Via Service mode
(Local UI)
periodical download

Download
Via User mode
(Local UI)

Download
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
Download via SST
Apply (Update)
Via Service mode
(Local UI)
Periodical update
Apply (Update)
Via User mode
(Local UI)
Apply (Update)
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
Update via SST
*Functioning supports periodical update with a device after firmware version V50.00.
F-2-483
*1: Schedules for UGW-linked distribution are maintained on CDS.

*Functioning supports periodical update with a device after firmware version V50.00.
Technology > Updater > Distribution Flow > Firmware Installation Flow
2-274
Technology > Updater > Limitations and Cautions > Cautions
2-275
Limitations and Cautions
MEAP Application/System Option Installation Flow

MEAP application/system option installation method using service mode is not provided.
Be sure to use the user mode to install.
Limitations
Changing Date/Time on Device
: User operation
When a user changes the date/time setting on the device (including change of the setting
according to daylight saving time), the firmware distribution may not be performed as
scheduled.
Application
Market Release
But there is not the problem if it is time adjustment of several minutes with NTP servers.
Change of Setting from Service mode
License Access
Number Acquisition
(packaged with the
product)
Any settings from Service mode will be enabled after restarting the device.
Cautions
Concurrent use of Updater functions
Device Serial No.

Acquisition
(from the device)
Multiple users cannot use Updater functions on a device concurrently by using it together with
Remote UI.
License Key
Acquisition
(from LMS)
License File
Acquisition
(from LMS)
Coexistence of Remote UI and other tools

Users logged in SMS (Service Management Service) are unable to use Update functions
from Remote UI.
Install
Via User mode
(Local UI)
Install distributed
application
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
System Option
Install
Via User mode
(Local UI)
System Option
Manual Install
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
MEAP Application
Manual Install
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
F-2-484
Using Updater function from Remote UI

Upon the following operations done, Updater functions are suspended from Remote UI for
certain duration.
When a user exits Web browser without clicking [Portal] or [Log Out] button in the setting of
Remote Login Service via SMS
When a user exits Web browser without clicking [Portal] button in the setting of not to use
Remote Login Service via SMS.
When a user exits Web browser without clicking [Log out from SMS] or [To Remote UI]
button.
2-275
2-276
Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function

Firmware update will be triggered only after the following jobs are completed.
This is the Updater-specific specification.
Job/Function
type
COPY
PRINT
FAX
I-FAX Receipt
Report Print
SEND
Receiving
Wait for EOJ
(end of job)
Wait for EOJ
Cancel
processing to
trigger update *
-
Printing
Queued print
jobs
Sending
Queued send
jobs
Wait for EOJ

Wait for EOJ
Wait for EOJ

Wait for EOJ
Wait for EOJ

Wait for EOJ
Wait for EOJ

Wait for EOJ
Wait for EOJ

Wait for EOJ
Wait for EOJ

-
Wait for EOJ

-
Cancel
Cancel
processing to processing to
trigger update * trigger update *
Wait for EOJ

Wait for EOJ
T-2-130
*The data are guaranteed even if cut off in the middle of a job.It becomes the recovery object
after the device reboot and carry out send / reception again.
Even during transfer, Pull SCAN job processing is cancelled soon after scanning is
completed.
Firmware update is cancelled if the jobs are not completed within 10 minutes. If this occurs,
the error code, 8x001106, will be returned (different numbers will be shown for x depending
on the execution modes).
Firmware update is executed if the jobs stated above are not in the queue.
Follow the shutdown sequence to reboot the device after the firmware is updated.
Caution:
The following firmware versions do not support Wait for EOJ Function.
iR-ADV V5000 series: V40.17 or earlier
iR-ADV V7000/9000 series: V40.18 or earlier
For the versions above, triggering firmware update will cancel all COPY/PDL jobs
submitted and/or queued. Only jobs with power-off safeguard (Fax/ I-Fax/ Auto-Report
Print) are recovered after reboot.
2-276
Technology > Updater > Setting Sales Companys HQ
2-277
Overview of Preparation
Setting Sales Companys HQ
The following should be prepared before using Updater.
When using devices input in the markets listed below, the default setting of Sales Companys
For updating of firmware
HQ should be changed before obtaining firmware distributed from CDS. Unless the setting is
Installation
Method
UGW-linked
Download and
Update
UGW-linked
Download
Manual
Download and
Update
Manual
Download and
Update via
Local UI
Manual
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Special
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Periodical
update
Enabling
Enabling
Setting
[Update
[Manual
Periodical
Sales
Network Enabling
Firmware]
Update] Button update
Companys Settings UGW Link
Button of User of User Mode validation
HQ
Mode
(Remote UI)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
changed properly, the desired firmware may not be able to be selected.

Market
Canada
Latin America
Hong Kong
Default Setting of Sales

Company's HQ
US
US/SG
SG
Setting of Sales Company's

HQ after Change
CA
LA
HK
T-2-133
Go to the following screen to change the setting of Sales Company's HQ.

Service
Technician
Setting of Device Service Mode

(Level 1)
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CDS-CTL
NOTE:
The list below shows the setting of Sales Companys HQ for CDS-CTS by market.
Check and adhere to the appropriate setting for your market.
<List of Sales Companys HQ and the settings for CDS-CTL>
Japan = JP
USA = US
Singapore = SG
Europe = NL
Korea = KR
China = CN
Hong Kong = HK
Australia = AU
Canada = CA
Latin America= LA
T-2-131
For Install of Application

Installation Method
Network Settings
Enabling [Install Application/

Options] Button of User Mode
LMS-linked Installation
LMA-linked installation via Local UI
LMS-linked installation via Remote UI
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-2-132
Technology > Updater > Setting Sales Companys HQ
2-277
Technology > Updater > Network Settings > Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server
Network Settings
Connecting to External Network
The method of connecting to external network is similar to a normal network connection
method. Refer to user manual of the device for details.
2-278
Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server
This section describes how to confirm the URL setting of the distribution server.
1). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
2). Press [2] and [8] buttons at a time on the control panel.
NOTE:
See User Manual for how to connect the device to the external network.
Before using UGW link or User mode, see the sections below to prepare as required.
"Enabling UGW Link"
"Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode"
"Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode"
4). [Service Mode] screen is shown.

2. Press [Updater] button.
NOTE:
External Network here means the network connecting the device to CDS via Internet.
F-2-485
2-278
3. Press [Software Management Settings] button.
2-279
5. Ensure to enter https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif in the field beside the
[Delivery Server URL] button.
If the URL is not entered or a wrong URL is entered in the field, click [Delivery Server URL]
button to show the virtual keypad. Check the URL and enter the correct one.
F-2-486
4. Press [Settings] button.

F-2-488
6. Press [OK] to set the entered items. Now the URL of the distribution server is successfully
set.
F-2-487
2-279
Technology > Updater > Network Settings > Communication Test
Communication Test
2-280
This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution
server and/or the file server.
NOTE:
CDS and RDS are another servers.You need the communication test of CDS by all
means even if You succeed in a communication test of the Embedded RDS.

F-2-490
4. Press [Test Communication] button.
F-2-489
Technology > Updater > Network Settings > Communication Test
F-2-491
2-280
Technology > Updater > Enabling UGW Link
2-281
Enabling UGW Link
5. Press [Yes] button.
When installing the firmware in the method of UGW-linked Download and Update or UGWlinked Download, the following should be set before actually using UGW link.
Service Technician
Setting of Device
Service Mode
(Level 1)
Setting of UGW
WebPortal
COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-UGW

(0 -> 1)
In [Customer Management] screen, set [Do not

distribute firmware] to [Distribute firmware].
See "Analysis>Firmware Distribution
Setting of Authorities on
Sales Company's HQ
Information" to grant the appropriate authorities
UGW WebPortal
to each account.
NOTE:
F-2-492
Obtain the download file information for communication test from the distribution server
(to execute the communication test to the distribution server).
Using the download file information for communication test, the contents for test are
downloaded from the file server (for the communication test to the file server).
See imageWARE Remote Operators Manual / e-Maintenance Business Operation

Manual for how to operate UGW WebPortal.
[Distribute Firmware] should be set on [Customer Management] screen for staff in charge
of setting for [Enter customer information] or [Command for firmware distribution] in order
to allow them to select the desired device on [Firmware Distribution Information] screen.
If [Distribute Firmware] is not shown on [Customer Management] screen of UGW
WebPortal, appropriate authorities may not be set to each account in Firmware
Distribution Information. Contact the Sales Company HQ concerned for confirmation.
6. Upon the communication test completed, the communication test result screen is shown.
Press [OK] button to exit this operation.
F-2-493
Technology > Updater > Enabling UGW Link
2-281
Technology > Updater > Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode
Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode

To allow users to install firmware using Updater, the setting of firmware installation should be
set to ON for users in advance.
Service
Technician

(Level 1)
COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-FIRM

(0 -> 1)
2-282
Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User

Mode
To allow users to install applications using Updater, the setting of application installation
should be set to ON for users in advance.
Service
Technician
Setting of Device Service Mode COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-MEAP

(Level 1)
(0 -> 1)
User Mode screen for Updater when the setting is not enabled (CDS-FIRM(0)):
User Mode screen of Updater when the setting is not enabled (CDS-MEAP(0)):
F-2-494
User Mode screen for Updater when the setting is enabled (CDS-FIRM(1)):
F-2-496
User Mode screen of Updater when the setting is enabled (CDS-MEAP(1)):
F-2-495
F-2-497
Technology > Updater > Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode
2-282
Technology > Updater > Enabling [Manual Update] Button of User Mode (Remote UI)
2-283
Enabling [Manual Update] Button of User Mode

(Remote UI)
To allow users to install firmware from Updater using the file on Local PCs, the setting of
firmware installation should be set to ON for users in advance.
Service
Technician
Setting of Device Service Mode COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >LOCLFIRM

(Level 1)
(0 -> 1)
Remote UI screen of Updater when the setting is not enabled (LOCLFIRM (0)):
F-2-498
Remote UI screen of Updater when the setting is enabled (LOCLFIRM (1)):
F-2-499
Periodical validation
Service
Technician
Setting of Device Service Mode COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-LVUP

(Level 1)
(0 -> 1)
Technology > Updater > Enabling [Manual Update] Button of User Mode (Remote UI)
2-283
Technology > System Management Operations > Various Setting > Setting URL of Distribution Server
System Management Operations
2-284
Various Setting
Setting URL of Distribution Server
This section describes how to set URL of the distribution server.
F-2-501
5. Press [Delivery Server URL] to show the virtual keypad. Enter the URL.
F-2-502
[Delivery Server URL]:

Enter the "https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif"
F-2-500
set.
Technology > System Management Operations > Various Setting > Setting URL of Distribution Server
2-284
Technology > System Management Operations > Various Setting > Setting Log Level
Setting Log Level
2-285
This section describes how to set system log levels.

F-2-504
F-2-503
Technology > System Management Operations > Various Setting > Setting Log Level
2-285
Technology > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs > Update Logs
2-286
Displaying Logs
5. Select a log level from [Log Level] dropdown list.
Update Logs
This section describes how to confirm System Option/MEAP Application Installation Logs and
Firmware Update Logs.
F-2-505
[Log Level]:
Select one of 5 levels ranging from [0] to [4].

See the table below for logs output in each level.
Log Level
Trace
Information
Yes
Yes
Yes
0
1
2
3
4
Log Output
Important Message Ordinary Error
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

System Error
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-2-134
NOTE:
This list shows the contents of the Log Output.
Log Output
Trace
Information
Important Message
Ordinary Error
System Error
Description
Detailed logs for debug
Logs related to operations done on the system
Update logs output by firmware type
Installation logs by MEAP application
Logs related to enabled functions by system option
Logs for ordinary errors
Logs for internal system errors
F-2-506
T-2-135
6. Press [OK] button to set the selected log level. Now the log level is successfully set.
Technology > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs > Update Logs
2-286
Technology > System Management Operations > Displaying Logs > System Logs
4. Press [Select Log Display] button.
2-287
6. System Option/MEAP Application Installation Logs and Firmware Update Logs are shown.
F-2-507
5. Press [Display Update Logs] button.
F-2-509
System Logs
This section describes how to confirm System Logs.
F-2-508
2-287
2-288
5. Press [Display System Logs] button.
F-2-510
4. Press [Select Log Display] button.
F-2-512
6. Updater internal logs are displayed.

F-2-511
F-2-513
NOTE:
See Chapter6 "Debug Logs" for how to obtain System Log.
2-288
Technology > System Management Operations > Communication Test
Communication Test
2-289
NOTE:
CDS and RDS are another servers.
You need the communication test of CDS by all means even if You succeed in a
communication test of the RDS.
F-2-515
F-2-516
Obtain the download file information for communication test from the distribution server (to
execute the communication test to the distribution server).
F-2-514
2-289
2-290
F-2-517
2-290
Technology > System Management Operations > Formatting Hard Disk
Upgrading Updater
2-291
Formatting Hard Disk
The firmware installed in the device should be also upgraded when upgrading Updater. See
Since Updater is a MEAP application, its contents can be temporarily saved in the MEAP
"Overview" in chapter 3 of this manual for how to update firmware.
application storage area on PC via SST during formatting or replacing HDD. See MEAP
The setting information and logs (update logs/system logs) are inherited in the upgraded
Service Manual for further information.
version.
The settings initialized in format or replacement should be restored. See "Overview of

Preparation" in chapter 2 of this manual for details.
NOTE:
When formatting or replacing HDD, distribution schedule, downloaded firmware (not
updated yet) and logs (update/system logs) will be deleted.
Technology > System Management Operations > Formatting Hard Disk
2-291
Technology > System Management Operations > How to Replace Devices
How to Replace Controller Boards
2-292
How to Replace Devices
The steps are different depending on which of 2 controller boards are to be replaced.
All settings should be set again because no data are inherited. See "Overview of Preparation"
Main Controller Board PCB 1
in chapter 2 of this manual for details.
No steps follow.
Main Controller Board PCB 2 (including SRAM)
The network and service mode setting should be set again after initialization. See
"Overview of Preparation" in chapter 2 of this manual for details.
Technology > System Management Operations > How to Replace Devices
2-292
Technology > System Management Operations > FAQ on Installing Firmware
FAQ on Installing Firmware
2-293
No.4
Q: In the course of UGW-linked download, what will happen if the user downloads the
No.1
firmware before the service technician update the firmware downloaded with UGW-linked
Q: Is it also possible to downgrade firmware with using CDS?
download before?
A: Firmware can be downgraded in some methods shown in the table below.
A: The previously downloaded firmware in the method of UGW-linked download will be
If download and update are performed consecutively, firmware cant be downgraded.
overridden by the subsequently downloaded one.

This is because only one downloaded firmware can be held on the device.
Distribution Method
Downgrade Possibility
The firmware downloaded in the method of Service mode-linked download and UGW-
No
Yes
Yes
No
linked download can be checked/deleted from User mode, but cannot be updated, so it
UGW-linked Download and Update

UGW-linked Download
Manual Download and Update(Timing to Apply : Manual)
Manual Download and Update(Timing to Apply : Automatic)
cannot be updated by the user unnoticed by the service technician.

T-2-136
No.2
Q: When installing firmware, does it take less time in manual download and update
compared to update via SST?
A: It depends on the number of devices to update firmware.
When updating the firmware on a device, it takes more time in manual download and
update compared to update via SST (It depend on network environment.).
As for the time to update firmware to multiple devices, manual download and update
takes less time compared to update via SST because updating the firmware to multiple
devices can be executed simultaneously.
When the network line of the user is slow, update via CDS becomes slow in comparison
with the SST. Because speed is displayed by a communication test, You refer to it.
As for the aim of the downloading time, transmission rate is 6 or 7 minutes in the case of
1000KB/sec. (There is a difference in a device and a version of Firmware, accessories and
the quantity of the language files).
No.5
Q: What happens if the user registers another distribution schedule when the distribution
schedule has been set in manual download and update?
A: The distribution schedule subsequently registered by the user will override the existing
schedule. This is because only one distribution schedule can be held. Any existing
distribution schedule is deleted and the newly registered distribution schedule is made
valid.
No.6
Q: How is an individual response edition of firmware distributed?
A: Any individual response edition of firmware can be installed in all the methods provided by
service technicians. Before installing the individual response edition, ensure to obtain the
ID and password separately.
No.7
Q: If the device is down during firmware update, can the device be started using the older
firmware version?
A: No, it is impossible to start the device using older versions. If this occurs, the service
No.3
Q: How can we confirm that the firmware is properly updated after UGW-linked download
and update done?
A: You can confirm this in E-mail or the Device List on UGW-linked screen.
E-mail to notify firmware update will be sent from CDS server to the addresses set as
destinations at the time of distribution setting to notify update completion.
On UGW-linked screen, search the device of your interest on [Select Device] screen to find
the distribution status per device as shown in the search result.
Technology > System Management Operations > FAQ on Installing Firmware
technician in charge should reinstall the firmware via SST. See "Troubleshooting on
Firmware Installation" in chapter 6 of this manual for details.
No.8
Q: If the device is down during firmware download, is it possible to download the firmware
again?
A: Firmware cannot be downloaded again automatically. Instead, the error is notified in E-mail.
The user should register the firmware distribution schedule again accordingly.
2-293
Technology > System Management Operations > FAQ on Installing MEAP Application/System Option
2-294
FAQ on Installing MEAP Application/System Option
No.9
Q: Can we cancel the operation during firmware download?
No.1
A: Yes. [Cancel] button is shown.
Q: What happens if a MEAP application is installed in the system with insufficient HDD free
space?
A: An error message is shown. Upon starting installation, the MEAP application checks the
required space against free space to judge installation availability.
No.2
Q: Can we cancel the operation during installation of MEAP application?
A: Yes: [Cancel] button is shown.
No.3
Q: Is the device automatically restarted after the system option is enabled?
A: The device is not automatically restarted. Users should restart the device manually.
F-2-518
No.10
Q: E-mail is sent to users to notify update completion. Can service technicians also receive
such a notification?
A: Yes. The notification E-mail is also set for the service technician in charge if the user enters
his/her E-mail address at the time of firmware distribution setting.
Multiple E-mail addresses can be entered in the field.Delimit each E-mail address with ,
(comma) or ; (semicolon) when you enter multiple E-mail addresses in the field.
No.11
Q: How long does the firmware update take?
A: Approx. 30 min. However, this does not include the download time. Download time relies
on the network environment.
Technology > System Management Operations > FAQ on Installing MEAP Application/System Option
2-294
Technology > System Management Operations > FAQ on General Matters of Updater
FAQ on General Matters of Updater
No.2
Q: How can operations using Updater be masked on the users' side?
No.1
A: Be sure to perform the following from the service mode.
Q: What preparation is needed in each installation method?
Masking Firmware Installation
A: See the table below for preparation required in each installation method.
For updating firmware
Installation
Method
UGW-linked
Download and
Update
UGW-linked
Download
Manual
Download and
Update
Manual
Download and
Update via
Local UI
Manual
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Special
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Periodical
update
2-295
Enabling
Enabling
Setting
Enabling
[Update
[Manual
Sales
Network
UGW
Firmware] Update] Button
Companys Settings
Link
Button of User of User Mode
HQ
Mode
(Remote UI)
Periodical
update
validation
Setting Device Service Mode

(Level 1)
(Level 1)
Masking Application Installation

(Level 1)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-FIRM

(1 -> 0)
COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >LOCLFIRM
(1 -> 0)
COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-MEAP

(1 -> 0)
No.3
Q: Can the communication be cancelled during the communication test?
A: Yes. During the communication test, Cancel button is displayed.
T-2-137
For install Application

Installation Method
Network Settings

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-2-138
Technology > System Management Operations > FAQ on General Matters of Updater
2-295
Technology > DCM > DCM > Overview
DCM
2-296
2) Reboot the Host machine.
3) Import the DCM data of the user mode.
As for service mode, if the process is not completed within 5 minutes in the case of export
DCM
and 15 minutes in the case of import, the item performed at that time is continued until it
Overview
ends, but the final result becomes ERROR.

Data to which no password is set when exporting service mode cannot be loaded
DCM (Device Configuration Management) is a function to migrate the setting values (of user
from collective import from RUI. When assuming to perform collective import from RUI,
mode and service mode). In terms of the description in the Users Guide, it is synonymous
password must be set to data to be exported.
with "Import/Export All". Service mode setting values can be backed up/restored from the top
Following limitations are applied to password for DCM data:
screen of service mode.
Character string of software keyboard: 0 to 32 characters
By the conventional method for backing up SRAM of the Main Controller 2, data could be
No password is set when 0 character is entered. (The setting in which no password is
backed up/restored only for the same machine. DCM supports the following 3 patterns.
set is allowed only for service mode.)

No space is allowed in the middle of a password.
The same machine (backup for the purpose of providing against emergency)
A different machine of the same model (setting values are migrated collectively to multiple
machines when replacing a host machine)
A different model (e.g.: the setting values are copied from an old model to a new model)
Where data is stored

Store the backup data in the following location.
Password is case sensitive.

At the time of following setting, Host matchine does not recognize USB memory.The DCM
function is not usable, too.
Settings/Registration > Preferences > External Interface > USB Settings > Use MEAP
Driver for External USB Device = On
User > PC (RUI)
Restrictions about import/export
Service > USB memory device/HDD of the machine (top screen of service mode)
An import/export process ends with error while the following specific job is executed;
Setting values that can be backed up

The values changed by the user under [Settings/Registration] and those specified in service
mode can be backed up.
Only setting values are backed up. Image data such as scanned image cannot be backed up.
[Settings/Registration] value that a user set.
Service mode setting values
General limitations on DCM

With DCM, stored data, MEAP application, and system option license cannot be migrated.
A .dcm file exported to the internal HDD is not deleted even when the machine is restarted.
Only 2 files at a maximum are stored in HDD. When there are more than 2 files, the old
.dcm files are deleted from the oldest.
Continuous import is not guaranteed. After importing a file, the machine must be restarted.
If executing import without restart, NG is displayed and a file is not imported.
When importing DCM file in service mode and user mode separately, perform it in the
following procedures.
Send job,
Forwarding job,
FAX reception job,
IFAX reception job
If this function is executed with a print job simultaneously, it affects the operation such as;
UI is locked, or a print job is cleared by reboot after import. So it requires careful operation.
A device rejects an import/ export request during shut-down.
If this function is executed with device information distribution or RUI import/ export
(conventional function) simultaneously, the first coming job takes priority and they are
controlled exclusively.
If this function is executed with a firmware update by a CDS Updater simultaneously, a
firmware update process takes priority, and this function is stopped temporarily by reboot.
When error code is issued, this function ends with error.
If the display language differs between export and import, a setting value of a text corrupts
in some cases. The character corruption can be solved by changing the display language
to the appropriate one.
1) Perform the import of the DCM data of the service mode earlier.
2-296
2-297
Import/Export All from Remote UI

The following settings information is available with the Import function in each case
Settings/Registration Basic Information
Box Settings
Department ID Management Settings
Main Menu Settings
Note:
Display/hide of the service mode settings on RUI can be switched by changing the
setting in the following service mode.
Service mode L1 > Copier > Option > USER > SMD-EXPT
[0]: Hide the service mode settings. (Def.)
[1]: Display the service mode settings.
Favorite Settings
Address Book
Forwarding Settings
Quick Menu Settings
MEAP Application Setting Information
Collective Import Using Data Collectively Exported from RUI
Paper Type Management Settings
For the reason of security, it is not appropriate that the user mode can be exported from
User Access Control for Advanced Space
service mode without user's permission. Because of that, it cannot be exported due to the
Web Access Settings

Service Mode Settings(Display/hide of the service mode settings on the export screen)
specification However, it is possible to import the setting values of user mode exported from
RUI.
Preparation
PC and web browser
USB memory device to store the data of reference machine
Overall flow
1. Complete the device setting as a reference machine.
2. Export the data of reference machine including service mode from RUI.
3. Copy the data to the root of the USB memory device using a PC.
4. Connect the USB memory device to the copy destination machine.
5. Execute import by specifying the target files from RESTORE in service mode.
F-2-519
2-297
2-298
The following cases may be possible for the Import All function.
Setting Information
Case A:Importing all to your machine (Restoring the settings information to your machine for
backups)
Case B:Importing all to the same model machine.
Case C:Importing all to the different model machine that supports the Import All function
Setting Information
Preferences Paper Settings
Display Settings
Timer/Energy
Settings
Paper Settings
Case Case Case

A
B
C
Yes Yes No
A5R/STMTR Paper Selection
Yes Yes No
B5/EXEC Paper Selection
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes No
Register Custom Size
Yes Yes Yes
Default Screen after Startup/Restoration
Yes Yes Yes
Default Screen (Status Monitor/Cancel)
Yes Yes Yes
Copy Screen Display Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Display Fax Function
Yes Yes Yes
Store Location Display Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Language/Keyboard Switch On/Off
Yes Yes Yes
Language/Keyboard Switch
Yes Yes Yes
Use Keyboard Shift Lock Feature
Yes Yes Yes
Display Remaining Paper Message
Yes Yes Yes
No. of Copies/Job Duration Status
Yes Yes Yes
Display Original Scanning Cleaning Area
Yes Yes Yes
Paper Type Selection Screen Priority
Yes Yes Yes
mm/Inch Entry Switch
Yes Yes Yes
ID/User Name Display On/Off
Yes Yes Yes
Date/Time Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Time Format
Yes Yes Yes
Quick Startup Settings for Main Power
Yes Yes Yes
Auto Reset Time
Yes Yes Yes
Restrict Auto Reset Time
Yes Yes Yes
Function After Auto Reset
Yes Yes Yes
Auto Sleep Time
Yes Yes Yes
Sleep Mode Energy Use
Yes Yes Yes
Auto Sleep Weekly Timer
Yes Yes Yes
Energy Saver/Sleep Mode Exit Time SettingsYes Yes Yes

Mode After Energy Saver Key Pressed
Yes Yes Yes
Network
Change Energy Saver Mode
Case Case Case

A
B
C
Yes Yes Yes
Silent Mode Time
Yes Yes Yes
Confirm Network Connection Set. Changes Yes Yes Yes

TCP/IP Settings
IPv4 Settings
Use IPv4
Yes Yes Yes
IP Address Settings
IP Address
Yes No
No
Subnet Mask
Yes Yes Yes
Gateway Address
Yes Yes Yes
DHCP
Yes Yes Yes
RARP
Yes Yes Yes
BOOTP
Yes Yes Yes
DHCP Option Settings Yes Yes Yes

IPv6 Settings
DNS Settings
WINS Settings
Use IPv6
Yes Yes Yes
Stateless Address
Settings
Manual Address
Settings
Use DHCPv6
Yes Yes Yes

Yes No
No
Yes Yes Yes
DNS Server Address Yes Yes

Settings
DNS Host/Domain
Yes No
Name Settings
DNS Dynamic Update Yes Yes
Settings
Yes Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
LPD Print Settings
Yes Yes Yes
RAW Print Settings
Yes Yes Yes
SNTP Settings
Yes Yes Yes
FTP Print Settings
Yes Yes Yes
WSD Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Use FTP PASV Mode
Yes Yes Yes
Multicast Discovery Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Use HTTP
Yes Yes Yes
Use WebDAV Server
Yes Yes Yes
Proxy Settings
Yes Yes Yes
NetWare Settings
Yes Yes Yes
AppleTalk Settings
Yes No
No
SMB Server Settings
Yes No
No
2-298
Setting Information
2-299
SNMP Settings
Case Case Case

A
B
C
Yes Yes Yes
Setting Information
Scanner Noise Settings
Case Case Case

A
B
C
Yes Yes No
Dedicated Port Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Streak Prevention
Yes Yes No
Use Spool Function
Yes Yes Yes
LTRR/STMT Original Selection
Yes Yes No
Startup Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Remote Scan Gamma Value
Yes Yes No
Ethernet Driver Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Auto Online
Yes Yes Yes
Firewall Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Auto Offline
Yes Yes Yes
External Interface USB Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Generate File
Accessibility
Key Repetition Settings
Yes Yes Yes
High Compression Image Quality Level
Reversed Display (Color)
Yes Yes Yes
OCR (Text Searchable) Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Trace & Smooth Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Function
Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Adjust Image
Quality
Correct Density
Yes Yes Yes
OOXML Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Fine Adjust Zoom
Yes No
Specify Minimum PDF Version
Yes Yes Yes
Adjust Action
Speed/Precision Priority for Double Staple
Yes Yes No
Format PDF to PDF/A
Yes Yes Yes
Alignment Adjustment When Stapling
Yes No
No
Optimize PDF for Web
Yes Yes Yes
Finisher Tray A Alignment Adjustment
Yes No
No
256-bit AES Settings for Encrypted PDF
Yes Yes Yes
Finisher Tray B Alignment Adjustment
Yes No
No
Document Scan Lock Operational Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Set Authentication Method
Yes Yes Yes
Auto Collate
Yes Yes No
Image Orientation Priority
Yes Yes No
Auto Orientation
Yes Yes Yes
Photo Printout Mode
Yes Yes No
Common
No
Paper Feed Settings

Suspended Job Timeout
Yes Yes Yes
Copy
Paper Output Settings

Output Tray Settings
Yes No
No
High Volume Stack Mode
Yes Yes
Offset Jobs
Yes Yes No
Job Separator Between Jobs
Yes Yes No
Job Separator Between Copies
Yes Yes No
E-Mail/I-Fax Settings
Different Paper Sizes for Output Tray
Yes No
Register Unit Name
No
Align Output Paper of Diff. Sizes (Diff. Width) Yes Yes No

Unfinished Tab Paper Forced Output
Yes Yes Yes
Send
Cascade Copy Communication Timeout
Yes Yes Yes
Common Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Communication
Settings
Print Settings
Yes Yes Yes
POP
Yes Yes Yes
SMTP Server
Yes Yes Yes
Print Priority
Yes Yes Yes
E-Mail Address
Yes No
Thin/Plain Paper Printing Priority Settings
Yes Yes No
POP Server
Yes Yes Yes
Output Report Default Settings
Yes Yes Yes
POP Login Name
Yes No
No
POP Password
Yes No
No
Register Characters for Page No./Watermark Yes Yes Yes

Copy Set Numbering Option Settings
Yes Yes No
Secure Watermark/Document Scan Lock
Yes Yes Yes
Scan Settings
Yes Yes Yes

SMTP RX
POP Interval
No
Yes Yes Yes
Authent./Encryption
Yes Yes Yes
Confirm SSL Certificate for SMTP TX
Yes Yes Yes
Timing to Raise Feeder Tray
Yes Yes No
Confirm SSL Certificate for POP RX
Yes Yes Yes
Feeder Jam Recovery Method
Yes Yes No
Maximum Data Size for Sending
Yes Yes Yes
2-299
Setting Information
2-300
Default Subject
Case Case Case

A
B
C
Yes Yes Yes
Setting Information
Specify Authentication User Dest. to Reply
Yes Yes Yes
Scan and Store Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Set Authentication User Dest. to Sender
Yes Yes Yes
Access Stored Files Settings
Yes Yes No
Allow Unregistered Users to Send E-Mail
Yes Yes Yes
Limit Box PIN to 7 Digits/Restrict Access
Yes Yes Yes
Full Mode TX Timeout
Yes Yes Yes
Mail Box Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Print MDN/DSN upon Receipt
Yes Yes Yes
Advanced Space Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Use Send via Server
Yes Yes Yes
Network Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Allow MDN Not via Server
Yes Yes Yes
Memory Media Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Restrict TX Destination Domain
Yes Yes Yes
Simple Authentication Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Only Allow Encrypted Print Jobs
Yes Yes Yes
Use Hold Function
Yes Yes Yes
Store PS/PDF Data to Hold
Yes Yes Yes
Store/Access FilesCommon Settings
Secure Print
Autocomplete for Entering E-Mail Addresses Yes Yes Yes

Fax Settings
Hold
Default Screen
Yes Yes Yes
Change Default Settings
Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes
Set
Change Default Display of Address Book
Destination Address Book PIN
Yes Yes Yes
Register Options Shortcuts

Register Sender Name (TTI)
Yes Yes Yes
Manage Address Book Access Numbers
Yes Yes Yes
Use Auth. User Name as Sender Name
Yes Yes Yes
Include Pswd. When Exporting Address Book
Yes Yes Yes
ECM TX
Yes Yes Yes
Register LDAP Server
Yes Yes No
Set Pause Time
Yes Yes Yes
Auto Search When Using LDAP Server
Yes Yes Yes
Auto Redial
Yes Yes Yes
Change Default LDAP Search Conditions
Yes Yes Yes
Check Dial Tone Before Sending
Yes Yes Yes
Register/Edit LDAP Search Conditions
Yes Yes No
Fax TX Report
Yes Yes Yes
Acquire Remote
Address Book
Yes Yes Yes
Fax Activity Report

Set Line
Yes Yes Yes

Line 1 to Line 4
Yes Yes Yes
Register Unit Telephone Yes No

Number
Register Unit Name
Yes No
No
No
Select Line Type
Yes Yes Yes
Select TX Line
Yes Yes Yes
Acquire Address Book
Yes Yes Yes
Remote Address Book Server Address
Yes Yes Yes
Communication Timeout
Yes Yes Yes
Fax TX Line Auto Select Adjustment
Yes Yes Yes
Make Remote
Make Address Book Open
Add. Book Open
Management Device
Device Information Settings
Settings
Management
Device Information Delivery Settings
Yes Yes Yes

Yes No
No
TX Start Speed
Yes Yes Yes
Register Destinations
Yes Yes No
PIN Code Access
Yes Yes Yes
Set MEAP Authentication
Yes Yes Yes
Confirm Entered Fax Number
Yes Yes Yes
Set Auto Delivery
Yes Yes No
Allow Fax Driver TX
Yes Yes Yes
Restrict Receiving Device Information
Yes Yes Yes
Remote Fax TX Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Restrict Receiving for Each Function
Yes Yes Yes
Remote Fax Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Set Paper Information
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Use MEAP Auth. When Receive
Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Report Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Display Job Status Before Authentication
Yes Yes Yes
Receive/Forward Common Settings

Fax Settings
Case Case Case

A
B
C
2-300
Setting Information
License/Other
Display Log
Case Case Case

A
B
C
Yes Yes Yes
Audit Log Retrieval
Yes Yes Yes
Store Key Operation Log
Yes Yes Yes
Format Encryption Method to FIPS 140-2
Yes Yes Yes
Message Board/Support Link
Yes Yes Yes
Remote Operation Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Data ManagementBack Up/Restore Settings

HDD Data Complete Deletion
Box Settings Function Settings Receive/Forward
Access Stored
Files
Scan and Store
Department Management
ID
Settings
Management
Settings
2-301
Common Settings
Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes
Yes Yes Yes
Store/Access Files
Mail Box (Print)
Mail Box Settings

Yes Yes Yes
Color Balance (Options) Yes Yes No
Advanced Space
(Scan)
User Management
Custom (Scan Size)
Yes Yes No
System Manager
Information Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Department ID Management
Register PIN
Yes Yes Yes
Main Menu Main Menu

Settings
Settings
Setting File
Yes Yes Yes
Wallpaper Image File
Yes Yes Yes
Favorite
Settings
Register/Edit Favorite Settings
Yes Yes No
Copy
Yes Yes No
Register Options Shortcuts (Regular Copy)
Yes Yes No
Setting Information
Quick Menu Quick Menu
Settings
Settings
Button File
Case Case Case

A
B
C
Yes Yes No
MEAP
Workflow
Application Composer
Setting
Information MEAP User
Setting
Information
MEAP Application
Setting
Information
Paper Type Preferences
Management
Settings
Flow Data File
Yes Yes Yes
Operation Setting File
Yes Yes Yes
Data
Yes Yes Yes
Data
Yes Yes Yes
Paper Settings
Paper Type
Yes Yes Yes
Management Settings
User Access User Access

Control for Control for
Advanced Advanced Box
Space
User List
Yes Yes Yes
Integrated Authentication Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Web Access Web Access

Settings
Settings
Favorites
Yes Yes Yes
Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Authentication/Operation Log Management Yes Yes Yes
T-2-139
Register Options Shortcuts (Express Copy) Yes Yes No

Send
Common Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Fax Settings
Yes Yes Yes
Store/Access FilesCommon Settings
Yes Yes No
Scan and Store
Address
Book
Advanced Box
(Scan)
Set Destination
Custom (Scan Size)
Yes Yes No
Yes Yes Yes
Rename Address List
Yes Yes Yes
Register One-Touch
Forwarding Function Settings Receive/Forward
Common Settings
Settings
Yes Yes Yes

Yes Yes Yes
2-301
Technology > DCM > DCM > Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM
Service mode setting values that can be backed up by DCM

The numbers shown in the Compatibility level are explained in the table below.
Compatibility level (Lv)
Description
Not supported.
Can import to a device of the same model and same SN only.

Usable for the purpose of backup/restore.
Can import to a device of a same model.
Can import to a device of a different model also.

T-2-140
DCM list for Service Mode

Initial screen
BOARD
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
Large
OPTION
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
Middle
ADJ-XY
ADJ-XY
ADJ-XY
ADJ-XY
ADJ-XY
ADJ-XY
ADJ-XY
AE
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
BLANK
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
Small
FONTDL
ADJ-X
ADJ-Y
ADJ-Y-DF
STRD-POS
ADJ-X-MG
ADJY-DF2
ADJ-Y-MG
AE-TBL
BLANK-T
BLANK-L
BLANK-R
BLANK-B
W-PLT-X
W-PLT-Y
W-PLT-Z
SH-TRGT
100-RG
100-GB
DFTAR-R
DFTAR-G
DFTAR-B
MTF2-M1
MTF2-M2
MTF2-M3
MTF2-M4
MTF2-M5
MTF2-M6
MTF2-M7
MTF2-M8
MTF2-M9
MTF2-S1
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Yes
Lev3
Yes
Yes
2-302
Initial screen
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
Large
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
Middle
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
Small
MTF2-S2
MTF2-S3
MTF2-S4
MTF2-S5
MTF2-S6
MTF2-S7
MTF2-S8
MTF2-S9
100DF2GB
100DF2RG
DFCH2R2
DFCH2R10
DFCH2B2
DFCH2B10
DFCH2G2
DFCH2G10
CCD-CHNG
MTF-M1
MTF-M2
MTF-M3
MTF-M4
MTF-M5
MTF-M6
MTF-M7
MTF-M8
MTF-M9
MTF-S1
MTF-S2
MTF-S3
MTF-S4
MTF-S5
MTF-S6
MTF-S7
MTF-S8
MTF-S9
DFCH-R2
DFCH-R10
DFCH-B2
DFCH-B10
DFCH-G2
DFCH-G10
MTF2-M10
MTF2-M11
MTF2-M12
MTF2-S10
MTF2-S11
MTF2-S12
MTF-M10
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Lev3
2-302
2
Initial screen
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
Large
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
Middle
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CCD
CST-ADJ
CST-ADJ
CST-ADJ
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DENS
DEVELOP
EXP-LED
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
FEED-ADJ
HV-PRI
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
Small
MTF-M11
MTF-M12
MTF-S10
MTF-S11
MTF-S12
DFCH2K2
DFCH2K10
DFCH-K2
DFCH-K10
DFTAR-BW
DFTBK-G
DFTBK-B
DFTBK-R
CCD-CHG2
DFTBK-BW
MF-A4R
MF-A6R
MF-A4
DENS-ADJ
P-OFFSET
P-DHALF
P-B-TGT
DMAX-N-T
BIAS
PR-EXP
REGIST
ADJ-C1
ADJ-C2
ADJ-C3
ADJ-C4
ADJ-MF
ADJ-DK
ADJ-REFE
RG-MF
REG-THCK
REG-OHT
REG-DUP1
REG-DUP2
LP-FEED1
LP-MULT1
LP-DUP1
REG-SPD
PRI-GRID
TR-OFS1
TR-OFS2
TR-OFS3
TR-OFS4
TR-OFS5
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Lev3
2-303
Initial screen
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
Large
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
Middle
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
HV-TR
IMG-REG
LASER
LASER
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
PASCAL
V-CONT
V-CONT
V-CONT
V-CONT
V-CONT
V-CONT
V-CONT
2D-SHADE
2D-SHADE
Small
TR-OFS6
TR-L-OF1
TR-L-OF2
TR-L-OF3
TR-L-OF4
TR-L-OF5
TR-L-OF6
P-TR-OF1
P-TR-OF2
P-TR-OF3
P-TR-OF4
P-TR-OF5
P-TR-OF6
TR-SP1
TR-SP2
TR-L-SP1
TR-L-SP2
P-TR-SP1
P-TR-SP2
MAG-V
PVE-OFST
POWER
SEG-ADJ
K-ADJ
ACS-ADJ
ACS-EN
ACS-CNT
ACS-EN2
ACS-CNT2
WT-FL-LM
SEG-ADJ3
K-ADJ3
ACS-ADJ3
ACS-EN3
ACS-CNT3
TBSIS-WB
DCON-V
HP-OFST
OFST-P-K
VL-OFST
VD-OFST
DE-OFST
VCONT-1
VL-OF-L
VL-OF-H1
VL-OF-H2
M-LINE1
M-LINE2
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Lev3
Yes
2-303
2
Initial screen
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
Large
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
Middle
2D-SHADE
2D-SHADE
2D-SHADE
2D-SHADE
DENS
INSTALL
INSTALL
INSTALL
INSTALL
INSTALL
SYSTEM
ACC
ACC
ACC
ACC
ACC
ACC
ACC
ACC
ACC
ACC
ACC
ACC
ACCPST-D
ACCPST-D
ACCPST-D
ACCPST-D
ACCPST-D
ACCPST-D
ACCPST-D
ACCPST-D
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
Small
S-LINE1
S-LINE2
S-LINE3
S-LINE4
AGG-SW
E-RDS
RGW-PORT
RGW-ADR
CDS-CTL
BIT-SVC
DEBUG-1
COIN
DK-P
CARD-SW
PD-SIZE
CC-SPSW
UNIT-PRC
MIN-PRC
MAX-PRC
MIC-TUN
SRL-SPSW
PDL-THR
CR-TYPE
ACC1
ACC2
ACC3
ACC4
ACC5
ACC6
ACC7
ACC8
PO-CNTMD
MODEL-SZ
FIX-CLN
FIX-TEMP
FSPD-S1
SCANSLCT
PASCAL
DH-SW
DRM-IDL
SENS-CNF
CONFIG
RAW-DATA
SHARP
LAPC-SW
RMT-LANG
IFAX-LIM
DF-BLINE
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-304
Initial screen
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
Large
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
Middle
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
Small
TEMP-TBL
W/SCNR
DRM-H-SW
SMTPTXPN
SMTPRXPN
POP3PN
ORG-LGL
ORG-LTR
ORG-B5
UI-COPY
UI-BOX
UI-SEND
UI-FAX
SCR-SLCT
TMC-SLCT
CAL-SW
FTPTXPN
NW-SPEED
T-LW-LVL
INTROT-1
DMAX-SW
TRY-CHG
NWERR-SW
STS-PORT
CMD-PORT
MODELSZ2
DFDST-L1
DFDST-L2
NS-CMD5
NS-GSAPI
NS-NTLM
NS-PLNWS
NS-PLN
NS-LGN
MEAP-PN
SVMD-ENT
DH-MODE
ENVP-INT
DRM-CNTR
CHNG-STS
CHNG-CMD
ANIM-SW
BASE-SW
DV-RT-LG
MEAP-SSL
SC-L-CNT
CBLTINVL
KSIZE-SW
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-304
2
Initial screen
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
Large
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
Middle
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
Small
LPD-PORT
PDF-RDCT
ABC-MODE
REBOOTSW
VP-ART
VP-TXT
UI-PRINT
WUEV-SW
WUEV-INT
WUEV-POT
WUEV-RTR
SJB-UNW
IMGC-ADJ
UI-RSCAN
UI-EPRNT
UI-WEB
UI-HOLD
WEBV-SW
OPEMANT
CARD-RNG
WUEN-LIV
MAILYEAR
OPLOG-SW
OP-ALMT
TMP-TBL2
TMP-TBL3
TMP-TBL4
SJOB-CL
DHCP-12
DHCP-81
IFX-CHIG
USB-RCNT
UNLMTBND
SCANTYPE
RAG-CONT
DNSTRANS
ABC-MD2
MIBCOUNT
DRY-CISU
RMT-CNSL
MEAP-PRI
PDLEVCT1
PROXYRES
WOLTRANS
DF2DSTL1
DF2DSTL2
802XTOUT
IKERETRY
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Yes
Yes
Lev3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-305
Initial screen
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
Large
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
Middle
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
Small
SPDALDEL
NCONF-SW
ABK-TOOL
IKEINTVL
REG-SPD
INSRT-SW
ILSZ-JAM
IPSDEBLV
SP-LINK
W/RAID
PSWD-SW
SM-PSWD
C-PDL-T
C-S-P-D
C-S-C-D
DH-TGT
ADJ-VPPN
RAG-SW
DEV-SP1
DEV-SP2
LM-LEVEL
RPT2SIDE
AFS-JOB
AFC-EVNT
UI-SBOX
UI-MEM
ILOGMODE
ILOGKEEP
UI-NAVI
UI-MOBP
ERS-SEL
IR-FILTR
STND-PNL
INVALPDL
CDS-FIRM
CDS-MEAP
CDS-UGW
LOCLFIRM
RSHDW-SW
DEV-SP3
DEV-SP4
DEV-SP5
DEV-SP6
DEV-SP7
DEV-SP8
IPTBROAD
DK2-TURN
DK3-TURN
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-305
2
Initial screen
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
Large
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
Middle
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
Small
DK4-TURN
DK1-TURN
DK5-TURN
PFWFTPRT
YP-ROT
PG-DMAX
CLN-SW
CLN-ADJ
FIX-DWN
FIX-RT
DRM-IDL2
AC-FREQ
2D-SHADE
T-RUN-LV
WDREDUCT
VDADDCNT
HDADDCNT
DK1-AIR
BXNUPLOG
LIN-OFST
TFL-RTC
D-MXDSZ
UI-CUSTM
MIX-WAIT
P-BETWN
FIX-TMP2
FIX-TMP3
SDLMTWRN
JLK-PWSC
IPMTU
DDNSINTV
FX-IMGLV
FX-WNKL
FAX-INT
ATM
CDS-LVUP
EP-CONT
LWDTY-SW
LWDTYADJ
BB-CNT
PRI-SHUT
TBLTCLSW
TBLTBIS+
TBLTBISTBLTTMS
FIX-TMP4
DRM-IDL3
AMSOFFSW
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-306
Initial screen
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
Large
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
Middle
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
BODY
CST
CST
CST
CST
CST
CST
CST
CST
CST
CST
CST
CST
CST
CST
INT-FACE
INT-FACE
INT-FACE
INT-FACE
INT-FACE
LCNS-TR
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
Small
EXT-TBOX
UA-OFFSW
MIB-NVTA
MIB-EXT
SCT-BTN
DFEJCLED
SVC-RUI
PSCL-TBL
USER-DSP
LCDSFLG
STNDBY-A
SDTM-DSP
NWLOGINT
BXSHIFT
HOME-SW
NO-LGOUT
T-DLV-BK
WT-WARN
JM-ERR-D
JM-ERR-R
WEB-LIFE
LCRY-DSP
U1-NAME
U2-NAME
U3-NAME
U4-NAME
P-SZ-C1
P-SZ-C2
CST3-P1
CST3-P2
CST4-P1
CST4-P2
CST3-U1
CST3-U3
CST4-U1
CST4-U3
IMG-CONT
AP-OPT
AP-ACCNT
AP-CODE
NWCT-TM
OF-POPDF
COPY-LIM
SLEEP
SIZE-DET
COUNTER1
COUNTER2
COUNTER3
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Lev3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-306
2
Initial screen
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
Large
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
Middle
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
Small
COUNTER4
COUNTER5
COUNTER6
DATE-DSP
MB-CCV
CONTROL
B4-L-CNT
TRY-STP
MF-LG-ST
CNT-DISP
PH-D-SEL
COPY-JOB
OP-SZ-DT
NW-SCAN
INS-C-S
HDCR-DSP
JOB-INVL
TAB-ROT
PR-PSESW
IDPRN-SW
PCL-COPY
CNT-SW
TAB-ACC
BCNT-AST
PRJOB-CP
DOC-REM
DPT-ID-7
RUI-RJT
CTM-S06
FREG-SW
IFAX-SZL
IFAX-PGD
MEAPSAFE
AFN-PSWD
PTJAM-RC
PDL-NCSW
SLP-SLCT
PS-MODE
CNCT-RLZ
LDAP-SW
FROM-OF
DOM-ADD
FILE-OF
MAIL-OF
IFAX-OF
LDAP-DEF
FREE-DSP
CLR-TIM
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-307
Initial screen
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
COPIER
FEEDER
FEEDER
FEEDER
FEEDER
FEEDER
FEEDER
FEEDER
FEEDER
FEEDER
SORTER
SORTER
Large
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
OPTION
ADJUST
ADJUST
Middle
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
Small
HDCR-DSW
DK1-ASST
SNMP-COA
SCALL-SW
SCALLCMP
USBH-DSP
USBM-DSP
USBI-DSP
CTCHKDSP
DFLT-ADJ
USBR-DSP
POL-SCAN
PH-D-SL2
SCAN-RSL
JA-SBOX
JA-DFAX
JA-REP
JA-FREP
JA-BOX
JA-FORM
JA-PREV
JA-PULL
JA-PDLB
JA-JOBK
JA-JDF
JA-RUI
JA-WEB
EXP-CRYP
THK1-DSP
SLEEP1SW
AUT-SLCT
CNCL-ATH
EZY-SCRP
DMN-MTCH
SCN-RSLG
SNDSTREN
FAXSTREN
DOCST
LA-SPEED
DOCST2
LA-SPD2
ADJMSCN1
ADJMSCN2
ADJSSCN1
ADJSSCN2
SIZE-SW
PNCH-Y
PF-A3Z1
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-307
2
Initial screen
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
Large
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
Middle
Small
PF-A3Z2
PF-B4Z1
PF-B4Z2
PF-A4RZ1
PF-A4RZ2
PF-LDRZ1
PF-LDRZ2
PF-LGLZ1
PF-LGLZ2
PFLTRRZ1
PFLTRRZ2
PF-A4RC1
PF-A4RC2
PFLTRRC1
PFLTRRC2
PF-A4R31
PF-A4R32
PFLTRR31
PFLTRR32
PF-A4R41
PF-A4R42
PFLTRR41
PFLTRR42
PF-A4R21
PFLTRR21
PRCS-ALG
STP-F1
STP-F2
STP-R1
STP-R2
STP-2P
BFF-SFT
PNCH-X
TRM-RG1
TRM-RG2
TRM-CUT1
TRM-CUT2
BFF-SFT2
SDL-STP
SDL-FLD
SDL-ALG
SDL-RLPT
SDL-RLFD
SDL-RLHD
BFR-UPA4
BFR-UPB5
BFR-UPLT
RTR-DWA4
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Lev3
2-308
Initial screen
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
Large
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
ADJUST
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
Middle
Small
RTR-DWB5
RTR-DWLT
BF-SB-A4
BF-SB-B5
BF-SB-LT
RTR-UPA4
RTR-UPB5
RTR-UPLT
PUNCH-SB
ST-ALG1
ST-ALG2
DW-CL
PRT-DWN
PF-LGL41
PF-LGL42
PNC-SBTN
SBFD-SPL
SBFD-LPL
SBFD-SHV
SBFD-LHV
SBFD-STN
SBFD-LTN
SBFD-SCT
SBFD-LCT
NST-SPD
NST-SPTN
RTNRL-SP
SW-ADJ
GRP-ALG
PRTN-ALG
BFF-SFT3
BFF-SFT4
BLNK-SW
MD-SPRTN
CNTR-OUT
SDL-PRS
BUFF-SW
TRY-EJCT
PN-SKEW
CURL-SW
TRY-OVER
TRM-LMT
PUCH-SW
ALG-IMPR
BUFF-SW2
1SHT-SRT
SD-LMTLS
SD-STCNB
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Lev3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-308
2
Initial screen
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
SORTER
Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (external)
Large
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
OPTION
Middle
Small
BUFF-THK
PRCS-SP1
PRCS-SP2
BUFF-MX1
BUFF-MX2
PRCS-MX1
PRCS-MX2
BUF-THK1
PRD-PRTY
SLD-BCK
STP-MAX
SDL-MAX
VFLD-MAX
NEAT-MIX
NEAT-SW
TRM-CNT
THN-SW
THN-STK
Lev1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Lev2
Yes
2-309
Lev3
Import/export by service mode (external)

The following shows the procedure for importing and exporting the service mode setting
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
values in service mode. With export by which data is collected from the machine, service
mode setting values can be backed up. With import, data backed up from service mode and
that backed up from remote UI can be restored.
The save destination of backup data can be selected from either a USB memory device or
HDD of the machine.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-2-141
Export
Preparation
USB memory device
* Required when exporting to an external USB memory device.
It needs to have been formatted to be recognized by the device. No firmware registration is
necessary.
Overall flow
Select the save destination between the internal HDD or external USB memory device
depending on the use case.
Procedure
1. Select external USB memory device as save destination (LIST=1)
2. Register password
3. Export to external USB memory device
4. Remove USB memory device
Exporting data to an external USB memory device

1. Connect the USB memory device and check that it has been mounted. (When using the
external USB memory device)
F-2-520
2-309
2-310
2. Log in to service mode and press BACKUP.
F-2-521
3. Select LIST after the screen moves to <BACKUP>.

F-2-523
5. The names of .dcm files saved in the external USB memory device are displayed.
F-2-522
4. When saving to the external USB memory device, select 1 and press OK.
F-2-524
6. Select PASSWD, enter a password from the software keyboard, and then press OK.
F-2-525
2-310
2-311
9. After access to the USB memory device has occurred, select LIST=0 and press OK.
Unmount the USB memory device.
Note:
Limitations regarding the DCM data password
It can also be removed by pressing the Remove button on the main menu.

No password is set when 0 character is entered. (The setting in which no password is
set is allowed only for service mode.)
Limitations regarding the DCM data no password
The exporte data cannot import from remote UI without appointing a password. You can
import only from service mode UI.
7. After registering the password, select BACKUP. Press OK to execute export.
F-2-528
Reference:
iAC5255_JWH00003_V0102_0040_2012_0124_193650.dcm
Model
Export
YYYY_MMDD_HHMMSS
S/N
Main controller
firm ware version
DCM File format
DCM Job
management number
F-2-526
8. OK!" is displayed in the status column when the processing is successfully completed.
Press <-.
F-2-529
Import
Preparation
USB memory device
* Required when importing from an external USB memory device.
It needs to have been formatted to be recognized by the device. No firmware registration is
necessary.
When necessary, copy the files which you want to import using a PC in advance.
Be sure to store them in the root folder of the USB memory device.
Do not change the extension from .dcm. (only .dcm files can be recognized.)
It is desirable to connect the USB memory device before entering service mode.
Overall flow
Procedure for restoring data from an external USB memory device.
F-2-527
Procedure
1. Select external USB memory device as save destination (LIST=1)
2-311
2-312
2. Names of saved DCM data files are displayed
4. When referring to the external USB memory device, select 1 and press OK.
4. Import from external USB memory device
5. Remove USB memory device
6. Specification of export file name
Procedure for restoring data from an external USB memory device

1. Connect the USB memory device. (When using the external USB memory device)
2. Log in to service mode and press RESTORE.
F-2-532
5. The names of .dcm files referred to in the external USB memory device are displayed.
F-2-530
3. Select LIST after the screen moves to <RESTORE>.
F-2-533
F-2-531
2-312
6. Select SELECT.
2-313
8. When the correct file is displayed, press ->.
F-2-534
F-2-536
7. Enter the selection number displayed on the left side of the file to be selected and press
Note:
OK.
Specification of file selection display
"*" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the file has been selected in
SELECT.
USB memory device: Up to 8 files are displayed in a screen.
03 iAC5255
F-2-535
F-2-537
2-313
2-314
Press <-.
OK
F-2-538
Note:
F-2-540
"<-" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the selection of the file has
been confirmed.
"***" is displayed after the password is entered.
12. After access to the USB memory device has occurred, select LIST=0 and press OK.
Unmount the USB memory device.
It can also be removed by pressing the Remove button on the main menu.
10. After registering the password, select RESTORE. Press OK to execute import.
F-2-541
F-2-539
2-314
Technology > DCM > DCM > Import/export by service mode (internal)
2-315
Import/export by service mode (internal)
When selecting the HDD of the machine at execution of BACKUP from the top screen
of service mode, service mode settings can be saved. Setting values of Main Controller
2, Reader Controller, DC Controller, etc. can be collectively saved. It can be used when
recovering the initial status after having tried multiple setting changes temporarily for
troubleshooting, etc.
Note:
DCM must not be used when replacing a PCB.
Be sure to use a method such as backup of SRAM of the Main Controller 2/service
mode backup of DCON/RCON.
DCM enables to back up only service mode setting values. There is still necessary
information other than setting values when replacing a PCB.
SRAM backup or service mode backup enables to save data other than setting values.
F-2-543
3. When saving to the internal HDD, select 2 and press OK.
Export
Preparation
There is no need to newly prepare for saving data to the HDD of the machine.
Overall flow
Here is a procedure for exporting data of the HDD of the machine.
Procedure
1. Select internal HDD as save destination (LIST=2)
3. Import from the internal HDD
Procedure for backing up data to the HDD of the machine

4. The names of .dcm files saved in the internal HDD are displayed. F-2-544
F-2-542
2-315
2-316
6. After registering the password, select BACKUP. Press OK to execute export.
F-2-547
Press <-.
F-2-545
F-2-546
Note:
Limitations regarding the DCM data password

No password is set when 0 character is entered. (The setting in which no password is set
is allowed only for service mode.)
F-2-548
Reference:
iAC5255_JWH00003_V0102_0040_2012_0124_193650.dcm
Model
Export
YYYY_MMDD_HHMMSS
S/N
Main controller
firm ware version
DCM File format
DCM Job
management number
F-2-549
2-316
2-317
Import
3. When referring to the internal HDD, select 2 and press OK.
Preparation
There is no need to newly prepare for saving data to the HDD of the machine.
Overall flow
Here is a procedure for Importing data of the HDD of the machine.
Procedure
1. Select internal HDD as save destination (LIST=2)
3. Import from the internal HDD
Import from the internal HDD

1. Log in to service mode and press RESTORE.
F-2-552
4. The names of .dcm files referred to in the internal HDD are displayed.
F-2-550
2. Select LIST after the screen moves to <RESTORE>.
F-2-553
F-2-551
2-317
5. Select PASSWD.
2-318
7. When the correct file is displayed, press ->.
F-2-554
6. Enter the selection number displayed on the left side of the file to be selected.
F-2-556
Note:
" *" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the file has been selected in
SELECT.
HDD : Up to 2 files are displayed in a screen.
F-2-555
F-2-557
2-318
2-319
Press <-.
OK
F-2-558
Note:
F-2-560

"<-" is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the selection of the file has
been confirmed.
"***" is displayed after the password is entered.
9. After registering the password, select RESTORE. Press OK to execute import.
F-2-559
2-319
Periodic Service
Periodic Service
Service Operation Item

Periodical
Periodic Service > Periodical Service Operation Item
3-2
Periodical Service Operation Item

: Replacement (Periodical replacement) : Replacement (Consumable parts) : Cleaning : Lubrication : Adjustment : Inspection
Interval
Process Primary Charging Assembly

Unit
Part No
FM3-7288
FB4-3687
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Primary Charging Wire cleaner

Primary Charging Wire cleaner holder
Grid Wire
FL2-04620 2
FL2-2720 2
FY1-0883 AR
FM3-7297 1
FB4-3687 1
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Pre-transfer Charging Wire cleaner

Pre-transfer Charging Wire cleaner holder
Developing Cylinder
Developing Roller
Drum Cleaning Blade
Drum Front Side Seal
Drum Rear Side Seal
Scraper
Dustproof Glass
Primary Charging Assembly Shield Plate
Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shield Plate
Drum Cleaning Unit Plate
Toner collection area
Drum Sliding Assembly
FL2-0462
FL2-2720
FM4-5438
FB6-6569
FL3-5187
FB4-8018
FC8-7086
FC8-7086
FC9-9153
-
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
1
2
1
3
2
1
1
1
1
1
25
26
Drum Surface
Drum Edge
1
1
27
The host machine surface below the

Developing Assembly
Developing wheel
Lower side of Cylinder.
2
1
1
1
28
29
30
31
As needed
6000K
1000K
600K
500K
250K
120K
At installation
1
2
Part Name
Number
No. Category
Counter
Remark
DRBL-1 PRM-UNIT
PRDC-1 PRM-WIRE With spring:FL3-4558
In a high temperature/humidity environment (30 deg C/80%), it is 250000 sheets
PRDC-1 PRM-CLN
PRDC-1 PRM-GRID
DRBL-1 PO-UNIT
PRDC-1 PO-WIRE
With spring:FL3-4559
PRDC-1 PO-CLN
DRBL-1 DVG-CYL
DRBL-1 CLN-BLD
The blade movement is reversed at every 300 thousand sheets (1-sided).
DRBL-1 SP-CLAW
DRBL-1 BS-SL-F
DRBL-1 BS-SL-R
DRBL-1 EXP-SCRP Clean with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
Crumb toner clusters.
Apply lubricant at the Drum Sliding Assembly when abnormal sound is heard at
the time of operation (FY9-6008).
Using lint-free paper, clean the drum with the drum cleaning powder (FY9-6024).
Clean with lint-free paper moistened
Remove toner which was scattered at removal of Developing Assembly.
-

Remove toner on the tray.
Clean when the message is displayed.
3-2
3-3
Interval
32
Image ETB
33 Formation Transfer Roller
34 System Brush Roller
35
ETB Cleaning Blade
36
ETB Driver Roller
37
ETB Idler Roller
38
Fixing Fixing Web
39 System Fixing Roller
40
Fixing Roller Insulating Bush
41
Fixing Roller Thrust retainer
42
Main Thermistor Unit
43
Sub Thermistor
44
Pressure Roller Unit
45
Pressure Roller Static Eliminator
46
Fixing Inlet Guide
47
48
49
50
51
Fixing Oil Receiver

Fixing Web Guide
Fixing Right Stay
Dowel
Dowel Holder
As needed
6000K
1000K
600K
500K
250K
120K
At installation
Part Name
Part No
Number
No. Category
FC8-7160
FC8-7159
FC8-7175
FC6-1647
FY1-1157
FC9-9163
FC9-8069
FC6-35010
FK2-7683
FK2-76930
FM4-3160
FC7-4287
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
PRDC-1
PRDC-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
-
1
1
1
4
4
Counter
Remark
TR-BLT
TR-ROLL
T-CN-BRU
T-CLN-BD
FX-WEB
FX-UP-RL
FX-IN-BS
FX-RTNR
FIX-TH1
FIX-TH2
FX-LW-RL
FX-L-STC
-

Clean with solvent and lint-free paper.

Also, remove paper lint covered on the Inlet Sensor Flag.
Dry wiping
Dry wiping
3-3
3-4
Interval
53
54
55
56
Pickup/ Upper Separation Claw

Feeding
System Cassette 3 Pickup Roller / Cassette 4 Pickup
Roller
Cassette 3 Feed Roller / Cassette 4 Feed
Roller
Cassette 3 Separation Roller / Cassette 4
Separation Roller
Right Deck Pickup Roller / Left Deck Pickup
Roller
As needed
6000K
1000K
600K
500K
250K
120K
At installation
52
Part Name
Part No
Number
No. Category
FB5-3625
FC5-2524
FC5-2526
FC5-2528
FC5-2524
57
Right Deck Feed Roller / Left Deck Feed

Roller
FC5-2526
58
Right Deck Separation Roller / Left Deck

Separation Roller
FC5-2528
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66

Feed Guide
Rollers/wheels
Duplex Unit Cleaning Brush
Scanner Sensor(Feeding Assembly)
FC6-6661
FB1-8581
-
1
1
1
2
1
7
Ozone Filter
Dustproof Filter
FL3-2134
FC8-9564
1
1
67
68
Filter
Counter
DRBL-1 DLV-UCLW
DRBL-1 3: C3-PU-RL
4: C4-PU-RL
DRBL-1 3: C3-FD-RL
4: C4-FD-RL
DRBL-1 3: C3-SP-RL
4: C4-SP-RL
DRBL-1 Right:
C1-PU-RL
Left:
C2-PU-RL
DRBL-1 Right:
C1-FD-RL
Left:
C2-FD-RL
DRBL-1 Right:
C1-SP-RL
Left:
C2-SP-RL
DRBL-1 M-SP-RL
DRBL-1 M-FD-RL
-
Remark
Clean this part when it is not replaced.

Actual use in terms of number of prints.
1 pc. each (3/4)
1 pc. each (3/4)
1 pc. each (3/4)
1 pc. each (Left/Right)



Remove paper lint with lint-free paper and cleaning tool.
Remove paper lint (toner) with Blower.
Using Blower, remove paper lint which was collected by Cleaning Brush.
Using Blower, remove paper lint
Vertical Path Sensor 1 (PS24) ,the Multi-purpose Tray Last Paper Sensor
(PS28),the Registration Sensor (PS29),Reverse Vertical Path Sensor
(PS65),Duplex Outlet Sensor (PS64), Duplex Merge Sensor (PS67), and Duplex
Left Sensor (PS66)
PRDC-1 OZ-FIL1
PRDC-1 AR-FIL1
T-3-1
3-4
of Parts
List
Controller
Main
Exposure System
Laser
Formation System
Image
Fixing
System
Pickup/Feed
Auxiliary System
External
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of External / Internal Cover
List of Parts
No
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
List of External / Internal Cover

[2]
[1]
[3]
[16]
[4]
[5]
[15]
4-2
Name
Reference
Upper Cover
Upper Left Cover
Operation Panel
Upper Right Cover
Front Cover
Deck Left Cover
Deck Right Cover
Left Front Cover
Left Lower Cover
Left Handle Cover
Delivery Cover
Finisher Connector Cover
Left Upper Cover
T-4-1
[6]
[14]
[8]
[13]
[9]
[12]
[7]
[10]
[11]
F-4-1
4-2
No
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[27]
[28]
[29]
[30]
[31]
[32]
[33]
[34]
[32]
[34]
[31]
[17]
[33]
[30]
[18]
[29]
[28]
[19]
[27]
[26]
4-3
Name
Reference
Upper Rear Cover

Left Rear Cover
Rear Upper Cover
Rear Lower Cover
Filter Cover
Waste Toner Container Cover
Right Lower Cover
Right Rear Cover 2
Vertical Path Cover
Right Front Cover
Right Handle Cover
Duplex Delivery Cover
Right Cover
MP Pickup Tray Sub Cover
MP Pickup Tray
Right Upper Cover
Right Rear Cover 1
Right Rear Cover 2
T-4-2
[25]
[20]
[24]
[23]
[21]
[22]
F-4-2
4-3
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Main Unit
4-4
List of Main Unit

Developing Assembly
Laser Scanner Unit
Process Unit
Waste Toner Feed Unit
Fixing Assembly
Hopper Unit
F-4-3
4-4
4
No
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Name
Service Parts No.
Waste Toner Feed Unit

Laser Scanner Unit
Hopper Unit
Fixing Assembly
Process Uint
Developing Assembly
FM4-0899
FM3-7526
FM4-0879
NPN
FM4-5397
FM3-7384
4-5
Reference
"Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit"(page 4-168).

"Removing the Laser Scanner Unit"(page 4-92).
"Removing the Hopper Unit"(page 4-159).
"Removing the Fixing Assembly"(page 4-176).
"Removing the Process Unit"(page 4-113).
"Removing the Developing Assembly"(page 4-128).
T-4-3
4-5
Fixing Feed Unit
4-6
Right Deck Pickup Unit
Left Deck Pickup Unit
Outer Delivery Unit
Multi-purpose
Tray Pickup Unit
Vertical Path Unit
Registration Unit
Cassette 3 Pickup Unit

ETB Unit
ETB Cleaning Unit

F-4-4
4-6
4
No
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
Name
Service Parts No.
Outer Delivery Unit

Fixing Feed Unit
Vertical Path Unit
Registration Unit
ETB Cleaning Unit
ETB Unit
FM3-7379
NPN
FM3-7367
FM0-3208
FM0-3207
FM4-0943
FM0-3207
FM0-3207
FM4-5156
FM4-5316
FM4-0913
FM4-0916
4-7
Reference
"Removing the Left Deck Pickup Unit"(page 4-215).

"Removing the Right Deck Pickup Unit"(page 4-216).
"Removing the Cassettes 3 and 4 Pickup Unit"(page 4-217).
"Removing the Cassettes 3 and 4 Pickup Unit"(page 4-217).
"Removing the Registration Unit"(page 4-221).
"Removing the ETB Unit"(page 4-137).
T-4-4
4-7
4-8
Drum Drive Unit
Controller Box
Developing Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Flat Control Panel Unit
ETB Drive Unit
Vertical Path Cassette

Pickup Drive Unit
Left Deck Drive Unit

F-4-5
4-8
4
No
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
Name
Service Parts No.
Flat Control Panel Unit

Controller Box
Drum Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit
Left Deck Drive Unit
ETB Drive Unit
FM0-1155
NPN
FM4-0904
FM3-7386
NPN
FM3-7374
NPN
4-9
Reference
"Removing the Drum Drive Unit"(page 4-171).

"Removing the Developing Drive Unit"(page 4-173).
"Removing the Main Drive Unit"(page 4-225).
"Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit"(page 4-218).
"Removing the Left Deck Pickup Drive Unit"(page 4-224).
"Removing the ETB Drive Unit"(page 4-153).
T-4-5
4-9
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts, Durable Parts
4-10
Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts

Periodic Replacing Parts, Durable Parts
Developing Roller
Developing Roller
Developing Cylinder
Drum Side Seal (R)
Drum Cleaning Blade
Drum Side Seal (F)
F-4-6
4-10
4
No
Name
Main Unit
Service Parts No.
[1] Developing Roller
Developing Assembly
[2] Developing Cylinder
Developing Assembly
FM4-5438
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Process Uni
Process Unit
Process Unit
Process Unit
Drum Cleaning Unit
FC8-7086
FL3-6291
FB4-8018
FC8-7086
FC9-9153
Drum Side Seal(Rear)

Drum Cleaning Blade
Drum Side Seal(Front)
4-11
Reference
Adjustment during parts

replacement
"Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Developing Roller"(page

4-132).
"Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Developing Roller"(page
4-132).
"Removing the Side Seal"(page 4-127).
"Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade"(page 4-117).
"Removing the Cleaner Separation Claw"(page 4-127).
"Removing the Side Seal"(page 4-127).
"Replacing the Pre-exposure Plastic Film"(page 4-120).
T-4-6
4-11
4-12

Primary Charging
Wire Cleaner
Primary Charging
Wire Cleaner Holder
Primary Charging
Wire Cleaner
Wire Cleaner
Wire Cleaner Holder
F-4-7
4-12
4
No
Name
Main Unit
Service Parts
No.
Reference
[1] Primary Charging Assembly
Process Unit
FM3-7288
"Removing the Primary Charging Assembly"(page 4-96).
[2] Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
Process Unit
FM3-7297
"Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly"(page 4-107).
[3] Primary Charging Wire
[4] Pre-transfer Charging Wire
[5] Primary Charging Wire Cleaner
FB4-3687
FL3-4558
FB4-3687
FL3-4559
FL2-4271
[6] Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Holder
FL2-2720
[7] Grid Wire

[8] Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner

FY1-0883
FL2-4271
[9] Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner Holder
FL2-2720
"Replacing the Primary Charging Wire"(page 4-103).

Primary Charging Wire(with Spring)
"Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire"(page 4-111).
Pre-transfer Charging Wire(with Spring)
"Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder (Right/
Left)"(page 4-97).
"Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder (Right/
Left)"(page 4-97).
"Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire"(page 4-100).
"Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder"(page
4-108).
"Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder"(page
4-108).
4-13
Adjustment during
parts replacement
"Primary Charging
Assembly"(page 5-7).
"Pre-transfer Charging
Assembly"(page 5-9).
"Primary Charging
Wire"(page 5-7).
"Pre-transfer Charging
Wire"(page 5-9).
T-4-7
4-13
ETB
4-14
Transfer Roller
ETB Cleaning Blade

Brush Roller
F-4-8
4-14
4
No
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Name
Main Unit
ETB
Transfer Roller
ETB Cleaning Blade
Brush Roller
ETB Unit
ETB Unit
ETB Unit
ETB Unit
Service Parts No.

FC8-7159
FC8-7160
FC6-1647
FC8-7175
Reference
"Removing the Transfer Roller"(page 4-141).
"Removing the ETB Cleaning Blade"(page 4-142).
"Removing the ETB Brush Roller"(page 4-142).
4-15
Adjustment during parts replacement

T-4-8
4-15
4-16
Fixing Sub Thermistor 1(THM2)

Fixing Sub Thermistor 2(THM3)
Fixing Main Thermistor(THM1)
Fixing Roller
Fixing Roller
Thrust Retainer
Fixing Roller Insulating Bush

Fixing Roller Thrust Retainer
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Roller
Insulating Bush
Fixing cleaning web

Pressure Roller
Static Eliminator
Pressure Roller Unit
F-4-9
4-16
4
No
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Name
Main Unit
Service Parts No.
Fixing Sub Thermister 1(THM2)

Fixing Sub Thermister 2(THM3)
Fixing Main Thermister(THM1)
Fixing Roller
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
FK2-7693
FK2-7693
FK2-7683
FC9-9163
[5] Fixing Roller Insulating Bushing
Fixing Assembly
FC9-8069
[6] Fixing Roller Thrust Retainer
Fixing Assembly
FC6-3501
[7] Fixing Cleaning Web

[8] Pressure Roller Static Eliminator
[9] Pressure Roller Unit (120V, 230V)
Pressure Roller Unit (100V)
[10] Upper Separation Claw
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
FY1-1157
FC7-4287
FM4-3160
FM4-5403
FB5-3625
Reference
"Removing the Sub Thermistor1"(page 4-192).
"Removing the Main Thermistor, Sub Thermistor2"(page 4-190).
"Removing the Main Thermistor, Sub Thermistor2"(page 4-190).
"Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper"(page
4-186).
4-186).
4-186).
"Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web"(page 4-180).
"Removing the Pressure Roller Static Eliminator Unit"(page 4-189).
"Removing the Pressure Roller"(page 4-188).
4-17
Adjustment during parts raplacement

"Fixing Roller"(page 5-12).
-
"Removing the Upper Separation Claw"(page 4-193).

T-4-9
4-17
4-18

Dustproof Filter
Ozone Filter


F-4-10
4-18
4
No
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
Name
Main Unit

Dustproof Filter
Ozone Filter
Multi-purpose Pickup Unit

Product configuration
Reference
"Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller"(page 4-205).
"Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller"(page 4-206).
"Removing the Right Deck Pickup Roller"(page 4-199).
"Removing the Right Deck Separation Roller"(page 4-200).
"Removing the Right Deck Feed Roller"(page 4-200).
"Removing the Left Deck Separation Roller"(page 4-199).
"Removing the Left Deck Pickup Roller"(page 4-197).
"Removing the Left Deck Feed Roller"(page 4-198).
"Removing the Upper Cassette Separation Roller"(page 4-202).
"Removing the Upper Cassette Feed Roller"(page 4-202).
"Removing the Upper Cassette Pickup Roller"(page 4-201).
"Removing the Lower Cassette Separation Roller"(page 4-204).
"Removing the Lower Cassette Feed Roller"(page 4-204).
"Removing the Lower Cassette Pickup Roller"(page 4-203).
"Removing the Filter (for primary charging)"(page 4-230).
"Removing the Ozone Filter"(page 4-230).
4-19
Adjustment during parts

replacement
T-4-10
4-19
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Periodic Replacing Parts,Durable Parts,Cleaning Parts > List of Cleaning Parts
4-20
List of Cleaning Parts

Lower side of Developing Assembly
Developing Roller
Lower side of Developing Cylinder
Developing Roller
Drum Edge
Cleaning Unit Plate
Drum

Waste Toner collection area

F-4-11
4-20
4
No
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
Name
Main Unit
Cleaning Unit Plate

Waste Toner Collection Area
Drum
Drum Edge
Lower side of Developing Assembly
Developing Roller
Lower side of Cylinder
Drum Cleaning Unit

Drum Cleaning Unit
Drum Cleaning Unit
Process Unit
Process Unit
Process Unit
Process Unit
Process Unit
Developing Assembly
Developing Assembly
Developing Assembly
4-21
Reference
"Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Unit"(page 4-119).
"Cleaning the Process Unit"(page 4-115).
"Cleaning Photosensitive Drum"(page 4-125).
"Cleaning the Drum edges"(page 4-126).
"Cleaning the Developing Assembly"(page 4-131).
T-4-11
4-21
4-22
Primary Charging Assembly Shield Plate (R)

Shield Plate (L)
Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire

Shield Plate

ETB Idler Roller
ETB Drive Roller

F-4-12
4-22
4
No
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Name
Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire
Primary Charging Assembly Shield Plate
Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shield Plate
ETB Drive Roller
ETB Idler Roller
Main Unit
ETB Unit
ETB Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
4-23
Reference
"Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire"(page 4-106).
"Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire"(page 4-106).
"Cleaning the Pre-transfer Charging Wire"(page 4-113).
"Cleaning the ETB"(page 4-140).
"Cleaning the ETB"(page 4-140).
"Removing the Toner Receptacle Tray"(page 4-158).
"Removing the Waste Toner Container"(page 4-145).
T-4-12
4-23
4-24
Fixing inlet guide

Fixing cleaning web guide
Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag
Fixing Assembly
Fixing oil pan
Fixing Right Stay

Dowel Holder
Dowel
F-4-13
4-24
4
No
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Name
Fixing Inlet Guide
Fixing Right Stay
Dowel
Dowel Holder
Fixing Oil Pan
Fixing Cieaning Web Guide
Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag
Main Unit
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
4-25
Reference
"Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide,Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag, Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder"(page 4-178).
"Cleaning the Fixing Oil Pan, Fixing Cleaning Web Guide"(page 4-180).
"Cleaning the Upper Separation Claw"(page 4-194).
"Cleaning the Fixing Oil Pan, Fixing Cleaning Web Guide"(page 4-180).
"Cleaning the Inner Delivery Roller"(page 4-179).
T-4-13
4-25
4-26
Registration Unit Feed Guide

Right Door Unit
Feed Guide
Right Lower Door Unit

Feed Guide
Inner Feed Guide

Feed Guide
Fixing Feed Unit (Duplex/Rear) Feed Guide

F-4-14
4-26
4
No
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
Name
Main Unit
Registration Unit Feed Guide

Reverse Delivery Unit Feed Guide
Fixing Feed Unit (Duplex/Rear)Feed Guide
Inner Feed Guide
Right Door Unit Feed Guide
Right Lower Door Unit Feed Guide
Registration Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
Product Specification
Right Door Unit
4-27
Reference
"Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly"(page 4-207).
T-4-14
4-27
4-28
Roller of Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit

Roller of Right Door Unit
Roller of Right Lower Door Unit

Duplex area
Cleaning Brush
Roller of Reverse Delivery Unit
Roller of Fixing Feed Unit
Duplex area Cleaning Brush

F-4-15
4-28
4
No
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Name
Main Unit
Roller of Fixing Feed Unit

Roller of Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit
Roller of Right Door Unit
Roller of Right Lower Door Unit
Roller of Reverse Delivery Unit
Duplex area Cleaning Brush
Fixing Feed Unit

Registration Unit
Right Door Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
4-29
Reference
T-4-15
4-29
4-30
Pickup Feed Drive Unit
PS28
PS24
PS29
PS64
PS65
PS66
PS67
Right Door Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
F-4-16
4-30
4
No
PS24
PS28
PS29
PS64
PS66
PS67
Name
Vertical Path Sensor 1
Multi-purpose Tray Last Paper Sensor
Registration Sensor
Duplex Left Sensor
Main Unit
Vertical Path Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
4-31
Reference
T-4-16
4-31
4-32
Dust-Proof Glass
Laser Scanner Unit
F-4-17
4-32
4
No
Name
[1] Dustproof Glass
Main Unit
Main Body
4-33
Reference
"Cleaning the Dust Collecting Glass"(page 4-95).
T-4-17
4-33
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Fan
4-34
List of Fan
FM17
FM16
FM33
FM7
FM2
IH power supply unit

FM8
FM31
FM30
FM32
FM41
FM4
Power Supply
FM42
FM5
FM40
FM3
FM14
FM15
F-4-18
4-34
4
No
FM2
FM3
FM4
FM5
FM7
FM8
FM14
FM15
FM16
FM17
FM30
FM31
FM32
FM33
FM40
FM41
FM42
Name
Primary Charging Assembly Air Supply Fan
Paper Cooling Fan
Primary Charging Assembly Exhaust Fan
Developing Assembly Lower Cooling Fan
Developing Assembly Upper Cooling Fan
Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Air Supply Fan
Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Exhaust Fan
Registration Motor/Duplex Motor Cooling Fan
Main Unit
4-35
Reference
T-4-18
4-35
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Clutch / Solenoid
4-36
List of Clutch / Solenoid
Fixing Feed Unit
SL2
SL11
SL5
SL9
Fixing Assembly
F-4-19
4-36
4
No
SL2
SL5
SL9
SL11
Name
Main Unit
Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Solenoid

Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid
Left Deck Merging Solenoid

Fixing Feed Unit
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Feed Unit
4-37
Reference
T-4-19
4-37
4-38
CL5
CL1
SL6
SL7
SL3
SL4
F-4-20
4-38
4
No
CL1
SL3
SL4
CL5
SL6
SL7
Name
Main Unit
Developing Clutch
Magnet Roller Clutch
Developing Assembly
Hopper Unit
4-39
Reference
T-4-20
4-39
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Motor
4-40
List of Motor
Buffer Assembly
Hopper Unit
Process Unit
ETB Unit
M10
M6
M28
M7
M15
M3
Fixing Assembly
M43
F-4-21
4-40
4
No
M3
M6
M7
M10
M15
M28
M43
Name
Fixing Motor
Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor
Toner Supply Motor
Toner Feed Motor
ETB Motor
Main Unit
Fixing Assembly
Process Unit
Process Unit
Hopper Unit
Fixing Assembly
Hopper Unit
ETB Unit
4-41
Reference
T-4-21
4-41
4-42
Laser Scanner Unit
Fixing Feed Unit

M44
M13
M32
M16
Outer Delivery Unit
M18
M19
M14
F-4-22
4-42
4
No
M13
M14
M16
M18
M19
M32
M44
Name
Delivery Motor
Reverse Motor
Side Registration Motor
Polygon Motor
Main Unit
Outer Delivery Unit

Fixing Feed Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
Laser Scanner Unit
4-43
Reference
T-4-22
4-43
4-44
Pickup Feed Unit
M1
M34
M2
M33
Drum Drive Unit
M26
M31
M11
M24
M4
M27
M20
M5
M12
M21
Cassette Pickup Drive Unit

F-4-23
4-44
4
No
M1
M2
M4
M5
M11
M12
M20
M21
M24
M26
M27
M31
M33
M34
Name
Main Unit
Drum Motor
Developing Motor
Cassette 3,4 Pickup Motor
Cassette 3 Lifter Motor
Cassette 4 Lifter Motor
Multi-purpose Tray Registration Front Motor
Registration Motor
Drum Drive Unit

Developing Assembly Drive Unit
Pickup Feed Unit
Pickup Feed Unit
Pickup Feed Unit
Pickup Feed Unit
Pickup Feed Unit
Pickup Feed Unit
Pickup Feed Unit
4-45
Reference
T-4-23
4-45
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Sensor
4-46
List of Sensor
Developing Assembly
PS29
TS1
PS24
PS51
PS4
PS61
PS45
PS52
PS53
Drum Drive Unit
Right Door Unit

PS96
Fixing Assembly
F-4-24
4-46
4
No
PS4
PS24
PS29
PS45
PS51
PS52
PS61
PS96
TS1
Name
Main Unit

Registration Sensor
Fixing Cleaning Web Level Sensor
Fixing Inlet Sensor
Fixed Feed Lever Sensor
Developing Assembly Toner Sensor
4-47
Reference
Fixing Assembly
Vertical Path Unit
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Drum Drive Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
Developing Assembly
T-4-24
4-47
4-48
Upper High Voltage Unit
Hopper Unit
Buffer Assembly
PS54
TS3
UN13
PS23
TS2
PS56
PS55
PS35
PS66
PS65
PS28
PS64
PS67
PS36
PS25
PS31
PS2
Outer Delivery Unit

Fixing Feed Unit
Vertical Path Unit
F-4-25
4-48
4
No
PS2
PS23
PS25
PS28
PS31
PS35
PS36
PS54
PS55
PS56
PS64
PS65
PS66
PS67
TS2
TS3
UN13
Name
Multi-purpose Tray Last Paper Sensor
Toner Exchange Cover Open/Close Sensor
Transfer Belt Engage Sensor
Transfer Belt Disengage Sensor
Duplex Left Sensor
Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Sensor
Main Unit
Vertical Path Unit

Vertical Path Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
Outer Delivery Unit
Hopper Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
Fixing Feed Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
4-49
Reference
T-4-25
4-49
4-50
Cassette1 Pickup Unit
PS8
PS6
PS19
PS32
PS7
PS3
PS94

PS12
PS95

PS10
PS33
PS68
PS17
PS21
PS26
PS20
PS47
PS11
PS48
PS13
PS49
PS50
PS70
PS69
PS73
PS72
PS71
PS18
PS22
PS27
PS26
PS14
THU1
F-4-26
4-50
4
No
PS3
PS6
PS7
PS8
PS10
PS11
PS12
PS13
PS14
PS17
PS18
PS19
PS20
PS21
PS22
PS26
PS27
PS32
PS33
PS47
PS48
PS49
PS50
PS68
PS69
PS70
PS71
PS72
PS73
PS94
PS95
THU1
Name
Multi-purpose Tray Cover Open/Close Sensor
Left Deck Upper Limit Sensor
Cassette 3 Paper Sensor
Cassette 3 Paper Height Sensor
Right Deck Pickup Sensor 2
Cassette 3 Pickup Sensor 2
Left Deck Pull Out Sensor
Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1
Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1
Primary Charging Assembly Shutter Open/Close Sensor
Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Open/Close Sensor
Environment Sensor
Main Unit
4-51
Reference

Right Deck Unit
Right Deck Unit
Right Deck Unit
Left Deck Unit
Left Deck Unit
Left Deck Unit
Right Deck Unit
Left Deck Unit
Vertical Path Unit
Vertical Path Unit
Right Deck Unit
Left Deck Unit
Right Deck Unit
Right Deck Unit
Left Deck Unit
Left Deck Unit
Main Body
T-4-26
4-51
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of Switch
4-52
List of Switch
SW1
SW6
Waste Toner Unit
SW5
Power Supply Unit
SW2
SW7
SW9
SW8
SW3
SW10
SW4
F-4-27
4-52
4
No
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW6
SW7
SW8
SW9
SW10
Name
Power Switch
Environment Switch
Cassette Heater Switch
Waste Toner Lock Detection Switch
Multi Door Switch
Main Unit
4-53
Reference
Waste Toner Unit
T-4-27
4-53
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > List of PCB
4-54
List of PCB
PCB50
Fixing Feed Unit
PCB51
PCB13
Controller Unit
PCB9
PCB4
HDD
PCB34
PCB2
PCB1
PCB25
PCB29
PCB6(100V)
PCB7(200V)
PCB3
PCB8 PCB5
PCB33
Power Supply Unit
PCB17(100V)
PCB18(200V)
PCB30
PCB31
F-4-28
4-54
4
No
PCB1
PCB2
PCB3
PCB4
PCB5
PCB6
PCB7
PCB8
PCB9
PCB13
PCB17
PCB18
PCB25
PCB29
PCB30
PCB31
PCB33
PCB34
PCB50
Name
DC Controller PCB
Main Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Duplex Driver PCB
Relay PCB
AC Driver PCB(100V)
AC Driver PCB(200V)
DC-DC Converter PCB
DC-DC Converter PCB
Noise Filter(100V)
Noise Filter(200V)
Choke Coil PCB
DC Power Supply(12V)
Transfer High Voltage Registance PCB
PCB51 Main Controller PCB 2
Main Unit
Service Parts No.

FM0-4158
FM4-1083
FM4-1084
FM4-1085
FM0-2963
FM0-2961
FM0-2962
FM4-1089
FM4-1089
FM4-1095
FM0-2958
FM0-2959
FM4-1103
FM0-4161
FM0-4153
FM0-4152
FK3-1998
FM2-7196
iR-ADV6255:FM4-2500
iR-ADV6265:FM4-2501
iR-ADV6275:FM4-2517
FM4-2497
4-55
Reference
"DC Controller PCB"(page 5-12).
"Main Controller PCB 1"(page 5-4).
"Main Controller PCB 2"(page 5-5).

T-4-28
4-55
4-56
Upper High Voltage Unit
PCB12
Laser Scanner Unit
PCB32
PCB35
PCB26
PCB10
PCB11
PCB15
PCB36
PCB54
PCB24
PCB23
PCB19
PCB20
Process Unit
Process Unit
PCB27(200V)
PCB28(100V)
F-4-29
4-56
4
No
Name
Main Unit
Service Parts No.
PCB10
PCB10
PCB11
PCB12
PCB15
Fixing power Supply PCB (100V, 120V)

Fixing power Supply PCB (230V)
Developing High Voltage PCB
Potential Sensor PCB
FM2-3648
FM4-1099
FM4-1093
FM4-1094
FM4-1096
PCB19
PCB20
PCB23
PCB24
PCB26
PCB27
PCB28
PCB32
Primary Charging Contact A PCB

Primary Charging Contact B PCB
Pre-transfer Charging Contact A PCB
Pre-transfer Charging Contact A PCB
Pre-transfer Charging PCB
Drum Heater Driver PCB(200V)
Drum Heater Driver PCB(100V)
Potential Control PCB
FM4-5148
FM4-1102
FM4-5148
FM4-1102
FM4-1106
FM4-1107
FM4-1108
FM4-1096
PCB35 Laser Driver PCB
PCB36 BD PCB
PCB54 Drum Rom PCB
Laser Scanner Unit:

FM3-7531
Laser Scanner Unit:
FM3-7531
FM2-7734
4-57
Refernce
"Potential Sensor / Potential Control

PCB"(page 5-11).
"Potential Sensor / Potential Control

PCB"(page 5-11).
T-4-29
4-57
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Heater,others
4-58
Heater,others
UN75
VA
EPC1
LE1
THM2
THM3
TP1
THM1
H3
VA
VA
Process Unit
H1
Power Supply Unit
Fixing Assembly
H2
CB1001
CB1002
CB1003
CB1004
F-4-30
4-58
4
No
H1
LE1
H2
H3
TP1
THM1
THM2
THM3
EPC1
CB1002
CB1003
Name
Drum Heater
Pre-exposure LED
Multi Cassette Heater
Fixing Heater
Fixing Thermal Switch 1
Potential Sensor
Leakage Breaker
Leakage Breaker
Main Unit
4-59
Reference
Process Unit
Process Unit
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Process Unit
T-4-30
4-59
Parts Replacement and Clearning > List of Parts > Connector List
4-60
Connector List
10
32
13
2
3
16
6
7
17
8
11
12
15
21
29
31 30
14
24
19
20
22
25
26
27
28
23
18
F-4-31
4-60
4
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
12
13
14
15
15
15
16
17
J401
J411
J412
J413
J414
J421
J431
J432
J441
J442
J451
J461
J461
J462
J471
J472
J472
J472
J491
J493
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
PCB1
Parts Name
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
DC Controller PCB
4-61
Intermediate Connector
J3017
J3002
J3002
J3123
J3130
J3241
J9040
J9040
J9043
J3018
J3018
J3011
J3011
J2087
J2102
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
-
J518
J126
J125
J124
J128
J204
J300
J301
J21
J22
J514
J5100
J403
J2159
J5101
-
PCB5
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB3
PCB4
PCB4
PCB51
PCB51
PCB5
PCB35
PCB36
M44
PCB35
-
Relay PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Duplex Driver PCB
Duplex Driver PCB
Relay PCB
DECK LATTICE
DECK LATTICE
FINISHER LATTICE
Laser Driver PCB
BD PCB
Polygon Motor
Laser Driver PCB
-
REMARKS
T-4-31
4-61
4-62
31
39
29
43
23
26
40
16
19
11
34
45
12
25
28
42
35
22
38
30
33
32
36
44
24
21
10
8
6
9
7
3
13
20
27
41
14
4
5
1
18
17
37
15
F-4-32
4-62
4
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
1
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
J101
J102
J103
J103
J103
J103
J104
J104
J104
J104
J104
J104
J105
J105
J105
J105
J105
J106
J106
J106
J106
J106
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
7
7
7
8
9
9
9
9
9
9
10
10
11
J107
J107
J107
J108
J109
J109
J109
J109
J109
J109
J110
J110
J152
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB19
12
J153
Parts Name
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB

Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Pre-tranfer Charging
Contact A PCB
PCB20 Pre-tranfer Charging
Contact B PCB
4-63
3174
3251
J3001
J3001
3001
3001
J3001
J3001
J3001
J3001
J3001
J3001
J3001
J3235
J3235
J3235
J3235
J3235
J3006
J3006
J3007
J3092
J3092
J3009
J3094
J3094
J3121
J3121
J3121
J3121
J3121
J3177
J3177
J4060
J4060
J3272
J3272
J3167
J3167
J3093
J3093
J3122
J3101
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
J515
J2009
J615
J2136
J2140
J3050
J2011
J2012
J2014
J2157
J2157
J2158
J1
J2015
J2017
J2018
J2019
J2001
J2002
J2003
J2005
J2053
PCB5
M13
PCB6,7
PS36
PS96
SW5
PS45
PS53
M15
THM1
THM3
THM2
M3
SL9
PS51
PS52
PS4
SL2
PS23
UN13
PS24
PS28
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
-
J2137
J4141
J151
J522
J2004
J2006
J2007
J2008
J2138
J2139
J3253
-
PS61
LED03
PCB19
PCB5
FM33
CL1
FM16
FM17
M1
M2
SW2
SW6
PCB20
Relay PCB
Delivery Motor
AC Driver PCB
Fixed Feed Lever Sensor
Waste Toner Lock Detection Switch
Fixing Cleaning Web Level Sensor
Fixing Shutter Home Position Sensor
Fixing Motor
Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid
Fixing Inlet Sensor
Multi-purpose Pickup Solenoid
Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Sensor
Multi-purpose Tray Paper Last paper
Sensor
LE1
Pre-tranfer Charging Contact A PCB
Relay PCB
Pre-transfer Charging Exhaust Fan
Developing Clutch
Primary Charging Exhaust Fan
Drum Motor
Developing Motor
Multi Door Switch
Pre-tranfer Charging Contact B PCB
Parts Name
45
J4107
M6
REMARKS
T-4-32
4-63
4-64
15
30
27
32
29
28
39
38
22
24
13
14
36
26
40
37
23
17
25
35
18
31
16
42
20
41
33
12
6
7
10
8
19
11
21
34
F-4-33
4-64
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
5
6
7
7
8
9
10
11
12
12
12
12
12
J111
J112
J112
J114
J114
J114
J114
J114
J114
J114
J115
J115
J115
J115
J115
J117
J118
J119
J119
J122
J123
J127
J129
J130
J130
J130
J130
J130
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
Parts Name
13
J152
14
J153
15
J3
PCB23 Pre-tranfer
Charging Contact A
PCB
PCB24 Pre-tranfer
Charging Contact
B PCB
PCB32 Voltage Control
PCB
Main Driver PCB

Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
4-65
J3097
J3098
J3098
J3088
J3088
J3088
J3088
J3088
J3088
J3088
J3091
J3091
J3091
J3091
J3091
J3063
J3172
J3111
J3111
J9058
J9059
J3176
J3231
J3066
J3066
J3066
J3066
J3066
J3169
J3089
J3089
J3089
J3055
J3089
J3089
J3089
J3090
J3090
J3090
J3090
J3090
J3080
J3001
J3067
J3067
J3067
J3067
J3067
J3252
J3047
J2133
J3168
J3106
J3124
J3124
J3124
J3124
J3215
J3215
J3215
J3215
J3215
J3170
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
J3501
J3511
J3544
J2029
J2132
J3048
J3510
J1
J151
J2034
J2035
J2036
J2038
J2039
J2037
J104
J103
J2130
J614
J2156
J2114
J2131
J2170
J2171
J2177
PCB11
PCB12
PCB26
PS94
PS3
THU1
PCB54
TS1
PCB32
PCB23
PS54
M28
CL5
TS2
TS3
M10
PCB10
PCB10
FM7
PCB6,7
TP1
PS95
FM2
FM30
FM31
FM32
PCB24

Primary Charging Shutter Sensor
Environment Sensor
Drum ROM PCB
Voltage Control PCB
Contact A PCB
Toner Exchange Cover Sensor
Toner Feed Motor
Magnet Roller Clutch
Buffer Toner Sensor
Toner Supply Motor
Shift Tray-E1
Shift Tray-E1
AC Driver PCB
Thermal Switch1
Pre-transfer Charging Shutter Sensor
Primary Charging Suction Fan
Developer Lower Cooling Fan
Developer Upper Cooling Fan
Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Air Supply
Fan
Contact B PCB
41
J3108
M7
Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Motor
42
J3172
PCB15
REMARKS
Voltage Sensor PCB

T-4-33
4-65
4-66
32
28
35
27
13
14
21
20
30
34
23
4
12
24
22
25
26
16
33
29
15
17
31
18
11
10
19
F-4-34
4-66
4
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
1
2
2
3
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
9
9
J201
J211
J211
J212
J212
J213
J214
J215
J218
J221
J221
J221
J221
J221
J221
J221
J221
J221
J221
J221
J222
J222
J222
J222
J222
J222
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
Parts Name
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
4-67
J3634
J3634
J3634
J3634
J3634
J3132
J3132
J3634
J3028
J3028
J3633
J3633
J3633
J3633
J3633
J3633
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
J516
J2050
J2071
J2146
J2147
J2076
J2097
J2077
J100
J2042
J2043
J2044
J2045
J2046
J2048
J2049
J2051
J2052
J2148
J2149
J2060
J2061
J2062
J2063
J2064
J2070
PCB5
M24
M11
M33
M26
M31
M12
M27
PCB8
PS20
PS12
PS11
PS10
PS33
PS49
PS50
M5
SL7
PS47
PS48
PS19
PS8
PS7
PS6
PS32
SL6
Parts Name
REMARKS
Relay PCB
Multi-purposeTray Registration Front Motor
Cassette3.4 Pickup Motor
DC-DC Converter PCB
T-4-34
4-67
4-68
6
9
28
26
27 15
30
23
21
31
25
7
14
17
29
20
11
12
18
10
16
13
19
8
2
32
24
22
F-4-35
4-68
4
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
J223
J223
J223
J223
J223
J223
J223
J223
J224
J224
J224
J224
J224
J224
J225
J225
J225
J225
J225
J225
J226
J226
J226
J226
J226
J226
J227
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
Parts Name
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
Feed Driver PCB
4-69
J3128
J3635
J3128
J3635
J3635
J3635
J3635
J3635
J3636
J3636
J3636
J3636
J3636
J3636
J3031
J3008
J3031
J3273
J3273
J3273
J3033
J3033
J3033
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
J2054
J2055
J2066
J2073
J2078
J2079
J2080
J2081
J2056
J2075
J2089
J2090
J2091
J2092
J2069
J2072
J2074
J2085
J2088
J2096
J2082
J2083
J2084
J2093
J2094
J2095
J2168
PS25
PS68
PS2
SL3
PS21
PS13
PS17
PS26
PS71
SL4
PS22
PS14
PS18
PS27
M4
M20
M21
SW9
FM3
SW10
PS69
PS70
SW7
PS72
PS73
SW8
FM40

REMARKS
T-4-35
4-69
4-70
28
13
32
36
31
10
12
20
16
22
15
34
33
30
29
24
27
25
35
21
26
18
3
23
17
14
11
19
F-4-36
4-70
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
1
2
2
3
4
4
5
5
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
J310
J311
J311
J330
J331
J331
J332
J332
J333
J340
J340
J340
J340
J340
J340
J340
J340
J342
J342
J342
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
Duplex Driver PCB

Duplex Driver PCB
Duplex Driver PCB
Duplex Driver PCB
Duplex Driver PCB
Duplex Driver PCB
Duplex Driver PCB
Duplex Driver PCB
Duplex Driver PCB
Duplex Driver PCB
Duplex Driver PCB
Duplex Driver PCB
Duplex Driver PCB
Duplex Driver PCB
Duplex Driver PCB
Duplex Driver PCB
Duplex Driver PCB
Duplex Driver PCB
Duplex Driver PCB
Duplex Driver PCB
Parts Name
9
9
9
9
9
9
10
J343
J343
J343
J343
J343
J343
J3063
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
PCB13
Duplex Driver PCB

Duplex Driver PCB
Duplex Driver PCB
Duplex Driver PCB
Duplex Driver PCB
Duplex Driver PCB
Transfer High Voltage
PCB
4-71
J3233
J3002
J3042
J3236
J3243
J3236
J2121
J3242
J3242
J3263
J3020
J3021
J3270
J3270
J3265
J3269
J3270
J3306
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
J517
J100
J3061
J2167
J2108
J2111
J2098
J2109
J2107
J2113
J2115
J2117
J2118
J2120
J2121
J2124
J2125
J2116
J2144
J2145
PCB5
PCB9
PCB13
M14
M32
M19
M34
M18
M43
PS35
SL5
PS65
FM5
PS66
FM8
M16
PS31
PS29
FM41
FM42
31
32
33
34
35
36
-
J2100
J2101
J2104
J2105
J2106
J3062
-
PS55
PS56
PS64
PS67
SL11
PCB13
PCB34
Parts Name
REMARKS
Relay PCB
DC-DC Converter PCB
Reverse Motor
Registration Motor
ETB Motor
Paper Cooling Fan
Duplex Left Sensor
Side Registration Motor
Registration Sensor
Registration Motor/Duplex Motor
Cooling Fan
ETB Engage Sensor
Transfer High Voltage Resistance PCB
T-4-36
4-71
4-72
26
28
30
37
29
19
16
17
27
23
24
20
21
25
14
13
15
4
2
9
10
22
18
11
12
F-4-37
4-72
4
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
7
8
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
14
14
15
J501
J502
J503
J505
J505
J506
J507
J508
J509
J509
J510
J511
J512
J513
J519
J520
J520
J520
J523
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
Parts Name
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
4-73
J3237
J709
J3118
J3238
J3095
J3096
J9040
J9024
J9043
J3224
J3099
J3218
J3102
J3102
J3001
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
J5
J23
J611
J4
J2134
J2154
J691
J201
J202
J202
J3545
J2
J2151
J2152
J3637
PCB51
PCB51
PCB6,7
PCB51
FM14
FM15
PCB33
PCB29
PCB30
PCB31
PCB26
M3
M1
M2
SW1
Parts Name
REMARKS

DECK LATTICE
USB Device Port-A1
READER LATTICE
FINISHER LATTICE
AC Driver PCB
DC Power Supply PCB
DC Power Supply PCB
DC Power Supply PCB
Fixing Motor
Drum Motor
Developing Motor
Power ON Switch
T-4-37
4-73
4-74
18
34
33
17
31
15
16
14
26
32
25
27
13
12
30
22
29
10
19
11
7
21
20
28
9
1
24
2
23
F-4-38
4-74
4
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
8
9
10
11
12
J601
J602
J603
J604
J604
J605
J606
J606
J607
J607
J608
J608
J608
J609
J610
J613
J101
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB6,7
PCB10
13
J107
PCB10
14
J3500
PCB11
14
J3500
PCB11
15
J3502
PCB11
16
J3503
PCB11
17
J3512
PCB12
17
J3512
PCB12
18
J3513
PCB12
Parts Name
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
AC Driver PCB
Fixing Power
Supply PCB
Fixing Power
Supply PCB
Primary Charging
High Voltage PCB
Primary Charging
High Voltage PCB
Primary Charging
High Voltage PCB
Primary Charging
High Voltage PCB
Develop High
Voltage PCB
Develop High
Voltage PCB
Develop High
Voltage PCB
4-75
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
J1
J802
J681
J101
J102
J102
J2001
J2002
J3273
J220
J2
PCB25
PCB17,18
PCB33
PCB29
PCB30
PCB31
SW3
SW4
PCB27,28
PCB27,28
SW1
H2
PCB25
30
J9005
H3
31
J3510
PCB12
32
J3545
PCB26
33
J3214
High Voltage Connector
34
J3003
J3221
J3222
J3217
9020
9020
J3173
J3173
J3173
J3549
J9019
J3174
J3639
J3119
J3115
J3115
J9024
J3116
J3116
J3638
J9043
J4060
J4060
Parts Name
REMARKS
Choke Coil PCB

Noise Filter
Paper Deck Unit-A1
Paper Deck Unit-D1
DC Power Supply PCB
DC Power Supply PCB
DC Power Supply PCB
Environment Switch
READER LATTICE
Drum Heater Driver PCB
Power ON Switch
FINISHER LATTICE
Choke Coil PCB
Fixing Heater
T-4-38
4-75
4-76
17
15
18
37
21
36
40
14
19
16
35
41
23
20
24
26
39
22
38
25
28
11
32
12
33
30
13
6
7
10
31
29
34
27
4
5
1
F-4-39
4-76
4
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
1
1
1
1
2
J801
J801
J801
J801
J3547
PCB17,18
PCB17,18
PCB17,18
PCB17,18
PCB26
J3548
PCB26
J692
PCB33
J693
PCB33
6
7
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
15
16
17
18
19
20
20
21
22
23
24
J776
J1003
J1003
J1005
J1006
J1007
J1008
J1009
J4002
J1
J2
J2
J3
J4
J5
J7
J8
J8
J9
J10
J2
J3
UN111
UN111
UN111
UN111
UN111
UN111
UN111
UN111
UN112
UN117
UN117
UN117
UN117
UN117
UN117
UN117
UN117
UN117
UN117
UN117
UN120
UN120
Parts Name
Noise Filter
Noise Filter
Noise Filter
Noise Filter
Pre-transfer
Charging PCB
Pre-transfer
Charging PCB
All-night Power
Supply PCB
All-night Power
Supply PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
Sub Key PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
Inverter PCB
Inverter PCB
4-77
J3004
J3129
3225
J3225
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
25
J9001
CB1001
CB1002
CB1003
CB1004
UN75
Leakage Breaker
Leakage Breaker
Leakage Breaker
Leakage Breaker
Post Charging Trance
Parts Name
26
J3005
UN75
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
27
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
-
J504
J4001
J6001
J2002
J1
J3002
J3001
J5001
J504
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J1
J2
-
PCB5
UN112
UN114
UN109
UN110
UN110
UN113
PCB5
UN118
UN121
UN116
UN120
UN119
UN115
UN115
-
REMARKS
Relay PCB
Sub Key PCB
Inverter PCB
Transparent touch panel
Hub PCB
LCD
Ten Key PCB
Ten Key PCB
Volume PCB
Relay PCB
Sub Key PCB
TALLY PCB
Ten Key PCB
Inverter PCB
Volume PCB
Hub PCB
Hub PCB
T-4-39
4-77
2
3
5
6
7
8
11
12
14
4-78
55
20
16
10
15
13
42
41
34
27
19
25
33
26
21
46
43
40
22
44
58
48
54
39
47
35
29
30
51
49
31
32
28
52
45
24
50
57
38
36
37
53
56
59
F-4-40
4-78
Parts Name
4-79
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
J13
J6
J4
J15
J7
J3
J17
J11
J5
J8
J1025
J21
J20
PCB50
PCB50
PCB50
PCB50
PCB50
PCB50
PCB50
PCB50
PCB50
PCB50
PCB50
PCB50
PCB50

42
-
J2
-
FM4
PCB51
-
16
19
20
21
J1
J14
J2017
J12
PCB51
PCB51
PCB51
PCB51

43
44
J1
J1
PCB52
-
22
J2024
PCB51
44
J1
24
J6
46
J2
25
26
26
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
J19
J20
J20
J20
J2083
J4
J5
J6
J7
J3
J1
J3
J4
J2
J1
J7
J1
J2
PCB51
PCB51
PCB51
PCB51
PCB51
-
HDD Mirroring Kit-G1 or

HDD Data Encryption & MirroringKit-C5
Modular PCB (1 line)
Modular PCB (2 to 4 lines)
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
58
59
59
J403
J5
J2
J2
J1
J3
J1
J8
J751
J4
J1
J4
J4
J803
J803
PCB17,18
PCB17,18
J3141 J3140
J3012
J3012
KeyNo. J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
REMARKS

USB Device Port-A2
Control panel
LAN
USB(D)
Flash PCB
USB(H)
TPM PCB
Not used
Copy Control Interface Kit-A1
Card reader or Serial interface kit or Coin
manager
Channel Link PCB
Memory PCB
Image Data Analyzer Board-B1
LED PCB
Pseudo CI PCB/Off-hook Power Supply PCB
Speaker
Noise Filter
Noise Filter
T-4-40
4-79
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Main Controller > Removing Main Controller PCB 1
Main Controller
4-80
<Procedure>
1) Route the removed cable to the open space and remove the Main Controller PCB 1.
Edge Saddle
Removing Main Controller PCB 1
USB Cable
<Preparation>
1. Remove the Box Cover (Right).
1-1)
Control Panel
Connector
Push [A] part to open the HDD Cover.
x2
Handle
F-4-43
CAUTION:
[A]
Points to Note when Inserting the Main Controller PCB 1

Be sure to push the handle in horizontally.
F-4-41
1-2)
Remove the Main Controller Right Cover Unit.
If pushing any part other than the handle, the Main Controller PCB 1 may not be
inserted horizontally. In such case, note that connector connection error (or damage of
connector) or deformation of plate may occur.
1 Screw
[1]
[A]
F-4-42
F-4-44
4-80
3) Remove the Flash PCB and the TPM PCB.
<Actions after Parts Replacement>
2 Screws
1. Install the following parts removed from the old PCB to the new PCB.
4-81
Flash PCB
TPM PCB
NOTE:
It is not necessary to reconfigure/register the data after replacing the Main Controller
PCB 1.
Flash PCB
TPM PCB
F-4-45
4-81
Removing Main Controller PCB 2

<Processing before replacing the parts>
Be sure to gain agreement from the user in advance to execute the following work.
4-82
<Processing when replacing the parts>

1) Replace the part from the old PCB to the new PCB.
DDR2-SDRAM (when the option DDR2-SDRAM is installed)
Memory PCB
1) Backup the Settings/Registration data

Data in SRAM on the Main Controller PCB 2 can be backed up to a USB memory device or
an HDD from download mode.
* However, if the HDD Encryption Board is installed, backup to an HDD is not possible. It is
therefore recommended to perform backup to an USB memory device.
DDR2-SDRAM
Operation method:
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD
then,
Download Menu > Backup > SRAM(HDD/USB)
Note:
Download Menu is not intended for the "Settings/Registration > Paper Type Management
Settings".
Memory PCB
You need back up from:

Remote UI
Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Export
F-4-46
Memory PCB
4-82
<Preparation>
<Procedure>
1. Remove the Box Cover (Right). (Refer to "Removing Main Controller PCB 1")
12)
2. Remove the Main Controller PCB 1. (Refer to page 4-80)
7 Connectors
3. Remove the Box Cover (Left).
6 Screws
4-83
Remove the Main Controller PCB 2.
1 Claw
1 Protrusion
x7
Claw
Protrusion
F-4-47
4. Remove the Rear Cover.
F-4-49
x6
x7
F-4-48
F-4-50
4-83
4-84
<Actions after Parts Replacement>

1. Specify and register the data again of the Main Controller PCB 2.
1) While pressing 2 + 8 keys at the same time, turn ON the Main Power Switch.
2) The restore of backup data:
When Download Menu is displayed, connect USB memory to the main body.
Download Menu 2 > Restore
3) Specify and register the data again.
Import from:
Remote UI
Settings/Registration > Management Settings > Data Management > Import
4) When an encryption key/certificate/CA certificate has been generated or added by the user,
ask the user to execute reinstallation.
4-84
4-85
4-85
4-86
4-86
4-87
4-87
4-88
4-88
4-89
4-89
4-90
4-90
4-91
4-91
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Laser Exposure System > Removing the Laser Scanner Unit
Laser Exposure System
4-92
2. Removing the Right Cover.

NOTE:
Laser Scanner Unit can be removed without removing the Right Cover.
Howerver, removing the Right Cover is recommended here for better operability.
Removing the Laser Scanner Unit

<Preparation>
1. Removing the Right Upper Cover.
1-1)
Open the Toner Exchange Cover.
1-2)
Open the Right Cover.
1-3)
Open the Right Rear Cover1
1-4)
Remove the Right Upper Cover.
2-1)
Remove the Right Rear Cover2.
2 Screws
x2
2 Screws
1 Boss
3 Protrusions
x2
F-4-52
2-2)
Disconnect the Connector and remove the Grounding Wire and the Reuse Band.
1 Screw
F-4-51
F-4-53
2-3)
Open the Right Cover.
4-92
4
2-4)
Remove the E-ring to remove the Door Link.
4-93
CAUTION:
To prevent falling of Right Cover, hold the Right Cover to remove the Hinge Pins.
<Procedure>
1) Lift the Plate to remove.
2 Screws
x2
F-4-54
2-5)
Remove the 2 Hinge Pins to remove the Right Cover.
F-4-56
2) Remove the 2 Retainer Fixtures.

2 Screws
x2
F-4-57
F-4-55
4-93
3) Free the Harness from the Harness Guide and Disconnect the Connector.
4-94
5) Hook the wire of the Laser Scanner Unit to the hook of the main body.
F-4-60
F-4-58
4) Pull out the Laser Scanner Unit halfway.
CAUTION:
2 Bosses
Do not use the wire when the Right Cover is not removed.
6) Free the Harness from the Harness Guide and Disconnect the Connector.
F-4-59
F-4-61
4-94
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Laser Exposure System > Cleaning the Dust Collecting Glass
4-95
Cleaning the Dust Collecting Glass
7) Remove the Laser Scanner Unit.

CAUTION:
<Preparation>
Before removing the Laser Scanner Unit, check that the hooking wire of the unit is not
hooked to the frame of the main body.
1) Open the Front Cover.

2) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (Refer to page 4-96)
<Procedure>
Removing the Dustproof Glass
1) Pull out the Dustproof Glass and clean it with lint-free paper.
F-4-62
CAUTION:
When installing the Laser Scanner Unit, be sure to check that the bosses are fitted into
the holes.
F-4-64
F-4-63
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Laser Exposure System > Cleaning the Dust Collecting Glass
4-95
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Assembly
4-96
1) While pushing the Release Lever in the direction of the arrow, pull out the Primary Charging
Assembly.
Removing the Primary Charging Assembly
CAUTION:
When removing the Primary Charging Assembly, be careful not to hold the PCB of the
Primary Charging Assembly.
<Preparation>
1. Open the Inner Cover.
1-1)
Open the Front Cover.
1-2)
Open the Inner Cover.
1 Screw (to loosen)

Loosen
PCB
PCB
F-4-66
F-4-65
<Procedure>
CAUTION:
When removing the Primary Charging Assembly and the Pre-transfer Charging
Assembly, go through the following procedure while the Charging Shutter is open.
At sleep mode, press the Power Switch on the Control Panel, check that the machine
is in standby condition, turn OFF the Main Power, and then perform removing.
In the case that the condition of the Charging Shutter (open/close) is unknown while
the power of the host machine is OFF, turn ON the power, check that the machine is
in standby condition, turn OFF the Main Power, and then perform removing.
F-4-67
If the above operations are not performed, it may be possible to remove the assembly
while the Charging Shutter is closed, which may damage the drum or the shutter.
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Assembly
4-96
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder (Right/Left)
<Processing after replacing the parts>

1) Clear the parts counter for the Primary Charging Assembly.
2) Output halftone image in service mode.
TEST > PG > TYPE: 5 halftone test print
3) Output HT to check density difference between the front and the rear. (Refer to page 5-7)
4) In the case of density difference: Execute adjustment with the Wire Height Adjustment
Spring.
5) Execute cleaning of the Charging Wire. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>WIRE-CLN)
4-97
Removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner

Holder (Right/Left)
<Preparation>
NOTE:
Replacement procedure is the same between the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner/
Cleaner Holder (Left) and the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner/Cleaner Holder (Right).
The following explains the procedure of the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner (Right) and
Cleaner Holder (Right).
1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly")
2. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly. (Refer to page 4-96)
4-97
<Procedure>
4-98
1) Remove the Shield Plate (Right). When removing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner
Holder (Left), remove the Shield Plate (Left).
CAUTION:
2 Screws
Do not move the Charging Wire Shutter; otherwise, the shutter can be damaged when
installing the Charging Assembly. When the Charging Wire Shutter is moved by chance,
be sure to move the Shutter until it is invisible.
x2
Charging Wire Shutter
F-4-69
2) Loosen the screw to move the Primary Charging Assembly Cleaner to the center.
Primary Charging Wire Cleaner
Loosen
F-4-68
F-4-70
CAUTION:
Do not remove both Shield Plates (Right and Left) of the Primary Charging Assembly at
the same time. Be sure to work on one Shield Plate at a time (otherwise, the Frame of
the Primary Charging Assembly can be deformed).
4-98
CAUTION:Points to Caution when Installing the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Holder
Be sure to push in the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Holder until it is secured with the
Claw.
4-99
4) Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner (Right) in the direction of the arrow.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the Primary Charging Wire and the Grid Wire when removing
the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner (Right).
F-4-71
3) Bring up the Primary Charging Assembly and pinch the Hook to remove the Primary
Charging Assembly Cleaner Holder (Right) in the direction of the arrow.
F-4-73
CAUTION:Points to Caution at Installation

Be sure to push the Charging Wire against the 2 pads of the Primary Charging Wire
Cleaner to install.
Charging Wire
Pad
F-4-72
Primary
Charging
Wire Cleaner
F-4-74
4-99
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire
Replacing the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire
4-100
3) Loosen the 4 screws fixing the Motor Unit in the front.

Screws
<Preparation>
1. Open the Front Cover.
4.Removing the Primary Charging Shutter Unit (Refer to page 4-147)
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire
1 Screw
Screw
F-4-77
4) Loosen the screw and turn over the Primary Charging Assembly.
5) Push the front Motor Unit in the direction of the arrow and tighten the 4 screws.
turn over
Screws
Grid Wire
F-4-75
2) Shift the Primary Charging Wire Cleaners (Left and Right).

2 Screws (to loosen)
Primary Charging
Wire Cleaners (Left )
Primary Charging
Wire Cleaners (Right)
Screw
Push
Motor Unit
Screws
Motor Unit
F-4-78
F-4-76
4-100
6) Untie approx. 5cm of the Charging Wire from the 0.1mm (wire-diameter) Charging Wire
Reel to make a 2mm-diameter ring at the edge.
4-101
9) After setting the wire 35 times around, pass through B part. After turning over the Primary
Charging Assembly, pass the wire between the washer and the Motor Unit, wrap around
the screw clockwise to make a full round and secure with the screw.
NOTE:
The ring can be easily made by the following procedure: Wrap the Charging Wire
around the Hex Key to make a full round, and then turn the Hex Key for 3 to 4 times to
twist the Charging Wire.
Stud A
7) Cut the twisted Charging Wire (extra length) with nippers.

8) Hook the ring to the Stud A as shown in the figure.
B part
Screw
turning over
B part
F-4-79
4-101
10) Cut the extra length of the Charging Wire with nippers.
4-102
13) Remove the Shield Plate (Left) and pinch the Grid Wire from the left side to clean it on the
11) Loosen the 4 screws and tighten the screw until the tension of the Grid Wire is uniformed.
left side with lint-free paper moistened with water.
Be careful not to deform (bend) the Charging Assembly.

CAUTION:
turning over
Screws
The frame of the Primary Charging Assembly may be distorted, so be careful not to
remove both Left and Right Shield Plates simultaneously.
Screw
Motor Unit
F-4-80
12) Tighten the loosened 4 screws.

Screws
F-4-82
14) Shift the Primary Charging Wire Cleaners (Left and Right).
15) Tighten the 2 screws.
Primary Charging
Primary Charging
F-4-81
Be sure to check the following items.
Screws
No bend or twist is found with the Grid Wire.

The wire is set evenly spaced apart. (The Grid Wire is fitted into the groove of the
Block.)
F-4-83
4-102
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Primary Charging Wire
4-103
Replacing the Primary Charging Wire
CAUTION:
Be sure to move the Primary Charging Wire Cleaners (Left and Right) until they stop
and tighten the screws.
Screws
NOTE:
Replacement procedure is the same between the Primary Charging Wire (Left) and the
Primary Charging Wire (Right).
The following explains the procedure of the Primary Charging Wire (Right).
NOTE:
The Primary Charging Wire with spring is set as a service part.
CAUTION:
Primary Charging
In the case of replacing the Charging Wire on a Charging Wire basis, be sure to use
the dedicated Charging Wire Tension Spring (97-5527) [A]. Do not use the Spring [B]
attached to the Charging Wire.
Primary Charging
F-4-84
16) Install the Primary Charging Shutter Unit.(Refer to page 4-147)
Spring [B]
Spring [A]
F-4-85
<Preparation>
4. Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Holder (Right). (Refer to "Removing the
Primary Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder (Right/Left)")
5. Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner (Right). (Refer to page 4-97)
4-103
<Procedure>
4-104
3) Remove the Charging Wire from the protrusion and the groove of the Positioning Block at
<Removing the Charging Wire>
the front side.
1) Remove the Sheet.

Protrusion
Groove
Charging
Wire
F-4-88
F-4-86
2) Use tweezers to hold the tip of the Spring at the rear side to remove the Spring from the
charging electrode and remove the Charging Wire from the groove of the Positioning Block.
<Installing the Charging Wire>

NOTE:
When installing the Charging Wire set as a service part, steps 4, 5, 7, and 8 are not
required.
Groove
Charging
Electrode
NOTE:
The ring can be easily made by the following procedure: Wrap the Charging Wire
around the Hex Key to make a full round, and then turn it for 3 to 4 times to twist the
Charging Wire.
F-4-87
4-104
5) Cut the edge of the twisted Charging Wire with nippers.
4-105
9) Hook the Charging Wire to the rear groove of the Charging Wire Positioning Block and
6) Hook the ring to the front protrusion of the Positioning Block to hook the Charging Wire to
the groove.
hold the edge of the Charging Wire Tension Spring with tweezers to hook it to the charging
electrode.
Groove
Protrusion
Groove
Charging Electrode
Charging
Wire
F-4-91
F-4-89
7) Hook the Charging Wire Tension Spring to the Charging Wire to twist with it.
CAUTION:
Be sure to keep the following in mind after installation.
No bend or twist is found with the Charging Wire.
The Charging Wire is fitted into the groove of the Charging Wire Positioning Block.
10) Clean the Charging Wire with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
11) Install the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner (Right).
12) Install the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Holder (Right).
13) Install the Shield Plate (Right).
F-4-90
8) Cut extra length of the Charging Wire with nippers.

4-105
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire
Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire

<Preparation>
4-106
3) Remove the Shield Plate (Left) and pinch the Grid Wire from the left side to clean it on the
left side with lint-free paper moistened with water.
1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to Removing the Primary Charging Assembly)
CAUTION:
The frame of the Primary Charging Assembly may be distorted, so be careful not to
remove both Left and Right Shield Plates simultaneously.
3. Remove the Primary Charging Wire Cleaner Holder. (Refer to Removing the Primary
Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder (Right/Left))
4. Remove the Primary Charging Wire. (Refer to page 4-97)
NOTE:
With this machine, discharge products tend to be accumulated inside the Charging
Assembly. To remove the discharge products efficiently, clean with lint-free paper
moistened with water. (If there is toner stain, clean with lint-free paper moistened with
alcohol.)
<Procedure>
1) Clean the inside of Shield Plate (Right) and Inner Shield Plate (Left) removed from the
Primary Charging Assembly with lint-free paper moistened with water.
2) Clean both sides of the Inner Shield Plate (Middle) of the Primary Charging Assembly with
lint-free paper moistened with water.
F-4-93
4) Remove the Shield Plate (Right) and pinch the Grid Wire to clean it on the right side with
lint-free paper moistened with water.
F-4-92
F-4-94
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly Grid Wire
4-106
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly

<Preparation>
4-107
1) Turn the Lock Lever in the direction of the arrow to pull out the Pre-transfer Charging
Assembly.
CAUTION:
<Procedure>
When removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly, be careful not to hold the PCB of
the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly.
CAUTION:
PCB
PCB
F-4-95
F-4-96
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
4-107
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder

Be sure to fit the Transfer Charging Assembly to the groove on the host machine and
install it horizontally.
4-108
Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner,

Cleaner Holder
<Preparation>
2. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. (Refer to page 4-107)
<Procedure>
1) Displace the Shield Plate Retainer Block to open the Shield Plate in the direction of the
arrow.
1 Screw (to loosen)
Loosen
F-4-97

2) Clean the Charging Wire. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>WIRE-EX)
F-4-98
4-108
4-109
2) Turn the Gear by hand to move the Cleaning Pad Arm to the front.
CAUTION:Points to Caution when Securing the Shield Plate

Move the Shield Plate Retainer Block fully to the inside to secure with the screw.
Check that the rear Pin is fitted into the Frame hole, and then move the Shield Plate
back and forth to check that the Shield Plate is secured.
F-4-100
CAUTION:Points to Caution when Installing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner

Holder
Push in the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner Holder until it is secured with the Claw.
F-4-99
F-4-101
4-109
3) Pinch the Hook and turn it in the direction of the arrow to remove the Pre-transfer Charging
Assembly Cleaner Holder.
4-110

Be sure to push the Charging Wire against the 2 pads of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire
Cleaner to install.
Charging Wire
F-4-102
4) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner in the direction of the arrow.
Pad
Primary
Charging
Wire Cleaner
F-4-104
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the Pre-transfer Charging Wire when removing the Pretransfer Charging Wire Cleaner.
F-4-103
4-110
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire
Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire
4-111
1) Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Covers (Front and Rear).
NOTE:
The Primary Charging Wire with spring is set as a service part.
<Preparation>
4. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner Holder. (Refer to "Removing the Pretransfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder")
5. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner. (Refer to page 4-108)
<Procedure>
F-4-106
2) Use tweezers to remove the front Spring from the Hook and then remove the Charging
Wire from the rear charging electrode.
CAUTION:
In the case of replacing the Charging Wire on a Charging Wire basis, be sure to use
the dedicated Charging Wire Tension Spring (97-5527) [A]. Do not use the Spring [B]
attached to the Charging Wire.
Spring [B]
Spring [A]
F-4-105
F-4-107
4) Cut the edge of the twisted Charging Wire with nippers.
4-111
5) Hook the ring to the rear charging electrode of the Pre-charging Assembly and put the ring
through the rear groove and the sponge groove.
Charging Wire
4-112
8) Hold the tip of the Spring with tweezers and hook the Charging Wire to the groove to hook
the Spring to the Hook.
Groove
Charging
Electrode
Hook
F-4-108
6) On the front side of the Pre-charging Assembly, hook the Charging Wire Tension Spring to
the Charging Wire to twist with it.
F-4-110
9) Clean the Charging Wire with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
10) Install the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Covers (Front and Rear).
11) Install the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Cleaner and the Pre-transfer Charging
Assembly Cleaner Holder.
2) Clean the Charging Wire. (COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING>WIRE-EX)
F-4-109
7) Cut extra length of the Charging Wire with nippers.
4-112
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Process Unit
Cleaning the Pre-transfer Charging Wire
4-113
Removing the Process Unit
<Preparation>
<Preparation>
4. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner Holder. (Refer to Removing the Pretransfer Charging Wire Cleaner, Cleaner Holder)
<Procedure>
5. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaner. (Refer to page 4-108)

CAUTION:
6. Remove the Pre-transfer Charging Wire. (Refer to page 4-111)
Do not touch the surface of the Photosensitive Drum.

<Procedure>
1) Clean the Shield Plate with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
1) Remove the Drum Fixation Cylinder to remove the Process Unit.
2 Screws
1 Screw (for installing the Drum Fixation Cylinder)
NOTE:
When removing the Process Unit, hold both the upper and front Handles to pull out the
Process Unit.
Screw (RS Tightening)
x3
F-4-111
Screw (for installing

the Drum Fixation Cylinder)
F-4-112
4-113
When installing the Process Unit, fit the 3 grooves at the edge of the Drum Shaft with
the 3 protrusions of the Drum Fixation Cylinder to install the Drum Shaft Fixing Screw.
Be sure to fit the Drum Cleaning Unit to the rail on the host machine and install it
horizontally.
4-114
Groove
Protrusion
Groove
Protrusion
F-4-113
F-4-114
4-114
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Process Unit
Cleaning the Process Unit
4-115
2) Clean the rear side of the Process Unit with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
<Preparation>
4. Remove the Process Unit. (Refer to page 4-113)
5. Remove the Drum Cleaning Unit. (Refer to Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade)
6. Remove the Drum Unit. (Refer to page 4-121)
<Procedure>
1) Clean the Separation Claw Mounting Base and Separation Claw with lint-free paper
moistened with alcohol.
F-4-116
F-4-115
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Process Unit
4-115
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Cleaning Unit
Removing the Drum Cleaning Unit
4-116
CAUTION:
<Preparation>
When installing the Drum Cleaning Unit, clean the area shown with lint-free paper
If the Drum Cleaning Unit is installed without removing toner, it cannot be installed in
the correct position, causing the cleaning error.

<Procedure>
CAUTION:
After removing the Drum Cleaning Unit, place paper over the Photosensitive Drum to
block light.
1) Remove the Drum Cleaning Unit.
F-4-118
Edge Saddle
1 Connector
4 Screws
x4
F-4-117
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Cleaning Unit
4-116
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade
Removing the Drum Cleaning Blade
<Preparation>
Procedure differs according to the temperature inside the machine. Be sure to perform the
work by following the flow indicated below.
Turn ON the power
5. Remove the Drum Cleaning Unit. (Refer to page 4-117)

<Procedure>
Check the temperature inside the machine in service mode

(COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> TEMP)
1) Turn over the Drum Cleaning Unit to remove the Drum Cleaning Blade Unit.
1 E-ring
10 deg C or higher
Lower than 10 deg C
4-117
1 Plate
Turn ON the Environment Heater Switch
Check that the machine has been started up,

and then turn OFF the power
Plate
Replace the Drum Cleaning Blade with the following procedure

Drum Cleaning
Blade Unit
Install the Process Unit

CAUTION: Be sure not to close the Front Cover
F-4-120
Waiting for 15 minutes or more while the power

is OFF, and then close the Front Cover
Turn ON the power

F-4-119
4-117
2) Remove the Drum Cleaning Blade.
4-118
CAUTION:Points to Caution when Installing the Drum Cleaning Blade Unit
1. Wipe out the toner on both edges of the Drum Cleaning Unit before installation.
2. Be sure to fit in the center position, and then temporarily tighten the screws following
the numeric order (from 1 to 4) and also securely tighten the screws (from 5 to 9).
Loosen
x5
F-4-121
CAUTION:Points to Caution when Installing the Drum Cleaning Blade

Be sure to apply toner on the contact area (edge) on the Drum of the Drum Cleaning
Blade. In particular, be sure to apply toner on both edges of the Blade.
F-4-122
4-118
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Unit
Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Unit
4-119
2) Clean the 2 Pre-exposure Plastic Films of the Drum Cleaning Blade Unit with lint-free
paper.
<Preparation>
<Procedure>
CAUTION:
1) Clean the Drum Cleaning Unit Plate with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
F-4-123
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Drum Cleaning Unit
F-4-124
4-119
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Pre-exposure Plastic Film
4-120
Replacing the Pre-exposure Plastic Film
3) Crumb toner clusters in the toner collection area and then clean it.
<Preparation>
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Pre-exposure Plastic Film.
2) Fit the Pre-exposure Plastic Film to the edge and lower grooves of the Drum Cleaning Unit.
F-4-125
F-4-126
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Replacing the Pre-exposure Plastic Film
4-120
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Unit
Removing the Drum Unit

<Preparation>
4-121
1) Remove the Drum Retainer Plate (tentative name).

3 Screws
x3

5. Put paper on the Photosensitive Drum, so that it is not exposed to direct sunlight.
6. Remove the Drum Cleaning Blade. (Refer to page 4-117)
<Procedure>
CAUTION:
When handling the Process Unit and Photosensitive Drum, be sure to follow the
following points to note.
1. When removing the Process Unit, be sure to block light to the Photosensitive Drum.
Cover with the Photosensitive Drum Protection Sheet or wrap 5 or more papers
around the drum to block light.
F-4-127
2) Push to move the rear side of the Photosensitive Drum with your fingers and pull out the
Drum Unit to the front to remove.
2. Do not place the Process Unit and Photosensitive Drum in a location where is
exposed to direct rays of the sun (e.g. near the window).
3. Do not store in a location with high/low temperature/humidity, or in a location where
temperature or humidity is dramatically changed.
4. Do not store in a dusty area or in a location full of ammonia gas or organic solvent
gas.
When installing a new Photosensitive Drum, be sure to remove the Lightproof Sheet
after installing the drum to the main body. In addition, be sure to rotate the drum
counterclockwise at removal of the Lightproof Sheet. If the drum is rotated clockwise,
the Drum Cleaner Blade may be everted.
F-4-128
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Unit
4-121
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Photosensitive Drum
Removing the Photosensitive Drum
4-122
1) Wrap paper around the Drum Unit to block light.
<Preparation>
7. Remove the Drum Retainer Plate.
<Procedure>
F-4-129
CAUTION:
2) Remove the 2 screws and the Flange.
x2
gas.
the Drum Cleaning Blade may be everted.
F-4-130
4-122
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the Drum Heater.
4-123
4) Remove the Heater Control PCB Unit.
Drum Heater
F-4-132
F-4-131
NOTE:
Serial ID of the drum is written on the seal inside the drum.
F-4-133
4-123
CAUTION:
Align the yellow marker of the drum with the hole position of the unit when installing
the Heater Control PCB Unit to the drum.
4-124
NOTE:
If the yellow marker is not aligned with the protrusion, the following control cannot be
executed properly.
1. 2D shading
2. D-MAX control
3. D-half control
<Processing when reaplacing the parts>

1)Remove the EEPROM.
1 Screw
1 Connector
F-4-134
When securing the Flange, align the protrusion of the Flange with the yellow marker
to install.
F-4-136
3) Replace with the ROM packaged with the Drum.

CAUTION:
If the ROM is not replaced, the replaced drum and the drum-unique data stored in
the ROM are not matched. As a result, the 2D shading is not functioned normally.
F-4-135
4-124
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning Photosensitive Drum
4-125
Cleaning Photosensitive Drum
1) Moisten lint-free paper with 5 to 10 cc of alcohol solutions ; then, pour 0.2 to 0.3 g of the
drum cleaning powder (FY9-6024) on the lint-free paper.
2) While butting the lint-free paper relatively strongly against the photosensitive drum, wipe
the surface of the drum from the front to the rear and from the rear to the front.
Drum Cleaning Powder
FY9-6024
Alcohol Solutions
F-4-137

Lint-Free Paper
F-4-138
CAUTION:
Keep the widths of cleaning to 5 to 10 cm in the peripheral direction of the drum.
Move the lint-free paper back and forth 15 to 20 times over a single area. Forcing
the lint-free paper will not affect the life of the drum.
3) After the alcohol has evaporated, dry wipe the surface with the lint-free paper. If the area is
uneven, go back to the step 1, and increase the back-and-forth movements.
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning Photosensitive Drum
4-125
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Drum edges
4) Rotate the drum for the width (5 to 10 cm), and repeat the step 1 through 3 until the entire
area of the surface has been cleaned.
4-126
Cleaning the Drum edges

<Preparation>
<Procedure>
1) Rotate the Drum and dry wipe the soiling on the surface of the Drum edges with lint-free
paper.
F-4-139
F-4-140
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Drum edges
4-126
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Side Seal
Removing the Cleaner Separation Claw
4-127
Removing the Side Seal
<Preparation>
<Preparation>
<Procedure>
<Procedure>
1) Put the Process Unit Frame perpendiculararly.
1) Remove the Side Seals (Front and Rear).
2) Remove the 3 Cleaner Separation Claws.

1 Spring each
Cleaner Separation
Claws
F-4-142
Spring
F-4-141
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Side Seal
4-127
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Assembly
2) Apply Tospearl on the surfaces of the new Drum Side Seals (Front and Rear) and adhere it
uniformly with lint-free paper.
4-128
Removing the Developing Assembly

1) Place paper underneath the Developing Assembly.
NOTE:
In order to reduce adhesion of toner at both ends of the Photosensitive Drum
2) Open the Right Cover.

3) Turn the Tab to open the Plate Cover.
1 Screw
Tospearl
lint-free paper
Sheet
F-4-143
3) Align the Drum Side Seals (Front and Rear) with the edges of the sheets and affix them.
1 Connector
Seal
Seal
F-4-145
4) Remove the Developing Assembly by following the Rail.
Edge
Edge
F-4-144
F-4-146
4-128
4-129
CAUTION:How to Hold the Developing Assembly
CAUTION:Points to Caution when Installing the Developing Assembly
When holding the Developing Assembly, be sure to hold the handle of the Developing
Assembly as shown in the figure.
Before installing the Developing Assembly, check that the Buffer Shutter is not open.
Do not touch the shutter area of the Developing Assembly. The shutter area is slippery,
so it may cause a fall of the assembly.
If the Developing Assembly is forcibly installed while the Buffer Shutter is open, the
shutter may get damage. When the Buffer Shutter is open, pull out the shutter to the
front and then close it.
F-4-147
F-4-148
Whether the shutter is open or not can be checked with the Shutter Arm.
<Buffer Shutter is closed>
Shutter Arm
<Buffer Shutter is open>
Shutter Arm
F-4-149
4-129
As shown in the figure, hold the Developing Assembly and fit the protrusions at right
and left sides of the Developing Assembly to the rail of the host machine.
Protrusion
4-130
Install the Developing Assembly horizontally by following the rail.
rail
Protrusion
F-4-151
rail

2) Supplying Developing Assembly toner (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>TONER-S)
Protrusion
F-4-150
4-130
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Developing Assembly
Cleaning the Developing Assembly
4-131
3) Remove toner in the main body.
<Preparation>
1. Remove the Developing Assembly. (Refer to page 4-128)
<Procedure>
1) Clean the 2 Developing Rollers with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating
them.
F-4-154
F-4-152
2) Clean the lower side of Cylinder in the Developing Assembly with lint-free paper moistened
with alcohol.
F-4-153
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the Developing Assembly
4-131
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Developing Roller
Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Developing

Roller
2-3)
4-132
Remove the Developing Assembly Front Cover.
3 Screws
<Preparation>
x3
2. Remove the Developing Cylinder Blade.

NOTE:
When the Developing Assembly is put on the floor or the desk, be sure to place paper
underneath to work on the Developing Assembly.
2-1)
Remove the Developing Assembly Cover.
4 Screws
5 Claws
2 Protrusions
F-4-156
CAUTION:
x4
Be sure to hold the Developing Assembly Front Cover to remove the screw.
Otherwise, the Developing Assembly Front Cover may fall, which can cause damage
on the Developing Cylinder.
x5
2-4)
Remove the Sleeve Bias Plate.
1 Screw
F-4-155
2-2)
Empty the toner in the Developing Assembly on the paper.
F-4-157
4-132
Points to Caution at Installation:
Since white lines may occur on the image, go through the following steps to match the
phase of the Sleeve Bias Plate and Developing Cylinder Blade.
Check that the long hole of the Sleeve Bias Plate is fitted with the hole of
the Developing Cylinder Blade. If it is not fitted, rotate the Sleeve Bias Plate
counterclockwise to match the phase.
Fit the Sleeve Bias Plate with the shaft of the Developing Cylinder to install.
4-133
Be careful not to rotate the Sleeve Bias Plate clockwise since this direction is to be a
reverse direction of the proper Developing Cylinder rotation.
F-4-158
F-4-159
4-133
4-134

Find the position in which either scale of Sleeve Bias Plate is most matched with one
of the Developing Cylinder Blade scales.
(If the Developing Cylinder Blade is not marked with scales, put a mark on the
Developing Cylinder Blade at a point that matches one of the scales on the Sleeve
Bias Plate and use the point as a reference point.)
See the Sleeve Bias Plate from the front side, and from the most matched position
(scales), rotate the plate clockwise by 3 scales of the Developing Cylinder Blade.
With the position where the plate was rotated by 3 scales, hold the Sleeve Bias Plate
and secure with the removed screw.
This is a reverse direction of the proper Developing Cylinder rotation, but this would be
no problem in this procedure.
F-4-160
4-134
4
2-5)
Lift the left side to remove the Developing Cylinder Blade in the direction of the arrow.
4-135
Developing O Ring
Roller
2 Bosses
Spacer
C Ring
x2
Parallel Pin
Gear
Spacer
O Ring
(Black)
Grip Ring
F-4-162
F-4-161
2) Remove the C Ring, the Spacer, the Developing Roller and the O Ring.
CAUTION:
Developing
Roller
Do not disassemble the Developing Cylinder Blade. Otherwise, cleaning of the

Developing Cylinder is not properly executed when removing just the Blade (as a
single part).
Spacer
O Ring
<Procedure>
C Ring
1) Remove the Grip Ring, the Gear, the Parallel Pin, the C Ring, the Spacer, the Developing
Roller and the O Ring in the rear.
O Ring
(Black)
CAUTION: Point to Caution at Installation
Spacer
Be sure to install the C Ring and the Spacer correctly.

Be sure to use a dedicated tool when installing/removing the Grip Ring and C Ring.
F-4-163
CAUTION:
The C Rings and the O Rings removed in step 2 and 3 cannot be reused. Be sure to
use the C Rings and the O Rings included in the package.
Be sure to use a dedicated tool when installing/removing the Grip Ring and C Ring.
4-135
4-136
3) Remove the Bearing to remove the Developing Cylinder.
CAUTION: How to Install the C Ring

When installing the C Rings removed in step 2 and 3, be sure to perform the following
to fit the C Rings into the groove of the Developing Cylinder securely.
1. Fit the C Ring into the groove of the Developing Cylinder Shaft using a dedicated
tool.
2. Locate the side of the Gear where the Parallel Pin removed in step 2 was set inside,
and install the Gear to the Developing Cylinder Shaft temporarily.
Bearing
Bearing
F-4-166

2) Supplying Developing Assembly toner (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>TONER-S)
F-4-164
3. Insert the Gear while pushing it against the C Ring, and check that click sound
which occurs when the C Ring fits into the groove of the Developing Cylinder Shaft
is heard.
4. Pull out the Gear from the Developing Cylinder Shaft, and check visually that the C
Ring is fitted into the groove of the shaft.
F-4-165
4-136
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Unit
Removing the ETB Unit
1-3)
4-137
Push to release the Release Springs at both sides of the Rail, and then further pull
out the Fixing Feed Unit until it stops.
<Preparation>
1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.
1-1)
1-2)
Turn the Fixing Feed Unit Pressure Release Lever in the direction of the arrow to pull
out the Fixing Feed Unit.
F-4-167
F-4-168
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the ETB when handling the ETB Unit.
4-137
<Procedure>
4-138
2) Hold the 2 Handles to remove the ETB Unit in the direction of the arrow.
1) Remove the Fixing Feed Right Front Upper Cover.

1 Screw
F-4-169
F-4-170

4-138
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB
Removing the ETB
4-139
2) Set up the ETB Unit to remove the Roller Unit from the ETB.
<Preparation>
1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the ETB Unit")
2. Remove the ETB Unit. (Refer to page 4-137)
CAUTION:
<Procedure>
1) Fold the ETB Drive Roller Unit.
2 Screws
F-4-172
CAUTION:
x2
Be sure to hold within 10mm from both edges of the ETB when handling the ETB.
Do not touch the surface of the ETB Drive Roller and the Transfer Roller; otherwise,
it can cause image faults.
F-4-171
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB
4-139
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the ETB
4-140
Cleaning the ETB

<Preparation>
1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to Removing the ETB)
CAUTION:Points to Caution when Installing the ETB
Set the ETB to make the ETB located inside the Guides at both edges.
3. Remove the Roller Unit from the ETB Unit.

<Procedure>
1) Clean the Transfer Roller and Drive Roller with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the ETB Drive Roller and the Transfer Roller; otherwise, it
can cause image faults.
F-4-173
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Cleaning the ETB
F-4-174
4-140
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Transfer Roller
Removing the Transfer Roller
4-141
2) Remove the Transfer Roller Shaft Support from the Transfer Roller.
<Preparation>
3. Remove the ETB. (Refer to page 4-139)
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of the ETB Drive Roller and the Transfer Roller; otherwise, it
can cause image faults.
<Procedure>
1) Turn over the Roller Unit to remove the Claw of the Transfer Roller Shaft Support with
needlenose pliers.
F-4-176
NOTE:
When installing the Transfer Roller Shaft Support to the Roller Unit, be sure to check
that the bosses of the Transfer Roller Shaft Support are fitted into the Springs.
x2
F-4-175
F-4-177
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Transfer Roller
4-141
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Brush Roller
Removing the ETB Cleaning Blade
4-142
Removing the ETB Brush Roller
<Preparation>
<Preparation>
<Procedure>
<Procedure>
1) Remove the ETB Cleaning Blade.
1) Remove the Post-transfer Guide.
4 Screws
1 Screw
x4
F-4-178
F-4-179
4-142
4-143
2) Remove the Connection Gear and the N-ring from the ETB Brush Roller.
CAUTION:
Be sure to keep in contact with the Grounding Plate when installing the Post-transfer
Guide.
Do not deform the Grounding Plate when installing the Post-transfer Guide.
F-4-181
3) Remove the ETB Brush Roller Unit.

2 Screws
x2
F-4-182
F-4-180
4-143
4-144
4) Remove the Shaft Support from the ETB Brush Roller.

1 N-ring
Shaft Support
ETB Brush Roller
Shaft Support
F-4-183
4-144
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Container
Removing the Waste Toner Container

1) Remove the Right Rear Lower Cover.
4-145

1) Set a new Waste Toner Container.
2) Clear the waste toner counter.(COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>WST-TNR)
1 Screw
F-4-184
2) Remove the Waste Toner Container.
F-4-185
NOTE:
In the case of toner spill when removing the Waste Toner Container, be sure to wipe out
the spilled toner.
After the Waste Toner Container is removed, be sure to cover the Waste Toner
Container with the Cap attached in the side.
When the Waste Toner Container is removed outside the machine, be sure to promptly
cover with the Cap to prevent toner scattering.
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Container
4-145
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Heater
Removing the Drum Heater
4-146
1) Wrap paper around the Drum Unit to block light.
<Preparation>
<Procedure>
F-4-186
CAUTION:
2) Remove the 2 screws and the Flange.
x2
gas.
the Drum Cleaner Blade may be everted.
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Heater
F-4-187
4-146
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Primary Charging Shutter Unit
4-147
Removing the Primary Charging Shutter Unit
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the Drum Heater.
<Preparation>
Drum Heater

<Procedure>
1) Move the Primary Charging Wire Cleaners (Left and Right).
F-4-188
Loosen
F-4-189
CAUTION:
Do not remove both Shield Plates (Right and Left) of the Primary Charging Assembly at
the same time. Be sure to work on one Shield Plate at a time. (Otherwise, the frame of
the Primary Charging Assembly can be deformed.)
4-147
2) Move down the Primary Charging Assembly to remove the Shield Plate (Right).
4) Install the Shield Plate (Right).
2 Screws
2 Screws
4-148
5) Remove the Shield Plate (Left).

2 Screws
x2
x2
F-4-190
3) Remove the Leaf Spring of the Primary Charging Shutter from the claw.
F-4-192
6) Remove the Leaf Spring of the Primary Charging Shutter from the claw.
F-4-191
F-4-193
4-148
7) Install the Shield Plate (Left).
4-149
<Installation Method>
2 Screws
Be careful not to get the Leaf Spring caught by the Charging Wire to install it to the
Cleaner Claw.
CAUTION:
Do not make the Leaf Spring caught by the Charging Wire when removing the Primary
Charging Shutter Unit.
8) Remove the Primary Charging Shutter Unit.
NOTE:
The Shield Plate does not need to be removed when installing the Shutter Unit.
2 Screws
1) Set the Leaf Spring of the Primary Charging Shutter to the Cleaner Claw.
x2
F-4-194
F-4-195
2) Install the Primary Charging Shutter Unit.

2 Screws
3) Return the Primary Charging Wire Cleaners (Left and Right) to the original position.
4-149
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit
Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter

Unit
<Preparation>
4-150
CAUTION:
Be careful not to remove the screw and the Screw Gear when removing the Pre-transfer
Charging Assembly Shutter Unit.
3) Hold the screw to remove the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit while the Motor
Unit is installed.
3 Screws
<Procedure>
1) Move the Shield Plate Retainer Block to open the Shield Plate in the direction of the arrow.
x3
1 Screw (to loosen)
Loosen
F-4-198
4) Remove the Motor Unit from the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit.
3 Claws
F-4-196
2) Remove the claw at the edge of the Shutter.
x3
F-4-199
F-4-197
4-150
<Installation Method>
4-151
CAUTION:
1) Install the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Shutter Unit.
When installing the Motor Unit, fit the PCB into the slot.
3 Screws
x3
F-4-202
F-4-200
2) Pull the Shutter with your fingers to hook it to the Cleaner Unit.
NOTE:
Be sure to check that the rear shaft is secured.
3) Install the Motor Unit.
3 Claws
x3
F-4-201
F-4-203
4-151
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Brush Roller
4-152
Removing the Drum Brush Roller
CAUTION:Points to Caution when Securing the Shield Plate

Be sure to check that the rear pin is fit into the frame hole.
CAUTION:
4) Move the Shield Plate Retainer Block fully to the inside to secure with the screw.
Do not touch the Photosensitive Drum.

Cover the Photosensitive Drum with paper to avoid direct exposure to light.
NOTE:
Move the Shield Plate back and forth to check that the Shield Plate is secured.
<Preparation>
5. Remove the Drum Cleaning Unit. (Refer to page 4-116)
7. Remove the Side Seal. (Refer to page 4-127)
<Procedure>
1) Remove the sheet.
CAUTION:
The removed sheet will be used at the time of assembly, so be sure to remove the
sheet neatly and keep it in a safe place.
Sheet
F-4-204
F-4-205
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Brush Roller
4-152
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the ETB Drive Unit
4-153
Removing the ETB Drive Unit
2) Remove the 2 Gears and the 2 Bearings.

3 E-rings
<Preparation>
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Fixing Feed Lever.
1 Screw
F-4-206
3) Remove the Drum Brush Roller by following the procedure as shown in the figure.
F-4-208
F-4-207
4-153
4-154
2) Remove the Fixing Feed Right Front Cover.
3) Remove the Fixing Feed Left Cover.
2 Screws
3 Screws
1 Claw
x3
x2
F-4-211
F-4-209
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
When installing the Fixing Feed Right Front Cover, be sure to follow the order as shown
in the figure to tighten screws.
When installing the Fixing Feed Left Cover, be sure to follow the order as shown in the
figure to tighten screws.
x3
x2
F-4-212
F-4-210
4-154
4-155
4) Remove the Duct.
5) Remove the ETB Drive Unit.
2 Screws
3 Screws
1 Connector
1 Connector
Harness
x3
x2
F-4-214
F-4-213
CAUTION:
When installing, turn the gear so that the gear is engaged.
F-4-215
4-155
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Post-transfer Static Eliminator
Removing the Transfer Cleaning Unit
4-156
Removing the Post-transfer Static Eliminator
<Preparation>
<Preparation>

3. Remove the ETB Drive Unit. (Refer to page 4-153)
<Procedure>
<Procedure>
CAUTION:
1) Disconnect the connectors.
1) Remove the Post-transfer Guide Unit.

1 Screw
F-4-216
2) Remove the Transfer Cleaning Unit.

1 Stepped Screw
F-4-218
F-4-217
4-156
2) Remove the Post-transfer Guide.
3) Remove the Separation Guide Reinforcing Plate.
2 Protrusions
3 Screws
4-157
2 Springs
x3
F-4-220
4) Remove the Post-transfer Static Eliminator.
F-4-219
CAUTION:
Be careful not to lose the springs when removing the Post-transfer Guide.
F-4-221
4-157
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Receptacle Tray
Removing the Toner Receptacle Tray
4-158
CAUTION:
<Preparation>
1. Be sure to fit the protrusion into the groove of the plate to install.
1. Open the Front Upper Cover.
2. Toner can be accumulated in the Toner Receptacle Tray; therefore, be careful not to
spill toner when removing.
2. Remove the Toner Bottle.

<Procedure>
1) Remove the Toner Receptacle Tray.
1 Screw
1 Protrusion
F-4-223
2) Clean the Toner Receptacle Tray with lint-free paper.

F-4-222
F-4-224
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Toner Receptacle Tray
4-158
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Hopper Unit
Removing the Hopper Unit
4-159
CAUTION:
When starting the host machine, be sure to set the Shutter from CLOSE to OPEN.

2) Open the Inner Cover (Primary Charging Air Supply Fan Unit).
5) Remove the Front Upper Cover.
2 Hinge Pins
3) Remove the Inner Cover (Primary Charging Air Supply Fan Unit).
2 Springs
1 Connector
2 Protrusions
F-4-227
6) Release the Lock Lever to remove the Toner Bottle.

F-4-225
4) Move the lever in the direction of the arrow to close the Shutter.
CLOSE
OPEN
F-4-228
F-4-226
4-159
8) Remove the Connecting Drive Unit.
1 Screw
1 Screw
4-160
1 Protrusion
F-4-231
F-4-229
9) Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
When pulling out the Fixing Feed Unit, be sure to place paper over the ETB Unit for
protection.
NOTE:
Clean the Toner Receptacle Tray with lint-free paper.
F-4-232
F-4-230
4-160
10) Remove the Left Upper Cover 2.
4-161
13) Set the Lock Lever back.
1 Screw
1 Protrusion
F-4-235
14) Remove the Hopper Unit.

4 Screws
F-4-233
11) Set the Fixing Feed Unit back.
2 Connectors
12) Remove the Right Upper Inner Cover.
1 Hook
4 Screws
1 Connector
CAUTION:
Harness
Put the removed Hopper Unit on paper placed on the work space.
x4
x4
x2
F-4-236
F-4-234
4-161
4-162
16) Remove the Bottle Cam.
CAUTION:
When installing the Hopper Unit, be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure to
tighten screws.
1 E-ring
1 Roller
1 Bearing
E-ring
Roller
x4
Bearing
Bottle Cam
F-4-237
F-4-239
17) Remove the Bottle Box.

4 Hooks
15) Remove the 4 Tapping Screws.
x4
Hooks
Bottle Box
Hook
Hook
CAUTION: Points to Note when Installing the Tapping Screws
F-4-238
F-4-240
When tightening the Tapping Screws, turn them in the reverse direction to check the
screw thread on the Hopper Unit side before tightening them. Otherwise, the screw
thread on the Hopper Unit side may be broken, which makes it impossible to tighten the
screw.
4-162
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Buffer Unit
Removing the Buffer Unit
4-163
4) Move the lever in the direction of the arrow to close the Shutter.
<Preparation>
1. Open the Right Cover.
<Procedure>
CLOSE
OPEN
2) Open the Inner Cover (Primary Charging Air Supply Fan Unit).
3) Remove the Inner Cover (Primary Charging Air Supply Fan Unit).
1 Connector
2 Protrusions
F-4-242
CAUTION:
When starting the host machine, be sure to set the Shutter from CLOSE to OPEN.
5) Remove the Front Upper Cover.

2 Hinge Pins
2 Springs
F-4-241
F-4-243
4-163
6) Release the Lock Lever to remove the Toner Bottle.
4-164
NOTE:
Clean the Toner Receptacle Tray with lint-free paper.
F-4-244
F-4-246
1 Screw
1 Protrusion
8) Remove the Connecting Drive Unit.
1 Screw
F-4-245
CAUTION:
F-4-247
4-164
9) Disconnect the connector of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly.
4-165
CAUTION:Points to Caution When Installing the Buffer Unit

Be sure to securely set the Buffer Unit on the Rail.
Do not get the harness caught.
Fit the emboss into the proper position; otherwise, toner can be scattered.
Be sure to set the Shutter from CLOSE to OPEN.
F-4-248
10) Remove the Buffer Unit.

2 Screws
1 Connector
F-4-250
x2
F-4-249
CAUTION:
When removing the Buffer Unit, be sure not to tilt the unit to prevent toner scattering.
4-165
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit
Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit
4-166
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Right Door Link Unit from the pin.
<Preparation>
1 E-ring
1. Remove the Primary Charging Assembly Unit.

4. Remove the Hopper Unit. (Refer to page 4-159)
5. Open the Right Door.
6. Remove the Right Upper Cover.
6-1)
Open the Front Upper Cover.
6-2)
Open the Right Door.
6-3)
Open the Box Cover (Right).
6-4)
Remove the Right Upper Cover.
2 Screws
1 Boss
3 Protrusions
F-4-252
2) Remove the Right Shield Plate.

2 Screws
x2
x2
F-4-251
F-4-253
4-166
3) Remove the Potential Control Tray.
5) Remove the harness.
3 Screws
1 Connector
2 Connectors
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle
Wire Saddle
4-167
x3
x2
F-4-254
F-4-256
4) Remove the Potential Sensor Control PCB.
6) Remove the Potential Sensor.
1 Screw
1 Screw
4 Claws
2 Connectors
x2
x4
F-4-257
F-4-255
4-167
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit
Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit
4-168
2. Open the Controller Box.
<Preparation>
2-1)
Disconnect the Reader Communication Cable.
2-2)
Open the Controller Box in the direction of the arrow.

1-1)
Remove the Harness.
2 Wire Saddles
F-4-260
4 Screws
F-4-258
1-2)
Remove the Box Cover (Left).
x4
1 Claw
1 Protrusion
Claw
F-4-261
Projection
F-4-259
4-168
4-169
3. Remove the Rear Lower Cover.
<Procedure>
3-1)
1) Open the Motor Driver Support Plate.
Remove the Rear Lower Cover in the direction of the arrow.
2 Screws
3 Screws
5 Connectors
Wire Saddle
Reuse Band
x3
NOTE:
When opening the Motor Driver Support Plate, be sure to free from the protrusion.
Projection
F-4-262
x5
x2
F-4-263
2) Remove the Flywheel.

2 Screws
x2
F-4-264
4-169
3) Loosen the screw and move the Belt Tensioner in the direction of the arrow, and then again
tighten the screw.
4-170
5) Remove the Duct.

2 Screws
x2
F-4-265
4) Remove the belt from the pully.
F-4-267
6) Open the Front Cover to move the Fixing Feed Lever down.
(To move the cam at the rear of the Fixing Feed Lever Shaft to the position where it does
not interfere with the Waste Toner Feed Unit.)
F-4-266
F-4-268
4-170
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Drum Drive Unit
4-171
Removing the Drum Drive Unit
7) Remove the Waste Toner Feed Unit.

2 Connectors
<Preparation>
4 Screws
x4

5. Remove the Box Cover (Left). (Refer to "Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit")
6. Open the Controller Box. (Refer to "Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit")
x2
<Procedure>
2 Screws
2 Washers
F-4-269
x2
F-4-270
4-171
tighten the screw.
4-172
4) Remove the transformer.

2 Screws
3 Connectors
x2
x3
F-4-271
F-4-273
5) Free the harness and remove the Transformer Support Base.

1 Screw
Harness
F-4-272
F-4-274
4-172
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Image Formation System > Removing the Developing Drive Unit
4-173
Removing the Developing Drive Unit
6) Remove the Duct Unit.

3 Screws
<Preparation>
1 Connector
Harness
2. Remove the Box Cover (Left). (Refer to "Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit")
3. Open the Controller Box. (Refer to "Removing the Waste Toner Feed Unit")
x3
<Procedure>
2 Screws
2 Washers
x2
F-4-275
7) Remove the Drum Drive Unit.

5 Connectors
1 Wire Saddle
3 Screws
F-4-277
x3
x5
F-4-276
4-173
tighten the screw.
4-174

2 Screws
3 Connectors
x2
x3
F-4-278
F-4-280

1 Screw
Harness
F-4-279
F-4-281
4-174
4-175
8) Remove the Developing Drive Unit.
3 Screws
3 Connectors
1 Connector
1 Reuse Band
Harness
3 Screws
x3
x3
x3
F-4-282
F-4-284
7) Disconnect the Pre-transfer Charging High Voltage Connector.

1 Screw
F-4-283
4-175
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Fixing Assembly
Fixing
4-176
1-3)
Removing the Fixing Assembly

<Preparation>
1-1)
1-2)
F-4-285
F-4-286
4-176
<Procedure>
4-177
CAUTION: Points to Caution at Installation
1) Hold the Lever of the Feed Unit to open the Feed Unit.
Be careful not to damage the Inner Delivery Sensor Flag.
2) Remove the Fixing Assembly.

2 Screws
Flat Head Screw
x2
F-4-288
Stepped Screw
F-4-287
When installing the Fixing Assembly, be sure that the Inner Delivery Sensor Flag
passes through the cut-off of the Fixing Outlet Guide.
F-4-289
4-177
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide,Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag, Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder
Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide,Fixing Inlet Sensor

Flag, Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder
4-178
3) Remove the Fixing Inlet Guide Unit.

1 Connector
2 Wire Saddles
1 Harness Guide
<Preparation>
2 Screws
1. Pull out the Fixing Feed Unit. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Assembly")
2. Remove the Fixing Assembly. (Refer to page 4-176)
CAUTION:
When removing the Fixing Inlet Guide Unit, be careful no to turn the 2 Adjustment
Screws.
<Procedure>
1) Clean the Fixing Inlet Guide with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
2)Clean the Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder with lint-free paper moistened with
alcohol.
F-4-291
F-4-290
x3
F-4-292
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide,Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag, Fixing Right Stay, Dowel, Dowel Holder
4-178
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Cleaning the Inner Delivery Roller
Cleaning the Inner Delivery Roller
4) Turn over the Fixing Inlet Guide Unit, and insert lint-free paper into the clearance (front
side) between the Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag Shaft and the Shaft Support Plate to remove the
accumulated paper lint by dry wipe.
4-179
<Preparation>
<Procedure>
1) Clean the Inner Delivery Roller with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
F-4-293
5) Slide the sensor flag to the rear side, and insert lint-free paper into the clearance (rear
side) between the Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag Shaft and the Shaft Support Plate to remove the
accumulated paper lint by dry wipe.
F-4-295
F-4-294
CAUTION:Checking after Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Sensor Flag Shaft

Be sure to check that the sensor flag rotates and moves back and forth smoothly by
moving it manually.
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Cleaning the Inner Delivery Roller
4-179
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web
Cleaning the Fixing Oil Pan, Fixing Cleaning Web

Guide
4-180
Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web

<Preparation>
<Preparation>
3. Remove the Fixing Front Cover.
2. Remove the Fixing Front Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web")
3-1)
3. Remove the Fixing Upper Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Cleaning Web")
Remove the Fixing Front Cover.
2 Screws
<Procedure>
1) Clean the surface of the Fixing Oil Pan with lint-free paper.
x2
F-4-298
4. Remove the Fixing Upper Cover.

4-1)
F-4-296
Remove the Handle by sliding to the rear side.
2) Clean the surface of the Fixing Cleaning Web Guide with lint-free paper.
Grip
F-4-299
F-4-297
4-180
4
4-2)
Remove the Fixing Upper Cover.
4-181
2) Remove the Fixing Cleaning Web.
1 Screw
F-4-302
F-4-300
<Procedure>
1) Open the Fixing Cleaning Web Cover.
2 Screws
NOTE:
Because it is engaged, hold the Fixing Cleaning Web Cover to remove the screws.
x2
F-4-301
4-181
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit
4-182
Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower

Unit
CAUIOTN: Points to Caution at Installation

Be sure to install the Fixing Cleaning Web in the correct direction.
<Preparation>
4. Remove the Fixing Drive Unit 1.
4-1) Remove the Fixing Drive Unit 1.
Wire Saddle
Edge Saddle
Reuse Band
3 Connectors
3 Screws
F-4-303
When installing the Fixing Cleaning Web, be sure to wind the web around the Web
Take-up Roller until the green line on the web disappears from view.
x3
x3
F-4-305
F-4-304
4-182
5. Secure the Shutter Drive Gear.

5-1)
5-2)
Remove the Fixing Pin for the Shutter Drive Gear (Rear).
1 Screw
4-183
Rotate the Shutter Drive Gear (Rear) with fingers. Then, align the cut-off of the
Shutter Gear with the hole position, and secure with the Fixing Pin removed in step 5-1.
1 Screw
F-4-306
F-4-307
4-183
4
5-3)
Remove the Fixing Pin for the Shutter Drive Gear (Front).
1 Screw
5-4)
4-184
Align the cut-off of the Shutter Drive Gear (Front) with the hole position of the Plate,
and then secure with the Fixing Pin removed previously.

1 Screw
F-4-308
F-4-309
4-184
<Procedure>
4-185
3) Disconnect the 5 Connectors on the other side of the Fixing Assembly.

Wire Saddle
1) Remove the Fixing Drive Unit 2.
4) Remove the Fixing Pin.
Wire Saddle
1 Screw
Reuse Band
2 Connectors
NOTE:
Because it is engaged, hold the Fixing Upper Unit to remove the Fixing Pin.
2 Screws
x2
x5
x2
F-4-310
2) Remove the Fixing Pin.
F-4-312
1 Screw
5) Separate the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit.
Fixing Upper Unit
Fixing Lower Unit

F-4-311
F-4-313
4-185
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper
Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust

Stopper
CAUTION: Points to Caution at Installation of the Fixing Drive Unit 2

Be sure to fit the protrusion of the Fixing Shutter to the groove of the Fixing Shutter
Drive Gear (Front) to install.
4-186
<Preparation>
4. Remove the Fixing Drive Unit 1. (Refer to "Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing
Lower Unit")
5. Secure the Shutter Drive Gear. (Refer to "Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing
Lower Unit")
6. Separate the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit. (Refer to "Separating the Fixing
Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit")
7. Remove the Heater Unit.
7-1)
Remove the Heater Unit.
4 Screws
F-4-314
Remove the Fixing Pin for the Shutter Drive Gear (Front) and return to the original
position. (Refer to "Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit")
x4
F-4-315
CAUTION: Points to Caution at Installation of the Heater Unit

Remove the Fixing Pin for the Shutter Drive Gear (Rear) and return to the original
position. (Refer to "Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit")
4-186
<Procedure>
4-187
3) Remove the Thrust Stopper from the Fixing Roller Unit to remove the Fixing Roller.
1) Place the Fixing Upper Unit as shown in the figure and remove the Fixing Roller Bearing
Retainer.
Bearing
Insulating Bush
Bushing
Spacer
Fixing Roller
Thrust Retainer
2) Remove the Fixing Roller Unit.
Fixing Roller
Thrust Retainer
Gear
Insulating Bush
Bearing
Fixing Roller
F-4-317

Be sure to locate the groove of the Fixing Roller Bearing inside the Fixing Upper Unit to
install.
F-4-316
F-4-318
CATION: Points to Caution when Replacing the Fixing Roller

Do not reuse the once removed Thrust Stopper.
If the Thrust Stopper is reused, it may come off during printing.
4-187
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Pressure Roller
4-188
Removing the Pressure Roller

Grease Application
<Preparation>
Lower Unit")
Lower Unit")
6. Separate the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower Unit. (Refer to page 4-182)
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Fixing Inlet Guide.
2 Screws
Grease Application
F-4-319
Wire Saddle
Edge Saddle
1 Connector
Clear the counter

Stepped Screw
Screw (Binding)
x2
F-4-320
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Pressure Roller
4-188
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Pressure Roller Static Eliminator Unit
4-189
Removing the Pressure Roller Static Eliminator Unit
2) Remove the Pressure Roller Unit.
<Preparation>
Lower Unit")
Lower Unit")
7. Remove the Pressure Roller Unit. (Refer to page 4-188)
F-4-321
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Pressure Roller Static Eliminator Unit.
2 Screws
x2
F-4-322
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Pressure Roller Static Eliminator Unit
4-189
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Main Thermistor, Sub Thermistor2
4-190
Removing the Main Thermistor, Sub Thermistor2
2) Remove the Pressure Roller Static Eliminator.

1 Screw
<Preparation>
5. Remove the Fixing Cleaning Web. (Refer to page 4-180)
Lower Unit")
Lower Unit")
8. Remove the Heater Unit. (Refer to "Separating the Fixing Upper Unit from the Fixing Lower
Unit")
F-4-323
10. Remove the Fixing Roller. (Refer to page 4-186)

<Procedure>
1) Remove the Harness Guide Cover and free the Harness from the Guide.
1 Screw
Edge Saddle
Harness Guide
F-4-324
4-190
2) Remove the Harness Guide and remove the Harness Band.
4-191
4) Remove the Thermistor Unit Support Plate to remove the Thermistor Reciprocating Shaft
1 Screw
from the Fixing Upper Unit.

2 Screws
x2
F-4-327
5) Remove the Leaf Spring and remove the Main Thermistor and the SubThermistor 2 from
F-4-325
the Thermistor Holder.
3) Place the Fixing Upper Unit as shown in the figure and remove the Fixing Oil Pan.
1 Screw
F-4-328
F-4-326
4-191
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Sub Thermistor1
Removing the Sub Thermistor1
CAUTION: Points to Note when Installing the Main Thermistor and the Sub Thermistor 2
When the harness on the Thermistor side is short, the Sub Thermistor 2 may not
be engaged with the Fixing Roller. Perform the following procedure to check the
engagement.
4-192
<Preparation>
1) After installing the Thermistor, temporarily place the Fixing Roller.

2) While sliding the Thermistor for at least one reciprocation by rotating the
Reciprocating Cam, check that there is no gap between the Sub Thermistor 2 and
the Fixing Roller. If a gap is found, perform the following procedure.
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Harness Guide Cover.
1 Screw
3) Remove the Fixing Roller.

4) Arrange the harness of the Sub Thermistor 2 so as to give the harness some slack
on the Thermistor side.
5) Perform steps 1 and 2 for double check.
Fixing Roller
F-4-330
2) Remove the Harness to free as shown in the figure.
Sub Thermistor 2
5 Connectors
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle
Sub Thermistor 2
Fixing Roller
Reciprocating Cam
x5
Harness of Sub Thermistor 2
F-4-329
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Sub Thermistor1
F-4-331
4-192
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Upper Separation Claw
4-193
Removing the Upper Separation Claw
3) Remove the Sub Thermistor Holder.

1 Screw
<Preparation>
<Procedure>
1) Hold the Lever of the Left Guide to open the Left Guide.
2) While holding the Upper Separation Claw Retaining Spring, remove the Upper Separation
Claw.
F-4-332
4) Remove the Sub Thermistor 1.

1 Screw
Upper Separation
Claw Spring
Upper
Separation
Claw
F-4-333
F-4-334
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Upper Separation Claw
4-193
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Cleaning the Upper Separation Claw
Cleaning the Upper Separation Claw
4-194
3) Wipe toner off the 4 Inner Delivery Rollers with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
<Preparation>
<Procedure>
1) Hold the Lever of the Feed Unit to open the Feed Unit.
F-4-337
F-4-335
2) Clean the Upper Separation Claw with lint-free paper moistened.
F-4-336
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Cleaning the Upper Separation Claw
4-194
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Fixing > Removing the Thermoswitch
Removing the Thermoswitch
4-195
2) Remove the Harness Guide.
1 Screw
<Preparation>
4. Remove the Fixing Cleaning Web. (Refer to page 4-180)
Lower Unit")
Lower Unit")
8. Remove the Heater Unit. (Refer to "Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust
Stopper")
9. Remove the Fixing Roller. (Refer to page 4-186)
F-4-339
3) Place the Fixing Upper Unit as shown in the figure and remove the Web Lower Cover.
<Procedure>
1 Screw
1) Remove the Harness Guide Cover and free the harness from the Harness Guide.
1 Screw
Edge Saddle
Harness Guide
F-4-340
F-4-338
4-195
4-196
4) Remove the Thermoswitch Unit.

1 Screw
F-4-341
5) Remove the Retainer Plate and Thermoswitch.
Leaf Spring
Thermoswitch
F-4-342
4-196
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Pickup Roller
Pickup/Feed System
4-197
Removing the Left Deck Pickup Roller

<Preparation>
Removing the Left Pickup Deck

2. Remove the Left Pickup Deck. (Refer to page 4-197)

2) Pull out the Left Pickup Deck to remove.
<Procedure>
2 Screws
1) Remove the Left Deck Pickup Roller.

1 Claw
x2
F-4-343
NOTE:
When installing the Left Pickup Deck, be sure to fit the 4 protrusions on the Rail into the
4 grooves of the Left Pickup Deck to install.
Protrusion
F-4-345
Groove
F-4-344
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Pickup Roller
4-197
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Right Pickup Deck
Removing the Left Deck Feed Roller
4-198
Removing the Right Pickup Deck
<Preparation>
2) Pull out the Right Pickup Deck to remove.
2. Remove the Left Pickup Deck. (Refer to page 4-197)
2 Screws
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Stopper to remove the Left Deck Feed Roller.
x2
F-4-347
F-4-346
NOTE:
When installing the Right Pickup Deck, be sure to fit the 4 protrusions on the Rail into
the 4 grooves of the Right Pickup Deck to install.
Protrusion
Groove
F-4-348
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Right Pickup Deck
4-198
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Right Deck Pickup Roller
Removing the Left Deck Separation Roller
Removing the Right Deck Pickup Roller
<Preparation>
<Preparation>
2. Remove the Right Pickup Deck. (Refer to page 4-198)
<Procedure>
<Procedure>
1) Pull out the Left Pickup Deck.
1) Remove the Right Deck Pickup Roller.
2) Remove the Stopper to remove the Left Deck Separation Roller.
1 Claw
F-4-349
4-199
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Right Deck Pickup Roller
F-4-350
4-199
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Right Deck Separation Roller
Removing the Right Deck Feed Roller
4-200
Removing the Right Deck Separation Roller
<Preparation>
1) Open the Right Upper Cover.
2) Pull out the Right Pickup Deck.
3) Remove the Feed Guide.

1 Boss
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Stopper to remove the Right Deck Feed Roller.
F-4-352
4) Remove the Stopper to remove the Right Deck Separation Roller.

F-4-351
F-4-353
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Right Deck Separation Roller
4-200
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Upper Cassette Pickup Roller
Removing the Upper Cassette
4-201
Removing the Upper Cassette Pickup Roller
1) Pull out the Upper Cassette to remove.
<Preparation>
4 Screws
1. Remove the Upper Cassette. (Refer to page 4-201)

<Procedure>
1) Remove the Upper Cassette Pickup Roller.
x4
1 Claw
F-4-354
F-4-355
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Upper Cassette Pickup Roller
4-201
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Upper Cassette Separation Roller
Removing the Upper Cassette Feed Roller
4-202
Removing the Upper Cassette Separation Roller
<Preparation>
1) Open the Right Lower Cover.
1. Remove the Upper Cassette. (Refer to page 4-201)
2) Remove the Upper Cassette.

1 Boss
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Stopper to remove the Upper Cassette Feed Roller.
F-4-357
F-4-356
4) Remove the Stopper to remove the Upper Cassette Separation Roller.
F-4-358
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Upper Cassette Separation Roller
4-202
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Lower Cassette Pickup Roller
4-203
Removing the Lower Cassette Pickup Roller

Removing the Lower Cassette
<Preparation>
1. Remove the Lower Cassette. (Refer to page 4-203)
1) Pull out the Lower Cassette to remove.

4 Screws
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Lower Cassette Pickup Roller.
1 Claw
x4
F-4-359
F-4-360
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Lower Cassette Pickup Roller
4-203
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Lower Cassette Separation Roller
Removing the Lower Cassette Feed Roller
4-204
Removing the Lower Cassette Separation Roller
<Preparation>
1. Remove the Lower Cassette. (Refer to page 4-203)
2) Remove the Lower Cassette.

1 Boss
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Stopper to remove the Lower Cassette Feed Roller.
F-4-362
F-4-361
4) Remove the Stopper to remove the Lower Cassette Separation Roller.
F-4-363
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Lower Cassette Separation Roller
4-204
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller
4-205
2) Remove the bushing.

1 E-ring
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller

<Preparation>
1. Open the Inner Cover.
1-1) Open the Front Cover.
1-2) Open the Inner Cover.
1 Screw (to loosen)
Loosen
F-4-366
3) Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Guide.
F-4-364
<Procedure>
1) Remove the gear.
1 Claw
F-4-367
F-4-365
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller
4-205
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller
4-206
Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller
4) Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller.

1 E-ring
<Preparation>
1. Open the Inner Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller")
2. Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roller. (Refer to page 4-205)
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Lower Guide.
2 Screws
6 Claws
6 Protrusions
x2
F-4-368
x6
F-4-369
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller
4-206
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly
4-207
Cleaning the Pickup and Fixing Feed Assembly
CAUTION:
Installation work gets difficult if the plate and the spring (as shown in the figure) are
removed when removing the cover; therefore, be careful not to remove them.
<Cleaning the Vertical Path Assembly>

3) Open the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Guide Unit, and clean the 2 areas of the Feed Guide [A].
(Remove paper lint.)
4) Clean a whole circumference of 2 Rollers [B] and the 3 Rollers [C] by manually rotating
them with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
CAUTION:
When rotating the Roller by hand, do not touch the surface of the Roller. Be sure to hold
the side of the Roller to rotate manually.
[B]
F-4-370
[A]
2) Remove the Multi-purpose Tray Separation Roller.

1 Claw
[C]
F-4-372
F-4-371
4-207
5) Clean paper dust on the Vertical Path Sensor 1 (PS24) and the Multi-purpose Tray Last
Paper Sensor (PS28) with a blower.
4-208
7) Clean a whole circumference of 10 Rollers by manually rotating them with lint-free paper
CAUTION:
PS28
PS24
F-4-373
6) Clean paper dust on the Feed Guide [A] with lint-free paper.
F-4-375
[A]
F-4-374
F-4-376
4-208
9) Open the Duplex Merging Guide and clean paper dust on the Feed Guide [A] with lint-free
paper.
4-209
<Cleaning the Fixing Feed Assembly>

1) Open the Fixing Feed Unit fully.
2) Open the Registration Upper Guide, insert the paper lint cleaning tool into the clearance
between the Registration Upper Guide and the Registration Lower Guide, and clean the
feed area [A].
CAUTION:
[A]
Be careful not to damage the sheet on the edge of the Registration Upper Guide.
[A]
Sheet
F-4-377
F-4-378
4-209
3) Insert lint-free paper into the clearance between the Registration Upper Guide and the
4-210
5) Point the leading edge of Blower to the Static Eliminator and clean adhered soiling.
Registration Lower Guide, and clean the feed area [B] and the sheet on the edge of the
Registration Upper Guide.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the sheet on the edge of the Registration Upper Guide.
F-4-381
Sheet
6) Remove the Fixing Feed Cover (Upper).

1 Screw
[B]
F-4-379
4) Open the Registration Upper Guide and clean paper dust on the Registration Sensor (PS29)
with a blower.
F-4-382
PS29
F-4-380
4-210
7) Hold the 2 handles to lift the ETB Unit in the direction of the arrow.
4-211
9) I return an ETB unit to the original position.

10) Clean the Fixing Inlet Guide [A] with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
[A]
F-4-383
8) Clean the soiling adhered on the Magnet and the Sheet with lint-free paper moistened with
alcohol.
F-4-385
11) Hold the lever of the Feed Unit to open the Feed Unit.
Sheet
12) Clean paper dust on the Feed Guide [A] with lint-free paper.
Magnet
F-4-384
[A]
F-4-386
4-211
4-212
CAUTION:
F-4-389
16) Hold the lever of the Feed Unit to close the Feed Unit.
17) Clean paper dust on the feed area [A] of the Reverse Path with lint-free paper.
F-4-387
14) Clean paper dust on the Reverse Vertical Path Sensor (PS65) with a blower.
PS65
[A]
F-4-390
F-4-388
4-212
18) Clean paper dust on the feed area [A] inside the equipment with lint-free paper.
4-213
19) Open the Duplex Path.

20) Clean paper dust on the feed area [A] of the Duplex Path (Upper/Lower) with lint-free
paper.
[A]
F-4-391
NOTE:
To clean the feed area [A] inside main body, removing the Fixing Assembly can improve
the operability.
[A]
[A]
F-4-393
CAUTION:
F-4-392
F-4-394
4-213
22) Clean paper dust on the Duplex Outlet Sensor (PS64), Duplex Merge Sensor (PS67), and
Duplex Left Sensor (PS66) with a blower.
4-214
24) Place a paper on the Duplex Path. Then, point the leading edge of Blower to the Roller
frame to remove paper lint.
NOTE:
The Cleaning Brush is engaged with 4 Rollers, causing accumulation of paper lint. By
blowing air with the Blower, paper lint can be fallen down.
PS66
PS67
PS64
F-4-395
F-4-397
25) Insert the paper lint cleaning tool to the gap of Reverse Path [A] to remove paper lint.
[A]
F-4-396
F-4-398
26) Close the Duplex Path.

27) Install the Fixing Feed Cover (Upper).
28) Push in the Fixing Feed Unit.
4-214
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Pickup Unit
Removing the Left Deck Pickup Unit
4-215
3) Remove the Left Deck Pickup Unit.
<Preparation>
1. Remove the Right Deck. (Refer to page 4-198)
2. Remove the Left Deck. (Refer to page 4-197)
<Procedure>
1) Disconnect the Connectors.
F-4-401

When installing the Left Deck Pickup Unit, pull out the Fixing Feed Unit for approx.
10cm to install, and then return the unit to its original position after installation.
F-4-399
2) Remove the Pickup Unit Fixation Plate (Upper/Right).
NOTE:
Be sure to check that the parts number of Pickup Unit is correct.
3 Screws
Pickup Unit Fixation Plate(Upper)
x3
F-4-402
Pickup Unit Fixation Plate(Right)

F-4-400
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Pickup Unit
4-215
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Right Deck Pickup Unit
Removing the Right Deck Pickup Unit
4-216
4) Remove the Right Deck Pickup Unit.

1 Screw
<Preparation>
1. Remove the Right Cover.(Refer to page 4-92)
2. Pull out the Right Deck.(Refer to page 4-198)
<Procedure>
2) Remove the Connector Cover.
1 Screw
F-4-405
NOTE:
F-4-403
F-4-406
F-4-404
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Right Deck Pickup Unit
4-216
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Cassettes 3 and 4 Pickup Unit
Removing the Cassettes 3 and 4 Pickup Unit
<Procedure>
<Preparation>
NOTE:
This procedure explains the case for Cassette 3 Pickup Unit.
Be sure to perform the same procedure when the Cassette 4 Pickup Unit is used.
1. Remove the Right Lower Cover.

1-1)
4-217
Open the Right Lower Cover.
1) Remove the Connector Cover.

1 Screw
F-4-407
1-2)
Remove the Right Lower Cover.
2 Hinge Pins
F-4-409
F-4-408
2. Pull out the Cassettes 3 and 4.

F-4-410
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Cassettes 3 and 4 Pickup Unit
4-217
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit
4-218
Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive Unit
3) Remove the Pickup Unit.

1 Screw
<Preparation>
1-1)
Remove the Harness.
2 Wire Saddles
F-4-411
NOTE:
F-4-413
1-2)
1 Claw
1 Protrusion
Claw
F-4-412
Projection
F-4-414
4-218
2-1)
3-1)
4-219
3 Screws
x3
F-4-415
2-2)
F-4-417
4 Screws
4. Remove the Waste Toner Container. (Refer to page 4-145)

5. Remove the Cassette 3 and Cassette 4 Pickup Units. (Refer to page 4-217)
<Procedure>
x4
1) Remove the 2 E-rings and move the bushings to remove the Vertical Path Rollers 3 and 4
in the direction of the arrow.
F-4-416
F-4-418
CAUTION:
Do not lose the bushings when removing the Roller Shaft.
4-219
2) Remove the Shield Plate.
4) Remove the Feed Driver PCB Unit.
1 Screw
4 Screws
2 Protrusions
13 Connectors
4-220
9 Wire Saddles
1 Reuse Band
Harness
x2
x4
x13
F-4-419
3) Remove the Waste Toner Container Shutter Unit.

3 Screws
1 Hook
F-4-421
5) Remove the Right Rear Handle.

4 Screws
x3
x4
F-4-420
F-4-422
4-220
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Registration Unit
4-221
Removing the Registration Unit
CAUTION:
When installing the handle, be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure to tighten
screws.
<Preparation>
1-1)
1-2)
x4
F-4-423
6) Free the harness and remove the Vertical Path Cassette Drive Unit.
1 Connector
F-4-425
3 Wire Saddles
6 Screws
x6
F-4-424
4-221
4
1-3)
4-222
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Fixing Feed Right Front Upper Cover
1 Screw
F-4-427
2) Lift the ETB Unit in the direction of the arrow.
F-4-426
F-4-428
4-222
3) Disconnect the 2 connectors.
4-223
5) Remove the Registration Unit.

4 Screws
x2
x4
F-4-429
4) Set the ETB Unit back.
F-4-431
CAUTION:
When installing, be sure to check that the 2 Positioning Pins are secured.
F-4-430
[A]
F-4-432
4-223
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Pickup Drive Unit
NOTE:
When installing the Registration Unit, be sure to follow the order as shown in the figure
to tighten screws.
4-224
Removing the Left Deck Pickup Drive Unit

<Preparation>
1. Remove the Box Cover (Left). (Refer to "Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive
Unit")
2. Open the Controller Box. (Refer to "Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive
x4
Unit")
3. Remove the Rear Lower Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup
Drive Unit")
4. Remove the Power Supply Assembly.(Refer to page 4-234)
5. Remove the Left Deck Pickup Unit. (Refer to page 4-215)
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Left Deck Pickup Drive Unit in the direction of the arrow.
6 Screws
F-4-433
1 Connector
1 Wire Saddle
x6
F-4-434
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Left Deck Pickup Drive Unit
4-224
Parts Replacement and Clearning > Pickup/Feed System > Removing the Main Drive Unit
Removing the Main Drive Unit
4-225
2) Remove the Middle Vertical Path Guide.

1 Screw
<Preparation>
1. Remove the Box Cover (Left). (Refer to "Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive
Unit")
2. Open the Controller Box. (Refer to "Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup Drive
Unit")
3. Remove the Rear Lower Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Vertical Path Cassette Pickup
Drive Unit")
5. Remove the Right Lower Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Cassettes 3 and 4 Pickup Unit")
6. Remove the Right Deck Pickup Unit. (Refer to page 4-216)
<Procedure>
1) Remove the Pre-registration Guide Unit.
F-4-436
2 Screws
3) Remove the 2 E-rings and move the bushings to remove the Vertical Path Rollers 1 and 2
in the direction of the arrow.
x2
F-4-435
F-4-437
CAUTION:
Do not lose the bushings when removing the Vertical Path Rollers 1 and 2.
4-225
4) Remove the Shield Plate.
4-226
NOTE:
When installing the Waste Toner Container Shutter Unit, be sure to follow the order as
shown in the figure to tighten screws.
2 Screws
2 Protrusions
x2
x3
F-4-440
F-4-438
5) Remove the Waste Toner Container Shutter Unit.

3 Screws
6) Remove the Feed Driver PCB Unit.

4 Screws
13 Connectors
x3
9 Wire Saddles
1 Reuse Band
Harness
x4
x13
F-4-439
CAUTION:
When removing the Waste Toner Container Shutter Unit, be careful of toner scattering.
F-4-441
4-226
4-227
CAUTION:
When installing the Feed Driver PCB Unit, be sure to follow the order as shown in the
tighten the screw.
x4
F-4-444

F-4-442

2 Screws
2 Washers
x2
F-4-445
F-4-443
4-227
4-228
2 Screws
3 Screws
3 Connectors
1 Connector
Harness
x2
x3
x3
F-4-446
F-4-448
1 Screw
13) Disconnect the Pre-transfer Charging High Voltage Connector.
Harness
1 Screw
F-4-447
F-4-449
4-228
4-229
14) Remove the Right Rear Handle.
15) Remove the Main Drive Unit.
4 Screws
6 Screws
1 Connector
x4
x6
F-4-450
F-4-452
CAUTION:
When installing the Right Rear Handle, be sure to follow the order as shown in the
x4
F-4-451
4-229
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Ozone Filter
4-230
Removing the Ozone Filter

1) Remove the Filter Cover.
Removing the Filter (for primary charging)
1 Screw

2) Remove the Filter (for primary charging).
1 Screw
F-4-454
F-4-453
NOTE:
To prevent falling of the Filter Cover, be sure to hold the Filter Cover to remove the
screw.
2) Remove the Ozone Filter.
F-4-455
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Ozone Filter
4-230
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the DC Controller PCB
Removing the DC Controller PCB
4-231
<Preparation>
2-1)
2-2)

1-1)
Remove the Harness.
2 Wire Saddles
F-4-458
4 Screws
F-4-456
1-2)
x4
1 Claw
1 Protrusion
Claw
F-4-459
Projection
F-4-457
4-231
4-232
<Procedure>
3) Remove the DC Controller PCB in the direction of the arrow.
1) Remove the Controller Box Inner Cover.
8 Screws
4 Screws (TP)
x8
x4
F-4-462
F-4-460
2) Disconnect the 17 Connectors.

Be sure to securely connect the Connector at the back of the DC Controller PCB.
x17
F-4-461
F-4-463
4-232
4-233

Get in service mode to enter all the latest service mode values written on the label at the
back of the Front Cover.
F-4-464
4-233
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Power Supply Assembly
Removing the Power Supply Assembly
4-234
2) Disconnect the 23 Connectors and free the Harness to the top of the Power Supply
Assembly.
<Preparation>
1. Remove the Box Cover (Left). (Refer to "Removing the DC Controller PCB")
2. Open the Controller Box. (Refer to "Removing the DC Controller PCB")
x23

3-1)
3 Screws
x3
F-4-467
3) Remove the Power Supply Assembly in the direction of the arrow.

2 Screws
F-4-465
x2
<Procedure>
1) Free the Harness from the Wire Saddle.
F-4-468
F-4-466
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Power Supply Assembly
4-234
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Fixing Power Unit
Removing the Fixing Power Unit
4-235
2) Remove the Left Upper Cover.

3 Screws
CAUTION:Points to Caution before Operation

When executing this procedure, be sure to turn OFF the breaker beforehand.
x3
F-4-471
Leakage Breaker
3) Remove the Left Upper Frame.

5 Screws
F-4-469
<Preparation>
x5
<Procedure>
1) Open the 2 Finisher Connector Covers.
2 Claws
x2
F-4-472
F-4-470
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Fixing Power Unit
4-235
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Feed Driver PCB
4-236
Removing the Feed Driver PCB
4) Free the harness and remove the Fixing Power Unit.

4 Connectors
<Preparation>
2 Screws

x4
4. Remove the Rear Lower Cover. (Refer to "Removing the Power Supply Assembly")
<Procedure>
1) Remove the frame of Waste Toner Container.
2 Screws
2 Protrusions
x2
F-4-473
5) Remove the Fixing Power Unit Plate.
x2
5 Screws
x5
F-4-475
F-4-474
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Feed Driver PCB
4-236
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Upper High Voltage Unit
4-237
2) Remove the Feed Driver PCB.

6 Screws
Removing the Upper High Voltage Unit
15 Connectors
<Preparation>
<Procedure>
1) Open the Motor Driver PCB Unit.
x6
NOTE:
When opening the Motor Driver PCB Unit, free the top side from the protrusion.
5 Connectors
Wire Saddle
Reuse Band
F-4-476
Projection
x5
x2
F-4-477
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Upper High Voltage Unit
4-237
Parts Replacement and Clearning > External Auxiliary System > Removing the Flat Control Panel
4-238
Removing the Flat Control Panel
2) Disconnect the connector and Grounding Wire.

1 Screw
NOTE:
The same procedure is applied to both copier model and printer model.
x10
1) Open the Toner Replacement Cover.

3) Remove the Right Upper Cover.
2 Screws
3 Protrusions
1 Boss
F-4-478
3) While avoiding the harness and Motor Driver PCB Unit, remove the Upper High Voltage
Unit.
1 Screw
Boss
Protrusion
x2
F-4-479
F-4-480
4-238
4) Close the Right Cover.
7) Open the Upper Right Cover.
5) Remove the Right Rear Cover 2. (The removed cover and screws are no longer used.)
8) Remove the Upper Right Cover.
1 Screw
1 Screw
4-239
Protrusion
F-4-483
F-4-481
6) Remove the Side Cover.
9) Remove the Upper Left Cover.
1 Screw
1 Screw
2 Hooks
Hook
F-4-484
F-4-482
4-239
4
10)
Remove the 4 screws which secure the Flat Control Panel.
11)
(The removed screws will be used when installing the Front Upper Cover (Middle).)
4-240
Move the Flat Control Panel to the front and disconnect the Control Panel Cable and
Power Supply Cable.

1 Edge Saddle
1 Wire Saddle
x4
Control Panel Cable
Wire Saddle
x2
F-4-485
Power Supply Cable
Edge Saddle
F-4-486
4-240
4
12)
Lift up the Flat Control Panel in the direction of the arrow and pull out the Control
15)
Panel Cable.
13)
4-241
Disconnect the Control Panel Cable.
6 Wire Saddles
1 Connector
Disconnect the Control Panel Connector and Power Supply Connector, and then
remove the Flat Control Panel from the machine.

Control Panel Connector
x6
x2
[A]
Control Panel Cable
Control Panel Cable
Power Supply Connector
Wire Saddle
Wire Saddle
F-4-488
F-4-487
14)
Secure the Power Supply Cable removed in step 11 with the Wire Saddle again.
CAUTION:
Do not disconnect the Power Supply Cable.
Be sure to close the Wire Saddles except for the open one [A].
16)
Disconnect the Power Supply Connector.
F-4-489
4-241
4-242
4-242
4-243
4-243
Adjustment
Overview
replacing parts
When
Adjustment
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Controller System > HDD
Overview
When replacing parts
In this chapter, measures of adjustment when replacing parts in servicing operation are
Controller System
mentioned. Parts to be replaced are categorized into 4 blocks based on their related
technology as shown below.
Parts Name
5-2
HDD
Actions at Parts Replacement
Controller System
HDD
TPM PCB
Image Formation System Primary Charging Wire
Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly
Pre-Transfer Charging Wire
Drum
Drum Side Seals (Front and Rear)
Developing Assembly
Potential Sensor / Potential Control PCB
ETB
Fixing System
Fixing Roller
External Auxiliary System DC Controller PCB
p. 5-2
p. 5-4
p. 5-5
p. 5-7
p. 5-7
p. 5-7
p. 5-9
p. 5-9
p. 5-10
p. 5-11
p. 5-11
p. 5-11
p. 5-11
p. 5-11
p. 5-12
p. 5-12
Refer to Removing HDD

1. Before Replacing
Use the Remote UI.
Target data:
Address List
Forwarding Settings
T-5-1
Printer Settings
Paper Information
2) Printing the set/registered data
Use the service mode.
5-2
2. After Replacing
5-3
When using the Card Reader and imageWARE Accounting Manager
1) HDD format
1-1) Start with the safe mode. (While pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously, turn
ON the main powerswitch.)
1-2) Use SST to format all partitions.
2) Downloading system software
2-1) Use SST to download the system software (System, LANG, RUI and others).
3) Initializing the key, certificate and CA certificate
(Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CA-KEY
Use the Remote UI.
While referring to the list of set/registered data which was printed before replacement,
reset/register the data.
7) When the user generates and adds the encryption key, certificate and/or CA ertificate,
request the user to generate them again.
8) Executing Auto Adjust Gradation (Full Adjust)
Settings/Registration mode: Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto
Adjust Gradation
Card ID used for imageWARE Accounting Manager is stored in the HDD, so NSA
collection control is not enabledafter the HDD replacement. After the HDD is replaced,
reinstall the card ID from imageWARE Accounting Manager using the following
procedures.
1) Go to COPIER > FUNCTION> INSTALL > CARD and enter the numerical value of
the leading card which is used for Department ID. Then, press OK button.(e.g.: If
No.1 to No.1000 cards are used for Department ID, enter 1 of the leading card.)
2) After turning OFF and ON the main power switch, perform the following operations
from Settings/Registration mode.
In Management Settings > User Management > Department ID Management > Page
Totals, be sure that ID00000001 to ID00001000 are created.
Set the following: Preferences > Network > TCP / IP Settings > IPv4 Settings> IP
Address Settings > IP Address, Gateway Address, Subnet Mask
In Management Settings > User Management> System Manager Information
Settings> System Manager ID and System PIN, register any number for them. Then,
turn OFF and ON the main power switch.
If System Manager ID and System PIN are not registered, card registration
to device cannot be executed for the imageWARE Accounting Manager setting
operation.
3) Download the card ID from imageWARE Accounting Manager to the Main Body
again.
4) After downloading is completed, go to Management Settings > User Management >
Department ID Management > Page Totals. Be sure that only the downloaded card
ID is displayed.
5) Print using the user card registered from imageWARE Accounting Manager. Be sure
that the card information used for the target devices of imageWARE Accounting
Manager is collected.
CAUTION:Points to Caution when Using the System Software-installed HDD

When using the HDD which was installed the system software of the other achine
(different serial number), be sure to format the HDD after the installation. If the HDD is
not formatted, the operation cannot be guaranteed.
5-3
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Controller System > Main Controller PCB 1
5-4
NOTE:
Resetting/registering the data is not necessary after Main Controller PCB 1 is replaced.

Service part:
Setting unit: Main Controller PCB 1 + Controller Box Frame + Cooling Fan
Parts number differs on a model basis (speed basis).
Cooling Fan
Controller
BOX Frame
F-5-1
In order to secure the accuracy of connector connection when slotting in, this service part is
provided with the PCB being installed to the frame.
DDR2-SDRAM (2 pc.)
Flash PCB
TPM PCB
DDR2-SDRAM
TPM PCB
Flash PCB
F-5-2
5-4
5-5
1. Before Replacing
Use the Remote UI.
Service part:
Target data:
Setting unit: Main Controller PCB 2 + Controller Box Frame
Address List
Forwarding Settings
Printer Settings
Paper Information
2) Printing the set/registered data Use the service mode.
F-5-3
5-5
2. When Replacing
5-6
3. After Replacing
1) After installing the parts, turn ON the main power switch.
DDR2-SDRAM (1 pc.) (When option DDR2-SDRAM is installed: 2 pc.)

Memory PCB

Use the Remote UI.
While referring to the list of set/registered data which was printed out before
replacement, reset/register the data.
4) When the user generates and adds the encryption key, certificate and/or CA certificate,
request the user to generate them again
DDR2-SDRAM
Memory PCB
F-5-4
Memory PCB
5-6
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Primary Charging Assembly
5-7
TPM PCB

see "Replacing the Primary Charging Wire," on p. 4-103.
When TPM setting is OFF

Any operation is not necessary at replacement.
When TPM setting is ON
It is necessary to restore the TPM key which was backed up after changing the setting to ON.
1) Removing the network cable
Until the TPM key is restored, information might be leaked due to the inappropriate access
via network, so be sure to perform this operation appropriately.
2) Connecting the USB Memory after turning ON the main power switch
3) Restoring the TPM key
Management Settings > Data Management >TPM Settings> Restore of TPM Key

5) Execute the potential control. (COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>DPC)

see "Removing the Primary Charging Assembly," on p. 4-96.
1) Output a halftone image using the service mode.
TEST > PG > TYPE : 5
2) Execute the following procedure according to the density difference on the front and rear
sides of the test print image.
When the front side test print image is dark, execute step 3.
When the rear side test print image is dark, execute step 4.
When there is no uneven density, execute step 5 and the following.
When the front side test print image is dark
NOTE:
When the front side test print image is dark [1], execute step 3 until the density
CAUTION:
5-7
5
3)
Make the resin screws [A] and [C] a full turn clockwise. While referring to the
5-8
When the rear side test print image is dark
replacement procedure of the Primary Charging Assembly, install it to the main body, output
NOTE:
a test print and check the image.
When the rear side test print image is dark [2], execute step 4 until the density
CAUTION:
[1]
CAUTION:
4) Make the resin screws [B] and [D] a full turn clockwise. While referring to the replacement
procedure of the Primary Charging Assembly, install it to the main body, output a test print
[C]
[A]
F-5-5
5-8
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Pre-transfer Charging Wire
5-9
CAUTION:
see "Removing the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly," on p. 4-107.

[2]


see "Replacing the Pre-transfer Charging Wire," on p. 4-111.
[D]
[B]
F-5-6
5) Clean the Charging Wire using the service mode.

(FUNCTION > CLAENING > WIRE-CLN) Time required: Approx. 30 sec.
7) Execute the potential control. (COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC>DPC
8) Execute the density correction using the user mode.
("Settings/Registration" > "Adjustment/Maintenance" > "Adjust Image Quality" > "Correct
Density")
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Pre-transfer Charging Wire
5-9
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Photosensitive Drum
Photosensitive Drum
5-10

see "Removing the Photosensitive Drum," on p. 4-122.
1) Remove the EEROM.
1 Screw
1 Connector
F-5-8

F-5-7
3) Replace the ROM connected to the host machine with the drum ROM included in the drum.
CAUTION:
If the ROM is not replaced, the replaced drum and the drum-unique data stored in the
ROM are not matched. As a result, the 2D shading is not functioned normally.
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Photosensitive Drum
5-10
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Waste Toner Container
Drum Side Seals (Front and Rear)
ETB Unit / ETB
see "Removing the Side Seal," on p. 4-127.
see "Removing the ETB Unit," on p. 4-137.
see "Removing the ETB," on p. 4-139.
1) Applying Tospearl
5-11
Apply Tospearl on the surfaces of the Drum Side Seals (Front and Rear) and adhere it
uniformly with lint-free paper. In order to reduce adhesion of toner at both ends of the
Photosensitive Drum
Tospearl

see "Removing the Waste Toner Container," on p. 4-145.
1) Set the new Waste Toner Container.
2) Clear the waste toner counter. (COPIER>COUNTER>MISC>WST-TNR)
lint-free paper
Sheet
F-5-9
Developing Assembly, Developing Cylinder

see "Removing the Developing Assembly," on p. 4-128.
2) Supplying Developing Assembly toner. (COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL>TONER-S)
Potential Sensor / Potential Control PCB

see "Removing the Potential Control PCB Unit," on p. 4-166.
1) Adjust the Potential Sensor offset. (COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC > OFST)
Adjustment > When replacing parts > Image Formation System > Waste Toner Container
5-11
Adjustment > When replacing parts > External Auxiliary System > DC Controller PCB
Fixing System
5-12
Fixing Roller
DC Controller PCB
see "Removing the Fixing Roller, Insulating Bush and Thrust Stopper," on p. 4-186.
see "Removing the DC Controller PCB," on p. 4-231.
1) Grease Application
1. Before Replacing
1)Backup of the Service Mode data

COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DSRAMBUP

2) Clear the counter
2. After Replacing
1)Restoring the backup data

COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DSRAMRES
2)Switch OFF and then ON the main power.
3)Execute auto gradation adjustment.
4)Test print
Adjustment > When replacing parts > External Auxiliary System > DC Controller PCB
5-12
Troubleshooting
Print
Test
Faults
Image
Faults
Feed
Other
upgrade
Version
Initial Checks
Making
Messages
Error
Codes
Error
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting > Test Print > Overview
6-2
Test Print
Overview
PG
TYPE
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Pattern
Gradation
Normal copy/print
Grid
17 gradations Tbic rank 2
17 gradations 600dpi (134-line screen or
141-line screen)
Solid white
Halftone (density: 80H, Tbic rank 2,
without image correction)
Halftone (density: 80H, 134-line screen or
141-line screen, without image correction)
Solid black
Horizontal line (4 dots, 27 spaces)
15 to 50: For development
Transfer
Fogging
failure
Black
line
Image check item

Uneven
White Uneven
density
line
pitch
(rear/
front)
Right angle
accuracy
Straight line
accuracy
Side
Magnification
Shock
registration
ratio
PCB to generate PG
Yes
Yes
Yes
--Main Controller PCB 2

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

--T-6-1
NOTE:
When outputting a halftone test print, be sure to use PG TYPE:6 except in the following cases.
1. When checking the image of side registration adjustment, use PG TYPE:11.
2. When the setting value of the following service mode is "2" (TBIC is used for both the photo part and the text part), use PG TYPE:5.
COPIER > OPTION > USER > PH-D-SL2
Troubleshooting > Test Print > Overview
6-2
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > 17 gradations (TYPE=2/3)
How to View the Test Print
6-3
17 gradations (TYPE=2/3)
Grid (TYPE=1)
F-6-2
Check item
F-6-1
Check item
Right angle
accuracy/
Straight line
accuracy
Side
registration
Magnification
ratio
Check method
Assumed cause
Check whether lines in the horizontal/

vertical scanning directions are
Feed system failure or Laser Scanner Unit
paralleled to the paper and these lines failure is considered.
are at right angles to one another.
Floor at the installation site is extremely
Check the left margin.
distorted, or the feed system failure is
considered.
Check whether the grid is printed at
ETB and rollers feed system failure or
9.99mm intervals. (Check the image on laser exposure system failure (drum, Laser
the second side at duplex printing.)
Scanner) is considered.
Check method
Gradation
Check whether gradation in density is

made appropriately.
Black line
Check whether black lines appear on

the image.
White line
Check whether white lines appear on

the image.
Assumed cause
Drum failure, laser exposure system failure
or developing system failure is considered.
Laser light path failure, grid failure,
developing system failure, cleaning (drum,
ETB) failure or Pre-transfer Charging
Assembly failure is considered.
Primary Charging Wire failure or developing
system failure is considered.
T-6-3
T-6-2
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > 17 gradations (TYPE=2/3)
6-3
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > Halftone (TYPE=5/6/11/12/13/14)
Solid white (TYPE=4)
6-4
NOTE:
When outputting a halftone test print, be sure to use PG TYPE:6 except in the following
cases.
1. When checking the image of side registration adjustment, use PG TYPE:11.
2. When the setting value of the following service mode is "2"
(TBIC is used for both the photo part and the text part), use PG TYPE:5.
COPIER > OPTION > USER > PH-D-SL2
When changing the density of the test print, use the following service mode to change the
density: TEST>PG>K.
Check item
F-6-3
Check item
Fogging
Check method
Assumed cause
Check whether foggy image appears in Drum failure, laser exposure system failure
the blank area.
or developing system failure is considered.
T-6-4
Halftone (TYPE=5/6/11/12/13/14)
Check method
Assumed cause
Check the evenness of halftone

Transfer system failure or Pre-transfer
Transfer failure density. Check whether uneven image
Charging Assembly failure is considered.
or foggy image appears.
Check whether black lines appear on developing system failure, cleaning (drum,
Black line
the image.
Check whether white lines appear on Primary Charging Wire failure or developing
White line
the image.
Check whether lines appear on the
Drum failure, developing system failure,
Uneven pitch image in the horizontal scanning
laser exposure system failure or drivedirection.
related failure is considered.
Uneven
Primary Charging Assembly failure, drum
Check the density difference between
density
failure or developing system failure is
the front and rear sides.
(rear/front)
considered.
Floor at the installation site is extremely
Side
Check the left margin.
distorted, or the feed system failure is
registration
considered.
ETB and rollers feed system failure or
Check whether horizontal lines appear
Shock
laser exposure system failure (drum, Laser
on the image.
Scanner) is considered.
T-6-5
F-6-4
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > Halftone (TYPE=5/6/11/12/13/14)
6-4
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > Horizontal line (TYPE=8/9/10)
Solid black (TYPE=7)
Horizontal line (TYPE=8/9/10)
F-6-5
Check item
6-5
Check method
F-6-6
Assumed cause
Check the evenness of halftone

Transfer failure density. Check whether uneven image
or foggy image appears.
Uneven pitch image in the horizontal scanning
direction.
Uneven
density
(rear/front)
Check item
Transfer system failure or Pre-transfer

Charging Assembly failure is considered.
laser exposure system failure or driverelated failure is considered.
considered.
T-6-6
Black line
White line
Uneven pitch
Uneven
density
(rear/front)
Check method
Check whether black lines appear on
the image.
Check whether white lines appear on
the image.
image in the horizontal scanning
direction.
Assumed cause
developing system failure, cleaning (drum,
Primary Charging Wire failure or developing
laser exposure system failure or driverelated failure is considered.
considered.
T-6-7
Troubleshooting > Test Print > How to View the Test Print > Horizontal line (TYPE=8/9/10)
6-5
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Trailing Edge Shock Imaget
Image Faults
6-6
[Image Sample]
Feed direction
Trailing Edge Shock Imaget

55mm
[Location]
.ETB
[Cause]
Lines occur on the image due to shock when distortion on the belt is released while rotation
speed between the ETB and drum differs
[Condition]
When replacing the ETB
[Field Remedy]
1) Output a halftone image with the following conditions and check the output image

63mm
(LDR) or larger.
With shock image: go to step 2
2) Measure a distance from the trailing edge of the shock image.
3) Adjust using the following service mode. COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > TBLT-SPD:
Adjust the Transfer Belt speed
Shock image is located approx. 55mm from the trailing edge: Adjust the value by +10
gradually.
Shock image is located approx. 63mm from the trailing edge: Adjust the value by -10
F-6-7
gradually
4) Output a halftone image with the condition described in step 1 again and check the image.
With shock image: go to step 3.
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Trailing Edge Shock Imaget
6-6
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Uneven density correction by 2D shading
Uneven density correction by 2D shading

To correct uneven image density caused by uneven potential on the surface of the Drum.
NOTE:
This machine performs two dimensional shading which replaces uneven potential of
the Photosensitive Drum to the exposure amount to correct. (Default: two dimensional
shading is disabled.) As the data of Drums uneven potential, the data measured at
the shipment of the Drum is used. Therefore, as the life of the Photosensitive Drum
advances, it gets deteriorated, so the uneven potential becomes different from the one
at the shipment of the Drum. Although the uneven potential of the Drum is changed due
to the deterioration, the data can be corrected per horizontal/vertical scanning direction
line by outputting a test pattern image with the following procedure.
6-7
4) Output a halftone image with the following conditions and check if uneven density occurs.
(LDR) or larger.
When uneven density is seen: Go to step 5.
CAUTION:
This adjustment is executed when the preferred image is not output even if the Primary
Charging Wire height adjustment and secure watermark adjustment * are performed.
* Secure watermark adjustment: Function Settings>Common>Print Settings>Secure
Watermark Settings>Adjust Background/Character Contrast
F-6-8
1) Check that the two dimensional shading is enabled.

COPIER>OPTION>IMG-LSR>2D-SHADE 1: Enabled
5) Output a test pattern for two dimensional shading.

5-1) Set the cassette.Select the cassette which A3 (LDR) or larger paper is set.
2) Read the two dimensional shading ROM data.
Select "SHD-P1" and cassette using "numeric keypad".
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>2D-READ
CAUTION:
Be sure to turn OFF and then ON the main power switch after step 2. Uneven
density may be reduced by the two dimensional shading correction at the startup.
6-7
5-2) Output 3 sheets of the test pattern.
6-8
<Test pattern>
F-6-9
CAUTION:
It is difficult to judge whether uneven potential of the Photosensitive Drum

causes uneven density of the output image, so output 3 sheets of the test print
and adjust the area where all.
(If the same symptom is seen on the same spot of all 3 sheets, it is possibly
caused from the Drum.)
F-6-10
NOTE:
For the test print, the following 3 types can be output, but basically set SHD-P1
to output. The following shows the use case of each test print.
: When the image which uneven density occurs is the halftone image with light
density
: When the image which uneven density occurs is the halftone image with dark
density
: In case of the secure watermark image with uneven density
6-8
6-9
6) Check (T-shaped) halftone area of the output test print visually and adjust the area of
uneven density.
6-1) Take a note to write down the values of the following service mode.
When the adjustment cannot be performed appropriately, these values are required to
return to the initial values.
6-2) Adjust the target horizontal scanning direction (A to O) which uneven density is seen.
After selecting "M-LINE1/M-LINE2", select the target horizontal scanning window (A to
O), and enter the numerical value using "numerical keypad".
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>M-LINE1 (Level 2) Horizontal scanning
direction A to H
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>M-LINE2 (Level 2) Horizontal scanning
direction I to O
Not Use
CAUTION:
Be sure to switch the screen after entering the value. Unless the screen
is switched, the numerical value is not reflected. (Actually, the value is not
reflected on the screen, but it is retained internally.)
When the horizontal scanning direction (H line) is adjusted, the adjustment
value of the vertical scanning direction (1 to 27) is also changed.
Be sure to make adjustment in order of horizontal and vertical scanning
directions. If the adjustment is executed in the inverse order, it may not be
executed correctly.
F-6-11
Entering 96 or larger value can generate an error in potential control (E061).

In the case of an error, adjust the setting value between 0 and 95.
becomes darker.
6-9
6-10
6-3) After the adjustment, output a test print and check the image.
When uneven density is seen: Go to 6-4).
6-4) Adjust the target vertical scanning direction (1 to 27) which uneven density is seen.
After selecting "S-LINE1 to 4", select the target vertical scanning window (1 to 27),
and enter the numerical value using "numerical keypad".
COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>S-LINE1 (Level 2) Vertical scanning direction
1 to 8
9 to 16
17 to 24
25 to 32
CAUTION:
Be sure to switch the screen after entering the value. Unless the screen
is switched, the numerical value is not reflected. (Actually, the value is not
reflected on the screen, but it is retained internally.)
When the vertical scanning direction (25 and 26 lines) is adjusted, the
adjustment value of the horizontal scanning direction (A to P) is also
changed.
Not Use
becomes darker.
F-6-12
6-5) After the adjustment, output a test print and check the image to complete the
procedure.
CAUTION:
If the image cannot be adjusted correctly even with this adjustment procedure,
reenter the values written in step 6-1.
6-10
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > ADF black line
ADF black line
[Remedy]
Changing the setting value in the following service mode improves the problem of a black
Image processing has been improved with this equipment, which applies optimal image
processing to the text part and the photo part respectively. Improvement in image processing,
however, highlights imperceptible dusts at the original scanning position, which may appear
as a line on the image.
Before Reading
Original
6-11
line.
COPIER > ADJUST > AE > AE-TBL: Text density adjustment when adjusting image density
Setting value: Change the default (5) to 3
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON > SHARP: Setting of the sharpness level on the image
After Reading
Result
COPIER > OPTION > USER > PH-D-SL2: Setting of the halftone processing in text/photo
Platen roller 1
mode
CAUTION:
Platen roller 1
Stream reading
glass
Scanning position
When performing a field remedy, remind that the scan result changes as follows:
It sticks on the
original during
scanning.
Scanning of light halftone base is skipped (to be scanned as white color)

Blur text outline due to reduced edge emphasis level with the text
F-6-13
[Location]
Photo part appears coarsely
ADF
[Cause]
At stream reading with the ADF, imperceptible dusts (paper dust, toner, dust, etc.) adhere
and remain at the original scanning position, which causes a black line on the original image.
(Occurrence frequency is roughly 3/10,000 of scanning documents)
The dusts causing a black line are delivered outside the ADF together with the scanning
original; therefore, there will be no black line with the next original.
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > ADF black line
6-11
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller
6-12
Image error due to soil attached to the Cleaning

Brushes for the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex
Outlet Roller
Separation Failure Jam due to Deformation of

Separation Claw
[Location]
[Location]
Fixing Feed Unit
[Cause]
[Cause]
When the paper enters to the drum at separation failure, the Separation Claw may be
Soil attached to the 4 Cleaning Brushes contacting the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex
deformed. When the Separation Claw is deformed, the paper is easily caught by the leading
Outlet Roller
edge of the Separation Claw when the paper (especially curled paper) is fed, and a jam (Jam
Code: 0205) is likely to occur.
[Condition]
When soil is attached to the 4 Cleaning Brushes contacting the Duplex Right Roller and the
Duplex Outlet Roller, paper is fed with minor soil (paper dust and toner) attached to it, and the
soil is gradually attached to the Registration Front Roller. When the paper stops at the time of
registration, the rotating Registration Front Roller contacts the paper, which causes two trails
of soil of the roller width at 143mm from the paper edge.
Cleaning Brush
Paper
Duplex Right Roller
F-6-14
[Condition]
Job after a jam which occurs when the paper enters to the drum
When using curled paper (when using backside of printed paper, etc.)
[Field Remedy]
Replace the Separation Claw.
NOTE:
Replace the Separation Claw when a separation failure jam occurs even once..
Registration Roller
143
mm
Registration
Front Roller
F-6-15
6-12
[Image Sample]
6-13
<Procedure>
1) Open the Duplex Path.
Feed Direction
2) Remove the Fixed Feed Cover 1.

2 Screws
<Soil attached.143mm from the paper edge>
1 Claw
x2
143mm
F-6-16
[Field Remedy]
Follow the following procedure to replace the Cleaning Brushes contacting the Duplex Right
Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller and clean the relevant parts.
F-6-17
3) Remove the right side Duct.

1 Connector
1 Wire Saddle
2 Screws
1 Protrusion
<Preparation>
Remove the Registration Unit. (See Chapter 4, "Removing the Registration Unit.")
Protrusion
x2
F-6-18
6-13
4) Remove the left side Duct.
5) Remove the Duplex Driver PCB and the Mounting Base.
1 Connector
4 Wire Saddles
2 Harness Guide
1 Edge Saddle
1 Wire Saddle
11 Connectors
2 Screws
3 Screws
6-14
2 Claws
x5
x3
x11
x2
F-6-19
x3
x2
F-6-20
6-14
6) Remove the following parts.
9) Remove the following parts.
2 E-rings
3 Connectors
1 Timing Belt
1 Wire Saddle
2 Pulleys
2 Screws
6-15
2 Parallel Pin
x3
x2
F-6-23
10) Remove the Transfer High Voltage PCB Unit in the direction of the arrow.
F-6-21
7) Lift the ETB Unit in the direction of the arrow.
2 Hooks
8) Free the 2 claws, and remove the Transfer High Voltage PCB Unit Upper Cover in the
direction of the arrow.
2 Protrusions
Protrusion
x2
Hook
Hook
F-6-24
F-6-22
6-15
11) Place a sheet of paper on the Duplex Path, and remove a N-ring each from the Duplex
6-16
13) Pull out the Duplex Right Roller and remove the shaft at the rear.
Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller.

NOTE:
In this procedure, the procedure for removing the Duplex Right Roller is shown in steps
13 and 14. When removing the Duplex Outlet Roller, check the installation position in
step 15 and remove the Duplex Outlet Roller by a similar procedure.
CAUTION:
Be sure to place a sheet of paper on the Duplex Path because paper dust drops
during the following work.
CAUTION: Points to Caution at Work

Be careful not to damage the surfaces of the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex
Outlet Roller.
The bearing at the front and the bushing at the rear of the Duplex Right/Duplex
Outlet Roller are not fixed, so be careful not to drop them.
Bearing
Paper
N-ring
F-6-25
12) Remove the Fan Unit.

2 Wire Saddles
1 Connector
Bushing
1 Screws
F-6-27
Bushing
x2
F-6-26
F-6-28
6-16
6-17
14) Move the Duplex Right Roller toward the rear and remove the shaft from the Fixing Feed
Unit Side Plate. Then, move the Duplex Right Roller in the direction of the arrow and take it
out from the opening on the top of the Fixing Feed Unit.
F-6-29
15) Remove the Duplex Outlet Roller in a similar procedure referring to the procedure for
removing the Duplex Right Roller in steps 13 and 14.
NOTE:
The installation position of the Duplex Outlet Roller is shown in the following figure.
F-6-30
6-17
16) Remove the 4 Cleaning Brushes contacting the Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet
Roller.
6-18
18) Remove the paper on the Duplex Path, and clean the entire perimeter of each of the 4
rollers with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating the roller by hand.
17) Clean the four areas where the Cleaning Brushes are attached with lint-free paper
F-6-32
19) Attach new 4 Cleaning Brushes with reference to the upper right of the plate where they
are going to be attached.
F-6-31
Reference for
attachment
F-6-33
6-18
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Uneven density
20) Clean the four areas on the removed Duplex Right Roller and the Duplex Outlet Roller
with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
6-19
Uneven density
[Cause]
Uneven density occurs on the image because of uneven developing performance or change
in drum characteristics due to wear.
[Field Remedy]
Is it straight uneven density?
YES
NO
Adjust developing bias
F-6-34
21) Install the removed parts in reverse order.
Adjust height of the Primary Charging Wire

(Set the dark area apart)
22) Open the Right Door.

24) Clean the entire perimeter of each of the 2 rollers and Registration Front Roller with lintfree paper moistened with alcohol while rotating the roller by hand.
Is it fixed?
YES
NO
CAUTION:
When rotating the roller by hand, be sure not to touch the surface of the roller but to
hold a side face.
Enable 2D shading
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR > 2D-SHADE; ON
Is it fixed?
Roller
YES
NO
Execute 2D shading individual correction
Field remedy is complete

F-6-36
F-6-35
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Uneven density
6-19
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Smeared image
6-20
Smeared image
[Cause]
OR
Excess toner is transferred on the paper that causes toner collapse at the time of fixing, which
Feed Direction
F-6-37
In the case of dark/light image at either the left or right side on the image in horizontal
direction, adjust height of the Primary Charging Wire and check the output result. When
making adjustment, execute the work while keeping the wire at dark area apart.
can generate smeared image on the image. The following are assumed causes of smeared
image:
When the paper type is changed
Toner deterioration
Rapid change in environment (High temperature <- -> Low temperature)
Feed Direction
< Smeared Image >
OR
Feed Direction
F-6-38
If it is not a straight uneven density, change the value of the following service mode in
decrement of -10 and check the output result.
(Setting value: default 0, -10, -20, -50)
Side Line
CAUTION :
Smeared image may also occur exclusively in the area 5 to 10 mm from the leading edge of
Executing the above setting can generate smeared image or foggy image.
the paper when there is burr on the leading edge of the paper (jagged edge formed when the
paper was cut by a cutter).
It is caused by toner being pushed backward by the power of the ETB, which is pushed down
After switching the mode to enable 2D shading in the following service mode, turn OFF/ON
by the burr when it passes through the transfer nips, to go back to the original position.
the main power and check the output result.
Burr
Toner
Photosensitive Drum

COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR > 2D-SHADE Setting value: 1 (ON)
ETB
Output the test pattern for 2D shading and adjust the uneven density area individually.
Transfer Roller
Paper
Smeared image
F-6-39
6-20
[Field Remedy]
6-21
Select the following: Settings/Registration > Adjustment Maintenance > Adjust Image > Auto
Adjust Gradation; and check the output result.
1) In COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR > P-TR-OF1, set the values to "4", "7", and "-10" in that
order from the left, and check the output result.
Execute Auto Adjust Gradation

Settings/Registration > Adjustment/Maintenance >
Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation
CAUTION :
Executing the above setting may cause the Pre-transfer Charging Wire to be easily
soiled. Be sure to check for soiling of the Charging Wire at the time of inspection since
heavy soiling may cause vertical lines to occur on the rear side of the image.
YES
Is it fixed?
NO
1) COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT > VL-OFST; set the value of VL-OFST to 10
Increased current of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly

COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR > P-TR-OF1; set the values to "4", "7", and "-10"
Check the image
2) Select the following: COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC; execute DPC and then check the
output result.
3) If the symptom is not improved, further increase the value in step 1) to 20, 30and then
execute step 2).
YES
Is it fixed?
CAUTION :
NO
Changing the above setting can cause reduced density or thinner line
Reduce the density

COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT>VL-OFST; increase the value of VL-OFST
COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC; Execute DPC
If the smeared image is not improved within the acceptable range for density and line width,
execute skipping process in the following procedure:
1) COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > RAG-SW; change the value to 1
Is the density/line width fixed

within the acceptable range?
2) COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > RAG-CONT; change to 1 and check the output result.
YES
3) If the symptom is not improved, change the value in step 2) to 2, 3and check the output
result.
NO
CAUTION :
Execute skipping processing (within the acceptable range for density/line width)
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > RAG-SW; set 1
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX > RAG-CONT; set 1 to 3
Check the image
Changing the above setting can cause minor skipping in the text part.
Complete
F-6-40
6-21
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Adjusting the Edge Emphasis Level
Adjusting the Edge Emphasis Level
Example: In the case of the environment where the relative value "135" is suitable as the
default value.
The edge emphasis level of image can be adjusted in both user mode and service mode, but
the use conditions differ.
1) Set "SHARP" to "4".

2) Set "Sharpness", which is set to "+1" level, as the default in the user mode (Function
Settings > Copy > Change Default Settings).
User mode
Item code
6-22
Service mode
Other Functions > Sharpness
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-MCON>

SHARP
Operator
User
Service technician
Purpose
To make adjustment for each original To set the central value of edge
to be copied
emphasis to control individual
variability or environmental change
during transportation/after installation.
Text/photo area
Individual
Batch
Setting range
-3 to +3 level
1 to 5
Default value
0 level
3
Setting value at power Canceled (Default value can be
Retained
OFF/ON or at reset
retained.)
T-6-8
The following table shows the edge emphasis level by the combination of "SHARP" and
"Sharpness" settings, using the relative value when the default is 100.
Service mode "SHARP"
1
2
3
4
5
-3
-2
25
40
45
50
55
65
User mode "Sharpness"

-1
0
+1
+2
50
65
75
85
100
60
85
100
115
140
100
115
125
135
150
140
145
150
155
160
+3
175
T-6-9
Images become smoother as values in the table become smaller, while they become sharper
as values become larger.
Note that, when "Sharpness" is the upper limit or lower limit, the relative value stays constant
regardless of the "SHARP" setting, therefore the edge emphasis effect does not change even
if the settings are changed.
Normally, adjustment is made for each copy on the Touch Panel based on the service
mode setting, but depending on the environment or paper type (coarse surface, etc.), edge
emphasis may not turn out the way the user expected.
In this case, edge emphasis level customized for the user can be set by setting the current
value of "Sharpness" as the default value.
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Adjusting the Edge Emphasis Level
6-22
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Soiling at an interval equal to the circumference of the Developing Sleeve
Soiling at an interval equal to the circumference of the

Developing Sleeve
6-23
3) Wipe the surface of the sleeve with dry lint-free paper.

CAUTION:
Do not use water or alcohol.
[Location]
Developing Sleeve
4) Execute service mode > COPIER > TEST > PG > TYPE to output a halftone image (PG12),
[Cause]
If the surface of the sleeve is soiled, uneven toner coating occurs, causing the soiling of the
same shape to appear at intervals equal to the circumference of the sleeve (approx. 53 mm)
in the vertical scanning direction.

If white spots occur, go to step 5.
5) Execute service mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > DEV-ROT.
6) Check the image.
If the white spots persist, execute step 5 again.
CAUTION:
Heavy use of DEV-ROT can result in deterioration of developer or toner scattering.
F-6-41
[Field Remedy]
1) Rotate the sleeve in the normal direction and identify the location where the soiling occurs.
CAUTION:
Do not turn the sleeve in the reverse direction.
2) Remove the toner found at that location using a blower, etc.

CAUTION:
If toner is dry wiped instead of removed, it may be fixed on the surface of the sleeve.
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > Soiling at an interval equal to the circumference of the Developing Sleeve
6-23
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > MTF Adjustment > Adjustment Procedure
MTF Adjustment
6-24
Adjustment Procedure
The MTF value of the Reader Unit may differ from the factory setting value depending on the
1) Obtain the MTF adjustment chart.
condition of transportation/storage. If the machine is installed without correcting the value, it

may cause an image failure such as moire. Therefore, readjust the MTF value by reading the
MTF adjustment chart at installation as needed.
Series
MTF Adjustment Type

Copyboard
Front side
Back side
reading
stream
stream
reading
reading
Color B&W Color B&W Color B&W
Model
imagePRESS
1135/1125/1110 Series
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
C5051/C5045/
C5035/C5030 Series
MTF (128g)
FY9-9453-000 MK0808 (100)
: Need adjustment, -: Not need adjustment
Simultaneous
duplex reading *1
Copyboard
reading
Reverse duplex
reading
Simultaneous
duplex reading
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
Reverse duplex
C9075 PRO/9070 PRO/9065 PRO/
reading
9060 PRO/C7065/7055 Series
Simultaneous
duplex reading
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
Simultaneous
8105/8095/8085 Series
duplex reading
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
Reverse duplex
6075/6065/6055 Series
reading
Simultaneous
duplex reading
-*2
F-6-42
NOTE:
The end with a dark color square will be the trailing edge at reading. When adjusting
the copyboard reading, place the chart on the Copyboard Glass to make the dark color
square comes at the right side.
T-6-10
*1: Respond by another adjustment (Refer to the Service Manual).

*2: In the case of using a simultaneous duplex reading model as a copyboard model, B&W
adjustment is also required.
2) Set the MTF adjustment chart.

Description of adjustment
Copyboard reading
Front side stream reading
Back side stream reading
Location to set the chart

Copyboard Glass
DADF Document Pickup Tray
DADF Document Pickup Tray (turn over the chart when setting)
T-6-11
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > MTF Adjustment > Adjustment Procedure
6-24
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > MTF Adjustment > When Disabling the MTF Adjustment
When Making Fine Adjustment After Sampling the MTF Value
3) Execute sampling of the MTF value.

Description of adjustment Color/B&W (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R >
Copyboard reading
6-25
Color
B&W
Color
B&W
Color
B&W
CLM-PLTN
BWM-PLTN
CLM-DF1
BWM-DF1
CLM-DF2
BWM-DF2
1) Set the MTF value for fine adjustment to 1.

Color/B&W (Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R >
Color
B&W
CLM-TGT
BWM-TGT
T-6-14
T-6-12
NOTE:
In the case of executing sampling of the MTF value several times, execute in arbitrary
order.
NOTE:
The MTF value for fine adjustment can be set only after executing sampling of the MTF
value.
2) Recalculate the MTF filter coefficient.
(Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD >
MTF-CLC
4) During the adjustment, START is indicated, and once it is terminated normally, OK! is
indicated.
T-6-15
3) Print the image with moir, and check that moir is not appeared on the image.
At abnormal termination, NG1 to 3 is indicated.
If moir appears, determine the image quality by asking the user to compare the images
NOTE:
If NG1 to 3 is indicated, check the location to set the chart and direction of the chart,
and then executed the adjustment again.
before adjustment, after sampling of the MTF value, and after making a fine adjustment.
4) If using the MTF value after sampling as the MTF value, set the MTF value for fine
adjustment to 0 and recalculate the MTF filter coefficient.
5) Check that the initial setting of the MTF value is set to 1.
If using the MTF value before the adjustment, it disables the MTF adjustment.
Copyboard reading
Color
B&W
Color
B&W
Color
B&W
CLPLT-EN
BWPLT-EN
CLDF1-EN
BWDF1-EN
CLDF2-EN
BWDF2-EN
When Disabling the MTF Adjustment

1) By setting the initial setting of the MTF value to 0, the MTF value is initialized to the
factory setting value.
T-6-13
Copyboard reading
NOTE:
The initial value of the MTF value is updated by switching the Control Panel screen.
After the adjustment, the corresponding MTF value is corrected.
(Lv.1) COPIER > ADJUST > CCD > MTF-xx, MTF2-xx
Color
B&W
Color
B&W
Color
B&W
CLPLT-EN
BWPLT-EN
CLDF1-EN
BWDF1-EN
CLDF2-EN
BWDF2-EN
T-6-16
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB or the Scanner Unit, check the initial value of
the MTF value. If the value is 1, it will be necessary to execute the adjustment.
6) Print the image with moir, and check that moir is not appeared on the image.
If moir appears, make a fine adjustment.
Troubleshooting > Image Faults > MTF Adjustment > When Disabling the MTF Adjustment
6-25
Troubleshooting > Other > Adjusting rotation of the Upright Control Panel Arm
Feed Faults
6-26
Other
Paper wrinkle
Adjusting rotation of the Upright Control Panel Arm
<Location>
If rotation of the Upright Control Panel Arm has become loose, retighten the Fixation Screws
Fixing Roller, Pressure Roller
securing the Arm Rotation Adjustment Ring according to the following procedure.
<Cause>
Right after the startup, temperature is different between the center and the edge of the
<Procedure>
Fixing Roller (temperature: center > edge).
1) Remove the Shaft Support Cover (Left) and the Shaft Support Cover (Right).
Because a slippery solid black image does not match to the nip shape when it is fed, the
2) Open the DADF and retighten the 2 Fixation Screws securing the Arm Rotation Adjustment
center of paper is pulled toward the feeding direction, causing paper wrinkle.
Ring.
<Condition>
Timing: Approx. 20 sheets immediately after the startup first time for the day
Paper size: Paper size larger than B4
<Field Remedy>
If 2 is set, control temperature is increased by performing idle rotation when printing to
A3/LDR or larger size paper at the start of printing in a normal humidity/high humidity
environment. Paper wrinkle which occurs at this time can be decreased, but first copy time
If paper wrinkle occurs on paper larger than B4, increase the setting value from 2 in
increments of 1 until paper wrinkle is alleviated.
If paper wrinkle occurs on B4 size paper, increase the setting value from 4 in increments of
1 until paper wrinkle is alleviated.
COPIER>OPTION>BODY>FX-WNKL
F-6-43
[Setting values]
0: OFF
1: OFF (Default)
NOTE:
If rotation of the arm is still loose after retightening the Fixation Screws according to
Adjusting rotation of the Upright Control Panel Arm, change the phase difference
between the Arm Rotation Adjustment Ring and the Fixation Screws according to the
following procedure.

6-26
1) Open the DADF and loosen the 2 Fixation Screws securing the Arm Rotation Adjustment
Ring.
6-27
3) Pull out the Upright Control Panel and the Arm Shaft, and rotate the Arm Rotation
Adjustment Ring to change the phase so that the Fixation Screws do not contact with the
dents formed by tightening the screws.
F-6-44
2) Remove the 3 Stepped Screws securing the Arm Shaft.
F-6-46
4) Insert the Upright Control Panel and the Arm Shaft, and retighten the 2 screws loosened in
step 3.
x3
F-6-45
6-27
Troubleshooting > Other > Remedy to be implemented when the ETB Disengage Member (Transfer Frame Stopper) is left unremoved
Remedy to be implemented when the ETB Disengage

Member (Transfer Frame Stopper) is left unremoved
6-28
3) Remove the Fixing Feed Right Front Cover.

2 Screws
When the power is turned ON after installation, E017-0003 may occur due to the ETB
Disengage Member (Transfer Frame Stopper) left unremoved.
x2
When this error occurs, the ETB Disengage Member (Transfer Frame Stopper) is caught
between the ETB Unit and the plate of the machine and cannot be removed. Moreover, one
side of the Photosensitive Drum is in contact with the ETB Unit, so pulling out the Fixing Feed
Unit by sheer force may result in damage to the ETB Unit.
When the ETB Disengage Member (Transfer Frame Stopper) is left unremoved, follow the
following steps to implement remedy.
<Field Remedy>
1) Turn OFF the power.
Fixing Feed Right Front Cover
F-6-48
4) Remove the Fixing Feed Right Front Upper Cover.

Loosen
1 Screw
Fixing Feed Right
Front Upper Cover
F-6-47
F-6-49
6-28
5) Remove the Fan Duct.
6-29
7) Remove the Transfer Frame Stopper.
2 Screws
Duct
Transfer Frame Stopper
F-6-52
F-6-50
6) Rotate the Disengage Gear about 90 degrees counterclockwise by hand and lower the ITB
Unit.
CAUTION:
The load of rotating the gear is heavy, so be careful not to get injured.
ITB Unit
Disengage Gear
F-6-51
6-29
Troubleshooting > Other > Checking nip width
6-30
Checking nip width

In the case of paper wrinkle or fixing failure, check that the fixing nip width is within the
specified range. Note that the fixing nip width of this equipment cannot be adjusted in the
field.
1) Print approx. 20 sheets of A4 size paper.
3) COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING > NIP-CHK
A sheet is stopped once in a state held by the Fixing Nip area, and is delivered approx. 20
seconds later.
If the nip widths are as follow it is judged as normal: 5.0 to 6.0 mm at the center (b), and
difference between front (a) and rear (b) is within 0.5 mm.
In the case of failure, check if there are any damaged parts (*), and replace the damaged
parts (if any).
* Gear, Bearing, Fixing Roller, Pressure Roller and Fixing Assembly
Nip width
Edge
Center
Edge
Paper feed direction

F-6-53
Troubleshooting > Other > Checking nip width
6-30
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Overview > Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool
Controller Self Diagnosis
6-31
Overview
Two types of error diagnosis tools are installed in this machine, and stored in the locations
Introduction
shown below.
Operation of the (2 types of) error diagnosis tools added to the main body and remedy for
errors are described. These tools can reduce time to determine cause of errors occurred in
DC Controler PCB
field and improve the accuracy of specifying error locations.

This manual can be applied when the main body is placed in the following conditions.
The main body does not boot. (In such a case that the Control Panel is not displayed or the
Option
HDD
Controller system
failure diagnosis
tool
Reader
progress bar does not work, etc.)

An error is suspected to have occurred in the Main Controller PCB 1/2 and other related
PCBs (child PCBs such as SDRAM or TPM mounted in the Main Controller PCB 1/2).
PCBs and units diagnosed by each tool are as follow:
Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool

Main Controller PCB 1 side <Main Controller PCB 1, SDRAM, FLASH Memory PCB>
Control Panel
Start system
failure
diagnosis
tool
Main
Controller
PCB 1
All-night Power Supply, Non-all-night Power Supply
Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool

Main Controller PCB 1 side <Main Controller PCB 1, SDRAM, TPM PCB>
Operation
panel
All-night/Non-allnight Power Supply
Main Controller PCB 2 side <Main Controller PCB 2, SDRAM, Memory PCB>
Option
F-6-54
Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool covers the components shown in the red frame (solid line)
HDD>
in the figure. Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool covers the components shown in the
blue frame (dotted line).
Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool

This tool automatically checks the Control Panel, Main Controller PCB 1, All-night Power
Supply, and Non-all-night Power Supply, and notifies the result by the number of light-out and
blinking interval of the lamp on the Control Panel.
This tool is installed in the ROM of Main Controller PCB 1.
Therefore, regardless the version of MN-CNT, this tool can be used even when an error
occurs in child PCBs or when the Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool cannot be booted.
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Overview > Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool
6-31
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Overview > Layout Drawing
Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool
6-32
This tool automatically checks the Main Controller PCB 1/2, child PCBs mounted on the Main
Controller PCB 1/2, and HDD, and display the result on the Control Panel.
This tool is installed in HDD.
Therefore, this tool cannot be used when an error occurred in HDD or HDD cannot be
accessed.
Layout Drawing
Layout Drawing of PCBs Subject to Diagnosis

Flash PCB
TPM PCB
HDD(Option)
HDD
(Standard)
F-6-56
TPM PCB
Flash PCB
F-6-55
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Overview > Layout Drawing
6-32
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Basic Flowchart
6-33
Basic Flowchart
Basic Check Items

Check all of the items shown below.
Turn O N the m ain power s witc h.
BAT1
DDR2-SDRAM
512MB Standard
DDR2-SDRAM
512MB Option
Does the Pow er Supply LED
on the Control Panel light up?
J13
No
Ex ec ute bas ic c hec k.
Yes
Memory PCB
Is the Control Panel dis play ed?
No
Ex ec ute Boot Sy s tem Error

Diagnos is Tool.
Yes
F-6-57
Does the main body boot c orrec tly ?
No
Ex ec ute Controller Sy s tem Error

Diagnos is Tool.
Yes
Take an ac tion appropriate f or
the error.
F-6-58
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Basic Flowchart
6-33
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation
6-34
Basic Check Items

Control Panel(Flat)
1. Check if the Leakage Breaker is turned OFF.

2. Check if the Power Supply Plug is disconnected.
3. Check if the Connection Cable between the Main Controller PCB 1 and Control Panel is
disconnected.
4. Check if the Connection Main Controller PCB 1 and Main Controller PCB 2 definitely?
5. Check if the Connection An All-night Power Supply.
Operation
Operations of the two diagnosis tools are explained below.
Use each tool according to the following purposes.
When the main body does not boot (the Control Panel is not displayed): Execute Boot
Upright Control Panel
System Error Diagnosis.

When an error is suspected to have occurred in the Main Controller PCB 1/2 or child PCBs
mounted on the Main Controller PCB 1/2: Execute Controller System Error Diagnosis.
Boot System Error Diagnosis

1) Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the Control Panel Energy Saver
Switch.
F-6-60
Main Power Switch

F-6-59
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation
6-34
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Diagnosis Time
2) Right after the Main Power Supply Lamp lights up once, it lights out instantly, and diagnosis
6-35
<When an error is detected by diagnosis>
starts.
The Main Power Supply Lamp repeats high-speed blinking after completion of a check in
(When the Main Power Supply Lamp lights out, you can release your finger from the
which an error is detected. (See *1.)
Control Panel Switch.)
For example, when an error is detected in Check 2, the Main Power Supply Lamp lights out
twice and repeats high-speed blinking (ON/OFF in 0.3 seconds interval).
When an error is detected, be sure to count the number of times the Main Power Supply
Lamp lights out.
For detailed results, see "Error Diagnosis".
F-6-61
Diagnosis Time
F-6-63
*1: When an error is detected, there is a possibility that the Main Power Supply Lamp may not
Diagnosis is completed in approx. 1 minute.
perform high-speed blinking but perform other operation (continuous light-up, light-out). In
this case, remove and then install the SDRAM on the Main Controller PCB 1.
<When the diagnosis result is normal>

After the Main Power Supply Lamp repeatedly lights out 5 times, it lights up and the diagnosis
is completed.
If the error is not resolved, execute the remedy of the Check No. which is not completed
normally. (For details, see "Error Diagnosis".)
*2: Although diagnosis time for Check 3, and Check 4 is longer than that of other Checks, it is
After completion of the diagnosis, this machine executes normal boot sequence.
correct operation.
F-6-62
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Operation > Diagnosis Time
6-35
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis > Boot Method
6-36
Controller System Error Diagnosis
Error Diagnosis
<Boot System Error Diagnosis Table>
Boot Method
The error locations are identified according to the following table.
1) Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the numeric keys '2' and '4'
simultaneously.
F-6-65
Board
Main Power Switch
Board
F-6-64
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis > Boot Method
F-6-66
6-36
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis > Diagnosis Time
2) Keep pressing the numeric keys (for approx. 20 seconds) until the following screen appears
on the Control Panel.
6-37
Diagnosis Time
Diagnosis is completed in approx. 3 minutes.
The result is displayed on the Control Panel.
<When the diagnosis result is normal>
F-6-67
Note:
When this tool is not installed correctly, the following regular screen is displayed.
In this case, perform the following remedy.
Turn OFF the Main Power Supply Switch again, and execute step 1 and 2 shown
above.
If this tool still does not boot, it means that BCT is deleted. So, install BCT.
If BCT is not installed correctly, "--.--" is displayed in Service
Mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION>BCT) in the main body.
F-6-69
<When an error is detected by diagnosis>

Detailed information is displayed under the judgment result. In detailed information, the name
of the test where an error was detected is indicated.
F-6-70
<How to view the error result>

The following screen is an enlarged view of the detailed information indicated above.
Explanation of the detailed error information is described.
F-6-68
F-6-71
6-37
[no] means that optional PCBs are not mounted.

When [no] is displayed although an optional PCB is mounted, it means that an error has been
SN-6 PCI
Config
SOC
occurring.
[NG] means that an error occurred to PCBs mounted as standard.
Note:
Once the tool is activated, this machine reboots after approx. 2 minutes.
After completion of the diagnosis, be sure to turn OFF and then ON the main power.
By turning the power OFF, the operation of this tool completes.
<Controller System Error Diagnosis Table>

The error locations are identified according to the following table.
Test Name
SN-1
IA-DDR2
SDRAM
SN-2 SM BUS
IA DIMM0
SN-3 SM BUS
IA DIMM1
SN-4 SM BUS
IA Clock Gen
SN-5 SM BUS
SOC DIMM
Description
Check an error
between the Main
Controller PCB 1 and
SDRAM on the Main
Controller PCB 1
Check an SM bus
error in SDRAM on
the Main Controller
PCB 1
Check an SM bus
error in SDRAM on
the Main Controller
PCB 1
Check an SM
bus error in Clock
Generator on the Main
Controller PCB 1
Check an SM bus
error in the Main
Controller PCB 1 and
SDRAM on the Main
Controller PCB 2
Assumed Error
Location
Remedy
Error
Code
Main Controller Replace the Main Controller PCB 1. PCB 1

SDRAM on
Main Controller
PCB 1
Main Controller
PCB 1
Main Controller
PCB 2
SDRAM on
Main Controller
PCB 2
Test Name
1. Check the connection of the Main Controller PCB 1, and the Main
Controller PCB 2.
2. Check the installation of SDRAM
on the Main Controller PCB 2.
3. Replace SDRAM on the Main
Controller PCB 2.
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB
2.
1.
Description
Check a PCI bus error
in the Main Controller
PCB 1 and the Main
Controller PCB 2
SN-7 PCI
Check a LAN chip
Config LANC error on the Main
Controller PCB 1
SN-8 CPLD Check failure of CPLD
chip on the Main
Controller PCB 1
SN-9 LANC Check failure of LANC
SPI
SPI on the Main
Controller PCB 1
SN-10 RTC
Check failure of RTC
CHECK
on the Main Controller
PCB 1
SN-11 TPM
Check failure of the
TPM PCB on the Main
Controller PCB 1
* TPM PCB is not
installed in products
for China. So, the
diagnosis results NG.
SN-12
Check an error
SOC-DDR2 between SDRAMs on
SDRAM
the Main Controller
PCB 2
SN-13 SRI
CHECK
SN-14 JUST
ROM READ
SN-15
FRAM
Assumed Error
Location
Main Controller
PCB 1
Main Controller
PCB 2
SDRAM on
Main Controller
PCB 2
Main Controller
PCB 1
6-38
Remedy
Error
Code
1. Check the connection of the

Main Controller PCB 1, and the
Main Controller PCB 2.
2. Replace the Main Controller
PCB 1.
3. Replace the Main Controller
PCB 2.
Replace the Main Controller PCB 1. -

Main Controller 1. Check the installation of the TPM E746
PCB 1
PCB.
TPM PCB
2. Replace the TPM PCB.
1.
Main Controller
PCB 2
SDRAM on
Main Controller
PCB 2
1. Check the installation of SDRAM E748

2. Replace SDRAM on the Main
Controller PCB 2.
2.
Check On-board BUS Main Controller Replace the Main Controller PCB 2. on the Main Controller PCB 2
PCB 2
Check On-board ROM Main Controller It is always no indication.
on the Main Controller PCB 2
A result become NG
PCB 2
Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.
Check Main Controller Main Controller 1. Check the installation of Memory E355
PCB 2 and the
PCB 2
PCB on the Main Controller PCB 2.
connection of the
Memory PCB
2. Replace Memory PCB on the
memory PCB
2.
6-38
6
Test Name
Description
SN-16 SRAM Check failure of

SRAM on the Main
Controller PCB 2.
A battery emptied
check
SN-17 GS
Check On-board BUS
on the Main Controller
PCB 2
SN-18 HDD Check an HDD I/F
error
SN-19
BOARD
CONNECT
IA-SOC
SN-20
BOARD
CONNECT
SOC-DCON
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis > Restrictions
Assumed Error
Location
Remedy
6-39
Error
Code
Main Controller Replace the Main Controller PCB 2. E246

PCB 2
E350
E355

Main Controller
PCB 2
HDD Cable
HDD
1. Check the cable connection of

E602
the HDD.
2. Check the connection between
the Main Controller PCB 2 and the
3. Replace the HDD.
Check failure between Main Controller 1. Check failure between the Main E748
the Main Controller
PCB 1
Controller PCB 2 and the the Main
PCB 2 and the Main Main Controller Controller PCB 1.
Controller PCB 1
PCB 2
2.
1.
Check failure between Main Controller 1. Check failure between the Main the Main Controller
PCB 2
Controller PCB 2 and DC controller
PCB 2 and the DC
DC controller
PCB.
controller PCB
PCB
2.Replace the DC controller PCB
2.
T-6-17
Restrictions
<Boot System Error Diagnosis>
If an error cannot be resolved by executing remedy according to the error diagnosis table
described above, consider boot failure of the main power supply and take appropriate
actions.
<Controller System Error Diagnosis>

Regarding the diagnosis for the test names (SN-1, 2, 3,6,12,18,19), if an error occurs in the
diagnosis under the test names, this diagnosis tool will not boot.
When no PCBs are installed on the Main Controller PCB 1/2, the following judgment results
are displayed.
Standard PCB: [NG]
Optional PCB: [OK]
However, [no] is displayed in detailed error information for optional PCBs.
Troubleshooting > Controller Self Diagnosis > Controller System Error Diagnosis > Restrictions
6-39
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Overview of Version Upgrade
6-40
Version upgrade
Overview
Overview of Version Upgrade
The system software version is upgraded in 2 steps, downloading and writing the new version of the system software.
Downloading System Software

This machine supports the following 3 downloading methods.
1. Download via the service support tool (hereinafter SST)
Connect this machine to the PC by the cross cable to download the system software using SST installed in the PC.
2. Download using the USB memory storage device
Insert the USB memory storage device storage device to the slot of the machine and download the system software stored in the device.
3. Download via Contents Delivery System (hereinafter CDS)
Access to CDS via Internet to download the system software directly to the machine.
SST
System Software
System CD
System Software
Host Machine
Download mode
Normal mode
/(Safe mode)
Copy the
System Software
Write the
system software
Restart
Automatically restarted
USB menu
USB memory
storage device
System Software
Temporary Memory Space
Activate the machine with the

new system software version
Done
CDS
System Software
Updater
F-6-72
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Overview of Version Upgrade
6-40
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Download Mode
Writing System Software
6-41
Download Mode
The system software downloaded in either of the above-mentioned methods is stored in the
When the version is upgraded via SST or with the USB memory storage device storage
temporary memory space.
device, start the machine in Download mode. This machine has the following 2 Download
After the system software is successfully downloaded, restart the machine to write the
modes similarly with other iR-series models.
software in the machine.

In case the main power switch is turned OFF during the writing process, the machine may not
be started.
This machine supports the remote version upgrade via CDS. When upgrading the system
software via CDS, the warning message is shown on the control panel to alert the user not to
turn OFF the power switch.
Normal mode(recommend):
Start from Copier > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > Download.
Conventionally, the main power switch of this machine was turned ON while pressing 1
and 7 keys. However, the procedure above automatically assigns a static IP address and
enables the download same as before.
You can obtain the version information and avoid unnecessary download and errors.
F-6-73
NOTE:
When entering Download mode, be sure to go into Service mode after all items of main
menu have been displayed.
This machine reads the version information of system software when it starts. You must
start Download mode after the version information has been obtained.
When the system software is successfully written, the machine is automatically restarted to
activate the downloaded system software.
If any error occurs during the writing process, the error code, E753-0001, is shown.
The name of the system software component is shown to the left of the error log message,
version up..error. Check the name if the software is for the option not attached to the
machine. If so, turn OFF / ON the machine to recover the error (see Troubleshooting for
details).
Safe mode:
Press 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric keypad when turning on the power.
Be sure to use normal mode when using download mode except in a case where it is not
possible to start this machine and enter service mode or where format of the HDD is going
to be executed.
F-6-74
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Download Mode
6-41
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > System Software Components
6-42
System Software Components

The table below shows the system software components for this machine.
Display on SST
Software to be upgraded
Host Machine
Main Controller
MEAP Controller
Language Module
Remote UI Contents
RUI portal
Mobile print
UI-BOX
UI-COPY
UI-Intro
UI-SEND
Voice Synthesis Dictionary
Paper Type Information File
Service Mode Contents
Printer Controller
WebDAV Contents
Resources for Web Browser
Reader Controller(2-sided Single Pass)
Reader Controller(2-sided Double Pass)
FAX Board Boot Program
Registered
name of
product
iA6075
Fax Board Main Program
Staple Finisher-E1/Booklet Finisher-E1

Document Insertion Unit-L1/Document
Insertion / Folding Unit-H1
External 2-hole Puncher A1
iAxxxx
Name of
system
software
SST
USB
memory
Others
SYSTEM
MEAPCON
LANGUAGE
RUI
RPTL
MOBPR
BOX
COPY
INTRO
SEND
TTS
MEDIA
SMCNT
DCON
WEBDAV
BROWSER
RCOND
RCONS
G3CCB
G3CCM
KEY
Key/Certificatefor Encrypted
Communication
OCR Libraly
Finisher Controller
Saddle Controller
Inserter Controller
INF_LH
SDICT
FIN_CON
SDL_CON
INF_CON
Punch Controller
EXP_A1
EXP_CON
FIN_E1
How to upgrade versions

Remarks
Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-C1

Color Image Reader Unit-C1
Super G3 FAX Board-AF1/Super G3 2nd Line Fax
Board-AF1/Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board-AE1
Super G3 FAX Board-AF1/Super G3 2nd Line Fax
Board-AF1/Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board-AE1

Booklet Finisher-E1
Document Insertion Unit-L1/Document Insertion /
Folding Unit-H1
External 2-hole Puncher A1
This machine holds the increased number of system software components compared to conventional iR machines to meet vastly extended functionality.
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > System Software Components
T-6-18
6-42
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Note on Download Process
The Image Reader for this machine consists of 2-sided Single Pass and 2-sided Double
Pass, requiring specific system software for each.
The name of the system software for the 2-sided Single Pass Image Reader (Duplex Color
Image Reader Unit C1): RCOND
The name of the system software for the 2-sided Double Pass Image Reader (Color Image
Reader Unit C1): RCONS
The finisher for this machine supports version upgrade via the host machine in any of the
above-mentioned methods, i.e., via SST, USB memory storage device storage device or
CDS. Note that the External 2-hole Puncher A1, Document Insertion / Folding Unit-H1,
Document Insertion Unit-L1, does not support version upgrade via the host machine. To
6-43
Note on Download Process

Warning: Never turn OFF the power during the download / writing process.
Turning off the power during the download / writing process may cause a failure of
machine start-up at power-on.
If this occurs, start the machine in Safe mode (by pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously
on the numeric keypad).
When the machine is successfully started in Safe mode, execute formatting of
BOOTDEV partition, retry downloading the system software.
upgrade versions, connect the option with the PC using the downloader PCB to download the
system software via SST..
CAUTION:
Be sure to use normal mode when using download mode except in a case where it is
not possible to start this machine and enter service mode.
In safe mode, version information of SYSTEM, MEAPCONT, LANGUAGE, RUI, and
SDICT can be obtained, but version information of other system software such as
DCON and RCON cannot be obtained. Therefore the following points to note are
required when downloading in safe mode.
[RCON]
The version is not upgraded except in a case where Single mode of SST is used or
when "Overwrite all" of USB download menu is used.
[DCON and others]
The following symptoms occur when SST (Single mode) or USB download menu (Auto)
is used.
The time for download/write becomes longer because the software is overwritten
even when system software of the same version is being written.
A confirmation message is not displayed when a lower version is going to be
downloaded.
CAUTION: error code E753-0001

When an error occurs during writing process of the system software downloaded using
SST or USB memory, error code E753-0001 is displayed.
Check if the target option is properly installed and see if the software to download is for
the correct target option, and then execute downloading again.
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Overview > Note on Download Process
6-43
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Overview
Version Upgrade via SST
6-44
Downloading the System Software

System software is saved in the temporary storage area on HDD after downloaded with SST.
Overview
Restart the machine after download so that it will be written to the system area, and the flash
The system software can be downloaded either of the two modes below via SST.
Assist mode(recommended)
ROM.
After the writing has been completed normally, this machine automatically restarts with the
new system software.
Single mode
1) The system software is downloaded.
Assist mode provides the following features.

Attached option types are automatically recognized.
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
The new versions of the system software for attached option types are automatically
searched.
- - Download Mode - - iR2270i-JPjaxxxx-MN.dsh ] - - - - - - - - - - Complete

iR2270iM-JPjaxxxx-1F77-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iM-ZZjaxxxx-49AD.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
iR2270iW-JPjaxxxx-5C16-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iW-ZZjaxxxx-A825.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
iR2270iF-JPjaxxxx-DE96-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iG-JPjaxxxx-EC30-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete
The set of system software with interactive behavior confirmed is automatically

downloaded.
HDD
The accessories attached to the host machine are automatically recognized to download
System
Software
the system software for each accessory.
System
Software
Temporary
storage area
This machine holds a number of system software components that mutually interacts
during operation. Behaviors of such system software should be confirmed when these are
downloaded as the set. Thus, Assist mode is basically recommended to download the system
software for this machine.
2) The main power switch is turned off and then on.
Use Single mode only when any of the following conditions is met.
When downloading some the system software components, i.e. DCON, RCON or options.
When reloading the system software after HDD is formatted
NOTE:
Use Single mode only when any of the following conditions is met.
3) Writing takes place.

<<<<< download shell >>>>>
[ SYSTEM JPja-m ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM JPja-w ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ FONT F ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
[ FONT G ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
+++ Switch OFF the power then ON. +++
When downloading some the system software components, i.e. DCON, RCON or options.
When reloading the system software after HDD is formatted
HDD
System
Software
Temporary
storage area
System area
BOOT area
4) The main power switch is turned off and then on.
FLASH
ROM
5) The machine starts up using the new version.
F-6-75
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Overview
6-44
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Copying System Software
Copying System Software
6-45
5) Select the drive where the system CD is set and click Search button.
System CD -> SST

Copy the system software stored in the system CD to SST.
NOTE:
The system software is compressed if the file size exceeds the CD memory capacity.
If the above is the case, decompress the file before copying it to SST.
Preparation
Requirements:
PC with SST Ver.4.41 or later installed
The system CD for this machine
Steps to copy the system software
1) Start the PC
F-6-77
2) Set the system CD in the PC
6) The system software stored in the system CD is listed.
3) Start SST
Uncheck the box(es) for unnecessary folder(s) and/or system software and click Copy
4) Click Register Firmware button.
button.
F-6-76
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Copying System Software
F-6-78
6-45
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Connection
7) The message is shown when the system software is successfully copied. Click OK button.
6-46
Connection
The following IP address is automatically set for this machine at start-up in Download mode.
IP address:172.16.1.100
Subnet mask:255.255.255.0
When the PC with SST installed is connected to this machine, change the PC network
address to the following.
IP address:172.16.1.160
Subnet mask:255.255.255.0
Default gateway: arbitrary
CAUTION:
F-6-79
If the PC has the connection to the network, the settings changed to the abovementioned may cause network failures due to redundant IP addresses, etc. Ensure that
the PC is disconnected from the network when you change the PC network settings.
Alternatively use the cross cable to connect the PC to this machine.
Preparation
Requirements
PC with SST Ver. 4.41 or later installed and the system software for this machine is stored
Cross cable
10Base-T: Category 3 or 5
100Base-T: Category 5
1000Base-T: Enhanced Category 5 (CAT5e) or later
CAUTION:
Disconnect USB memory storage device storage devices if connected.
Communication to SST is disabled in this machine if any USB memory storage device
storage device is recognized. SST and the USB memory storage device storage device
cannot be used concurrently.
6-46
6-47
4) Check the IP address of the PC.

Go to Start menu to select Program > Accessory > Command Prompt.
Type IPCONFIG and press [Return] to see the network settings of the PC.
If any discrepancies from the description in the figure below are found, change the network
settings of the PC.
F-6-81
CAUTION:
The network settings are not shown with IPCONFIG if the PC is disconnected from
the network. To check the settings, connect the PC to this machine at power-on by the
cross cable.
IP address : 172.16.1.100
Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0
Cross cable
IP address : 172.16.1.160
10Base-T : category 3, 5 or later
Subnet mask : 255.255.255.0
100Base-TX : category 5 or later
1000Base-TEnhanced Category 5 (CAT5e) or later
F-6-80
Steps
1) Use the cross cable to connect the machine to the PC with SST installed.
2) Turn on the main power switch of this machine.
3) Enter Service mode to start the machine in Download mode.
Select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD and press [OK].
6-47
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Assist mode)
Downloading System Software (Assist mode)

1) Start this machine and enter Download mode (COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM >
DOWNLOAD).
2) Connect the PC to this machine and start SST.
6-48
NOTE:
When You was connected to the main body of Safe mode in Assist mode:
A system software of LANGUAGE, RUI, MEAPCONT, SDICT can acquire version
information.
3) Click Start Assist mode button.

Skip this step when starting SST in Assist mode.
F-6-83
F-6-82
If the upgraded set of the system software is stored in SST, the new set is automatically
4) Click Start button
selected.
NOTE:
If no upgrade is stored, the existing system software set is unchanged. At any rate, any
versions of the system software can be downloaded by manual selection.
F-6-84
When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted to initiate the writing
process. The machine may repeat restarting several times depending on option configuration.
Upon the system software written, the machine is restarted again and the main menu is
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Assist mode)
6-48
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Downloading System Software (Single mode)
6-49
Downloading System Software (Single mode)
displayed.
The following is the sample steps to download DCON (the other components of the system
software can be downloaded similarly).
NOTE:Download Confirmation Message Modes

Download is confirmed in any of the three message modes.
1) Start the machine in an appropriate Download mode.
Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded versions
Upgraded versions are downloaded without message.
Skip download of the existing versions.
Confirm whether to download downgraded versions.
2) Connect the PC to this machine to start SST.

3) Select the model to be connected and Single, check the network settings. Click Start
button.
Confirm whether to download the existing versions / downgraded versions

Confirm whether to download and overwrite the existing versions.
Overwrite all versions
Regardless of version upgrade or downgrade, all versions of the system software are
downloaded without message.
By default, Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded
versions is selected.
5) Click"Next"button.
F-6-86
F-6-85
6) Disconnect the cross cable from the machine.

7) Enter Service mode to check the system software versions.
8) Click"OK"button.
The main menu is displayed.
6-49
NOTE:
The following device information is shown at the right top of SST screen.
6-50
NOTE:Download Confirmation Message Modes

Download is confirmed in any of the three message modes.
IP address
Model name
Download mode
Device Information
Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded versions
Skip download of the existing versions.
Confirm whether to download the existing versions / downgraded versions
Confirm whether to download and overwrite the existing versions.
Overwrite all versions.
Regardless of version upgrade or downgrade, all versions of the system software are
downloaded without message.
By default, Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded
5) When download is completed, click OK button.
F-6-87
4) Select the DCON version to be downloaded and click Start button.

Multiple files can be selected in this step.
F-6-89
The main menu is displayed.
F-6-88
6-50
NOTE:
If it is before restarting the machine, the downloaded system software can be deleted
not written on HDD or Flash ROM.
1) Click Clear button.
6-51
6) Click Shutdown / Restart button.
Clear
F-6-93
7) Click Restart button.

F-6-90
2) Click Execute Clear button.

The system software, which is stored in the temporary memory space of HDD, is
deleted.
F-6-94
The machine is restarted.

The downloaded system software is written on HDD or Flash ROM.
F-6-91
3) ClickOKbutton.
8) Click"OK"button.
9) Enter Service mode to check the versions.
Return to the previous screen.
F-6-92
6-51
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Formatting HDD
Formatting HDD
When executing format BOOTDEV
Overview
This machine probides the following two types of HDD Formatting.
Execute format BOOTDEV
ALL:to format the whole HDD
6-52
When executing format ALL
startup in normal mode
Execute format ALL
Automatically restart
When HDD set as the service parts (the new HDD) is mounted
When clearing the system software and data completely from HDD and reloading the
system software.
Once Format ALL is executed in your machine, all the user data and MEAP applications
held in HDD will be cleared. Ensure to gain an agreement from the user before formatting.
Select download mode

([1]: Upgrade (AUTO)is recommended)

Download the system software

for the main controller
Writing process
Writing process
Start in the new version

of the system software

BOOTDEV: to format the system software storage area on HDD.

When clearing the system software storage area and reloading the system software
HDD needs not to be formatted at version upgrade.
HDD can be formatted only in Single mode.
After HDD is formatted, the machine cannot be started before the system software is
downloaded.
After Format ALL is executed, the machine is automatically restarted to reflect formatting
to HDD. At this time, the machine automatically starts in Download mode. For BOOTDEV
format, the machine is ready to download the system software without restarting.
After formatting, enter either Assist mode(recommended) or Single mode to download the
system software.
F-6-95
6-52
When executing format ALL startup in normal mode

NOTE:
With SSTv4.41, due to sharing the simple mode processing with the existing models,
the following screen is displayed.
As for the iR ADVANCE series models (or this machine), the procedure displayed on the
screen is not necessary; thus, click the Next button to go on to the next screen.
Execute format ALL
Execute format ALL

6-53
Device Information
Select Download mode

(preferably in assist mode)
Select Download mode

(preferably in assist mode)

for the main controller
Writing process
Writing process
F-6-97
Start in Download mode

of Normal mode
Start in Download mode

of Normal mode
Download the system software for

DCON/RCON/option
Since there is no system software

to be downloaded,
the shutdown sequence is executed
restart the machine manually

Writing process
Start in the same version
F-6-96
6-53
Steps of Formatting
6-54
5) Select "BOOTDEV" or "ALL" to click "Start".
1) Enter Download mode. (Enter Safe mode when you mount the new HDD or when the
machine is unable to start normally due to HDD failures, etc.)
2) Connect the PC to the machine to start SST.
3) Select the model to be connected and the information file (single) for individual download.
Check the network settings and click Start button.
F-6-100
6) Click "Execute Format" button.
F-6-98
4) ClickFormat HDDbutton
F-6-101
HDD is formatted.
F-6-99
6-54
7) Download the system software in any Download mode (Assist mode recommended). See
the steps to download the system software for details.
6-55
Mounting New HDD

After HDD set as the service parts is mounted, the new HDD should be formatted initially. In
this case, the message is shown to confirm if the new HDD is mounted.
The figure below shows the abbreviated steps.
Replacing HDDs
Start the machine in Safe mode

(by pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric keypad)
Connect to SST
F-6-102
CAUTION:
After HDD is formatted, ensure to download the system software. If the system software
is not downloaded, E602 error is triggered at power-on.
Confirm that the new HDD is successfully mounted
Format HDD (Format ALL)

CAUTION:
Restarting takes more time after HDD is formatted and the system software is
downloaded (to write the downloaded software).
Follow the steps as described in Format ALL section.
Down time may be approx. 5 minutes in maximum to proceed the writing process.
Never turn OFF the machine while Starting screen is shown.
F-6-103
6-55
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade via SST > Backup
When the new HDD is mounted, the machine cannot be started in the normal procedure.
Start the machine in Safe mode as Download mode. When gaining connection to SST, the
message is shown to confirm if the new HDD is mounted.
6-56
Backup
Overview
At the time of replacing controller PCBs, the backup function enables to save data held in the
PCB to migrate them to the new PCB.
Backup via SST
Backup data
Backup data RAM
MEAP applications
For investigation in Dev
Service Print
Downloaded/Uploaded file names

SramImg.bin(to be uploaded / downloaded)
MeapBack.bin(to be uploaded / downloaded)
Sublog.bin(Downloadable)
The text file of the contents which You output to paper with a service
mode(Downloadable).
T-6-19
Backup RAM holds the data from Backup RAM of the Main Controller PCB 2.
(Before replacing the Main Controller PCBs, DC Controller PCB, be sure to back up
the data because Backup RAM holds the parts durable counter data and service mode
F-6-104
Click "Yes" and the message is shown, confirming whether to format HDD.
setting data in the Main Controller.)

MeapBack holds MEAP applications and their data stored in HDD
Backup via Service mode
Backup data
Backup of Reader
Controller PCB
Backup of DC Controller
PCB
Service mode
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM RSRAMBUP (Backup)
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM RSRAMRES (Restore)
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM DSRAMBUP (Backup)
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM DSRAMRES (Restore)
T-6-20
Data is stored in HDD
F-6-105
Click Initialize button to initialize HDD (Format ALL). Follow the steps described in Format
ALL section to download the system software.
6-56
NOTE:
Before replacing the Reader Controller PCBs, back up the data from Service mode.
The backup data can be restored from Service mode when the PCBs are replaced. This
enables to maintain the setting data including Service mode stored in the old Reader
Controller PCB.
Before replacing the DC controller PCBs, back up the data from Service mode. The
backup data can be restored from Service mode when the PCBs are replaced. This
enables to maintain the setting data including Service mode stored in the old Controller
PCB.
Before replacing the Main Controller PCB 2, upload SramImg.bin. By downloading
SramImg.bin after replacement, the new Main Controller PCB 2 inherits the data
including Service mode stored in the old PCB
6-57
Steps to Upload Data

CAUTION:
When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of
debug log by the R&D department, we ask the field to collect log for an investigation
to determine the cause.
The backup data can be downloaded only on the machine from which the data were
uploaded.
This machine does not use SramRCON and SramDcon
iR ADVNCE xxxx Series

Service PC
SST
iR ---System
Upload/Download
MeapBack
/ SramImg.bin

SRAM
HDD
SramImg.bin
Meapback.bin
Main controller
F-6-106
Listed below are the sample steps to upload MeapBack.

1) Enter Download mode.
2) Connect the PC to the machine to start SST.
6-57
3) Select the model to be connected and the information file for individual download (Single).
6-58
5) Select MeapBack.bin to click Start button.
Check the network settings and click Start.
F-6-109
F-6-107
6) Enter the file name to be saved and comments when necessary. Click Save button.
4) Click Upload Data button.
F-6-110
7) Click OK button
F-6-108
6-58
Steps to Download Data
6-59
4) Click Download Data button.
CAUTION:
The backup data can be downloaded to the machine from which the data were
uploaded
Store Meapbackup.bin; and "Settings/Registration > Data Management> Initialize All
Data/Setings"; Restore it; even if it, cannot log in to SMS.
Restore Meapbackup.bin which backed up after "Initialize All Data/Setings"; store it.
Listed below were the sample steps to download MeapBack.

1) Enter Download mode
2) Connect the PC to the machine and start SST.
3) Select the model to be connected and Single. Check the network setting and click Start
button.
F-6-112
5) Select the data to be downloaded and click Start button.
F-6-113
F-6-111
6) When the data are successfully downloaded, click OK button.

7) Restart the machine
6-59
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Relation between SST and USB memory Storage Device
Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device

Relation between SST and USB memory Storage Device
6-60

Copy the system software from SST to the USB memory storage device storage device.
Right after download from the USB memory storage device storage device, the system
When using the USB memory storage device storage device for version upgrade, the system
software should be copied to the USB memory storage device storage device. By inserting
the USB memory storage device storage device to the slot of the machine, the system
software can be upgraded.
The figure below shows the relation between SST and USB memory storage device storage
software is stored in the temporary memory space in HDD.

The system software is written in the system memory area, Boot area and Flash ROM upon
the machine restarted.
When the writing process is successfully completed, the machine is automatically restarted
with the new version of the system software.
device.
Tasks in the customer site

iR ----
PC
1) Download the system software

[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
- - Download Mode - - iR2270i-JPjaxxxx-MN.dsh ] - - - - - - - - - - Complete

iR2270iM-JPjaxxxx-1F77-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iM-ZZjaxxxx-49AD.PRG ] - - - - - - - Complete
iR2270iW-JPjaxxxx-5C16-MN.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iF-JPjaxxxx-DE96-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete
iR2270iG-JPjaxxxx-EC30-ICC.PRG ] - - - - Complete
Task in the office

USB memory
storage device
System
Software
SST
System
Software
System software
Copying the System Software
USB memory
storage device
SST
HDD
System
Software
Temporary
memory space
Copying the system software
Downloading the
system software
HDD
2) OFF/ON
3) The system software is written
<<<<< download shell >>>>>
[ SYSTEM JPja-m ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM JPja-w ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ FONT F ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
[ FONT G ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
+++ Switch OFF the power then ON. +++
Flash ROM
System software
F-6-114
When downloading the system software, enter any of Download modes below.
Normal mode (recommended)
HDD
System
Software
Temporary
memory space
System
memory area
Select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > Download in Service mode and press [OK].
4) OFF/ON
Safe mode (only when any system error occurs or the machine is unable to start normally;
turn ON the main power switch by pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric
keypad)
FLASH
ROM
5) Start with the new version.
F-6-115
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Relation between SST and USB memory Storage Device
6-60
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Copying System Software
Copying System Software
6-61
5) Select the drive where the system CD is set and click Search button.
System CD to SST
Copy the system software stored in the system CD to SST.
NOTE:
The system software is compressed if the file size exceeds the CD memory capacity.
If the above is the case, decompress the file before copying it to SST.
Preparation
Requirements:
PC with SST Ver. 4.41 or later installed
The system CD for this machine
F-6-117
6) The list of the system software components stored in the system CD is shown on the
1) Start the PC.
screen.
2) Set the system CD to the PC.
Uncheck the box(es) of unnecessary folder(s) and/or system software component(s) and
3) Start SST.
click Copy button.
4) Click Register Firmware button.
F-6-116
F-6-118
6-61
7) The message is shown when the system software is copied. Click OK button.
6-62
SST to USB memory Storage Device

Copy the system software stored in SST to the USB memory storage device storage device.
Preparation
Requirements:
PC with SST Ver. 4.41 or later installed
USB memory storage device (*)
Requirements for USB memory storage device:
Interface: USB 1.1 or later (USB 2.0 is recommended)
Memory capacity: 1GB or more is recommended (the total file size of the system software
is approx. 500MB).
Format: FAT (FAT 16), FAT32 (NTFS and HFS are not supported). The memory is formatted
in a partition (multiple partitions are not supported)
F-6-119
Unavailable USB memory: memory that is protected by a password or the encryption

technology.
1) Start the PC.
2) Insert the USB memory storage device storage device to the slot of the PC.
3) Start SST.
6-62
4) Click the USB icon shown in "Select the target" Screen.
6-63
6) Select Series and Version (the System Version).
F-6-120
F-6-122
5) Select the drive (removable disk) where the USB memory storage device storage device is
NOTE:
The signs shown in the field of Firmware registration static indicate the following:
Y: Stored in SST
N: Not stored in SST
inserted.
7) Click Start button.

Start copying the system software to the USB memory storage device storage device.
F-6-121
F-6-123
6-63
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Connection
NOTE:
When the accessory configuration is known for the machine where the system software
is to be downloaded, uncheck the boxes of unnecessary accessories. E753-0001 is
triggered if the software for an unnecessary accessory is downloaded. (If this occurred,
turn OFF/ON the power to recover the error.)
6-64
Connection
CAUTION:
This machine does not communicate with SST once it recognizes a USB memory
storage device; therefore, SST and a USB memory storage device cannot be used at
the same time.
8) Click OK when the system software is successfully copied in the USB memory storage
device storage device.
Preparation
Item to prepare: a USB memory storage device, which the system software for this machine
is stored.
Procedure
1) If a cross cable is connected to this machine, remove the cross cable.
2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port.
F-6-124
USB memory
USB port
F-6-125
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Connection
6-64
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Upgrading System Software
6-65
Upgrading System Software
3) Switch to the download mode to use.

In the case of normal mode (Recommended)
Select the following in Service Mode: COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD;
Menu/Function Overview
and then press [OK].
[[[[[ download Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]]

------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
[2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation)
[3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all)
[4]: Format HDD
[5]: Backup
[7]: Clear downloaded files
[8]: download Menu 2
[9]: Other Menu
In the case of safe mode (This mode should not be used as general rule. To be used only
when normal startup fails, such as a system error, etc.)
While pressing 2 + 8 keys at the same time, turn ON the Main Power Switch.
Once this machine recognizes the USB memory storage device, the following menu is
displayed on the Control Panel.

------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
[4]: Format HDD
[5]: Backup
[9]: Other Menu
[Reset]: Shutdown
F-6-127

[1]: Upgrade(Auto)
To download/write the system software (automatic)
To download the system software (confirmation)
[Reset]: Shutdown

F-6-126
To download the system software (overwriting)

[4]: Format HDD
To format the HDD/BOOTDEV partition
CAUTION:
Depending on the manufacturer or the model, this machine may not recognize the USB
memory storage device.
[5]: Backup
Collection of debug Log or Service Print(Because You are for R&D review, do not use it
other than the following.)
This machine retries the detection of a USB memory storage device for up to 60
seconds after power-ON. The above menu is not displayed if the recognition of a USB
memory storage device is failed within the time period.
In such a case, use another USB memory storage device.
[8]: Download Menu 2
To clear the system software immediately after downloading (before writing)

To move to Download Menu 2
[9]: Other Menu
Others (e.g.: version information)
[Reset]: Shutdown
To execute shutdown sequence
Press the key on the Control Panel to select/execute the functions.
6-65
Points to Note When Operating/Using System Software

NOTE:
The following download method is recommended to execute normal download of the
system software (any download work other than downloading after replacing/formatting
the HDD):
Download mode --- Normal mode
Download menu --- [1]: Upgrade (Auto)
6-66
CAUTION:Caution when the power is turned OFF

Be sure to execute shutdown sequence to quit download mode.
Pressing the [Reset] key and then the [0] key on the menu screen executes the
shutdown sequence.
Once the message on the touch panel disappears, turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
CAUTION:Prohibition to turn OFF the power during downloading/writing

Do not turn OFF the power during downloading or writing of the system software;
otherwise, this machine may not be started even if the power is turned ON.
If the machine fails to be started even if the power is turned ON, start the machine in
safe mode (pressing 2 + 8 keys).
When the machine can be started in safe mode, be sure to download the system
software once again.
If the machine fails to be started, replace the HDD and then download the system
software.
F-6-128
6-66
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic)
Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic)

[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
The version is compared between the host machine/option and the system software in the
USB memory storage device to download only the system software with newer version in the
USB memory storage device to the temporary storage area of the HDD.
In safe mode, only the following system software can retrieve the version information (the
version is compared).
SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI, MERAPCONT, SDICT
As for system software of the host machine whose version information cannot be obtained,
the software for RCON is not downloaded, but other software are downloaded.
For the system software of the option that is not connected, it is handled as follows:
<In the case of startup in normal mode (Recommended)>
For the option that is not connected, the system software is not to be downloaded.
6-67
3) Press the key on the Control Panel.

[1] -> [0]: To execute downloading/Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen.

------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
[4]: Format HDD
[5]: Backup
[9]: Other Menu
[Reset]: Shutdown
F-6-129
<In the case of startup in safe mode>

The system software of the options which are not connected are not downloaded.
During downloading, download status is displayed on the Control Panel.
After downloading is complete, this machine is automatically restarted to write the

downloaded system software to the HDD system area/flash ROM.
Operation procedure
1) Enter download mode.
F-6-130
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic)
6-67
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Confirmation)
Once downloading is complete, this machine is automatically restarted to start writing to the
HDD system area/flash ROM.
The screen shows the countdown once writing process is properly complete.
6-68
Downloading System Software (Confirmation)

The version is compared between the host machine/option and the system software in the
USB memory storage device to download the system software with newer version in the USB
memory storage device to the temporary storage area of the HDD.
When the system software version in the USB memory storage device is the same or older, a
confirmation message is displayed on the Control Panel so that the user can select whether
to overwrite or not.
In safe mode, only the following system software can retrieve the version information (the
version is compared).
SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI, MERAPCONT, SDICT
As for system software of the host machine whose version information cannot be obtained,
the software for RCON is not downloaded, but other software are downloaded.
For the system software of the option that is not connected, it is handled as follows:
F-6-131
Once the countdown shows 0, this machine is automatically restarted.

4) When the main menu is displayed, press the removal key at the lower right on the touch
panel and select removal of the memory media, and then remove the USB memory storage
device.
<In the case of startup in normal mode (Recommended)>

For the option that is not connected, the system software is not to be downloaded.
<In the case of startup in safe mode>
The system software of the options which are not connected are not downloaded.
Unlike menu [1], this machine is not automatically started despite completion of downloading.
CAUTION:
After HDD formatting and downloading, this machine takes a long time (for writing the
software).
This machine, in some cases, stays in standby screen up to 10 min during writing. At
this time, do not turn off the main power switch.
By manually turning OFF/ON the power, the system software is written at the time of startup.
In this case, starting the machine in safe mode deletes the downloaded system software
saved in the temporary storage area; therefore, do not press the numeric keys (2 + 8), but
execute normal startup to execute writing.
6-68
6-69
Operation procedure
Once downloading is complete, a message is displayed to encourage pressing the Reset
key.


------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
[4]: Format HDD
[5]: Backup
[9]: Other Menu
/[2] has been selected. Execute?/
- (OK):0 / (CANCEL):Any other keys F-6-132

NOTE:
When the system software version in the USB memory storage device is the same or
older than the system software in the HDD, a message is displayed in each case to
confirm whether to overwrite or not.
Press the key on the Control Panel.
[0]: To overwrite/Any key other than [0]: Not to overwrite
F-6-134
4) Press the Reset key.

Shutdown sequence is executed.
5) Once the message on the touch panel disappears, turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
6) Remove the USB memory storage device.
7) Ensure the LED at the lower right on the Control Panel is turned OFF, and turn ON the
Main Power Switch.
Writing to the HDD system area/flash ROM is started after the startup. The screen shows
the countdown once the writing process is properly completed.
The screen shows the countdown once the writing process is properly completed. This
machine is restarted with the downloaded system software at the count of 0.
F-6-133
6-69
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Overwriting)
Downloading System Software (Overwriting)
6-70
CAUTION:

Regardless of the system software version in the host machine, all the system software in the
USB memory storage device is downloaded.
Regardless of the system software version in the host machine, all the system software in the
USB memory storage device is downloaded.
Unlike menu [1], this machine is not automatically started despite completion of downloading.
By manually turning OFF/ON the power, the system software is written at the time of startup.
In this case, starting the machine in safe mode deletes the downloaded system software
saved in the temporary storage area; therefore, do not press the numeric keys (2 + 8), but
execute normal startup to execute writing.
In overwriting download mode of the USB memory storage device, all the system
software stored in the USB memory storage device is downloaded as well. Therefore,
be sure to keep the following in mind: If the USB memory storage device includes the
system software of non-connecting option, E753-0001 is displayed when the writing
process is completed.
In the case of an error in downloading of the non-connecting option, the machine can
be recovered by turning OFF/ON the power.
To prevent such error, uncheck the applicable system software so that the system
software of the non-connecting option is not downloaded when downloading the system
software from SST to USB.
Operation procedure
key.


------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
[4]: Format HDD
[5]: Backup
[9]: Other Menu
F-6-136
4) Press the Reset key.

Shutdown sequence is executed.

- (OK):0 / (CANCEL):Any other keys -
5) Once the message on the touch panel disappears, turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
7) After checking that the LED is turned OFF at the lower right on the Control Panel, turn ON
F-6-135
the Main Power Switch.

Writing to the HDD system area/flash ROM is started after the startup. The screen shows
the countdown once the writing process is properly complete.
When the countdown shows 0, this machine is restarted with the downloaded system
software.
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Downloading System Software (Overwriting)
6-70
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Formatting HDD
Formatting HDD
HDD Format Overview
Execute format BOOTDEV
6-71
Execute format ALL
The following 2 types of formatting methods are available with this machine:
ALL: To initialize the entire HDD
In the case of installing the HDD provided as a service part (a new HDD).
In the case of cleaning the entire software and data in the HDD to reinstall the system
software.
All the user data and MEAP application in the HDD is deleted when executing Format ALL


Writing process
Writing process


with the machine in use; therefore, be sure to obtain agreement from the user to execute
Format ALL.
BOOTDEV: to format the system software storage area on HDD.
In the case of normal upgrading by cleaning the storage area of the system software
to reinstall the system software, HDD formatting is not required.
User data is not erased.
After formatting, this machine cannot be started unless the system software is downloaded.
When Format ALL is executed, initialization process is reflected to the HDD so that this
machine is automatically restarted to automatically enter download mode. In the case of
formatting BOOTDEV, the machine is not automatically restarted, but the system software
can be downloaded.
After formatting is executed, be sure to download the system software by [1]: Upgrade
(AUTO) in main menu.
F-6-137
6-71
[4]: Format HDD
6-72
This mode executes formatting of BOOTDEV partition or the entire HDD.
[1] -> [0]: To execute formatting BOOTDEV/Any key other than [0]: To return to the menu
Operation procedure
[2] -> [0]: To execute formatting the entire HDD/Any key other than [0]: To return to the
screen.
menu screen.
[C]: To return to the menu screen.

[4] -> [0]: To execute formating /Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen.

------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
[4]: Format HDD
[5]: Backup
[9]: Other Menu
- (OK):0 / (CANCEL):Any other keys F-6-138
F-6-139

key.
5) Press any key to return to the menu screen.
6) Download the system software.
Refer to Separate Download for details.
6-72
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Other Menu
6-73
Backup
This function is used to clear the downloaded file without writing it after downloading the
[5]: Backup
Operation procedure
system software in menu [2] or [3].

1) After downloading by menu [2] or [3], press the Reset key to execute shutdown
sequence, and then turn OFF the main power once the screen display disappears.
CAUTION:
This function includes R&D review.Do not usually use it other than the following
function.
The USB memory collecting log uses the USB memory where You registered a system
software for this Host machine with by SST.
2) Start the machine in safe mode (while pressing 2 + 8 keys at the same time, turn ON the
Main Power Switch).
If the system software is stored in the HDD temporary storage area when starting the
machine in safe mode, the system software is deleted. In such a case, the following message
is displayed on the touch panel.
All downloaded file is deleted.
Operation procedure
3) Turn OFF the Main Power Switch.

[5] -> [0]: To execute formating /Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen.
4) SRAM backup of Main Controller PCB 2
Download Menu 2
[1] Sublog -> Collect debugging log.

[4] ServicePrint -> Save the service data which P-PRINT or etc. output to paper with a text
[1]: Service Mode Password Clear
format.
[[[[[ download Menu 2nd (USB) ]]]]]]

[[[[[ Backup Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]]]
[1]: Sublog
[4]: ServicePrint
[5]: Netcap
[C]: Return to Main Menu
------------------------------------
[1]: Service Mode Password Clear

F-6-141
Other Menu
[9]: Other Menu
F-6-140
This mode displays other menu.
Clearing Download File
Operation procedure
This menu clears the system software stored in the temporary storage area of the HDD.

[9] -> [0]: To display other menu/Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen.
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Version Upgrade using USB memory Storage Device > Other Menu
6-73
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Troubleshooting > Error Code: E753-0001
6-74
Troubleshooting
[1]: Version Information
Error Code: E753-0001
This mode displays the version of download mode.
Cause
In the case of an error during writing process of the system software or in the case of writing
the system software of the option that is not installed, an error is determined to display E7530001.
Remedy
The result of writing process is displayed at the upper side of E753-0001 error display.
Check if the target option is properly installed and see if the software to download is for the
correct target option, and then execute downloading again.
Upgrading by SST
Be sure to use Assist mode as a general rule because the system software of the nonconnecting option is not to be downloaded in Assist mode.
F-6-142
Press any key to return to the main menu.
In Single mode, it is available to download the system software of the option that is not
installed.
In the case of downloading the Finishers system software, make the download mode of
the Host Machine in normal mode and connect to SST, and then download just the system
software of the Finisher with the version information displayed at the right side of the SST
screen.
In the case that Super G3FAX Board AE1 is not installed or in the case of download mode
in safe mode, G3CCB/G3CCM is not displayed on the list of downloadable system software.
NOTE:
Image Reader has 2 types of system software: RCOND and RCONS.
Downloading both RCOND and RCONS results in writing of only the system software
that complies with the Image Reader installed in the Host Machine. When downloading
the system software that does not comply with the Image Reader installed in the Host
Machine, it results in skipping of writing process (it will not be an error).
Troubleshooting > Version upgrade > Troubleshooting > Error Code: E753-0001
6-74
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > List of Initial Check Items
6-75
Making Initial Checks

List of Initial Check Items
Item
Site Environment
Checking the Paper

Checking the
Placement of Paper
Checking the
Durables
Checking the
Periodically
Replaced Parts
No.
Detail
Check
1
2
The voltage of the power supply is as rated (10%).

The site is not a high temperature / humidity environment (near
a water faucet, water boiler, humidifi er), and it is not in a cold
place. The machine is not near a source of fire or dust.
3 The site is not subject to ammonium gas.
4 The site is not exposed to direct rays of the sun. (Otherwise,
provide curtains.)
5 The site is well ventilated, and the floor keeps the machine
level.
6 The machine's power plug remains connected to the power
outlet.
7 The paper is of a recommended type.
8 The paper is not moist. Try paper fresh out of package.
9 Check the cassette and the manual feed tray to see if the
paper is not in excess of a specific level.
10 If a transparency is used, check to make sure that it is placed
in the correct orientation in the manual feed tray.
11 Check the table of durables to see if any has reached the end
of its life.
12 Check the scheduled servicing table and the periodically
replaced parts table, and replace any part that has reached the
time of replacement.
T-6-21
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > List of Initial Check Items
6-75
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Preparation > Overview of Preparation
Version Upgrade via CDS
6-76
Preparation
Overview
Overview of Preparation
Among the 4 methods in which service technicians provide firmware install services, the
The following should be prepared before using Updater.
following 3 methods are available using Updater functions.
For updating of firmware
a. UGW-linked Download and Update (Full-remote Update)

b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)
Installation
Method
c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)

: User operation
Firmware
Market Release
Distribution
Setting to UGW
(UGW-linked)
Automatic download
Automatic update
b
Firmware acquisition

Download
Via Service mode
(Local UI)
Apply (Update)
Via Service mode
(Local UI)
periodical download
Periodical update

Download
Via User mode
(Local UI)

Download
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
Download via SST
Apply (Update)
Via User mode
(Local UI)
Apply (Update)
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
Update via SST
With connection to external network
Without connection to
external network
F-6-143
*1: Schedules for UGW-linked distribution are maintained on CDS.

NOTE:
See User Manual of the device for how to connect the device to the external network.
When needed, perform the communication test before actual download to check if the
communication with the distribution server is normal.
UGW-linked
Download and
Update
UGW-linked
Download
Manual
Download and
Update
Manual
Download and
Update via
Local UI
Manual
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Special
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Periodical
update
Enabling
Enabling
Setting
Enabling
[Update
[Manual
Sales
Network
UGW
Firmware]
Update] Button
Companys Settings
Link
Button of User of User Mode
HQ
Mode
(Remote UI)
Periodical
update
validation
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-6-22
For Install of Application

Installation Method
Network Settings

Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Preparation > Overview of Preparation
T-6-23
6-76
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Preparation > Network Settings
Setting Sales Companys HQ
6-77
Network Settings
When using devices input in the markets listed below, the default setting of Sales Companys
1. Connecting to External Network
HQ should be changed before obtaining firmware distributed from CDS. Unless the setting is
The method of connecting to external network is similar to a normal network connection
changed properly, the desired firmware may not be able to be selected.
method. Refer to user manual of the device for details.
Market
Canada
Latin America
Hong Kong
Default Setting of Sales

Company's HQ
US
US/SG
SG
Setting of Sales Company's

HQ after Change
CA
LA
HK
T-6-24
NOTE:
See User Manual for how to connect the device to the external network.
Before using UGW link or User mode, see the sections below to prepare as required.
"Enabling UGW Link"
"Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode"
"Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode"
Go to the following screen to change the setting of Sales Companys HQ.

Service
Technician

(Level 1)
NOTE:
The list below shows the setting of Sales Companys HQ for CDS-CTS by market.
Check and adhere to the appropriate setting for your market.
<List of Sales Companys HQ and the settings for CDS-CTL>
Japan = JP
USA = US
Singapore = SG
Europe = NL
Korea = KR
China = CN
Hong Kong = HK
Australia = AU
Canada = CA
Latin America= LA
NOTE:
External Network here means the network connecting the device to CDS via Internet.
2. Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server

This section describes how to confirm the URL setting of the distribution server.
F-6-144
6-77
6-78
5. Ensure to enter https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif in the field beside the

[Delivery Server URL] button.
If the URL is not entered or a wrong URL is entered in the field, click [Delivery Server URL]
button to show the virtual keypad. Check the URL and enter the correct one.
F-6-145

F-6-147
set.
F-6-146
6-78
3. Communication Test
6-79
NOTE:
CDS and RDS are another servers.
You need the communication test of CDS by all means even if You succeed in a
communication test of the RDS.

F-6-149
F-6-148
F-6-150
6-79
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Preparation > Enabling UGW Link
6-80
Enabling UGW Link
When installing the firmware in the method of UGW-linked Download and Update or UGWlinked Download, the following should be set before actually using UGW link.
Service Technician
Setting of Device
Service Mode
(Level 1)
Setting of UGW
WebPortal
COPIER >OPTION >FNC-SW >CDS-UGW

(0 -> 1)
In [Customer Management] screen, set [Do not

distribute firmware] to [Distribute firmware].
See "Analysis>Firmware Distribution
Setting of Authorities on
Sales Company's HQ
Information" to grant the appropriate authorities
UGW WebPortal
to each account.
NOTE:
F-6-151
Obtain the download file information for communication test from the distribution server
(to execute the communication test to the distribution server).
See imageWARE Remote Operators Manual / e-Maintenance Business Operation

Manual for how to operate UGW WebPortal.
[Distribute Firmware] should be set on [Customer Management] screen for staff in charge
of setting for [Enter customer information] or [Command for firmware distribution] in order
to allow them to select the desired device on [Firmware Distribution Information] screen.
F-6-152
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Preparation > Enabling UGW Link
6-80
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)
a. UGW-linked Download and Update (Full-remote

Update)
6-81
b. UGW-linked Download (Remote Distribution Update)

See the figure below for the operational flow of UGW-linked download.
See the figure below for the operational flow of UGW-linked Download and Update.
STEP 1
Scheduling
via UGW
STEP 1
STEP 2
Scheduling
via UGW
Update using
Updater
F-6-154
F-6-153
STEP1: Scheduling via UGW

The firmware distribution schedule to the certain device should be set on UGW.
See UGW-linked Download and Update in chapter 5 of Operation Manual of Content
STEP 1: Scheduling via UGW

The firmware distribution schedule to the certain device should be set on UGW.
See UGW-linked Download in Operation Manual of CDS V1.0 (for Firmware Distribution) for
details.
Delivery System V1.0 for Firmware Distribution for details.

The device checks the schedule concerned every 12 hours on UGW. This allows the device
to register the firmware distribution setting, enabling automatic firmware download and
update.
NOTE:
The firmware downloaded by scheduling via UGW can be checked/deleted from User
mode, but cannot be updated. If a user download the other firmware, the firmware
downloaded with "UGW-linked Download" is overwritten.
STEP 2: Update using Updater
CAUTION:
Firmware update will not be triggered when any of the following jobs remains in the
queue.
-Print
-Scan
-Fax (except I-FAX; this function is enabled for I-FAX only during Print/Scan
operation)
See the section of "Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function" under Limitations and
Cautions, Updater of Chapter 2 Technology of this manual for more detailed
information.
The firmware downloaded on the device can be updated using Updater functions.
1). Press [Setting/Registration (User mode)] button on the control panel.
NOTE:
To contacts registered for E-mail notification on UGW, the E-mail is sent from UGW
upon completing firmware update.
6-81
6-82
4. Press [Apply Firmware] button.
F-6-155
3. Press [Update Firmware] button.
F-6-157
5. Confirm the downloaded firmware and press [Yes] button.
F-6-158
F-6-156
6-82
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from Service Mode)
6. The firmware is applied to the device. The device is automatically restarted when the
firmware is successfully applied.
7. When the device is restarted, confirm the version of the firmware.
1). Press [Check Counter Key] button on the control panel.
c. Manual Download and Update (On-site Update from

Service Mode)
The figure below shows the operational flow of Manual Download and Update.
2). Press [Check Device Configuration] button.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Download using
Updater
Update using
Updater
3). Confirm if the updated firmware version corresponds to [Controller Version].

Now the firmware is successfully updated in the method of Manual Download and Update.
6-83
F-6-159
CAUTION:
queue.
-Print
-Scan
operation)
Cautions, Updater of Chapter 2 Technology of this manual for more detailed
information.
STEP 1: Download using Updater

The firmware can be downloaded from CDS to the device using Updater.
3). Press [Setting/Registration (User mode)] on the control panel.
NOTE:
To contacts registered for E-mail notification on UGW, the E-mail is sent from UGW
upon completing firmware update.
F-6-160
6-83
6-84
5. [Special Firmware] screen is shown as below. Enter the fields and press [OK] button.
F-6-163
F-6-161
4. Confirm the firmware to be updated in either of the following 2 ways.

To update to the official edition, press [Confirm Applicable Firmware] button and go to Step 6.
To update to the individual response edition, press [Special Firmware] and go to Step 5.
[Retrieval ID]:
Enter numeric up to 8 characters.
[Password]:
Enter numeric up to 8 characters.
F-6-162
6-84
6. [New Firmware] screen is shown as below. Check the contents and press [Next] button.
7. [Delivery Settings] screen is shown as below. Enter the fields and press [OK] button.
F-6-164
[Version]:
6-85
F-6-165
[Delivery Time]:
The current firmware version is shown.
Press either [Now] or [Set Time] button.
[Applicable Firmware]:
Select the firmware applicable to the device from the dropdown list.
[Additional Languages]:
If there are any addtional languages, they are displayed.
More than 1 language can be selected, and it is possible to add another language when
upgrading the firmware.
Up to 8 languages can be added. The languages already registered in the device are
always selected, and SST is used to delete an unnecessary language from the device.
Include English and Japnese in eight languages.
[Release Note]:
If any release note is published, the contents are shown here.
[Now]:
The firmware is downloaded immediately after distribution schedule is set.
[Set Time]:
Be sure to specify the date (within 30 days) and time. The firmware is downloaded on
the specified date and time.
Enter the date and time using the numeric keypad in the format of yyyy/mm/dd
hh:mm:ss
[Timing to Apply]:
Press either [Auto] or [Manual] button.
[Auto]:
The firmware is applied automatically upon firmware downloaded.
[Manual]:
NOTE:
To update to the individual response edition, the firmware corresponding to the ID and
password that you input is displayed in [Applicable Firmware].
The firmware is automatically downloaded. Go to [Apply Firmware] to set up for

updating the downloaded firmware.
[Updated Module Only]:
Press either [On] or [Off] button.
[On]:
Only difference between the current and new firmware is downloaded.
[Off]:
The firmware to be applied is wholly downloaded.
6-85
[E-mail]:
6-86
8. Confirm Export Criteria screen is shown as below. Check the contents and press [Accept]
E-mails concerning update statuses are sent from the device to the contact registered here.
button.
Enter the E-mail address of the service technician in charge.

Enter 1-byte alphanumeric or symbols up to 64 characters.
[Comments]:
Enter the comment in 1-byte alphanumeric or symbols up to 128 characters.
Enter the comment to be automatically included in E-mail. Model Name in the comment will
be helpful to identify the device relevant to the E-mail.
NOTE:
[Timing to Apply]
For firmware versions with no remote update permission, [Auto] cannot be selected in
[Timing to Apply]
[Updated Module Only]
For firmware versions with difference-only delivery disabled, only [OFF] can be
selected in [Updated Module Only].
[E-mail]
To send E-mails to multiple destinations, each E-mail address should be delimited with
comma (,) or semi-colon (;).
For E-mail addresses entered in this field, a notification E-mail is sent at the following
timing.
F-6-166
9. One of the screens below is shown according to the setting.

When Distribution Time and Timing to Apply of Distribution Setting are set to [Now] and
[Auto], respectively:
Firmware is downloaded and updated automatically to the device. The device is
automatically restarted upon update completed. Now STEP 1 is successfully completed.
-Distribution Set
-Distribution Started
-Distribution Finished
-Update Started
-Update Finished
-Error Occurred
F-6-167
6-86
When Distribution Time and Timing to Apply of Distribution Setting are set to [Now] and
6-87
STEP 2: Update using Updater
[Manual], respectively:
The firmware downloaded to the device can be updated using Updater functions.
Confirm the firmware and press [OK] button. Now STEP 1 is successfully completed.
When Timing to Apply is set to [Auto] in Distribution Setting in STEP 1, the firmware is
updated automatically. Only when Timing to Apply is set to [Manual], follow the steps below to
update the firmware.
F-6-168
When Distribution Time is set to [Set Time] in Distribution Setting:

Confirm the distribution schedule and press [OK] button. Now STEP 1 is successfully
completed.
F-6-170
F-6-169
6-87
6-88
F-6-173
F-6-171
Now the firmware is successfully updated in the method of Manual Download and Update.
CAUTION:
queue.
-Print
-Scan
operation)
F-6-172
Cautions, Updater of Chapter 2 Technical Information of this manual for more
detailed information.
6-88
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule
Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule
6-89
4. Press [Delete Scheduled Delivery] button.
This section describes how to delete firmware distribution schedule set by Updater.
2). Press [2] and [8] button at a time on the control panel.
F-6-175
5. Confirm the contents of the distribution schedule and press [Yes] button.
F-6-174
F-6-176
6. Confirm the result of deletion shown on the screen and press [OK] button. Now the
firmware distribution schedule is successfully deleted.
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Deleting Firmware Distribution Schedule
6-89
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware)
Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware)
6-90
This section describes how to update the downloaded firmware.

F-6-178
F-6-177
F-6-179
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Updating Downloaded Firmware (Applying Firmware)
6-90
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Deleting Downloaded Firmware

Now the firmware is successfully updated in the method.
6-91
Deleting Downloaded Firmware

This section describes how to delete the downloaded firmware using Updater.
2). Press [2] and [8] button at a time on the control panel.
F-6-180
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Deleting Downloaded Firmware
6-91
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation
6-92
Troubleshooting on Firmware Installation
4. Press [Delete Firmware] button.

No.1
Symptom: I cant find the firmware to be updated using Updater.

Cause: Preparation has not been properly done.
Action: Confirm the setting of Sales Companys HQ bellow.
Setting of Device [SERVICE MODE] (Level1)
F-6-181
5. Confirm the downloaded firmware to be deleted and press [Yes] button.
F-6-183
Cause: The version currently in use is not available for update.

Action: Download the release note from CDS separately to upgrade to the version available
for update.
Cause: You try to download firmware from User mode.You can download only the latest
version of firmware from User mode.
Action: Download from Service mode.
<User Mode>
<Service Mode>
F-6-182
6. Confirm the result of deletion and press [OK] button. Now the downloaded firmware is
successfully deleted.
F-6-184
F-6-185
6-92
6-93
No.2
No.5
Symptom: Firmware download is aborted during operation using Updater functions.
Symptom: The firmware presumed to be downloaded to the device cannot be found.
Cause: The network cable is disconnected or the power went off due to blackout and the like.
Cause: Since only 1 firmware can be held on the device, the firmware previously downloaded
Action: Retry download. Firmware under download is cancelled upon aborted.
was overridden by the newly downloaded one.

Action: Retry the firmware download.
No.3
Symptom: Firmware update is aborted during operation using Updater functions and the
device cannot be started.
Cause: The power went off due to blackout and the like.
Action: Service technicians should follow the steps below via SST.
1. Press [2] and [8] buttons at a time to start the device.
1) Turn on the power and hold down [2] and [8] buttons at a time on the control panel.
2) [Download Mode] is shown on Local UI.
If the operation above does not trigger the download mode, BOOT (Flash Memory,
service parts) should be replaced (takes up to 1 minute for rewriting).
If the operation above successfully triggers the download mode, go to the next steps
below.
2. Via SST, format the HDD of BOOT Dev only.
3. Via SST, install the firmware in the device.
No.4
Symptom: Firmware has not been downloaded according to the distribution schedule.
Cause: Other firmware distribution schedule is set.Since only 1 distribution schedule is held,
the registered schedule may be overridden by the new firmware distribution schedule.
Action: Once the schedule is overridden, the firmware cannot be downloaded. Distribution
should be rescheduled for the firmware.
Cause: At the scheduled distribution date and time, the firmware registered was not found on
CDS.
Action: Distribution should be rescheduled for the firmware.
Cause: After distribution is scheduled, device is updated to other version of firmware via SST.
(Status of the firmware in the device is changed.)
Cause: The power of the device was off at scheduled date and time.
6-93
Troubleshooting > Making Initial Checks > Debug Logs > Obtaining Log Files
Information required for Reports

Information required for Service Technicians to Obtain on Site
Debug Logs
Obtaining Log Files
Update Logs
Updater log files can be obtained by copy & paste from remote UI.
System Logs (Log Level: 4)
This procedure is shown below.
Information to Report
6-94
1. Check that the CDS-MEAP or CDS-FIRM is enabled in the service mode. If they are not
enabled, change the value to 1 and then restart the device.
Symptom occurred
Service mode (Level1) > Mode List
Location of the device
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-MEAP: 1
Date and Time that symptom occurred
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-FIRM: 1
Steps taken for reproduction

Firmware / Application you tried to install
2. Log in the remote UI (URL: http://<devices IP address or host name>) using the system
Occurrence frequency
Model dependency (if the same symptom occurred in other models)
administrator right.
Dependency on firmware/MEAP application/system option

Conditions of symptom occurrence
Model
Firmware version installed on the device
List of MEAP applications installed on the device
Network setting information of the device
Service mode setting information
Setting of device service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CDS-CTL
(Level 1)
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-UGW
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-FIRM
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-MEAP
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > LOCLFIRM
* As many as the items listed above should be obtained on site. More information provided
will be helpful for investigation.
6-94
6-95
3. From Display Logs/Communication Test screen, obtain System Logs (log level 4) and
Update Logs by copy & paste.
Top page (Remote UI) > [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [License/
Others] > [Register/Update Software] > Display Logs/Communication Test
F-6-186
NOTE:
See "Setting Log Level" in chapter 3 for details of changing Log Level
4. If the value of CDS-MEAP or CDS-FIRM was changed in the service mode, return to the
original value and then restart the device to enable this setting.
Obtaining the log files is completed.
6-95
Troubleshooting > Error Messages
6-96
Error Messages
Error messages displayed in LUI on a device are shown below. As to error codes, see the next list.
No.
Messages
Timing of display
Cause
Remedy
An error occurred with the delivery

In communicating with the System error occurred in server.
Obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version Upgradeof
server.
delivery server.
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales
Contact your sales representative.
company.
Error Code: [xxx]
Delivery server is stopped.
In communicating with the Delivery server stopped.
Check the delivery server stop information. After the delivery server starts, perform the
Wait a while and then try to perform the delivery server.
operation from this application.
operation again.
When the delivery server stop information is not available, contact the sales company's
Check the following URL for details.
Support Department.
<Stopped Delivery Server URL>
Failed to connect to delivery server.
In communicating with the Communication error due to incorrect settings of
Set correct CDS URL in the Updater settings.
Check the delivery server and network. delivery server.
CDS URL.
Excluding delivery server stop, communication error Check if the network environment is correct to solve the cause of the error occurrence.
to the delivery server occurred.
If the network environment of the device is correct, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version
Upgrade via CDS" under Version Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this
manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company.
Download was stopped because an
At the time of file
Communication error to the delivery server
Check if the network environment is correct to solve the cause of the error occurrence.
error occurred with the file server.
download
occurred.
Check the network.
Downloaded files are invalid. Check
At the time of file
The received file is broken.
After checking the network environment of the device, re-execute the job.
the network.
download
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Failed to retrieve information of special Acquisition of applicable No information exists about firmware for special
Enter the correct firmware ID or Password applicable to the firmware information.
firmware.
firmware information
firmware retrieval ID or Password is invalid.
Check the retrieval ID and password.
sales company.
Scheduled delivery information of
Acquisition of applicable Delivery information with specified delivery ID does Register the delivery schedule again. If this occurs at the time of canceling file download,
firmware does not exist.
firmware information
not exist.
deleting downloaded firmware or deleting scheduled delivery, no remedy is required.
Check it because it may already have
been deleted.
Failed to apply firmware.
Firmware application error Error due to the application (NLM)
company.
6-96
6
No.
Messages
Delivery Server : Connect Failed

File Server : Retrieve Failed
Error Code: [xxxx]
10
Delivery Server : Connect OK

File Server : Retrieve Failed
Error Code: [xxxx]
Timing of display
6-97
Cause
Communication test, etc. In the communication test, failed to connect to the

(communication test result delivery server.
dialogue)
In SOAP communication, failed to success after 1
min retry.
ID and Password required for proxy to connect to
the internet are not configured in device.
Remedy
Check the network environment of the device, and re-execute the job.
sales company.
Set proxy and restart the communication test.
sales company.
The access to the network is limited.
Set the user environment to make the access to the following domain available.
https://device.cdsknn.net/
http://cdsknn.net.edgesuite.net/
sales company.
Delivery server stopped.
Contact Field Support Group in the sale company.
After confirmation that the delivery server has been restored, restart the communication
test.
sales company again.
Delivery Server : Connect Due to no return of data for the communication test, Check the network environment of the device and re-execute the job.
OK
time-out (in HTTP communication, no response
File Server : Retrieve
for 1min) occurred. After that, retried but failed to Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
Failed
connect to server.
sales company.
The network cable was disconnected during data Reconnect the network cable and then restart the communication test.
Error Code: [XXXX]
download in the communication test.
sales company.
The file server stopped during data download in the Contact the sales company's Support Department.
communication test.
After confirmation that the delivery server has been restored, restart the communication
test.
sales company again.
Hash value in the communication test file is
Check the network environment and re-execute the job.
incorrect.
sales company.
6-97
6
No.
11
Messages
An error occurred.
Error Code: [xxx]
Timing of display
6-98
Cause
communication test, etc. The max value (space/file) was exceeded and new
(main screen)
log was not accepted.
Normally an old log file is deleted before the max
value (space/file) is exceeded, but error may occur
due to other element (e.g. I/O error).
Remedy
Check if the log file exceeded the max value.

<Update log>
Max space: 128KB/file
Max file number: 4
<System log>
Max space: 512KB/file
Max file number: 4
sales company.
Notice of version
Failed to acquire version information of device
Re-execute the job.
information (main screen) due to no CDS registration of firmware version of If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
device.
sales company.
At the time of notifying version information, failed to Check if the network environment is correct to solve the cause of the error occurrence.
connect to the delivery server.
No return of notifying version information
Network cable was disconnected during notice of Re-connect the network cable and re-execute the job.
version information.
sales company.
Failed to send notice of version information since Re-execute the job.
the main power was turned OFF and then ON
during the sending.
sales company.
Server stopped at the time of sending notice of
Check the network environment of the device and re-execute the job.
version information.
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of sending
notice of version information.
company.
6-98
6
No.
11
Messages
An error occurred.
Error Code: [xxx]
Timing of display
UGW linkage (main

screen)
On-site (error dialogue)
Immediate download
(error dialogue)
Manual update (error

dialogue)
Automatic update (error
dialogue)
Deletion of downloaded
firmware
6-99
Cause
Remedy
UGW linkage was turned ON when eRDS was OFF.For a device using eRDS, turn ON the eRDS. For a device not using eRDS, turn OFF the
UGW linkage.
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of acquiring Re-execute the job.
delivery information.
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of acquiring Re-execute the job.
applicable firmware information.
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of sending
Re-execute the job.
approval information.
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of delivery
Re-execute the job.
order
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of requesting Re-execute the job.
firmware delivery information.
sales company.
During the download, all space in the storage disk After adding vacant space of the storage disk, re-execute the job.
was occupied. (DiskFull)
sales company.
At the end of receipt, an internal error occurred.
Re-execute the job.
sales company.
At the update start, an internal error occurred.
Re-execute the job.
sales company
At the update start, an internal error occurred.
Re-execute the job.
sales company.
At the time of notifying cancellation, an internal
Re-execute the job.
error occurred.
sales company.
6-99
6
No.
12
Messages
An error occurred. Check the Update

Firmware screen.
Timing of display
UGW linkage (main

screen)
Immediate download
(main screen)
Manual update (main
screen)
Automatic update (main
screen)
6-100
Cause
eRDS sent an order but Updater failed to connect

to server.
Remedy
Conduct a communication test to analyze the cause of the error. After solving the cause,
resend the order from the eRDS.
sales company.
Delivery server stopped.
Contact the sales company's Support Department.
After confirming restoration of the delivery server, re-execute the job.
sales company.
Scheduled date and time acquired from the delivery Do the delivery setting from UGW again.
server was before current time (15 or more min had If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
passed.)
sales company.
Scheduled data and time acquired from the delivery Do the delivery setting from UGW again.
server did not exist.
sales company.
At the time of immediate download, turned OFF and Re-execute the job.
then ON the power of device main body.
sales company.
Updated version was different from the ordered
Re-execute the job.
version.
sales company.
After the update, failed to connect to the delivery
Check the network environment and re-execute the job.
server.
sales company.
After the update, delivery server stopped.
Contact the sales company's Support Department. After confirming restoration of the
delivery server, re-execute the job.
sales company.
After the update, the network cable was
Re-connect the network cable and re-execute the job.
disconnected.
sales company.
After the update, server returned an error.
company.
After the update, an internal error occurred.
sales company.
6-100
6
No.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Messages
Delivery Error
Error Code: [xxx]
Timing of display
UGW linkage (Update

Firmware screen)
6-101
Cause
eRDS sent an order but Updater failed to connect

to the server.
Remedy
Conduct a communication test to analyze the cause of the error. After solving the cause,
resend the order from the eRDS.
sales company.
The delivery server stopped.
Contact the sales company's Support Department. After confirming restoration of the
delivery server, re-execute the job.
sales company.
The scheduled data and time acquired from delivery Do the delivery setting from UGW again.
server does not exist.
sales company.
Delivery Error
UGW linkage (Update
The scheduled date and time acquired from delivery Do the delivery setting from UGW again.
Delivery Time
Firmware screen)
server was before current time (15 or more min had If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to "Version Upgrade via CDS" under Version
Delivery Firmware Label
passed).
Delivery Firmware version
sales company.
Immediate download
At the time of immediate download, turned OFF and Re-execute the job.
Error Code: [ xxx ]
(Update Firmware screen) then ON the power of device main body.
sales company.
Applicable firmware is not registered. On-site (error dialogue) At the user site, no latest firmware exists.
This means the current firmware is the latest, so this error has no impact.
But when the latest firmware to be retrieved must exist e.g. released new firmware
information has been notified, contact Field Support Group in the sales company.
No applicable firmware exists on CDS, so the
Contact the sales company's Support Department.
service person can't select any applicable firmware.
Restart failed.
Manual update (error
An error occurred at the time of the device restart. After turning OFF and then ON the main power of the device, re-execute the job.
Turn the main power OFF and ON.
dialogue)
sales company.
Automatic update (error An error occurred at the time of the device restart. After turning OFF and then ON the main power of the device, re-execute the job.
dialogue)
sales company.
Specify [E-Mail Address] with up to 64 At the time of periodical The specified E-mail address exceeded 64
Specify E-mail address within 64 characters.
characters.
update setting
characters.
The following characters cannot be
At the time of periodical
used for the [E-Mail Address]:
update setting
,:;()[]<>\
Specify [Comments] with up to 128
At the time of periodical Comments exceeded 128 characters.
Specify comments within 128 characters.
characters.
update setting
The [Delivery Server URL] is incorrect. In setting with the deliver The specified deliver server URL is wrong.
Enter the right URL(https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif)
server URL.
T-6-25
6-101
Troubleshooting > Error Codes > How to read an error code
6-102
Error Codes
Error Codes displayed on LUI in a device and how to read them.
How to read an error code
84014206
Code
Value
The rst digit

Error eld
The second digit
Operator
Error
0
1
2
3
4
5
Not dened.
CDS server
Updater
UGW
Service person
IT administrator (User)
The 3rd - 4th digits

Method category
The 5th digit
Category code
xx
Method
The 6 - 8th digits

Description code
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
000-
Contents
Category code
See Error code list
F-6-187
Troubleshooting > Error Codes > How to read an error code
6-102
Troubleshooting > Error Codes > Error Code
6-103
Error Code
The error code list is shown below. Remedy are error codes of "-", and for all the error codes out of the list, contact Field Suppot Group in the sales company.
Error Code (hex number)
The first The second The 3rd - 4th The 5th digit The 6 - 8th digits
digit Error
digit
digits Method Category
Description
field
Operator
category
code
code
Error
0
1
Not defined.
CDS server
x
x
Description
Relating method code

0
Not categorized
0
0
1
No value is set in a mandatory data entry item
0
0
2
In a string type of a data entry item, digit number and/or
character type is/are set against the regulations
0
0
3
In an data entry item, the value is set against the regulations (E.g. the set value is other than "Operator: 4. Service person,
5. User")
0
0
4
No applicable delivery information exists
1
Operation
0
0
1
Inconsistency between the current firmware component
in the data entry item and delivery information (E.g. the
conditions for automatic update are not met. The settings of
a mandatory additional set are invalid)
0
0
2
In a notice of delivery-allowed information, an install-set was release to the market, but the market release was stopped
during the delivery
0
0
3
No mail template file exists
0
0
4
The device serial number in the data entry item differs from that in delivery information
0
0
5
User is selected as Operator in the data entry items and the retrieval type is other than the latest
0
0
6
The retrieval type in the data entry item is special and
registration ID and individual Password are not set (*
Operator did not enter registration ID and individual
Password)
0
0
7
The retrieval type in the data entry item is special and
Operator is not Service person
0
0
8
As to the device serial number in the data entry items, there is no applicable device code product
0
0
9
The retrieval type in the data entry items is special and
there are no basic-set applicable to the registration ID and
Password (* When wrong registration ID or Password was
entered by an operator)
0
0
A
The delivery status is Applying
0
0
B
No approval information exists about EULA or the export
criteria when the delivery is determined
0
0
C
The delivery status is Distributing/Distributed/Applying/
Finished/Failed
0
0
D
Finished/Failed
Remedy
Cause of error
CDS
UP CDS file Network
delivery DATER server
server
6-103

digit Error
digit
Description
field
Operator
category
code
code
2~5
I/O
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
8
9
Relating method code

0
Not cartelized
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
Operation
0
0
1
1
6-104
Description
The delivery status is New/Waiting to Distribute/Distributed/

Applying/Finished/Failed
The delivery code is other than Distributing.
(Firmware delivery)
The delivery status is New/Waiting to Distribute/Distributing/
Applying/Finished/Failed
Finished/Failed
Device is "Not applicable to CDS"
(Firmware delivery)
Remedy
Cause of error
CDS
UP CDS file Network
server
-
The specified license access number does not exist in LMS The specified license access number has been deauthorized The package product of the entered license access number doesn't include MEAP application/System Option
The sales company for the MEAP application isn't identical with the sale company for the package product
The number of licenses to be issued will exceed the limit
number allowed to register
As for System Option for the same function, the license keys were issued more than the defined number of times for the
same device serial number
No device product exists applicable to the optional product No product exists applicable to the device serial number
The product of the entered license access number cannot
be used with this device because the settings of the sales
company are incorrect
No product linked to the license access number is registered in CDS for delivery
Although the product linked to the license access number is registered in CDS for delivery, the delivery is stopped now
No existence of optional product applicable to the device
serial number.
The license access number has been registered for another device
For the device product applicable to the device serial
number, no available software (MEAP application, System
Option) exists
LMS system error
-
Not defined
Unknown error
Normally not indicated

Normally not indicated
Processing exclusively
Start the operation again after

terminating other Updater operations
being executed simultaneously
-
Failed to process preparation for use
6-104

digit Error
digit
Description
field
Operator
category
code
code
1
1
1
0
0
0
2
3
4
1
1
0
0
5
6
Description
Failed to process use end

Time out during restart of readiness preparation
Session time-out excluding after application inquiry (after
issuing delivery ID)
CDS URL is not set
There is another job
I/O
1
x
x
An internal error about file operation
2
x
x
An internal error about xML file operation
3
0
1
Failed to output the license file
Device
1
x
x
An internal error in CPCA
2
x
x
An internal error in IMI
3
x
x
An internal error in SMS
4
x
x
An internal error in NLM
SOAP communication
1
0
1
The processing thread stopped
1
0
2
Processing SOAP communication now
1
0
3
The function type is not matched
1
0
4
An invalid SOAP response error
2
0
1
An internal error about application information
2
0
2
config.xml is NOT FOUND
2
0
3
type.xml is NOT FOUND
2
0
4
An error in binding type.xml
2
0
5
An error in creating a service tab
2
0
6
A runtime error in performing the web method
2
0
7
An unknown host error in performing the web method
3
0
1
The delivery server is stopped
3
0
2
An error occurrence in the delivery server
HTTP communication
1
0
1
Specified Hash Algorithm is unknown
2
0
1
Invalid HTTP request
2
0
2
Failed to connect to the server
2
2
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
6
1
2
3
4
6-105
Remedy
Start the operation again from the

beginning
Set CDS URL
Start the operation again after
terminating the job of the device
Check the network environment of the

device and start the operation again
Check if the URL settings of the
CDS server are correct, and start the
operation again after resetting
-

Failed to find the server
An input/output error occurred during the connecting process to the server
Failed to read a HTTP response
Error in a HTTP response
Failed to retrieve the data stream
Failed to create the file object for receipt
Failed to create the data stream of the file for receipt
Failed to receive the data
Cause of error
CDS
UP CDS file Network
server
6-105

digit Error
digit
Description
field
Operator
category
code
code
Description
3
3
3
3
0
0
0
0
5
6
7
8
An error about reserving the file data for receipt

Failed to close the data stream
Failed to close the file data for receipt
Invalid hash code of the download file
The prosy authorization method is not applicable
6-106
Remedy

Check the proxy authentication method
used, and start the operation again
after changing the settings to use the
corresponding proxy anthentication
Socket communication
1
0
1
Failed to connect the eRDS
1
0
2
No response from eRDS
1
0
3
No notice of start from the eRDS
1
0
4
Error of socket reading
1
0
5
Socket communication time-out
Other internal codes
0
0
2
One of installation, start or authorization failed
(When installation or authorization failed, it is regarded as an
error) *
0
3
x
An internal error in processing the installation
1
x
x
An error by using invalid API
2
x
x
An internal error in SMS
3
0
1
No existence of delivery ID
3
0
2
Invalid delivery ID
3
0
3
The updated firmware information is not identical with the
firmware information after activation of the Updater
3
0
4
The process of firmware download is incomplete
3
0
5
The update process is incomplete
3
0
6
The installment process is incomplete
4
0
1
Failed to retrieve delivery information
5
0
1
Failed to execute the delivery process
5
0
2
The scheduled delivery was not executed within the defined Scheduled deliveries not executed
period of time
within the defined period of time are
abandoned, so register a scheduled
delivery again.
When setting the date and time of the
scheduled delivery, be sure to designate
a time when the device is ON
Cause of error
CDS
UP CDS file Network
server
-
T-6-26
* Not displayed on a device UI
6-106
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Overview > Function Overview
Debug log
6-107
Types of Logs
There are continuous logs, event logs, and manual logs.
Scope of Application
Type
Purpose
When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of debug log
by the R&D department, we ask the field to collect log for an investigation to determine the
cause.
This is intended to improve efficiency in log collection when a trouble occurs.
Collecting method
Number/size of Setting
logs collected
Continuous The behaviors of the Main Controller, 800 KB x 200

log
Reader Controller, and DC Controller files
are recorded on the HDD.
(160 MB)
Event log Automatically recorded in accordance 800 KB x 10 files
with the conditions specified in
(80 MB)
DEBUG-1.
n/a
Manual log Perform the following procedure.

1. Hold down the [Counter] button (10
seconds or longer).
2. Press 1 on the numeric keypad.
n/a
Overview
Function Overview
Debug log is an integrated log for failure analysis that gathers logs prepared by the software
modules in the device for debug purpose.
In the case of a field failure that is hard to be reproduced, this measure is intended to improve
efficiency in failure analysis and reduce the time for failure support by collecting debug log at
the user site (which was created immediately after the failure) and sending it to the R&D.
When the Canon quality-appointed staff determines the need for an analysis of firmware
Service mode Lev2: COPIER

> FUNCTION > SYSTEM >
DEBUG-1 > 3 (default)
3: Exception + E code + Reboot
Make movement same as 3
even if you change setting of it.
USB-FAX Board:
FAX--SSSW--SW01--bit5
0: File size 256-512KB
1: File size 4MB-8MB
T-6-27
debug log by the R&D department, we ask the field to collect log for an investigation to
determine the cause.
Effective Instances of Collecting Debug Log

The error occurs only at the customer site and cannot be reproduced by the sales company
or the Canon staff who is in charge of quality follow-up.
When the error frequency is low.
When the error is suspected of links with firmware rather than a mechanical/electrical
failure.
* Collection of Sublog is not necessary when the reproduction procedure is identified and
Conditions of Log Collection

Logs can be collected on a PCB-by-PCB basis. (SUBLOG, SUBLOG_RCON, SUBLOG_
DCON)
As for continuous logs, only SUBLOG is collected.
When restriction has occurred, SUBLOG_RCON and SUBLOG_DCON are collected.
Location
File name
Automatic collection
Continuous Event log
log
When an event
has occurred
the error can be reproduced by the sales company HQ or the Canon staff who is in charge
of quality follow-up.
Main Controller SUBLOG
Manual
collection
Manual log
When
restriction
has occurred
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Reader
SUBLOG_RCON No
Controller
DC Controller
SUBLOG_DCON No
USB-FAX Board SUBLOG
Yes
USBFAX_LOG
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
T-6-28
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Overview > Function Overview
6-107
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device)
6-108
Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device)
Collection of Logs
Connect SST or a USB memory device,
and select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD > OK to collect logs.
NOTE:
When the data is sent to the USB memory device:
USB memory where the system software for this machine has been registered using
the SST.
Description of Log to be Collected

As for SUBLOG, up to 200 logs can be stored on the HDD.
As for SUBLOG_RCON and SUBLOG_DCON, up to 10 logs can be stored on the HDD.
1) Lev1 COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD > OK
Logs are stored from the latest one, and the latest file is always stored.
Connect the USB memory device to the machine.
Logs earlier than those logs are overwritten and deleted from the oldest log.
2) [5] Execute [BACKUP].
When collecting logs from the machine, the log file in the machine is deleted.
Previous time
Delete
Delete Delete
10
This time
10
F-6-188
Collecting System Information

Collection Destination
To retrieve debug log to an external location from the device, use a USB memory device, FTP
server or SST (Ver. 4.63 or later).

------------------------------------[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
[4]: Format HDD
[5]: Backup
[9]: Other Menu
- (OK):0 / (CANCEL):Any other keys -
Collection Method
Retrieve debug log from the machine by any of the following methods.
Make the machine recognize the USB memory device. Select the following in service mode
Lev1: COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD; and click OK.
Use SST on a PC with the network cable connected to transfer the debug log.
Transfer the debug log to a USB memory device that stores the system of the machine.
File Name of Sublog

Whether the file is new or old can be judged by the year, month, day, hour, and minute.
SUBLOG04_0014_0515204388.Z
Layer number
mmddhhmm
Sequence number
F-6-189
F-6-190
3) [1] Execute [Sublog].
[[[[[ Backup Menu (USB) ]]]]]]]]]]]]
[1]: Sublog
[4]: ServicePrint
[5]: Netcap
[6]: SRAM(HDD)
[7]: SRAM(USB)
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Collecting Debug Log (USB memory device)
F-6-191
6-108
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Collecting System Information > Preconditions:
6-109
Uploading Data by SST
When the data is sent to the USB memory device

A folder of the year, month, day, hour, and minute is created in the USB memory device. The
log file is saved in the folder.
The following shows a method to collect a log by connecting a PC with SST (Ver. 4.63 or
later) running to the machine.
Example: Folder 201205241821
Preconditions:
In addition to continuous logs, obtained manual logs (holding down the counter + 1, 2, and 3
keys) and event logs (DEBUG-1) are stored in the machine.
A PC where SST is running is connected to the machine, and the machine is in download
mode.
Note:
Executing a log collection by SST deletes logs in the machine.
1. Start SST (Ver. 4.63 or later) and select iRC5051 from Model List. Press the Start button.
F-6-193
F-6-192
6-109
2. Press the Upload Data button.
6-110
4. Press the "Save" button.
F-6-194
3. Select the data to be uploaded, then click [Start] button.
F-6-196
5. Check that the data storage is completed and click the "OK" button.
When there is no log in the machine, it results in blank option items for "data to upload".
When the file name is longer than the frame, it displays that it is a log in the comment
column just below.
It is displayed as "log" in the figure below.
Note:
The log is not stored when You cancel it before pushing the Start button.
It is deleted from the main body.
F-6-197
F-6-195
6-110
6-111
6. Check that the log is stored in the specified location in the PC.
In the initial setting:
Windows(C:) > ServData > iAxxxx(Model) > JWH00003(Serial number) >
20120524192934-Log(yymmddhhmm)
F-6-198
6-111
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs > Checking the lighting of the LED4, LED5 on the Main Controller 2
Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs
6-112
Checking the lighting of the LED4, LED5 on the Main Controller 2
You may be able to determine the remedies against Main Controller-related troubles by
checking the lighting status of LEDs on the PCB.
Check the lighting of the LED
on the Main Controller PCB 2
Location of LEDs
LED4 is lit.
No
- Check for any blown-out fuse of the Relay

Board
- Check whether the connector (on the Main
Controller PCB 2 side) is securely connected
Yes
LED5 is lit.
LED1
LED 4
No
LED 5
LED 9
LED16
-When you did ON of a main switch, LED5 is lit.

If LED5 does not lit, replace the Main
Controller PCB 2.
Yes
Normal operation
F-6-200
F-6-199
Preconditions
Check whether the Main Controller PCB 1 and the Main Controller PCB 2 are properly
inserted.
Check whether the connectors are securely connected. LEDs are not lit when the contaction
is poor. (Power-on is not possible)
When the LED of the Control Panel main power is not lit, check the connection of cables (such
as UI Cable).
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs > Checking the lighting of the LED4, LED5 on the Main Controller 2
6-112
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs > Check the lighting of the LDEs on the Main Controller PCB 1
6-113
Check the lighting of the LDEs on the Main Controller PCB 1

Main Controller PCB 1 - LED9, LED16
Flash PCB - LED1
Check the lighting of the LDEs on

the Main Controller PCB 1
No
- Check power supply LED on the control panel light up

and connection cable.
- Check for any blown-out fuse of the Relay Board
- Check whether the connector (on the Main Controller
PCB 1 side) is securely connected
- Replace the Main Controller PCB1
No
-When you did ON of a main switch, the Main Controller PCB 2 LED5 is lit.
If LED5 does not lit, replace the Main Controller PCB 2.
- Error code (E602-0001) is displayed -> Replace the Main Controller PCB 1
LED16 is lit.
Yes
LED9 is lit.
Yes
LED1 of the Flash

PCB is lit.
No
- Check for poor connection of the FLASH PCB connector

- Replace the FLASH PCB / Main Controller PCB 1
- In the case of startup failure (error code cannot be displayed) although the
LED is lit, replace the FLASH PCB
Yes
Replace the
FLASH PCB
Normal startup
No
Yes
Normal operation
F-6-201
Troubleshooting > Debug log > Operation Check of the Main Controller LEDs > Check the lighting of the LDEs on the Main Controller PCB 1
6-113
Error Code
Overview
Code
Error
Code
Jam
Code
Alarm
Error Code
Error Code > Overview > Outline > Points to Note When Clearing HDD
Overview
7-2
Pickup position code

When jam occurs, pickup location is indicated with the following pickup position code.
Outline
In the jam display screen, the P row corresponds to the pickup position code.
This chapter describes various codes which are displayed when a failure occurs on the
Pickup position
product. These are classified into 3 codes as follows.

Code type
Error code
Jam code
Alarm code
Explanation
Reference
This code is displayed when an error occurs on the machine.

This code is displayed when a jam occurs inside the machine.
This code is displayed when a function of the machine is
malfunctioned.
p. 7-3
p. 7-83
p. 7-92
T-7-1
Error code notation

An error code is shown in 7-digit [E000XXX] on the display on the operation panel. However,
[000] in 2 to 4 digit is not used. Thus, an error code is described as [EXXX] using 5 to 7 digit
At Finisher jam/At error avoidance jam/At ADF jam without pickup

operation (at SEND, Inbox, etc.)
Right Deck
Left Deck
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
Multi-purpose Tray
Side Paper Deck
Duplex (At duplex printing, jam occurs after paper passes through the
Duplex Paper Sensor (PS38).)
Pickup position code

00
01
02
03
04
05
06
F0
T-7-3
in the service manual. (e.g.: E012 = E000012)
Points to Note When Clearing MN-CON
Location code
Execution of clearing MN-COM deletes all data in Address Book, Forwarding Settings,
Error code, jam code, and alarm code include the location information.
Settings/Registration (Preferences), Adjustment/Maintenance, Function Settings, Set
Location information is displayed as 2-digit numbers as follows.
Destination, Management Settings, TPM Settings, etc. Before execution of this operation,
In the jam display screen, the L row corresponds to the location code.
Device
JAM
ask user to back up the data and get approval for this operation.
ERR
ALARM
imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075/6065/6055 Series
00
Main Controller = 00 Others of

Printer engine = 05 listed below
Color Image Reader Unit-C1/

Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-C1
01
04
02
Paper Deck Unit-A1
00
05
04
Paper Deck Unit-D1
00
05
04
Document Insertion / Folding Unit-H1
02
05
02
05
02
05
61, 62
External 2/3 Hole Puncher-A1
02
05
65
When clearing MN-CON while any login application other than Default Authentication is,
error such as not displayed login screen occurred. In this case, access SMS once and
switch login application to Default Authentication to recover to the normal status.
Points to Note When Clearing HDD

As a remedy for error codes (E602-XXXX, E611-0000), HDD partition is selected and the
target partition may be cleared.
When clearing partition, be sure to check which data will be deleted by referring Detail of
HDD partition and explain to the user before starting work.
T-7-2
Error Code > Overview > Outline > Points to Note When Clearing HDD
7-2
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E000 to E069
Error Code
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E001 -0002 -05
Error Code Details

E000 to E069
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E000 -0001 -05
E000 -0002 -05
E000 -0010 -05
Item
Description
Title
Fixing Assembly low temperature error
Detection Temperature of the Fixing Main Thermistor (THM1) does
description not reach 70 degC although 20 seconds have passed after
starting the Fixing Roller temperature control.
Remedy
1. Check the connection of the Fixing Assembly. (Connection
error of the Drawer, connector disconnection, open circuit)
-> Replace the Heater Assembly.
2. Check the connection between the Main Driver PCB (PCB2)
and the Fixing Power Supply PCB (PCB10) (connector
disconnection, open circuit, the caught cable).
3. Replace the Fixing Power Supply PCB (PCB10).
4. Replace the Main Driver PCB (PCB2).
5. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
Title
Detection Temperature of the Fixing Main Thermistor (THM1) does
description not reach 10 degC although 20 seconds have passed after
starting the Fixing Roller temperature control.
Remedy
1. Check the connection of the Fixing Assembly. (Connection
error of the Drawer, connector disconnection, open circuit)
-> Replace the Heater Assembly.
and the Fixing Power Supply PCB (PCB10) (connector
disconnection, open circuit, the caught cable).
Title
Detection Turning OFF and then ON the power without clearing the
description error.
Remedy
Clear the error.
E001 -0003 -05
E001 -0004 -05
E001 -0010 -05
7-3
Item
Description
Title
Fixing Assembly high temperature error (software detection)
Detection The Fixing Main Thermistor (THM1) detects 230 degC or
description
higher.
The Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 (THM2)/Fixing Sub Thermistor
2 (THM3) detects 230 degC or higher for 2 consecutive
seconds.
Remedy
1. Check if the cable of the Thermistor is caught. -> Replace
the Thermistors. -> Replace the Fixing Upper Unit.
2. IH control error. -> Replace the Fixing Power Supply PCB
(PCB10), the DC Controller PCB (PCB1), or the Main Driver
PCB (PCB2).
Title
Fixing Assembly high temperature error (hardware detection)
Detection The Fixing Main Thermistor (THM1) detects hardware
description
overheating.
The Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 (THM2)/Fixing Sub Thermistor
2 (THM3) detects hardware overheating.
Remedy
1. Check if the cable of the Thermistor is caught. -> Replace
the Thermistors. -> Replace the Fixing Upper Unit.
Title
Fixing Assembly high temperature error (hardware detection)
Detection Abnormal temperature difference among the Thermistors was
description detected.
Remedy
1. Check if the cable of the Thermistor is caught or is open
circuit. -> Replace the Thermistors. -> Replace the Fixing
Upper Unit.
4. Check if the Fixing Shutter operates. -> Replace the Fixing
Assembly.
Title
Fixing Assembly high temperature error
description error.
Remedy
Clear the error.
7-3
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E002 -0001 -05
E002 -0010 -05
E003 -0000 -05
E003 -0010 -05
E004 -0010 -05
Item
Description
Title
Fixing Assembly temperature rise error
Detection Temperature of the Fixing Main Thermistor (THM1) does not
description
reach 100 degC although 12 seconds have passed since
it reached above 70 degC after starting the Fixing Roller
temperature control.
Temperature of the Fixing Main Thermistor does not reach
130 degC although 12 seconds have passed since it
reached above 100 degC after starting the Fixing Roller
Temperature of the Fixing Main Thermistor does not reach
150 degC although 15 seconds have passed since it
reached above 130 degC after starting the Fixing Roller
Remedy
1. Check the connection of the Fixing Main Thermistor (THM1).
-> Replace the Fixing Main Thermistor Unit.
2. Check the installation of the Fixing Main Thermistor. ->
Replace the Fixing Upper Unit.
6. Replace the Relay PCB (PCB5).
Fixing Assembly temperature rise error
Title
description error.
Remedy
Clear the error.
Title
Fixing Assembly temperature decrease error
Detection The Fixing Main Thermistor (THM1) detects 70 degC or lower
description for 2 seconds or longer although the temperature reached
above 100 degC after starting the Fixing Roller temperature
control.
Remedy
1. Check the connection of the Fixing Main Thermistor (THM1).
-> Replace the Fixing Main Thermistor Unit.
2. Check the installation of the Fixing Main Thermistor. ->
Replace the Fixing Upper Unit.
Fixing Assembly temperature decrease error
Title
description error.
Remedy
Clear the error.
Title
Fixing Power Supply error
description error.
Remedy
Clear the error.
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E004 -0205 -05
E005 -0000 -05
E005 -0001 -05
E005 -0010 -05
7-4
Item
Description
Title
Detection Detect that the Fixing Main Thermistor Unit is not connected.
description
Remedy
1. Check the harness of the Fixing Main Thermistor (THM1) in
the Fixing Assembly.
2. Check the connection of the harness of the Fixing Assembly
on the host machine side.
Fixing Cleaning Web absent error
Title
Detection After noticing the Fixing Cleaning Web absent, the web was
description pulled out 2000 times.
Remedy
1. Replace the Fixing Cleaning Web.
2. Replace the Fixing Cleaning Web Level Sensor (PS45).
After executing the measures, clear the Fixing Cleaning Web
counter (COPIER> COUNTER> MISC> FIXWEB).
Title
Error in Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid connection
Detection Connection of the Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid (SL9)
description is not detected when the power is turned ON.
Remedy
1. Check the Connector of the Fixing Cleaning Web Drive
Solenoid.
2. Check the output of the DC Power Supply PCB (24V)
(PCB31).
Using a tester, check whether 24V is output from 3PIN
through 6PIN of J513 on the Relay PCB. In case of error,
replace the DC Power Supply PCB (24V) (PCB31) (on the
right).
3. Replace the Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid (SL9).
Title
Fixing Cleaning Web error
description error.
Remedy
Clear the error.
7-4
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E012 -0001 -05
E013 -0001 -05
E013 -0002 -05
Item
Description
Title
Drum Motor (M1) error
Detection Lock error of the Drum Motor (M1).
description
Remedy
1. Check the connection of the Main Driver PCB (PCB2) and
the Drum Motor (M1).
Motor side: J2138, PCB side: J109
2. Check the voltage of the Drum Motor (M1) J2151.
If voltage is 0V, check the connection of the Relay PCB
J520.
3. Replace the Drum Motor (M1).
4. Check the gear of the Drum Drive Shaft.
If the load is too much, replace the Process Unit and the
Drum Drive Unit (Shaft).
Title
Error in Waste Toner Lock Detection Connector disconnection
Detection The Waste Toner Lock Detection Switch (SW5) detects locked
description state 3 times for 200 msec at power-on.
Remedy
Check the connection of the Waste Toner Lock Detection
Switch (SW5) and the Main Driver PCB (PCB2).
Switch side: J3050, PCB side: J103
Title
Error in Waste Toner Feed Screw Lock detection
Detection The Waste Toner Lock Detection Switch detects locked state 3
description times for 200 msec while the Developing Assembly is driven.
Remedy
1. Check the Waste Toner Container and the Waste Toner
Container Pipe.
If toner overflowed from the Waste Toner Container clogs
the outlet of the Waste Toner Pipe, remove the clogged
toner.
After removing it, check that the screw can be seen from
the outlet of the pipe.
2. Check the connection of the Waste Toner Lock Detection
Switch (SW5) and the Main Driver PCB (PCB2).
3. Check the connection of the Main Driver PCB (PCB2) and
the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
Main Controller side: J3050, DC Controller side: J103
4. Replace the Waste Toner Lock Detection Switch (SW5).
5. Replace the Waste Toner Feed Unit.
7. Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1). (When the error
is still displayed after replacing the Waste Toner Feed Unit
and the Main Driver PCB (PCB2).)
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E014 -0001 -05
E017 -0001 -05
7-5
Item
Description
Title
Fixing Motor error
Detection Lock error of the Fixing Motor (M3).
description
Remedy
1. Check the gear of the Fixing Drive Unit. -> Replace the
gear.
2. Replace the Fixing Motor (M3).
3. Check the connection drawer between the Fixing Assembly
and the host machine.
Title
ETB disengagement error
Detection Disengagement of the ETB is not completed within the
description specified period of time.
Remedy
1. Check the connection of the ETB Disengage Sensor (PS56).
Sensor side: J2101, J3270, PCB side: J343 (Duplex Driver
PCB (PCB4))
2. Check the connection of the Duplex Feed Left Motor (M19).
Motor side: J2107, J3044 (relay), PCB side: J330 (Duplex
Driver PCB (PCB4))
3. Replace the ETB Disengage Sensor (PS56).
4. Replace the Duplex Feed Left Motor (M19).
5. Replace the Duplex Driver PCB (PCB4).
NOTE:
Check if the Disengagement Cam is stained. If necessary,
clean it.
Check if the drive system (gear, Motor, one-way) is failed. If
necessary, replace it.
Check if the link with the Fixing Feed Handle is failed. If
7-5
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E017 -0002 -05
Item
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Description
ETB engagement error
Engagement of the ETB is not completed within the specified
period of time.
PCB (PCB4))
Driver PCB (PCB4))
3. Replace the ETB Engage Sensor (PS55).
NOTE:
clean it.
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E017 -0003 -05
7-6
Item
Description
Title
ETB HP error
Detection Engagement of the ETB was not completed at initialization.
description
Remedy
If this error occurs at installation, the ETB Disengage Member
(Transfer Frame Stopper) may be left unremoved. Refer
to the troubleshooting Remedy to be implemented when
the ETB Disengage Member (Transfer Frame Stopper) is
left unremoved in the Service Manual, and check whether
the ETB Disengage Member is left unremoved or not and
implement appropriate procedure.
If this error occurs at times other than installation, follow the
following steps to implement check and remedy.
PCB (PCB4))
Driver PCB (PCB4))
3. Replace the ETB Disengage Sensor (PS56).
NOTE:
clean it.
7-6
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E020 -0000 -05
E020 -0001 -05
E020 -0002 -05
Item
Description
Title
Developing Assembly toner absent error
Detection Toner in the Developing Assembly was empty for 2 minutes.
description
Remedy
1. Check the connection of the Developing Toner Sensor (TS1).
Sensor side: J2133, J3089 (relay), PCB side: J3088 (relay),
J114 (Main Driver PCB (PCB2))
2. Check the connection of the Magnet Roller Clutch (CL5).
Sensor side: J2036, J3124 (relay), J3090 (relay) PCB side:
J3091(relay), J115 (Main Driver PCB (PCB2))
3. Check the connection of the Toner Feed Motor (M28).
Motor side: J2035, J3124 (relay), J3090 (relay) PCB side:
4. Check the connection of the Buffer Toner Sensor (TS3).
5. Replace the Developing Toner Sensor (TS1).
6. Replace the Magnet Roller Clutch (CL5).
7. Replace the Toner Feed Motor (M28).
8. Replace the Buffer Toner Sensor (TS3).
Title
Error in Developing Toner Sensor connection detection
Detection The connection detection port was OFF at power-on.
description
Remedy
1. Check the connection of the Developing Toner Sensor (TS1).
2. Replace the Developing Toner Sensor (TS1).
Title
Error in Buffer Toner Sensor connection detection
description
Remedy
1. Check the connection of the Buffer Toner Sensor (TS3).
2. Replace the Buffer Toner Sensor (TS3).
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E020 -0003 -05
E020 -0004 -05
E020 -0020 -05
E020 -0021 -05
7-7
Item
Description
Title
Error in the Toner Excess Supply Sensor connection detection
description
Remedy
1. Check the connection of the Toner Excess Supply Sensor
(TS2).
2. Replace the Toner Excess Supply Sensor (TS2).
Title
Error in Magnet Roller Clutch connection detection
description
Remedy
Title
Error in Developing Assembly Toner Sensor Cleaning Scraper
displacement
Detection State without toner was detected continuously.
description
Remedy
1. Turn OFF the main power.
2. Replace the Developing Assembly.
3. Turn ON the main power.
Title
Error in Developing Assembly Toner Sensor Cleaning Scraper
displacement
Detection State with toner was detected continuously.
description
Remedy
1. Turn OFF the main power.
3. Turn ON the main power.
7-7
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E023 -0001 -05
E023 -0002 -05
E025 -0001 -05
Item
Description
Title
Developing Motor error
Detection Lock error of the Developing Motor (M2).
description
Remedy
1. Check the connection of the Connector.
Motor side: J2319, Main Driver PCB (PCB2) side: J109
2. Check the voltage of the Developing Motor (M2) J2152.
If voltage is 0V, check the connection of the Relay PCB
J520.
3. Check the load of the Developing Motor (M2).
Manually turn the Developing Motor (M2) located at the rear
of the host machine to check it.
4. Replace the Developing Motor (M2).
5. Replace the Developing Clutch (CL1). (When an error
occurs while the Developing Clutch is ON.)
Title
Error in Magnet Roller Clutch connection detection
Detection Connection of the Magnet Roller Clutch (CL5) cannot be
description detected 5 times with 20 msec time interval.
Remedy
Sensor side: J2006, Main Driver PCB (PCB2) side: J109
Title
Toner Feed Motor error
Detection Overcurrent of the Toner Feed Motor (M28) was detected.
description
Remedy
Motor side: J2036, Buffer Unit relay: J3124, Front side relay:
J3090, Rear side relay: J3091, Main Driver PCB (PCB2)
side: J115
2. Replace the Toner Feed Motor (M28).
3. Check if toner is clogged inside of the Buffer.
Turn the Drive Shaft of the Motor with your hand to check it.
If the load is too much, inside of the Buffer may be clogged,
so clean inside of it.
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E027 -0001 -05
E032 -0001 00
E041 -0001 -05
E041 -0002 -05
E041 -0003 -05
E041 -0004 -05
7-8
Item
Description
Title
Toner Supply Motor error
Detection Lock error of the Toner Supply Motor (M10).
description
Remedy
Motor side: J2037, Front side relay: J3080, Rear side relay:
J3063, Main Driver PCB (PCB2) side: J117
2. Remove the Toner Container, and check if an error occurs.
If an error does not occur, reinstall the Toner Container and
check again. If an error occurs, check the driving area of
connection point of the container.
If an error occurs, go on to 3.
3. Replace the Toner Supply Motor (M10).
Title
Failure of NE Controller Counter
Detection Detection of open circuit of count pulse signal.
description
Remedy
Disconnection of cable.
Title
Right Deck Lifter Motor error
Detection Overcurrent of the Right Deck Lifter Motor was detected.
description
Remedy
1. Check for displacement of the Lifter Wire of the Right Deck.
2. Check for hindrance to smooth movement of the Deck Base
Plate of the Right Deck.
Title
Left Deck Lifter Motor error
Detection Overcurrent of the Left Deck Lifter Motor was detected.
description
Remedy
1. Check for displacement of the Lifter Wire of the Left Deck.
2. Check for hindrance to smooth movement of the Deck Base
Plate of the Left Deck.
Title
Cassette 3 Lifter Motor error
Detection Overcurrent of the Cassette 3 Lifter Motor was detected.
description
Remedy
1. Check for error around the Lifter of the Cassette 3.
2. Check for hindrance to smooth movement of the Cassette
Base Plate of the Cassette 3.
Title
Cassette 4 Lifter Motor error
Detection Overcurrent of the Cassette 4 Lifter Motor was detected.
description
Remedy
1. Check for error around the Lifter of the Cassette 4.
2. Check for hindrance to smooth movement of the Cassette
Base Plate of the Cassette 4.
7-8
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E053 -0001 -05
Item
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Description
Error in Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid connection detection
Connection of the Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid (SL5)
cannot be detected 5 times with 20 msec time interval.
1. Check the connection of the Reverse Upper Flapper
Solenoid (SL5).
Solenoid side: J2115, Duplex Driver PCB side: J340
2. Replace the Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid (SL5).
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E060 -0001 -05
7-9
Item
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Description
Primary Charging Shutter HP open error
The Primary Charging Shutter Sensor (PS94) detects that the
shutter is opened although it is moved to the close position.
1. Check the position of the Primary Charging Shutter and the
Cleaning Pad.
1-A. In the case that the Primary Charging Shutter and the
Cleaning Pad fail to operate (stopped at HP at front side)
1-A-1. Check the connection of the Primary Charging
Wire Cleaning Motor (M6).
Motor side: J3017, J3060 (iR-ADV 8xxx)/J3160 (iRADV 6xxx) (relay), PCB side: J3177 (relay), J107 (Main
Driver PCB (PCB2))
1-A-2. Replace the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning
Motor (M6).
1-B. In the case that the Primary Charging Shutter and the
Cleaning Pad are stopped at rear side (close operation
position)
1-B-1. Check the connection of the Primary Charging
Shutter Sensor (PS94).
Sensor side: J2029, J3089 (relay), PCB side: J3088
(relay), J114 (Main Driver PCB (PCB2))
1-B-2. Replace the Primary Charging Shutter Sensor
(PS94).
1-C. In the case that the Primary Charging Shutter and the
Cleaning Pad are stopped along the way
1-C-1. Check the loosening of screw on the Slider Pin
and abrasion of the pin. Tighten the screw or replace
the Slider Pin.
1-C-2. Replace the Primary Charging Assembly.
1-D. In the case that the Primary Charging Shutter stops at
front side and the Cleaning Pad moves to rear side
1-D-1. Check if the Shutter Mounting Plate is deformed.
If so, replace the Shutter Unit.
1-D-2. Check the loosening of screw on the Slider Pin
the Slider Pin.
1-D-3. Replace the Primary Charging Assembly.
7-9
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E060 -0002 -05
Item
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Description
Primary Charging Shutter HP close error
The Primary Charging Shutter Sensor (PS94) detects that the
shutter is closed although it is moved to the open position.
1. Check the position of the Primary Charging Shutter and the
Cleaning Pad.
1-A. In the case that the Primary Charging Shutter and the
Cleaning Pad fail to operate (stopped at HP at front side)
1-A-1. Check the connection of the Primary Charging
Wire Cleaning Motor (M6).
Motor side: J3017, J3060 (iR-ADV 8xxx)/J3160 (iRADV 6xxx) (relay), PCB side: J3177 (relay), J107 (Main
Driver PCB (PCB2))
1-A-2. Replace the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning
Motor (M6).
1-B. In the case that the Primary Charging Shutter and the
Cleaning Pad are stopped at rear side (close operation
position)
1-B-1. Check the connection of the Primary Charging
(relay), J114 (Main Driver PCB (PCB2))
1-B-2. Replace the Primary Charging Shutter Sensor
(PS94).
1-C. In the case that the Primary Charging Shutter and the
Cleaning Pad are stopped along the way
1-C-1. Check the loosening of screw on the Slider Pin
the Slider Pin.
1-C-2. Replace the Primary Charging Assembly.
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E061 -0001 -05
7-10
Item
Description
Title
Potential control error (VL)
Detection The measured value in the dark area (VL) differs +/-30 V or
description higher than the target potential at potential control.
NOTE:
If the difference is somewhere between +/-10 V and less than
30 V, alarm is indicated.
Remedy
1. Check the connection of the Pre-exposure LED (connector
connection, open circuit, the caught cable).
2. Check the installation of the Primary Charging Assembly
(connector connection, open circuit, the caught cable).
3. Check the fixation state of the Drum and the Drum Shaft.
(Check if the drum fixation cylinder is properly installed.)
4. Check if the Dustproof Glass is soiled. If necessary, clean it.
5. Check the installation of the Laser Scanner Unit (connector
6. Check the installation of the Primary Charging High Voltage
PCB (PCB11), and its connection (connector connection,
open circuit, the caught cable).
7. Check the installation of the Potential Sensor (connector
8. Check the installation of the Drum Motor (M1), and its
connection (connector connection, open circuit, the caught
cable).
9. Replace the parts.
Laser Scanner Unit
Potential Sensor
Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (PCB11)
Drum Motor (M1)
Main Driver PCB (PCB2)
DC Controller PCB (PCB1)
7-10
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E061 -0101 -05
E064 -00FF -05
Item
Description
Title
Potential control error (VD)
Detection Potential in the dark area did not fall within the range (target
description value +/-10 V) although retry was executed 8 times at VD
potential control.
Remedy
1. Check the connection of the Pre-exposure LED (connector
2. If the current value of the Primary Charging Roller (COPIER>
DISPLAY> DPOT> PRIM-C) is 1550 micro A or higher,
execute 2-1 to 3.
2-1. Increase the grid voltage of the Primary Charging
Assembly by 100V (COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI>
PRI-GRID).
2-2. Execute the potential control (COPIER>
FUNCTION> DPC> DPC).
2-3. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
4. Check the installation of the Primary Charging High Voltage
PCB (PCB11), and its connection (connector connection,
5. Check the installation of the Drum Motor (M1), and its
connection (connector connection, open circuit, the caught
cable).
Drum Motor (M1)
Title
High voltage setting error
Detection With the state in which the developing AC is output, 600 V or
description higher developing DC output was detected.
(Basically, this error is not detected. However, to detect that
the image formation-related backup data is corrupted or to
protect the hardware in case of 600 V or higher developing
DC output, this is to be an error.)
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
2. Replace the DCON PCB.
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E065 -0001 -05
7-11
Item
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Description
Primary charging/grid high voltage output leak error
The leak detection signal was detected 5 times in a row for
every 20 msec.
and the High Voltage Unit.
Main Driver side: J111, High Voltage Unit side: J3097
2. Check the connection between the Relay PCB (PCB5) and
the High Voltage Unit.
Relay side: J519, High Voltage Unit side: J3099
3. Replace the Primary Charging Assembly.
4. Check the connection inside of the High Voltage Unit.
High Voltage Unit Relay (J3097) and Primary Charging High
Voltage PCB (PCB11) (J3501)
High Voltage Unit relay (J3099) and Pre-transfer Charging
PCB (PCB26) (J3545, J3500)
6. Replace the Primary Grid High Voltage Connector (FM41006).
7-11
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E066 -0001 -05
Item
Description
Title
Pre-transfer Charging Shutter HP open error
Detection The Pre-transfer Charging Shutter Sensor (PS95) detects
description that the shutter is opened although it is moved to the close
position.
Remedy
1. Check the position of the Pre-transfer Charging Shutter.
1-A. In the case that the Pre-transfer Charging Shutter fails to
operate (stopped at HP at front side)
Check the connection of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire
Cleaning Motor (M7).
1-B. In the case that the Pre-transfer Charging Shutter is
stopped at rear side (close operation position)
1-B-1. Check that the Primary Fan Duct is closed. Close
the Primary Fan Duct.
1-B-2. Check movement of the pin to push the Pretransfer Charging Shutter Sensor (PS95). Replace the
Pin.
1-B-3. Check movement of the flag on the Pre-transfer
Charging Shutter Sensor (PS95). Replace the flag/
spring.
1-B-4. Check the connection of the Pre-transfer Charging
Sensor side: J2114, J3215 (relay), J3067 (relay) PCB
side: J3066 (relay), J130 (Main Driver PCB (PCB2))
1-C. In the case that the Pre-transfer Charging Shutter is
stopped along the way
1-C-1. Check abrasion of the Slider Pin. Replace the
Slider Pin.
1-C-2. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly.
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E066 -0002 -05
7-12
Item
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Description
Pre-transfer Charging Shutter HP close error
The Pre-transfer Charging Shutter Sensor (PS95) detects that
the shutter is closed although it is moved to the open position.
1. Check the position of the Pre-transfer Charging Shutter.
1-A. In the case that the Pre-transfer Charging Shutter fails to
operate (stopped at HP at front side)
Check the connection of the Pre-transfer Charging Wire
Cleaning Motor (M7).
1-B. In the case that the Pre-transfer Charging Shutter is
stopped at rear side (close operation position)
1-B-1. Check that the Primary Fan Duct is closed. Close
the Primary Fan Duct.
1-B-2. Check movement of the pin to push the Pretransfer Charging Shutter Sensor (PS95). Replace the
Pin.
1-B-3. Check movement of the flag on the Pre-transfer
Charging Shutter Sensor (PS95). Replace the flag/
spring.
1-B-4. Check the connection of the Pre-transfer Charging
Sensor side: J2114, J3215 (relay), J3067 (relay) PCB
side: J3066 (relay), J130 (Main Driver PCB (PCB2))
1-C. In the case that the Pre-transfer Charging Shutter is
stopped along the way
1-C-1. Check abrasion of the Slider Pin. Replace the
Slider Pin.
1-C-2. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly.
7-12
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E067 -0001 -05
E068 -0001 -05
Item
Description
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Developing high voltage output leak error

every 20 msec.
4. Check the connection point of the Developing Assembly.
If it is soiled, clean it.
Check the connection of the High Voltage Unit Relay (J3097)
and the Developing High Voltage PCB (J3511).
High Voltage Unit Relay (J3099) and Pre-transfer Charging
PCB (J3545, J3500, J3510)
Title
Pre-transfer charging high voltage output leak error
Detection The leak detection signal was detected 5 times in a row for
description every 20 msec.
Remedy
3. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly.
and the Transfer High Voltage PCB (J3544).
and the Pre-transfer Charging PCB (J3545, J3500)
6. Replace the Pre-transfer High Voltage Connector (FM41007).
7. Replace the Pre-transfer Transformer (Post Charging
Trance) of the High Voltage Unit.
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E069 -0001 -05
7-13
Item
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Description
Transfer high voltage output leak error
every 20 msec.
1. Check the connection between the Duplex Driver PCB
(PCB4) and the High Voltage Unit.
Check the connection at Duplex Driver side (J343) and the
Transfer High Voltage side (J3066).
Check the connection at Duplex Driver side (J311) and the
Transfer High Voltage side (J3061). (In addition, check that
24 V is output.)
2. Check the connection of the Transfer High Voltage PCB
(J3306).
3. Replace the ETB Unit.
T-7-4
7-13
E100 to E199
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E100 -11xx
-05
E100 -12xx
-05
Item
Description
BD unlock error
Locked state was not detected within the specified period of
time at start-up.
1. Check if the door is opened. Close the door.
2. Check the connection between the DC Controller PCB
(PCB1) and the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35).
DC Controller side: J471, J472, Laser Driver side: J5100,
J5101, Relay Harness connection to Polygon Motor and BD
PCB: J3011
3. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit.
4. Replace the Laser Driver PCB (PCB35).
NOTE:
When condensation occurs inside of the machine or the Laser
Scanner Unit, this error also occurs.
When condensation occurs, leave the machine or the unit as it
is until condensation disappears. (Use the machine or the unit
in an environment where condensation does not occur.)
Title
BD unlock error
Detection After the BD range was specified, lock was unlocked for 1
description second or longer.
Remedy
PCB: J3011
NOTE:
7-14
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E100 -13xx
-05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E100 -FFFF -05
E102 -0001 -05
Item
Description
Title
Polygon Motor BD unlock error (Laser diode is not lit up/failure

of the BD PCB/power supply error, or condensation)
Detection During the Polygon speed change, lock was unlocked for 1
description second or longer. (Laser diode is not lit up/failure of the BD
PCB/power supply error, or condensation)
Remedy
PCB: J3011
NOTE:
Title
Polygon Motor BD unlock error
Detection Failed to get the Detailed Code (communication error, power
description supply error, PCB failure, etc.).
Remedy
2. Check the connector connection, open circuit, and the
caught cable of the DC Controller PCB (PCB1) and the
Laser Driver PCB (PCB35).
J5101, Relay Harness connection to Polygon Motor (M44)
and BD Sensor: J3011
Title
EEPROM writing error
Detection Failed to write to EEPROM (Power is not supplied/EEPROM
description failure).
Remedy
7-14
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E103 -0001 -05
E110 -11xx
E110 -12xx
-05
-05
Item
Description
Title
Different Laser Scanner Unit model error
Detection The scanner for 6275/6265/6255 models was installed to the
description imageRUNNER ADVANCE 8205/8295/8285 models, and vice
versa.
Remedy
Replace the Laser Scanner Unit with the one for the correct
model.
Title
Polygon Motor FG unlock error
Detection Locked state was not detected within the specified period of
description time at start-up. (Power is not supplied/Polygon Motor signal
error)
Remedy
Title
Detection After the BD range was specified, lock was unlocked for 1
description second or longer. (Power is not supplied/Polygon Motor signal
error)
Remedy
7-15
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E110 -13xx
-05
E110 -FFFF -05
E121 -0001 -05
E197 -0001 -05
Item
Description
Title
Detection During the Polygon speed change, lock was unlocked for 1
description second or longer. (Power is not supplied/Polygon Motor signal
error)
Remedy
Title
Detection Failed to get the Detailed Code (communication error, power
description supply error, PCB failure).
Remedy
Title
Laser Scanner Cooling Fan error
Detection The Fan stop signal is detected for 5 seconds or longer and
description retry is failed 4 times in a row although the Laser Scanner
Cooling Fan (FM16) is turned ON.
Remedy
2. Replace the Laser Scanner Cooling Fan (FM16).
Title
Error in Main Driver PCB connection detection
Detection Failed to establish a communication between the DC
description Controller PCB (PCB1) and the Main Driver PCB (PCB2).
Remedy
1. Check the connection of the DC Controller PCB (PCB1)
and the Main Driver PCB (PCB2).
DC Controller side: J411, J412, Main Driver side: J125,
J126
2. Check the Main Driver PCB (PCB2) power supply
connection.
Check the connection at the Main Driver side (J128) and
the DC Controller side (J414), and check the voltage.
7-15
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E197 -0002 -05
E197 -0003 -05
E197 -0004 -05
Item
Description
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Error in Feed Driver PCB connection detection

Failed to establish a communication between the DC
Controller PCB (PCB1) and the Feed Driver Pub (PCB3).
and the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3).
DC Controller side: J421, Feed Driver side: J204
2. Check the connection of the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3) and
the DC-DC Converter PCB.
Check the connection at the Feed Driver side (J218) and
the DC-DC Converter side (J9033).
3. Check the power supply of the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3).
Check if appropriate voltages are applied to the Feed Driver
side (12 V to 1pin, 5 V to 3pin, 3.3 V to 4pin). -> If not,
replace the DC-DC Converter PCB.
4. Replace the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3).
Title
Error in Duplex Driver PCB connection detection
Detection Failed to establish a communication between the DC
description Controller PCB (PCB1) and the Duplex Driver PCB (PCB4).
Remedy
(PCB1) and the Fixing Feed Drawer.
DC Controller side: J431, J432, Fixing Feed Drawer (host
machine side): J3002D
Fixing Feed Drawer (Fixing Feed side): J3002L, Duplex
Driver side: J300, J301
2. Check the connection of the Duplex Driver PCB (PCB4)
and the DC-DC Converter PCB.
Check the connection at the Duplex Driver side (J311) and
the DC-DC Converter side (J9034).
3. Check the power supply of the Duplex Driver PCB (PCB4).
Check if appropriate voltages are applied to the Duplex
Driver side (12 V to 1pin, 5 V to 3pin, 3.3 V to 4pin). -> If
not, replace the DC-DC Converter PCB.
Title
Error in Relay PCB connection detection
Detection Connection between the DC Controller PCB (PCB1) and the
description Relay PCB (PCB5) is disconnected.
Remedy
and the Relay PCB (PCB5).
DC Controller side: J451, Relay side: J514
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E197 -0005 -05
7-16
Item
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E197 -0006 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E197 -0008 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E197 -0009 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Description
Error in Main Driver PCB Analog Connector connection
detection
Connection between the DC Controller PCB (PCB1) and the
Main Driver PCB (PCB2) is disconnected.
DC Controller side: J413, Main Driver side: J124
Error in Feed Driver PCB Drawer Connector connection
detection
Feed Driver PCB (PCB3) is disconnected.
(PCB1) and the Fixing Feed Drawer.
DC Controller side: J431, J432, Fixing Feed Drawer (host
machine side): J3002D
Fixing Feed Drawer (Fixing Feed side): J3002L, Feed
Driver side: J300, J301
Error in Fixing Drawer Connector connection detection
Main Driver PCB (PCB2) is disconnected.
and the Fixing Drawer.
Main Driver side: J105, Fixing Drawer (host machine side):
J3001D
Check the Harness of the Fixing Drawer (Fixing side)
(J3001L).
Error in the Process Unit connection detection
Connection between the Main Driver PCB (PCB2) and the
Process Unit is disconnected.
and the Process Unit.
PCB side: J107, Process Unit side: J3060
2. Replace the Process Unit.
7-16
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E197 -0010 -05
Item
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E197 -0011
-05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E197 -0012 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E197 -0181 -05
Title
Detection
description
E199 -0000 -05
E202 to E280
Description
Error in Primary Charging High Voltage PCB connection
detection
Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (PCB11) is disconnected.
and the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (PCB11).
Main Driver side: J111, Primary Charging High Voltage side:
J3501
2. Replace the Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (PCB11).
Error in Developing High Voltage PCB connection detection
Developing High Voltage PCB (PCB12) is disconnected.
and the Developing High Voltage PCB (PCB12).
Main Driver side: J112, Developing High Voltage side:
J3511
2. Replace the Developing High Voltage PCB (PCB12).
Error in Transfer High Voltage PCB connection detection
Connection between the Duplex Driver PCB (PCB4) and the
Transfer High Voltage PCB (PCB13) is disconnected.
1. Check the connection between the Duplex Driver PCB
(PCB4) and the Transfer High Voltage PCB (PCB13).
Duplex Driver side: J343, Transfer High Voltage side: J3062
2. Replace the Transfer High Voltage PCB (PCB13).
Serial communication error
Failure of reception from the video signal control ASIC.
Data reception was failed 5 times in a row when reading data
from the video signal control ASIC (at FG lock detection, BD
lock detection).
Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
-
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Collect the sublog and contact the sales company.
T-7-5
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E202 -0001 -04
E202 -0002 -04
E202 -0101 -04
E202 -0102 -04
E227 -0001 -04
E227 -0002 -04
7-17
Item
Description
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Scanner HP error
An error occurs during the Scanner Unit (Paper Front) HP
detection operation (outward).
1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Scanner HP
Sensor (SR2).
2. Failure of the Scanner HP Sensor (SR2).
3. Failure of the Scanner Motor (M1).
4. Failure of the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1).
Title
Scanner HP error
Detection An error occurs during the Scanner Unit (Paper Front) HP
description detection operation (homeward).
Remedy
1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Scanner HP
Sensor (SR2).
2. Failure of the Scanner HP Sensor (SR2).
3. Failure of the Scanner Motor (M1).
Title
Glass HP error
Detection An error occurs during the Glass HP detection operation
description (outward).
Remedy
1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Glass Shift HP
Sensor (SR11).
2. Failure of the Glass Shift HP Sensor (SR11).
3. Failure of the Glass Shift Motor (M9).
4. Failure of the DADF Driver PCB (PCB1).
Title
Glass HP error
Detection An error occurs during the Glass HP detection operation
description (homeward).
Remedy
1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Glass Shift HP
Sensor (SR11).
2. Failure of the Glass Shift HP Sensor (SR11).
3. Failure of the Glass Shift Motor (M9).
Title
Power supply (24 V) error
Detection 24 V port is OFF when the power is turned ON.
description
Remedy
1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Reader Power
Supply.
2. Failure of power supply.
Title
Detection 24 V port is OFF when a job is started.
description
Remedy
Supply.
7-17
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E227 -0003 -04
E227 -0004 -04
E227 -0101 -04
E227 -0102 -04
E227 -0103 -04
E240 -0000 -05
Item
Description
Title
Detection 24 V port is OFF when a job is ended.
description
Remedy
Supply.
Title
Detection 24 V port is OFF when loading.
description
Remedy
Supply.
Title
Detection 24 V port is OFF when the power of DADF is turned ON.
description
Remedy
1. Connection error between the DADF Driver PCB (PCB1)
and the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1).
Supply.
Title
Detection 24 V port is OFF when a job is started in the DADF.
description
Remedy
Supply.
Title
Detection 24 V port is OFF when a job is ended in the DADF.
description
Remedy
Supply.
Title
Communication error between Main Controller and DC
Controller
Detection Communication error occurs between the CPU of the Main
description Controller PCB and the DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
Remedy
1. Check the connection of the Main Controller PCB and the
DC Controller PCB (PCB1).
Main Controller side: J712, DC Controller side: J442
3. Replace the Main Controller PCB.
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E240 -0001 -05
E240 -0002 -05
E240 -0003 -05
E246 -0001 -00
E246 -0002 -00
E246 -0003 -00
E246 -0005 -00
E247 -0001 -00
7-18
Item
Description
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
3 minutes passed with pickup request waiting status

It was detected that 3 minutes passed with pickup request
waiting status.
2. Check the connection of the Sub PCB in the Main Controller
PCB 1 Box.
3. Check the connections of the DC Controller PCB and the
Main Controller PCB 1. Replace the PCB(s) if necessary.
Title
3 minutes passed with image output request waiting status
Detection It was detected that 3 minutes passed with image output
description request waiting status.
Remedy
PCB 1 Box.
Title
Software sequence error after the jam
Detection A software sequence error (engine bug) was detected after the
description jam.
Remedy
PCB 1 Box.
Title
System error
Detection --description
Remedy
Contact to the sales companies.
Title
System error
Remedy
Title
System error
Remedy
Title
System error
Remedy
Title
System error
Remedy
7-18
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E247 -0002 -00
E247 -0003 -00
E247 -0004 -00
E248 -0000 -00
E248 -0001 -04
E248 -0002 -04
E248 -0003 -04
E263 -0000 -05
Item
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Description
System error
---
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E263 -0001 -05

System error
--Contact to the sales companies.
System error
---
E263 -0002 -05

SRAM error
SRAM check error when the power is turned ON.
EEPROM error
An error when EEPROM power for the Reader Controller PCB
(PCB1) is turned ON.
Failure of the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1).
EEPROM error
EEPROM writing error for the Reader Controller PCB (PCB1).
EEPROM error
Reading error after writing to EEPROM for the Reader
Controller PCB (PCB1).
Error in Current Sensor reference voltage generation
When CP54 on the Main Driver PCB was measured with a
tester, the reference voltage (normally 2.5 V) was not within
the range of reference value (2.2 to 2.7 V).
1. Check the connection between the AC Driver PCB and the
Main Driver PCB (connector disconnection, open circuit,
short circuit of harness).
AC Driver side: J615, Main Driver side: J103
2. Replace the AC Driver PCB.
E270 -0001 -04
E270 -0002 -04
7-19
Item
Description
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Current Sensor error

An error is detected in the value of the Current Sensor (SE601)
(the value remains at the upper limit).
Title
Current Sensor error
Detection An error is detected in the value of the Current Sensor (SE601)
description (the value remains at the lower limit).
Remedy
Title
Error in paper front vertical scanning synchronous signal
Detection Vertical scanning synchronous signal (VSYNC) is not sent
description appropriately from the CMOS PCB (Scanner Unit (Paper
Front)), so the image error occurs or the operation stops
abnormally.
Remedy
1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Scanner Unit
(Reader).
2. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Reader
3. Failure of the Scanner Unit (Reader).
Title
Error in horizontal scanning/vertical scanning synchronous
signal
Detection Due to the horizontal scanning synchronous signal (HSYNC)
description error, the vertical scanning synchronous signal (VSYNC) is
not sent, so the image error occurs or the operation stops
abnormally.
Remedy
(Reader/DADF).
3. Failure of the Scanner Unit (Reader/DADF).
7-19
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E270 -0101 -04
E280 -0001 -04
E280 -0101 -04
Item
E301 to E355
Description
Title
Error in paper back vertical scanning synchronous signal
Detection Vertical scanning synchronous signal (VSYNC) is not sent
description appropriately from the CMOS PCB (Scanner Unit (Paper
Back)), so the image error occurs or the operation stops
abnormally.
Remedy
(DADF).
3. Failure of the Scanner Unit (DADF).
Title
Communication error between Reader Controller PCB (PCB1)
and Scanner Unit (Reader)
Detection Within the specified period of time, communication between
description the Reader Controller PCB and Scanner Unit (Paper Front) is
not started.
Remedy
(Reader).
Title
and Scanner Unit (DADF)
Detection Within the specified period of time, communication between
description the Reader Controller PCB and Scanner Unit (Paper Back) is
not started.
Remedy
(DADF).
T-7-6
7-20
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E301 0001
-04
E301 0101
-04
E302 0001
-04
E302 0101
-04
E315 0007
-00
E315 000d
-00
E315 000e
-00
Item
Description
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Paper front light intensity NG

Light intensity is below the reference level at paper front
shading.
Failure of the Scanner Unit (Reader).
Paper back light intensity NG
Light intensity is below the reference level at paper back
shading.
Failure of the Scanner Unit (DADF).
Error in paper front shading
Error in shading RAM access, or the shading value is either
below or higher than the reference level.
(Reader).
Title
Error in paper back shading
Detection Error in shading RAM access, or the shading value is either
description below or higher than the reference level.
Remedy
(DADF).
3. Operation error of the Glass Shift Motor (M9).
Title
Codec error
Detection JBIG encode error.
description
Remedy
Replacement of the Main Controller PCB.
Title
Codec error
Detection JBIG decode error.
description
Remedy
1. Replacement of SDRAM.
2. Replacement of HDD.
3. Replacement of the Main Controller PCB.
Title
Codec error
Detection Software decode error.
description
Remedy
1. Replacement of SDRAM.
2. Replacement of HDD.
3. Replacement of the Main Controller PCB.
7-20
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E315 0025
-00
E315 0027
-00
E315 0033
-00
E315 0035
-00
E315 0100
-00
E315 0500
-00
E315 0501
-00
E315 0510
-00
E315 0511
-00
E315 0520
-00
E315 0521
-00
Item
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Description
Codec error
ROTU hardware error.
7-21
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E315 0530
-00

Codec error
ROTU timeout error.
E315 0531
-00

MemFill hardware error
MemFill hardware error.
E315 0540
-00

Codec error
MemFill timeout error.
Item
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy

Codec error
PrcOverRun error.
Codec error
Interruption does not occur although 2 minutes have passed
after starting the operation.
jcdImage device.
Codec error
Abnormal interruption is detected after starting the operation.
jcdImage device.
Codec error
jcdImage device.
Codec error
jcdImage device.
Codec error
jcdImage device.
Codec error
E315 0541
-00
E315 0550
-00
E315 0551
-00
E315 0560
-00
E315 0561
-00
E350 0000
-00
jcdImage device.
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Description
Codec error
jcdImage device.
Codec error
jcdImage device.
JPEG decode error
This error occurs when images buffered in the HDD or
memory were corrupted when performing image processing.
JPEG decode is used when handling color (or gray) images.
Therefore, the error does not occur for normal copy or PDL
print. But it may occur with SEND.
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
If it is not recovered or it occurs frequently, perform the
following measures.
2. Format the HDD. If it is not recovered, replace the HDD.
3. Replace the memory on the Main Controller 2 (DDR2SDRAM).
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.
Codec error
jcdImage device.
Codec error
jcdImage device.
Codec error
jcdImage device.
Codec error
jcdImage device.
Codec error
jcdImage device.
System error
7-21
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E350 0001
-00
E350 0002
-00
E350 0003
-00
E350 3000
-00
E351 0000
-00
E354 0001
-00
E354 0002
-00
E355 0001
-00
E355 0003
-00
E355 0004
-00
Item
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
7-22
E400 to E490
Description
E
Detail Location
Code Code
System error
---
E400 -0001 -04

System error
---
Item
Title
Detection
description
Remedy

System error
---
E400 -0002 -04

System error
---
Title
Detection
description
Remedy

Main Controller PCB 2 communication error
Main Controller PCB 2 communication error.
E401 -0001 -04
1. Disconnect and then connect the connector of the Main

Controller PCB 2.
System error
---
Title
Detection
description
Remedy

System error
---
E401 -0002 -04

System error
---
Title
Detection
description
Remedy

System error
---
Description
and DADF
Reception error occurs at the time of communication between
the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF.
and DADF
Reception error occurs at the time of communication between
the Reader Controller PCB and the DADF.
Pickup Roller Unit lifting error
The level of the Pickup Roller Unit Lifter HP Sensor (SR12)
does not change within the specified period of time although
the Pickup Roller Unit Lifter Motor (M10) is driven.
1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Pickup Roller
Unit Lifter HP Sensor (SR12).
Unit Lifter Motor (M10).
3. Failure of the Pickup Roller Unit Lifter HP Sensor (SR12).
4. Failure of the Pickup Roller Unit Lifter Motor (M10).
Pickup Roller Unit lifting error
The level of the Pickup Roller Unit Lifter HP Sensor (SR12)
does not change within the specified period of time although
the Pickup Roller Unit Lifter Motor (M10) is driven.
Unit Lifter HP Sensor (SR12).
Unit Lifter Motor (M10).
3. Failure of the Pickup Roller Unit Lifter HP Sensor (SR12).
4. Failure of the Pickup Roller Unit Lifter Motor (M10).

System error
T-7-7
7-22
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E407 -0001 -04
E407 -0002 -04
E413 -0001 -04
E413 -0002 -04
Item
Description
Title
Tray Lifter Motor (M8) error
Detection The Tray HP Sensor (SR13) is not turned ON or OFF within
description the specified period of time although the Tray Lifter Motor (M8)
is driven.
Remedy
1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Tray HP Sensor
(SR13).
2. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Tray Lifter Motor
(M8).
3. Failure of the Tray HP Sensor (SR13).
4. Failure of the Tray Lifter Motor (M8).
Title
Tray Lifter Motor (M8) error
Detection The Paper Surface Sensor (SR6) is not turned ON within the
description specified period of time although the Tray Lifter Motor (M8) is
driven.
Remedy
1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Paper Surface
Sensor (SR6).
2. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Tray Lifter Motor
(M8).
3. Failure of the Paper Face Sensor (SR6).
4. Failure of the Tray Lifter Motor (M8).
Title
DADF Disengagement Motor 1 (M6) error
Detection The DADF Disengagement HP Sensor 1 (SR15) is not turned
description ON within the specified period of time although the DADF
Disengagement Motor 1 (M6) is driven.
Remedy
1. Connector disconnection/open circuit of the Disengagement
HP Sensor 1 (SR15).
Motor 1 (M6).
3. Failure of the Disengagement HP Sensor 1 (SR15).
4. Failure of the Disengagement Motor 1 (M6).
Title
description OFF within the specified period of time although the DADF
Remedy
HP Sensor 1 (SR15).
Motor 1 (M6).
7-23
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E413 -0011
-04
E413 -0012 -04
E423 -0001 -04
E423 -0002 -04
E490 -0001 -04
Item
Description
Title
description ON within the specified period of time although the DADF
Remedy
HP Sensor 2 (SR16).
Motor 2 (M7).
Title
description OFF within the specified period of time although the DADF
Remedy
HP Sensor 2 (SR16).
Motor 2 (M7).
Title
DADF SDRAM error
Detection SDRAM access error.
description
Remedy
Error in SDRAM (video image memory) on the Reader
Title
DADF SDRAM error
Detection SDRAM Verify error.
description
Remedy
Error in SDRAM (video image memory) on the Reader
Title
Different DADF model error
Detection Not proper DADF is installed.
description
Remedy
1. Installed DADF is a different model.
3. Failure of the DC Controller PCB.
4. Failure of the Main Controller PCB.
T-7-8
7-23
7-24
7-24
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E500 to E5F6
E500 to E5F6
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E500 -0000 -05
E503 -0002 -05
E503 -0003 -05
E503 -0004 -05
E505 -0001 -05
Item
Description
Title
Communication error (Finisher-P1)
Detection The communication with the host machine is interrupted.
description
Remedy
1. The Finisher Controller PCB is faulty.
2. The host machine DC Controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Communication error (Finisher-P1)
Detection The communication with the Saddle Stitcher is interrupted.
description
Remedy
1. The wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and Saddle
Controller PCB is faulty.
3. The Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Communication error (Finisher-P1/External 2 Hole Puncher)
Detection The communication with the Puncher unit is interrupted.
description
Remedy
1. The wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and host
machine DC Controller PCB is faulty.
2. The Punch Controller PCB is faulty.
4. The host machine DC Controller PCB is faulty.
Title
A. Communication error (Finisher-P1)
B. Communication error with Insertion Unit (Document
Insertion Unit-L1)
C. Communication error with Insertion Unit (Document
Insertion/Folding Unit-H1)
Detection A. The communication with the Inserter or the Paper Folding
Unit is interrupted.
description
B. Failed communication for 3 consecutive times.
C. Failed communication for 3 consecutive times.
Remedy
A-1. The wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and host
machine Controller PCB is faulty.
A-2. The Finisher Controller PCB is faulty.
A-3. The host machine Controller PCB is faulty.
B-1. Inserter Controller PCB is faulty.
B-2. Disconnection of communication cable
B-3. Connector on the Inserter Controller PCB is disconnected.
C-1. Folder Controller PCB is faulty.
C-2. Disconnection of communication cable
C-3. Connector on the DC Controller PCB is disconnected.
Title
Finisher back-up RAM (EEPROM) error (Finisher-P1)
Detection The checksum for the EEPROM data has an error. (The value
description written in EEPROM and the value extracted from EEPROM
doesnt conform.)
Remedy
The Finisher Controller PCB is faulty.
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E505 -0002 -05
E505 -0003 -05
7-25
Item
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E514 -8001 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E514 -8002 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E518 -8001 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Description
EEPROM error (External 2 Hole Puncher)
The checksum for the EEPROM data has an error.
The Punch Controller PCB is faulty.
A. EEPROM error with the Insertion Unit (failed data reading/
writing) (Document Insertion Unit-L1)
B. EEPROM error with the Insertion Unit (failed data reading/
writing) (Document Insertion/Folding Unit-H1)
A. The checksum for the EEPROM data has an error.
B. Data failed to be read properly.
A. The Insertion Unit Controller PCB is faulty.
B. Folder Controller PCB is faulty.
Rear end assist home position error (Finisher-P1)
The stapler does not leave the rear end assist home position
when the Rear Eend Assist Motor has been driven for 3
seconds.
1. The Rear End Assist Home Position Sensor (PI109) is
faulty.
2. The wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and Rear
End Assist Motor is faulty.
3. The end assist mechanism is faulty.
4. The Rear End Assist Motor (M109) is faulty.
Rear end assist home position error (Finisher-P1)
The stapler does not return to the rear end assist home
position when the Rear End Assist Motor has been driven for
3 seconds.
1. The Rear End Assist Home Pposition Sensor (PI109) is
faulty.
2. The wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and Rear
End Assist Motor is faulty.
3. The end assist mechanism is faulty.
4. The Rear End Assist Motor (M109) is faulty.
Error in Folding Feed Motor lock (Document Insertion/Folding
Unit-H1)
The Folding Feed Motor (M5) lock signal has been detected
for more than the specified time.
1. Connector of the Folding Feed Motor (M5) is disconnected.
2. Folding Feed Motor (M5) is faulty.
7-25
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E519 -0002 -05
E519 -8001 -05
E530 -8001 -05
E530 -8002 -05
Item
Description
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Gear change home position error (Finisher-P1)

The Gear Change Hhome Position Sensor does not turn ON
when the Gear Change Motor has been driven for 387 pulses.
1. The Gear Change Home Position Sensor (PI117) is faulty.
2. The wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and Gear
Change Motor is faulty.
3. The gear change mechanism is faulty.
4. The Gear Change Motor (M110) is faulty.
Title
Gear change home position error (Finisher-P1)
Detection The Gear Change Home Position Sensor does not turn OFF
description when the Gear Change Motor has been driven for 387 pulses.
Remedy
1. The Gear Change Home Position Sensor (PI117) is faulty.
2. The wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and Gear
Change Motor is faulty.
3. The gear change mechanism is faulty.
4. The Gear Change Motor (M110) is faulty.
Title
Front aligning plate home position error (Finisher-P1)
Detection The aligning plate does not leave the Aligning Plate Front
description Home Position Sensor when the Alignment Plate Front Motor
has been driven for 4 seconds.
Remedy
1. The Front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI106) is
faulty.
2. The wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and Front
Aligning Plate Motor is faulty.
3. The front aligning plate is faulty.
4. The Front Aligning Plate Motor (M103) is faulty.
Title
Front aligning plate home position error (Finisher-P1)
Detection The aligning plate does not return to aligning plate front home
description position Sensor when the alignment plate front Motor has
been driven for 4 seconds.
Remedy
1. The front Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI106) is
faulty.
2. The wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and front
aligning plate Motor is faulty.
3. The front aligning plate is faulty.
4. The front aligning plate Motor (M103) is faulty.
E
Detail Location
Code Code
7-26
Item
Description
E531 -8001 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E531 -8002 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E532 -8001 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E532 -8002 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E535 -8001 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Staple home position error (Finisher-P1)

The Stapler does not leave the staple home position when the
Staple Motor has been driven for 0.4 sec.
1. The wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and Stapler
is faulty.
2. The Stapler is faulty.
Staple home position error (Finisher-P1)
The Stapler does not return to the staple home position when
the Staple Motor has been driven for 0.4 sec.
is faulty.
2. The Stapler is faulty.
Stapler shift home position error (Finisher-P1)
The Stapler does not leave the stapler shift home pposition
when the Stapler Shift Motor hasbeen driven for 5 seconds.
1. The Stapler Drive Home Position Sensor (PI110) is faulty.
Shift Motor is faulty.
3. The stapler shift base is faulty.
4. The Stapler Shift Motor (M105) is faulty.
Stapler shift home position error (Finisher-P1)
The Stapler does not return to the stapler shift home position
when the Stapler Shift Motor has been driven for 20 seconds.
1. The Stapler Drive Home Position Sensor (PI110) is faulty.
3. The stapler shift base is faulty.
4. The Stapler Shift Motor (M105) is faulty.
Swing home position error (Finisher-P1)
The Stapler does not leave the swing home position when the
Swing Motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
1. The Swing Home Position Sensor (PI105) is faulty.
2. The wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and Swing
Motor is faulty.
3. The swing mechanism is faulty.
4. The Swing Motor (M106) is faulty.
7-26
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E535 -8002 -05
E537 -8001 -05
E537 -8002 -05
E540 -8001 -05
Item
Description
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Swing home position error (Finisher-P1)

The Stapler does not return to the swing home position when
the Swing Motor has bee driven for 3 seconds.
1. The Swing Home Position Sensor (PI105) is faulty.
2. The wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and Swing
Motor is faulty.
3. The swing mechanism is faulty.
4. The Swing Motor (M106) is faulty.
Title
Rear aligning plate home position error (Finisher-P1)
Detection The aligning plate does not leave the Aligning Plate Rear
description Home Position Sensor when the Alignment Plate Rear Motor
Remedy
1. The Aligning Plate Rear Home Position Sensor (PI107) is
faulty.
2. The wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and
Aligning Plate Rear Motor is faulty.
3. The rear aligning plate is faulty.
4. The Rear Aligning Plate Motor (M104) is faulty.
Title
Rear aligning plate home position error (Finisher-P1)
Detection The aligning plate does not return to Aligning Plate Rear
description Home Position Sensor when the Alignment Plate Rear Motor
Remedy
1. The Aligning Plate Rear Home Position Sensor (PI107) is
faulty.
2. The wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and
Aligning Plate Rear Motor is faulty.
3. The rear aligning plate is faulty.
4. The Rear Aligning Plate Motor (M104) is faulty.
Title
Tray 1 time out error (Finisher-P1)
Detection 1. If the tray does not return to home position when the Tray 1
description
Shift Motor is driven for 25 seconds.
2. If the tray does not move to other area when Tray 1 Shift
Motor is driven for 5 seconds.
Remedy
1. The Tray 1 Shift Area Sensor PCB is faulty.
2. The wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and Tray 1
3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty.
4. The Tray 1 Shift Motor (M107) is faulty.
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E540 -8002 -05
E540 -8003 -05
E540 -8004 -05
E540 -8005 -05
7-27
Item
Description
Title
Tray 1 shift area error (Finisher-P1)
Detection 1. The dangerous area is reached before the Tray 1 Paper
description
Surface Sensor detects paper surface during the paper
surface detection operation.
2. A discontinuous area is detected during tray operation.
Remedy
Title
Swing Guide Switch/Staple Safety Switch error (Finisher-P1)
Detection The swing guide switch or staple safety switch is activated
description while the tray is operating.
Remedy
Title
The Tray 1 Shift Motor clock error (Finisher-P1)
Detection The FG input cannot be detected when the Tray 1 Shift Motor
description has been driven for 0.2 second.
Remedy
Title
The Tray 1 Shift Motor speed error (Finisher-P1)
Detection The lock detection signal turns OFF 150 msec after the lock
description detection signal turned ON.
Remedy
7-27
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E540 -8006 -05
E540 -8007 -05
E542 -8001 -05
E542 -8002 -05
Item
Description
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
The Tray 1 Shift Motor acceleration error (Finisher-P1)

The lock detection signal does not turn ON when the Tray 1
Shift Motor has been driven for 1 second.
Title
The Tray 1 Shift Motor error (Finisher-P1)
Detection The lock detection signal does not turn OFF when the Tray 1
description Shift Motor is at a stop.
Remedy
Title
Tray 1 time out error (Finisher-P1)
Detection 1. If the tray does not return to home position when the Tray 1
Shift Motor is driven for 25 seconds.
description
2. If the tray does not move to other area when Tray 2 Shift
Motor is driven for 5 seconds.
Remedy
1. The Tray 2 shift area Sensor PCB is faulty.
4. The Tray 2 shift Motor (M105) is faulty.
Title
Tray 2 shift area error (Finisher-P1)
Detection 1. The upper limit area is reached before the Tray 2 Paper
description
Surface Sensor 1 detects the paper surface during paper
surface detection operation.
2. A discontinuous area is detected during tray operation.
3. During evacuation operation, arrival at the area beyond
the Tray 2 Paper Surface Sensor 2 is detected before this
Sensor detects paper surface.
Remedy
7-28
E
Detail Location
Code Code
Item
Description
E542 -8004 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E542 -8005 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E542 -8006 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E542 -8007 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E551 -0011
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
The Tray 2 Shift Motor clock error (Finisher-P1)

The FG input cannot be detected when the Tray 2 Shift Motor
has been driven for 0.2 second.
The Tray 2 Shift Motor speed error (Finisher-P1)
The lock detection signal turns OFF 150 msec after the lock
detection signal turned ON.
The Tray 2 Shift Motor acceleration error (Finisher-P1)
The lock detection signal does not turn ON when the Tray 2
Shift Motor has been driven for 1 second.
The Tray 2 Shift Motor error (Finisher-P1)
The lock detection signal does not turn OFF when the Tray 2
Shift Motor is at a stop.
Error in the Power Supply Fan of the Insertion Unit
The loch signal is detected for the specified times while the
fan operates.
1. The connector of the Fan (F1) is disconnected.
2. The wiring of the Fan (F1) is faulty.
3. The Fan (F1) is faulty.
4. The Insertion Unit Controller PCB is faulty.
-05
7-28
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E551 -0021 -05
E562 -8001 -05
Item
Description
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Error in the Power Supply Fan of the Paper Folding Unit

The loch signal is detected for the specified times while the
fan operates.
1. The connector of the Fan (F1) is disconnected.
2. The wiring of the Fan (F1) is faulty.
3. The Fan (F1) is faulty.
4. The Paper Folding Unit Controller PCB is faulty.
Error in Slowing Timing Sensor (Document Insertion/Folding
Unit-H1)
The receiving-light intensity failed to be within the threshold
although the emitting-light intensity is adjusted to be within the
threshold when adjusting the Sensor.
1. Connector of the Slowing Timing Sensor (S24) is
disconnected.
2. Slowing Timing Sensor (S24) is faulty.
Error in Disengagement Timing Sensor (Document Insertion/
Folding Unit-H1)
1. Connector of the Disengagement Timing Sensor (S21) is
disconnected.
2. Disengagement Timing Sensor (S21) is faulty.
Error in Folding Position Accuracy Sensor (Document
Insertion/Folding Unit-H1)
1. Connector of the Folding Position Accuracy Sensor (S23) is
disconnected.
2. Folding Position Accuracy Sensor (S23) is faulty.
Error in the Upper Stopper HP Sensor (Document Insertion/
Folding Unit-H1)
1. Connector of the Upper Stopper HP Sensor (S16) is
disconnected.
2. Upper Stopper HP Sensor (S16) is faulty.
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E562 -8002 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E562 -8003 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E562 -8004 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E569 -8001 -05
7-29
Item
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E569 -8002 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E56A -8001 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E56A -8002 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Description
Upper Stopper Motor of Paper Folding Unit failed to go
through HP (Document Insertion/Folding Unit-H1)
The Upper Stopper HP Sensor failed to be OFF despite the
drive of specified pulse in the case that the Upper Stopper
Motor started to be driven while the Upper Stopper HP Sensor
was ON.
1. Connector of the Upper Stopper Motor (M7) is disconnected.
2. Upper Stopper Motor (M7) is faulty.
disconnected.
Upper Stopper Motor of Paper Folding Unit failed to return to
HP (Document Insertion/Folding Unit-H1)
The Upper Stopper HP Sensor failed to be ON despite the
drive of specified pulse in the case that the Upper Stopper
Motor started to be driven while the Upper Stopper HP Sensor
was OFF.
1. Connector of the Upper Stopper Motor (M7) is disconnected.
2. Upper Stopper Motor (M7) is faulty.
disconnected.
C-fold Stopper Motor of Paper Folding Unit failed to go
through HP (Document Insertion/Folding Unit-H1)
The C-fold Stopper Motor HP Sensor failed to be OFF despite
the drive of specified pulse in the case that the C-fold Stopper
Motor started to be driven while the C-fold Stopper Motor HP
Sensor was ON.
1. Connector of the C-fold Stopper Motor (M8) is disconnected.
2. C-fold Stopper Motor (M8) is faulty.
3. Connector of the C-fold Stopper HP Sensor (S17) is
disconnected.
4. C-fold Stopper HP Sensor (S17) is faulty.
C-fold Stopper Motor of Paper Folding Unit failed to return to
The C-fold Stopper Motor HP Sensor failed to be ON despite
the drive of specified pulse in the case that the C-fold Stopper
Motor started to be driven while the C-fold Stopper Motor HP
Sensor was OFF.
1. Connector of the C-fold Stopper Motor (M8) is disconnected.
2. C-fold Stopper Motor (M8) is faulty.
3. Connector of the C-fold Stopper HP Sensor (S17) is
disconnected.
4. C-fold Stopper HP Sensor (S17) is faulty.
7-29
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E56B -8001 -05
Item
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E56B -8002 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E584 -0002 -05
E584 -8001 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Description
C-fold Tray Motor of Paper Folding Unit failed to go through
The C-fold Tray Motor Sensor failed to be OFF despite the
drive of specified pulse in the case that the C-fold Tray Motor
started to be driven while the C-fold Tray Motor Sensor was
ON.
1. Connector of the C-fold Tray Motor (M6) is disconnected
2. C-fold Tray Motor (M6) is faulty
3. Connector of the C-fold Tray Motor Sensor (S19) is
disconnected
4. C-fold Tray Motor Sensor (S19) is faulty
Folding Tray Motor of Paper Folding Unit failed to return to HP
(Document Insertion/Folding Unit-H1)
The C-fold Tray Motor Sensor failed to be ON despite the
drive of specified pulse in the case that the C-fold Tray Motor
started to be driven while the C-fold Tray Motor Sensor was
OFF.
1. Connector of the C-fold Tray Motor (M6) is disconnected.
2. C-fold Tray Motor (M6) is faulty.
3. Connector of the C-fold Tray Motor Sensor (S19) is
disconnected.
4. C-fold Tray Motor Sensor (S19) is faulty.
Shutter home position error (Finisher-P1)
The stapler does not return to the shutter home position when
the Stack Ejection Motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
1. The Shutter Home Position Sensor (PI113) is faulty.
2. The wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and Stack
Ejection Motor, and between the Finisher Controller PCB
and Shutter Clutch is faulty.
3. The shutter mechanism is faulty.
4. The Stack Ejection Motor (M102), Shutter Clutch (CL101),
ang Stack Ejection Lower Roller Clutch (CL102) is faulty.
Shutter home position error (Finisher-P1)
The stapler does not leave the shutter home position when the
Stack Ejection Motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
1. The Shutter Home Position Sensor (PI113) is faulty.
3. The shutter mechanism is faulty.
4. The Stack Ejection Motor (M102), Shutter Clutch (CL101),
ang Stack Ejection Lower Roller Clutch (CL102) is faulty.
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E590 -8001 -05
E590 -8002 -05
E591 -8001 -05
E591 -8002 -05
7-30
Item
Description
Title
Punch home position error (External 2 Hole Puncher)
Detection The Puncher does not detect the Punch Home Position
description Sensor when the Puncher Motor has been driven for 200
msec.
Remedy
1. The Punch Home Position Sensor (PI63) and Punch Motor
Clock Sensor (PI62) is faulty.
2. The wiring between the Punch Controller PCB and Sensor
is faulty.
3. The punch mechanism is faulty.
4. The Punch Motor (M61) is faulty.
Title
Punch home position error (External 2 Hole Puncher)
Detection After the Motor has been stopped at time of Punch Motor
description initialization, the Puncher does not detect Punch Home
Position Sensor.
Remedy
1. The Punch Home Position Sensor (PI63) and Punch Motor
Clock Sensor (PI62) is faulty.
is faulty.
3. The punch mechanism is faulty.
4. The Punch Motor (M61) is faulty.
Title
Scrap full detection error (External 2 Hole Puncher)
Detection The voltage of the light received is 3.0 V or less even when
description the light emitting duty of the Scrap Full Detector Sensor has
been increased to 66 % or more.
Remedy
1. The wiring between the Scrap Full Detector PCB and Punch
Controller PCB is faulty.
2. The Scrap Full Detector PCB is faulty.
Title
Scrap full detection error (External 2 Hole Puncher)
Detection The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even when
description the light emitting duty of the Scrap Full Detector Sensor has
been decreased to 0 %.
Remedy
1. The Scrap Full Detector PCB is faulty.
7-30
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E592 -8001 -05
E592 -8002 -05
E592 -8003 -05
E592 -8004 -05
E592 -8005 -05
Item
Description
Title
Trailing Edge Sensor error (External 2 Hole Puncher)
description the light emitting duty of the Trailing Edge Sensor (LED5,
PTR5) has been increased to 66% or more.
Remedy
1. The wiring between the LED PCB/Photosensor PCB and
Punch Controller PCB is faulty.
2. The LED PCB and Photosensor PCB is faulty.
Title
Trailing Edge Sensor error (External 2 Hole Puncher)
description the light emitting duty of the Trailing Edge Sensor has been
decreased to 0 %.
Remedy
Title
Horizontal Registration Sensor 1 error (External 2 Hole
Puncher)
description the light emitting duty of the Horizontal Registration Sensor 1
(LED1, PTR1) has been increased to 66 % or more.
Remedy
Title
Puncher)
(LED1, PTR1) has been decreased to 0 %.
Remedy
Title
Puncher)
Remedy
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E592 -8006 -05
7-31
Item
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E592 -8007 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E592 -8008 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E592 -8009 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E592 -800A -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Description
Puncher)
The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even when
the light emitting duty of the Horizontal Registration Sensor 2
Puncher)
The voltage of the light received is 2.5 V or less even when
Puncher)
Puncher)
The voltage of the light received is 2.5 V or less even when
Puncher)
7-31
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E593 -8001 -05
Item
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E593 -8002 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E5E1 -0001 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E5E1 -0002 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Description
Horizontal registration home position error (External 2 Hole
Puncher)
At time of Horizontal Registration Motor initialization, the
punch slide unit does not leave the Horizontal Home Position
Sensor even when it has been driven for 9 mm.
1. The Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor (PI61) is
faulty.
is faulty.
3. The horizontal registration mechanism is faulty.
4. The Horizontal Registration Motor (M62) is faulty.
Horizontal registration home position error (External 2 Hole
Puncher)
At time of Horizontal Registration Motor initialization, the
punch slide unit does not return to the Horizontal Registration
Home Position Sensor even when the unit has been driven for
37 mm.
1. The Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor (PI61) is
faulty.
is faulty.
3. The horizontal registration mechanism is faulty.
4. The Horizontal Registration Motor (M62) is faulty.
Tray Lift Motor of Paper Folding Unit failed to go through HP
(Document Insertion Unit-L1)
The Paper Feed Sensor (S3) did not turned ON when the
Inserter paper feed tray moved up.
1. Connector of the Tray Lift Motor (M2) is disconnected
2. Tray Lift Motor (M2) is faulty
3. Connector of the Paper Feed Sensor (S3) is disconnected
4. Paper Feed Sensor is faulty
Tray Lift Motor of Paper Folding Unit failed to return to HP
(Document Insertion Unit-L1)
During initialization or lowering of the Inserter paper feed tray,
the Tray Lower Limit Sensor (S5) has not turned ON within the
specified time.
3. Connector of the Tray Lower Limit Sensor (S5) is
disconnected
4. Tray Lower Limit Sensor (S5) is faulty
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E5E1 -8001 -05
7-32
Item
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E5E1 -8002 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E5F0 -8001 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E5F0 -8002 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Description
Tray Lift Motor of Paper Folding Unit failed to go through HP
The Paper Feed Sensor (S3) did not turned ON when the
Inserter paper feed tray moved up.
3. Connector of the Paper Feed Sensor (S3) is disconnected
4. Paper Feed Sensor (S3) is faulty
Tray Lift Motor of Paper Folding Unit failed to return to HP
During initialization or lowering of the Inserter paper feed tray,
the Tray Lower Limit Sensor (S5) has not turned ON within the
specified time.
3. Connector of the Tray Lower Limit Sensor (S5) is
disconnected
4. Tray Lower Limit Sensor (S5) is faulty
Paper positioning plate home position error (Finisher-P1)
The paper positioning plate home positio Sensor does not turn
ON when the Paper Positioning Plate Motor has been driven
for 1500 pulses.
1. The Paper Positioning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI7) is
faulty.
2. The positioning plate drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The Paper Positioning Plate Motor (M4) is faulty.
The Paper Positioning Plate Home Position Sensor does not
turn OFF when the Paper Positioning Plate Motor has been
driven for 300 pulses.
1. The Paper Positioning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI7) is
faulty.
3. The positioning plate drive mechanism is faulty.
4. The Paper Positioning Plate Motor (M4) is faulty.
7-32
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E5F1 -8001 -05
E5F1 -8002 -05
Item
Description
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Paper Ffolding Motor lock error (Finisher-P1)

The feed speed of the paper fold roller reaches 5 mm/sec or
less.
1. The Paper Folding Motor Clock Sensor (PI4) and Paper
Ffolding Home Position Sensor (PI21) is faulty.
2. The paper folding roller drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The Paper Folding Motor (M2) is faulty.
The status of the Paper Fold Home Position Sensor does
not change when the paper fold Motor has been driven for 3
seconds.
1. The Paper Folding Motor Clock Sensor (PI4) and Paper
Ffolding Home Position Sensor (PI21) is faulty.
2. The paper folding roller drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The Paper Folding Motor (M2) is faulty.
Guide home position error (Finisher-P1)
The Guide Home Position Sensor does not turn ON when the
Guide Motor has been driven for 700 pulses.
1. The Guide Home Position Sensor (PI13) is faulty.
2. The guide plate drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The Guide Motor (M3) is faulty.
Guide home position error (Finisher-P1)
The Guide Home Position Sensor does not turn OFF when the
Guide Motor has been driven for 50 pulses.
1. The Guide Home Position Sensor (PI13) is faulty.
2. The guide plate drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The Guide Motor (M3) is faulty.
Aligning plate home position error (Finisher-P1)
The Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor does not turn ON
when the Aligning Motor has been driven for 500 pulses.
1. The Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI5) is faulty.
2. The aligning plate drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The Aligning Motor (M5) is faulty.
Aligning plate home position error (Finisher-P1)
The Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor does not turn OFF
when the Aligning Motor has been driven for 50 pulses.
1. The Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI5) is faulty.
2. The aligning plate drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The Aligning Motor (M5) is faulty.
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E5F2 -8001 -05
E5F2 -8002 -05
E5F3 -8001 -05
E5F3 -8002 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E
Detail Location
Code Code
7-33
Item
Description
E5F4 -8001 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E5F4 -8002 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E5F5 -8001 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E5F5 -8002 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E5F6 -8001 -05
Title
Detection
description
Stitcher (rear) home position error (Finisher-P1)

The Stitcher Home Position Sensor does not turn ON when
the Stitch Motor (rear) has been driven backward for 0.5 sec.
1. The Stitcher Home Position Sensor (rear) (SW5) is faulty.
2. The Stitcher (rear) is faulty.
Stitcher (rear) home position error (Finisher-P1)
The stitching home position Sensor does not turn OFF when
the Stitch Motor (rear) has been driven forward for 0.5 sec.
1. The Stitcher Home Position Sensor (rear) (SW5) is faulty.
2. The Stitcher (rear) is faulty.
Stitcher (front) home position error (Finisher-P1)
The Stitcher Home Position Sensor does not turn ON when
the Stitch Motor (front) has been driven forward for 0.5 sec.
1. The Stitcher Home Position Sensor (front) (SW7) is faulty.
2. The Stitcher (front) is faulty.
Stitcher (front) home position error (Finisher-P1)
The Stitcher Home Position Sensor does not turn OFF when
the Stitch Motor (front) has been driven backward for 0.5 sec.
1. The Stitcher Home Position Sensor (front) (SW7) is faulty.
2. The Stitcher (front) is faulty.
Paper pushing plate home position error (Finisher-P1)
The Paper Pushing Plate Home Position Sensor does not turn
ON when the Paper Pushing Plate Motor has been driven for
0.5 sec.
1. The Paper Pushing Plate Home Position Sensor (PI14),
Paper Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor (PI15), and Paper
Pushing Plate Motor Clock Sensor (PI1) is faulty.
2. The paper pushing plate drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The Paper Pushing Plate Motor (M8) is faulty.
Paper pushing plate home position error (Finisher-P1)
The Paper Pushing Plate Home Position Sensor does not turn
OFF when the Paper Pushing Plate Motor has been driven for
150 msec.
Remedy
E5F6 -8002 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
7-33
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E5F6 -8003 -05
E5F6 -8004 -05
E5F6 -8005 -05
Item
7-34
Description
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Paper Pushing Plate Motor clock error (Finisher-P1)

The number of pulses detected by the Paper Pushing Plate
Motor Clock Sensor is 6 pulses or less.
Title
Pushing position error (Finisher-P1)
Detection The Paper Pushing Plate Leading Edge Position Sensor does
description not turn ON when the Paper Pushing Plate Motor has been
driven for 0.1 sec.
Remedy
Title
Pushing position error (Finisher-P1)
Detection The Paper Pushing Plate Leading Edge Position Sensor does
description not turn OFF when the Paper Pushing Plate Motor has been
driven for 0.5 sec.
Remedy
T-7-9
7-34
Error Code > Error Code > Error Code Details > E602
E602
E
Detail Location
Code Code
Item
Description
Error in HDD
HDD failed to be recognized. Startup partition (BOOTDEV)
failed to be found at startup.
1. Turn OFF the main switch and check connection of HDD
cable, and then turn ON the main switch.
2. If the Encryption Board has been installed, there may be
an Encryption Board failure. In this case, disconnect the
signal cable connecting to the Encryption Board and directly
connect to the HDD. (It cannot be connected from the back
side. Open the Main Controller Cover, and connect by going
over the Main Controller PCB 1.) After connecting, power
on by the safe mode. If the machine starts normally, replace
the Encryption Board as the Encryption Board had failed.
3. Be sure that HDD spins stably (no problem in drive sound)
and 5V/12V power is supplied when the main power is
turned ON. (If the drive sound is abnormal, replace the
HDD.)
4. Replace the HDD and reinstall the system. (In the case of
using a USB memory device, insert a USB memory device
where the system software has been registered to the slot
of the host machine, and then execute main menu [3]:
Upgrade (Overwrite all).)
Error in HDD
There is no system for the main CPU
E602 0001
-00
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E602 0002
-00
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
1. Start in Safe Mode, then perform overall format using SST
or USB memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF
and then ON the Main Switch. (Prepare the USB memory
which system software was registered. Insert the USB
memory to the equipment. Execute [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite
All) in the main menu.)
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and
reinstall the system.
7-35
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 0003
-00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Detection WriteAbort was detected with BootDevice
description
Remedy
1. Execute detection and recovery of WriteAbortSector
<In the case of display of B/W E-code>
1-1. Perform the following steps because Service Mode
is not available.
1-2. Turn OFF the power. Then, while pressing 1+9 keys,
turn ON the power. WriteAbortSector recovery routine
is automatically started which makes the screen black.
1-3. After a while, progress is displayed because the
process takes time (40 to 50 min.). The process is
complete when the screen turns white.
<In the case of official display of wrench-mark>
1-1. Set as follows: CHK-TYPE=0; and execute HDCHECK (40 to 50 min.), and then turn OFF and then
ON the main switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start up
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the main switch.
3. If no improvement is found despite the above measures, it
can be caused by failure with HDD; therefore, replace the
HDD and reinstall the system.
7-35
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 0006
-00
E602 0007
-00
E602 0009
-00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Detection There is no system for the sub CPU
description
Remedy
Reinstall the system software. For details, see Chapter 6:
Upgrading.
For your reference, the method using USB memory is
described below.
1. Prepare the USB memory which system software was
registered.
download mode. (When it is not operated normally, start the
safe mode.)
4. Execute [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite All) in the main menu. (Be
sure to download SYSTEM, LANGUAGE and RUI.)
5. System software is downloaded and the machine restarts
automatically. At this time, if the machine restarts with the
safe mode, E753 might occurs. Check the log. In case of
the system software of the options which are not connected,
turn OFF and then ON the power supply to restore. (For
details, see the description for E753.)
7-36
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 0010
-00
E602 0011
-00
E602 0012
-00
If the measures above do not solve the problem, replace the

HDD and download the system software with the foregoing
method.
Error in HDD
There is no ICCProfile
Item
Description
Error in HDD
There is no Chinese, Korean, and Taiwan font files
1. Start up in Safe Mode and reinstall the system using SST;
and then turn OFF and then ON the main power switch.
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Error in HDD
There is no Chinese, Korean, and Taiwan font files
Error in HDD
There is no file in which the Web browser refers to
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
1. Start up in Safe Mode and reinstall the Web browser using
SST, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power
switch.
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Error in HDD
Detection There is no Font file in /BOOTDEV/BOOT
description
Remedy
7-36
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 0101
-00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Detection Error in storage area of image data (Inbox, etc.) (at startup)
description
Remedy
When the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON
the power, ask the followings to user.
A. Preferring to give priority on recovery time although data is
deleted
B. Preferring to wait for tens of minutes with possibility that
data can be protected (Tell the user that data may not be
able to be protected in the worst case.)
7-37
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 0111
-00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Detection Error in storage area of image data (Inbox, etc.) (after startup)
description
Remedy
deleted
Case A
1. Enter CHK-TYPE=1, execute HD-CLEAR, and then turn
OFF and then ON the power. (Deletion of the corresponding
partition)
2. If the problem is not solved with step 1, enter CHK-TYPE=0,
execute HD=CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the
power. (Deletion of HDDALL)
3. If the problem is not solved with step 2, format the HDD
using SST or USB, and download the firmware.
4. Replace the HDD.
Case A
partition)
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
1. Try to recover the corresponding file/partition.
-> Enter CHK-TYPE=1, execute HD-CHECK, and then turn
OFF and then ON the power.
2. Back up necessary data.
partition) After that, restore the backup data.
6. Replace the HDD.
Note: Although the problem can be solved with step 1 in some
cases, there is a possibility that the error may occur again;
therefore, be sure to perform the steps 1 through 3.
Case B
6. Replace the HDD.
7-37
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 0201
-00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Detection Error in management data area of image (at startup)
description
Remedy
deleted
7-38
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 0211
-00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Detection Error in management data area of image (after startup)
description
Remedy
deleted
Case A
partition)
4. Replace the HDD.
Case A
partition)
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
6. Replace the HDD.
Case B
6. Replace the HDD.
7-38
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 0301
-00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Detection Storage area of image data (temporary data) (at startup)
description
Remedy
deleted
7-39
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 0311
-00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Detection Storage area of image data (temporary data) (after startup)
description
Remedy
deleted
Case A
partition)
4. Replace the HDD.
Case A
partition)
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
6. Replace the HDD.
Case B
6. Replace the HDD.
7-39
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 0401
-00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Detection Error in thumbnail area (at startup)
description
Remedy
deleted
7-40
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 0411
-00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Detection Error in thumbnail area (after startup)
description
Remedy
deleted
Case A
partition)
4. Replace the HDD.
Case A
partition)
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
6. Replace the HDD.
Case B
6. Replace the HDD.
7-40
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 0501
-00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Detection Error in storage area of universal data (at startup)
description
Remedy
deleted
7-41
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 0511
-00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Detection Error in storage area of universal data (after startup)
description
Remedy
deleted
Case A
partition)
4. Replace the HDD.
Case A
partition)
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
6. Replace the HDD.
Case B
6. Replace the HDD.
7-41
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 0601
-00
Item
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Description
Error in HDD
Error in storage area of universal data (temporary data) (at
startup)
deleted
7-42
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 0611
-00
Item
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Description
Error in HDD
Error in storage area of universal data (temporary data) (after
startup)
deleted
Case A
partition)
4. Replace the HDD.
Case A
partition)
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
6. Replace the HDD.
Case B
6. Replace the HDD.
7-42
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 0701
-00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Detection Error in storage area of fax (temporary data) (at startup)
description
Remedy
deleted
7-43
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 0711
-00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Detection Error in storage area of fax (temporary data) (after startup)
description
Remedy
deleted
Case A
partition)
4. Replace the HDD.
Case A
partition)
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
6. Replace the HDD.
Case B
6. Replace the HDD.
7-43
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 0801
-00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Detection Error in storage area of PSS (temporary data) (at startup)
description
Remedy
deleted
7-44
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 0811
-00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Detection Error in storage area of PSS (temporary data) (after startup)
description
Remedy
deleted
Case A
partition)
4. Replace the HDD.
Case A
partition)
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
6. Replace the HDD.
Case B
6. Replace the HDD.
7-44
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 0901
-00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Detection Error in storage area of PDL-related file (at startup)
description
Remedy
deleted
7-45
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 0911
-00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Detection Error in storage area of PDL-related file (after startup)
description
Remedy
deleted
Case A
partition)
4. Replace the HDD.
Case A
partition)
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
6. Replace the HDD.
Case B
6. Replace the HDD.
Error in HDD
Error in storage area of firmware (BOOTDEV) (at startup)
E602 1001
-00
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
If the problem is not solved by turning OFF and then ON the
power,
1. Format the BOOTDEV using SST or USB, and download
the firmware.
2. Replace the HDD.
7-45
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 1011
-00
E602 1101
-00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Detection Error in storage area of firmware (BOOTDEV) (after startup)
description
Remedy
power,
1. Format the BOOTDEV using SST or USB, and download
the firmware.
2. Replace the HDD.
Title
Error in HDD
Detection Error in MEAP area (at startup)
description
Remedy
deleted
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 1111
Case A
partition)
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
6. Replace the HDD.
7-46
-00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Detection Error in MEAP area (after startup)
description
Remedy
deleted
Case A
partition)
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
6. Replace the HDD.
7-46
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 1201
-00
E602 1211
-00
E602 1301
-00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Detection Error in Send area (at startup)
description
Remedy
power,
3. Format the all using SST or USB, and download the
firmware.
4. Replace the HDD.
Title
Error in HDD
Detection Error in Send area (after startup)
description
Remedy
power,
firmware.
4. Replace the HDD.
Title
Error in HDD
Detection Error in MEAP area (at startup)
description
Remedy
power,
firmware.
4. Replace the HDD.
7-47
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 1311
-00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Detection Error in MEAP area (after startup)
description
Remedy
power,
firmware.
4. Replace the HDD.
7-47
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 1401
-00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Detection Error in storage area of system log (at startup)
description
Remedy
deleted
7-48
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 1411
-00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Detection Error in storage area of system log (after startup)
description
Remedy
deleted
Case A
partition)
4. Replace the HDD.
Case A
partition)
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
6. Replace the HDD.
Case B
6. Replace the HDD.
7-48
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 1501
-00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Detection Error in Advanced Box area (at startup)
description
Remedy
deleted
7-49
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 1511
-00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Detection Error in Advanced Box area (after startup)
description
Remedy
deleted
Case A
partition)
4. Replace the HDD.
Case A
partition)
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
6. Replace the HDD.
Case B
6. Replace the HDD.
7-49
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 1601
-00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Detection Error in CDS area (at startup)
description
Remedy
deleted
7-50
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 1611
-00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Detection Error in CDS area (after startup)
description
Remedy
deleted
Case A
partition)
4. Replace the HDD.
Case A
partition)
4. Replace the HDD.
Case B
6. Replace the HDD.
Case B
6. Replace the HDD.
7-50
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 2000
-00
E602 4000
-00
E602 4001
-00
E602 FF01
-00
Item
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Description
Error in HDD Encryption Board
Authentication error between the host machine and the
Encryption Board.
1. After checking connection of the Encryption Board,
disconnect and connect the connector and, turn OFF and
then ON the power.
2. Execute the key clear procedure.
7-51
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E602 FF11
* Key clear: system recovery procedure

1. Execute the key clear procedure with SST.
--> As a result, the disk becomes unformatted disk. Thus, it
is necessary to execute step 2.
--> E602-0001 will be indicated if activating the machine
with the unformatted disk.
2. Execute HDD format and system reinstallation with SST.
Error in HDD
Unable to mount the Linux system.
-00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Detection HDD error (unidentified) (after startup)
description
Remedy
2. Disconnect and then connect the HDD connector.
3. Format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the
firmware.
4. Replace the HDD.
T-7-10
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
1. Check the cable and the power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start in
Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by failure
with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the
system.
Title
Error in HDD
Detection No Linux system start script.
description
Remedy
1. Check the cable and the power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start in
Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by failure
with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall the
system.
Title
Error in HDD
Detection HDD error (unidentified) (at startup)
description
Remedy
2. Disconnect and then connect the HDD connector.
3. Format the HDD using SST or USB, and download the
firmware.
4. Replace the HDD.
7-51
7-52
7-52
7-53
7-53
7-54
7-54
7-55
7-55
7-56
7-56
7-57
7-57
7-58
7-58
7-59
7-59
7-60
7-60
7-61
7-61
7-62
7-62
7-63
7-63
7-64
7-64
7-65
7-65
7-66
7-66
7-67
7-67
7-68
7-68
7-69
7-69
7-70
7-70
E604 to E677
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E604 -1024 -00
E609 -0008 -00
E609 -0009 -00
E610 -0001 -00
E610 -0002 -00
E610 -0101 -00
E610 -0102 -00
E610 -0201 -00
Item
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Description
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E610 -0202 -00
Insufficient memory
Insufficient memory (require 1024 MB).
DDR2-SDRAM
Hard disk error
Temperature of the HDD does not rise to the specified
temperature within the specified period of time at the time of
startup.
Remedy
HDD.
Title
Hard disk error
Detection At the time of recovery from sleep, it does not reach to the
description specified temperature.
Remedy
HDD.
Title
Failure of the HDD encryption key (hardware configuration
error/initialization error/encryption key error/encryption
processing error)
Detection The Encryption Board does not exist.
description
Remedy
Check the hardware configuration.
Title
processing error)
Detection Not meeting the memory configuration to execute encryption
description operation.
Remedy
Check the hardware configuration.
Title
processing error)
Detection Failed to initialize the memory of key storage area.
description
Remedy
Turn OFF and then ON the power.
Title
processing error)
Detection Failed to initialize the encryption processing part.
description
Remedy
Title
processing error)
Detection Error in the encryption processing part.
description
Remedy
E610 -0301 -00
E610 -0302 -00
E610 -0303 -00
E610 -0401 -00
E610 -0402 -00
E610 -0501 -00
7-71
Item
Title
Description
processing error)
Error in the encryption processing part.
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
processing error)
Detection Failed to create the encryption key.
description
Remedy
Title
processing error)
Detection Failure of the encryption key is detected.
description
Remedy
Due to this error, HDD content is initialized.
Title
processing error)
Detection Failure of the encryption key is detected.
description
Remedy
Due to this error, HDD content is initialized.
Title
processing error)
Detection Error is detected during encryption.
description
Remedy
Title
processing error)
Detection Error is detected during decryption.
description
Remedy
Title
processing error)
Detection Error in document management information on /FSTDEV.
description
Remedy
7-71
7
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E611 -0000 -00
E674 -0001 -00
E674 -0002 -00
E674 -0004 -00
E674 -0008 -00
E674 -000C -00
E674 -0010 -00
E674 -0011
-00
E674 -0030 -00
Item
Description
Title
Rebooting due to SRAM corruption when executing a

transmission job that secures disconnection of the power
Detection In the case that reboot is repeated at recovery from power
description down because SRAM information is corrupted and the job
information saved on SRAM cannot be read, the phenomenon
that the communication is repeated occurs.
Remedy
Clear SRAM to erase the job that secures disconnection of the
power.
Title
FAX error
Detection Communication error with the FAX PCB.
description
Remedy
Check the cable connection, replace the FAX PCB, replace
the Main Controller PCB.
Title
FAX error
Detection Communication error with the FAX PCB.
description
Remedy
Title
FAX error
Detection Error in access of the modem IC.
description
Remedy
Title
FAX error
Detection Error in access of the port IC.
description
Remedy
Title
FAX error
Detection Error in access of the modem IC/port IC.
description
Remedy
Title
FAX error
Detection FAX error.
description
Remedy
Replace the Main Controller PCB.
Title
FAX error
Detection FAX error.
description
Remedy
Replace the Main Controller PCB.
Title
FAX error
Detection Checksum error.
description
Remedy
Download the system software for 2-line FAX.
E
Detail Location
Code Code
E674 -0100 -00
E674 -0200 -00
E677 -0001 -00
E677 -0003 -00
E677 -0004 -00
E677 -0010 -00
E677 -0080 -00
7-72
Item
Description
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
FAX error
Logging is failed after completion of FAX communication, and
unable to read.
HDD access error
An error occurred when accessing the HDD.
1. Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
2. Reinstall all the formats and the system.
3. Replace the HDD.
Print server error
Exhaust Fan operation error on the print server is detected.
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
1. Check power supply to the Exhaust Fan.
2. Replace the Exhaust Fan.
Title
Print server error
Detection Error is detected at the configuration check performed at
description startup.
Remedy
Check the cable connection, reinstallation.
Title
Print server error
Detection CPU Fan operation error on the print server is detected.
description
Remedy
1. Check power supply to the CPU Fan.
2. Replace the CPU Fan.
Title
Print server error
Detection Not proper print server is connected.
description
Remedy
Replace the print server with the proper one.
Title
Print server error
Detection Communication error at startup.
description
Remedy
Check the cable connection, reinstallation.
T-7-11
7-72
E710 to E760
E Detail Location
Code Code
E710 -0001 -00
E711 -0001 -00
E711 -0001 -05
Item
Description
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Printer IPC error

Error is detected by IPC communication IC of the printer engine
at power ON.
Disconnection of cable.
IPC communication error
Occurrence of error was set for 4 times or more for 1.5 seconds
to the error register of the IPC Chip.
Check the Cable.
IPC communication error (retransmission request reception
error)
Communication between the host machine and the Finisher
was lost.
1. Check the cable connection.
Check the connection between DCON side (J462) and
Finisher Lattice side (J9043)
Finisher Cable
2. Replace the DC Controller PCB.
IPC communication error (reception timeout)
was lost.
Finisher Cable
IPC communication error (checksum error)
was lost.
Finisher Cable
IPC communication error (recovery error)
was lost.
Finisher Cable
Detection
description
Remedy
E711 -0002 -05
E711 -0004 -05
E711 -0020 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E Detail Location
Code Code
7-73
Item
Description
E711 -0040 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E713 -0001 -05
Title
IPC communication error (serial error)

was lost.
Finisher Cable
Finisher IPC communication error (retransmission request
reception error)
was lost.
1. Check the cable connection of the Finisher.
DC Controller side: J462, Finisher Lattice side: J9043
2. Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.
Finisher IPC communication error (reception timeout)
was lost.
Finisher IPC communication error (checksum error)
was lost.
Finisher IPC communication error (recovery error)
was lost.
Finisher IPC communication error (serial error)
was lost.
Communication error with the NE Controller
Error when the NE Controller is started.
The NE Controller which was connected before turning OFF
the power is not connected at power-on.
Check the cable, and then go through the following to clear the
error: Service Mode> COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR.
Detection
description
Remedy
E713 -0002 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E713 -0004 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E713 -0020 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E713 -0040 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E717 -0001 -00
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
7-73
7
E Detail Location
Code Code
Item
Description
E717 -0002 -00
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E719 -0001 -00
Title
Detection
description
Communication error with the NE Controller

IPC error at NE Controller operation.
Open circuit of IPC, unable to recover the IPC communication.
Error in coin manager
Error when the coin manager is started.
The coin manager which was connected before turning OFF
the power is not connected at power-on.
IPC error at coin manager operation.
When open circuit of the pickup/delivery signal cable is
detected.
Invalid connection is detected.
Communication error with the coin manager occurs during unit
price acquisition at startup.
Error when the Card Reader is started
The Card Reader which was connected before turning OFF the
power is not connected at power-on.
IPC error at Card Reader operation
Remedy
E719 -0002 -00
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E719 -0003 -00
E719 -0011 -00
E719 -0012 -00
E719 -0031 -00
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Communication error when the Card Reader (serial) is started
Detection Unable to start communication with the Card Reader at startup.
description
Remedy
1. Check the cable connection of the Card Reader (connector
connection error, open circuit), and then go through the
following to clear the error: Service Mode> COPIER>
FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR.
2. After removing the Card Reader, execute the following
service mode, and then reinstall the Card Reader.
COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> CARD
COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR
E Detail Location
Code Code
7-74
Item
Description
E719 -0032 -00
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E720 -0001 -05
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Communication error after the Card Reader (serial) is started

Although communication with the Card Reader was possible at
startup, it became unavailable in the middle of it.
Check the cable connection of the Card Reader (connector
connection error, open circuit), and then go through the
following to clear the error: Service Mode> COPIER>
FUNCTION> CLEAR> ERR.
Different model error
Not proper Finisher is connected.
E720 -0002 -05
E730 -1001 -00
E730 -100A -00
E730 -9004 -00
E730 -9005 -00
Check the configuration of options.

Different model error
Not proper Option Deck is connected.
Check the configuration of options.
PDL software error
Initialization error.
1. PDL reset processing.
PDL software error
Systematic fatal error, such as initialization failure, occurs.
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Third party PDL communication error
Detection Communication error with the print server.
description
Remedy
3. Replace the Open I/F PCB, F Link PCB (Main/Sub).
Title
Third party PDL communication error
Detection Error in video cable connection with the print server.
description
Remedy
3. Replace the Open I/F PCB, F Link PCB (Main/Sub).
7-74
7
E Detail Location
Code Code
E730 -A006 -00
E730 -A007 -00
E730 -B013 -00
E732 -0000 -00
E732 -0001 -00
E732 -0010 -00
Item
Description
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
PDL communication error

No reply from PDL. Due to failure of Subbootable, or no
existence, there is no reply from PDL.
3. Check the connection of the Main Controller PCB.
4. Reinstall the firmware.
Title
Mismatched PDL version
Detection Version of the host machine control software and version of
description PDL control software are different.
Remedy
3. System All Format and installation.
Title
PDL embedded font error
Detection Font data is corrupted.
description
Remedy
2. Reinstall the system.
3. System All Format and installation.
Title
Reader communication error
Detection Negotiation failure.
description
Remedy
1. Check the connection of the Connector with the Reader.
2. Check the power of the Reader (check if the initialization
operation is executed at startup).
3. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and the Main Controller
PCB.
Title
Detection Communication error.
description
Remedy
PCB.
Title
Detection Unable to detect Vsync from the Reader Controller although 2
description minutes have passed after the completion of register setting of
the Main Controller.
Remedy
PCB.
E Detail Location
Code Code
7-75
Item
Description
E732 -0023 -00
Title
Detection
description
Detection
description
E732 -8888 -00
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Scanner communication error

SPRDY-S signal cannot be detected (Hardware failure of
DDI-S)
1. Check of connector of scanner connection
2. Check of scanner power (check whether initialization
operation is executed or not at start-up)
3. Replacement of RCON, scanner board or main controller
PCB
Error in the reader type
When a scanner for the different model is detected during the
communication with the reader.
Replace to the proper reader.
Detection of Reader
The Reader is detected for the first time with the printer model.
(On the user screen, only the message Turn OFF and then
ON the power again, instead of an error code, is displayed.
It is recorded as an error log in Service Mode> COPIER>
DISPLAY> ERR.)
--Communication error between the Main Controller PCB 1 and
the DC Controller PCB
Unable to make communication between the Main Controller
PCB 1 and the DC Controller PCB. (Communication error was
detected at startup.)
1. Check the cable connection (connector connection error/
open circuit).
DC Controller PCB: J441, J442, Main Controller PCB 2:
J21, J22
Main Controller PCB 2: J2, Main Controller PCB 1:
J1019
2. Replace the DC Controller PCB/Main Controller PCB 2/Main
Controller PCB1.
Communication error between the Main Controller PCB 1 and
Unable to make communication between the Main Controller
PCB 1 and the DC Controller PCB. (Communication error was
detected during power distribution (while the power is ON).)
open circuit).
J21, J22
J1019
Controller PCB1.
E732 -9999 -00
E733 -0000 -00
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
E733 -0001 -00
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
7-75
7
E Detail Location
Code Code
E733 -0002 -00
E733 -0010 -00
E740 -0002 -00
E743 -0000 -04
Item
Description
Title

Detection Error was detected in the signal from the DC Controller PCB to
description the Main Controller PCB 1. (Communication between the
DC Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB 1 is normal.)
Remedy
open circuit).
J21, J22
J1019
Controller PCB1.
Title
Detection An image request signal is not sent from the Main Controller
description PCB 2 to the DC Controller PCB. Or, a vertical synchronization
signal (a signal to synchronize the write start timing in
horizontal scanning direction at the time of laser exposure) is
not sent from the DC Controller PCB to the Main Controller
PCB 2.
Since the Main Controller PCB 1 monitors whether the
foregoing communication is made normally, this error may
occur when communication between the Main Controller PCB
2 and the Main Controller PCB 1 is not available.
Remedy
open circuit).
J21, J22
J1019
Controller PCB1.
Title
Network Controller error
Detection Invalid MAC address.
description
Remedy
1. Check the connection of the LAN Connector.
2. Check the connection of the Main Controller PCB 1.
3. Replacement of the Main Controller PCB 1.
Title
DDI communication error
Detection The Reader Controller PCB detected the communication error
description between the Main Controller PCB and the Reader Controller
PCB.
Remedy
1. Connection error between the Main Controller PCB and the
Reader Controller PCB.
E Detail Location
Code Code
E743 -0003 -04
E743 -0004 -04
E744 -0001 -00
E744 -0002 -00
E744 -0003 -00
E744 -0004 -00
E744 -1000 -00
E744 -2000 -00
7-76
Item
Description
Title
PCB.
Remedy
Title
PCB.
Remedy
Title
Error in language file/BootROM
Detection Version of language in HDD and version of Bootable are
description different.
Remedy
Download the correct version of the language file.
Title
Detection Size of the language in HDD is too big.
description
Remedy
Title
Detection Unable to find the language to be switched to that is described
description in the Config.txt in HDD.
Remedy
Title
Detection Unable to switch to the language in HDD.
description
Remedy
Title
Detection The Boot ROM for the different model is installed.
description
Remedy
Replace the Boot ROM with the one for the correct model.
Title
Controller firmware mismatch
Detection Invalid controller firmware was detected.
description
Remedy
This error normally does not occur. This error occurs when
using the HDD which was used with another model.
Replace the HDD with the one which was originally installed or
a new one for the model.
7-76
7
E Detail Location
Code Code
E744 -4000 -05
E746 -0003 -00
E746 -0021 -00
E746 -0022 -00
E746 -0023 -00
E746 -0024 -00
E746 -0031 -00
Item
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Description
Engine ID error
The Main Controller PCB model and the DC Controller PCB
(PCB1) model are not matched.
Replace the DC Controller PCB (PCB1) or redownload.
Different Image Analysis PCB model
Different Image Analysis PCB model.
E Detail Location
Code Code
E746 -0032 -00
1. Check the connection of the Image Analysis PCB.

2. Replace the Image Analysis PCB.
Image Analysis PCB self-check error detection
Image Analysis PCB self-check error detection.
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Invalid Image Analysis PCB version
Detection Invalid Image Analysis PCB version.
description
Remedy
1. Upgrade the Image Analysis PCB software.
Title
No reply from Image Analysis PCB
Detection No reply from Image Analysis PCB.
description
Remedy
Title
Image Analysis PCB operation error
Detection Image Analysis PCB operation error.
description
Remedy
Title
Hardware error (TPM)
Detection Hardware error (TPM).
description
Remedy
The TPM PCB is not installed, the TPM PCB for other model is
installed, or failure of TPM Chip.
E746 -0033 -00
7-77
Item
Description
Title
Detection Mismatched data in TPM
description
Remedy
Format the system.
system software. For details, see Chapter 6: Upgrading. For
your reference, the method using USB memory is described
below.
registered.
download mode.
5. After formatting is completed, the machine reboots
automatically and starts with the download mode.
automatically.
Title
Detection Error that can be recovered
description
Remedy
When the TPM key was backed up, it can be restored.
1. Connect the USB memory which stores the TPM key.
2. Go to Management Settings > Data Management > TPM
Settings, and then click Restore TPM Key.
3. Enter the password set at backup operation.
4. When the restoration completion screen is displayed, click
OK. Remove the USB memory, and turn OFF and then ON
the main power.
When the TPM key was not backed up, formatting the system
is required.
registered.
download mode.
5. After formatting is completed, the machine reboots
automatically and starts with the download mode.
automatically.
7-77
7
E Detail Location
Code Code
E746 -0034 -00
E746 -0035 -00
E748 -2000 -00
E748 -2001 -00
E748 -2010 -00
E748 -2011 -00
E748 -2012 -00
E748 -2021 -00
Item
Description
Title
Error occurs, but auto recovery of system is possible (TPM)
Detection Error occurs, but auto recovery of system is possible (TPM).
description
Remedy
Mismatch of key occurs. However, recovery by restart is
possible.
Title
TPM version error
Detection TPM which cannot be used in this machine was installed.
description
Remedy
Install the supported TPM.
Title
Main Controller PCB access error
Detection Main Controller PCB Chip access error.
description
Remedy
Replace the Main Controller PCB 1/2.
Title
Main Controller PCB access error
Detection Main Controller PCB memory access error.
description
Remedy
1. Remove and then reinstall the DDR2-SDRAM(M0/M1/P).
2. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1/2.
Title
Flash PCB error / HDD error
Detection Flash PCB error has occurred, or the HDD cannot be
description recognized.
Remedy
1. After turning OFF the main power, disconnect the HDD
interface connector (J12) of the Main Controller PCB 2 and
turn ON the main power.
2. If the error code E748-2010 remains unchanged, it means a
Flash PCB error, so replace the Flash PCB, and install the
system using SST or USB.
3. When it changed to another error code(For example E602),
refer to the remedy of the applicable code.
Title
Flash PCB error
Detection Flash PCB error
description
Remedy
Replace the Flash PCB, and install the system using SST or
USB.
Title
Flash PCB error
Detection Flash PCB error
description
Remedy
Replace the Flash PCB, and install the system using SST or
USB.
Title
Main controller board 2 access errors
Detection Main controller board 2 access errors
description
Remedy
Main controller board 1/2 removing and inserting, replacement
E Detail Location
Code Code
E748 -2023 -00
E748 -2024 -00
E748 -4910 -00
E748 -9000 -00
E749
7-78
Item
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Description
DDR2-SDRAM (M0/M1/P) removing and inserting, replacement
Main controller board 1/2 removing and inserting, replacement
Main Controller PCB 2 error
Main Controller PCB 2 error.
Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.
System error
--Contact to the sales companies
Restart direction due to configuration change.
The option such as the Finisher and Paper Deck was installed
or removed when all of following conditions were met and the
machine configuration is changed when the main power switch
is turned ON.
Settings/Registration > Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings
> Quick Startup at Power-on > ON
The Main Power Switch is turned OFF
The power plug of the machine is connected to the output.
The breaker is ON
Remedy
E753 -0001 -00
It is recovered by turning OFF and then ON the main power.

CAUTION
This machine provides power to some PCBs even when in the
main power OFF status.
The power supply is not completely OFF by just turning OFF
the main power switch and therefore, the machine is unable to
detect a configuration change.
When disconnecting and then connecting a connector, always
disconnect the power plug or turn the breaker OFF.
Refer to the Service Manual > Chapter 2 > External and
Controls > Quick Startup for details.
Download error
Firmware update error.
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
7-78
7
E Detail Location
Code Code
E753 -0001 -05
E760 -0001 -00
Item
E804 to E996
Description
Title
Download Error
Detection System Software Update Error
description Error occurs when updating system software of uninstalled
options
Remedy
Check the log to find where the download error has been
occurred.
<FIN_P1> Staple Finisher-P1/Booklet Finisher-P1
<G3CCB> Super G3 FAX Board-AL1/Super G3 2nd Line Fax
Board-AL1/Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board-AL1
<G3CCM> Super G3 FAX Board-AL1/Super G3 2nd Line Fax
Board-AL1/Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board-AL1
When any of the above system software is displayed, check if
the target option has been installed.
When the target option has not been installed:
Turn OFF and then ON the main power supply to restore (since
there is no system software to be updated.).
When the target option has been installed:
Check if the accessory is correctly installed and if the target
system software to be downloaded is for the installed option.
Then download the appropriate system software again.
Title
Main Controller PCB 2 internal error
Detection Error was detected in the Image Processing Chip on the Main
description Controller PCB 2.
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
2. Remove and then install the DDR2-SDRAM (J11 and J13)
3. Replace the DDR2-SDRAM on the Main Controller PCB 2.
NOTE:
If the error occurs periodically or it occurs with specific jobs
although it can be solved by turning OFF and then ON the
power, upgrade the system software to the latest version.
T-7-12
7-79
E Detail Location
Code Code
E804 -0000 -05
E804 -0001 -05
E806 -0000 -05
E808 -0001 -05
E808 -0002 -05
Item
Description
Title
Power Supply Cooling Fan 1/2 error
description retry is failed 4 times in a row although the Power Supply
Cooling Fan 1 (FM14)/Power Supply Cooling Fan 2 (FM15) is
turned ON.
The error detection signal cable is shared with the Fans, and it
is not detected with which Fan the error occurs.
Remedy
2. Replace the Power Supply Cooling Fan 1 (FM14)/Power
Supply Cooling Fan 2 (FM15).
Title
Fixing Power Supply Cooling Fan error
Detection The Fan stop signal is detected for 1.5 seconds or longer
description and retry is failed 4 times in a row although the Fixing Power
Supply Cooling Fan (FM7) is turned ON.
Remedy
2. Replace the Fixing Power Supply Cooling Fan (FM7).
Title
Making Image Exhaust Fan error
description retry is failed 4 times in a row although the Making Image
Exhaust Fan (FM3) is turned ON.
Remedy
2. Replace the Making Image Exhaust Fan (FM3).
Title
Detection Detected 145 V (100 V/120 V model)/290 V (230 V model) or
description higher inlet voltage at power-on.
Remedy
1. Check the outlet voltage. -> Connect to the correct outlet.
and the Fixing Power Supply PCB (PCB10).
Title
Detection Detected 75 V (100 V/120 V model)/150 V (230 V model) or
description higher inlet voltage at power-on.
Remedy
1. Check the outlet voltage. -> Connect to the correct outlet.
7-79
7
E Detail Location
Code Code
E808 -0003 -05
E808 -0004 -05
E808 -0005 -05
E808 -0006 -05
E808 -0007 -05
Item
Description
Title
Detection
description
Remedy

Inlet current is 1 A or lower for 1 second or longer although the
maximum voltage is output.
1. Check the clogging of the Fixing Power Supply Cooling Fan
(FM7).
2. Check the clogging of the Louver on right side of the host
machine (Multi-purpose Tray side).
3. Check the connection of the Fixing Power Supply PCB
(PCB10) Output Connector.
Title
Detection Detected OFF with 12 V of the Main Driver PCB (PCB2)
description output.
Remedy
Replace the Main Driver PCB (PCB2).
Title
12 V OFF detection when relay is turned ON
Detection Detected OFF with 12 V of the Fixing Power Supply output
description after IH relay is turned ON.
Remedy
1. Check the conduction of the Fixing Thermal Switch 1/2
(TP1/2).
2. Check the drawer between the Fixing Assembly and the
host machine.
4. Replace the Fixing Power Supply Unit.
Title
ASIC error
Detection ASIC error.
description
Remedy
Title
Detection The detected power voltage differs from the voltage of the port
description in the IH Power Supply.
Remedy
2. Replace the Fixing Power Supply PCB with the one for the
correct location (voltage).
E Detail Location
Code Code
E808 -0008 -05
E808 -0009 -05
E820 -0000 -05
E820 -0001 -05
E820 -0002 -05
E824 -0000 -05
7-80
Item
Description
Title
Detection Current fluctuation error.
description
Remedy
2. Check the connection between the Fixing Power Supply
PCB (PCB10) and the Heater Unit.
3. Replace the Fixing Roller and Heater Unit.
Title
Detection Unable to clear the error flag at power-on.
description
Remedy
Title
Developer Lower Cooling Fan error
description retry is failed 4 times in a row although the Developer Lower
Remedy
2. Replace the Developer Lower Cooling Fan (FM30).
Title
Developer Upper Cooling Fan error
description retry is failed 4 times in a row although the Developer Upper
Remedy
2. Replace the Developer Upper Cooling Fan (FM31).
Title
Duplex Driver Cooling Fan error
description retry is failed 4 times in a row although the Duplex Driver
Remedy
2. Replace the Duplex Driver Cooling Fan (FM41).
Title
Primary Charging Air Supply Fan error
description retry is failed 4 times in a row although the Primary Charging
Air Supply Fan (FM2) is turned ON.
Remedy
2. Replace the Primary Charging Air Supply Fan (FM2).
7-80
7
E Detail Location
Code Code
E840 -0001 -05
E880 -0001 -00
E880 -0005 -00
E905 -0001 -05
E905 -0002 -05
Item
Description
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Fixing Shutter Motor error

The Fixing Shutter HP Sensor (PS53) failed the detection at
the Fixing Shutter operation.
1. Check the operation of the Fixing Shutter Gear (overload,
etc.).
2. Check the operation of the Fixing Shutter Motor (M15) at the
initialization operation of the Fixing Shutter.
3. Check the detection of the Fixing Shutter HP Sensor (PS53)
(if the Sensor operates normally).
4. Check the drawer of the Fixing Assembly and the host
machine.
5. Replace the Fixing Upper Unit and the Fixing Drawer
Harness Unit.
6. Replace the Main Driver PCB (PCB2) (check the fuse
(FU11)).
Controller Fan error
Error in the Main Controller Cooling Fan (FM4) is detected.
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Remedy
Title
Detection
description
Connector disconnection, failure of Fan.

Controller Fan error
Error in the HDD Cooling Fan (FM) is detected.
Connector disconnection, failure of Fan.

POD Deck Air Assist Fan error
[POD Deck Lite] When the Air Assist Swing Motor fails to
return to the HP although a specified period of time has
passed
Remedy
1. Check connector disconnection/improper connection. =>
Disconnect and then connect the connector.
Target connector: Deck Lite Controller J04, J05
BoxDriver J51, J52, J57
2. Replace the Swing Motor (M3) and the Air Assist Fan (FM1,
FM2, FM3).
3. Replace the Deck Lite Controller PCB.
4. Replace the BoxDriver PCB.
Title
Detection [POD Deck Lite] When the Pickup Motor Cooling Fan is not
description locked
Remedy
Target connector: Deck Lite Controller J30
2. Replace the Motor Cooling Fan (FM4).
7-81
E Detail Location
Code Code
E905 -0003 -05
E906 -0001 -05
E906 -0002 -05
E996 -xxxx
-05
E996 -0071 -04
Item
Description
Title
Detection
description
Remedy

[POD Deck Lite] When the Pickup Motor Cooling Fan is not
unlocked
Target connector: Deck Lite Controller J30
2. Replace the Motor Cooling Fan (FM4).
Title
POD Deck Air Heater error
Detection [POD Deck Lite] Air Heater high temperature error
description When 120 deg C or higher temperature is detected for 1
second consecutively
Remedy
BoxDriver J52, J54, J58, J59
2. Replace the Air Heater.
Title
POD Deck Air Heater error
Detection [POD Deck Lite] Air Heater low temperature error
description When the heater does not become Ready although a specified
period of time has passed
Remedy
BoxDriver J52, J54, J58, J59
2. Replace the Air Heater.
Title
Timeout error
Detection The DC Controller is not stopped.
description The Detailed Code varies according to the state transition of
the software.
Remedy
Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
Title
Frequent error avoidance jam (ADF)
Detection Frequent error avoidance jam (ADF)
description
Remedy
Depending on the setting of JM-ERR-R in service mode,
010071 jam is displayed as an error.
Collect log and contact to the sales companies.
To cancel the setting, select COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW>
JM-ERR-R, and set JM-ERR-R to 0.
7-81
7
E Detail Location
Code Code
E996 -0CA1 -05
E996 -0CA2 -05
E996 -0CA3 -05
E996 -0CA4 -05
E996 -0CA4 -05
Item
Description
Title
Frequent error avoidance jam (PRINTER)
Detection Error avoidance jam (PRINTER)
description
Remedy
Make 000CA1 jam to be displayed as an error by setting JMERR-D in service mode.
JM-ERR-D, and set JM-ERR-D to 0.
Title
description
Remedy
Title
description
Remedy
Title
description
Remedy
Title
description
Remedy
E Detail Location
Code Code
E996 -0CAF -05
7-82
Item
Description
Title
description
Remedy
Make 000CAF jam to be displayed as an error by setting JMERR-D in service mode.
T-7-13
7-82
Error Code > Jam Code > Jam Type
7-83
Jam Code
Jam Type
Jam types are shown below.
Type
DELAY
STNRY
OVERLAP
TIMING NG
OHP NG
ADF OP
COVER OP
RESIDUAL
PICKUP NG
POWER ON
DOOR OP
SEQ NG
DELAY ESC
OTH JAM
STNRY ESC
STP
SDL STP
INIT ROT
UP DEVICE
OTHER
ERROR
RETRY ERR
STOP
ROT
PROGRAM
TIME OUT
PUNCH
MEDIA NG
Meaning
Delay jam
Stationary jam
Double feed detection
Timing error
Incorrect paper
ADF open
Cover open
Residual jam
Pickup error
Power ON
Door open
Sequence jam
Delay jam while ejecting to the escape delivery tray
Other jams
Stationary jam while ejecting to the escape delivery tray
Staple
Saddle stitch staple
Residual (at initial rotation)
Upper stream device jam
Others
Error
Retry error
Press Stop key
Keeps rotating
Program
Time-out
Punch
Misprint
T-7-14
Error Code > Jam Code > Jam Type
7-83
Error Code > Jam Code > Main Unit
Main Unit
SW2
7-84
ACC
ID
PS52
PS20 PS67
PS29 PS64
PS28
PS36
PS35
PS4
PS65
PS66
PS33
00
00
00
00
00
PS3
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
PS24
00
00
PS19
00
00
PS32
00
00
PS2
00
00
PS25
00
00
00
PS21
00
PS26
00
00
00
00
PS22
00
PS27
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
F-7-1
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
Jam
Code
0101
0102
0103
0104
0105
0106
0107
0108
0109
010A
010B
010C
010D
010E
0111
0112
0113
0114
0115
0202
0203
0204
0205
0207
0208
0209
020B
020C
020E
0212
0213
0214
0215
0305
0A02
0A03
0A04
0A05
0A07
0A08
0A09
0A0B
0A0C
0A0E
Type
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
TIMING NG
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
Sensor Name/Description
Writing Judging Sensor
Registration Sensor
Duplex Left Sensor
Registration Sensor
Duplex Left Sensor
Registration Sensor
Registration Sensor
Sensor ID
PS19
PS32
PS24
PS28
PS29
PS20
PS33
PS67
PS64
PS21
PS26
PS25
PS22
PS27
PS52
PS35
PS36
PS65
PS66
PS32
PS24
PS28
PS29
PS33
PS67
PS64
PS26
PS25
PS27
PS35
PS36
PS65
PS66
PS29
PS32
PS24
PS28
PS29
PS33
PS67
PS64
PS26
PS25
PS27
7-84
7
ACC
ID
Jam
Code
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
02
0A0F
0A10
0A11
0A12
0A13
0A14
0A15
0B01
0B02
0B03
0CA1
0CA2
0CA3
0CA4
0CA5
0C10
0CF1
0D91
1E00
Type
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
DOOR OP
DOOR OP
DOOR OP
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
Fixing Inlet Sensor Power ON jam
Duplex Left Sensor
Multi-purpose Tray Cover Sensor
FeedSts time out jam
RefeedStart time out jam
ImageSet time out jam
PageComplete time out jam
Fixing temperature control time out jam
Fixing Toenail jam
Retry jam
Different Size jam(short paper length)
Finisher Sequence Error jam
7-85
Sensor ID
PS51
PS4
PS52
PS35
PS36
PS65
PS66
DOOR OP
DOOR OP
DOOR OP
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
PS4
OTHER
OTHER
OTHER
T-7-15
7-85
Error Code > Jam Code > Duplex Color Image Reader-G1
Duplex Color Image Reader-G1

SR20
SR22
SR17 PCB2
PCB3
SR18 SR19
SR4
SR12
SR6
SR10
SR2
SR7
SR8
7-86
ACC
ID
Jam
Code
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
0051
0052
0071
0073
0074
0075
0090
0091
0092
0093
0094
0095
Type
DELAY
STNRY
TIMING NG
HP NG
HP NG
HP NG
ADF OP
ADF OP
COVER OP
COVER OP
POWER ON
PICKUP NG
Delivery sensor
Delivery sensor
Disengaging HP sensor 1
Disengaging HP sensor 2
Pickup roller unit lifter HP sensor
DADF open/closed sensor 1/2
DADF open/closed sensor 1/2
Cover open/closed sensor
Cover open/closed sensor
All feed sensor *3
Post-separation sensor 1/2/3
Sensor ID
PCB5
PCB5
TIMING NG
SR15
SR16
SR12
ADF OP
ADF OP
SR10
SR10
POWER ON
SR2,SR3,PCB2
T-7-16
*1 The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the
power supply.
SR15
SR5
PCB4
SR16
SR11
PCB5
SR3
SR1
SR9
If the same jam is detected although the above operation is performed, an error code will
VR
be notified.
SR13
F-7-2
ACC
ID
Jam
Code
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0042
0043
0044
0045
0046
0047
0048
0049
0050
Type
DELAY
STNRY
DELAY
STNRY
DELAY
STNRY
DELAY
STNRY
DELAY
STNRY
DELAY
STNRY
STNRY
DELAY
STNRY
DELAY
STNRY
DELAY
STNRY
DELAY
STNRY
Delay detection sensor
Registration sensor
Registration sensor
Lead sensor 1
Lead sensor 1
Lead sensor 2
Lead sensor 2
Delivery sensor
Delivery sensor
Post-separation sensor 3
Registration sensor
Registration sensor
Lead sensor 1
Lead sensor 1
Lead sensor 2
Lead sensor 2
Sensor ID
SR2,SR3,PCB2
SR2,SR3,PCB2
SR4
SR4
PCB3
PCB3
PCB4
PCB4
SR5
SR5
PCB5
PCB5
SR2,SR3,PCB2
SR4
SR4
PCB3
PCB3
PCB4
PCB4
SR5
SR5
*2 The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the
power supply.
If it is not recovered by the above operation, it is considered an error near the target sensor.
Disconnect and then connect the connectors around the target sensor, check if the cable is
open circuit, and replace the sensor.
*3 Confirm the following sensors from service mode.
Delivery Sensor (PCB5): COPIER> IO> FEEDER> P006> 3 (0: Paper presence)
Read Sensor 2 (SR5): COPIER> IO> FEEDER> P006> 2 (0: Paper presence)
Read Sensor 1 (PCB4): COPIER> IO> FEEDER> P006> 1 (0: Paper presence)
Registration Sensor (PCB3): COPIER> IO> FEEDER> P006> 0 (0: Paper presence)
Delay sensor (SR4): COPIER> IO> FEEDER> P006> 5 (0: Paper presence)
Post-separation Sensor 3 (PCB2): COPIER> IO> FEEDER> P006> 4 (0: Paper presence)
Error Code > Jam Code > Duplex Color Image Reader-G1
7-86
Error Code > Jam Code > Paper Deck Unit-A1
7-87
Paper Deck Unit-A1

Paper Deck Unit-D1
PS1
PS6
PS1
PS6
F-7-4
F-7-3
ACC
ID
Jam
Code
00
00
00
00
0117
0118
0218
0A18
Type
DELAY
DELAY
STNRY
POWER ON
Sensor Name / Description

Deck feed sensor
Deck pickup sensor
Deck pickup sensor
Deck pickup sensor
Sensor ID
PS1
PS6
PS6
PS6
Error Code > Jam Code > Paper Deck Unit-A1
ACC
ID
Jam
Code
00
00
00
00
0117
0118
0218
0A18
Type
DELAY
DELAY
STNRY
POWER ON
Sensor Name / Description

Deck feed sensor
Deck pickup sensor
Deck pickup sensor
Deck pickup sensor
Sensor ID
PS1
PS6
PS6
PS6
T-7-17
7-87
Error Code > Jam Code > Inserter-L1
Inserter-L1
S2 S3
S4
SW1
S12
S1
S11
7-88
ACC ID
Jam
Code
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
10B1
10B2
10B3
10B4
11C1
11C2
11C3
11C4
13D7
14D8
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
POWER ON
COVER OP
Paper Registration Sensor Delay jam

Reverse Inlet Sensor Delay jam
Reverse Sensor Delay jam
Reverse Timing Sensor Delay jam
Paper Registration Sensor Stationary jam
Reverse Inlet Sensor Stationary jam
Reverse Sensor Stationary jam
Reverse Timing Sensor Stationary jam
Power ON jam
Door Open jam
S4
S12
S10
S11
S4
S12
S10
S11
POWER ON
SW1, S1, S2
02
1FD1
OTHER
Inserter Paper absent jam
OTHER
Type
Sensor ID
T-7-18
S10
S13
F-7-5
Error Code > Jam Code > Inserter-L1
7-88
Error Code > Jam Code > Paper Folding Inserter Unit-H1
Paper Folding Inserter Unit-H1

S2 S3
S4
SW1
S12
S1
S11
S10
S25
S24
S22
S21
7-89
ACC
ID
Jam
Code
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
10B1
10B2
10B3
10B4
10B5
10B6
10B7
10B8
10B9
10BA
10BB
11C1
11C2
11C3
11C4
11C5
11C6
11C7
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
STNRY
02
02
02
02
02
11C8
11C9
11CA
11CB
13D7
02
02
Type
Sensor ID
S4
S12
S10
S11
S24
S21
S23
S22
S25
S15
S18
S4
S12
S10
S11
S24
S21
S23
STNRY
STNRY
DELAY
DELAY
POWER ON
Paper Registration Sensor Delay jam

Reverse Inlet Sensor Delay jam
Reverse Sensor Delay jam
Reverse Timing Sensor Delay jam
Slowdown Timing Sensor Delay jam
Release Timing Sensor Delay jam
Fold Position Sensor Delay jam
Upper Stopper Path Sensor Delay jam
Delivery 1 Sensor Delay jam
Delivery 2 Sensor Delay jam
3-fold Tray Empty Sensor Delay jam
Paper Registration Sensor Stationary jam
Reverse Inlet Sensor Stationary jam
Reverse Sensor Stationary jam
Reverse Timing Sensor Stationary jam
Slowdown Timing Sensor Stationary jam
Release Timing Sensor Stationary jam
Fold Position Detection Sensor Stationary
jam
Upper Stopper Path Sensor Stationary jam
Delivery 1 Sensor Stationary jam
Delivery 2 Sensor Stationary jam
3-fold Tray Empty Sensor Stationary jam
Power ON jam
14D8
COVER OP
Door Open jam
SW1,S1,S2
1FD1
OTHER
Inserter Paper absent jam
OTHER
S22
S25
S15
S18
POWER ON
T-7-19
S23
S15
S18
F-7-6
Error Code > Jam Code > Paper Folding Inserter Unit-H1
7-89
7
External 2-hole Puncher-A1
PI63
LED5/
PTR5
Error Code > Jam Code > External 2-hole Puncher-A1
7-90
ACC
ID
Jam
Code
02
02
02
02
1F44
1F45
1012
1122
Type
PUNCH
POWER ON
DELAY
STNRY
Punch home jam
Punch Residual jam
Punch Path Sensor Feed Delay jam
Punch Path Sensor Feed Stationary
jam
Sensor ID
PI63
LED5,PTR5
LED5, PTR5
LED5, PTR5
T-7-20
F-7-7
Error Code > Jam Code > External 2-hole Puncher-A1
7-90
Error Code > Jam Code > Staple Finisher-P1/Booklet Finisher-P1
Staple Finisher-P1/Booklet Finisher-P1
PI118
MSW101
PI102
PI104
PI103
PI50
PI9
PI17
PI11
PI22
PI18
PI19
PI20
SW5
SW7
PI15 PI14
PI8
7-91
ACC ID
Jam
Code
02
02
02
02
1011
1013
1014
1091
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
02
1092
DELAY
02
02
1093
1121
DELAY
STNRY
02
1123
STNRY
02
1124
STNRY
02
02
112F
11A1
OTHER
STNRY
02
11A2
STNRY
02
11A3
STNRY
02
02
02
1205
1307
1387
OTH JAM
POWER ON
POWER ON
Inlet Path Sensor Feed Delay jam

Escape Path Sensor Feed Delay jam
Delivery Path Sensor Feed Delay jam
Saddle Feed Path Sensor Feed
Delay jam
Saddle Delivery Sensor Feed Delay
jam
Saddle Inlet Sensor Feed Delay jam
Inlet Path Sensor Feed Stationary
jam
Escape Path Sensor Feed Stationary
jam
Delivery Path Sensor Feed
Stationary jam
Error Avoidance jam
Saddle Feed Path Sensor Feed
Stationary jam
Saddle Delivery Sensor Feed
Stationary jam
Saddle Inlet Sensor Feed Stationary
jam
Early Timing jam
Power ON jam
Saddle Power ON jam
02
02
02
02
02
1408
1488
1506
1586
1F8F
COVER OP
COVER OP
STP
SDL STP
OTHER
Door Open jam

Saddle Door Open jam
Staples jam
Saddle Staples jam
Error Avoidance jam
Type
Sensor ID
PI103
PI118
PI104
PI18
PI11
PI22
PI103
PI118
PI104
OTHER
PI18, PI19, PI20
PI11, PI17
PI22
PI103
PI103,PI104,PI118
PI11,PI17,PI18,PI19
PI20,PI22
PI102,MSW101
PI19,PI102
PI50
SW5,SW7
OTHER
T-7-21
F-7-8
Error Code > Jam Code > Staple Finisher-P1/Booklet Finisher-P1
7-91
Error Code > Alarm Code > List of Alarm Code
Alarm Code
Alarm
Code
List of Alarm Code

Alarm
Code
7-92
Title
Error code display
(4-digit)
Soft counter PCB cannot write normally
00-0247
Error code display

(4-digit)
Soft counter PCB cannot restore data
01-0001
Fails to obtain counter information (RDS

creates)
01-0002
No change in device
status after specified
period of time has
passed
(RDS server creates)
01-0004
IP address change
notification (RDS
server creates)
02-0020
Dust correction (paper Movement: Execute correction process to the pixel where dust
front) occurrence
is detected (image on paper front)
Cause: Dust is detected on the Stream Read Glass (paper
front).
Measures: Clean the Stream Read Glass (paper front), and
check if the Platen Roller 1 is soiled. If necessary,
clean it.
02-0021
Dust correction (paper Movement: Execute correction process to the pixel where
back) occurrence
dust is detected (image on paper back with 1-Path
DADF).
Cause: Dust is detected on the Scanner Glass (paper back).
Measures: Clean and check the Scanner Glass (paper back),
and check if the Platen Roller 2 is soiled.
A. movement /B. cause /C. measures
04-0001
Right Deck Lifter error Movement: The Right Deck Lifter Motor (M4) is stopped. Not
using the Right Deck.
Cause: The Right Deck Lifter does not rise, failure of the Right
Deck Paper Height Sensor (PS6).
Measures:
1. Turn OFF/ON the power.
When it is recovered, the measure is completed. If it is not
recovered, execute the following measures.
2. Check if the Deck Lifter rises.
If not, execute the following measures. If an alarm occurs
although it rises, execute step 5 and later steps.
3. Check the connection between the Right Deck Lifter Motor
(M4) and the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3).
4. Replace the Right Deck.
5. Check the connection between the Right Deck Paper Height
Sensor (PS6) and the Feed Driver PCB (PCB3).
6. Check the operation of the Right Deck Paper Height Sensor
(PS6), and replace it.
04-0002
Left Deck Lifter error
00-0246
Title
Movement: The Left Deck Lifter Motor (M5) is stopped. Not

using the Left Deck.
Cause: The Left Deck Lifter does not rise, failure of the Left
Deck Paper Height Sensor (PS10).
Measures:
3. Check the connection between the Left Deck Lifter Motor
4. Replace the Left Deck.
5. Check the connection between the Left Deck Paper Height
6. Check the operation of the Left Deck Paper Height Sensor
(PS10), and replace it if necessary.
7-92
7
Alarm
Code
04-0003
04-0004
Title
Cassette 3 Lifter error Movement: The Cassette 3 Lifter Motor (M20) is stopped. Not
using the Cassette 3.
Cause: The Cassette Lifter does not rise, failure of the Cassette
3 Paper Height Sensor (PS17).
Measures:
3. Check the connection between the Cassette 3 Lifter Motor
4. Replace the Cassette 3.
5. Check the connection between the Cassette 3 Paper Height
6. Check the operation of the Cassette 3 Paper Height Sensor
Cassette 4 Lifter error Movement: The Cassette 4 Lifter Motor (M21) is stopped. Not
Cause: The Cassette 4 Lifter does not rise, failure of the
Cassette 4 Paper Height Sensor (PS18).
Measures:
4. Replace the Cassette 4.
5. Check the connection between the Cassette 4 Paper Height
6. Check the operation of the Cassette 4 Paper Height Sensor
7-93
Alarm
Code
Title
04-0008
Option Deck Lifter

error
Movement: The Option Deck Pickup Motor (M) is stopped. Not

Cause: The Option Deck does not rise, failure of the Option
Deck Paper Height Sensor (PS).
Measures: Clear the error by turning OFF/ON the power.
04-0010
Jam left untouched

(RDS creates)
04-0031
Right Deck Lifter

Motor overcurrent
alarm
Movement: The Right Deck Lifter Motor (M4) is stopped. Not

using the Right Deck.
Cause: The Right Deck is above the upper limit or is stopped
along the way.
Measures:
1. Check the connection between the Right Deck Lifter Motor
2. Replace the Right Deck Lifter Motor (M4).
3. Check the Right Deck Upper Limit Sensor (PS8).
4. Check the Right Deck Lifter Gear (damage, foreign matter,
etc.).
04-0032

overcurrent alarm
Movement: The Left Deck Lifter Motor (M5) is stopped. Not

Cause: The Left Deck is above the upper limit or is stopped
along the way.
Measures:
1. Check the connection between the Left Deck Lifter Motor
2. Replace the Left Deck Lifter Motor (M5).
3. Check the Left Deck Upper Limit Sensor (PS12).
4. Check the Left Deck Lifter Gear (damage, foreign matter,
etc.).
7-93
7
Alarm
Code
04-0033
04-0034
04-0069
04-0070
Title
Cassette 3 Lifter
Motor overcurrent
alarm
Cassette 4 Lifter
Motor overcurrent
alarm
Error in Right Deck

Pickup Solenoid
connection
Error in Left Deck

Pickup Solenoid
connection

Movement: The Cassette 3 Lifter Motor (M20) is stopped. Not
Cause: The Cassette 3 is above the upper limit or is stopped
along the way.
Measures:
2. Replace the Cassette 3 Lifter Motor (M20).
3. Check the Cassette 3 Upper Limit Sensor (PS68).
4. Check the Cassette 3 Lifter Gear (damage, foreign matter,
etc.).
Movement: The Cassette 4 Lifter Motor (M21) is stopped. Not
Cause: The Cassette 4 is above the upper limit or is stopped
along the way.
Measures:
2. Replace the Cassette 4 Lifter Motor (M21).
3. Check the Cassette 4 Upper Limit Sensor (PS71).
4. Check the Cassette 4 Lifter Gear (damage, foreign matter,
etc.).
Movement: Jam occurred when picking up from the Right
Deck.
Cause: Connection of the Right Deck Pickup Solenoid (SL6)
cannot be detected.
Measures:
1. Check the connection of the Right Deck Pickup Solenoid
(SL6).
Solenoid side: J2070, Pickup Unit side: J3633, Feed Driver
PCB side: J222
2. Replace the Right Deck Pickup Solenoid (SL6).
Movement: Jam occurred when picking up from the Left Deck.
Cause: Connection of the Left Deck Pickup Solenoid (SL7)
cannot be detected.
Measures:
1. Check the connection of the Left Deck Pickup Solenoid (SL7).
PCB side: J221
2. Replace the Left Deck Pickup Solenoid (SL7).
7-94
Alarm
Code
Title
04-0071
Error in Cassette
3 Pickup Solenoid
connection
Movement: Jam occurred when picking up from the Cassette 3.

Cause: Connection of the Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid (SL3)
cannot be detected.
Measures:
1. Check the connection of the Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid
(SL3).
PCB side: J223
2. Replace the Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid (SL3).
04-0072
Error in Cassette
4 Pickup Solenoid
connection
Movement: Jam occurred when picking up from the Cassette 4.

Cause: Connection of the Cassette 4 Pickup Solenoid (SL4)
cannot be detected.
Measures:
1. Check the connection of the Cassette 4 Pickup Solenoid
(SL4).
PCB side: J224
2. Replace the Cassette 4 Pickup Solenoid (SL4).
04-0073
Error in Multi-purpose
Pickup Solenoid
connection
Movement: Jam occurred when picking up from the Multipurpose Tray.

Cause: Connection of the Multi-purpose Pickup Solenoid (SL2)
cannot be detected.
Measures:
1. Check the connection of the Multi-purpose Pickup Solenoid
(SL2).
Solenoid side: J2001, Relay: J3060, J3121, J3235, Main
Driver PCB side: J106
2. Replace the Multi-purpose Pickup Solenoid (SL2).
04-0074
Error in Left Deck

Merging Solenoid
connection
Movement: Jam occurred when picking up from the Left Deck.

Cause: Connection of the Left Deck Merging Solenoid (SL11)
cannot be detected.
Measures:
1. Check the connection of the Left Deck Merging Solenoid
(SL11).
Solenoid side: J2106, Relay side: J3270, Duplex Driver PCB
side: J343
2. Replace the Left Deck Merging Solenoid (SL11).
7-94
7
Alarm
Code
Title
04-0075
Error in Reverse
Detachment Solenoid
connection
Movement: Jam occurred at the time of large size paper

reverse delivery.
Cause: Connection of the Reverse Detachment Solenoid (SL12)
cannot be detected.
Measures:
1. Check the connection of the Reverse Detachment Solenoid
(SL12).
Solenoid side: J2176, Duplex Driver PCB side: J340
2. Replace the Reverse Detachment Solenoid (SL12).
06-0003
Web absence notice
Movement: The Web Drive Solenoid is turned ON 4 times after

the Fixing Cleaning Web Level Sensor performs
detection.
Cause: Remaining level of the Fixing Cleaning Web is low.
Measures: Replace the Fixing Cleaning Web.
09-0006
2D Shading ROM
error 1
Movement: Turn OFF the 2D Shading.

Cause: After clearing the drum, not reading the EEPROM.
Measures: Execute COPIER>FUNCTION>2D-SHADE>2DREAD.
09-0007
2D Shading ROM
error 2
Movement: Turn OFF the 2D Shading.

Cause: After reading ROM data, calculated checksum value
and checksum of ROM does not match.
Measures: Install the correct ROM.
09-0008
Drum HP signal noise Movement: Only when the 2D shading is ON, the accuracy of
shading is degraded and an image error occurs.
alarm
Uneven density may occur.
Cause: The Drum HP cycle is shorter than the specified cycle.
Measures:
1. Install the Drum HP Sensor (PS61) and check the connector.
2. Check the Drum HP Flag.
3. Check the harness between the Drum HP Sensor (PS61)
(Between J2137 and J107)
4. Replace the Drum HP Sensor (PS61).
6. Check the harness between the Main Driver PCB (PCB2)
and the DCON PCB (PCB1).
(Between J125 and J411 and between J126 and J412)
7. Replace the DCON PCB (PCB1).
7-95
Alarm
Code
Title
09-0009
Drum HP signal
absence alarm
Movement: Only when the 2D shading is ON, the accuracy of

shading is degraded and an image error occurs.
Uneven density may occur.
Cause: The Drum HP cycle is longer than the specified cycle.
Measures:
1. Install the Drum HP Sensor (PS61) and check the connector.
2. Check the Drum HP Flag.
3. Check the harness between the Drum HP Sensor (PS61)
(Between J2137 and J107)
4. Replace the Drum HP Sensor (PS61).
6. Check the harness between the Main Driver PCB (PCB2)
and the DCON PCB (PCB1).
(Between J125 and J411 and between J126 and J412)
7. Replace the DCON PCB (PCB1).
10-0001
No toner (Bk) (RDS

creates)
11-0002
Waste Toner
Movement: A message The waste toner container is full. is
displayed on the Control Panel, and the machine is
Container full
stopped.
(Photosensitive Drum)
Cause: The Waste Toner Counter reaches 600000.
Measures: Clean the Waste Toner Container. Reset the Waste
Toner Counter.
30-0004
PCB Harness
disconnection
(connection error)
Movement: Pre-transfer charging high voltage is not output. An

image error like discharge trace occurs.
Cause: Connection error of the Pre-transfer Charging PCB
(PCB26).
Measures:
Main Driver PCB side: J112, High Voltage Unit side: J3098
High Voltage Unit inlet side: J3098, Pre-transfer Charging
PCB side: J3544
3. Replace the Pre-transfer Charging PCB (PCB26).
31-0005
Environment Sensor
reading alarm
Movement: It becomes as follow: environment temperature= 0

degC, environment humidity= 0%.
Cause: Connection of the Environment Sensor cannot be
detected.
Measures:
1. Check the connection of the Environment Sensor (THU1).
2. Replace the Environment Sensor (THU1).
7-95
7
Alarm
Code
31-0008
Title
HDD failure prediction Movement: HDD failure is expected to occur in a short time due
alarm
to occurrence of physical error in HDD. It does not
occur in the HDD of mirroring configuration.
Cause: Error in the S.M.A.R.T. value of HDD
Measures:
1. Back up the data stored in HDD.
2. Replace the HDD.
3. Restore the data.
S.M.A.R.T. (Self-Monitoring Analysis and Reporting
Technology): Self-diagnosis function built in the HDD. The
occurrence rate of reading error, reading and writing speed, the
total number of Motor start-up and stop times, the total length
of power-on time, etc. are monitored.
32-0002
Potential control (VL

control) error
Movement: Not reflecting the result of VL control. To the laser

power determined with VL control, the power with
which the previous potential control was succeeded
(within target potential +/-10V) is applied.
Cause: The measured value in the dark area (VL) differs over
+/-10V but less than +/-30V than the target potential at
potential control.
Measures: If there is no influence on image, measures are not
needed. If not, execute the following measures.
1. Check the installation of the Pre-exposure LED (connector
3. Check the fixation state of the Drum and the Drum Shaft
(check if the drum fixation cylinder is properly installed).
4. Check if the Dustproof Glass is soiled. If necessary, clean it.
5. Check the installation of the Laser Scanner Unit (connector
6. Check the installation and connection of the Primary
Charging High Voltage PCB (PCB11) (connector connection,
7. Check the installation of the Potential Sensor (connector
8. Check the installation and connection of the Drum Motor (M1)
Laser Scanner Unit
Potential Sensor
Primary Charging High Voltage PCB (PCB11)
Drum Motor (M1)
7-96
Alarm
Code
Title
33-0001
Delivery Assembly
Decurler Fan alarm
Movement: No change.
Cause: Connector disconnection of the Paper Cooling Fan
(FM5).
Failure of the Paper Cooling Fan (FM5).
Measures: Check the connector -> Replace the Paper Cooling
Fan (FM5).
33-0002
Feed Fan alarm
Cause: Connector disconnection of the Registration Motor/
Duplex Motor Cooling Fan (FM42).
Failure of the Registration Motor/Duplex Motor Cooling
Fan (FM42).
Measures: Check the connector -> Replace the Registration
Motor/Duplex Motor Cooling Fan (FM42).
33-0010
Stream Reading Fan

alarm
Movement: Nothing in particular (Fan stops).

Cause: The Fan rotation signal cannot be detected after 3
seconds have passed since the Scanner Unit Heat
Exhaust Fan (FM1) is turned ON.
Measures: Check the connector connection -> Replace the
Scanner Unit Heat Exhaust Fan (FM1).
33-0013
Power Unit Fan 1

alarm
Cause: Connector disconnection of the Feed Driver Cooling
Fan (FM40).
Failure of the Feed Driver Cooling Fan (FM40).
Measures: Check the connector -> Replace the Feed Driver
Cooling Fan (FM40).
33-0022
Read Motor Cooling

Fan alarm

seconds have passed since the Motor Driver Cooling
Fan (FM1) or the Read Motor Cooling Fan (FM2) is
turned ON.
Motor Driver Cooling Fan (FM1) or the Read Motor
Cooling Fan (FM2).
33-0023
Scanner Unit (DADF)

Cooling Fan alarm

seconds have passed since the (DADF) Scanner Unit
DADF Scanner Unit Cooling Fan (FM3).
33-0025
Scanner Unit (Reader) Movement: Nothing in particular (Fan stops).

Cooling Fan alarm
seconds have passed since the (Reader) Scanner Unit
(Reader) Scanner Unit Cooling Fan (FM2).
7-96
7
Alarm
Code
33-0026
33-0027
33-0028
Title
Charging Assembly
Fan 1 alarm
Charging Assembly
Fan 2 alarm
Power Unit Fan 2

alarm

Cause: Connector disconnection of the Pre-transfer Charging
Assembly Air Supply Fan (FM32) or the Pre-transfer
Charging Assembly Exhaust Fan (FM33).
Failure of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Air
Supply Fan (FM32) or the Pre-transfer Charging
Assembly Exhaust Fan (FM33).
Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Air Supply Fan
(FM32) or the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly
Exhaust Fan (FM33).
Cause: Connector disconnection of the Primary Charging
Assembly Exhaust Fan (FM17).
Failure of the Primary Charging Assembly Exhaust Fan
(FM17).
Measures: Check the connector -> Replace the Primary
Charging Assembly Exhaust Fan (FM17).
Cause: Connector disconnection of the Duplex Driver Cooling
Fan (FM41).
Failure of the Duplex Driver Cooling Fan (FM41).
Measures: Check the connector -> Replace the Duplex Driver
Cooling Fan (FM41).
37-0001
For R&D
For R&D
37-0002
For R&D
For R&D
37-0003
For R&D
For R&D
37-0004
For R&D
For R&D
37-0005
For R&D
For R&D
37-0006
For R&D
For R&D
37-0007
For R&D
For R&D
37-1000
For R&D
For R&D
37-2000
For R&D
For R&D
38-0001
For R&D
For R&D
38-0002
For R&D
For R&D
50-0007
Insufficient light
intensity in Postseparation Sensor 3
Movement: Nothing in particular.

Cause: Light intensity is insufficient when adjusting output of
the Post-separation Sensor 3 (PCB2).
Measures: Clean the Post-separation Sensor 3 (PCB2)
(periodical maintenance).
7-97
Alarm
Code
Title
50-0008
Insufficient light
intensity in Lead
Sensor 1

the Lead Sensor 1 (PCB4).
Measures: Clean the Lead Sensor 1 (PCB4) (periodical
maintenance).
50-0009
Insufficient light
intensity in Delivery
Sensor

the Delivery Sensor (PCB5).
Measures: Clean the Delivery Sensor (PCB5) (periodical
maintenance).
50-0010
Alarm due to original

separation failure

Cause: Condition unable to separate 1st sheet of original from
the ADF occurs 3 times .
Measures: Check rotation of the Pickup Motor (M1) -> Check
the life of the Pickup Roller -> Check if paper lint is
at the Pickup Slot.
50-0013
Insufficient
light intensity in
Registration Sensor

the Registration Sensor (PCB3).
Measures: Clean the Registration Sensor (PCB3) (periodical
maintenance).
60-0001
Shift Tray alarm
Movement: Shift Tray operation is stopped.

Cause: Home position at startup of the host machine cannot be
detected.
Measure: Check connector disconnection of the HP Sensor
(Front) (PS101) and the HP Sensor (Rear) (PS102)
-> Replace the HP Sensor (Front) (PS101) and the
HP Sensor (Rear) (PS102).
61-0001
Finisher Staple alarm
Movement: A user message is displayed on the Control Panel.

If staple job is being processed during a print job,
printing is stopped.
Measures: Load staples.
62-0001
Saddle Staple alarm
Movement: A user message is displayed on the Control Panel,

and printing is stopped. If staple job is being
processed during a print job, printing is stopped.
Measures: Load staples.
65-0001
Punch alarm
Movement: A user message is displayed on the Control Panel.

If punching is being operated during a print job,
operation varies depending on the detection level.
Level 1: Continue operation.
Level 2 (in case that punching operated 1000 times after the
detection level 1): Stop printing.
Measures: Remove the punched trash.
73-0006
LIPS
Error in configuration acquisition/management
7-97
7
Alarm
Code
Title
7-98
Alarm
Code
Title
73-0007
LIPS
Memory management error in LIPS
80-0008
BDL
Attribute error
73-0008
LIPS
File management error in LIPS
80-0009
BDL
VolatileResource error
73-0009
LIPS
Reception data management error
80-0010
BDL
Graphics error
73-0011
LIPS
Macro management error
80-0011
BDL
Char error
73-0014
LIPS
Font management error
80-0012
BDL
Image error
73-0015
LIPS
Letter drawing error
80-0013
BDL
Image error
73-0017
LIPS
Image drawing error
80-0015
BDL
Print data cannot process this version.
73-0021
LIPS
Utility execution control error
80-0016
BDL
Overflow of work memory for translator
73-0024
LIPS
Boot error in LIPS
80-0019
BDL
In case of invalid data format in BDL custom mode
73-0026
LIPS
Data format error of image mode
81-0001
Imaging
Fails to allocate the memory.
75-0001
Error occurred in
Yukon
81-0002
Imaging
Rendering error
Error occurred due to

invalid SVG analysis
from Yukon
81-0003
Imaging
81-0004
Imaging
Imaging initialization error
81-0005
Imaging
Imaging processing error
76-0001
Font
No memory for internal font
81-0006
Imaging
76-0002
Font
Fails to secure the work area to analyze the font that is

downloaded at Resource Download.
Error when the setting is long length paper + 1200dpi. (Because

of memory, long length paper + 1200dpi is not available.)
81-0007
Imaging
Error when long length paper + color is set.
PDF
PDF memory full
75-0002
76-0003
Font
Fails to access to the file that stores the font.
83-0005
76-0004
Font
Fails to allocate the FM work memory.
83-0015
PDF
PDF data decoding error
Fails to analyze the internal font.
83-0016
PDF
Page range error
PDF
PDF error
76-0005
Font
76-0006
Font
Alignment of font data is wrong.
83-0017
76-0007
Font
Fails to allocate work memory with scalar. There are 3 types

depending on where to occur.
84-0001
XPS memory full error -
84-0002
XPS spool full error
Fails to allocate work memory with scalar. There are 3 types

depending on where to occur.
84-0003
XPS print range error
84-0004
XPS document data

error
76-0008
Font
78-0003
GL
Invalid GL entry
78-0005
GL
System memory full
84-0005
XPS page data error
79-0001
Canon-made PCL
PCL initialization error
84-0006
XPS image data error
79-0002
Canon-made PCL
PCL processing error
84-0007
XPS font data error
79-0003
Canon-made PCL
84-0008
79-0004
Canon-made PCL
Download overflow
XPS non-support
image error
80-0001
BDL
Admin error
84-0009
XPS rendering error
80-0003
BDL
Data Area error
80-0004
BDL
Wrapper error
80-0007
BDL
Resource error
T-7-22
7-98
Service Mode
Overview
COPIER
FEEDER
SORTER
BOARD
Service Mode
Service Mode > Overview > Service mode item explanations
Overview
8-2
Service mode item explanations
Instructions on how to use service mode items can be found within the service mode itself.
The information explains what items have been added or changed from previous models.
Entering Service Mode
Explanatory texts for the initial window, main items, sub items and minor items can be
displayed.
Select the desired initial window, main item, sub item or minor item, then pres [i] (Information
button) to display an explanatory text (hereafter, service mode contents) on the selected item.
Contact the sales company for the method to enter service mode.
E.g., COPIER > DISPLAY > Version window
Service Mode Menu

TOP Screen
1) Press [i]
2) Minor item titles

are displayed.
4) A detailed explanation on the

item will be displayed (usage
scenarios, instructions,
settings range, etc.).
F-8-1
"MODELIST"
A brand new additional mode in the host machine.

A function that can be used as a reference on how to use each item in
Service Mode is installed. The new function, which will be described later,
is available in MODELIST Mode.
"MODELIST CLASSIC"
This mode is same as the old machine. The new function, which will be
described later, is not available in the MODELIST CLASSIC Mode.
Updater
This is a MEAP application with functions of network communication

to Content Delivery System V1.0 (hereinafter CDS) and installation of
firmware, MEAP applications or system options. (Refer to Updater V1.0
service manual.)
3) Select the desired

minor item and
press [i]
The service mode contents can be displayed in J/E/F/I/G/S languages.
F-8-2
Service mode contents, like system software, can be upgraded by SST.
If " MODELIST " or " MODELIST CLASSIC " or Updater is pressed, the screen will switch to initial
screen for each mode.
Service Mode > Overview > Service mode item explanations
8-2
Service Mode > Overview > Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description
I/O information enhancement
8-3
Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description
On the COPIER > I/O, the mode to confirm input output signal of electrical parts used (sensor,
The detail description of each code can be viewed on the error code and alarm code
motor, fan, etc), makes it easier to look for the intended electrical part.
occurrence record screen.
And the screen will also display the input output signal.
ERROR CODE : COPIER > DISPLAY >ERR
Device classification
Electrical parts
classification
1) Press the button.

Which button to press, will depend on which
electrical parts intended and its device
classification. For instance, if the host
machine uses paper pass detection sensor,
then press the button on the "COPIER" and
"P-Sensor" position.
2) Then the selected electrical

parts classification's mark,
name, port number and 0/1
content will appear.
F-8-4
3) If the "i" button is pressed,

the screen displaying the
electrical parts array will appear.
F-8-3
Service Mode > Overview > Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description
8-3
Service Mode > Overview > COPIER > OPTION > BODY, Item Segmentation
8-4
COPIER > OPTION > BODY, Item Segmentation
ALARM CODE : COPIER > DISPLAY >ERR
On the current machine, there are extremely many items in the COPIER > OPTION > BODY (in
related to host machine specification), that it is difficult to reach the intended item.
In order to reach the intended item in shorter time, all items inside the BODY is classified to
15 categories.
Classification
F-8-5
Name
Description
Function switching
FNC-SW
Language, cassette, paper size type, NAVI/

DA connection, count-up spec., document size
detection, dirt detection level
Display switching/ display timing
DSPLY-SW
UI (User Interface) display related
Image related (fixing)
IMG-FIX
Fixing related
Image related (transfer)
IMG-TR
Transfer related
Image related (developing)
IMG-DEV
Developer related
Image related (laser/ latent image) IMG-LSR
Laser, latent image related
Image related (reader/ ADF)
IMG-RDR
Reader, ADF image related
Image related (controller, other

general items)
IMG-MCON MN-CON image related, and image related items

other than those referred to above.
Image quality/ copy speed
IMG-SPD
Cleaning
CLEANING Cleaning of charging unit, drum, transfer roller,

etc.
Environment settings
ENV-SET
Temperature, humidity, environmental heater,

condensation, log acquisition
Paper feed (pickup, delivery)
FEED-SW
Stack performance, motor speed adjustment,

delivery functions, etc.
Noise reduction
SOUND
Noise related
Network
NETWORK
Network settings, IFAX, SEND, E-RDS, etc.
Customization
CUSTOM
Customization
Power down sequence
T-8-1
Service Mode > Overview > COPIER > OPTION > BODY, Item Segmentation
8-4
Service Mode > Overview > Security features > Related service modes
Security features
8-5
1) Additional Functions > System Settings > System Manager Settings > enter System
To prevent unauthorized access to Service Mode, Password set is enabled.
Manager ID > enter System Password Settings > press OK button.

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > PSWD-SW (Level1)
Set password type for transition to service mode.
<Setting range>
System Manager ID
0: No password (default)
1: Service engineer
System Password
2: System administrator and Service engineer.

COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > SM-PSWD (Level2)
Password for service engineer for transition to service mode.
<Setting range>
To reinforce the security, change the password from a default.
F-8-6
2) After entering the password for service technician (Service mode: COPIER > Option >
******** (eight digit numeral) [default: 11111111]
FNC-SW > SM-PSWD), press OK button.
After the above setting, to enter Service Mode, enter password screen will appear.
SM-PSWD
F-8-7
Service Mode > Overview > Security features > Related service modes
8-5
Service Mode > Overview > Language switch
Switching Screen (Level 1 < - > 2)
8-6
Language switch
Switching screens between level 1 and 2 has been made easier.
The language of the explanatory text displayed in the Service Mode can be switched by
When level 1 screen is displayed, press <LEVEL 1> in the right upper side of the screen, and
performing the below languange switch operation in User Mode
it will switch to level 2.
The explanatory text can be displayed by installing the Service Mode Content (SCMNT) in
HDD.
Service Mode Content (SCMNT) can be installed and upgraded on SST.
Settings/Registration > Prefernces > Display Settings > Language/Keyboard Switch
<Language/Keybord Switch>
Language
English
Japanese
French
German
Italian
Dutch
Keyboard Layout
English(USA)Layout
Cancel
1/1
Set
OK
F-8-9
NOTE:
If the Service Mode Content (SMCNT) of the concerned language is not installed,
English explanatory text will be displayed.
If English-language Service Mode Content (SMCNT) is not installed either, explanatory
text can't be displayed.
F-8-8
Service Mode > Overview > Language switch
8-6
Service Mode > Overview > Back-up of service mode
8-7
Back-up of service mode

In factory setting, adjustments are made for each machine, and adjustment values are written
in the service label.
When you replaced the DC controller PCB, or executed the RAM clear function, adjustment
values for ADJUST or OPTION return to default. Therefore, when you made adjustments and
changed values of the Service Mode in the field, be sure to write down the changed values in
the service label. When there is no relevant field in the service label, write down the values in
a blank field.
F-8-10
Service Mode > Overview > Back-up of service mode
8-7
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION
COPIER
COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION
DISPLAY
VERSION
DC-CON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
R-CON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
PANEL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ECO
Lv.1 Details
Use case
FEEDER
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SORTER
Lv.1 Details
Use case
NIB
Lv.1 Details
Use case
PS/PCL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
8-8
Display of DCON firmware version

To display the firmware version of DC Controller PCB.
When upgrading the firmware
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of RCON firmware version
To display the firmware version of Reader Controller PCB.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Control Panel CPU PCB ROM ver
To display the ROM version of Control Panel CPU PCB.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ECO-ID PCB ROM version
To display the ROM version of ECO-ID PCB.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of DADF Driver PCB ROM version
To display the firmware version of DADF Driver PCB.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of FIN-CONT firmware version
To display the firmware version of Finisher Controller PCB.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of network software version
To display the version of the network software.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of PS/PCL function version
Display of PS/PCL function version
00.01 to 99.99
SDL-STCH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
DECK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
MN-CONT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
RIP1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
DIAG-DVC
Lv.1 Details
Use case
RUI
Lv.1 Details
Use case
PUNCH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LANG-EN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Dspl of Saddle Sttch Ctrollr PCB ROM ver

To display the ROM version of the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of POD Deck ROM version
To display the ROM version of ROM version.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of MNCON firmware version
To display the firmware version of Main Controller PCB.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of RIP1 software version
To display the software version to be downloaded to RIP1 (PS/PCL
Expansion Accelerator Board).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of self diagnosis device ROM ver
To display the ROM version of self diagnosis device.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of remote UI version
To display the version of remote UI.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Finisher Inner Punch Unit
To display the version of Finisher Inner Punch Unit.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of English language file version
To display the version of English language file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-8

LANG-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LANG-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LANG-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LANG-JP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LANG-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LANG-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of French language file version

To display the version of French language file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of German language file version
To display the version of German language file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Italian language file version
To display the version of Italian language file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Japanese language file ver
To display the version of Japanese language file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Czech language file version
To display the version of Czech language file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Danish language file version
To display the version of Danish language file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Greek language file version
To display the version of Greek language file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Spanish language file version
To display the version of Spanish language file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Estonian language file ver
To display the version of Estonian language file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-9
LANG-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of Finnish language file version

To display the version of Finnish language file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Hungarian language file ver
To display the version of Hungarian language file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Korean language file version
To display the version of Korean language file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Dutch language file version
To display the version of Dutch language file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Norwegian language file ver
To display the version of Norwegian language file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Polish language file version
To display the version of Polish language file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Portuguese language file ver
To display the version of Portuguese language file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Russian language file version
To display the version of Russian language file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Slovenian language file ver
To display the version of Slovenian language file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-9

LANG-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LANG-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEAP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display of Swedish language file version

To display the version of Swedish language file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Chinese language file ver: trad
To display the version of Chinese language file (traditional).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Chinese language file ver: smpl
To display the version of Chinese language file (simplified).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Bulgarian language file ver
To display the version of Bulgarian language file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Croatian language file ver
To display the version of Croatian language file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Romanian language file ver
To display the version of Romanian language file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Slovak language file version
To display the version of Slovak language file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Turkish language file version
To display the version of Turkish language file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of MEAP contents version
To display the version of MEAP contents in HDD.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-10
OCR-CN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
OCR-JP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
OCR-KR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
OCR-TW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TTS-JA
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TTS-EN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TTS-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display of Chinese OCR: simplified

To display the version of Chinese OCR (simplified).
--.-- is displayed when no file is found.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Japanese OCR version
To display the version of Japanese OCR.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Korean OCR version
To display the version of Korean OCR.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Chinese OCR ver: traditional
To display the version of Chinese OCR (traditional).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Japanese voice dictionary ver
To display the version of Japanese voice dictionary.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of English voice dictionary version
To display the version of English voice dictionary.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Italian voice dictionary version
To display the version of Italian voice dictionary.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-10

TTS-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TTS-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TTS-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
WEB-BRWS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
HELP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Supplement/memo
LANG-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
WEBDAV
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Dspl of French voice dictionary version

To display the version of French voice dictionary.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Spanish voice dictionary version
To display the version of Spanish voice dictionary.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of German voice dictionary version
To display the version of German voice dictionary.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Web browser version
To display the version of Web browser.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of easy NAVI version
To display the version of EASY NAVI file.
N/A (Display only)
Version should be displayed for EASY NAVI function because it is an
external file.
00.01 to 99.99
EASY NAVI function is equipped as standard instead of the
conventional HELP function.
Display of Catalan language file version
To display the version of Catalan language file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of WebDAV version
To display the version of WebDAV file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-11
TIMESTMP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ASR-JA
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
ASR-EN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
MEDIA-JA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-EN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-DE
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-IT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of timestamp version

To display the version of Time Stamp file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Japanese ASR dictionary version
To display the version of Japanese automatic speech recognition
dictionary.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
ASR: Automatic Speech Recognition (voice recognition)
Dspl of English ASR dictionary version
To display the version of English automatic speech recognition
dictionary.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Japanese media information ver
To display the version of Japanese media information.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of English media information ver
To display the version of English media information.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of German media information version
To display the version of German media information.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Italian media information ver
To display the version of Italian media information.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-11

MEDIA-FR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-ES
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of French media information version

To display the version of French media information.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Chinese media info ver: smpl
To display the version of Chinese media information (simplified).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Slovak media information version
To display the version of Slovak media information.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Turkish media information ver
To display the version of Turkish media information.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Czech media information version
To display the version of Czech media information.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Greek media information version
To display the version of Greek media information.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Spanish media information ver
To display the version of Spanish media information.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Estonian media information ver
To display the version of Estonian media information.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Finnish media information ver
To display the version of Finnish media information.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-12
MEDIA-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of Hungarian media information ver

To display the version of Hungarian media information.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Korean media information version
To display the version of Korean media information.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Dutch media information version
To display the version of Dutch media information.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Norwegian media information ver
To display the version of Norwegian media information.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Polish media information version
To display the version of Polish media information.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Portuguese media information ver
To display the version of Portuguese media information.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Russian media information ver
To display the version of Russian media information.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Slovenian media information ver
To display the version of Slovenian media information.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Swedish media information ver
To display the version of Swedish media information.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-12

MEDIA-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
MEDIA-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
FAX1
Lv.1 Details
Dspl of Chinese media info version:trad

To display the version of Chinese media information (traditional).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Bulgarian media information ver
To display the version of Bulgarian media information.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Croatian media information ver
To display the version of Croatian media information.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Romanian media information ver
To display the version of Romanian media information.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of Catalan media information ver
To display the version of Catalan media information.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of 1-line FAX PCB ROM version
To display the ROM version of 1-line FAX PCB.
Nothing is displayed if the PCB is not connected.
Use case
Adj/set/operate method N/A (Display only)
ASCII character string (21 digits)
FAX2/3/4
Dspl of 2/3/4-line FAX PCB ROM version
Lv.1 Details
To display the ROM version of 2/3/4-line FAX PCB.
NULL is displayed if the PCB is not connected.
Use case
ASCII character string (21 digits)
IOCS
Display of BIOS version
Lv.1 Details
To display the BIOS version.
Use case
00.01 to 99.99
8-13
SYSTEM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ROOT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
INS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
S-LNG-JP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
S-LNG-EN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
S-LNG-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
S-LNG-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
S-LNG-GR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
S-LNG-SP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Dspl Linux kernel/tool/driver/file ver

To display the version of Linux kernel/tool/driver/file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ROOT version
To display the ROOT version.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of Inserter ROM version
To display the ROM version of Inserter.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of service mode Japanese file ver
To display the version of Japanese language file in service mode.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of service mode English file ver
To display the version of English language file in service mode.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of service mode French file version
To display the version of French language file in service mode.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of service mode Italian file ver
To display the version of Italian language file in service mode.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of service mode German file version
To display the version of German language file in service mode.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of service mode Spanish file ver
To display the version of Spanish language file in service mode.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-13

UI-RES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
COPY-AP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SEND-AP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BOX-AP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
MOBPR-AP
RPTL-AP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
INTRO-AP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TSP-JLK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
COPY-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display of UI resource file version

To display the UIRES version.
UIRES consists of the resource file which is necessary to display the
native screen (top screen and software keyboard screen) of UI.
When checking the version at the time of downloading UIRES to
MFP
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of COPY (JAVA UI) version
To display the version of COPY application (JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of SEND (JAVA UI) version
To display the version of SEND application (JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOX (JAVA UI) version
To display the version of BOX application (JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
[Not used]
Display of RUI portal version
To display the RUI portal version.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of useful feat introduce appli ver
To display the version of Introduction to Useful Features application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of PCAM Option Board version
To display the version of the PCAM Option Board.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli French file version
To display the French language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-14
COPY-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
COPY-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
COPY-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
COPY-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of COPY appli Italian file version

To display the Italian language file version of COPY application (JAVA
UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli German file version
To display the German language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Spanish file version
To display the Spanish language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl COPY appli Chinese file ver: smpl
To display the simplified Chinese language file version of COPY
application (JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Chinese file ver:trad
To display the traditional Chinese language file version of COPY
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Korean file version
To display the Korean language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Czech file version
To display the Czech language file version of COPY application (JAVA
UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-14

COPY-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of COPY appli Danish file version

To display the Danish language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Greek file version
To display the Greek language file version of COPY application (JAVA
UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Estonian file version
To display the Estonian language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Finnish file version
To display the Finnish language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Hungarian file ver
To display the Hungarian language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Dutch file version
To display the Dutch language file version of COPY application (JAVA
UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Norwegian file ver
To display the Norwegian language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-15
COPY-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of COPY appli Polish file version

To display the Polish language file version of COPY application (JAVA
UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Portuguese file ver
To display the Portuguese language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Russian file version
To display the Russian language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Slovenian file ver
To display the Slovenian language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Swedish file version
To display the Swedish language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Indonesian file ver
To display the Indonesian language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Bulgarian file ver
To display the Bulgarian language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-15

COPY-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
COPY-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of COPY appli Croatian file version

To display the Croatian language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Romanian file version
To display the Romanian language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Slovak file version
To display the Slovak language file version of COPY application (JAVA
UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Turkish file version
To display the Turkish language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Catalan file version
To display the Catalan language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Thai file version
To display the Thai language file version of COPY application (JAVA
UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of COPY appli Vietnamese file ver
To display the Vietnamese language file version of COPY application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-16
SEND-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SEND-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SEND-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SEND-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SEND-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of SEND appli French file version

To display the French language file version of SEND application (JAVA
UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Italian file version
To display the Italian language file version of SEND application (JAVA
UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli German file version
To display the German language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Spanish file version
To display the Spanish language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl SEND appli Chinese file ver: smpl
To display the simplified Chinese language file version of SEND
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Chinese file ver:trad
To display the traditional Chinese language file version of SEND
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Korean file version
To display the Korean language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-16

SEND-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of SEND appli Czech file version

To display the Czech language file version of SEND application (JAVA
UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Danish file version
To display the Danish language file version of SEND application (JAVA
UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Greek file version
To display the Greek language file version of the SEND application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Estonian file version
To display the Estonian language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Finnish file version
To display the Finnish language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Hungarian file ver
To display the Hungarian language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Dutch file version
To display the Dutch language file version of SEND application (JAVA
UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-17
SEND-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of SEND appli Norwegian file ver

To display the Norwegian language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Polish file version
To display the Polish language file version of SEND application (JAVA
UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Portuguese file ver
To display the Portuguese language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Russian file version
To display the Russian language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Slovenian file ver
To display the Slovenian language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Swedish file version
To display the Swedish language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Indonesian file ver
To display the Indonesian language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-17

SEND-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
SEND-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of SEND appli Bulgarian file ver

To display the Bulgarian language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Croatian file version
To display the Croatian language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Romanian file version
To display the Romanian language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Slovak file version
To display the Slovak language file version of SEND application (JAVA
UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Turkish file version
To display the Turkish language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Catalan file version
To display the Catalan language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of SEND appli Thai file version
To display the Thai language file version of SEND application (JAVA
UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-18
SEND-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
INTRO-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
INTRO-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
INTRO-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
INTRO-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of SEND appli Vietnamese file ver

To display the Vietnamese language file version of SEND application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of usful feat intro French file ver
To display the version of French language file of Introduction to
Useful Features application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl useful feat intro Italian file ver
To display the version of Italian language file of Introduction to Useful
Features application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of usful feat intro German file ver
To display the version of German language file of Introduction to
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl useful feat intro Spanish file ver
To display the version of Spanish language file of Introduction to
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Useful feat intro Chinese file ver: smpl
To display the version of simplified Chinese language file of
Introduction to Useful Features application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Useful feat intro Chinese file ver: trad
To display the version of traditional Chinese language file of
Introduction to Useful Features application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-18

INTRO-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of usful feat intro Korean file ver

To display the version of Korean language file of Introduction to
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of useful feat intro Czech file ver
To display the version of Czech language file of Introduction to Useful
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of usful feat intro Danish file ver
To display the version of Danish language file of Introduction to
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of useful feat intro Greek file ver
To display the version of Greek language file of Introduction to Useful
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl useful feat intro Estonian file ver
To display the version of Estonian language file of Introduction to
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl useful feat intro Finnish file ver
To display the version of Finnish language file of Introduction to
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl usful feat intro Hungarian file ver
To display the version of Hungarian language file of Introduction to
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-19
INTRO-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of useful feat intro Dutch file ver

To display the version of Dutch language file of Introduction to Useful
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl usful feat intro Norwegian file ver
To display the version of Norwegian language file of Introduction to
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of usful feat intro Polish file ver
To display the version of Polish language file of Introduction to Useful
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl usful feat intro Portuguese filever
To display the version of Portuguese language file of Introduction to
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl useful feat intro Russian file ver
To display the version of Russian language file of Introduction to
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl usful feat intro Slovenian file ver
To display the version of Slovenian language file of Introduction to
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl useful feat intro Swedish file ver
To display the version of Swedish language file of Introduction to
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-19

INTRO-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of useful feat intro Indon file ver

To display the version of Indonesian language file of Introduction to
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl usful feat intro Bulgarian file ver
To display the version of Bulgarian language file of Introduction to
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl useful feat intro Croatian file ver
To display the version of Croatian language file of Introduction to
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl useful feat intro Romanian file ver
To display the version of Romanian language file of Introduction to
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of usful feat intro Slovak file ver
To display the version of Slovak language file of Introduction to
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl useful feat intro Turkish file ver
To display the version of Turkish language file of Introduction to
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl useful feat intro Catalan file ver
To display the version of Catalan language file of Introduction to
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-20
INTRO-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
INTRO-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
CSTMN-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
CSTMN-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
CSTMN-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
CSTMN-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl useful feat intro Thai file version

To display the version of Thai language file of Introduction to Useful
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Useful feat intro Vietnamese file ver
To display the version of Vietnamese language file of Introduction to
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu French file version
To display the version of French language file for custom menu
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Italian file version
To display the version of Italian language file for custom menu
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu German file version
To display the version of German language file for custom menu
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Spanish file version
To display the version of Spanish language file for custom menu
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl custom menu Chinese file ver: smpl
To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for custom
menu application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-20

CSTMN-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl custom menu Chinese file ver:trad

To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for custom
menu application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Korean file version
To display the version of Korean language file for custom menu
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Czech file version
To display the version of Czech language file for custom menu
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Danish file version
To display the version of Danish language file for custom menu
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Greek file version
To display the version of Greek language file for custom menu
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Estonian file ver
To display the version of Estonian language file for custom menu
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Finnish file version
To display the version of Finnish language file for custom menu
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-21
CSTMN-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of custom menu Hungarian file ver

To display the version of Hungarian language file for custom menu
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Dutch file version
To display the version of Dutch language file for custom menu
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Norwegian file ver
To display the version of Norwegian language file for custom menu
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Polish file version
To display the version of Polish language file for custom menu
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Portuguese file ver
To display the version of Portuguese language file for custom menu
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Russian file version
To display the version of Russian language file for custom menu
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Slovenian file ver
To display the version of Slovenian language file for custom menu
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-21

CSTMN-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of custom menu Swedish file version

To display the version of Swedish language file for custom menu
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Indonesian file ver
To display the version of Indonesian language file for custom menu
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Bulgarian file ver
To display the version of Bulgarian language file for custom menu
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Croatian file ver
To display the version of Croatian language file for custom menu
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Romanian file ver
To display the version of Romanian language file for custom menu
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Slovak file version
To display the version of Slovak language file for custom menu
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Turkish file version
To display the version of Turkish language file for custom menu
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-22
CSTMN-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
CSTMN-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ACSBT-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ACSBT-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ACSBT-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Dspl of custom menu Catalan file version

To display the version of Catalan language file for custom menu
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Thai file version
To display the version of Thai language file for custom menu
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of custom menu Vietnamese file ver
To display the version of Vietnamese language file for custom menu
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility French file ver
To display the version of French language file for Accessibility
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Italian file ver
To display the version of Italian language file for Accessibility
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility German file ver
To display the version of German language file for Accessibility
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Spanish file ver
To display the version of Spanish language file for Accessibility
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-22

ACSBT-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl Accessibility Chinese file ver:smpl

To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for
Accessibility application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl accessibility Chinese file ver:trad
To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for
Accessibility application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Korean file ver
To display the version of Korean language file for Accessibility
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Czech file version
To display the version of Czech language file for Accessibility
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Danish file ver
To display the version of Danish language file for Accessibility
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Greek file version
To display the version of Greek language file for Accessibility
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Estonian file ver
To display the version of Estonian language file for Accessibility
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-23
ACSBT-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of accessibility Finnish file ver

To display the version of Finnish language file for Accessibility
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Hungarian file ver
To display the version of Hungarian language file for Accessibility
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Dutch file version
To display the version of Dutch language file for Accessibility
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Norwegian file ver
To display the version of Norwegian language file for Accessibility
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Polish file ver
To display the version of Polish language file for Accessibility
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl accessibility Portuguese file ver
To display the version of Portuguese language file for Accessibility
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Russian file ver
To display the version of Russian language file for Accessibility
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-23

ACSBT-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of accessibility Slovenian file ver

To display the version of Slovenian language file for Accessibility
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Swedish file ver
To display the version of Swedish language file for Accessibility
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl accessibility Indonesian file ver
To display the version of Indonesian language file for Accessibility
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Bulgarian file ver
To display the version of Bulgarian language file for Accessibility
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Croatian file ver
To display the version of Croatian language file for Accessibility
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Romanian file ver
To display the version of Romanian language file for Accessibility
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl accessibility Slovak file version
To display the version of Slovak language file for Accessibility
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-24
ACSBT-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ACSBT-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ERS-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ERS-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ERS-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Dspl of accessibility Turkish file ver

To display the version of Turkish language file for Accessibility
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Catalan file ver
To display the version of Catalan language file for Accessibility
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of accessibility Thai file version
To display the version of Thai language file for Accessibility
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl accessibility Vietnamese file ver
To display the version of Vietnamese language file for Accessibility
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS French file version
To display the version of French language file for ERS application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Italian file version
To display the version of Italian language file for ERS application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS German file version
To display the version of German language file for ERS application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Spanish file version
To display the version of Spanish language file for ERS application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-24

ERS-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of ERS Chinese file ver:smpl

To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for ERS
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Chinese file ver:trad
To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for ERS
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Korean file version
To display the version of Korean language file for ERS application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Czech file version
To display the version of Czech language file for ERS application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Danish file version
To display the version of Danish language file for ERS application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Greek file version
To display the version of Greek language file for ERS application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Estonian file version
To display the version of Estonian language file for ERS application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Finnish file version
To display the version of Finnish language file for ERS application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-25
ERS-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of ERS Hungarian file version

To display the version of Hungarian language file for ERS application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Dutch file version
To display the version of Dutch language file for ERS application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Norwegian file version
To display the version of Norwegian language file for ERS
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Polish file version
To display the version of Polish language file for ERS application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Portuguese file ver
To display the version of Portuguese language file for ERS
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Russian file version
To display the version of Russian language file for ERS application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Slovenian file version
To display the version of Slovenian language file for ERS application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Swedish file version
To display the version of Swedish language file for ERS application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-25

ERS-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ERS-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of ERS Indonesian file ver

To display the version of Indonesian language file for ERS
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Bulgarian file version
To display the version of Bulgarian language file for ERS application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Croatian file version
To display the version of Croatian language file for ERS application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Romanian file version
To display the version of Romanian language file for ERS application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Slovak file version
To display the version of Slovak language file for ERS application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Turkish file version
To display the version of Turkish language file for ERS application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Catalan file version
To display the version of Catalan language file for ERS application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of ERS Thai file version
To display the version of Thai language file for ERS application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-26
ERS-VN
Lv.2 Details
Display of ERS Vietnamese file version

To display the version of Vietnamese language file for ERS
application.
Use case
00.01 to 99.99
NLS-FR
Display of UAC French file version
Lv.1 Details
To display the version of French language file for UAC application.
Use case
00.01 to 99.99
NLS-IT
Display of UAC Italian file version
Lv.1 Details
To display the version of Italian language file for UAC application.
Use case
00.01 to 99.99
NLS-DE
Display of UAC German file version
Lv.1 Details
To display the version of German language file for UAC application.
Use case
00.01 to 99.99
NLS-ES
Display of UAC Spanish file version
Lv.1 Details
To display the version of Spanish language file for UAC application.
Use case
00.01 to 99.99
NLS-ZH
Display of UAC Chinese file ver:smpl
Lv.2 Details
To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for UAC
application.
Use case
00.01 to 99.99
NLS-TW
Display of UAC Chinese file ver:trad
Lv.2 Details
To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for UAC
application.
Use case
00.01 to 99.99
NLS-KO
Display of UAC Korean file version
Lv.2 Details
To display the version of Korean language file for UAC application.
Use case
00.01 to 99.99
NLS-CS
Display of UAC Czech file version
Lv.2 Details
To display the version of Czech language file for UAC application.
Use case
00.01 to 99.99
NLS-DA
Display of UAC Danish file version
Lv.2 Details
To display the version of Danish language file for UAC application.
Use case
00.01 to 99.99
8-26

NLS-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of UAC Greek file version

To display the version of Greek language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Estonian file version
To display the version of Estonian language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Finnish file version
To display the version of Finnish language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Hungarian file version
To display the version of Hungarian language file for UAC
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Dutch file version
To display the version of Dutch language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Norwegian file version
To display the version of Norwegian language file for UAC
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Polish file version
To display the version of Polish language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Portuguese file ver
To display the version of Portuguese language file for UAC
application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Russian file version
To display the version of Russian language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Slovenian file version
To display the version of Slovenian language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
8-27
NLS-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-ID
Lv.2 Details
Display of UAC Swedish file version

To display the version of Swedish language file for UAC application.
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Indonesian file ver
To display the version of Indonesian language file for UAC
application.
Use case
00.01 to 99.99
NLS-BU
Display of UAC Bulgarian file version
Lv.2 Details
To display the version of Bulgarian language file for UAC application.
Use case
00.01 to 99.99
NLS-CR
Display of UAC Croatian file version
Lv.2 Details
To display the version of Croatian language file for UAC application.
Use case
00.01 to 99.99
NLS-RM
Display of UAC Romanian file version
Lv.2 Details
To display the version of Romanian language file for UAC application.
Use case
00.01 to 99.99
NLS-SK
Display of UAC Slovak file version
Lv.2 Details
To display the version of Slovak language file for UAC application.
Use case
00.01 to 99.99
NLS-TK
Display of UAC Turkish file version
Lv.2 Details
To display the version of Turkish language file for UAC application.
Use case
00.01 to 99.99
NLS-CA
Display of UAC Catalan file version
Lv.2 Details
To display the version of Catalan language file for UAC application.
Use case
00.01 to 99.99
LS-ROM-V
Dspl of Laser Scanner Unit EEPROM ver
Lv.2 Details
To display the EEPROM version of Laser Scanner Unit.
Use case
At trouble analysis
001 to 999
LS-UNT-V
Dspl of Laser Scanner Unit version
Lv.2 Details
To display the version of Laser Scanner Unit.
Use case
At trouble analysis
001 to 999
8-27

LS-SRL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BCT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ASR-ES
Lv.1 Details
Dspl of serial No. of Laser Scanner Unit

To display the serial number of Laser Scanner Unit.
At trouble analysis
N/A (Display only)
00000001 to 99999999
Display of self diagnosis tool version
To display the version of self diagnosis tool.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dis of Spanish ASR dictionary version
To display the version of Spanish automatic speech recognition
dictionary.
Use case
00.01 to 99.99
Supplement/memo
ASR-FR
Dis of French ASR dictionary version
Lv.1 Details
To display the version of French automatic speech recognition
dictionary.
Use case
00.01 to 99.99
Supplement/memo
ASR-IT
Dis of Italian ASR dictionary version
Lv.1 Details
To display the version of Italian automatic speech recognition
dictionary.
Use case
00.01 to 99.99
Supplement/memo
ASR-DE
Dis of German ASR dictionary version
Lv.1 Details
To display the version of German automatic speech recognition
dictionary.
Use case
00.01 to 99.99
Supplement/memo
LANG-TH
Display of Thai language file version
Lv.2 Details
To display the version of Thai language file.
Use case
00.01 to 99.99
8-28
LANG-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BOX-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BOX-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BOX-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BOX-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of Vietnamese language file ver

To display the version of Vietnamese language file.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOX appli French file version
To display the version of French language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Italian file version
To display the version of Italian language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOX appli German file version
To display the version of German language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Spanish file version
To display the version of Spanish language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Chinese file ver:smpl
To display the version of simplified Chinese language file for BOX
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Chinese file ver:trad
To display the version of traditional Chinese language file for BOX
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-28

BOX-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of BOX appli Korean file version

To display the version of Korean language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOX appli Czech file version
To display the version of Czech language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOX appli Danish file version
To display the version of Danish language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOX appli Greek file version
To display the version of Greek language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Estonian file version
To display the version of Estonian language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Finnish file version
To display the version of Finnish language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Hungarian file version
To display the version of Hungarian language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-29
BOX-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of BOX appli Dutch file version

To display the version of Dutch language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Norwegian file version
To display the version of Norwegian language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOX appli Polish file version
To display the version of Polish language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOX appli Portuguese file ver
To display the version of Portuguese language file for BOX
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Russian file version
To display the version of Russian language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Slovenian file version
To display the version of Slovenian language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Swedish file version
To display the version of Swedish language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-29

BOX-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display of BOX appli Indonesian file ver

To display the version of Indonesian language file for BOX
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Bulgarian file version
To display the version of Bulgarian language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Croatian file version
To display the version of Croatian language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Romanian file version
To display the version of Romanian language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of BOX appli Slovak file version
To display the version of Slovak language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Turkish file version
To display the version of Turkish language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Catalan file version
To display the version of Catalan language file for BOX application
(JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
8-30
BOX-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BOX-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
WSDS-AP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
NLS-TH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
NLS-VN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl of BOX appli Thai file version

To display the version of Thai language file for BOX application (JAVA
UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Dspl of BOX appli Vietnamese file ver
To display the version of Vietnamese language file for BOX
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of WSD-SCAN (JAVA UI) version
To display the version of WSD-SCAN application (JAVA UI).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Thai file version
To display the version of Thai language file for UAC application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
Display of UAC Vietnamese file version
To display the version of Vietnamese language file for UAC
application.
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
T-8-2
8-30
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS
USER
ACC-STS
COPIER > DISPLAY > USER
SPDTYPE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BRWS-STS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Related service mode
8-31
COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS
Dspl of Ctrollr Board engine speed type

To display the engine speed type (ppm) of Controller Board.
When checking the engine speed type of Controller Board
N/A (Display only)
55 to 75
Display of service browser ON/OFF
To display whether the service browser can be used.
If the value is 1, [Service Browser] button is displayed on the service
mode initial screen.
The value of BRWS-STS switches whenever COPIER> FUNCTION>
INSTALL> BRWS-ACT is executed, but ON/OFF of service browser
is enabled after reboot. If the service browser does not start even
though the value of BRWS-STS is 1, turn OFF/ON the main power
switch.
When checking the operation mode of the service browser
The value of BRWS-STS is linked with COPIER> FUNCTION>
INSTALL> BRWS-ACT, but the service browser cannot start even
though 1 is displayed unless the main power switch is turned OFF/
ON.
1 to 2
1: ON (Available), 2: OFF (Not available)
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> BRWS-ACT
T-8-3
FEEDER
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display of DADF connection state

To display the connecting state of DADF.
When checking the connection between the machine and DADF
N/A (Display only)
0 to 1
0: Not connected, 1: Connected
SORTER
Connect state of Finisher-related option
Lv.1 Details
To display the connecting state of Finisher-related options.
Use case
When checking the connection of Finisher-related options
Left column (connecting state of Finisher-related options): 1 to 5
1: Without Saddle
2: With Saddle, without Folding Unit
3: With Saddle and Inserter, without Folding Unit
4: With Saddle and Folding Unit, without Inserter
5: With Saddle, Inserter and Folding Unit
Right column (connecting state of Finisher-belonged Inserter): 0 to 4
0: no hole, 1: 2-hole, 2: 2/3-hole, 3: 4-hole, 4: 4-hole (SW)
DECK
Dspl of Paper Deck connection state
Lv.1 Details
To display the connecting state of the Paper Deck.
Use case
When checking the connection between the machine and the Paper
Decks
0 to 8
0: Not connected
1: Connected (small) (Display is hidden on this machine.)
2: Connected (large)
3: POD Deck Lite (with Multi-purpose Tray)
4: POD Deck Lite (without Multi-purpose Tray )
5: Multi-purpose Tray only
6: POD deck
7: 2-POD deck connected
8: 3-POD deck connected (Display is hidden on this machine.)
CARD
Dspl of connection state of Card Reader
Lv.1 Details
To display the connecting state of Card Reader.
Use case
When checking the connection between the machine and the Card
Reader
0 to 1
0: No card is inserted while the Card Reader is connected. (Copy is
not available.)
1: Card Reader is not connected, or card is inserted while the Card
Reader is connected. (Copy is available.)
8-31

DATA-CON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
RAM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
COINROBO
Lv.1 Details
Use case
NIB
Lv.1 Details
Use case
PS/PCL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
RIP1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Appropriate target value
Dspl of NE Controller connection state

To display the connecting state of NE Controller.
When checking the connection between the machine and the NE
Controller
N/A (Display only)
0 to 1
Dspl of MNCON PCB 2 DDR2-SDRAM capacity
To display the memory (DDR2-SDRAM) capacity of the Main
Controller PCB 2.
When checking the memory capacity of the machine
N/A (Display only)
Dspl of Coin Manager connection state
To display the connecting state of the Coin Manager.
When checking the connection between the machine and the Coin
Manager
N/A (Display only)
0 to 1
Display of Network PCB connection state
To display the connecting state of the Network PCB.
When checking the connection between the machine and the
Network PCB
N/A (Display only)
0 to 3
0: Not connected, 1: Ethernet PCB connected, 2: Token Ring PCB
connected, 3: Ethernet PCB + Token Ring PCB connected
Install state dis of PS/PCL firmware
To display the installation state of PS/PCL firmware.
When checking whether NetWare firmware is installed to the
machine
0 to 2
0: Not installed, 1: PS/PCL, 2: PS Kanji
Display of RIP1 software version
To display the software version to be downloaded to RIP1 (PS/PCL
Expansion Accelerator Board).
N/A (Display only)
00.01 to 99.99
0
8-32
NETWARE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SEND
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TRIM-CN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
HDD
Lv.1 Details
Use case
PCI1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
PCI2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Install state dspl of NetWare firmware

To display the installation state of the NetWare firmware.
When checking whether NetWare firmware is installed to the
machine
N/A (Display only)
0 to 1
0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Display of SEND support PCB existence
To display whether there is PCB to support SEND function.
SEND function can be used only when the PCB is mounted.
When checking the connection between the machine and the PCB
that supports SEND function
N/A (Display only)
0 to 1
0: Not mounted, 1: Mounted
Display of Trimmer connection state
To display the connecting state of Trimmer.
When checking the connection between the machine and Trimmer
N/A (Display only)
0 to 1
Display of HDD model name
To display the model name of HDD.
When checking the model name of HDD used on the machine
N/A (Display only)
Display of PCI1-connected PCB name
To display the name of the PCB that is connected to PCI1.
When checking the name of the PCB that is connected to PCI1
N/A (Display only)
-: No PCB connected
Voice Board: Voice PCB
3DES Board: Encryption PCB
1Gbit-Board: Giga Ethernet PCB
Display of PCI2-connected PCB name
To display the name of the PCB that is connected to PCI2.
When checking name of the PCB that is connected to PCI2
N/A (Display only)
-: No PCB connected
iSLOT: iSLOT Wireless LAN PCB
Voice Board: Voice PCB
Voice Board R: Voice Recognition PCB (Display is hidden on this
machine.)
3DES Board: Encryption PCB
1Gbit-Board: Giga Ethernet PCB
8-32
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG
ANALOG

IA-RAM
Lv.1 Details
Dspl of MNCON PCB 1 DDR2-SDRAM capacity

To display the memory (DDR2-SDRAM) capacity of the Main
Controller PCB 1.
Use case
When checking the memory capacity of the Main Controller PCB
COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG

TEMP
Lv.1 Details
T-8-4
Use case
HUM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ABS-HUM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
FIX-U
Lv.1 Details
Use case
FIX-UE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
FIX-SHTR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
8-33
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG
Display of inside temperature

To display the temperature inside the machine detected by
Environment Sensor.
When checking the temperature inside the machine
N/A (Display only)
0 to 60
20 - 27
COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> HUM, ABS-HUM, PDK-TEMP
Display of inside humidity
To display the humidity inside the machine detected by Environment
Sensor.
When checking the humidity inside the machine
N/A (Display only)
0 to 100
30 - 70
COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> TEMP, ABS-HUM, PDK-HUM
Display of inside moisture content
To display the absolute moisture content inside the machine detected
by Environment Sensor.
When checking the moisture content inside the machine
N/A (Display only)
0 to 100
0 - 22
COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> TEMP, HUM
Dspl of Fixing Roller center temperature
To display the center temperature of the Fixing Roller detected by
the Fixing Main Thermistor.
When checking the temperature at the center of Fixing Roller
N/A (Display only)
0 to 999
Dspl of Fixing Roller edge temperature
To display the edge temperature of the Fixing Roller detected by the
Fixing Sub Thermistor 1.
Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 is located in the rear nip inlet side of Fixing
Roller.
When checking the edge temperature of the Fixing Roller
N/A (Display only)
0 to 999
Display of Fixing Shutter temperature
To display the temperature of the Fixing Shutter detected by the
Fixing Shutter Thermistor.
When checking the temperature of Fixing Shutter
N/A (Display only)
0 to 999
8-33
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CST-STS
COPIER > DISPLAY > ANALOG

PDK-TEMP
Lv.1 Details
Dspl of POD Deck compartment temp

To display the compartment temperature of POD Deck Lite.
It may be out of order if the indicated temperature is greatly different
from the machine right after power-on.
0 to 60
COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> TEMP, PDK-HUM
PDK-HUM
Dspl of POD Deck compartment humidity
Lv.1 Details
To display the compartment humidity of POD Deck Lite.
It may be out of order if the indicated temperature is greatly different
from the machine right after power-on.
0 to 100
COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG> HUM, PDK-TEMP
CST-STS
COPIER > DISPLAY > CST-STS
WIDTH-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
WIDTH-C4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
WIDTH-MF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
T-8-5
8-34
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CST-STS
Display of Cassette 3 paper size

To display the paper size of Cassette 3.
When checking the paper size of Cassette 3
N/A (Display only)
Display of Cassette 4 paper size
To display the paper size of Cassette 4.
When checking the paper size of Cassette 4
N/A (Display only)
Display of MP Tray paper width size
To display the paper width size set on the Multi-purpose Tray.
When checking the paper width side set on the Multi-purpose Tray
N/A (Display only)
T-8-6
8-34
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS
HV-STS
COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS

COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS
PRIMARY
Lv.1 Details
Use case
PRI-GRID
Lv.1 Details
Use case
PRE-TR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BIAS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TR-V
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TR-LV-I
Lv.1 Details
Use case
8-35
Display of primary charging current

To display the current that is applied to the Primacy Charging
Assembly at the latest.
The result set in COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> PRIMARY is
reflected.
When checking ON/OFF of potential control
N/A (Display only)
0 to 1600
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> PRIMARY
Dspl of Primary Charging Assy grid bias
To display the grid bias voltage that is applied to the Primacy
Charging Assembly at the latest.
The result set in COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> PRI-GRID is
reflected.
When checking ON/OFF of potential control
N/A (Display only)
500 to 900
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> PRI-GRID
Dspl of pre-transfer charge DC current
To display the DC component of current that is applied to the Pretransfer Charging Assembly at the latest.
For checking
N/A (Display only)
-650 to 0
Dspl of trns current: Plain, 1st side
To display the current that is applied to plain paper (1st side) in the
Pre-transfer Charging Assembly at the latest.
For checking
N/A (Display only)
Dspl of developing DC bias setting VL
To display the setting value of developing DC bias.
For checking
N/A (Display only)
Dspl of ATVC detection voltage value
To display the ATVC detection voltage value.
For checking
N/A (Display only)
Dspl ppr lead edge trns bias outpt crrnt
To display the current value in the paper leading edge position at
transfer bias output.
For checking
N/A (Display only)
0 to 100
TR-LV-T
Lv.1 Details
Dspl ppr lead edge trns bias output tmg

To display the transfer bias output timing in the paper leading edge
position.
Use case
For checking
-50 to 50
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS
T-8-7
8-35
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD
CCD
COPIER > DISPLAY > CCD

TARGET-B
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TARGET-G
Lv.2 Details
Use case
TARGET-R
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN-OB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN-OG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
8-36
Shading target value (B)

To display the shading target value of Blue.
Continuous display of 0 (minimum) or FFFF (maximum) is
considered a failure of the Reader Controller PCB.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB
At scanned image failure
N/A (Display only)
0 to FFFF
512 - 2047
Shading target value (G)
To display the target value of Green.
N/A (Display only)
0 to FFFF
512 - 2047
Shading target value (R)
To display the shading target value of Red.
N/A (Display only)
0 to FFFF
512 - 2047
Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit(B): frt
To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit
on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper front).
Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the
Scanner Unit/Reader Controller PCB.
N/A (Display only)
0 to 48
Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit(G): frt
To display the Green gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered
bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper front).
N/A (Display only)
0 to 48
GAIN-OR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN-EB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN-EG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN-ER
Lv.2 Details
Use case
LAMP-BW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit(R): frt

To display the Red gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit
N/A (Display only)
0 to 48
Gain level of Img Sensor even bit(B):frt
To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit
N/A (Display only)
0 to 48
Gain level of Img Sensor even bit(G):frt
To display the Green gain level adjustment value in even-numbered
bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper front).
N/A (Display only)
0 to 48
Gain level of Img Sensor even bit(R):frt
To display the Red gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit
N/A (Display only)
0 to 48
Scan Lamp intensity adj VL(B&W): front
To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Scanner Unit
(paper front) in B&W scanning mode.
When image failure occurs at front side scanning in B&W mode
N/A (Display only)
0 to 164
20 - 163
LED cannot be replaced individually. Replace the Scanner Unit.
8-36
8-37

LAMP-CL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
LAMP2-BW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
LAMP2-CL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
OFST-BW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OFST-CL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OFST2-BW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Scan Lamp intensity adj VL(color): frt

(paper front) in color scanning mode.
When image failure occurs at front side scanning in color mode
N/A (Display only)
0 to 164
33 - 163
Scan Lamp intensity adj VL(B&W): back
(paper back) in B&W scanning mode.
When image failure occurs at back side scanning in B&W mode.
N/A (Display only)
0 to 164
33 - 163
Scan Lamp intensity adj VL(color): back
(paper back) in color scanning mode.
When image failure occurs at back side scanning in color mode
N/A (Display only)
0 to 164
33 - 163
Img Sensor offset value (B&W) [Front]
To display the CMOS Sensor offset value at B&W scanning.
N/A (Display only)
0 to 96
1 - 95
Img Sensor offset value (color) [Front]
To display the CMOS Sensor offset value at color scanning.
When image failure occurs at front side scanning in color mode
N/A (Display only)
0 to 96
1 - 95
Img Sensor offset value (B&W) [Back]
To display the CMOS Sensor offset value at B&W scanning.
N/A (Display only)
0 to 96
1 - 95
GAIN-BW1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN-BW2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN-BW3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN-BW4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN2BW1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN2BW2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Img Sensor gain level adj VL1(B&W): frt

To display the CMOS Sensor B&W gain level adjustment value 1 of
Scanner Unit (paper front).
N/A (Display only)
0 to 48
1 - 47
N/A (Display only)
0 to 48
1 - 47
N/A (Display only)
0 to 48
1 - 47
N/A (Display only)
0 to 48
1 - 47
Img Sensor gain level adj VL1(B&W): Back
Scanner Unit (paper back).
N/A (Display only)
0 to 48
1 - 47
N/A (Display only)
0 to 48
1 - 47
8-37
8-38

GAIN2BW3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN2BW4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN2-OR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN2-OG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN2-OB
Lv.2 Details
Use case

N/A (Display only)
0 to 48
1 - 47
N/A (Display only)
0 to 48
1 - 47
Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit(R): bck
To display the Red gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit
on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper back).
N/A (Display only)
0 to 48
1 - 47
Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit(G): bck
To display the Green gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered
bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper back).
N/A (Display only)
0 to 48
1 - 47
Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit(B): bck
To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in odd-numbered bit
N/A (Display only)
0 to 48
1 - 47
GAIN2-ER
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN2-EG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
GAIN2-EB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
OFST2-CL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Gain level of Img Sensor even bit(R):bck

To display the Red gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit
N/A (Display only)
0 to 48
1 - 47
Gain level of Img Sensor even bit(G):bck
To display the Green gain level adjustment value in even-numbered
bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit (paper back).
N/A (Display only)
0 to 48
1 - 47
Gain level of Img Sensor even bit(B):bck
To display the Blue gain level adjustment value in even-numbered bit
N/A (Display only)
0 to 48
1 - 47
Img Sensor offset value (color) [Back]
To display the CMOS Sensor offset value at color scanning.
When image failure occurs at back side scanning in color mode
N/A (Display only)
0 to 96
1 - 95
T-8-8
8-38
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT
DPOT
COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT

COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT
DPOT-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
VL1T
Lv.1 Details
VL1M
Lv.1 Details
VDT
Lv.1 Details
VDM
Lv.1 Details
BIAS-C
Lv.2 Details
LPOWER-C
Lv.2 Details
PRIM-C
Lv.2 Details
VLT-L
Lv.1 Details
Use case
8-39
Display of Bk Drum surface potential

To display the current surface potential Vd on the Bk Photosensitive
Drum that is specified as a result of the potential control.
The value after the calculation of potential offset is displayed.
If the offset value is not adjusted, negative value may be detected
during printing.
When the density failure or foggy image occurs, check whether the
surface potential of the Drum is the factor.
N/A (Display only)
To update the display, be sure to move to a different screen, and
then move back to display it again. (The potential at the moment
of showing this screen is displayed.)
If the value is out of range (-30 to 30), there is a possibility of
Potential Sensor disconnection.
-30 to 600
Dspl of bright area target potential VL
To display the bright area target potential value.
N/A (Display only)
Dspl bright area measured potential VL
To display the bright area measured potential value.
N/A (Display only)
Dspl of dark area target potential VL
To display the dark area target potential value.
N/A (Display only)
Dspl of dark area measured potential VL
To display the dark area measured potential value.
N/A (Display only)
Dspl dev bias potential control result
To display the developing bias potential control result.
N/A (Display only)
Output laser intnsty potntl ctrl result
To display the output laser intensity potential control result.
N/A (Display only)
0 to 255
Dspl pry chg current potntl ctrl result
To display the potential control result of primary charging current.
N/A (Display only)
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-PRI> PRI-GRID
Bright area target potential VL: thin
To display the bright area target potential VL with thin paper.
At occurrence of an image density failure
N/A (Display only)
50 to 500
VLT-H1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
VLT-H2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > DPOT
Bright area target potential VL: heavy 1

To display the bright area target potential VL with heavy paper 1.
N/A (Display only)
50 to 500
Bright area target potential VL: heavy 2
To display the bright area target potential VL with heavy paper 2.
N/A (Display only)
50 to 500
T-8-9
8-39
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC
SENSOR
8-40
MISC
COPIER > DISPLAY > SENSOR
COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC
DOC-SZ
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Dspl size detect by Original Size Sensr

To display the original size detected by Original Size Sensor.
When checking whether the machine detects the paper on
Copyboard Glass correctly
Adj/set/operate method 1) Place the original on Copyboard Glass.
2) Close the Copyboard Cover/DADF.
3) Select the item.
Caution
Unless the Copyboard Cover/DADF is closed, this is not displayed
correctly.
A, B, L configuration size
LPOWER
Lv.2 Details
Display of laser light intensity

To display the laser power setting value during image formation in
real time.
Check that laser power is different between coated paper and plain
paper.
Use case
At occurrence of an image failure
0 to 255
T-8-11
T-8-10
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC
8-40
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > 2D-SHADE
ENVRNT
2D-SHADE
COPIER > DISPLAY > 2D-SHADE
Environment Indication
The readings of the environment sensor and the fixing thermistor (main) are indicated as a
history of changes in the following: machine inside temperature (deg C), humidity (%), fixing
roller surface (middle; deg C).
F-8-11
Item
No.
DATE
TIME
D+deg C
E+%
F+deg C
8-41
Description
order of data acquisition (the higher the number, the order the data)
date of data acquisition
time of data acquisition
machine inside temperature
machine inside humidity
fixing roller surface (middle) temperature
2D-STS
Lv.1 Details
Display of 2D shading ON/OFF

To display ON/OFF of 2D shading.
When 0 is displayed although 1 is set with COPIER> OPTION> IMGLSR> 2D-SHADE, check the Drum Lot number with DRM-LOT. If
no number has been registered, execute COPIER> FUNCTION>
2D-SHADE> 2D-READ.
Use case
When uneven image occurs
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
COPIER> DISPLAY> 2D-SHADE> DRM-LOT
COPIER> FUNCTION> 2D-SHADE> 2D-READ
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-LSR> 2D-SHADE
DRM-LOT
Display of Drum Lot number
Lv.2 Details
To display the Photosensitive Drum Lot number (10 digits) read at
power-on.
Lot number is stored in ROM for 2D shading.
Check that the displayed value is matched with the Lot number in the
seal affixed on the Photosensitive Drum.
Use case
10-digit alphanumerics
COPIER> DISPLAY> 2D-SHADE> 2D-STS
CHK-SUM
Display of checksum calculation result
Lv.1 Details
To display the checksum calculation result at power-on.
Calculation result is stored in ROM for 2D shading.
When the calculation result is NG, ROM for 2D shading has a failure,
so replace this ROM.
Use case
0 to 1
0: at normal state, 1: at failure occurrence
T-8-13
T-8-12
NOTE:
The interval at which data is acquired may be changed using the following service
mode item: COPIER > OPTION > BODY > ENVP-IN.
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > 2D-SHADE
8-41
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode)
8-42
I/O (I/O display mode)

Address
P001
P002
bit
Name
15 Not used
14 Not used
13 DC Power Supply PCB (24V)
(Fixing/Feed) Remote Signal
12 DC Power Supply PCB (24V)
Remote Signal
11 Not used
10 Not used
9 Not used
8 Fixing Feed Drawer Connector
Connection Signal
7 Main Driver PCB Connector
Connection Signal
6 Relay PCB Connection Signal
5 Not used
4 DC Power Supply PCB (12V) Laser
Output Signal
3 DC Power Supply PCB (24V) B
Interlock System Output Signal
2 DC Power Supply PCB (24V) B
Output Signal
1 DC Power Supply PCB (24V) A
Interlock System Output Signal
0 DC Power Supply PCB (24V) A
Output Signal
15 Not used
14 Not used
13 Not used
12 Not used
11 Not used
10 Not used
9 Not used
8 Power Supply Cooling Fan 1/2 Error
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
For R&D use

For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
Symbol
bit
P003
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
Primary Charging Shutter Sensor

Not used
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
Not used
Fixing Sub Thermistor 2 Excessive
Temperature Rise Detection
PS94
THM3
Fixing Sub Thermistor 1 Excessive

THM2
Fixing Main Thermistor Excessive

THM1
Remarks
0: ON
0: ON
0: Connect
PCB2
0: Connect
PCB5
PCB29
0: Connect
PCB31
0: Normal
PCB31
0: Normal
PCB30
0: Normal
PCB30
0: Normal
FM14/
FM15
-
Address
0: Normal
Name
Symbol
Remarks
1: HP front
1: Excessive temperature rise

* The value returns to 0 when
temperature of the Fixing Assembly
decreases.
decreases.
decreases.
1: Error
8-42
8
Address
bit
P004
15
14
13
12
Name
Not used
Not used
Not used
Thermistor temperature difference
error detection
Fixing Sub Thermistor 2 > Fixing
Sub Thermistor 1
11 Thermistor temperature difference
error detection
Fixing Main Thermistor > Fixing Sub
Thermistor 2
error detection
Main Thermistor
error detection
Fixing Main Thermistor > Fixing Sub
Thermistor 1
error detection
Main Thermistor
7 Thermistor Connection
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-43
Symbol
THM2/
THM3
THM1/
THM3
THM1/
THM3
THM1/
THM2
THM1/
THM2
THM1/
THM3
Front Door Open Detection Switch SW2
Fixing Feed Lever
Fixing Power Supply PCB 12V OFF PCB10
Not used
Fixing Motor Error
Error
PS36
M3
FM7
Remarks
Address
bit
P005
15
14
13
12
1: Error
decreases.
1: Error
decreases.
1: Error
decreases.
1: Error
decreases.
1: Error
decreases.
0: Connect
Name
Roller Bias OFF

Pre-transfer Charging PCB Remote
Develop High Voltage PCB Remote
Remote
11 Fixing Motor ON
10 Fixing Motor CCW
9 Not used
8 Not used
7 Fixing Power Supply PCB 12V ON
6 Fixing Power Supply PCB Relay 2
ON
5 Fixing Power Supply PCB Relay 1
ON
4 Not used
3 Developer Lower Cooling Fan/
Developer Upper Cooling Fan Half
Speed
2 Developer Lower Cooling Fan/
Developer Upper Cooling Fan Full
Speed
1 Not used
0 Not used
Symbol
Remarks
PCB26
PCB12
PCB11
0:
0:
0:
0:
M3
M3
PCB10
-
1: ON
0: CW (paper feed direction)
1: ON
FM30/
FM31
1: Half Speed
FM30/
FM31
OFF, 1: ON
ON
ON
ON
0: 12V forcible OFF

1: ON
1: Full Speed
0: Close, 1: Open
1: Fixing Feed Unit presence
1: 12V to Fixing Power Supply PCB
is OFF or safety circuit operation
1: Paper presence
1: Stop
1: Stop
8-43
8
Address
bit
Name
P006
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
For R&D use

Not used
Not used
Multi Cassette Heater ON
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
For R&D use
For R&D use
Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning
Motor ON 2
Symbol
H02
M7
Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning M7

Motor ON 1
8-44
Remarks
Address
P007
0: ON
ON1/ON2 Signal=
0/0: Stop
0/1: Front -> Rear
1/0: Rear -> Front
ON1/ON2 Signal=
0/0: Stop
0/1: Front -> Rear
1/0: Rear -> Front
bit
14 Shift Tray Paper Sensor

13 Shift Tray Rear Home Position
Sensor
12 Shift Tray Front Home Position
Sensor
11 Process Unit Connection
10 Shift Tray Connection
9 Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid
Connection
8 Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid
Connection
7 Fixing Cleaning Web Level Sensor
Symbol
Remarks
PS104
(rear) /
PS105
(front)
PS103
PS102
0: Full
PS101
1: HP
SL9
0: Connect
0: Connect
0: Connect, 1: Not connect or
Driving
Driving
1: Web level is low or Connector
disconnection
0: JAM
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence or Connector
disconnection
SL10
PS45
6
5
4

Fixing Inlet Sensor
PS4
PS52
PS51
3
2
Not used
Fixing Shutter Home Position
Sensor
Not used
Pre-transfer Charging Shutter
Sensor
PS53
1
0
Name
15 Shift Tray Rear Tray Full Sensor /

Shift Tray Front Tray Full Sensor
PS95
0: Paper presence
1: HP
0: HP or middle size 1, or small size

1
1: HP front
8-44
8
Address
bit
P008
15
14
13
12
Name
Fixing Power
Not used
Not used
Fixing Power
Detection
11 Fixing Power
Supply ID1
10 Fixing Power
Supply ID0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Supply Detection
8-45
Symbol
Supply PCB 12V
PCB10
Supply PCB Power
PCB10
Supply PCB Power
PCB10

24V Detection
Connection
Develop High Voltage PCB 24V
Detection
Connection
Pre-transfer Charging PCB 24V
Detection
Connection
Fixing Drawer Connection
Reserve Fan Error
AC Driver PCB Location Detection
Remarks
1: iRA6075 Series
PCB11
0: Fixing Power Supply PCB 12VON

Detect 100V or 200V by
combination of power supply ID0/
ID1.
- 100V: ID0=0, ID1=1
- 200V: ID0=1, ID1=0
0: 24V-ON, 1: Error
PCB11
0: Connect
PCB12
0: 24V-ON, 1: Error
PCB12
0: Connect
PCB26
0: 24V-ON, 1: Error
PCB26
0: Connect
PS61
PCB6 or
PCB7
1:
0:
1:
0:
HP
Connect
Error
100V, 1: 200V
Address
P009
P010
bit
Name
15 5V sensor ON Signal (Fixing

Assembly)
14 Not used
13 Not used
12 Not used
11 Not used
10 Transfer High Voltage PCB AC ON
9 Transfer High Voltage PCB DC ON
8 Not used
7 Pre-exposure LED_ON
6 Shift Motor CW
5 Shift Motor CCW
4 Not used
3 Shift Tray Rear Tray Full Sensor /
Shift Tray Front Tray Full Sensor
ON
Symbol
-
PCB13
PCB13
M101
M101
PS104
(rear) /
PS105
(front)
2 Develop High Voltage PCB AC ON PCB12
1 Develop High Voltage PCB DC ON PCB12
0 Primary Charging High Voltage PCB PCB11
ON
15 Not used
14 Patch Sensor_ON
PS90
M6
13 Primary Charging Wire Cleaning
Motor ON 2
12 Primary Charging Wire Cleaning

Motor ON 1
M6
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Remarks
1: ON
0: ON
0: ON
1: ON
0: CW
0: CCW
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
0: ON
1: ON
ON1/ON2 Signal=
0/0: Stop
0/1: Front -> Rear
1/0: Rear -> Front
ON1/ON2 Signal=
0/0: Stop
0/1: Front -> Rear
1/0: Rear -> Front
8-45
8
Address
P011
bit
Name
Symbol
15 Developing Motor Error

M2
14 Drum Motor Error
M1
13 Waste Toner Lock Detection Switch SW5
8-46
Remarks
1: Stop
1: Stop
1: Lock (toner clogging) or
Connector disconnection
0: Cover Open or Connector
disconnection
12 Toner Exchange Cover Sensor
PS54
11 Not used
10 Toner Supply Motor Error
M10
9
8
Not used
Toner Feed Motor Error
M28
7
6
5
4
TS3
TS3
TS2
TS2
TS1
TS1
1: Toner presence
0: Connect
Buffer Toner Sensor

Buffer Toner Sensor Connection
Connection
Connection
Magnet Roller Clutch Connection
1: Overcurrent Error (logical

change)
1: Toner presence
0: Connect
1: Toner presence
0: Connect
CL5
Developing Clutch Connection
CL1

Driving
Driving
3
2
Address
P012
1: Overcurrent Error (logical

change)
P013
bit
Name
15 Primary Charging Exhaust Fan Error

14 Laser Scanner Cooling Fan Error
13 Primary Charging Air Supply Fan
Error
12 Not used
11 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Last
Paper Sensor
10 Multi-purpose Pickup Solenoid
Connection
9 Multi-purpose Tray Paper Sensor
8 Vertical Path Sensor 1
7 For R&D use
6 Front Door Open Detection Switch
5 Multi-purpose Cover Open/Close
Sensor
4 For R&D use
3 For R&D use
2 Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Air
Supply Fan/Pre-transfer Charging
Exhaust Fan Error
1 Developer Upper Cooling Fan Error
0 Developer Lower Cooling Fan Error
15 Not used
14 Not used
13 Not used
12 Not used
11 Not used
10 Not used
9 Not used
8 Not used
7 Not used
6 Not used
5 Not used
4 Not used
3 Not used
2 For R&D use
1 For R&D use
0 For R&D use
Symbol
Remarks
FM17
FM16
FM2
1: Stop
1: Stop
1: Stop
PS28
1: Paper presence
SL2
PS23
PS24
SW2
PS3
FM32/
FM33
FM31
FM30
-

Driving
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
1: Open
0: Open
1: Error
1: Error
1: Error
8-46
8
Address
P014
bit
Name
15 Not used
Exhaust Fan Full Speed ON
13 Not used
12 Not used
11 Drum Motor_ON
10 Drum Motor_CCW
9 Not used
8 Not used
Exhaust Fan Half Speed ON
6 Voltage Sensor PCB ON
5 Not used
4 Not used
3 Developing Motor_ON
2 Developing Motor_CCW
1 Not used
0 Not used
8-47
Symbol
FM32/
FM33
M1
M1
FM32/
FM33
PCB15
M2
M2
-
Remarks
Address
P015
1: Full Speed
1: ON
0: CW
1: Half Speed
1: ON
bit
Name
Symbol
15 Right Deck Pickup Sensor 1/2

14 Right Deck Pickup Solenoid
Connection
13 Right Deck Paper Height Sensor
10 Right Deck Upper Limit Sensor
9 Vertical Path Cover Open/Close
Sensor
8 Right Deck Pull Out Sensor
7 For R&D use
6 For R&D use
5 For R&D use
4 For R&D use
3 Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 2
2 Right Deck Paper Level Sensor 1
PS19
SL6
1
0
M4
PS7
PS6
PS25
PS26
PS8
PS2
PS32
PS48
PS47
1: ON
0: CW

Remarks
1: Paper presence
Driving
0: Lifter Up
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
1: Upper limit
0: Open
1: Paper presence
Detect paper level by combination

of the Paper Level Sensor 1/2
0: OFF
1: ON (Condition that the flag
blocks the sensor)
As for the combination, refer to the
Pickup/Feed System in Service
Manual.
1: Error
0: Paper absence, 1: Paper
presence
8-47
8
Address
P016
bit
Name
Symbol
15 Cassette3 Lifter Motor Error

14 Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 2
13 Cassette 3 Paper Level Sensor 1
M20
PS70
PS69
12
11
10
9
Cassette
Cassette
Cassette
Cassette
PS17
PS21
PS68
PS13

Connection
Cassette 3 Paper Length Detection
Switch
Switch
Switch
Switch
Cassette 3 Paper Width Detection
Switch
Switch
Switch
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
3
3
3
3
Paper Height Sensor

Pickup Sensor 1
Upper Limit Sensor
Paper Sensor
SL3
SW9
SW9
SW9
SW9
SW7
SW7
SW7
SW7
8-48
Remarks
Address
bit
1: Error
0: OFF
blocks the sensor)
Manual.
0: Lifter Up
1: Paper presence
1: Upper limit
0: Paper absence, 1: Paper
presence
Driving
Detect paper size by combination
of 4 switches
0: ON (Condition that the switch is
pressed)
1: OFF
Manual.
P017
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P018

of 4 switches
pressed)
1: OFF
Manual.
Name
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Symbol
Remarks
8-48
8
Address
bit
P019
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Symbol
Not used
Not used
Not used
Feed Driver Cooling Fan Error
Making Image Exhaust Fan Error
Connection
PS27
FM40
FM3
SL4

Cassette 4 Lifter Motor Error
Connection
PS18
M21
PS22
PS71
PS14
SL7
PS73
PS72
PS50
8-49
Remarks
Address
P020
bit
Name
Symbol
15 Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 1
PS49
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
M5
PS12
PS20
PS33
PS10
PS11
SW10
1: Paper presence
1: Error
1: Stop
Driving
0: OFF
blocks the sensor)
Manual.
0: Lifter Up
1: Error
1: Paper presence
1: Upper limit
1: Paper presence
Driving
0: OFF
blocks the sensor)
Manual.
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Left Deck Lifter Motor Error

Left Deck Upper Limit Sensor
Not used
Switch
Switch
Switch
Switch
Switch
Switch
Switch
Switch
SW10
SW10
SW10
SW8
SW8
SW8
SW8
Remarks
0: OFF
blocks the sensor)
Manual.
1: Error
1: Upper limit
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
0: Lifter Up
1: Paper presence
of 4 switches
pressed)
1: OFF
Manual.
of 4 switches
pressed)
1: OFF
Manual.
8-49
8
Address
bit
Name
P021
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Feed Driver Cooling Fan Half Speed
Feed Driver Cooling Fan Full Speed
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Making Image Exhaust Fan Half
Speed
Making Image Exhaust Fan Full
Speed
For factory use
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
P022
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Symbol
FM40
FM40
FM3
FM3
8-50
Remarks
Address
bit
Name
P023
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
For R&D use

For R&D use
For R&D use
For R&D use
Registration Sensor
Not used
Connection
Not used
Connection
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
ETB Engage Sensor
Transfer Cleaner Cooling Fan Error
Duplex Left Sensor
Not used
Not used
Not used
Duplex Driver Cooling Fan Error
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
1: ON
1: ON
7
6
1: ON
1: ON (priority)
P024
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Symbol
PS29
PS64
SL11
SL5
PS56
PS55
PS31
FM8
PS66
FM41
-
Remarks
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
Driving
Driving
1:
1:
0:
1:
1:
HP
Engage
Detect
Stop
Paper presence
1: Stop
8-50
8
Address
bit
P025
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P026
Name
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
For factory use
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
Symbol
8-51
Remarks
Address
P027
P028
bit
Name
15 Transfer High Voltage PCB

Connection
14 Not used
13 Transfer High Voltage PCB 24V
Check
12 Not used
11 Not used
10 Not used
9 Not used
8 Not used
7 Duplex Merging Sensor
6 Registration Motor/Duplex Motor
Cooling Fan
5 Reverse Vertical Path Sensor
4 Not used
3 Paper Cooling Fan Error
2 Not used
1 For R&D use
0 For R&D use
15 For R&D use
14 For R&D use
13 For R&D use
12 For R&D use
11 For R&D use
10 For R&D use
9 For R&D use
8 For R&D use
7 Reverse Detachment Solenoid
Connection
6 Inner Delivery Sensor
5 Not used
4 Not used
3 Not used
2 Not used
1 Not used
0 Not used
Symbol
Remarks
PCB13
0: Connect
PCB13
1: Error
PS67
FM42
1: Paper presence
1: Stop
PS65
FM5
SL12
PS35
-
1: Paper presence
1: Stop

Driving
1: Paper presence
8-51
8
Address
P029
P030
bit
Name
15 Transfer High Voltage Positive Bias

Constant Current mode
14 Transfer High Voltage Negative Bias
Constant Current
13 Transfer High Voltage Positive Bias
Constant Voltage mode
12 Transfer High Voltage PCB Remote
11 Not used
10 Not used
9 Not used
8 Not used
7 Not used
6 Not used
5 Not used
4 Not used
3 Not used
2 Paper Cooling Fan Half Speed
1 Paper Cooling Fan Full Speed
0 Operation Check LED Port
Cooling Fan Half Speed
Cooling Fan Full Speed
13 Not used
12 Not used
11 Not used
10 Not used
9 Not used
8 Not used
7 Not used
6 Not used
5 Not used
4 Transfer Cleaner Cooling Fan Half
Speed
3 Transfer Cleaner Cooling Fan Full
Speed
2 Not used
1 Not used
0 Not used
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_Main Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P005))
8-52
Symbol
Host Machine_Main Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P005))
Remarks
PCB13
0: ON
PCB13
0: ON
PCB13
0: ON
PCB13
FM5
FM5
FM42
0: Active
FM42
1: Full Speed
Address
bit
Name
P001
0-7
8
9 - 11
12
13
14
15
0 - 15
0 - 15
0 - 10
11
12 - 14
15
0
For R&D use

Data Analyzer Board power state
For R&D use
Main Controller PCB 2 Version bit0
Not used
Not used
Not used
Power Supply Cooling Fan 1/2
For R&D use
Reader Controller PCB power state
SCPRDY (Controller reception is
available)
For R&D use
SPRDY (Reader power ON)
For R&D use
/PPRDY (Printer power ON)
/PCPRDY (Controller reception is
available)
For R&D use
For R&D use
Channel Link PCB Connection
DC Controller PCB Connection
For R&D use
P002
P003
P004
P005
1:
1:
1:
1:
Half Speed
Full Speed
ON
Half Speed
FM8
1: Half Speed
FM8
1: Full Speed (priority)
1-3
4
5 - 10
11
12
P006
13 - 15
0-4
5
6
7 - 15
Symbol
PCB51
PCB51
PCB51
PCB51
FM14/FM15
-
Remarks
0: Abnormal, 1: Normal
0: Normal, 1: Abnormal
0: ON, 1: OFF
PCB52
PCB1
-
0: Connect, 1: Not connect

0: Connect, 1: Not connect
T-8-15
T-8-14
8-52
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Host Machine_Main Controller (DC-CON>P001 to P005))
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Reader (R-CON>P001 to P005)
8-53
Reader (R-CON>P001 to P005)

Address
bit
P001
P002
P003
Name
Symbol
Remarks
SR2
1: HP
1
2
3
4
5
Scanner Unit HP Sensor

Interruption
DDI-SPO1
Fan Lock Signal (Reserve)
DDI-SRTS
DDI-SCPRDY
Silent Mode
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
Board Test
12V Power Supply Monitor
Reader-DADF Connect
Location Information 0
Location Information 1
Debug LED
Memory Identification
Model Identification
7
0
1
2
3
Original Size Sensor 1

DADF Sensor 1
DADF Sensor 2
Scanner Unit Heat Exhaust Fan
Lock Signal
Scanner Unit Cooling Fan Lock
Signal
LED Select 1
LED Select 2
-
CF1
CF2
SR1
SR3
FM1
Not used
0: Reception is available
0: Controller ready
1: Normal start-up, 0: Silent startup
1: Normal start-up, 0: PCB check
0: Power supply
0: Power supply
1: Connect, 0: Unconnected AP
Not used
Not used
Not used
1: Model with memory, 0: Model
without memory
1: X-system or Copyboard, 0:
S-system
0: Original presence
0: Original presence
1: Close, 0: Open
1: Close, 0: Open
1: Failure
FM2
1: Failure
DIPSW2, 3 (1,1): Rank A, (1,0):

Rank B, (0,1): Rank C
-
4
5
6
7
Address
bit
P004
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
P005
Name
B_DDI_SPI1
B_DDI_SCTS
B_DDI_SPRDY
Debug Inspection Activation LED
DF/Reader Selector
Size Detection LED
Watchdog Output
Scanner Motor Current Setting 1
Scanner Motor Current Setting 2
Scanner Motor Reset
Scanner Motor Enable
Scanner Unit Cooling Fan ON
Scanner Motor Direction
-
Symbol
M1
M1
M1
M1
FM2
M1
-
Remarks
Fix to 1
0: Transmission is available
0: Engine ready
1: ON
1: DADF, 0: Reader
1: ON
0: (Toggle operation)
(0,0): 100%, (0,1): 75%, (1,0): 50%,
(1,1): 25%
0: Reset (100nsec)
1: Enable
1: ON
1: Back scan, 0: Scan
T-8-16
8-53
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Reader (R-CON>P001 to P005)
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > ADF (FEEDER>P001 to P007)
8-54
ADF (FEEDER>P001 to P007)

Address
bit
Name
P001
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3

Reverse Sensor
DADF Fan Alarm
LTR-R/LGL Identification Sensor
AB/Inch Identification Sensor
Tray Sensor
Tray HP Sensor
Paper Surface Sensor
Cover Sensor
Original Sensor
Stamp Presence/Absence
Post-separation 3 Sensor
(Reserve)
Pickup Roller Unit Lifting HP
Sensor
Scanner Unit Cooling Fan Alarm
Disengagement HP Sensor 2
1-path Duplex Model Identification
Leading Edge Position Sensor
Disengagement HP Sensor 1
Delivery Sensor
Read Sensor 2
Read Sensor 1
Registration Sensor
ITOP
Glass Shift HP Sensor
Feed Sensor
Post-separation Sensor 3
P002
4
5
6
P003
P004
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Symbol
Remarks
SR23
SR8
SR7
SR9
SR13
SR6
SR10
SR1
PCB2
0:
1:
0:
1:
1:
0:
1:
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
Power supply
Paper presence
Failure
Paper presence
A4R, STMTR, B6R
Open
HP (lower limit)
Paper surface detection
Open
Original presence
Stamp presence
Paper presence
SR3
SR2
SR12
0: Paper presence
0: Paper presence
1: HP (Escape)
FM3
SR16
SR22
SR15
SR20
SR19
SR18
SR17
PCB5
SR5
PCB4
PCB3
SR11
PCB2
0: Failure
1: HP (Disengagement)
1: 1-path duplex, 0: Reverse duplex
1: Paper presence
1: HP (Disengagement)
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
0: Paper presence
1: Paper presence
0: Paper presence
0: Paper presence
Not used
0: HP
0: Paper presence
0: Paper presence
Address
bit
P005
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
P006
P007
Name
Pickup Motor Direction
DA Enable
Tray Lifting Motor Direction
Stamp Solenoid
Original LED
Tray Lifting Motor Current
Disengagement Motor 1 Current
Disengagement Motor 2 Current
Glass Shift Motor Current
Glass Shift Motor Direction
DADF Fan ON
Pickup Motor Direction
Separation Motor Current
Pickup Motor Current
Registration Motor Current
Read Motor Current
Pickup Motor Current
Scanner Unit Cooling Fan ON
Pickup Clutch
Delivery Motor Current
Delivery Motor Direction
-
Symbol
M1
M8
SL2
LED
M8
M6
M7
M9
M9
M1
M1
M3
M4
M1
FM3
M5
M5
-
Remarks
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
1:
-
Rotation direction, 0: (Not used)

Enable, 0: Reset
Up, 0: Down
ON
ON
Operation is available
Shading direction (Right upper)
ON
ON
ON
ON
CCW (Delivery direction)
T-8-17
8-54
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > ADF (FEEDER>P001 to P007)
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Deck Uint - A1 (DC-CON>P048 to P050)
8-55
Paper Deck Uint - A1 (DC-CON>P048 to P050)

Addres
bit
P048
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P049
Description
Symbol
not used
not used
not used
not used
deck main motor hold
M1
deck open solenoid
SL2
deck lifter motor
M2
deck lifter motor ON signal
M2
deck main motor ON signal
M1
not used
not used
deck pickup clutchON ON signal
CL2
not used
deck pickup roller releasing solenoid SL1
deck open indicator
LED100
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
-
Remarks
0:open/1:close
0:up/1:down
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
-
Addres
bit
Description
P050
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
for R&D
not used
for R&D
for R&D
deck open sensor
deck set sensor
deck lifter lower limit detecting
switch
deck paper level sensor
deck paper supply position sensor
deck main motor lock signal
deck pickup roller releasing solenoid
ON signal
deck pickup sensor
deck feed sensor
deck lifter position sensor
deck paper sensor
deck open detecting switch
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Symbol
Remarks
PS9
PS5
SW2
0:close/1:open
0:connected/1:unconnected
0:ON/1:OFF
PS8
PS7
M1
SL1
0:paper present/1:paper absent

0:ON/1:OFF
PS6
PS1
PS4
PS2
SW1

0:ON/1:OFF
0:open/1:close
T-8-18
8-55
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Deck Uint - A1 (DC-CON>P048 to P050)
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Deck Uint - D1 (DC-CON>P048 to P050)
8-56
Paper Deck Uint - D1 (DC-CON>P048 to P050)

Addres
bit
P048
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P049
Description
Symbol
not used
not used
not used
not used
deck main motor hold
M1
deck open solenoid
SL2
deck lifter motor
M2
deck lifter motor ON signal
M2
deck main motor ON signal
M1
not used
not used
deck pickup clutchON ON signal
CL2
not used
deck pickup roller releasing solenoid SL1
deck open indicator
LED100
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
-
Remarks
0:open/1:close
0:up/1:down
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
-
Addres
bit
Description
P050
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
for R&D
not used
for R&D
for R&D
deck open sensor
deck set sensor
deck lifter lower limit detecting
switch
deck paper level sensor
deck paper supply position sensor
deck main motor lock signal
deck pickup roller releasing solenoid
ON signal
deck pickup sensor
deck feed sensor
deck lifter position sensor
deck paper sensor
deck open detecting switch
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Symbol
Remarks
PS9
PS5
SW2
0:close/1:open
0:ON/1:OFF
PS8
PS7
M1
SL1

0:ON/1:OFF
PS6
PS1
PS4
PS2
SW1

0:ON/1:OFF
0:open/1:close
T-8-19
8-56
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Deck Uint - D1 (DC-CON>P048 to P050)
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inserter - L1 (SORTER>P047 to P061)
8-57
Inserter - L1 (SORTER>P047 to P061)

Address
bit
P047
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
P048
P049
P050
P051
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Reserve
Reserve
Reserve
Reserve
unit
unit
unit
unit
motor*B
motor*A
motorB
motorA
Symbol
M3
M3
M3
M3
Remarks
Address
bit
P052
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
H:active
H:active
H:active
H:active
P053
Straight path feed motor(IN)*B

Straight path feed motor(IN)*A
Straight path feed motor(IN)B
Straight path feed motor(IN)A
Front upper cover open/close sensor
Top cover open/close sensor
M11
M11
M11
M11
SW1
S2
H:active
H:active
H:active
H:active
H:open
L:open
PCB Identification signal2

PF3098 1:H 2:L

2:L
P054
PF4154 1:L
P055
Analog input
Through pass/IN_motor driver

current
Paper feed motor driver current
Analog input
P056
Name
Symbol
Remarks
Folding unit sensor

By Borah motor driver_standby signal Reverse solenoid_PWM
SL1
H:No unit
H:Movement is possible L:stop
PWM
PCB LED2
PCB LED1
DSW5
DSW6
DSW7
L:ON
L:ON
L:ON
L:ON
L:ON
Tray lift motor driver current

Reverse unit motor driver current
Inserter open/close sensor
Tray paper sensor2
Tray paper sensor1
Paper feed sensor
Tray lower limit sensor
Paper set sensor
M2
M3
S1
S8
S7
S3
S5
S6
Analog output
Analog output
H:open
L:paper on
L:paper on
L:ON
H:lower limit
H:empty
Reverse sensor
S10
H:paper on
8-57
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Inserter - L1 (SORTER>P047 to P061)
8
Address
bit
P057
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P058
P059
P060
P061
Name
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Paper Folding Inserter Unit - H1 (SORTER>P047 to P061)
8-58
Symbol
Paper Folding Inserter Unit - H1 (SORTER>P047 to P061)
Remarks
EEPROM/DA converter CLK signal

EEPROM CS signal
Tray lift motor B PHASE
Tray lift motor A PHASE
Tray lift motor B ENABLE
Tray lift motor A ENABLE
M2
M2
M2
M2
H:OUTX
H:OUTX
H:output
H:output
Fold adjustment regi clutch BACK

Fold adjustment regi clutch FEED
paper set LED
Interface InsDataEnable signal
H:Absorption
H:Absorption
H:ON
-
Address
bit
P047
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
L:OUT*X
L:OUT*X
L:OFF
L:OFF
P048
P049
Paper feed motor*B
Paper feed motor*A
Paper feed motorB
Paper feed motorA
DSW8
DSW4
DSW3
DSW2
Reverse entrance sensor
DSW1
Reverse timing sensor
Paper registration sensor
PSW2
PSW1
Delivery sensor
M1
M1
M1
M1
S12
S11
S4
S13
H:active
H:active
H:active
H:active
L:ON
L:ON
L:ON
L:ON
L:paper on
L:ON
H:paper on
L:paper on
L:ON
L:ON
H:paper on
P050
P051
T-8-20
Name
Reserve unit motor*B
Reserve unit motor*A
Reserve unit motorB
Reserve unit motorA
DAconverter Cssignal
C fold flapper solenoid
Fold transport motor Clock signal
Straight path feed motor(IN)B
Front upper cover open/close sensor
Top cover open/close sensor
Slowdown timing sensor
Interface FinDataEnable signal
Through pass/IN_motor driver current

Paper feed motor driver current
C fold paper full sensor
Upper stopper path sensor AD
Fold position sensor AD
Release timing sensor AD
Slowdown timing sensor AD
Tray paper width senor AD
Symbol
Remarks
M3
M3
M3
M3
M9
M9
M9
M9
H:active
H:active
H:active
H:active
H:active
H:active
H:active
H:active
SL5
H:Absorption
M5
M4
M4
M4
M4
SW1
S2
S24
H:active
H:active
H:active
H:active
H:open
L:open
H:paper on
PF3098 1:H 2:L
PF4154 1:L 2:L
S20
S22
S23
S21
S24
S9
Analog
Analog
L:full
Analog
Analog
Analog
Analog
Analog
input
input
input
input
input
input
input
8-58
8
Address
bit
P052
7
6
Folding unit sensor

By Borah motor driver_standby signal
S14
-
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reverse solenoid_PWM
Straight path flapper solenoid PWM
Skew correction pressure solenoid PWM
Skew correction release solenoid PWM
PCB LED2
PCB LED1
DSW5
DSW6
DSW7
Upper stopper motor B PHASE
Upper stopper motor A PHASE
Upper stopper motor B ENABLE
Upper stopper motor A ENABLE
Tray lift motor driver current
Reverse unit motor driver current
Inserter open/close sensor
Tray paper sensor2
Tray paper sensor1
Paper feed sensor
Tray lower limit sensor
Paper set sensor
C fold tray motor B PHASE
C fold tray motor A PHASE
C fold tray motor B ENABL
C fold tray motor A ENABL
C fold stopper motor B PHASE
C fold stopper motor A PHASE
C fold stopper motor B ENABL
C fold stopper motor A ENABL
Fold position adjustment motor *B
Fold position adjustment motor *A
Fold position adjustment motor B
Fold position adjustment motor A
Reverse sensor
C fold stopper sensor
C fold tray motor sensor
C fold tray empty sensor
SL1
SL2
SL4
SL3
M7
M7
M7
M7
-
P053
P054
P055
P056
Name
8-59
Symbol
S1
S8
S7
S3
S5
S6
M6
M6
M6
M6
M8
M8
M8
M8
M10
M10
M10
M10
S10
S17
S19
S18
Remarks
Address
bit
H:No unit
H:Movement is possible
L:stop
PWM
PWM
PWM
PWM
L:ON
L:ON
L:ON
L:ON
L:ON
H:OUTX L:OUT*X
H:OUTX L:OUT*X
H:output L:OFF
H::output L:OFF
Analog output
Analog output
H:open
L:paper on
L:paper on
L:ON
H:lower limit
H:empty
P057
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
H:OUTX L:OUT*X
H:OUTX L:OUT*X
H:output L:OFF
H:output L:OFF
H:active
H:active
H:active
H:active
H:paper on
H:home
H:home
L:paper on
P058
P059
P060
P061
Name
C fold stopper solenoid
C fold guide solenoid
EEPROM/DA converter CLK signal
EEPROM CS signal
Tray lift motor B PHASE
Tray lift motor A PHASE
Tray lift motor B ENABLE
Tray lift motor A ENABLE
EEPROM/DA converter Disignal
Fold transport motor ON/OFF signal
Fold adjustment regi clutch BACK
Fold adjustment regi clutch FEED
paper set LED
Interface InsDataEnable signal
Fold transport motor lock signal
Delivery sensor
Upper stopper sensor
Upper stopper path sensor
Paper feed motor*B
Paper feed motor*A
Paper feed motorB
Paper feed motorA
DSW8
DSW4
DSW3
DSW2
Reverse entrance sensor
DSW1
Reverse timing sensor
Paper registration sensor
PSW2
PSW1
Delivery sensor
Fold position sensor
Release timing sensor
Symbol
SL7
SL6
M2
M2
M2
M2
M5
S25
S16
S22
M1
M1
M1
M1
S12
S11
S4
S25
S23
S21
Remarks
H:Absorption
H:Absorption
H:OUTX L:OUT*X
H:OUTX L:OUT*X
H:output L:OFF
H:output L:OFF
H:Absorption
H:on
H:Absorption
H:Absorption
H:ON
H:lock
H:paper on
H:paper on
H:paper on
H:active
H:active
H:active
H:active
L:ON
L:ON
L:ON
L:ON
L:paper on
L:ON
H:paper on
L:paper on
L:ON
L:ON
H:paper on
H:paper on
H:paper on
T-8-21
8-59
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > External Punch - A1 (SORTER>SORTER>P041 to P046)
8-60
External Punch - A1 (SORTER>SORTER>P041 to P046)

Addres
bit
P041
7
6
5
punch home position sensor

punch motor clock sensor
trailing edge detection snsor
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
punch OUT signal

not used
SW601-3 on the punch controller PCB
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
punch TxD
punch RxD
punch In
punch motor CW signal
punch motor CCW signal
horizontal registration motor
M61
M61
M62
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
horizontal registration home position sensor

EEPROM CS
EEPROM CLK
EEPROM DataOut
EEPROM DataIn
not used
sensor PWM signal
horizontal registration motor electric current
setting
PI61
M62
4
3
2
1
0
not
not
not
not
not
P042
P043
P044
Description
Symbol
PI63
PI62
LED5, PT5
used
used
used
used
used
Remarks
0:ON/1:OFF
0:paper
present/1:paper
absent
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:besides
standby/1:drive
0:besides HP/1:HP
0:ON/1:OFF
0:drive electric
current /
1:maintenance
electric current
-
Addres
bit
P045
7
6
5
4
3
2
SW602 on the punch controller PCB

SW603 on the punch controller PCB
for R&D
not used
LED602 on the punch controller PCB
horizontal registration motor phase B signal
M62
horizontal registration motor phase A signal
M62
0
7
LED601 on the punch controller PCB

horizontal registration sensor 1 on the LED
PCB
LED1, PT1
scrap full detector PCB
5
4
3
upper door switch

front door switch
PCB
LED2, PT2

PCB
LED3, PT3

PCB
LED4, PT4
trailing edge sensor on the LED PCB
LED5, PT5
P046
Description
Symbol
Remarks
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:OFF/1:ON
0:phase B*
ON/1:phase B ON
0:phase A*
ON/1:phase A ON
0:OFF/1:ON
0:paper
present/1:paper
absent
0:paper
present/1:paper
absent
0:open/1:close
0:open/1:close
0:paper
present/1:paper
absent
0:paper
present/1:paper
absent
0:paper
present/1:paper
absent
0:paper
present/1:paper
absent
T-8-22
8-60
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > External Punch - A1 (SORTER>SORTER>P041 to P046)
Service Mode > COPIER > I/O (I/O display mode) > Staple Finisher - E1 / Booklet Finisher -E1 (SORTER>P001 to P040)
8-61
Staple Finisher - E1 / Booklet Finisher -E1 (SORTER>P001
Addres
bit
Description
Symbol
P005
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
not used
not used
tray motor clock signal
saddle serial signal
saddle serial signal
PWM output for solenoid
for R&D
for R&D
not used
not used
expansion I/O read signal
for R&D
expansion I/O write signal
for R&D
for R&D
PSW3 on the finisher controller PCB
not used
not used
not used
not used
tray 1 shift motor lock detection
chip select 2
chip select 1
front cover sensor
tray 2 shift area sensor 1
inlet sensor
M107
PI102
PI103
3
2
1
0
swing guide HP sensor

download mode
not used
not used
PI105
-
to P040)
Addres
bit
P001
7
6
5
4
3
2
punch serial communication

escape feed motor clock signal
folding serial communication (RxD)
folding serial communication (TxD)
front cover sensor
saddle unit connection detection
M112
PI102
-
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
punch serial communication (RxD)

punch serial communication (TxD)
punch serial communication
not used
not used
not used
inserter communication (IN)
tray motor clock signal
not used
swing motor clock signal
punch feed motor phase B* signal
punch feed motor phase A* signal
punch feed motor phase B signal
punch feed motor phase A signal
feed motor phase B* signal
feed motor phase A* signal
feed motor phase B signal
feed motor phase A signal
stack ejection motor clock signal
tray 2 shift motor FG signal
tray 1 shift motor FG signal
feed motor clock signal
punch feed motor clock signal
punch paper trailing edge detection
M106
M63
M63
M63
M63
M101
M101
M101
M101
M102
M108
M107
M101
M63
-
P002
P003
P004
Description
Symbol
Remarks
0:OFF/1:ON
0:close/1:open
0:saddle present/1:saddle
absent
0:OFF/1:ON
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:not detected/1:detected
P006
P007
P008
Remarks
0:ON/1:OFF
0:OFF/1:lock detectioon
0:close/1:open
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:paper present/1:paper
absent
0:besides HP/1:HP
0:OFF/1:ON
-
8-61
8
Addres
bit
P009
tray 1 paper sensor
host machine software IPC

communication (RxD)
host machine software IPC
communication (TxD)
tray 2 shift motor lock detection
tray 2 paper sensor
5
4
3
2
1
0
P010
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P011
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Description
DIPSW1-8 on the finisher controller

PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
EEPROM clock signal
EEPROM enable signal
EEPROM output signal
not used
gear change motor electric current
change I1
gear change motor electric current
change I0
gear change motor phase B signal
gear change motor phase A signal
8-62
Symbol
PI111
Remarks
absent
-
M108
PI112
-
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:OFF/1:lock detectioon
absent
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
M110
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
-
M110
M110
M110
Addres
bit
P012
7
6
5
4
3
swing height sensor

gear change home position sensor
not used
rear end assist HP sensor
processing tray sensor
PI123
PI117
PI109
PI108
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
rear aligning plate HP sensor

front aligning plate HP sensor
EEPROM input signal
tray 2 shift motor ON signal
tray 2 shift motor CW/CCW signal
feed roller separation solenoid
punch feed motor standby
punch feed motor electric current
change I0
punch feed motor electric current
change I1
feed motor electric current change
I0
I1
tray 1 shift motor enable signal
tray 1 shift motor CW/CCW signal
tray 1 shift motor ON signal
rear end assist motor enable signal
rear end assist motor electric
current change I1
rear end assist motor electric
current change I0
rear end assist motor directiojn
change
inserter serial communication (OUT)
staple motor direction change CW
signal
staple motor direction change CCW
signal
Stapler shift motor enable signal
stack ejection motor electric current
change I0
stack ejection motor electric current
change I1
stack ejection motor torque terminal
swing motor electric current change
swing motor direction change
PI107
PI106
M108
M108
SL101
M63
M63
P013
2
1
0
P014
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
P015
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Description
Symbol
Remarks
0:close/1:open
0:HP/1:besides HP
0:HP/1:besides HP
absent
0:HP/1:besides HP
0:HP/1:besides HP
0:OFF/1:ON
0:CW/1:CCW
0:OFF/1:ON
0:standby/1:drive
-
M63
M101
M101
M107
M107
M107
M109
M109
0:standby/1:drive
0:CW/1:CCW
0:OFF/1:ON
0:standby/1:drive
-
M109
M109
0:CW/1:CCW
M41
0:OFF/1:ON
-
M41
M105
M102
0:drive/1:standby
-
M102
M102
M106
M106
0:71%/1:100%
0:High/1:Low
0:CW/1:CCW
8-62
8-63
Addres
bit
Description
Symbol
P016
7
6
M104
0:CW/1:CCW
M104
M104
0:High/1:Low
M103
0:High/1:Low
M103
0:CW/1:CCW
0
7
not used
rear aligning plate motor direction
change
rear aligning plate motor clock signal
rear aligning plate motor electric
current change I0
not used
front aligning plate motor electric
current change I0
front aligning plate motor direction
change
front aligning plate motor clock signal
tray 2 paper surface sensor 1
M103
PI115
tray 1 paper surface sensor
PI114
5
4
3
shutter HP sensor
stapler shift HP sensor
stapler alignment interference sensor
PI113
PI110
PI116
stapler needle presence
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
M105
SL102
CL101
CL102
SL104
SL103
M105
M105
7
6
stapler READY
stapler HP detection
stapler shift motor
buffer roller separation solenoid
shutter clutch
stack ejection lower roller clutch
buffer rear end holding solenoid
1st delivery roller separation solenoid
stapler shift motor electric current
change I1
stapler shift motor electric current
change I0
inserter unit connection detection
feed path sensor
absent
absent
0:HP/1:besides HP
0:HP/1:besides HP
0:interference/1:not
interference
0:needle present/1:needle
absent
0:standby/1:drive
0:besides HP/1:HP
0:CCW/1:CW
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
-
PI104
5
4
3
2
1
0
swing guide switch signal

staple safety switch signal
not used
not used
not used
Stapler shift motor lock signal
MS102
MS104
M105
absent
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
-
5
4
3
2
1
P017
P018
0
P019
Remarks
Addres
bit
Description
Symbol
P020
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
not used
not used
not used
not used
escape feed motor phase B* signal
escape feed motor phase A* signal
escape feed motor phase B signal
escape feed motor phase A signal
puncher unit connection detection
tray 2 paper surface sensor 2
M112
M112
M112
M112
PI120
5
4
3
2
not used
not used
not used
escape tray full sensor
PI119
1
0
escape door sensor

escape tray path sensor
PI121
PI118
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
not used
not used
not used
not used
for host machine download
not used
not used
not used
not used
motor enable signal
punch serial communication (OUT)
not used
escape solenoid
escape feed motor standby signal
escape feed motor electric current
change I1
escape feed motor electric current
change I0
SL105
M112
M112
absent
absent
0:close/1:open
absent
0:OFF/1:ON
0:standby/1:drive
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
0:standby/1:drive
-
M112
P021
P022
P023
Remarks
8-63
8
Addres
bit
Description
Symbol
P024
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
not used
not used
not used
not used
stack ejection motor phase B* signal
stack ejection motor phase A* signal
stack ejection motor phase B signal
stack ejection motor phase A signal
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
for host machine download
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
not used
M102
M102
M102
M102
-
P025
P026
P027
P028
8-64
Remarks
0:OFF/1:ON
-
Addres
bit
P029
7
6
5
4
3
2
P030
P031
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
P032
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Description
alignment plate HP sensor
not used
not used
not used
saddle staple unit connection
detection
vertical path paper sensor
not used
not used
not used
paper folding motor PWM signal
solenoid PWM signal
stitcher HP sensor (rear)
stitcher HP sensor (front)
paper pushing plate top position
sensor
paper pushing plate HP sensor
guide motor phase B signal
guide motor phase A signal
alignment motor B signal
alignment motor A signal
not used
paper positioning plate motor phase
B signal
paper positioning plate motor phase
A signal
feed motor CW/CCW signal
saddle rear staple electric current
detection (AD)
saddle front staple electric current
detection (AD)
not used
not used
paper folding motor clock sensor
paper pushing plate motor clock
sensor
not used
Symbol
Remarks
PI5
-
0:besides HP/1:HP
PI17
0:paper absent/1:paper
present
0:besides HP/1:HP
0:besides HP/1:HP
0:top position/1:besides top
position
0:besides HP/1:HP
-
M1
M2
SW5
SW7
PI15
PI14
M3
M3
M5
M5
M4
M4
M1
-
0:CCW/1:CW
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
M1
PI4
PI1
8-64
8
Addres
bit
Description
Symbol
P033
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SL2
SL1
SL5
PI21
M3
M1
M1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
not used
not used
No.2 paper deflecting solenoid
No.1 paper deflecting solenoid
saddle inlet solenoid
paper folding HP sensor
for R&D
for R&D
not used
PSW1 on the saddle controller PCB
not used
power ON signal
guide motor I0
feed motor enable
I1
I0
not used
not used
not used
not used
stitcher motor (rear) CW signal
not used
staple sensor (rear)
24V detection
not used
feed plate contact solenoid
paper folding motorRV
paper positioning plate motor I0
alignment motor I0
paper positioning plate paper sensor
1
0
paper positioning plate HP sensor

tray paper sensor
PI7
PI6
P034
0
P035
P036
M1
M6
SW4
SL4
M2
M4
M5
PI8
8-65
Remarks
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
-
Addres
bit
Description
Symbol
P037
7
6
paper pushing plate motor EN signal

paper pushing plate motor FWD
signal
paper pushing plate motor RV signal
paper folding motor FWD signal
not used
for R&D
for R&D
for R&D
stitcher motor (rear) CCW signal
saddle software IPC communication
saddle software IPC communication
stitcher motor (front) CW signal
stitcher motor (front) CCW signal
staple sensor (front)
M8
M8
P038
0:ON/1:OFF
0:OFF/1:ON
0:ON/1:OFF
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
absent
0:HP/1:besides HP
absent
P039
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
controller
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:ON/1:OFF
0:needle absent/1:needle
present
0:ON/1:OFF
controller
0:ON/1:OFF
controller
0:ON/1:OFF
controller
0:ON/1:OFF
controller
0:ON/1:OFF
controller
0:ON/1:OFF
controller
0:ON/1:OFF
controller
0:ON/1:OFF
not used
not used
SW504-8 on the saddle
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
PCB
saddle inlet sensor
6
5
4
guide HP sensor
crescent roller phase sensor
delivery sensor
PI13
PI12
PI11
3
2
1
0
inlet cover sensor

saddle trailing edge sensor 3
PI9
-
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P040
M8
M2
M6
M7
M7
SW6
Remarks
0:ON/1:OFF
0:OFF/1:ON
PI22
0:paper absent/1:paper
present
0:besides HP/1:HP
0:besides HP/1:HP
absent
0:colse/1:open
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
0:OFF/1:ON
T-8-23
8-65
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY
ADJUST
8-66
ADJ-XY
COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY
AE
ADJ-X
Lv.1 Details
COPIER > ADJUST > AE

AE-TBL
Lv.1 Details
Adj of text density at image density adj

To adjust text density according to the adjusted image density.
As the greater value is set, text gets darker.
Use case
When clearing the RAM data of the Reader Controller PCB
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution
When clearing the RAM data of the Reader Controller PCB, enter
the value of service label.
1 to 9
Default value
5
T-8-24
Adj of img pstn in book mode: vert scan

To adjust the image reading start position (image leading edge
position) in vertical scanning direction.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter
When the non-image width is larger than the standard value, set the
smaller value.
When out of original area is copied, set the larger value.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image position moves to the
trailing edge side by 0.1mm.
Use case
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Caution
Do not use this at the normal service.
-50 to 50
Unit
0.1mm
Default value
0
ADJ-Y
Adj of img pstn in book mode: horz scan
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the image reading start position in horizontal scanning
direction.
When the non-image width is larger than the standard value, set the
smaller value.
When out of original area is copied, set the larger value.
rear side by 0.1mm.
Use case
Caution
After the setting value is changed, write the changed value in the
service label.
-50 to 50
Unit
0.1mm
Default value
0
8-66

ADJ-Y-DF
Lv.1 Details
Adj img pstn in DADF mode:horz scan[Frt]

To adjust the image reading start position in horizontal scanning
direction at DADF reading.
rear side by 0.1mm.
Use case
Caution
service label.
-50 to 50
Unit
0.1mm
Default value
0
STRD-POS
Adj read pstn in DADF mode: front side
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the reading position at DADF reading (front side).
Use case
Caution
service label.
-100 to 100
Unit
0.1mm
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> STRD-POS
ADJ-X-MG
Adj img ratio in book mod:vert scan[frt]
Lv.1 Details
To make a fine adjustment of image magnification in vertical
scanning direction at copyboard reading.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image magnification changes
by 0.01%.
+: Enlarge
-: Reduce
Use case
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and
press OK key.
Caution
service label.
-50 to 50
Unit
0.01%
Default value
0
8-67
ADJY-DF2
Lv.1 Details
Adj img pstn in DADF mode:horz scan[bck]

To adjust the image position of back side in horizontal scanning
direction at simultaneous duplex reading.
rear side by 0.1mm.
Use case
Caution
service label.
-50 to 50
Unit
0.1mm
Default value
0
ADJ-Y-MG
Fine adj img ratio:book, horz scan [frt]
Lv.1 Details
To make a fine adjustment of image magnification ratio in horizontal
scanning direction at copyboard reading.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image magnification ratio
changes by 0.1%.
+: Enlarge
-: Reduce
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
service label.
-10 to 10
Unit
0.1%
Default value
0
T-8-25
8-67
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CCD
CCD
8-68
COPIER > ADJUST > CCD

W-PLT-X
Lv.1 Details
White level data(X) entry of white plate

the value of service label. When replacing the Copyboard Glass,
enter the value of barcode label which is affixed on the glass.
Use case
When replacing the Copyboard Glass
Caution
7500 to 9999
Default value
8271
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-Y, W-PLT-Z
W-PLT-Y
White level data(Y) entry of white plate
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
service label.
7500 to 9999
Default value
8735
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Z
W-PLT-Z
White level data(Z) entry of white plate
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
service label.
7500 to 9999
Default value
9418
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Y
SH-TRGT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Shading target value (B&W) [Copyboard]

To set the B&W shading target value in copyboard reading mode.
When replacing the Scanner Unit
Caution
service label.
700 to 1400
Default value
1126
100-RG
Img Sensr RG color displace crrct VL:Frt
Lv.1 Details
To correct the color displacement (R and G lines) in vertical scanning
direction due to the Scanner Unit (paper front).
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
service label.
-256 to 256
Unit
0.001line
Default value
0
100-GB
Img Sensr GB color displace crrct VL:Frt
Lv.1 Details
To correct the color displacement (G and B lines) in vertical scanning
direction due to the Scanner Unit (paper front).
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
service label.
-256 to 256
Unit
0.001line
Default value
0
8-68
8-69

DFTAR-R
Lv.1 Details
Shading target value (R) [Front side]

When replacing the Reader Controller PCB, enter the value of
service label.
When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (paper front),
execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2 and
write the value which is automatically set in the service label.
Use case
When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (paper front)
700 to 1400
Default value
1159
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1, DF-WLVL2
DFTAR-G
Shading target value (G) [Front side]
Lv.1 Details
service label.
Use case
700 to 1400
Default value
1189
DFTAR-B
Shading target value (B) [Front side]
Lv.1 Details
service label.
Use case
700 to 1400
Default value
1209
MTF2-M1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-M2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-M3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-M4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-M5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF value 1 setting: horz scan [Front]

Setting value for MTF filter coefficient calculation.
Enter the value of service label on the Reader.
1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
20 to 85
50
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> MTF-CLC
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
8-69
8-70

MTF2-M6
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-M7
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-M8
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-M9
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value

20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
MTF value 1 setting: vert scan [Front]
20 to 85
50
MTF2-S2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S6
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value

20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
8-70
8-71

MTF2-S7
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S8
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S9
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
100DF2GB
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value

20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
Img Sensr GB color displace crrct VL:bck
To correct the color displacement (G and B lines) in vertical scanning
direction due to the Scanner Unit (paper back).
-256 to 256
0.001line
0
100DF2RG
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
DFCH2R2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DFCH2R10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DFCH2B2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Img Sensr RG color displace crrct VL:bck

To correct the color displacement (R and G lines) in vertical scanning
direction due to the Scanner Unit (paper back).
-256 to 256
0.001line
0
Complex chart No.2 data (R) [Front side]
To derive the front/back side linearity, set the Red data (for paper
front) of No.2 image in DADF complex chart.
1 to 2550
2000
Complex chart No.10 data(R) [Front side]
0 to 2550
0
Complex chart No.2 data (B) [Front side]
To derive the front/back side linearity, set the Blue data (for paper
1 to 2550
2000
8-71
8-72

DFCH2B10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DFCH2G2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DFCH2G10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
CCD-CHNG
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Complex chart No.10 data(B) [Front side]

0 to 2550
0
Complex chart No.2 data (G) [Front side]
To derive the front/back side linearity, set the Green data (for paper
1 to 2550
2000
Complex chart No.10 data(G) [Front side]
0 to 2550
0
Scanner Unit(ppr frt) rplce flag setting
To set the calculation mode of MTF filter coefficient that is used at
the replacement of Scanner Unit (paper front).
When replacing the Scanner Unit (paper front), enter 1. When
replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the
value of service label.
When replacing the Scanner Unit (paper front)
0 to 1
0: Data at factory shipment is used.
1: Data at factory shipment is not used. (Scanner Unit (paper front) is
already replaced.)
0
MTF-M1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-M2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-M3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-M4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-M5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF value 1 setting: horz scan [Back]

20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
8-72
8-73

MTF-M6
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-M7
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-M8
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-M9
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-S1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value

20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
MTF value 1 setting: vert scan [Back]
20 to 85
50
MTF-S2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-S3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-S4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-S5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-S6
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value

20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
8-73

MTF-S7
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-S8
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-S9
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DFCH-R2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value

20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
Complex chart No.2 data (R) [Back side]
back) of No.2 image in DADF complex chart.
1 to 2550
2000
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R10, DFCH-B2, DFCH-B10,
DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-LNR
8-74
DFCH-R10
Lv.1 Details
Complex chart No.10 data (R) [Back side]

Use case
0 to 2550
Default value
0
DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10
DFCH-B2
Complex chart No.2 data (B) [Back side]
Lv.1 Details
Use case
1 to 2550
Default value
2000
DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10
DFCH-B10
Complex chart No.10 data (B) [Back side]
Lv.1 Details
Use case
0 to 2550
Default value
0
DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10
8-74
8-75

DFCH-G2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DFCH-G10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-M10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-M11
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Complex chart No.2 data (G) [Back side]

1 to 2550
2000
DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10
Complex chart No.10 data (G) [Back side]
0 to 2550
0
DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
MTF2-M12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S11
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF2-S12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-M10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value

20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
8-75
8-76

MTF-M11
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-M12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-S10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-S11
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
MTF-S12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value

20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
20 to 85
50
DFCH2K2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DFCH2K10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DFCH-K2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DFCH-K10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Complex chart No.2 data (B&W) [Front]

To derive the front/back side linearity, set the B&W data (for paper
1 to 2550
2000
Complex chart No.10 data (B&W) [Front]
0 to 2550
0
Complex chart No.2 data (B&W) [Back]
1 to 2550
2000
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R2, DFCH-R10, DFCH-B2,
DFCH-B10, DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10, DFCH-K10
Complex chart No.10 data (B&W) [Back]
0 to 2550
0
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R2, DFCH-R10, DFCH-B2,
DFCH-B10, DFCH-G2, DFCH-G10, DFCH-K2
8-76

DFTAR-BW
Lv.1 Details
8-77
Shading target value (B&W) [Front side]

service label.
Use case
700 to 1400
Default value
1209
DFTBK-G
Shading target value (G) [Back side]
Lv.1 Details
service label.
When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (paper back),
Use case
When replacing the Scanner Unit (paper back)
700 to 1400
Default value
1136
DFTBK-B
Shading target value (B) [Back side]
Lv.1 Details
service label.
Use case
700 to 1400
Default value
1126
DFTBK-R
Lv.1 Details
Shading target value (R) [Back side]

service label.
Use case
700 to 1400
Default value
1156
CCD-CHG2
Scanner Unit(paper back) rplce flag set
Lv.1 Details
To set the calculation mode of MTF filter coefficient that is used at
the replacement of Scanner Unit (paper back).
When replacing the Scanner Unit (paper back), enter 1. When
replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the
Use case
0 to 1
0: Data at factory shipment is used.
1: Data at factory shipment is not used. (Scanner Unit (paper back)
is already replaced.)
Default value
0
DFTBK-BW
Shading target value (B&W) [Back side]
Lv.1 Details
service label.
Use case
When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit (paper back)
700 to 1400
Default value
1126
T-8-26
8-77
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG
LASER
8-78
IMG-REG
COPIER > ADJUST > LASER
COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG
PVE-OFST
Lv.1 Details
Adj of write start position of laser

To adjust the image position by changing the laser emitting position.
When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data, enter the
As the value is incremented by 1, the image moves by 0.1mm.
+: Toward rear
-: Toward front
Use case
When adjusting image position
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and
press OK key.
Caution
Use this only when replacing the DC Controller PCB/Laser Scanner
Unit. When adjusting the image write start position, use COPIER>
ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> ADJ-C1/C2/C3/C4/MF/DK. If it is not
sufficient enough, execute mechanical adjustment.
-300 to 300
Unit
0.1mm
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> ADJ-C1, ADJ-C2, ADJ-C3,
ADJ-C4, ADJ-MF, ADJ-DK
POWER
Adj laser power at no potential control
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the laser power when the potential control is not performed.
0 to 255
COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> PO-CNT
COPIER> OPTION> TEMPO> F-POT-SW
T-8-27
MAG-H-K
Lv.1 Details
Fine adj of magnification: horz scan

To make a fine adjustment of image magnification in horizontal
scanning direction by adjusting the rotation speed of the Polygon
Mirror/modulating clock.
Convert the magnification measurement line length of PG for image
position adjustment into a percentage, and enter the amount of
change in percentage.
by 0.01%.
+: Enlarge
-: Reduce
Use case
When checking image at initial installation
At check operation when replacing the Laser Scanner Unit
When adjustment is requested by a user
press OK key.
Caution
-100 to 100
Unit
0.01%
Default value
0
MAG-V
Fine adj of magnification: vertical scan
Lv.1 Details
To make a fine adjustment of image magnification in vertical
scanning direction by adjusting the rotation speed of the Polygon
Mirror/modulating clock.
Convert the magnification measurement line length of PG for image
position adjustment into a percentage, and enter the amount of
change in percentage.
by 0.01%.
+: Enlarge
-: Reduce
The setting value is reflected to the rotation speed of the Polygon
Mirror set to the DC Controller at the time of shipment.
Use case
When checking image at initial installation
At check operation when replacing the Laser Scanner Unit
When adjustment is requested by a user
press OK key.
Caution
-100 to 100
Unit
0.01%
Default value
0
T-8-28
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > IMG-REG
8-78
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS
DEVELOP
8-79
DENS
COPIER > ADJUST > DEVELOP
COPIER > ADJUST > DENS
BIAS
Lv.1 Details
Adjustment of developing bias

To adjust the developing bias when the potential control is not
performed.
Use case
When potential control is not performed
0 to 600
Default value
180
TSPLYADJ
[Not used]
DENS-ADJ
Lv.1 Details
T-8-29
Density correction of copy image

To correct the density of copy image by changing the F-value table.
Blurring is alleviated when the value is increased, and fogging is
alleviated when the value is decreased.
Use case
When fogging or blurring at high density area occurs with a copy
image
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Caution
Density of printer output image cannot be corrected.
1 to 9
Default value
5
Supplement/memo
F-value table: shows the relationship between original density and
image density.
T-8-30
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS
8-79
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT
BLANK
V-CONT
COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK
BLANK-T
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
BLANK-L
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
BLANK-R
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
BLANK-B
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
8-80
COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT
Adjustment of leading edge margin

To adjust the margin on the leading edge of paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin is increased toward the
center of the paper by 1 pixel (0.0212 mm).
When reducing the margin upon users request
When enlarging the margin for transfer separation/fixing separation
Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
0 to 1000
1pixel
118
Adjustment of left edge margin
To adjust the margin on the left edge of paper.
0 to 1000
1pixel
118
Adjustment of right edge margin
To adjust the margin on the right edge of paper.
0 to 1000
1pixel
118
Adjustment of trailing edge margin
To adjust the margin on the trailing edge of paper.
0 to 1000
1pixel
118
EPOTOFST
Lv.1 Details
Manual entry of Potential Sensor offset

To set the offset auto adjustment value of Potential Sensor manually.
As the value is incremented by 1, the offset value changes by 1V.
+: Identified as the lower potential than the detected one
-: Identified as the higher potential than the detected one
Use case
When an error is displayed by executing OFST (auto offset
adjustment) at the replacement of Potential Sensor (When the value
out of specified range is set due to Potential Sensor disconnection/
connection failure/installation failure), restore to the factory setting
values.
1) To stop the error, set 0 (V) in EPOTOFST.
2) Check around the Potential Sensor.
If there is an error, address it and if not, go to the step 3).
3) Enter the value of service label.
4) If image fogging or the like occurs, increase the value by 10V
increment.
Caution
0 to 255
Unit
1V
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> DPC> OFST
VL-OFST
Bright area tgt potential ofst VL entry
Lv.1 Details
To set the offset auto adjustment value of bright area target potential
VL manually.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
When replacing the DC Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Caution
-30 to 30
Unit
1V
Default value
0
T-8-31
8-80

VD-OFST
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Unit
Default value
DE-OFST
Lv.1 Details
Unit
Default value
VCONT-1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
VL-OF-L
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
VL-OF-H1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Dark area tgt potential ofst VL entry

To set the offset auto adjustment value of dark area target potential
VL manually.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
-30 to 30
1V
0
Copy image Vdc offset value entry
To set the Vdc offset auto adjustment value for potential control of
copy image manually.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
-50 to 50
1V
0
Dev contrast crrct potntl:first time/day
To make a fine adjustment of correction potential of developing
contrast target potential Vcont for the first time of the day.
When image density for the first time of the day is low
0 to 10
1V
0
Bright area target potential:thin
To make a fine adjustment of bright area target potential VL with thin
paper.
When an image density failure occurs with thin paper
-200 to 200
1V
20
Fine adj bright area target potntl:hvy 1
To make a fine adjustment of bright area target potential VL with
heavy paper 1.
When an image density failure occurs with heavy paper 1
-200 to 200
1V
20
8-81
VL-OF-H2
Lv.2 Details
Fine adj bright area target potntl:hvy 2

To make a fine adjustment of bright area target potential VL with
heavy paper 2.
Use case
When an image density failure occurs with heavy paper 2
-200 to 200
Unit
1V
Default value
20
SMR-IPRV
Smeared image control batch settings
Lv.2 Details
To set the service modes necessary for smeared image control (toner
scattering) collectively.
When 1 is set, offset value of each service mode is set, so that
adjustment cannot be made individually.
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> P-TR-OF1 (Environment: 4, feed
mode: 7, offset value of pre-transfer charging current: -10)
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VL-OFST (Offset value of bright
area target potential: 30)
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VD-OFST (Offset value of dark
area target potential: -30)
When 0 is set, each offset value returns to 0 (default), so that
adjustment can be made individually.
Use case
When a smeared image occurs
3) Execute auto gradation adjustment.
Caution
When 1 is set, the following service modes cannot be adjusted
individually.
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> P-TR-OF1
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VL-OFST, VD-OFST
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> VL-OFST, VD-OFST
T-8-32
8-81
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI
PASCAL
8-82
HV-PRI
COPIER > ADJUST > PASCAL
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI
OFST-P-K
Lv.1 Details
Bk density adj at test print reading

To adjust the offset of Bk color test print reading signal at Auto Adjust
Gradation (Full Adjust).
As the greater value is set, the image after adjustment gets darker.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
service label.
-128 to 128
Default value
According to the adjustment value of the Reader at factory shipment
T-8-33
PRIMARY
Lv.1 Details
Adjustment of primary charging current

To adjust the primary charging current flows to the Primary Charging
Assembly when potential control is OFF.
When potential control is turned OFF, the specified primary charging
current is output.
Use case
When outputting image while potential control is OFF
When changing the primary charging current and then checking
the high voltage output
press OK key.
Caution
0 to 1600
Unit
1uA
Default value
1000
PRI-GRID
Adjustment of Pry Chg Assy grid bias
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the grid voltage of the Primary Charging Assembly at
potential control.
Adjust the offset value for the voltage table that changes according
to the durability.
When an image failure occurs due to the soiled Primary Charging
Wire, set a negative value.
If the value in COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> PRIM-C is 1550 (micro
A) or higher when E061-0101 (potential control error) occurs, set a
positive value.
Use case
When an image failure occurs due to the soiled Primary Charging
Wire
When E061-0101 occurs
press OK key.
-50 to 220
Unit
1V
Default value
0
COPIER> DISPLAY> DPOT> PRIM-C
T-8-34
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-PRI
8-82
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR
HV-TR
8-83
COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR

TR-OFS1
Lv.2 Details
Adj transfer target current offset:Plain

To adjust the offset value of the target current of the Transfer Roller
for plain paper.
Set the environment (temperature and humidity), feed mode, and
Transfer Roller target current offset value in the order from left.
When the actual usage status matches to the specified environment
and feed mode, the specified offset value is added to the Transfer
Roller target current.
Use case
When transfer failure occurs
Environment: 0 to 4
0: No specification, 1: Environment 1and 2, 2: Environment 3 to 5, 3:
Environment 6 and 7, 4: All environments
TR-OFS2
Lv.2 Details
Adj transfer tgt current offset:Heavy 1

for heavy paper 1.
Use case
Environment: 0 to 4
Feed mode: 0 to 7
0: No specification, 1: Cassette/3.5K deck 1-sided, 2: Cassette/3.5K
deck 2-sided, 3: Multi-purpose Tray 1-sided, 4: Multi-purpose Tray
2-sided, 5: Large deck 1-sided (only POD Deck Lite), 6: Large deck
2-sided (only POD Deck Lite), 7: All modes
Feed mode: 0 to 7
Unit
Default value
Transfer Roller target current offset value: -10 to 10

5uA
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-OFS2-6
Unit
Default value

5uA
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-OFS1, 3-8
8-83
8-84
TR-OFS3
Lv.2 Details
Adj transfer tgt current offset:Heavy 2

for heavy paper 2.
Use case
Environment: 0 to 4
TR-OFS4
Lv.2 Details
Adj transfer tgt current offset: Thin

for thin paper.
Use case
Environment: 0 to 4
Feed mode: 0 to 7
Unit
Default value

5uA
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-OFS1, 2, 4-6
Feed mode: 0 to 7
Unit
Default value

5uA
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-OFS1-3, 5-6
8-84
8-85
TR-OFS5
Lv.2 Details
Adj transfer tgt current offset:Special1

for special paper 1.
When the actual usage status matches to the environment and feed
speed set in this item and the paper type (special paper 1) set in TRSP1, the specified offset value is added to the Transfer Roller target
current.
Use case
Environment: 0 to 4
TR-OFS6
Lv.2 Details
Adj transfer tgt current offset:Special2

for special paper 2.
speed set in this item and the paper type (special paper 2) set in TRSP2, the specified offset value is added to the Transfer Roller target
current.
Use case
Environment: 0 to 4
Feed mode: 0 to 7
Unit
Default value

5uA
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-OFS1-4, 6, TR-SP1
Feed mode: 0 to 7
5uA
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-OFS1-5, TR-SP2
Adj lead edge trns tgt crrnt ofst:Plain
To adjust the leading edge transfer target current and the offset value
of leading edge transfer bias output timing for plain paper.
Use case
When a drum separation failure occurs
Leading edge transfer target current offset value: -2 to 10
Offset value of leading edge transfer bias output timing: 0 to 20
Unit
5uA
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-L-OF2-6
Supplement/memo
1 mm
TR-L-OF2
Adj lead edge trns tgt crrnt ofst:Heavy1
Lv.2 Details
of leading edge transfer bias output timing for heavy paper 1.
Use case
Unit
5uA
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-L-OF1, 3-6
Supplement/memo
1 mm
Unit
Default value
TR-L-OF1
Lv.2 Details
8-85
8-86

TR-L-OF3
Lv.2 Details
Adj lead edge trns tgt crrnt ofst:Heavy2

of leading edge transfer bias output timing for heavy paper 2.
Use case
Unit
5uA
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-L-OF1, 2, 4-6
Supplement/memo
1 mm
TR-L-OF4
Adj lead edge trns tgt crrnt ofst: Thin
Lv.2 Details
of leading edge transfer bias output timing for thin paper.
Use case
Unit
5uA
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-L-OF1-3, 5-6
Supplement/memo
1 mm
TR-L-OF5
Adj lead edge trns tgt crrnt ofst:Spcl 1
Lv.2 Details
of leading edge transfer bias output timing for special paper 1.
When the paper type is the one (special paper 1) set in the TR-LSP1, the specified offset value is added to the leading edge transfer
target current and the leading edge transfer bias output timing.
Use case
Unit
5uA
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-L-OF1-4, 6, TR-L-SP1
Supplement/memo
1 mm
TR-L-OF6
Lv.2 Details
Adj lead edge trns tgt crrnt ofst:Spcl 2

of leading edge transfer bias output timing for special paper 2.
When the paper type is the one (special paper 2) set in the TR-LSP2, the specified offset value is added to the leading edge transfer
target current and the leading edge transfer bias output timing.
Use case
Unit
5uA
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-L-OF1-5, TR-L-SP2
Supplement/memo
1 mm
P-TR-OF1
Adj of pre-trn charge crrnt ofst: Plain
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the offset value of the pre-transfer charging current for
plain paper.
pre-transfer charging current offset value in the order from left.
and feed mode, the specified offset value is added to the pre-transfer
charging target current.
Use case
Environment: 0 to 4
Feed mode: 0 to 7
Unit
Default value
Pre-transfer charging current offset value: -10 to 10

10uA
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> P-TR-OF2-6
8-86
8-87
P-TR-OF2
Lv.2 Details
Adj of pre-trn charge crrnt ofst:Heavy1

heavy paper 1.
Use case
Environment: 0 to 4
P-TR-OF3
Lv.2 Details
Adj of pre-trn charge crrnt ofst:Heavy2

heavy paper 2.
Use case
Environment: 0 to 4
Feed mode: 0 to 7
Unit
Default value

10uA
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> P-TR-OF1, 3-6
Feed mode: 0 to 7
Unit
Default value

10uA
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> P-TR-OF1, 2, 4-6
8-87
8-88
P-TR-OF4
Lv.2 Details
Adj of pre-trn charge crrnt ofst: Thin

To adjust the offset value of the pre-transfer charging current for thin
paper.
Use case
Environment: 0 to 4
P-TR-OF5
Lv.2 Details
Feed mode: 0 to 7
Unit
Default value

10uA
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> P-TR-OF1-3, 5-6
Adj pre-trn charge crrnt ofst: Special 1

special paper 1.
speed set in this item and the paper type (special paper 1) set in
P-TR-SP1, the specified offset value is added to the pre-transfer
Use case
Environment: 0 to 4
Feed mode: 0 to 7
Unit
Default value

10uA
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> P-TR-OF1-4, 6, P-TR-SP1
8-88
P-TR-OF6
Lv.2 Details
Adj pre-trn charge crrnt ofst: Special 2

special paper 2.
speed set in this item and the paper type (special paper 2) set in
P-TR-SP2, the specified offset value is added to the pre-transfer
Use case
Environment: 0 to 4
Feed mode: 0 to 7
10uA
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> P-TR-OF1-5, P-TR-SP2
Set trns tgt crrnt adj: special paper 1
To set the paper type of special paper 1 which the offset value of the
target current of the Transfer Roller is adjusted.
When the actual usage status matches to the paper type set in this
item and the environment and feed mode set in TR-OFS5, the offset
value is added to the Transfer Roller target current.
Use case
0 to 10
0: No specification, 1: Transparency, 2: Postcard, 3: Tracing paper,
4: Bond paper, 5: Labels, 6: Recycled paper, 7: Color paper, 8:
Punched paper, 9: Tab paper, 10: Letterhead
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-OFS5
Unit
Default value
TR-SP1
Lv.2 Details
8-89
TR-SP2
Lv.2 Details
Set trns tgt crrnt adj: special paper 2

item and the environment and feed mode set in TR-OFS6, the offset
value is added to the Transfer Roller target current.
Use case
0 to 10
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-OFS6
TR-L-SP1
Set lead edge trns tgt crrnt adj: Spcl 1
Lv.2 Details
When the paper type is the specified one , the offset value set in TRL-OF5 is added to the leading edge transfer target current and the
leading edge transfer bias output timing.
Use case
0 to 10
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-L-OF5
TR-L-SP2
Set lead edge trns tgt crrnt adj: Spcl 2
Lv.2 Details
When the paper type is the specified one , the offset value set in TRL-OF6 is added to the leading edge transfer target current and the
leading edge transfer bias output timing.
Use case
0 to 10
Default value
0
COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> TR-L-OF6
8-89
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ

P-TR-SP1
Lv.2 Details
Set pre-trns charging crrnt adj: Spcl 1

pre-transfer charging current is adjusted.
item and the environment and feed mode set in P-TR-OF5, the offset
value is added to the pre-transfer charging current.
Use case
0 to 10
Default value
0
P-TR-SP2
Set pre-trns charging crrnt adj: Spcl 2
Lv.2 Details
pre-transfer charging current is adjusted.
item and the environment and feed mode set in P-TR-OF6, the offset
value is added to the pre-transfer charging current.
Use case
0 to 10
Default value
0
T-8-35
8-90
FEED-ADJ
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ
REGIST
Lv.1 Details
Adj of registration start timing: Plain

To adjust the timing to turn ON the Registration Motor in the case of
plain paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the leading edge of
paper is increased by 0.1 mm.
+: Top margin becomes smaller. (An image moves upward.)
-: Top margin becomes larger. (An image moves downward.)
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
0.1mm
Default value
0
ADJ-C1
Right Deck write start pstn in horz scan
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning
direction when feeding paper from the Right Deck.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin on the left edge of
+: Left margin becomes larger. (An image moves to the right.)
-: Left margin becomes smaller. (An image moves to the left.)
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
If write start position cannot be adjusted in service mode, execute
mechanical adjustment.
-20 to 20
Unit
0.1mm
Default value
0
8-90

ADJ-C2
Lv.1 Details
Left Deck write start pstn in horz scan

direction when feeding paper from the Left Deck.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-20 to 20
Unit
0.1mm
Default value
0
ADJ-C3
Cassette 3 write start pstn in horz scan
Lv.1 Details
direction when feeding paper from the Cassette 3.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-20 to 20
Unit
0.1mm
Default value
0
8-91
ADJ-C4
Lv.1 Details
Cassette 4 write start pstn in horz scan

direction when feeding paper from the Cassette 4.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-20 to 20
Unit
0.1mm
Default value
0
ADJ-MF
Write start pstn in horz scan: MP tray
Lv.1 Details
direction when feeding paper from the Multi-purpose Tray.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-20 to 20
Unit
0.1mm
Default value
0
8-91

ADJ-DK
Lv.1 Details
Write start pstn in horz scan:Deck/POD D

direction when feeding paper from the Paper Deck/ POD Deck Lite.
Use case
press OK key.
Caution
-20 to 20
Unit
0.1mm
Default value
0
ADJ-REFE
Write start pstn in horz scan: 2nd side
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the image write start position on the second side in the
horizontal scanning direction.
The image write start position is set in the relative amount against
the first side regardless of the paper pickup cassette/tray/deck.
Use case
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
0.1mm
Default value
0
RG-MF
Rgst start timing adj: MP Tray, Plain
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the top margin by changing the timing to turn ON the
Registration Motor when feeding plain paper from the Multi-purpose
Tray.
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
0.1mm
Default value
-20
8-92
REG-THCK
Lv.1 Details
Rgst start timing adj: Heavy, 1/2 speed

Registration Motor when feeding heavy paper.
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
0.1mm
Default value
-20
REG-OHT
Rgst start timing adj: Transp, 1/2 speed
Lv.1 Details
Registration Motor when feeding transparency.
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
0.1mm
Default value
-20
REG-DUP1
Rgst start timing adj: Plain, 2nd side
Lv.1 Details
Registration Motor when feeding the second side of plain paper.
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
0.1mm
Default value
-10
8-92

REG-DUP2
Lv.1 Details
Rgst start timing adj: Heavy, 2nd side

Registration Motor when feeding the second side of heavy paper.
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
0.1mm
Default value
-10
LP-FEED1
Cassette pre-rgst arch amount: Plain
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the arch amount before registration when feeding plain
paper from the cassette.
As the value is incremented by 1, the pre-registration arch amount
changes by 0.5 mm.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
0.5mm
Default value
0
LP-FEED2
Casstt pre-rgst arch amount:Heavy/Transp
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the arch amount before registration when feeding heavy
paper/transparency from the cassette.
changes by 0.5 mm.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
0.5mm
Default value
0
8-93
LP-MULT1
Lv.1 Details
MP Tray pre-rgst arch amount: Plain

paper from the Multi-purpose Tray.
changes by 0.5 mm.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
0.5mm
Default value
0
LP-MULT2
MP Tray pre-rgst arch amount:Heavy/Trans
Lv.1 Details
paper/transparency from the Multi-purpose Tray.
changes by 0.5 mm.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
0.5mm
Default value
0
LP-DUP1
Duplex pre-rgst arch amount: Plain
Lv.1 Details
paper in duplex mode.
changes by 0.5 mm.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
0.5mm
Default value
0
8-93
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ

LP-DUP2
Lv.1 Details
Duplex pre-rgst arch amount:Hvy/Transp

paper/transparency in duplex mode.
changes by 0.5 mm.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
press OK key.
-50 to 50
Unit
0.5mm
Default value
0
REG-SPD
Speed adj Registration Motor:1/1 speed
Lv.1 Details
To adjust 1/1 speed of the Registration Motor.
+: The speed is increased.
-: The speed is decreased.
Use case
At occurrence of an image failure
When the leading edge margin becomes larger due to wear of the
Registration Roller
press OK key.
-10 to 10
Default value
0
TBLT-SPD
Fine adjustment of ETB speed
Lv.1 Details
To make a fine adjustment of the ETB speed.
+: The speed is increased.
-: The speed is decreased.
When the speed is changed, image magnification in the vertical
scanning direction is changed.
Use case
When image magnification is changed due to replacement of ETB,
etc.
press OK key.
-200 to 200
Unit
0.1mm
Default value
0
8-94
CST-ADJ
COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ
MF-A4R
Lv.1 Details
Adj of MP Tray A4R paper width

To adjust the width of A4R paper in the Multi-purpose Tray.
When replacing the Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection PCB
or registering a new value, execute COPIER> FUNCTION> CST>
A4R.
Use case
When replacing the Multi-purpose Tray Paper Width Detection
PCB or registering a new value
Caution
service label.
0 to 255
COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A4R
MF-A6R
Adj of MP Tray A6R paper width
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the width of A6R paper in the Multi-purpose Tray.
A6R.
Use case
Caution
service label.
0 to 255
COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A6R
T-8-36
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ
8-94
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > MISC
COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ

MF-A4
Lv.1 Details
Adj of MP Tray A4 paper width

To adjust the width of A4 paper in the Multi-purpose Tray.
A4.
Use case
Caution
service label.
0 to 255
COPIER> FUNCTION> CST> A4
T-8-37
8-95
MISC
COPIER > ADJUST > MISC
SEG-ADJ
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
K-ADJ
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
ACS-ADJ
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
ACS-EN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Set criteria for text/photo: front side

To set the judgment level of text/photo original in Text/Photo/Map
mode.
As the value is increased, the original tends to be detected as a
photo document, and as the value is decreased, the original tends to
be detected as a text document.
When adjusting the classification level of text and photo in Text/
Photo/Map mode
1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and
press OK key.
-4 to 4
0
Set criteria for black text: front side
To set the judgment level of black characters at text processing.
As the value is increased, the text tends to be detected as black.
When preferring the text to be judged as black
press OK key.
-3 to 3
0
Set criteria for B&W/color in ACS:front
To set the judgment level of B&W/color original in ACS mode.
B&W document, and as the value is decreased, the original tends to
be detected as a color document.
When adjusting the color detection level in ACS mode
press OK key.
-3 to 3
0
Set judgment area in ACS mode:front side
To set the judgment area in ACS mode.
As the greater value is set, the judgment area is widened.
When adjusting the judgment area in ACS mode
press OK key.
-2 to 2
1
8-95

ACS-CNT
Lv.2 Details
Set jdgmt pixel count area in ACS:front

To set the area which counts the pixel to judge the color presence in
ACS mode.
Use case
When adjusting the area which counts the pixel to judge the color
presence in ACS mode
press OK key.
-2 to 2
Default value
0
ACS-EN2
Set ACS mode jdgmt area in DADF mode
Lv.2 Details
To set the judgment area in ACS mode at DADF reading.
Use case
When adjusting the judgment area in ACS mode at DADF reading
press OK key.
-2 to 2
Default value
1
ACS-CNT2
Set ACS jdgmt pixel count area in DADF
Lv.2 Details
ACS mode at DADF reading.
Use case
presence in ACS mode at DADF reading
press OK key.
-2 to 2
Default value
0
8-96
WT-FL-LM
Lv.1 Details
Set of waste toner full dspl timing

If the user sets the darker/lighter copy density than the normal
density, the toner level to be consumed is increased/decreased. As
a result, the number of images to be printed until the Waste Toner
Container becomes full varies.
According to the usage of the user, set the number of images
(calculation with A4 and 5% image duty) until the full toner message
is displayed.
Set -2 if the setting is dark, but set -1 according to circumstances.
Set 2 if the setting is light, but set 1 according to circumstances.
Use case
When adjusting the full toner display timing according to the usage of
the user
press OK key.
-2 to 2
-2: 300,000 (A4, 5% image duty), -1: 400,000, 0: 500,000, 1:
600,000, 2: 700,000
Default value
0
SEG-ADJ3
Set text/photo jdgmt stdrd: back side
Lv.1 Details
To set the judgment level of text/photo original in Text/Photo/Map
mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path).
photo document, and as the value is decreased, the original tends to
be detected as a text document.
Use case
When adjusting the classification level of text and photo in Text/
Photo/Map mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path)
press OK key.
-4 to 4
Default value
0
K-ADJ3
Set Bk text jdgmt stdrd: back side
Lv.1 Details
To set the judgment level of black characters at text processing (back
side at duplex reading with 1 path).
As the value is increased, the text tends to be detected as black.
Use case
When preferring the text to be judged as black (back side at duplex
reading with 1 path)
press OK key.
-3 to 3
Default value
0
8-96

ACS-ADJ3
Lv.1 Details
8-97
Set ACS B&W/color jdgmt stdrd:back side

To set the judgment level of B&W/color original in ACS mode (back
side at duplex reading with 1 path).
B&W document, and as the value is decreased, the original tends to
be detected as a color document.
Use case
When adjusting the color detection level in ACS mode (back side at
duplex reading with 1 path)
press OK key.
-3 to 3
Default value
0
ACS-EN3
Set of ACS mode jdgmt area: back side
Lv.2 Details
To set the judgment area in ACS mode (back side at duplex reading
with 1 path).
Use case
When adjusting the judgment area in ACS mode (back side at duplex
reading with 1 path)
press OK key.
-2 to 2
Default value
1
ACS-CNT3
ACS mode jdgmt pixel count area: back
Lv.2 Details
ACS mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path).
As the greater value is set, the judgment area is widen.
Use case
presence in ACS mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path)
press OK key.
-2 to 2
Default value
0
TBSIS-WB
Lv.2 Details
Setting of blank band ejection time

To set the blank band ejection time.
As the value is incremented by 1, the ejection time changes by 0.1
second.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
Use case
When an image failure (streaks of uneven density) occurs
press OK key.
Caution
When a positive value is set, the ejection time increases.
-2 to 2
Unit
0.1sec
Default value
0
DCON-V
Fine adj DC Controller reference voltage
Lv.2 Details
To make a fine adjustment of the reference voltage of CPU drive
voltage (3.3V) on the DC Controller PCB.
Use case
When the reference voltage is deviated from the center value (3.41 V)
significantly
press OK key.
Caution
Because it affects the scanning values of the Potential Sensor and
Patch Sensor, image density may vary.
-14 to 14
Unit
0.01V
Default value
0
HP-OFST
Setting of 2D shading drum HP offset
Lv.1 Details
To set the home position of Photosensitive Drum in the vertical
scanning direction at 2D shading.
As the value is incremented by 1, the home position moves by 10
mm.
Use case
When adjusting the home position of the Photosensitive Drum at the
replacement of the drum
press OK key.
-5 to 5
Unit
10mm
Default value
0
T-8-38
8-97
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED
8-98
EXP-LED
COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED
PR-EXP
Lv.2 Details
Setting of Pre-exposure LED current

To set the current of the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED.
Increase the value when taking a measure for drum ghost.
Decrease the value when potential is not applied well.
Use case
When drum ghost is significant (drum pitch is not correct)
When potential is not applied well
Caution
110 to 233
Unit
0.4uA
Default value
181
T-8-39
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED
8-98
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL
FUNCTION
8-99
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL
CARD
Lv.1 Details
INSTALL
TONER-S
Lv.1 Details
Toner supply to Developing Assembly

To execute a series of operation necessary for supplying toner to
the Developing Assembly/Toner Supply area (drive the Developing
Cylinder, Toner Stirring/Feed Member, Photosensitive Drum and
ETB, and output developing bias) as a whole.
After counting down from 600 seconds., it is stopped automatically.
Use case
At installation
When replacing the Developing Assembly
When replacing toner in the Developing Assembly
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the items.
Check the Developer is displayed.
2) Check connection, and then press OK key.
It automatically stops after 10 minutes.
Caution
Although Check the Developer is displayed when selecting the
item, be sure to check the connection between the Developing
Assembly and connector.
The operation can stop manually with OK key when a failure
occurs.
During operation: xxx second (remaining time), When operation
finished normally: END
Default value
600
STRD-POS
Scan position auto adj in DADF mode
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the DADF scanning position automatically.
Use case
At DADF installation/uninstallation
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set a paper for stream reading position adjustment, and then
close the DADF.
2) Select the item, and then press OK key.
The operation automatically stops after the adjustment.
3) Write the value displayed by COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>STRDPOS in the service label.
Caution
Write the adjusted value in the service label.
At normal termination: OK, At abnormal termination: NG
COPIER> ADJUST> ADJ-XY> STRD-POS
Supplement/memo
For the details of paper for stream reading position adjustment, refer
to the Service Manual.
Card number setting

To set the card number to be used for Card Reader.
A series of numbers from the entered number to the number of cards
specified by CARD-RNG can be used.
Use case
At installation of the Card Reader
After replacement of the HDD
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the number, and then press OK key.
Caution
The card management information (department ID and password) is
initialized.
1 to 2001
Default value
1
COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CARD-RNG
E-RDS
Set use/no use of Embedded-RDS function
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to use the Embedded-RDS function.
Use case
When using Embedded-RDS
Caution
Be sure to use E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COM-LOG and
RGW-ADR as a set.
0 to 1
0: Not used, 1: Used (All the counter information is sent.)
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> RGW-PORT, COM-TEST, COMLOG, RGW-ADR
Supplement/memo
Embedded-RDS: Function to send device information such as the
device counter, failure, and consumables to the sales companys
server via SOAP protocol
RGW-PORT
Set port number of Sales Cos server
Lv.1 Details
To set the port number of the sales companys server to be used for
Embedded-RDS.
Use case
Caution
RGW-ADR as a set.
1 to 65535
Default value
443
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, COM-TEST, COM-LOG,
RGW-ADR
Supplement/memo
8-99

COM-TEST
Lv.1 Details
Dspl connect result w/ Sales Cos server

To display the result of the connection test with the sales companys
server.
Use case
Adj/set/operate method Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution
RGW-ADR as a set.
During operation: ACTIVE, When connection is completed: OK,
When connection is failed: NG
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-LOG,
RGW-ADR
Supplement/memo
COM-LOG
Dspl connect error w/ Sales Cos server
Lv.1 Details
To display error information when the connection with the sales
companys server failed.
Use case
Adj/set/operate method Display only
Caution
RGW-ADR as a set.
Year, date, time, error code, error detail information (maximum 128
characters)
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST,
RGW-ADR
Supplement/memo
RGW-ADR
URL setting of Sales Companys server
Lv.1 Details
To set the URL of the sales companys server to be used for
Embedded-RDS.
Use case
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the URL.
2) Enter the URL, and then press OK key.
Caution
Do not use Shift-JIS character strings.
RGW-ADR as a set.
URL
Default value
https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, COM-TEST,
COM-LOG
Supplement/memo
8-100
CNT-DATE
Lv.1 Details
Set counter send start date to SC server

To set the year, month, date, hour and minute to send counter
information to the sales companys server.
This is displayed only when the Embedded-RDS third-party extended
function is available.
Use case
When the Embedded-RDS third-party expanded function is available
YYYYMMDDHHMM (12 digits)
YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date, HH: Hour, MM: Minute
Default value
000000000000
Supplement/memo
CNT-INTV
Set counter send interval to SC server
Lv.1 Details
To set the interval of sending counter information to the sales
companys server in a unit of one hour.
This is displayed only when the Embedded-RDS third-party extended
function is available.
Use case
When restarting potential control after execution of COPIER>
OPTION> IMG-FIX> PO-CNT
When the D-max control condition is changed
1 to 168 (=1 week)
Default value
24
Supplement/memo
8-100

BRWS-ACT
Lv.1 Details
ON/OFF of service browser

To set ON/OFF of service browser.
ON/OFF of service browser switches whenever the main power
switch is turned OFF/ON after execution.
If connection with the UGW server is successful, OK! is displayed.
If NG! is displayed, execute a communication test using COMTEST.
The setting is enabled after reboot. Whether the service browser is
ON or OFF can be checked in COPIER> DISPLAY> USER> BRWSSTS (1: ON, 2: OFF).
Use case
When using the service browser
At operation check
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution
After execution, turn OFF/ON the main power switch. After reboot,
be sure to check the usage status in COPIER> DISPLAY> USER>
BRWS-STS.
At normal termination: OK!, At abnormal termination: NG!
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> COM-TEST
COPIER> DISPLAY> USER> BRWS-STS
CDS-CTL
Set country/area when using CDS
Lv.1 Details
To set country/area to enable CDS.
Use case
When enabling CDS
Country/area set in COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CONFIG, CA
(Canada), LA (Latin America) and HK (Hong Kong)
Default value
It differs according to the location.
COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> CONFIG
Supplement/memo
CDS: Contents Delivery System
DRM-INIT
Initialization of Photosensitive Drum
Lv.1 Details
To initialize Photosensitive Drum.
Clear drum counter (PT-DRM), Drum Lot number, and checksum
stored in the DC Controller.
Use case
After replacement of the Photosensitive Drum
During operation: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal
termination: NG
COPIER> COUNTER> LF> K-DRM-LF
HD-CRYP
Initial install of HDD Encryption Board
Lv.1 Details
To execute operation necessary for initial installation of the HDD
Encryption Board.
After executing the necessary operation and then turning OFF the
main power switch, install the HDD Encryption Board.
Use case
At installation of the HDD Encryption Board
Caution
Be sure to execute this item before installing the HDD Encryption
Board.
During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
8-101
BIT-SVC
Lv.1 Details
OFF/ON of Web service of E-RDS

To set ON/OFF of Web service function of E-RDS.
When OFF is selected, authentication information cannot be
obtained from E-RDS.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
1
T-8-40
8-101
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD
CCD
8-102
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD
COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD

DF-WLVL1
Lv.1 Details
White level adj in book mode: color

To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by
setting the paper which is usually used by the user on the Copyboard
Glass.
Use case
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set paper on the Copyboard Glass.
Caution
Be sure to execute DF-WLVL2 in a row.
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL2
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTBK-R, DFTBK-G, DFTBK-B
DF-WLVL2
White level adj in DADF mode: color
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the white level for DADF scanning automatically by setting
the paper which is usually used by the user on the DADF.
Use case
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set paper on the DADF.
Caution
Be sure to execute this item after DF-WLVL1.
COPIER> FUNCTION> CCD> DF-WLVL1
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTAR-R, DFTAR-G, DFTAR-B,
DFTAR2-R, DFTAR2-G, DFTAR2-B, DFTAR-BW, DFTAR2BW,
DFTBK-R, DFTBK-G, DFTBK-B
DF-LNR
Deriving of DADF front/back linearity
Lv.1 Details
To derive the front/back side linearity characteristics in the use of
DADF based on the scanning data of the DADF complex chart (No. 2,
No. 10).
Use case
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the value of the readers service label. (under COPIER>
ADJUST> CCD)
DFCH-R2, DFCH-G2, DFCH-B2, DFCH-K2,
DFCH-R10, DFCH-G10, DFCH-B10, DFCH-K10,
DFCH2R2, DFCH2G2, DFCH2B2, DFCH2K2,
DFCH2R10, DFCH2G10, DFCH2B10, DFCH2K10
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R2, DFCH-G2, DFCH-B2,
DFCH-K2, DFCH-R10, DFCH-G10, DFCH-B10, DFCH-K10,
DFCH2R2, DFCH2G2, DFCH2B2, DFCH2K2, DFCH2R10,
DFCH2G10, DFCH2B10, DFCH2K10
MTF-CLC
Lv.1 Details
Deriving of MTF filter coefficient

To derive the MTF filter coefficient to be set for ASIC based on the
MTF value of the DADF complex chart.
Use case
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF-M1-M12, MTF-S1-S12, MTF2M1-M12, MTF2-S1-S12
Supplement/memo
The scanning data of the DADF complex chart is indicated in the
label of the Scanner Unit (DADF/Reader).
DF-WLVL3
White level adj in book mode (B&W)
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by
setting the paper which is usually used by the user on the Copyboard
Glass.
Use case
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set paper on the Copyboard Glass.
Caution
Be sure to execute DF-WLVL4 in a row.
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTBK-BW
DF-WLVL4
White level adj in DADF mode (B&W)
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the white level for DADF scanning automatically by setting
the paper which is usually used by the user on the DADF.
Use case
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set paper on the DADF.
Caution
Be sure to execute this item after DF-WLVL3.
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTAR-R, DFTAR-G, DFTAR-B,
DFTAR2-R, DFTAR2-G, DFTAR2-B, DFTBK-BW
BW-TGT
Set of B&W shading target value
Lv.1 Details
After the white level data (X/Y/Z) for the Standard White Plate is set,
read the Standard White Plate and set the black and white shading
target value.
Use case
When replacing the Copyboard Glass/Scanner Unit
Caution
Be sure to execute this item after execution of COPIER> ADJUST>
CCD> W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Y, W-PLT-Z.
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> W-PLT-X, W-PLT-Y, W-PLT-Z
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD
T-8-41
8-102
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CST
DPC
8-103
CST
COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC
COPIER > FUNCTION > CST
DPC
Lv.1 Details
Execution of potential control

To execute potential control for the Photosensitive Drum manually. (It
is usually executed automatically.)
Use case
When checking potential control operation
OFST
Potential adjustment of Potential Sensor
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the detection potential offset value of the Potential Sensor
automatically.
Use case
When replacing the Potential Sensor
At diagnosis for a failure of the Potential Sensor
Caution
An error is displayed when disconnection/connection failure/
installation failure occurs to the Potential Sensor at the time of
replacement. In this case, manually set the value to 0 by EPOTOFST
and then make an adjustment.
COPIER> ADJUST> V-CONT> EPOTOFST
T-8-42
C3-STMTR
Lv.1 Details
Reg Cassette 3 STMTR stdrd width

To register the standard value of STMTR paper width (139.5mm) on
the Cassette 3.
Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> C3STMTR.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set STMTR paper on the Cassette 3, and set the guide so that it
fits the paper width.
The value is registered after automatic adjustment.
Caution
After execution, check the registered value by COPIER> ADJUST>
CST-ADJ> C3-STMTR, and write it down on the service label.
COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> C3-STMTR
C3-A4R
Reg Cassette 3 A4R stdrd width
Lv.1 Details
To register the standard value of A4R paper width (210 mm) on the
Cassette 3.
Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> C3-A4R.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set A4R paper on the Cassette 3, and set the guide so that it fits
the paper width.
Caution
CST-ADJ> C3-A4R, and write it down on the service label.
COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> C3-A4R
C4-STMTR
Reg Cassette 4 STMTR stdrd width
Lv.1 Details
To register the standard value of STMTR paper width (139.5 mm) on
the Cassette 4.
Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> C4STMTR.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set STMTR paper on the Cassette 4, and set the guide so that it
fits the paper width.
Caution
CST-ADJ> C4-STMTR, and write it down on the service label.
COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> C4-STMTR
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CST
8-103
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING
COPIER > FUNCTION > CST

C4-A4R
Lv.1 Details
Caution
MF-A4R
Lv.1 Details
Caution
MF-A6R
Lv.1 Details
Caution
MF-A4
Lv.1 Details
Caution
Reg Cassette 4 A4R stdrd width

Cassette 4.
Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> C4-A4R.
1) Set A4R paper on the Cassette 4, and set the guide so that it fits
the paper width.
CST-ADJ> C4-A4R, and write it down on the service label.
COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> C4-A4R
Reg Multi-purpose Tray A4R stdrd width
To register the standard value of A4R paper width (210mm) on the
Multi-purpose Tray.
Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4R.
1) Set A4R paper on the Multi-purpose Tray, and set the guide so
that it fits the paper width.
CST-ADJ> MF-A4R, and write it down on the service label.
COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4R
Reg Multi-purpose Tray A6R stdrd width
Multi-purpose Tray.
Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A6R.
1) Set A6R paper on the Multi-purpose Tray, and set the guide so
that it fits the paper width.
CST-ADJ> MF-A6R, and write it down on the service label.
COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A6R
Reg Multi-purpose Tray A4 standard width
To register the standard value of A4 paper width (297 mm) on the
Multi-purpose Tray.
Make a fine adjustment by COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4.
1) Set A4 paper on the Multi-purpose Tray, and set the guide so that
it fits the paper width.
CST-ADJ> MF-A4, and write it down on the service label.
COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4
8-104
CLEANING
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING
TBLT-CLN
Lv.1 Details
ETB cleaning
To execute three idle rotations of the ETB and clean the ETB.
Disengage the Photosensitive Drum and Transfer Roller from the
ETB.
Use case
When ETB cleaning failure/stain on the back of paper occurs
WIRE-CLN
Cleaning of all Charging Wires
Lv.1 Details
To clean the Charging Wires of Primary Charging Assembly and Pretransfer Charging Assembly simultaneously (5-reciprocation).
Polish new Charging Wires to remove foreign matters or protrusions.
Use case
When replacing the Primary Charging Assembly/Pre-transfer
Charging Assembly
When replacing the Charging Wire
When vertical lines occur on an image
WIRE-EX
Check cleaning operation of all Chg Wir
Lv.1 Details
To clean the Charging Wires of Primary Charging Assembly and Pretransfer Charging Assembly simultaneously (1-reciprocation).
Check the reciprocation operation of the Wire Cleaner.
Use case
When checking operation of the Primary Charging Wire Cleaning
Motor after removing, and then installing the Primary Charging
Assembly at working around the Process area
T-8-44
T-8-43
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING
8-104
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL
FIXING
8-105
PANEL
COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING
COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL
NIP-CHK
Lv.1 Details
Check of fixing nip width

To check whether the fixing nip width is appropriate by printing.
If it is not appropriate, a fixing failure may occur.
Use case
When replacing the fixing-related parts (Fixing Roller, Pressure
Roller)
When a fixing failure occurs
Adj/set/operate method 1) Print approx. 20 sheets of A4 size paper.
A sheet is stopped once in a state held by the Fixing Nip area, and
is delivered approx. 20 seconds later.
If the nip widths are as follow it is judged as normal: 4.0 to 5.0
mm at the center, and difference between front and rear is within
0.5mm. If there is an error, execute step 5.
5) Check the Fixing Roller, Pressure Roller, and Fixing Lower Unit,
and replace damaged part.
COPIER> TEST> PG> TYPE
T-8-45
LCD-CHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
LED-CHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case

LED-OFF
Lv.1 Details
Use case
KEY-CHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TOUCHCHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Check of LCD Panel dot missing

To check whether there is a missing dot on the LCD Panel of the
Control Panel.
When replacing the LCD Panel
2) Check that the LCD Panel lights up in the order of white, black,
red, green and blue.
3) Press STOP key to terminate checking.
Check of Control Panel LED
To check whether the LED on the Control Panel lights up.
2) Check that the LED lights up in the order.
3) Use LED-OFF to terminate checking.
COPIER> FUNCTION> PANEL> LED-OFF
End check of Control Panel LED
To terminate the check of LED on the Control Panel.
During execution of LED-CHK
Select the item, and then press OK key.
COPIER> FUNCTION> PANEL> LED-CHK
Check of key entry
To check the key input on the Control Panel.
1) Select the item and press the key on the Control Panel.
2) Check that the input value is displayed.
3) Cancel the selection to terminate checking.
Adj of coordinate pstn of Touch Panel
To adjust the coordinate position on the Touch Panel of the Control
Panel.
2) Press the nine + keys in sequence.
T-8-46
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL
8-105
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK
PART-CHK
8-106
COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK
COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK

CL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Specification of operation Clutch

To specify the Clutch to operate.
When replacing the Clutch/checking the operation
Enter the value, and then press OK key.
1 to 6
1: Developing Clutch (CL1)
2: Magnet Roller Clutch (CL5)
3 to 6: Not used
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> CL-ON
CL-ON
Operation check of Clutch
Lv.1 Details
To start operation check of the Clutch specified by CL.
The operation stops after ON for 0.5 sec => OFF for 10 sec => ON
for 0.5 sec => OFF for 10 sec => ON for 0.5 sec.
Use case
When replacing the Clutch/checking the operation
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> CL
MTR
Specification of operation Motor
Lv.1 Details
To specify the Motor to operate.
Use case
When replacing the Motor/checking the operation
Adj/set/operate method Enter the value, and then press OK key.
Caution
Be sure to remove the Toner Container before Toner Supply Motor
(M10) is activated. If it remains to be installed, toner is supplied.
1 to 16
1: Toner Supply Motor (M10)
2: Toner Feed Motor (M28)
3: Delivery Motor (M13)
4: Reverse Motor (M14)
5: Side Registration Motor (M16)
6: Duplex Feed Right Motor (M18)
7: Duplex Feed Left Motor (M19)
8: Vertical Path Upper Motor (M26)
9: Vertical Path Lower Motor (M27)
10: Vertical Path Middle Motor (M31)
11: Duplex Feed Merging Motor (M32)
12: Multi-purposeTray Registration Front Motor (M33)
13: Registration Motor (M34)
14: ETB Motor (M43)
15 to 16: Not used
Default value
1
COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> MTR-ON
MTR-ON
Lv.1 Details
Operation check of Motor

To start operation check of the Motor specified by MTR.
The operation automatically stops after operation of 20 seconds.
Use case
When replacing the Motor/checking the operation
Caution
Be sure to remove the Toner Container before Toner Supply Motor
(M10) is activated. If it remains to be installed, toner is supplied.
COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> MTR
SL
Specification of operation Solenoid
Lv.1 Details
To specify the Solenoid to operate.
Use case
When replacing the Solenoid/checking the operation
1 to 10
1: Multi Middle Plate Release Solenoid (SL2)
2: Cassette 3 Pickup Solenoid (SL3)
3: Cassette 4 Pickup Solenoid (SL4)
4: Reverse Upper Flapper Solenoid (SL5)
5: Right Deck Pickup Solenoid (SL6)
6: Not used
7: Left Deck Merging Solenoid (SL11)
8: Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid (SL9)
9: Patch Sensor Shutter Solenoid (SL10)
10: Reverse Detachment Solenoid (SL12)
Default value
1
COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> SL-ON
SL-ON
Operation check of Solenoid
Lv.1 Details
To start operation check for the Solenoid specified by SL.
The operation stops after ON for 0.5 sec => OFF for 10 sec => ON
for 0.5 sec => OFF for 10 sec => ON for 0.5 sec.
Use case
When replacing the Solenoid/checking the operation
COPIER> FUNCTION> PART-CHK> SL
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK
T-8-47
8-106
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR
CLEAR
COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR

ERR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
DC-CON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution

R-CON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution

JAM-HIST
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ERR-HIST
Lv.1 Details
Use case
PWD-CLR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
8-107
Clear of error code

To clear error codes (E000, E001, E002, E003, E717, E719).
E000, E001, E002, and E003 are fixing-related errors.
E004 (IH Power Supply) and E005 (Web absence) do not need to be
cleared.
At error occurrence
RAM clear of DC Controller PCB
To clear the RAM data of the DC Controller PCB.
When clearing the RAM data of the DC Controller PCB
Output the service mode setting values by P-PRINT before
execution. After execution, enter necessary setting values.
The RAM data is cleared after the main power switch is turned
OFF/ON.
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> P-PRINT
RAM clear of Reader Controller PCB
To clear the RAM data of the Reader Controller PCB.
When clearing the RAM data of the Reader Controller PCB
OFF/ON.
Clear of jam history
To clear the jam history.
When clearing the jam history
Clear of error code history
To clear the error code history.
When clearing the error code history
Clear of system administrator password
To clear the password of the system administrator set in the user
mode.
When clearing the password of the system administrator
ADRS-BK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
CNT-MCON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
CNT-DCON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
OPTION
Lv.1 Details
Caution

MMI
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Clear of address book

To clear the address book data.
When clearing the address book data
The address book data is cleared after the main power switch is
turned OFF/ON.
Clear of Main Controller service counter
To clear the service counter counted by the Main Controller PCB.
When clearing the service counter counted by the Main Controller
PCB
COPIER> COUNTER
See COUNTER for the target counter.
Clear of DC Controller service counter
To clear the service counter (FIN-STPR, FIN-PDDL, SADDLE, STPL)
counted by the DC Controller PCB.
When clearing the service counter counted by the DC Controller
PCB
COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-2> FIN-STPR, FIN-PDDL, SADDLE,
STPL
Clear of service mode setting VL(OPTION)
To return the value specified in service mode (OPTION) to the default
value (value at the time of RAM clear).
This item is executed for the data on the Main Controller PCB, DC
Controller PCB and Reader Controller PCB.
Clear of user mode setting value
To clear the user mode setting values (excluding values for Control
Panel, common settings, and FAX).
Common Settings
Timer Settings
Adjustment/Cleaning
Report Settings
System Settings
Copy Settings
Communications Settings
Printer Settings
When clearing various setting values of user mode
The setting value is cleared after the main power switch is turned
OFF/ON.
8-107

MN-CON
Lv.1 Details
RAM clear of MNCON PCB SRAM Board

To clear the RAM data of the Main Controller PCB SRAM Board.
All data on the SRAM Board is initialized.
Use case
When clearing the RAM data of the Main Controller PCB SRAM
Board
The machine is automatically rebooted.
Caution
Inform the user that all images in Inbox will be deleted and get
approval for it.
Since the file management information is initialized, images on the
HDD cannot be read.
OFF/ON.
CARD
Clear of card ID-related data
Lv.1 Details
To clear the data related to the card ID (department).
Use case
When clearing the data related to the card ID
Caution
The value is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/ON.
ALARM
Clear of alarm log
Lv.1 Details
To clear alarm log.
Use case
When clearing alarm log
Caution
The alarm log is cleared after the main power switch is turned OFF/
ON.
8-108
CA-KEY
Lv.2 Details
Deletion of CA certificate and key pair

To simultaneously delete the CA certificate and key pair which are
additionally registered by the user.
Use case
When a service person replaces/discards the device
2) Check that OK is displayed.
Caution
Unless this item is executed at the time of replacement/discard of
the device, the CA certificate and key pair which are additionally
registered by the user remain in the HDD, which is a problem in
terms of security.
Do not execute this item carelessly because the CA certificate
and key pair which are additionally registered are deleted when
it is executed. If they are deleted mistakenly, they need to be
again registered by the user. If no CA certificate and key pair are
additionally registered, the machine condition becomes the same
as the one at the time of factory shipment.
When NG is displayed in 2), there is a possibility that deletion
was not executed. In this case, surely execute the deletion by
initializing the HDD, etc.
Supplement/memo
The CA certificate is used in the MEAP application with E-RDS
and SSL client connection, and the key pair is used in the SSL
function of IPP, RUI and MEAP.
When the main power switch is turned OFF/ON, the CA certificate
and key pair which were registered at the time of factory shipment
are decompressed from the archive (/BOOTDEV/KCMNG), and
become available in the E-RDS/SSL function.
ERDS-DAT
Initialization of E-RDS SRAM data
Lv.1 Details
To initialize the SCM value of the Embedded-RDS stored in the
SRAM.
SCM values are ON/OFF of E-RDS, servers port number, servers
SOAP URL, and communication schedule with the server (how often
the data is acquired), etc.
The value set by COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGWPORT, RGW-ADR, COM-LOG is cleared.
Use case
When upgrading the Bootable in the E-RDS environment
Caution
The method of using the SRAM in E-RDS differs depending on the
Bootable version. Therefore, unless the SRAM data is cleared at the
time of version upgrade, data inconsistency occurs.
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> E-RDS, RGW-PORT, RGW-ADR,
COM-LOG
8-108

KEY-CLR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
USBM-CLR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
JV-CACHE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
FXTX-CLR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TR-BLT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
GRD-CRNT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Encrypt key clear of HDD Encrypt Board

To clear the encryption key of the HDD Encryption Board (Security
Kit) for replacement.
Processing is executed at the time of replacement of the Encryption
Board, and a new encryption key is generated.
When replacing the encryption key for the HDD Encryption Board
2) Check that OK is displayed.
Since all data in the HDD becomes unavailable when executing this
item, be sure to initialize the HDD after turning OFF/ON the main
power switch.
Initialize USB MEAP priority rgst info
To initialize the registered ID data retained in the OS field by calling
the API provided by the OS.
When a failure occurs in USB MEAP priority registration
Cache clear of JAVA application
To clear the cache information used by JAVA application.
When initializing the JAVA application
Clearing fax job information
To clear fax job information stored on SRAM.
Use this mode to restore from E611-0001.
When E611-0001 occurs
Clearing Transfer Belt parts counter
To clear ETB parts counter when replacing to a new Transfer Belt
(ETB).
When replacing to a new ETB
COPIER> COUNTER> DRBL-1> TR-BLT
Init of Primary Charging Wire current VL
To initialize the current value of the Primary Charging Wire by
initializing the voltage value of the grid wire.
The current value of the Primary Charging Wire is linked with the
usage status; thus, execute initialization at the time of replacement.
When replacing the Primary Charging Wire
8-109
LANG-CLR
Lv.2 Details
Uninstallation of language files

To uninstall the language files other than Japanese and English files.
After execution, the machine automatically enters the download
mode.
Use case
When installing a new language file while there are 7 installed
language files
2) Reboot the machine.
Caution
The language files are not uninstalled if a language file is not
installed by SST after the execution of this service mode.
Supplement/memo
Screen is displayed in English after the execution, so switch the
language.
FIN-MCON
Clearing Finisher delvry destination set
Lv.1 Details
To clear the setting of Delivery Tray of the Finisher specified in user
mode (Settings/Registration> Function Settings> Common> Paper
Output Settings> Output Tray Settings).
Since the delivery destination settings are stored in the DC Controller
PCB in the machine, malfunction occurs when replacing the Finisher
with a different model without clearing the settings.
If the model of the Finishers is the same, there is no need to clear
the settings.
Use case
When the Finisher is replaced with a different model in the field
Related UI menu
Settings/Registration> Function Settings> Common> Paper Output
Settings> Output Tray Settings
T-8-48
8-109
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R
MISC-R
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R

SCANLAMP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
CLM-PLTN
Lv.1 Details
8-110
Light-up check of LED

To light up the LED for 3 seconds.
When replacing the LED
Sampling of color copyboard read MTF VL
The MTF value for the Reader Unit is sometimes displaced from the
factory setting value depending on the condition at transportation/
storage. If the machine is installed without correcting the value, it
may cause an image failure such as moire. Therefore, it is necessary
to readjust the MTF value by reading the MTF adjustment chart at
installation.
When color copyboard reading is performed, the controller performs
sampling of the MTF value. This value is set in COPIER> ADJUST>
CCD> MTF2-Mx, MTF2-Sx.
Use case
At installation
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set the MTF chart on the Copyboard Glass.
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF2-M1-12, MTF2-S1-12
BWM-PLTN
Sampling of B&W copyboard read MTF value
Lv.1 Details
installation.
When B&W copyboard reading is performed, the controller performs
sampling of the MTF value. This value is set in COPIER> ADJUST>
CCD> MTF2-Mx, MTF2-Sx.
Use case
At installation
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set the MTF chart on the Copyboard Glass.
CLM-DF1
Lv.1 Details
Sampling of clr front stream read MTF VL

installation.
When color front side stream reading is performed, the controller
performs sampling of the MTF value. This value is set in COPIER>
ADJUST> CCD> MTF2-Mx, MTF2-Sx.
Use case
At installation
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set the MTF chart on the ADF.
3) Perform color front side stream reading with the MTF chart set on
the ADF. (CLM-DF1)
BWM-DF1
Sampling of B&W front stream read MTF VL
Lv.1 Details
installation.
When B&W front side stream reading is performed, the controller
performs sampling of the MTF value. This value is set in COPIER>
ADJUST> CCD> MTF2-Mx, MTF2-Sx.
Use case
At installation
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set the MTF chart on the ADF.
3) Perform B&W front side stream reading with the MTF chart set on
the ADF. (BWM-DF1)
8-110

CLM-DF2
Lv.1 Details
Sampling color back stream read MTF VL

installation.
When color back side stream reading is performed, the controller
performs sampling of the MTF value. The MTF value is set in MTFMx, MTF-Sx.
Use case
At installation
Adj/set/operate method 1) Perform color back side stream reading with the MTF chart set on
the ADF. (CLM-DF2)
2) Set the MTF chart on the ADF.
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF-M1-12, MTF-S1-12
BWM-DF2
Sampling B&W back stream read MTF value
Lv.1 Details
installation.
When B&W back side stream reading is performed, the controller
performs sampling of the MTF value. The MTF value is set in MTFMx, MTF-Sx.
Use case
At installation
Adj/set/operate method 1) Perform B&W back side stream reading with the MTF chart set on
the ADF. (BWM-DF2)
2) Set the MTF chart on the ADF.
8-111
CLPLT-EN
Lv.1 Details
Color copyboard read MTF VL initial set

To return the MTF value for color copyboard reading to the factory
setting value.
Since overwriting is performed with the backup data retained in the
Reader Controller PCB, the MTF value obtained by sampling of the
MTF chart becomes disabled.
When CLM-PLTN is executed, the value is automatically set to 1.
When the value is set to 0, the value adjusted with CLM-PLTN
becomes disabled and returned to the factory setting value.
Use case
When returning the MTF value to the initial setting value upon users
request in case that a sufficient quality level cannot be obtained on
the front side of a color image even performing a fine adjustment
with CLM-TGT after adjusting the MTF value with CLM-PLTN.
Caution
The MTF value obtained by reading the MTF chart becomes
disabled.
0 to 1
0: Factory setting value, 1: Adjustment value at installation
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> CLM-PLTN, CLM-TGT
BWPLT-EN
B&W copyboard read MTF value initial set
Lv.1 Details
To return the MTF value for B&W copyboard reading to the factory
setting value.
When BWM-PLTN is executed, the value is automatically set to 1.
When the value is set to 0, the value adjusted with BWM-PLTN
Use case
the front side of a B&W image even performing a fine adjustment
with BWM-TGT after adjusting the MTF value with BWM-PLTN.
Caution
disabled.
0 to 1
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> BWM-PLTN, BWM-TGT
8-111

CLDF1-EN
Lv.1 Details
Clr front stream read MTF VL initial set

To return the MTF value for color front side stream reading to the
When CLM-DF1 is executed, the value is automatically set to 1.
When the value is set to 0, the value adjusted with CLM-DF1
Use case
the front side of a color image even performing a fine adjustment
with CLM-TGT after adjusting the MTF value with CLM-DF1.
Caution
disabled.
0 to 1
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> CLM-DF1, CLM-TGT
BWDF1-EN
B&W front stream read MTF VL initial set
Lv.1 Details
To return the MTF value for B&W front side stream reading to the
When BWM-DF1 is executed, the value is automatically set to 1.
When the value is set to 0, the value adjusted with BWM-DF1
Use case
the front side of a B&W image even performing a fine adjustment
with BWM-TGT after adjusting the MTF value with BWM-DF1.
Caution
disabled.
0 to 1
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> BWM-DF1, BWM-TGT
8-112
CLDF2-EN
Lv.1 Details
Clr back stream read MTF VL initial set

To return the MTF value for color back side stream reading to the
When CLM-DF2 is executed, the value is automatically set to 1.
When the value is set to 0, the value adjusted with CLM-DF2
Use case
the back side of a color image even performing a fine adjustment
with CLM-TGT after adjusting the MTF value with CLM-DF2.
Caution
disabled.
0 to 1
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> CLM-DF2, CLM-TGT
BWDF2-EN
B&W back stream read MTF VL initial set
Lv.1 Details
To return the MTF value for B&W back side stream reading to the
When BWM-DF2 is executed, the value is automatically set to 1.
When the value is set to 0, the value adjusted with BWM-DF2
Use case
the back side of a B&W image even performing a fine adjustment
with BWM-TGT after adjusting the MTF value with BWM-DF2.
Caution
disabled.
0 to 1
Default value
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-R> BWM-DF2, BWM-TGT
8-112

CLM-TGT
Lv.1 Details
Fine adjustment of color MTF value

To perform the filter processing inside of the Reader Controller so
that the MTF value measured by CLM-PLTN/CLM-DF1/CLM-DF2
becomes 55% or lower of the value.
When 1 is specified, the MTF correction filter is calculated again,
and the MTF value becomes 50% or lower of the value (the image
becomes foggy). The backup MTF filter correction coefficient is
updated.
Use case
When decreasing the MTF value (to make the image foggy) upon
users request (moire, incorrect judgment)
0 to 1
0: 55%
1: 50% (The image becomes foggy.)
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
The MTF value is set to 65% at the time of shipment.
BWM-TGT
Fine adjustment of B&W MTF value
Lv.1 Details
To perform the filter processing inside of the Reader Controller so
that the MTF value measured by BWM-PLTN/BWM-DF1/BWM-DF2
becomes 55% or lower of the value.
When 1 is specified, the MTF correction filter is calculated again,
and the MTF value becomes 50% or lower of the value (the image
becomes foggy). The backup MTF filter correction coefficient is
updated.
Use case
When decreasing the MTF value (to make the image foggy) upon
users request (moire, incorrect judgment)
0 to 1
0: 55%
1: 50% (The image becomes foggy.)
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
The MTF value is set to 65% at the time of shipment.
SCANLMP2
Light-up check of LED Lamp Unit: back
Lv.1 Details
To light up the LED Lamp Unit for back side, which is placed in the
ADF, and check whether there is a missing block or no lighting in
LED.
Use case
When replacing the LED Lamp Unit for back side
8-113
RD-SHPOS
Lv.2 Details
Moving to Reader Scanner Unit fix pstn

To move the Reader Scanner Unit to the position where it is fixed
when moving.
When moving the Reader after installation, the Reader Scanner
Unit may move and get damage. By moving the Scanner Unit to
the specified position and securing it in place with a screw before
moving, damage can be prevented.
Use case
When moving the Reader after installation
Caution
Be sure to move the Scanner Unit to the fixing position and secure
it in place with a screw when moving the Reader after installation.
Otherwise, the Scanner Unit may get damage.
T-8-49
8-113
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P
MISC-P
8-114
COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P

P-PRINT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
KEY-HIST
Lv.1 Details
Use case
HIST-PRT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
TRS-DATA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
USER-PRT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
LBL-PRNT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Output of service mode setting value

To print the service mode setting value.
Before executing the CLEAR service mode, etc.
It takes approximately 15 seconds before printing starts.
Output of Ctrl Panel key input log
To print the key input log on the Control Panel.
When printing the key input log on the Control Panel
Output of jam and error history
To print the jam history and error history.
When printing the jam/error history
Moving memory reception data to Inbox
To move the data received in memory to Inbox.
When moving the data received in memory to Inbox
Output of user mode list
To print the user mode list.
When printing the user mode list
Output of service label
To print the service label.
When printing the service label
1) Place A4/LTR paper in Cassette 1.
Supplement/memo
PRE-EXP
Light-up of Pre-exposure LED
Lv.1 Details
To light up the Cleaning Pre-exposure LED.
Open the Front Cover, and check that the LEDs light up visually.
It automatically stops after all light up.
Use case
When checking that the Pre-exposure LEDs light up
Caution
Drum memory may occur, so be sure not to execute this item
frequently.
ENV-PRT
Temp&hmdy/surface temp of Fix Roll log
Lv.1 Details
To output data of the temperature and humidity inside the machine/
surface temperature of the Fixing Roller as a log.
Use case
When figuring out the past temperature inside the machine/fixing
temperature information at trouble analysis
PJH-P-1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
PJH-P-2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
WB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
BB
Lv.1 Details
Use case
USBH-PRT
Lv.1 Details
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P
Detail info of print job history:100 job

To print the print job history for the latest 100 jobs with detailed
information.
In the case of less than 100 jobs, the history of all print jobs is
printed.
When printing the print job history with detailed information
Output the print job history with detailed information which is
not displayed/printed in the job history screen under System
Monitor>Print>Log>Printer and in the report of the print job history.
Detail info of print job history:all job
To print the history of all print jobs stored in the machine with detailed
information (for maximum 5000 jobs).
The difference between PJH-P-1 and this item is only the number of
jobs printed.
When printing the print job history with detailed information
Output the print job history with detailed information which is
not displayed/printed in the job history screen under System
Monitor>Print>Log>Printer and in the report of the print job history.
Reverse toner forcible eject: blank band
To eject the reverse toner forcibly.
After execution, it automatically stops.
When operating in a high duty and low humidity environment for a
long time (executed by administrator)
In processing: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK, At abnormal
termination: NG
Toner forcible eject (black band)
Forcibly discharge low-charge toner, and send it to the drum cleaner
unit.
The operation automatically stops after execution.
When operating the machine in low-duty and high-humidity
environment for a long period of time (implemented by the
administrator)
Select the item and press the OK key.
During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK,
When operation failed: NG
Output of USB device information report
To output information of the connected USB device in the form of a
report.
8-114
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SENS-ADJ

DV-RT
Lv.1 Details
Idle rotation of Developing Assembly

To execute idle rotation of the Developing Assembly.
Duration can be set by COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV>DV-RT-LG.
Use case
When small vertical lines occurs on an image
Caution
If using frequently, deterioration of developer or toner scattering
might occur.
termination: NG
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV>DV-RT-LG
RPT-FILE
Output of report print file
Lv.1 Details
To save various service reports in HDD as a file.
The files can be obtained using PC to which SST has been installed
or USB memory device after starting the machine in download mode.
Use case
When obtaining the service report as a file instead of printing the
report out
Supplement/memo
File size: Approx. 1 MB at a maximum
8-115
SENS-ADJ
COPIER > FUNCTION > SENS-ADJ
STCK-LMT
Lv.2 Details
Adj of Shift Tray Full Sensor position

To adjust position of the Shift Tray Full Sensor (front)/(rear).
ON is displayed at detection of full, and OFF is displayed at other
times.
At detection of full: ON, At other times: OFF
T-8-51
T-8-50
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SENS-ADJ
8-115
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM
SYSTEM
8-116
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM

DOWNLOAD
Lv.1 Details
Shift to download mode

To make the machine enter the download mode and wait for a
command.
Perform downloading by SST.
Use case
At upgrade
2) Perform downloading by SST.
Caution
Do not turn OFF the power before HOLD is displayed.
Supplement/memo
SST: Service Support Tool
CHK-TYPE
HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK exe partition No.
Lv.1 Details
To specify the partition number of the HDD to execute HD-CLEAR/
HD-CHECK.
Use case
When executing HD-CLEAR/HD-CHECK
0 to 65535
0: Entire HDD
1, 2, 3, 4: Image data storage area
5: Universal file storage area
6, 7, 8: Universal file storage area (temporary file)
9: PDL file storage area
10: Program file storage area
11: MEAP application
12: Address book/transfer setting
13: MEAP stored data
14: System log storage area
15: Advanced Box area
16: Delivery server area
COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> HD-CLEAR, HD-CHECK
Supplement/memo
Universal file: Management information of user setting data, various
log data, PDL spool data, and image data, etc.
HD-CHECK
Entire HDD check and recovery
Lv.1 Details
To check the entire HDD and execute recovery processing.
Caution
Be sure to execute this item after CHK-TYPE.
During operation: Progress ratio (%), When operation finished
normally: OK!
COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE
HD-CLEAR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Initialization of specified partition

To initialize the HDD partition specified by CHK-TYPE.
When initializing the HDD partition
Be sure to execute this item after CHK-TYPE.
Top 2 digits: Progress ratio (%, Returns to 00 at termination)
Last 2 digits: Result at termination (00: Normally finished, Others:
Abnormally finished)
COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> CHK-TYPE
DEBUG-1
Setting of log type and save timing
Lv.2 Details
To set the types of logs to be stored and the timing to store logs in
the HDD.
Logs are used to analyze the cause of a trouble.
Use case
When analyzing the cause of a problem
Caution
Do not use this at the normal service. Change the setting value in
accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division.
0 to 3
0: Save PLOG at detection of Reboot/Exception
1: Save PLOG at detection of Reboot/Exception/Encode
2: Save SUBLOG at detection of Reboot/Exception/Encode
3: Save SUBLOG in overwrite mode at detection of Reboot/
Exception/Encode
Default value
3
DSRAMBUP
Backup of DC Controller PCB SRAM
Lv.2 Details
To back up the setting data in SRAM of the DC Controller PCB.
Use case
When replacing the DC Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the
time of trouble occurrence
Caution
During operation, the setting data changes by manual or automatic
adjustment. When backup data which has been left for a long period
of time is restored, it is overwritten with new setting data and the old
data is deleted.
COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMRES
DSRAMRES
Restore of DC Controller PCB SRAM
Lv.2 Details
To restore the setting data which has been backed up in SRAM of
the DC Controller PCB.
Use case
When replacing the DC Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the
Caution
data is deleted.
COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> DSRAMBUP
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM
8-116
Service Mode > COPIER > FUNCTION > 2D-SHADE

RSRAMBUP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Backup of Reader Controller PCB SRAM

To back up the setting data in SRAM of the Reader Controller PCB.
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the
Caution
data is deleted.
COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMRES
RSRAMRES
Restore of Reader Controller PCB SRAM
Lv.2 Details
To restore the setting data which has been backed up in SRAM of
the Reader Controller PCB.
Use case
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB for troubleshooting at the
Caution
data is deleted.
COPIER> FUNCTION> SYSTEM> RSRAMBUP
R-REBOOT
Reboot of host machine (Remote)
Lv.1 Details
To reboot the host machine.
Use case
When rebooting the host machine by remote control
T-8-52
2D-SHADE
COPIER > FUNCTION > 2D-SHADE
M-LINE1
Lv.2 Details
M-LINE2
Lv.2 Details
S-LINE1
Lv.2 Details
S-LINE2
Lv.2 Details
S-LINE3
Lv.2 Details
S-LINE4
Lv.2 Details
8-117
2D shading horizontal scan 1 correction

To set the correction value of the horizontal scanning direction 1 at
2D shading.
0 to 255
COPIER> FUNCTION> 2D-SHADE> M-LINE2
2D shading horizontal scan 2 correction
To set the correction value of the horizontal scanning direction 2 at
2D shading.
0 to 255
COPIER> FUNCTION> 2D-SHADE> M-LINE1
2D shading vertical scan 1 correction
To set the correction value of the vertical scanning direction 1 at 2D
shading.
0 to 255
COPIER> FUNCTION> 2D-SHADE> S-LINE2, S-LINE3, S-LINE4
shading.
0 to 255
shading.
0 to 255
shading.
0 to 255
8-117
8-118
COPIER > FUNCTION > 2D-SHADE

SHD-P1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
2D shading pattern 1 output

To output pattern 1 for 2D shading.
When checking 2D shading profile visually and entering manually
COPIER> FUNCTION> 2D-SHADE> SHD-P2, SHD-P3
SHD-P2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SHD-P3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
2D-READ
Read 2D shading ROM
Lv.1 Details
To read 2D shading ROM data.
To check ROM for 2D shading, compare the calculated checksum
and checksum of ROM.
When they are matched, the checksum and Drum Lot number are
stored in the DC Controller. When they are not matched, it is judged
as an alarm.
Use case
After executing initialization of Drum at Drum replacement
During execution: ACTIVE, At normal termination: OK!, At abnormal
termination: NG!
T-8-53
8-118
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING
OPTION
8-119
COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING
CLN-ADJ
Lv.1 Details
CLEANING
COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING
W-CLN-P
Lv.2 Details
Set last rotn Prmry Charge Wir cln intvl

To set the offset value of the paper interval for automatic cleaning of
the Primary Charging Wire.
Default is 2000 sheets, and the paper interval can be changed within
the range between 1000 and 5000 sheets.
Use case
Upon users request
-1000 to 3000
Default value
0 (2000 sheets)
CLN-SW
ON/OFF of cleaning black band sequence
Lv.1 Details
To set ON/OFF of black band sequence for cleaning.
When printing a low duty image while toner ejection operation at low
duty image is set to OFF, amount of toner supply to the Cleaning
Blade is decreased extremely. Toner is supplied to the edge of
Cleaning Blade if the sequence is executed.
The execution of sequence is synchronized with the Primary
Charging Wire cleaning timing.
When setting CLN-SW to 2 and setting CLN-ADJ to 0, the setting
value 7 of environment control for each process speed is executed.
When setting CLN-SW to 2 and setting CLN-ADJ to other than 0,
operation is accorded with the setting value of CLN-ADJ.
When setting CLN-SW to 0, operation is not executed regardless of
the CLN-ADJ setting.
Use case
When amount of toner supply to the Cleaning Blade is decreased
extremely
0 to 2
0: OFF, 1: Based on environment control, 2: ON
Default value
1
COPIER> OPTION> CLEANING> CLN-ADJ
Set black band length for cleaning

To set black band length for cleaning.
When setting CLN-SW to 2 and setting CLN-ADJ to 0, the setting
value 7 of environment control for each process speed is executed.
When setting CLN-SW to 2 and setting CLN-ADJ to other than 0,
operation is accorded with the setting value of CLN-ADJ.
When setting CLN-SW to 0, operation is not executed regardless of
the CLN-ADJ setting.
However, with imageRUNNER ADVANCE 8205/8295/8285, black
band sequence is not executed although the setting value of
environment control is 7. Set CLN-ADJ to other than 0 to execute
the operation.
Use case
When amount of toner supply to the Cleaning Blade is decreased
extremely
0 to 4
0: Based on environment control, 1: 1000 mm, 2: 2098 mm, 3: 3548
mm, 4: 5000 mm
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> CLEANING> CLN-SW
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING
T-8-54
8-119
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM
CUSTOM
8-120
COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM

TEMP-TBL
Lv.1 Details
Set fixing control temp table: Plain

To set the control temperature table of the Fixing Roller for 64 to 90g/
m2 size paper.
Use case
When alleviating the curl
-5 to 2
-5 to -1: -5 degC, 0: 0 degC, 1 to 2: +5 degC
Default value
0
CCD-TYPE
Setting of CCD Unit type
Lv.2 Details
To set the CCD Unit type installed in the Reader to the backup area
in the controller.
Controller switches the image processing table according to the
setting value.
Use case
When changing the CCD Unit type
0 to 1
0: Initial type, 1: Improved type
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
If the CCD Unit is changed after factory shipment, the Reader cannot
identify the type.
SC-L-CNT
Set large paper jdgmt reference at scan
Lv.1 Details
To set the judgment reference of the scan counter as to which to use
B4 or LTR to determine large size.
The threshold is determined by the combination with the setting of
B4-L-CNT.
SC-L-CNT=0, B4-L-CNT=0: paper exceeding B4 is determined as
large size, paper with B4 or smaller is determined as small size.
SC-L-CNT=0, B4-L-CNT=1: paper with B4 or larger is determined as
large size, paper smaller than B4 is determined as small size.
Use case
As needed
0 to 1
0: B4 size, 1: LTR size
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> USER> B4-L-CNT
FACT-DEF
Set batch chng of factory setting values
Lv.2 Details
To set the batch change of factory setting values for customization.
0 to 1
Default value
0
MAILYEAR
Lv.2 Details
Set auto add to e-mail Subject/File name

To set whether to add date, time and split number automatically to
the end of a character string of e-mail Subject/File name.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Following the current setting, 1: Adding
Default value
0
BOX-BKUP
Set to allow Inbox backup data restore
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to permit restoration of Inbox backup data.
Machine subject to restoration can be selected from either the same
model or the next model.
When restoration is completed normally, the setting value is returned
to 0.
Use case
At replacement, permit to restore backup data of other model (some
models).
0 to 1
0: Permit restoration only from own device to own device (same
model only)
1: Permit restoration only from old device to new device (next model
only)
Default value
0
SCANTYPE
Switch of ADF + Reader
Lv.1 Details
To switch to a different type ADF + Reader Unit.
Use case
At installation
0 to 1
0: Reverse Duplex ADF + Reader, 1: 1-Path Duplex ADF + Reader
Default value
0
PDLEVCT1
Set event skipping at continuous PDL job
Lv.2 Details
To set event skipping at continuous PDL job.
During continuous operation, processing performance may be
decreased due to other events generated by the event in operation.
In this case, decrease of processing performance can be prevented
by skipping the amount of event.
Processing performance: No event skipping < Subject of skipping 1
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: No event skipping, 1: Subject of skipping 1
Default value
1
8-120

ABK-TOOL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Supplement/memo
DEV-SP1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
DEV-SP2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
DEV-SP3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
DEV-SP4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Allow access from address book mntc tool

To set whether to accept import from the address book maintenance
tool.
When executing import from the address book maintenance tool
0 to 1
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
0
Address book maintenance tool: Tool provided from CMJ.
Device special settings 1
To execute the device special settings 1.
When specific instructions are given from the Quality Support
Division
Change the setting value in accordance with the instructions from
the Quality Support Division.
00000000 to 11111111
00000000
Division
00000000 to 11111111
00000000
Division
00000000 to 11111111
00000000
Division
00000000 to 11111111
00000000
8-121
DEV-SP5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
DEV-SP6
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
DEV-SP7
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
DEV-SP8
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value

Division
00000000 to 11111111
00000000
Division
00000000 to 11111111
00000000
Division
00000000 to 11111111
00000000
Division
00000000 to 11111111
00000000
8-121

AC-FREQ
Lv.2 Details
Setting of frequency of AC power

Although power frequency is judged for power control with the
machine, it might be judged incorrectly depending on power
circumstance at the installation location.
At left side column, the power frequency (50 Hz/60 Hz) which the DC
Controller judged at power-on is displayed.
In the case that the power frequency is not matched with the one
at the installation location, set the AC power frequency at right side
column.
Use case
When the breaker is frequently tripped during operation
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the right side column.
Left side: 0 to 1
0: 50 Hz, 1: 60 Hz
Right side: 0 to 2
0: Judged frequency is used, 1: 50 Hz, 2: 60 Hz
Default value
0
EXT-TBOX
Set Wst Tonr Cntner preparation warn tmg
Lv.1 Details
To set the number of images (calculation with A4 and 5% image
ratio) until the Waste Toner Container preparation warning message
is displayed.
As the value is incremented by 1, the number of images is increased
by approx. 10,000.
+: Timing is delayed
-: Timing becomes earlier
Use case
When adjusting the Waste Toner Container preparation warning
timing according to the usage of the user
Caution
Depending on the image ratio or use environment (temperature
and humidity), the message may be displayed before reaching the
specified number of sheets.
Toner leak may occur when changing the value drastically.
-10 to 9
-10: -100,000 images, ..., -1: -10,000 images, 0: 0 sheet, 1: +10,000
images, ..., 9: +90,000 images (calculation with A4 and 5% image
ratio)
Default value
0
DFEJCLED
ON/OFF of DADF delivery LED
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to light up the delivery LED of DADF during a job.
Use case
Upon users request (The delivery LED is too bright.)
0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default value
0
8-122
RDEV-SP1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
RDEV-SP2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
RDEV-SP4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
RDEV-SP5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
RDEV-SP6
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
RCON device special settings 1

To execute the device special setting.
For customization, etc.
Use this mode only when specific instructions are given.
00000000 to 11111111
0
00000000 to 11111111
0
00000000 to 11111111
0
00000000 to 11111111
0
00000000 to 11111111
0
8-122
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW
DSPLY-SW

RDEV-SP7
Lv.2 Details
Use case

Caution
00000000 to 11111111
Default value
0
RDEV-SP8
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
00000000 to 11111111
Default value
0
COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW

UI-COPY
Lv.2 Details
Use case
T-8-55
8-123
Display/hide of copy screen

To set whether to display or hide the copy function.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
UI-BOX
Display/hide of Inbox screen
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to display or hide the Inbox function.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 2
0: No Inbox function (Storing is not available even with PDL to
Inbox.)
1: Inbox function is active
2: Inbox function is active (with limitation; Storing is available with
PDL to Inbox despite no display on the Control Panel/remote UI)
Default value
1
Related UI menu
Preferences> Display Settings> Store Location Display Settings>
Mail Box
The setting value is changed to 2 when turning OFF the foregoing
user mode, and the value is changed to 1 when turning ON the mode
at power-off/on.
As the setting value of this service mode is changed, the setting
value of the foregoing user mode is also changed.
UI-SEND
Display/hide of send screen
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to display or hide the SEND function.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
UI-FAX
Display/hide of FAX screen
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to display or hide the FAX function.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
T-LW-LVL
[Not used]
8-123

NWERR-SW
Lv.2 Details
OFF/ON of network-related error display

To set OFF/ON of network-related error message display.
When setting 0: OFF while the machine is not connected to
network, the error message Check the network connection. is not
displayed.
Use case
When using the machine as a copy machine
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
Printer model: 1, Copier model: 0
ANIM-SW
Screen switch set from MEAP to warning
Lv.2 Details
To set to enable/disable switching from MEAP screen to the error/
jam screen.
If disabling this mode, the screen will not be switched to the warning
screen in the case of an error/jam/alarm, and a message is appeared
on the MEAP screen indicating to contact the service person.
0 to 1
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled (No display of warning screen)
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> MEAP-DSP
Supplement/memo
If just disabling the switch with MEAP-DSP, the screen is switched to
the standard screen in the case of an error/jam/alarm. If disabling the
switch with ANIM-SW, the screen will not be switched to the standard
screen and a warning is appeared on MEAP screen.
UI-PRINT
Display/hide of print job screen
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to display or hide the print job screen.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
IMGC-ADJ
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Related UI menu
UI-RSCAN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
UI-EPRNT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
UI-WEB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
8-124
Dspl/hide of img adj item in user mode

To set whether to display or hide the item relating to image
adjustment in user mode.
When selecting display setting, detailed image adjustment procedure
will be displayed only for the duplicated paper specified with the
following settings: Preferences> Paper Settings> Set Paper Type
Management.
As needed
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
Preferences> Paper Settings> Set Paper Type Management
Display/hide of remote scan screen
To set whether to display or hide the remote scan screen on the
Control Panel.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
1
Display/hide of extended print screen
To set whether to display or hide the extended print screen (print
screen for print server).
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
1
Display/hide of Web browser screen
To set whether to display or hide the Web browser screen.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
1
8-124

UI-HOLD
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/hide of hold job screen

To set whether to display the hold job screen on the Control Panel.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
OPEMANT
ON/OFF of operator maintenance mode
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF of operator maintenance mode.
When setting to ON, Operator Maintenance Mode is displayed on
the Settings/Registration screen.
Use case
When starting operator maintenance
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
Related UI menu
Settings/Registration > Operator Maintenance Mode
OPLOG-SW
Dspl/hide of error log in operator mntc
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to display or hide error/jam/alarm-2 log in operator
maintenance mode.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
0
OP-ALMT
Set warning mssg timing in operator mntc
Lv.2 Details
To set the timing to display warning message of parts replacement/
cleaning counter in operator maintenance mode.
With this setting, warning message is displayed once before reaching
the specified life of parts or number of sheets for cleaning.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: At 100%, 1: At 90% and 100%
Default value
0
8-125
RMT-CNSL
Lv.1 Details
ON/OFF of MEAP console screen

Selecting 1: ON enables to obtain log for Function Composer on
console screen.
Use case
When obtaining log for Function Composer
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
UI-SBOX
ON/OFF of Advanced Box screen display
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF of the Advanced Box screen on the Control Panel.
Use case
When not displaying the Advanced Box screen on the Control Panel
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
JP:1, USA:1, EUR:0, AU:1, CN:1, KR:1, TW:1, ASIA:1
Supplement/memo
Advanced Box / Network
at power-off/on.
UI-MEM
ON/OFF of memory media screen display
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF of the memory media screen display on the Control
Panel.
Use case
When not displaying the memory media screen on the Control Panel
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
Memory Media
at power-off/on.
UI-NAVI
Display/hide of useful feat intro
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to display or hide Introduction to Useful Features in
the main menu.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
UI-MOBP
[Not used]
8-125

UI-CUSTM
Lv.2 Details
ON/OFF of custom menu screen display

To set ON/OFF of the custom menu screen display on the Control
Panel.
Use case
When not displaying the custom menu screen on the Control Panel
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
1
SCT-BTN
Set No. of shortcut buttons upper limit
Lv.1 Details
To set an upper limit on the number of shortcut buttons that appear
at the top of the Control Panel screen.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
When 1 is set, the number of shortcut buttons that can be set
increases from 2 to 4. However, the buttons become smalled in width,
and the number of characters that can be displayed decreases.
Depending on the MEAP application allocated to the shortcut button,
the character strings displayed may not be fully displayed. Since
the character strings displayed on the shortcut button are specified
by the MEAP application, they cannot be changed. Therefore, if the
number of characters are too many, foregoing symptom occurs. To
prevent the symptom, a measure such as decreasing the number of
characters on the MEAP application side needs to be taken.
0 to 1
0: 2 buttons, 1: 4 buttons
Default value
0
USER-DSP
Display/hide of login user name
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to display the name of the user who logs in to the
machine on the screen of the Control Panel (upper left area).
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 2
0: Hide, 1: Display the user name, 2: Display the display name
Default value
0
8-126
SDTM-DSP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Display/hide of auto shutdown time

To set whether to display Auto Shutdown Time in user mode.
Upon users request
When Hide is set, auto shutdown time is reset. (Auto shutdown is
not performed.)
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
Related UI menu
Settings/Registration> Preferences> Time/Energy Settings> Auto
Shutdown Time
WT-WARN
Dspl/hide of Wst Tonr Cntner prep mssg
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to display the preparation warning message of the
Waste Toner Container on the status area of LUI.
Use case
When there is no need to notify the preparation timing of the Waste
Toner Container to the user
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
T-8-56
8-126
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW
ENV-SET
8-127
FEED-SW
COPIER > OPTION > ENV-SET
COPIER > OPTION > FEED-SW
ENVP-INT
Lv.1 Details
Temp, humid/Fix Roll temp log get cycle

To set the cycle to obtain log of the temperature and humidity inside
the machine or the surface temperature of the Fixing Roller.
As the value is incremented by 1, the cycle is increased by 1 minute.
Obtained log can be displayed by selecting the following: COPIER >
DISPLAY > ENVRNT
Use case
At trouble analysis
0 to 480
Default value
60
COPIER> DISPLAY> ENVRNT
DRY-CISU
ON/OFF of condensation prevention mode
Lv.1 Details
To set ON/OFF of condensation mode.
When droplets are appeared on the Scanner Unit due to
condensation and image failure or E225 occurs, set 1: ON.
By selecting 1, the Scanner Unit (paper front) stops the fan for
15 seconds and the Scanner Unit (paper back) lights LED for 30
seconds from the next startup.
Use case
When droplets are appeared on the Scanner Unit due to
condensation and image failure or E225 occurs
0 to 1
0: OFF (Normal mode), 1: ON (Anti-condensation mode)
T-8-57
TRY-CHG
Lv.2 Details
Set of Delivery Tray switch at tray full

To set the Delivery Tray switching control when the Delivery Tray of
the Finisher reaches to the full level.
If Tray A/B is selected as a delivery tray, tray is switched to the Tray A
when the Tray B reaches to the full level. At this time, after removing
papers on the Tray B, paper is delivered to the Priority Tray when 0
is set. When 1 is set, paper is output followed by the previous job.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Deliver to the Priority Tray, 1: Deliver followed by the previous job
Default value
0
REG-SPD
Speed adj of Rgst Roller: plain paper
Lv.2 Details
To adjust the Registration Roller speed when 1/1 speed is set for
plain paper, etc.
Increase the value if the image at the leading edge of paper shrinks
in the feeding direction, and decrease the value if it expands.
Decrease the value if wavy-line image occurs.
If these symptoms are not alleviated after adjustment is made,
replace the Registration Roller.
-50 to 50
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> REG-SPD2, REG-SPD3
INSRT-SW
[Not used]
8-127

DK2-TURN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
ON/OFF of L-Deck Pckup Rol little rotn

To set whether to rotate the Left Deck Pickup Roller a little after
completion of job or at the time of warm-up rotation.
If the Pickup Deck has not been used for a long time, a part of the
Separation Roller engaged with the Pickup Roller becomes worn and
the roller stops rotation. As a result of that, jam may occur. When 1
is set, the Pickup Roller rotates 75mm after completion of job so that
wear of the Separation Roller can be reduced.
As the usage is extended or at the operation performed first time for
the day in a low temperature environment, the Separation Roller is
not rotated in response to rotation of the Pickup Roller. As a result of
that, jam may occur. When 2 is set, the Pickup Roller rotates 75mm
at warm-up rotation.
When pickup jam occurs with the following conditions
Pickup Deck has not been used for a long time
The usage is extended
At the operation performed first time for the day in a low
temperature environment
When ON is set, papers sticking out of the Receptacle may get stuck
at the time of opening and closing the deck.
0 to 3
0: OFF, 1: ON after a job, 2: ON at warm-up rotation, 3: ON after a
job and at warm-up rotation
0
COPIER> OPTION> FEED-SW> DK1-TURN, DK3-TURN, DK4TURN, DK5-TURN
8-128
DK3-TURN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
ON/OFF of Casstt3 Pckup Rol little rotn

To set whether to rotate the Cassette 3 Pickup Roller a little after
If the Pickup Cassette has not been used for a long time, a part of
the Separation Roller engaged with the Pickup Roller becomes worn
and the roller stops rotation. As a result of that, jam may occur. When
1 is set, the Pickup Roller rotates 75mm after completion of job so
that wear of the Separation Roller can be reduced.
Pickup Cassette has not been used for a long time
at the time of opening and closing the Cassette.
0 to 3
0
8-128

DK4-TURN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
ON/OFF of Casstt4 Pckup Rol little rotn

To set whether to rotate the Cassette 4 Pickup Roller a little after
If the Pickup Cassette has not been used for a long time, a part of
the Separation Roller engaged with the Pickup Roller becomes worn
and the roller stops rotation. As a result of that, jam may occur. When
1 is set, the Pickup Roller rotates 75mm after completion of job so
that wear of the Separation Roller can be reduced.
Pickup Cassette has not been used for a long time
at the time of opening and closing the Cassette.
0 to 3
0
8-129
DK1-TURN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
ON/OFF of R-Deck Pckup Rol little rotn

To set whether to rotate the Right Deck Pickup Roller a little after
0 to 3
0
8-129
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW

DK5-TURN
Lv.1 Details
ON/OFF of OP-Deck Pckup Rol little rotn

To set whether to rotate the Option Deck Pickup Roller a little after
Use case
Caution
0 to 3
Default value
0
TFL-RTC
Set delvry dest at rcvry after tray full
Lv.1 Details
To select the delivery destination for a job with multiple pages after
recovering the Delivery Tray that reaches the full level.
When 0 (default) is set, a job is output from the delivery destination
again from which the last job was delivered.
When 1 is set, a job is output from the delivery destination which
priority is set as high at Output Tray Settings in user mode.
Use case
When changing the delivery tray
0 to 1
0: Output from the tray from which the last job was output.
1: Output from the delivery destination which priority is high among
the delivery trays.
Default value
0
Related UI menu
Function Settings> Common> Paper Output Settings> Output Tray
Settings
8-130
FNC-SW
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW
PO-CNT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
ON/OFF of potential control function

To set ON/OFF of potential control function.
Caution
Be sure to set the value back to 1 (ON) after servicing.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
1
PO-CNTMD
Set potential control execution timing
Lv.2 Details
To set the combination of timing to execute the potential control.
Use case
When productivity decreases at execution of potential control
0 to 2
0:
At warm-up rotation performed first time for the day in an HH
environment
At last rotation in the case that a job right after startup first time for
the day takes 10 minutes or longer
At last rotation after 1500 sheets since the last potential control
At last rotation of the first job after 90 minutes since the last
potential control
At warm-up rotation of the fist job after 10 minutes since the
startup first time for the day (30 seconds)
1:
environment
At last rotation in the case that a job right after startup first time for
the day takes 10 minutes or longer
At warm-up rotation of the fist job after 10 minutes since the
startup first time for the day (30 seconds)
Default value
2:
environment
0
T-8-58
8-130

MODEL-SZ
Lv.1 Details
Fixed magnifictn & DADF orgnl dtct size

To set the fixed magnification ratio display and the original detection
size with DADF.
It is set automatically at the time of installation of the Reader
according to the location.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 3
0: AB configuration (6R5E) for Japan, 1: Inch configuration (5R4E)
for North/Middle/South America, 2: A configuration (3R3E) for
Europe, 3: AB/Inch configuration (6R5E) for Asia, Oceania, South
America
Default value
SCANSLCT
ON/OFF of scan area calculate function
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF of the function to calculate scanning area from the
specified paper size.
When the paper size is larger than the original size, selecting ON
reduces productivity because the scanning area gets larger.
Use case
When matching the scanning area with the paper size
0 to 1
0: OFF (calculated from the detected original size)
1: ON (calculated from the specified paper size)
Default value
0
SENS-CNF
Setting of original detection size
Lv.2 Details
To set original detection size according to AB configuration/Inch
configuration/A configuration.
Select 1 (Inch configuration) for Inch configuration/A configuration
machine.
Use case
0 to 1
0: AB configuration, 1: Inch configuration
Default value
0
8-131
CONFIG
Lv.1 Details
Set country/area/lang/location/ppr size

To set the country/region, language, location, paper size
configuration for multiple system software in HDD.
Use case
Upon users request
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the setting item.
2) Switch with +/- key, and then press OK key.
XX YY.ZZ.AA
XX: Country/region
JP: Japan, US: United States, GB: England, FR: France, DE:
Germany, IT: Italia, AU: Australia, SG: Singapore, NL: Netherlands,
KR: Korea, CN: China, TW: Taiwan, ES: Spain, SE: Sweden, PT:
Portugal, NO: Norway, DK: Denmark, FI: Finland, PL: Poland, HU:
Hungary, CZ: Czech, SI: Slovenia, GR: Greek, EE: Estonia, RU:
Russia, AD: Andorra, AL: Albania, AM: Armenia, AR: Argentine, AT:
Austria, BA: Bosnia Herzegovina, BE: Belgium, BG: Bulgaria, BO:
Bolivia, BR: Brazil, CA: Canada, CH: Switzerland, CL: Chile, CY:
Cyprus, HR: Croatia, ID: Indonesia, IE: Ireland, IL: Israel, IN: India,
IS: Iseland, LU: Luxembourg, LV: Latvia, MX: Mexico, MY: Malaysia,
NZ: New Zealand, PE: Peru, PH: Philippine, PY: Paraguay, RO:
Romania, SK: Slovakia, TH: Thailand, TR: Turkey, UA: Ukraine, UY:
Uruguay, VE: Venezuela, VN: Vietnam
YY: Language (Fixed; e.g. ja: Japanese)
ZZ: Location (Fixed; e.g. 00: CANON)
AA: Paper size configuration (00: AB configuration, 01: Inch
configuration, 02: A configuration, 03: Inch/AB configuration)
COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> MODEL-SZ
W/SCNR
Setting of Reader Unit installation
Lv.1 Details
To set installation of the Reader Unit.
1 (Installed) is automatically selected once the Reader Unit is
detected at the start of the machine.
Use case
When installing/removing the Reader Unit
0 to 1
8-131

ORG-LGL
Lv.2 Details
Special paper size set in DADF mode: LGL

To set the size of special paper (LGL configuration) that cannot be
recognized in DADF stream reading mode.
Use case
Upon users request
When picking up special paper size original from DADF
0 to 10
0: LEGAL-R, 1: FOOLSCAP-R, 2: OFICIO-R, 3: FOLIO-R, 4:
Australian FOOLSCAP-R, 5: Ecuador OFICIO-R, 6: Bolivia
OFICIO-R, 7: Argentine OFICIO-R, 8: Argentine LEGAL-R, 9:
Government LEGAL-R, 10: Mexico OFICIO-R
Default value
0
ORG-LTR
Special paper size set in DADF mode: LTR
Lv.2 Details
To set the size of special paper (LTR configuration) that cannot be
recognized in DADF stream reading mode.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 3
0: LETTER, 1: EXECUTIVE, 2: Argentine LETTER, 3: Government
LETTER
Default value
0
ORG-B5
Special paper size set in DADF mode: B5
Lv.2 Details
To set the size of special paper (B5) that cannot be recognized in
DADF stream reading mode.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: B5, 1: Korean government office paper
Default value
0
8-132
MODELSZ2
Lv.2 Details
Ppr size dtct global support in bookmode

To set ON/OFF for global support of document size detection in
copyboard reading mode.
Use case
Upon users request (mixed media original with AB/Inch
configuration)
Caution
The Document Size Sensor (Photo Sensor) is additionally required
to correctly detect the document size when the original consists of
mixed media (AB/Inch configuration).
0 to 1
0: Detected with detection size according to location, 1: Detected
with AB/Inch mixed media.
Default value
0
SVMD-ENT
Setting of entry method to service mode
Lv.2 Details
To set the way to get in service mode to prevent information leak.
Use case
As needed
0 to 1
0: [Settings/Registration] - Pressing [2] and [8] at the same time [Settings/Registration]
1: [Settings/Registration] - Pressing [4] and [9] at the same time [Settings/Registration]
Default value
0
BASE-SW
Model switch set from MEAP-Full to Base
Lv.1 Details
To switch from the MEAP-Full model to the Base model.
Switch this mode in the case of restricting the operation of MEAP
application for trouble analysis.
Use case
When trouble that caused by MEAP application occurs
Caution
Switching from the Base model to the MEAP-Full model is not
available.
0 to 1
0: OFF (Base model), 1: ON (Full model)
Default value
Depending on the setting of option bit (MeapModelBIT).
8-132

KSIZE-SW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Set of Chinese paper (K-size) support

To set to detect/display the Chinese paper (K size paper: 8K, 16K).
When using K size paper
Caution
Go through the following: COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > MODELSZ; and if MODEL-SZ is 0: AB configuration, this mode is enabled.
0 to 1
0: Not supported, 1: Supported
Default value
COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> MODEL-SZ
Supplement/memo
8K paper: 270 x 390 mm, 16K paper: 270 x 195 mm
PDF-RDCT
PDF reduction set at forwarding
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to reduce the image for transmission when converting
the image received by IFAX into PDF for e-mail/file transmission.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Following the current setting, 1: Image reduction
Default value
0
REBOOTSW
Restart setting at E240 error occurrence
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to reboot in the case of E240 error.
In the case of E240 error, the machine is automatically rebooted due
to the possibility of continuous operation of the drive system while
the spooled print job is cleared.
Print job can be obtained if selecting the setting not to reboot.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
Be sure to get approval from the user by telling the possibility of
continuous operation of the drive system in the case of E240 error.
0 to 1
0: Rebooted, 1: Not rebooted
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
E240 error: Communication error between the Main Controller and
the DC Controller.
SJB-UNW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
CARD-RNG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
SJOB-CL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Supplement/memo
USB-RCNT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
8-133
Reserve upper limit of secured print job

To set the upper limit for the number of reserved jobs in secured print
job.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: 50 jobs, 1: 90 jobs
0
Card number setting (department number)
To set the number of cards (departments) that can be used with the
Card Reader.
When setting the number of cards (departments)
1 to 1000
1000
Set of scan job canceling by logout
To set whether to cancel the scan job in operation by logout of the
user.
Upon users request
The job with scanning completed cannot be canceled.
0 to 1
0
Scan job: A job after the scanning operation is completed.
Auto connect set at USB device disconnct
To set to enable/disable automatic connection when the USB device
is disconnected.
With the setting to disable automatic connection, USB device cannot
be used if disconnecting and then connecting the USB device. To
enable connection again, the power needs to be turned OFF/ON.
With the setting to enable automatic connection, reconnection is
made after disconnecting, and then connecting the USB device.
Upon users request
With the setting to enable automatic connection, disconnecting of 1
area makes automatic connection of all USB devices if there is USB
hub.
0 to 1
0: No automatic connection, 1: Automatic connection
0
8-133

UNLMTBND
Lv.1 Details
Default value
Supplement/memo
MIBCOUNT
Lv.2 Details
Default value
MEAP-PRI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
CNTR-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Over 400 binders print job support set

To set whether to support print job that exceeds 400 binders.
With the setting to support, the machine makes prints by sharing
binders according to job attribution.
Select 1: Not supported if the user does not print job* with large
quantity of binders.
0 to 1
0: Automatic setting (When the print server is not connected: not
supported; When the print server is connected: supported)
1: Not supported
0
* : A job that requires finishing (such as stapling) in one job. Does not
apply in the case of executing finishing with multiple sets of output.
Scope range set of Charge Counter MIB
To set the range of counter information that can be obtained as MIB
(Management Information Base).
0 to 2
0: All charge counters are obtained, 1: Only displayed counter* is
obtained, 2: All charge counters are not obtained
* : Counter specified by the following: COPIER > OPTION > USER >
COUNTER 1 to 6
0
COPIER> OPTION> USER> COUNTER1-6
Setting of MEAP task priority
Selecting 1: ON increases MEAP task priority.
When improving processing performance of MEAP
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
1
Init of parts counter replacement timing
To return the estimated life of parts counter to the initial value.
Upon users request
1) Enter 0, and then press OK key.
0: Returned to the initial value
0
8-134
ILSZ-JAM
Lv.2 Details
ON/OFF of size difference jam detection

To set ON/OFF of size difference jam detection.
0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default value
0
W/RAID
Setting of HDD Mirroring Kit installation
Lv.1 Details
To set installation condition of HDD Mirroring Kit.
Select 1: Installed when installing the HDD Mirroring Kit. Select 0:
Not installed when removing the HDD Mirroring Kit.
Use case
When installing/removing HDD Mirroring Kit
0 to 1
Default value
0
PSWD-SW
Password type set to enter service mode
Lv.1 Details
To set the type of password that is required to enter when getting into
service mode.
2 types are available: one for service technician and the other for
system administrator + service technician.
When selecting the type for system administrator + service
technician, enter the password for service technician after the
password entry by the users system administrator.
Use case
Upon request from the user who concerns security
0 to 2
0: No password, 1: Service technician, 2: System administrator +
service technician
Default value
0
SM-PSWD
Password setting for service technician
Lv.2 Details
To set password for service technician that is used when getting into
service mode.
Use case
When password is required to get into service mode
Caution
Be sure to select 1 or 2 with PSWD-SW in advance.
1 to 99999999
Default value
11111111
COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> PSWD-SW
8-134

CE/SCNR
Lv.1 Details
Dspl/set scan connector disconnect times

To display/change the number of Scanner connector disconnection
detection.
To count up every time when connector disconnection is detected.
When 0 is set, the number of detection can be reset.
Use case
When checking/clearing the number of connector disconnection
0 to 5
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
When the connector is disconnected, Check the connector is
displayed on the Control Panel.
After detecting certain times, an error code (E732-000) is displayed.
RPT2SIDE
Set of report 1-sided/2-sided output
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to use 1-sided or 2-sided for report output of service
mode.
Use case
When making 2-sided report output to reduce the number of output
pages
0 to 1
0: 1-sided, 1: 2-sided
Default value
0
BRWS-FAV
Set of service browser favorite register
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to allow registration of favorites in the browser for
service.
When 1 is set, favorites in the browser for service can be edited, and
any URLs can be accessed.
Use case
When service engineers edit favorites in the browser for service
0 to 1
Default value
0
STND-PNL
Set Upright Control Panel installation
Lv.2 Details
To set whether the Upright Control Panel is installed.
When the Upright Control Panel is installed, set 1.
Use case
At installation of the Upright Control Panel
0 to 1
Default value
0
8-135
INVALPDL
Lv.1 Details
Disable of PDL license

To disable the registered PDL license.
When 1: Disabled is set, PDL is disabled even if a PDL license
is registered. This is set to the machines installed at convenience
stores, which do not allow PDL to be used.
Use case
When prohibiting the use of PDL
0 to 1
0: Registered PDL license is enabled, 1: Disabled
Default value
0
CDS-FIRM
Set to allow firmware update by admin
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to permit update of the firmware by user
(administrator).
When 1: Enabled is set, Updater can be activated from the user
mode.
Use case
When allowing the administrator to update the firmware
Caution
Do not use it for purposes other than collecting log files. In Japan,
the firmware cannot be updated by user. Be sure to return the value
to 0 after use.
0 to 1
Default value
Supplement/memo
CDS: Content Delivery System
CDS-MEAP
Set to allow MEAP installation by admin
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to permit the user (administrator) to install MEAP
applications and enable iR options from CDS.
When 1: Enabled is set, Updater can be activated from the user
mode.
Use case
When allowing the administrator to install MEAP applications and
enable iR options from CDS
0 to 1
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled (This setting can be specified for China,
Korea and Taiwan models only.)
Default value
1
Supplement/memo
CDS-UGW
Set to allow firmware update from UGW
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to permit update of the firmware from the UGW
server.
When 1: Enabled is set, Updater accepts the operation from the
UGW server in cooperation with CDS.
Use case
When allowing update of the firmware from the UGW server
0 to 1
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
8-135

LOCLFIRM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
T-RUN-LV
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
BXNUPLOG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
SDLMTWRN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Related UI menu
JLK-PWSC
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Set to allow firmware update by file

To set whether to permit the user (administrator) to update the
firmware from the remote UI using a local file.
This update is executed as a measure for vulnerability in emergency
situations.
When allowing the administrator to update the firmware using a file
0 to 1
1
No.of keep print at Toner Cntner rplce
To set the number of prints to be kept from the indication of Toner
Container replacement until job is interrupted.
The time to keep printing varies depending on image ratio and
productivity.
When preferring to shorten the time from replacement of the Toner
Container to the recovery
0 to 1
0: Approx. 900 sheets, 1: Approx. 140 sheets (A4, 5% image ratio)
0
ON/OFF of Nup log at Inbox print
To set whether to keep Nup log at Inbox print.
When keeping Nup log at Inbox print
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
At normal service: 0, At customization: 1
Cpcty warn dspl ON/OFF: E-mail/I-Fax TX
To set whether to display the warning message when sending data
that exceeds the upper limit value for the transmission data size via
E-mail/I-Fax.
For customization
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Function Settings> Send> E-Mail/I-Fax Settings> Maximum Data
Size for Sending
ON/OFF of PCAM password auth doc scan
To set whether to scan the PCAM password authentication document
with the MEAP application.
When scanning the PCAM password authentication document
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
8-136
FAX-INT
Lv.2 Details
Set FAX RX print interruption oprtn mode

To set the mode performing interruption operation of FAX reception
print automatically.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Normal, 1: Interruption operation mode
Default value
0
CDS-LVUP
Set to allow CDS periodical update
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to allow the user (administrator) to use the periodical
update function linked with CDS.
When 1 is set, the periodical update function can be used from the
user mode.
Use case
When allowing the user to use the periodical update function
Caution
Do not set 1 in Japan. The firmware cannot be updated by user.
0 to 1
Default value
Supplement/memo
AMSOFFSW
OFF of AMS mode
Lv.1 Details
Normally, the machine enters in AMS (ACQ) mode automatically
when the following conditions are satisfied.
AMS license which is an iR option is installed.
The AMS-supported login application is activated.
When turning OFF the AMS mode, set 0.
Use case
When turning OFF the AMS mode
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enable the AMS mode.
Enter the iR option license for AMS.
Make settings to activate SSOH.
Turn OFF/ON the main power switch twice.
Press Counter button, and display the Device Configuration
screen.
Check that ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM is displayed.
4) Check that AMS mode is disabled.
Press Counter button, and display the Device Configuration
screen.
Check that ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM is not displayed.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
Supplement/memo
AMS: ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
8-136

UA-OFFSW
Lv.1 Details
ON/OFF of unified auth function

To set ON/OFF of the Unified Authentication function.
Set 0 when not preferring to use the Unified Authentication function
because of security concern.
Use case
Upon users request (not to use the Unified Authentication function)
0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
Unified Authentication: A function with which it is considered that
login authentication under it is performed by logging in it using
SSO-H.
MIB-NVTA
RFC-compatible character stringMIB write
Lv.1 Details
As default, MIB object which NVT-ASCII can be written exists in
order to link with LUI entry value. This violates RFC order, so a
problem like garbled 2-byte characters may occur in the SNMP
monitoring system, such as the 3rd vendors MPS.
Whether non-RFC-compatible character strings are written in MIB
can be set using this mode.
When 1 is set, only the character strings which are strictly compatible
with RFC are written. (Writing operation is executed from the SNMP
manager.) LUI is not linked.
Use case
Upon users request (operation with RFC-compatible system)
0 to 3
0: Compatible in a conventional manner, 1: RFC-compatible, 2 to 3:
Not used
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
RFC: Document of internet-related technical standards
NVT-ASCII: Network Virtual Terminal-ASCII
MIB-EXT
ON/OFF of link with Ex-Cont on network
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to link with External Controller on network (HewlettPackard Co.).
Use case
When linking with External Controller of Hewlett-Packard Co.
0 to 2
0: OFF, 1: ON, 2: Not used
Default value
0
8-137
SVC-RUI
Lv.1 Details
Enabling of RUI function for servicing

To set whether to enable the RUI function for servicing (not provided
to end users).
When 0 is set, the RUI function is disabled.
When setting the value other than 0, RUI function is enabled. The
value entered becomes password to use the RUI function.
Use case
When preferring to use the import function of background image file
of main menu
0 to 65535
Default value
0
LCDSFLG
Enabling of local CDS server
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to use the local CDS server.
When CDSFIRM is 1, this setting is enabled.
Use case
When using the local CDS server
Caution
When CDSFIRM is 1, this setting is enabled.
0 to 1
Default value
0
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-FIRM
Related UI menu
Management Settings> License/Other> Register/Update Software>
Software Management Setting> Setting
Supplement/memo
When local CDS is used, iW EMC/MC device firmware update plugin is required.
STNDBY-A
Setting of operation at sleep
Lv.1 Details
To set the sleep operation when pressing the Control Panel Energy
Saver Key.
Normally, the entire machine shifts to sleep mode.
When 1 is set, only the LCD backlight is turned off.
Use case
Upon users request (FCOT)
Caution
By setting 1 when the machine is not frequently used, the life may
become shorter than the estimated life.
0 to 1
0: The entire machine is in sleep mode, 1: Only the LDC backligh is
turned off
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
FCOT: First Copy Output Time
8-137

BXSHIFT
Lv.1 Details
Setting of binding at 0mm binding margin

To set whether to judge the job as a job without binding when
storing a PDL job in Inbox while the binding margin is set to 0.
By setting the binding margin to 0 mm while 0 is set, the job is
processed as without binding. Booklet in Options on the Inbox
screen can be also used.
When 1 is set, it is judged as with binding even the binding margin
is 0 mm so Booklet, which has an exclusive relationship with
binding, cannot be used.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
When storing a PDL job in Inbox while 1 is set, Booklet in Options
on the Inbox screen cannot be used.
0 to 1
0: Without binding, 1: With binding
Default value
0
SELF-CHK
Set high voltg error condtn detect func
Lv.2 Details
To set the high voltage error condition detection function.
0 to 15
0: OFF, 1: ON, 2 to 15: Not used
Default value
0
HOME-SW
Set screen displayed with Main Menu key
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to display the main menu screen or the screen
registered as the startup screen when pressing Main Menu key.
Use case
Upon users request (to change the startup screen)
0 to 1
0: Main Menu screen, 1: Screen registered as the startup screen
Default value
0
NO-LGOUT
Display/hide of logout button
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to display or hide [Logout] button.
When 0 is set, [Logout] button is displayed on the screen, and logout
with the ID key is enabled. (Normal)
When 1 is set, [Logout] button is not displayed, and logout with the
ID key is disabled.
Use case
Upon users request (for customization, etc.)
0 to 1
0: Display, 1: Hide
Default value
0
8-138
T-DLV-BK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Set of Bk-toner level displaying alarm

To set the Bk-toner level to display absence of toner message.
When changing the timing to notify the end of life according to the
usage status
Caution
Since toner level is calculated based on the developing supply count,
some errors may occur.
0 to 40
Default value
JM-ERR-D
Set of error display of 0CAx jam (DCON)
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to display 0CAF jam as the error E996-0CAF.
In the case of a jam, log cannot be obtained depending on the timing.
By selecting 1 when the jam 0CAF occurs, it is displayed as the
error E996-0CAF so that the log can be obtained.
Use case
When obtaining a log at the occurrence of 0CAF jam
0 to 1
0: Display as a jam, 1: Display as an error
Default value
0
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > JM-ERR-R
JM-ERR-R
Set of error display of 0071 jam (RCON)
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to display 0071 jam as the error E996-0071.
In the case of a jam, log cannot be obtained depending on the timing.
By selecting 1 when the jam 0071 occurs, it is displayed as the
error E996-0071 so that the log can be obtained.
Use case
When obtaining a log at the occurrence of 0071 jam
0 to 1
0: Display as a jam, 1: Display as an error
Default value
0
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > JM-ERR-D
T-8-59
8-138
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV
IMG-DEV
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV

TSPLY-SW
DRM-IDL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DV-RT-LG
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
ADJ-VPPN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Supplement/memo
DRM-IDL2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
8-139
[Not used]
Set first idle rotn time in NL Ev
To set the duration of idle rotation to be performed first time for the
day in an NL (normal temperature/low humidity) environment.
0 to 20 (0: OFF)
1 (15 seconds)
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> DRM-IDL2, DRM-IDL3
Set Developing Assembly idle rotn time
To set the duration of idle rotation of the Developing Assembly by
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> DV-RT.
As the value is incremented by 1, the duration is increased by 1
minute.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
When an image failure is not alleviated by executing idle rotation
If the duration is long, deterioration of developer or toner scattering
might occur.
1 to 20
5
COPIER> FUNCTION> MISC-P> DV-RT
Adj developing bias Vpp: Uncoated paper
To adjust Vpp of the developing AC bias for uncoated paper group.
The initial value is 1.5 kV, and as the value is decreased by 1, Vpp is
decreased by 0.1 kV (density and fogging increase).
Decrease the value when fogging or bias leak occurs, and increase
the value when the density is low or white spots occur.
When fogging, bias leak, low density, or white spots occur
-4 to 2
0
Uncoated paper group: uncoated paper/recycled paper/textured
paper/label/postcard/cotton
Set first idle rotn time in NN Ev
To set the duration of idle rotation to be performed first time for the
day in an NN (normal temperature/normal humidity) environment.
0 to 20 (0: OFF)
1 (15 seconds)
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> DRM-IDL, DRM-IDL3
ATM
Lv.2 Details
Set of highland ev voltg reduction mode

To set the highland environment voltage reduction mode in the case
that leak occurs at a high latitude.
When 1 is set, high voltage settings for the Primary Charging
Assembly, Pre-transfer Charging Assembly and developing bias are
decreased so that leak can be prevented.
Use case
When leak occurs at high latitude
0 to 1
0: Normal, 1: Voltage reduction mode
Default value
0
LWDTY-SW
ON/OFF of low duty ejection
Lv.1 Details
To set ON/OFF of low duty ejection control.
When 1 is set, developer is ejected at the time of last rotation/during
a job.
Use case
Upon users request (Reduction of toner consumption)
Caution
Be sure to get approval from the user by telling possibility that the
image density may be lowered due to deterioration of developer
when setting 0.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> LWDTYADJ
LWDTYADJ
Set low duty ejection threshold value
Lv.1 Details
To set offset of image density which becomes the threshold value for
the low duty ejection control.
The threshold value which becomes a reference differs depending
on the environment (temperature and humidity).
When a positive value is entered, the interval of low duty ejection
control becomes shorter. Lowering of image density can be
prevented, but replacement timing of the Waste Toner Container
becomes early due to the increase of toner consumption.
Use case
When density is lowered at the time of continuous output of low duty
image
-50 to 50
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> LWDTY-SW
8-139

BB-CNT
Lv.1 Details
Set Bk band output intvl: Cleaning Blade

To set the paper interval to output black band for preventing flip of
the Cleaning Blade.
When a negative value is entered, the interval to output black band
becomes shorter. The possibility that the Cleaning Blade may be
flipped is decreased, but replacement timing of the Waste Toner
Container becomes early due to the increase of toner consumption.
Use case
When flip of the Cleaning Blade occurs
-15 to 15
Default value
0
PRI-SHUT
Set Pry/Pre-trn Chg Shutter close timing
Lv.1 Details
To set the time from when the Photosensitive Drum stops to when
the Primary/Pre-transfer Charging Shutter is closed.
With the Primary/Pre-transfer Charging Shutter control, the Primary/
Pre-transfer Charging Shutter is closed after up to 255 minutes of
the stop of the Photosensitive Drum to prevent image smear due to
nitrogen oxide.
Decrease the value to close the shutter earlier when image smear
occurs first time for the day.
Depending on the value, the shutter is closed before the machine
shifts to sleep mode, so that the first copy time becomes longer for
the time to open the shutter again (approx. 13 seconds).
As the value is reduced, the life of the Primary/Pre-transfer Charging
Wire Cleaning Pad is shortened because cleaning of the Charging
Wire is performed every time the shutter is closed.
Use case
When image smear occurs
Caution
If the shutter is closed before the machine shifts to sleep mode,
the first copy time becomes longer for the time to open it again.
As the value is reduced, the life of the Primary/Pre-transfer
Charging Wire Cleaning Pad is shortened.
-7 to 0
Default value
0 (255 minutes)
8-140
TBLTCLSW
Lv.1 Details
Setting of ETB cleaning timing

To set the timing to execute ETB cleaning control.
When 1 or 2 is set, it is also executed at the time of the Charging
Wire cleaning.
As the value is increased, the soiling of the back side of paper is
decreased, but the life of the ETB is shortened and productivity is
decreased.
Use case
When the back side of paper is soiled
Caution
As the number of times of ETB cleaning is increased, the life of the
ETB is shortened and productivity is decreased.
0 to 2
0: OFF
1: At last rotation + At Charging Wire cleaning
2: At last rotation + At initial rotation + At Charging Wire cleaning
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> TBLTBIS+, TBLTBIS-, TBLTTMS
Default value
0(100uA)
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> TBLTCLSW, TBLTBIS-, TBLTTMS
TBLTBISSetting of ETB cleaning bias (-)
Lv.1 Details
To set the transfer current value to apply cleaning bias (-) at the time
of ETB cleaning.
Use case
Caution
0 to 5
Default value
0 (-50 micro A)
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> TBLTCLSW, TBLTBISP, TBLTTMS
TBLTTMS
Set ETB cleaning bias application times
Lv.1 Details
To set the number of times to apply cleaning bias at the time of ETB
cleaning.
Apply positive (+) and negative (-) cleaning bias alternately.
As the value is increased, the soiling of the back side of paper is
decreased, but the life of the ETB is shortened and productivity is
decreased.
Use case
Caution
As the greater value is set, the life of the ETB is shortened and
productivity is decreased.
1 to 10
Default value
2
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> TBLTCLSW, TBLTBISP, TBLTBIS-
8-140
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX

DRM-IDL3
Lv.1 Details
Set first idle rotn time in HH Ev

To set the idle rotation time to be performed first time for the day in
an HH (high temperature and high humidity) environment.
Use case
0 to 20 (0: OFF)
Default value
1 (45 seconds)
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-DEV> DRM-IDL, DRM-IDL2
T-8-60
8-141
IMG-FIX
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX
FIX-CLN
Lv.1 Details
Set fixing cleaning execution interval

To set the number of sheets as the intervals to execute fixing
cleaning.
By performing idle rotation of the Fixing Assembly for 5 seconds
every time a specified number of sheets are fed , remove soil
adhered on the Pressure Roller.
Set 1 when an image failure occurs. If it is not alleviated, set 2 or 3.
Because idle rotation is executed by interrupting an ongoing job, as
the short execution interval is set, productivity decreases.
Use case
When an image failure due to the Pressure Roller occurs
Caution
As the short execution interval is set, productivity decreases.
0 to 3
0: OFF, 1: 500 sheets, 2: 300 sheets, 3: 150 sheets
Default value
0
FIX-TEMP
Set fixing/productivity: Heavy paper
Lv.1 Details
To set priority between productivity and fixing by changing
temperature at which down sequence is applied to Heavy paper.
When 2 is set, fixing has priority over productivity because the
machine is likely to go into the down sequence.
When 0 is set, productivity has priority over fixing.
Use case
When changing priority between fixing and productivity for Heavy
paper
0 to 2
0: Priority on productivity (-5 degC), 1: Normal, 2: Priority on fixing (+5
degC)
Default value
1
FSPD-S1
Setting of fixing improvement mode
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to start the machine in fixing improvement mode.
When 1 to 4 is set, duration of warm-up is increased for the specified
time to increase the temperature of the Fixing Assembly.
0 to 4
0: 0 second, 1: 15 seconds, 2: 30 seconds, 3: 45 seconds, 4: 60
seconds
Default value
0
8-141

CBLTINVL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
TMP-TBL2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
TMP-TBL3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
TMP-TBL4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
TMP-TBL5
TMP-TBL6
Setting of Fixing Web Solenoid ON times

To set frequency to turn ON the Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid.
If an image failure occurs due to the soiled Pressure Roller, set 1.
If an image failure occurs due to the soiled Separation Claw, set 2.
If the life of Fixing Cleaning Web is shorter than the target (500,000
sheets) (in case of much take-up amount of web), set 3.
When an image failure due to the soiled Pressure Roller/
Separation Claw occurs
When the life of Fixing Cleaning Web is too short
0 to 3
0: Normal, 1: 1.5 times higher than normal, 2: 0.5 times higher than
normal, 3: 0.75 times higher than normal
0
Set fixing control temp table: Thin
To set the control temperature table of the Fixing Roller for 52 to 63g/
m2 size paper.
-5 to 2
-5 to -1: -5 degC, 0: 0 degC, 1 to 2: +5 degC
0
Set fixing control temp table: Heavy
To set the control temperature table of the Fixing Roller for 91 to
256g/m2 size paper.
-5 to 2
-5 to -2: -10 degC, -1: -5 degC, 0: 0 degC, 1 to 2: +5 degC
0
Set fixing control temp table: Bond
To set the control temperature table of the Fixing Roller for bond
paper.
-5 to 2
-5 to -1: -5 degC, 0 to 2: 0 degC
0
[Not used]
[Not used]
8-142
RAG-CONT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
RAG-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
FIX-DWN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
FIX-RT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Set fix smeared image ctrl mode level

To set level of the mode (skipping) to control smeared image caused
by fixing area.
When a smeared image occurs
Set RAG-SW to 1 to 3 to enable skipping.
0 to 3
0: No skipping, 1: Small skipping, 2: Medium skipping, 3: Large
skipping
0
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> RAG-SW
ON/OFF of fixing burst prevention mode
To set ON/OFF of fixing burst prevention mode (skipping) to prevent
line burst.
Select 1: ON in the case all horizontal lines are burst.
Set ON according to paper type in the case the degree of line burst
differs depending on media.
When horizontal lines burst
Set RAG-CONT to 1 to 3 to enable skipping.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> RAG-CONT
Set prdctvty reduct mode: small size
To set the speed ratio in the case of reducing productivity when
feeding small size paper.
When an image failure (crepe mark) occurs
-3 to 0
-3: 40%, -2: 60%, -1: 80%, 0: 100%
0
Set idle rotation time at last rotation
To set the idle rotation time at last rotation executed after a job is
completed.
When an image failure (crepe mark) occurs
0 to 3
0: No idle rotation, 1: 10 seconds, 2: 20 seconds, 3: 30 seconds
0
8-142

P-BETWN
Lv.1 Details
Setting of paper interval: 2-sided mode

To set the paper interval at 2-sided mode.
Use this mode when uneven gloss occurs on the Fixing Roller pitch
(126mm) on 1st side of 2-sided print.
When 1 is set, 150mm or less paper interval at 2-sided mode
becomes 150mm or more. Uneven gloss can be alleviated, but
productivity decreases.
Use case
When uneven gloss occurs on 1st side of 2-sided print
Caution
When 1 is set, productivity decreases
0 to 1
0: Normal, 1: Widening paper interval
Default value
0
FX-IMGLV
Set img qlty/prdctvty lvl:Qlty Prrty
Lv.2 Details
To set image quality/productivity level when Quality Priority is set..
When Quality Priority is selected in user mode, productivity may
be extremely decreased to prevent occurrence of image with crepe
mark.
When 0 is set, image quality is slightly decreased compared with its
of normal Quality Priority mode, but productivity improves (suitable
for text document).
When 1 is set, image quality is prioritized so image with crepe
mark does not occur but productivity decreases (suitable for photo
document).
When Quality Priority is set in user mode, this item is enabled.
Use case
Upon users request (Alleviation of image with crepe mark)
Caution
Be sure to get approval from the user by telling that the productivity
decreases to improve image quality.
0 to 2
0: Text document mode, 1 to 2: Photo document mode
Default value
0
Related UI menu
Function Settings > Common > Print Settings > Thin/Plain Paper
Printing Priority Settings
8-143
FX-WNKL
Lv.2 Details
Setting of paper wrinkle prevention mode

To set paper wrinkle prevention mode.
If the edge temperature of the Fixing Roller is lower than the center
temperature, feeding speed at the center of a paper becomes faster
than the speed at the edge so paper wrinkle occurs.
Normally, when printing to paper larger than A3 or LDR size paper
at the start of printing in a high humidity environment, control
temperature is increased by performing idle rotation. Paper wrinkle
which occurs at this time can be decreased, but first copy time
When paper wrinkle occurs with A3/LDR or larger size paper in a
normal humidity/high humidity environment, set 2. If paper wrinkle is
not alleviated with 2, set 3. (First copy time becomes longer.)
When paper wrinkle occurs with B4 or larger size paper in all
environments, set 4. If it is not alleviated with 4, set 5 or 6. (As the
value is larger, first copy time becomes longer.)
Use case
When paper wrinkles occur
Upon users request (shorten the first copy time)
Caution
When 2 to 6 is set, the first copy time becomes longer.
0 to 6
0, 1: OFF
2: When paper is A3/LDR or larger size paper in a normal humidity/
high humidity environment, idle rotation is performed for up to 10
seconds.
3: When paper is A3/LDR or larger size paper in a normal humidity/
high humidity environment, idle rotation is performed for up to 20
seconds.
4: When paper is B4 or larger size paper in all environments, idle
rotation is performed for up to 10 seconds.
Default value
1
FIX-TMP4
Set fixing/productivity: Plain paper
Lv.1 Details
To set priority between productivity and fixing by changing
temperature at which down sequence is applied to plain paper (64 to
90g/m2).
When a positive value is set, fixing has priority over productivity
because the machine is likely to go into the down sequence.
When a negative value is set, productivity has priority over fixing.
Use case
When fixing failure occurs on plain paper
When productivity is decreased due to down sequence
-2 to 2
Default value
0
8-143
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR

WEB-LIFE
Lv.1 Details
Set Fixing Web level alarm notice timing

To set the timing to notify the Web absence alarm according to the
time required for replacement of the Fixing Cleaning Web.
The maximum output number until the error message appears after
the Fixing Cleaning Web absence alarm is 3000 sheets (on a A4
size conversion basis). If a large volume of papers is output after the
appearance of the alarm message, the machine may stop due to an
error before replacing the Web.
If 0 is set, an alarm is notified when the Fixing Cleaning Web Level
Sensor detects Web absence as usual.
If the value is between 1 and 7, an alarm is notified when the Fixing
Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid counter reaches the specified value.
As the value is incremented by 1, the threshold of the counter is
increased by 50,000 sheets (on a A4 size conversion basis).
Use case
When changing the timing to notify the Web absence alarm
according to the output status
Caution
Depending on the setting value of COPIER > OPTION> IMG-FIX
> CBLTINVL, the number of estimated prints to display an alarm
differs.
0 to 7
0: Detection by the sensor, 1: Count of 500,000 sheets (on a A4 size
conversion basis), 2: 550,000 sheets, 3: 600,000 sheets, 4: 650,000
sheets, 5: 700,000 sheets, 6: 750,000 sheets, 7: 800,000 sheets
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-FIX> CBLTINVL
8-144
IMG-LSR
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR
LAPC-SW
Lv.2 Details
ON/OFF of ini rotn/last rotn APC crrct

To set ON/OFF of laser APC correction executed at initial rotation
and last rotation.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default value
0
2D-SHADE
ON/OFF of 2D shading
Lv.1 Details
To set ON/OFF of 2D shading.
Use case
0 to 1
0: OFF
1: Drum Heater, first time for the day, potential control when
recovering from sleep, 2D shading ON
Default value
0
T-8-62
T-8-61
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-LSR
8-144
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON
IMG-MCON
8-145
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON

PASCAL
Lv.1 Details
Use/no use of auto gradation adj data

To set to use/not to use the gradation adjustment data gamma LUT
that is generated by auto gradation adjustment (Full/Quick Adjust)
control.
Selection is available as to whether to use gamma LUT at the time of
image formation.
Use case
When PASCAL-related failure occurs/when identifying the cause of
PASCAL-related failure
0 to 3
0: Initial LUT is used. (Automatic gradation adjustment is not used.)
1: Auto gradation adjustment is used.
2 to 3: Not used
Default value
1
SHARP
Setting of sharpness level of image
Lv.2 Details
To set the setting level (center value) of sharpness of image.
As the value is increased, the image tends to be sharp, and as the
value is decreased, image tends to be soft.
Use case
Upon users request
1 to 5
Default value
3
DRM-H-SW
ON/OFF of Drum Heater
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF control of the Drum Heater at power-off/at sleep.
0 to 2
0: ON/OFF depending on the environment condition
1: ON
2: OFF
Default value
0
SCR-SLCT
Lv.2 Details
Halftone process in Photo Printout mode

To set halftone process (error diffusion, screen 2 types) in Photo
Printout mode when making a copy.
Change the setting if the copy image has a problem with the initial
setting (Low screen ruling).
Select 0 (error diffusion) in the case of moire (suitable for character
reproduction).
Select 2 (High screen ruling) in the case of rough dots.
Use case
When moire image or rough dots occurs on copy image
0 to 2
0: Error diffusion, 1: Low screen ruling, 2: High screen ruling
Default value
1
Related UI menu
Function Settings> Copy> Photo Printout mode
TMC-SLCT
Setting of error diffusion coefficient
Lv.2 Details
To set coefficient to be used for error diffusion process.
Specify according to the level of granularity and dot stability.
0 to 2
0: Small granularity/low dot stability
1: Small granularity/low dot stability (color mode), Large granularity/
high dot stability (B&W mode)
2: Large granularity/high dot stability
Default value
2
CAL-SW
Set calibration control execute condtn
Lv.2 Details
To set the condition to execute the calibration control.
Two types of calibration (patch detection) are available: one for
1/1 speed (for plain paper), and the other for 1/2 speed (for heavy
paper).
When 0 is set, only patch detection for 1/1 speed is executed.
When 1 is set, patch detection for both 1/1 speed and 1/2 speed is
executed, which increases the required time.
Caution
Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly.
0 to 1
0: only for 1/1 speed, 1: both for 1/1 speed and 1/2 speed
Default value
0
DH-MODE
[Not used]
8-145

VP-ART
Lv.2 Details
Setting of line art processing

To set outline processing for line art on scalable PDF.
In the outline processing, a binary image outline is extracted in the
field which is recognized as line art, and is converted into vector
data.
Specify whether to convert the binary image outline into vector data
or to recognize it as one line (as a thin line). For the thin line, the line
width can be specified.
Change this value when you want to obtain an output of a wide-width
line as one line rather than as an outline (when you want to prioritize
edit operation as a line rather than image quality).
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 99
Default value
1
VP-TXT
Setting of character vectorization
Lv.2 Details
To set vector conversion processing for text on scalable PDF.
In the vector conversion processing, a binary image outline is
extracted in the field which is recognized as text, and is converted
into vector data.
In regular vector conversion, function approximation is not used for
small text because the image quality is not changed.
When the value is changed, function approximation processing is
executed for small text, which realizes smooth text although the
image quality is changed.
Change this value when you want to prioritize smoothness in small
text.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 99
Default value
1
C-PDL-T
Setting of PDL gradation reference
Lv.2 Details
To set whether gradation or density to be prioritized as the gradation
reference for PDL.
With priority on gradation (% of halftone dots), gradation is matched
with original on the shadow area although the maximum density
decreases. With priority on density, density is always matched with
original.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Priority on gradation (% of halftone dots), 1: Priority on density
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
Abbreviation of CAL_PDL_Target
8-146
C-S-P-D
Lv.2 Details
High dens end edge crrct: PDL dens prrty

To set ON/OFF of high density trailing edge correction function at
PDL.
By selecting CAL (priority on density) in C-PDL-T, high density
trailing edge correction function is ON in normal operation; however,
set OFF as needed.
Use case
ON: When reducing jagged line and jagged outline of text
OFF: When matching density with original on high density area, or
when prioritizing density and gradation
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
1
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-MCON> C-PDL-T
Supplement/memo
Abbreviation of CAL_Shadow_PDL_Density
C-S-C-D
High density end edge crrct ON/OFF: copy
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF of high density trailing edge correction function at
copy.
With CAL of COPY, high density trailing edge correction function is
ON in normal operation; however, set OFF as needed.
Use case
ON: When reducing jagged line and jagged outline of text
OFF: When matching density with original on high density area, or
when prioritizing density and gradation
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
1
Supplement/memo
Abbreviation of CAL_Shadow_COPY_Density. When adjusting the
input signal 255 to low in the case that the density of solid area is
too high, jaggy (jagged effect of halftone) may occur to text, etc. By
entering the input signal 255 as solid, occurrence of jaggy can be
prevented.
C-SM-P-G
[Not used]
C-SM-C-G
[Not used]
WDREDUCT
Setting of white dots reduction mode
Lv.1 Details
To set the white dots reduction mode.
When 1 is set, white dots become less significant by enlarging black
dots by thin line correction.
Use case
When white dots are significant
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-MCON> VDADDCNT, HDADDCNT, LINOFST
Related UI menu
Thin line correction, horizontal line correction, and vertical line
correction in user mode
8-146
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR

VDADDCNT
Lv.1 Details
Horz added dot amnt at white dots reduct

To adjust the amount of dots added to side at white dots reduction
mode.
As the greater value is set, the size of white dot gets smaller.
When WDREDUCT is 1, this setting is enabled.
Use case
When adjusting the level of white dots reduction mode
0 to 4
Default value
1
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-MCON> WDREDUCT
HDADDCNT
Vert added dot amnt at white dots reduct
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the amount of dots added to upside at white dots reduction
mode.
As the greater value is set, the size of white dot gets smaller.
Use case
When adjusting the level of white dots reduction mode
0 to 4
Default value
0
LIN-OFST
Set special paper added dot amnt offset
Lv.1 Details
To set the offset amount of dots added to vertical/horizontal direction
when lines on special paper are thinner than those on plain paper.
When printing special paper, compared to plain paper, the amount of
dots specified with this item is added.
As the value is larger, lines become thicker.
Use case
When the line width of special paper is thinner than the one of plain
paper
0 to 4
Default value
1
T-8-63
8-147
IMG-RDR
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR
DF-BLINE
Lv.2 Details
ON/OFF of dust dtct in DADF stream read

To set ON/OFF of dust detection in DADF stream reading mode
(measures for black line).
Use case
When black line occurs due to dust on the Platen Roller
Caution
When 1: ON is set, black line is resolved, but sharpness of image
edge is decreased.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
DFDST-L1
DADF mode dust dtct level adj: ppr intvl
Lv.1 Details
To adjust dust detection level with dust detection correction control
that is executed at paper interval in DADF mode.
Reduce the value in the case of frequent display of cleaning
instruction at the time of dust detection. As the value is smaller, the
dust is less detected.
Increase the value in the case of black lines. As the value is larger,
the small dust is more likely detected.
Use case
When black line occurs due to dust
Upon users request
Caution
When increasing the value too much, the cleaning instruction screen
may appear too often since even small dust that will not be appeared
on the image can be detected.
When reducing the value too much, black lines may appear on the
image.
0 to 255
0: OFF
Default value
200
Supplement/memo
Black lines may appear on the image if there is dust. With dust
detection correction control, the image is corrected to prevent black
lines once dust is detected.
8-147

DFDST-L2
Lv.1 Details
DADF mode dust dtct level adj: after job

that is executed after the job is completed in DADF mode.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
image.
0 to 255
0: OFF
Default value
200
Supplement/memo
ABC-MODE
Adj sface digital ABC bckgd dens reduct
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the background density reduction setting level of surface
digital ABC (at B&W mode).
-1 to 4
-1: Setting of the direction which the background density reduction is
less (For photo original and complex form original)
0: Default setting
1: Setting of the direction which the background density reduction is
more
more
more
4: Background density reduction according to the density in the 5
mm portion of the image leading edge
Default value
0
8-148
ABC-MD2
Lv.1 Details
Adj back digital ABC bckgd dens reduct

To adjust the background density reduction setting level of back side
digital ABC (Auto Background Control) at B&W mode.
-1 to 4
-1: Setting of the direction which the background reduction is less (For
photo original and complex form original)
0: Default
1 to 3: Setting of the direction which the background reduction is
more
4: Background density reduction according to the density in the 5
mm portion of the image leading edge
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
Auto Background Control: A control to make the background color of
the original close to white with the image processing when reading
the image on back side with the Scanner Unit (paper back).
DF2DSTL1
DADF dust dtct lvl adj at ppr intvl:bck
Lv.1 Details
that is executed at paper interval by the Scanner Unit (paper back) in
DADF mode.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
image.
1 to 255 (Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-C1 only)
Default value
200
Supplement/memo
8-148
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK

DF2DSTL2
Lv.1 Details
Adj DADF dust dtct level at job end:bck

that is executed by the Scanner Unit (paper back) after the job is
completed in DADF mode.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
image.
1 to 255 (Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-C1 only)
Default value
200
Supplement/memo
IR-FILTR
Set scan unit with infrared cut filter
Lv.1 Details
Due to the surface texture of an original, reflected light from an
original is diffused; thus, green might be detected as reddish brown
incorrectly. The Scanner Unit with the Infrared Cut Filter installed
is set as a service part to prevent incorrect detection. Set 1 when
installing this Scanner Unit.
Use case
When green becomes reddish brown
0 to 1
0: Not supported, 1: Supported
Default value
0
T-8-64
NETWORK
COPIER > OPTION > NETWORK
RAW-DATA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
RMT-LANG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
IFAX-LIM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
SMTPTXPN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
8-149
Setting of received data print mode

To set print mode for the received image data.
This item is used to identify the cause whether its due to image data
or image processing in the case of trouble with received image.
When received image trouble occurs
Be sure to set the value back to 0: Normal print operation after
recovering from the trouble.
0 to 1
0: Normal print operation, 1: Print with original data without image
processing
0
Language setting of remote UI
To set the language on remote UI.
Upon users request
1) Switch with +/- key, and then press OK key.
ja/en/de/fr/it/es
ja: Japanese, en: English, de: German, fr: French, it: Italian, es:
Spanish
No. of max print lines at IFAX reception
To set the maximum number of lines for e-mail text to be printed
when receiving IFAX.
Setting of this item can prevent endless printing of the attached file
data in the case of receiving an error e-mail or failure in interpretation
of the context.
Selecting 0 prints the header/footer in 1 sheet when receiving e-mail
text without attached file.
When preventing endless print in the case of failure in reception
0 to 999
0: E-mail text not printed, 999: Unlimited
500
Setting of SMTP TX port number
To set SMTP transmission port number.
Upon users request
0 to 65535
25
8-149

SMTPRXPN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Setting of SMTP reception port number

To set SMTP reception port number.
Upon users request
0 to 65535
Default value
25
POP3PN
Setting of POP3 reception port number
Lv.2 Details
To set POP3 reception port number.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 65535
Default value
110
FTPTXPN
Specification of SEND port (FTP) number
Lv.1 Details
To specify address port (FTP) number for SEND.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 65535
Default value
21
NW-SPEED
Setting of network data transfer speed
Lv.2 Details
To set the data transfer speed when the service network is
connected.
When downloading the firmware through network, use 0 in the
normal operation. When fixed to 100Base-TX/10Base-T for any
reason, change the setting.
Use case
When fixing the communication speed
0 to 2
0: Auto, 1: 100Base-TX, 2: 10Base-T
Default value
0
8-150
STS-PORT
Lv.2 Details
ON/OFF of TOT sync status comctn port

To set ON/OFF for Inquiry/Response (sync)-mode status
communication port with T.O.T.
Select 1: ON in the case of connecting the PC and the machine
with the cross cable while Service NAVI is used.
Use case
When the Service NAVI is used
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> CMD-PORT
Supplement/memo
T.O.T: TUIF over TCP. Communication protocol to be used for
communication with the built-in application (UI) and the internal
application such as COPY/ SEND/ BOX, etc. (Canons own protocol).
CMD-PORT
ON/OFF TOTasync command comctn port
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF for asynchronous command communication port with
T.O.T.
Select 1: ON in the case of connecting the PC and the machine
with the cross cable while Service NAVI is used.
Use case
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> STS-PORT
Supplement/memo
T.O.T: TUIF over TCP. Communication protocol to be used for
communication with the built-in application (UI) and the internal
application such as COPY/ SEND/ BOX, etc. (Canons own protocol).
NS-CMD5
Limit CRAM-MD5 auth method at SMTP auth
Lv.2 Details
To restrict use of CRAM-MD5 authentication method at the time of
SMTP authentication.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: SMTP server-dependent, 1: Not used
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
SMTP authentication: Protocol in which user authentication
function is added to SMTP, which is the protocol to be used
for e-mail transmission. At the time of e-mail transmission, this
protocol executes authentication of the user account and the
password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e-mail
transmission only when its authenticated.
8-150

NS-GSAPI
Lv.2 Details
Limit GSSAPI auth method at SMTP auth

To restrict use of GSSAPI authentication method at the time of SMTP
authentication.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
NS-NTLM
Limit NTLM auth method at SMTP auth
Lv.2 Details
To restrict use of NTLM authentication method at the time of SMTP
authentication.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
NS-PLNWS
Limit plaintext auth at SMTP auth encry
Lv.2 Details
To restrict use of PLAIN/LOGIN authentication, which is plaintext, at
the time of SMTP authentication under the environment where the
communication packet is encrypted.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
8-151
NS-PLN
Lv.2 Details
Limit plaintext auth at SMTPauth noencry

To restrict use of PLAIN/LOGIN authentication, which is plaintext, at
the time of SMTP authentication under the environment where the
communication packet is not encrypted.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
NS-LGN
Limit LOGIN authentication at SMTP auth
Lv.2 Details
To restrict use of LOGIN authentication at the time of SMTP
authentication.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
MEAP-PN
HTTP port No.setting of MEAP application
Lv.2 Details
To set HTTP port number of MEAP application.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
Do not specify port 8080 when the Print Server is connected.
Otherwise, you cannot browse the device RUI in which MEAP
authentication application is running (Port 8080 is reserved for
redirection of EFI Controller to the iR side.)
0 to 65535
Default value
8000
8-151

RMT-LGIN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Supplement/memo
CHNG-STS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
CHNG-CMD
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
MEAP-SSL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
LPD-PORT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Supplement/memo
Set to allow remote login to SSH server

To set whether to allow remote login from the remote host (SSH
client: DA) to debug console of the SSH server.
As needed (This mode is used for the Japanese models only and not
used with overseas models (outside Japan)).
This item is enabled when the setting value of SSH-SW is ON.
0 to 1
1
COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> SSH-SW
DA: Digital Accessory
Set of TOT status connection port number
To set the port number for status connection with T.O.T.
1 to 65535
20010
COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> STS-PORT
Set of TOT command connection port No.
To set the port number for command connection with T.O.T.
1 to 65535
20000
COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> CMD-PORT
HTTPS port setting of MEAP
To set the port of HTTPS server in the case of using SSL with HTTP
of MEAP.
When specifying the setting of HTTPS port for MEAP
0 to 65535
8443
Setting of LPD port number
To set the LPD port number.
Upon users request
1 to 65535
515
LPD port: Network port for TCP/IP communication when making
prints through network.
8-152
WUEV-SW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
WUEV-INT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
WUEV-POT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
WUEV-RTR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Setting of sleep notification execution

To set whether to notify the sleep mode to the application
(imageWARE, etc) on the network when shifting to/recovering from
the sleep mode.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Notified, 1: Not notified
0
Setting of sleep notification interval
To set the interval of sleep notification.
Upon users request
This is active when COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> WUEV-SW is
set to 0: Notified.
60 to 65535
600
COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> WUEV-SW
Port number setting for sleep notice
To set port number of the PC to notify the sleep mode.
Upon users request
set to 0: Notified.
1 to 65535
11427
Setting of sleep notification range
To set the number of available routers to the target for sleep
notification.
Upon users request
set to 0: Notified.
0 to 254
3
8-152

WUEN-LIV
Lv.2 Details
Recovery time setting after sleep notice

To set the time from the sleep start from network without job
assignment until the mode is shifted to the sleep mode.
Use case
When setting the startup time after sleep notification
10 to 600
Default value
15
IFX-CHIG
Set operation by IFAX recv mail content
Lv.1 Details
To set the number of characters for the IFAX received mail content,
so that the mail is not printed/forwarded when the characters in the
text is less than the number of specified characters.
This machine can output blank paper because some senders send
e-mail text consists of linefeed codes only. In such case, specify 2
(number of characters) so that there will be no output of blank paper.
In the case of specifying any number other than 0, header/footer is
printed/forwarded in 1 sheet only if the e-mail (body) text is less than
the specified value while no TIFF file is attached.
As the value is incremented by 1, the number of target characters in
e-mail body text is increased by 1 character.
Use case
When reducing print of blank paper due to e-mail received by IFAX
Caution
Be sure to get approval from the user by telling that there will be no
print of e-mail (body) text if the number of characters is less than the
specified value.
0 to 999
0: E-mail (body) text is not ignored.
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
1 Japanese Kanji character is calculated as 2 bytes, and the control
codes (such as linefeed code, etc) are included in the number of
characters.
DNSTRANS
Setting of DNS transfer priority
Lv.1 Details
To set priority order of the protocol (IPv4/IPv6) to be used for DNS
query.
In the case of using both IPv6 and IPv4 while the DNS server
supports IPv4, it takes time because of timeout when executing
DNS query with priority on IPv6. Giving priority on query by IPv4 can
shorten the time.
Use case
When it takes time to execute DNS query with priority on IPv6
because the DNS server supports IPv4
0 to 1
0: IPv4, 1: IPv6
Default value
1
8-153
PROXYRES
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
WOLTRANS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
802XTOUT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
IKERETRY
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Supplement/memo
Setting of proxy response to Windows

To set whether to provide proxy response or return the device status
when an inquiry is received via Windows while the device is in sleep
mode.
When executing status response for query from Windows correctly
0 to 1
0: No proxy response, 1: Proxy response
1
Setting of sleep recovery protocol
To set the protocol for recovery from sleep mode according to the
value of WOL (Wake On LAN) trans.
Reception of a specific network packet is one of the requirements for
the device to recover from sleep mode.
When the number of network protocols supported by the device
increases, the types of network packets which activate recovery from
sleep mode vary. However, there is a possibility that the existing
network protocol is actually used.
Select the type of network packet which activates recovery from
sleep mode according to the environment where the device is used.
When selecting protocol for sleep recovery
1 to 3
1: WSD and SNMP, 2: WSD and CPCA, 3: CPCA and SNMP
1
Set of IEEE802.1X authentication timeout
To set timeout value for IEEE802.1X authentication.
If the device executes 802.1X authentication, change the wait time
for response from the authentication server.
When response from the authentication server is slow/fast
10 to 120
30
Setting of IKE retry times
To set the number of retries in the case of no response from the
communication target at the time of IKE packet transmission.
Upon users request
0 to 3
2
IKE: Internet Key Exchange
8-153

SPDALDEL
Lv.2 Details
Initialization of SPD value

To initialize all the SPD values that are under management.
SPD values can be initialized without clearing SRAM.
Use case
At the time of SPD value mismatch when IPSec Board is added
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
SPD: Database that manages SA (Security Association).
SPD value is managed when IPSec Board is used. Normally, SRAM
needs to be cleared in the case of mismatch in SPD value.
NCONF-SW
ON/OFF of Network Configurator function
Lv.1 Details
To set ON/OFF of Network Configurator function.
If the user does not use the function, select OFF to prevent remote
attack through network.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
1
Supplement/memo
Network Configurator function is a function to be used for
communication with NetSpot Device Installer, etc., and the network
setting can be changed from the remote.
IKEINTVL
Setting of IKE retry interval
Lv.1 Details
To set retry interval in the case of no response from the
communication target at the time of IKE packet transmission.
Use case
Upon users request
1 to 10
Default value
5
Supplement/memo
IKE: Internet Key Exchange
IPSDEBLV
Setting of IPSec debug level
Lv.2 Details
For R&D use
8-154
SP-LINK
Lv.1 Details
Mode setting at 1W sleep

Switch to execute 10base-T standby as default to realize the standby
power 1W in sleep mode.
Use case
When shifting to sleep mode after negotiation (same as conventional
machines)
0 to 1
0: Shift to sleep mode with 10base-T
1: Shift to sleep mode after negotiation
Default value
0
LM-LEVEL
Set of SMB client authentication method
Lv.1 Details
To set the authentication method (LM, NTLMv1, NTLMv2) that the
SMB client uses for authentication.
In SMB authentication, authentication is generally made by
the authentication method with higher level, and if it fails, the
authentication level is lowered. (NLTMv2 => NLTMv1 => LM)
It is possible to limit the authentication level by setting 1 or 2 to avoid
using the authentication method with lower level.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 2
0: Authentication is made by LM, NTLMv1 and NTLMv2
1: Authentication is made by NTLMv1 and NTLMv2
2: Authentication is made by NTLMv2
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
Windows NT LAN Manager authentication: A user authentication
method for network logon, which was generally used in the OS for
Windows NT Series prior to Windows NT 4.0
AFS-JOB
Set of FAX server job reception port
Lv.1 Details
To set the reception port of the fax server to which a fax client sends
jobs.
Use case
When changing the job reception port of the fax server
0 to 65535
Default value
20317
COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> AFC-EVNT
AFC-EVNT
Set of FAX client event reception port
Lv.1 Details
To set the event notification reception port of a fax client.
Use case
When changing the event notification reception port of a fax client
0 to 65535
Default value
29400
COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> AFS-JOB
8-154

ILOGMODE
Lv.1 Details
8-155
Setting of IP address block mode

To set all protocols or TCP/UDP/ICMP unicast as the target of IP
block.
When 0 is set, the machine responds to ARP, ICMP multicast and
broadcast which have no direct relation, and consequently the
number of logs is increased.
When 1 is set, the machine filters TCP, UDP and ICMP unicast only.
Use case
Upon users request
Adj/set/operate method 0 to 3
0: All protocols support mode
1: TCP/UDP/ICMP unicast support mode
2, 3: Not used
Default value
0
ILOGKEEP
Set of IP address block log hold time
Lv.1 Details
To set the retention time from the log time of IP block.
When access is made again from a same IP address which was
blocked before, if it is within the retention time of the previous log, its
log is not recorded.
If access is frequently made from a same IP address, the log record
of the UI might be filled with its logs. If the user considers that a
single log for a same IP address is enough, set the longer retention
time.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 48
0: 1 minute (special mode)
1 to 48: 1 hour to 48 hours
Default value
1
IPTBROAD
Set to allow broad/multicast TX
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to permit transmission of broadcast packets and
multicast packets.
Transmission of broadcast packets and multicast packets is
permitted without specifying an exception address. It is permitted
within the device even if it is rejected in the default setting of the
IPv4/v6 transmission filter.
Set 1: Disabled when the user does not want to send them.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 5
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled, 2 to 5: Not used
Default value
0
PFWFTPRT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
PRNIPBLK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Related UI menu
IPMTU
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DDNSINTV
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Set of RST reply at IP filter FTP SEND

When FTP SEND is executed using an IP filter by which packets
from a specific remote PC are rejected, SYN is returned to the port
113 if the PC supports authentication of the FTP port 113. However,
since the IP filter blocks the packets, the block logs are increased
and the performance is lowered.
When 1 is set, RST is returned to the port 113 without blocking
packets.
When executing FTP SEND against the OS which supports
authentication of the FTP port 113 while the IP filter is enabled
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
ON/OFF of IP address block function
To set ON/OFF of IP address block function.
When 1 is set, IP Address Range Settings and RX/Print Range
screen is displayed on the Control Panel.
When using the IP address block function
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Preferences> Network> TCP/IP Settings> IPv4 Settings/IPv6
Settings> IP Address Range Settings> RX/Print Range
Setting of MTU size
To set MTU size of network packet.
This item is used when performing SEND communication between
locations connected with Ethernet in a field environment where MTU
black hole problem occurs.
When MTU black hole problem occur
0: OFF, 1: ON
10
Set of DDNS periodical update interval
DNS registration is executed only once at start-up with the current
iR, so the registered contents are deleted in an environment where
the DNS server settings are deleted at intervals.
To set the interval of DDNS periodical update for not deleting the
registered contents.
When the DNS server settings are deleted at intervals
0 to 48
0: No periodical update, 1: 1-hour interval, 2: 2-hour interval, ..., 47:
47-hour interval, 48: 48-hour interval
24
T-8-65
8-155
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > USER
USER
COPIER > OPTION > USER

COPY-LIM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
SLEEP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
SIZE-DET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
COUNTER1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
COUNTER2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
8-156
Setting of upper limit for copy

To set the upper limit value for copy.
Upon users request
1 to 9999
9999
Setting of auto sleep function
To set ON/OFF of auto sleep function.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
1
ON/OFF of original size detect function
To set ON/OFF of original size detection function.
Upon users request (glare of the scan lamp, etc)
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
1
Display of software counter 1
To display counter type for software counter 1 on the Counter Check
screen.
Upon user/dealers request
Display only. No change is available.
Setting of software counter 2
To set counter type for software counter 2 on the Counter Check
screen.
0 to 999
COUNTER3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
COUNTER4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
COUNTER5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
COUNTER6
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DATE-DSP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Related UI menu

screen.
0 to 999
screen.
0 to 999
screen.
0 to 999
0
screen.
0 to 999
0
Setting of data/time display format
To set date/time display format according to the country or region.
After the display format is set with this mode, the order of date is
reflected to the followings: Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings >
Date/Time Settings, and report output.
Upon users request
0 to 2
0: YYMM/DD, 1: DD/MMYY, 2: MM/DD/YY
Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > Date/Time Settings
8-156

MB-CCV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Control card usage limit for Mail Box

To restrict use of control card for Mail Box.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Unlimited, 1: Limited
Default value
1
CONTROL
Charge setting of PDL job
Lv.1 Details
To set charge count transmission of PDL job to the connecting
charging management device (Coin Manager or non-Canon-made
control card).
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: No charge, 1: Charge
Default value
0
B4-L-CNT
Count setting of B4 size
Lv.1 Details
To set B4 count with software counter 1 to 8 as to whether B4 is
counted as large size or small size.
Selecting 1 counts B4 or larger size paper as large size while paper
smaller than B4 size as small size.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Small size, 1: Large size
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> SC-L-CNT
TRY-STP
Set of Fin Tray output suspension ref
Lv.2 Details
To set the reference which judges to suspend outputting to Finisher
Tray.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: At detection of full tray, 1: At detection of height
Default value
0
8-157
MF-LG-ST
Lv.2 Details
Display/hide of long strip mode

To set whether to display or hide the [Long Original] button.
When 1 is set, [Long Original] button is displayed in Copy > Options
screen and the long strip paper becomes available.
Use case
Upon users request (use of long strip original or long strip paper)
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
0
Related UI menu
Copy > Options
Supplement/memo
Up to 630mm length paper is supported when DADF is used.
CNT-DISP
Display/hide of serial No.
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to display or hide the serial No. on the Counter Check
screen.
Use case
When setting to display/hide serial No. on the Counter Check screen.
0 to 1
0: Display, 1: Hide
Default value
0
PH-D-SEL
Set dither matrix at screen processing
Lv.2 Details
To set the screen dither matrix to be used for halftoning processing
at the time of copy output, B&W Inbox scan output and B&W SEND
output.
When moire occurs frequently, set to 1: 141 lines.
When the setting is changed, the number of PG lines to be output at
PASCAL control is also changed.
Use case
When moire frequently occurs at the time of copy output, B&W
Inbox scan output and B&W SEND output. Especially when moire
frequently occurs in the halftone density area of photo and image
gradation areas
0 to 1
0: 134 lines, 1: 141 lines
Default value
1
COPIER> OPTION> USER> PH-D-SL2
8-157

COPY-JOB
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
OP-SZ-DT
Lv.2 Details
Default value
NW-SCAN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
HDCR-DSP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Supplement/memo
Setting of copy job reservation

To set to enable/disable copy job reservation when the Card Reader/
Coin Manager is used.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
0
Orgnl size dtct ON/OFF at copyboard open
To set ON/OFF of original size detection while the Copyboard is
opened.
When 0: OFF is set, enter original size manually from the Control
Panel.
When 1: ON is set, original size is detected automatically.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Setting of network scan function usage
To set to enable/disable use of network scan function.
Upon users request
Do not change this mode in Japan.
For PS/PCL machines for overseas (outside Japan), fix the setting
value as 1: Enabled. For others, permit the use.
0 to 1
Setting of HDD complete delete method
To set data deletion method of HDD data complete deletion function.
When switching the deletion method in HDD data complete deletion
mode
1 to 4
1: 1-time deletion with 0 data, 2: 1-time deletion with random data, 3:
3-time deletion with random data, 4: DOD
1
HDD data complete deletion function: a function to completely delete
data in HDD by overwriting with 0 (null) data or random data to the
file data when logically deleting file on HDD (deleting management
information data).
8-158
JOB-INVL
Lv.2 Details
Job intvl setting at interruption copy

To set output interval between jobs at the time of interruption copy.
Sorting is difficult after interruption copy because of the continuous
output of the next job. Paper interval becomes longer when starting
pickup for the next job after the last sheet of the previous job is
delivered.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 2
0: Continuous output of the interruption copy and the next job
1: Starting pickup for the next job after the interruption copy is
delivered all.
2: Starting pickup for the next job after the previous job is delivered
all. (For all jobs)
Default value
0
TAB-ROT
Set of landscape img rotn at PDL:tab ppr
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to rotate landscape image by 180 degrees when PDL
print is made on tab paper.
When 1: Rotated is set, image is rotated.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Not rotated, 1: Rotated
Default value
0
PR-PSESW
Display/hide of output Stop button
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to display or hide [Stop] button on the Status Monitor
screen.
Use case
Upon users request
When promptly stopping the print job in operation or under
reservation
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
8-158

IDPRN-SW
Lv.1 Details
Charge target job set of dept mngm cntr

To set the job type that advances the department management
counter.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0:
PRINT category: Inbox Print, Report Print, Send Local Print, PDL
Print
COPY category: COPY
1:
PRINT category: Report Print, Send Local Print, PDL Print
COPY category: COPY, Inbox Print
Default value
0
PCL-COPY
Set of PCL COPIES command control method
Lv.2 Details
To set the binder control method of COPIES command with PCL.
Select whether to use the control method of Canon-made PCL or
use the same control method of non-Canon-made PCL.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 65535
0: Control method of Canon-made PCL (following the value of
COPIES command that is specified for each page to control on a
page basis)
1: Control method of non-Canon-made PCL (handling the value
of COPIES command, which is specified for page 1 at the time of
Collate mode, as bind figure while the value of COPIES command
for the next page or later is invalid. Same control applies as Canonmade PCL at the time of non-sorted mode)
2 to 65535: For future use
Default value
0
8-159
CNT-SW
Lv.1 Details
Set default dspl items on charge counter

To set default display items of the charge counter on the Counter
Check screen.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
Do not use this mode overseas (outside Japan).
0 to 2
For Japan
0: Counter 1 - Total 1: 101
1: Counter 1 - Total 2: 102, Counter 2 - Copy (Total 2): 202, Counter
3 - Total A2: 127
2: Not used
For UL
0: Counter 1 - Total 1: 101, Counter 2 - Total (Large): 103, Counter 3
- Copy (Total 1): 201, Counter 4 - Copy (Large): 203
1: Counter 1 - Total 2: 102, Counter 2 - Copy (Total 2): 202
2: Not used
Default value
0
TAB-ACC
Auto cassette change set for tab paper
Lv.1 Details
To set to enable/disable auto cassette change when tab paper runs
out.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
Be sure to instruct the user to thoroughly comply the following:
Use tab paper with the same number of tabs.
Set tab paper.
Be sure to comply the above; otherwise, proper print is not available
and it can cause soil inside the machine because of toner.
0 to 1
0: Auto cassette change disabled, 1: Auto cassette change enabled
Default value
0
BCNT-AST
Set of box print charge target job
Lv.1 Details
To set the job type that advances the count in box print with NE
Controller (ASSIST).
Use case
When switching the job type that is subject to counting of the box
print with NE Controller
0 to 1
0: PDL job, 1: Copy job
Default value
0
8-159

PRJOB-CP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Supplement/memo
DOC-REM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DPT-ID-7
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
RUI-RJT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Set count TX at RX/report print

To set to enable/disable a page-basis count pulse transmission to the
charging management device at the time of reception print or report
print.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: No transmission, 1: Transmission
0
Charging management device: Coin Manager, Non-Canon-made
control card
Display/hide of original removal message
To set whether to display or hide the message to remove original
when scanning with DADF without opening/closing DADF after
scanning with the Copyboard.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
Password entry set at dept ID reg/auth
To set whether to require a password entry at the time of registration/
authentication of department ID.
With the setting to require entry, entry of 7-digit password is required
as well as entry of department ID.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Department ID only, 1: 7-digit (password) entry
0
Connct set at invalid auth from remoteUI
To set to disconnect HTTP port when the machine receives invalid
authentication from remote UI 3 times.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Continued connection, 1: Disconnected
0
8-160
CTM-S06
Lv.2 Details
Set of password delete from export file

To set to delete password for file transmission address from export
file.
With the setting to delete password, the password of file transmission
target is deleted at the time of exporting address book data from
remote UI.
Use case
Upon users request
When avoiding information leak
0 to 1
0: Retained, 1: Deleted
Default value
0
FREG-SW
Dspl/hide of MEAP counter free rgst area
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to display or hide the free register area of MEAP
counter for SEND
Use case
At trouble analysis
Caution
Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the
Quality Support Division.
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
Individual count-up (counter advance) of MEAP application is
available in the free register area of MEAP counter.
IFAX-SZL
Setting of IFAX send size limit
Lv.2 Details
To set for restricting data size at the time of IFAX transmission that
does not go through the server.
With the setting to restrict the data size, there will be #830 error in
the case of sending data that exceeds the upper limit value.
In the case that the data goes through the server, the size of
transmission data is always restricted.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Limited, 1: Not limited (Restriction applies when data goes through
the server.)
Default value
1
Related UI menu
Function Settings > Send > E-Mail/I-Fax Settings > Maximum Data
Size for Sending
Supplement/memo
Specify the upper limit value for transmission data size in user mode.
8-160

IFAX-PGD
Lv.2 Details
Set page split TX at IFAX Simple mode TX

To set to enable/disable split-data transmission on a page basis in
the case that the transmission size in IFAX Simple mode exceeds
the upper limit value.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
In the case to enable split-data transmission, be sure to get approval
from the user by explaining the following:
No guarantee for page order on the reception side
There is a possibility of interruption of other received jobs between
pages.
0 to 1
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> CLEANING> W-CLN-P
Related UI menu
Function Settings > Send > E-Mail/I-Fax Settings > Maximum Data
Size for Sending
Supplement/memo
Specify the upper limit value for transmission data size in user mode.
MEAPSAFE
Setting of MEAP safe mode
Lv.2 Details
To set safe mode for MEAP platform.
MPSF is displayed on the Control Panel in safe mode.
In safe mode, MEAP application is stopped while just the system
application, which starts with initial state, is activated. This mode
enables obtaining log for cause analysis of MEAP failure.
Use case
Perform system recovery processing when MEAP platform fails to
be activated due to resource confliction between MEAP applications,
service registration or use order.
0 to 1
0: Normal mode, 1: Safe mode
Default value
0
AFN-PSWD
Access limit setting to user mode
Lv.2 Details
To set to restrict password entry when accessing to the user mode.
With the setting to enable this mode, password entry of system
administrator is required after pressing Settings/Registration key.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Password is not required, 1: Password is required
Default value
0
8-161
PTJAM-RC
Lv.2 Details
Auto reprint setting at PDL print jam

To set to automatically restart printing after jam recovery that occurs
with PDL print.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Not automatically reprinted, 1: Automatically reprinted
Default value
1
PDL-NCSW
Card mngm setting for PDL print job
Lv.2 Details
To set to make PDL print job to be subject to card management by
the Card Reader.
With the setting to enable this mode, PDL print is available only
when the card ID of the card inserted to the Card Reader matches
the department ID.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: PDL print is available with no card inserted.
1: PDL print is available only when the card ID matches the
department ID in the case that the card is inserted.
Default value
0
SLP-SLCT
Usage setting of network applications
Lv.2 Details
With the setting to use network-related application, the machine can
be recovered through network because it does not move to sleep
mode 1.
For this machine to recover from sleep mode 1 through network,
a particular packet needs to be received; however, the existing
network-related application does not send this packet. With the
setting not to use the network-related application, this machine
cannot recover from sleep mode 1 through network when it gets into
sleep mode 1.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
0 to 1
0: Not used (Shift to sleep mode 1 is available.)
1: Used (Shift to sleep mode 1 is not available.)
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
Network-related application: NetSpot Accountant, imageWARE
8-161

PS-MODE
Lv.2 Details
Setting of PS print line drawing

Details To set the line drawing processing at PS print.
In case that line width differs according to the print position, when 8
is set, PostScript interpreter automatically adjusts the line width.
Use case
Use case When right and left ruled lines are different in width
0 to 65535
8: Auto adjustment of line width
0 to 7, 9 to 65535: Spare
Default value
0
CNCT-RLZ
Setting of connection serialize function
Lv.2 Details
Connection serialize is a function to assure job grouping function of
imageWARE Output Manager Select Edition V1.0.
The setting to enable this mode can avoid job rearrangement
because the machine does not receive job data from other
connection until it completes job data reception from the current
connection.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
Connection: Connection to be established through network between
multiple hosts (PC, etc).
Job grouping function: A function of imageWARE Output Manager
Select Edition V1.0. This is to prevent job interruption from other PC
by group job (sending multiple jobs in 1 session at job transmission).
JA-FUNC
ON/OFF of job archive function
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF of job archive function.
Caution
Changing this mode is not available in service mode, but reference is
available (in service mode).
This mode is available only with the MEAP program that supports job
archive.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
8-162
JA-JOB
Lv.2 Details
Setting of job archive target job

To set the job type subject to job archive.
With the job archive function enabled, archive operation is executed
when executing the target job.
Caution
archive.
0: N/A, 3: Limited to FAX/IFAX, 0xFFFFFFFF: All jobs
Default value
0
COPIER > OPTION > USER > JA-FUNC
JA-RESTR
Setting of job archive limit items
Lv.2 Details
To set restriction items for job archive specification.
With job archive function enabled, follow the setting to execute
operation to restrict specification.
Caution
archive.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
32 specification restrictions with Bit definition
Bit0: Function to obtain image file (0: OFF, 1:ON)
Bit1: Function to compose form registration (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Bit2: Function to edit document (0:OFF, 1: ON)
Default value
0
COPIER > OPTION > USER > JA-FUNC
LDAP-SW
Retrieval condition set for LDAP server
Lv.1 Details
To set the condition to search e-mail address, etc. from LDAP server.
Use case
When specifying condition to search e-mail address, etc. from LDAP
server
0 to 5
0: Includes the next, 1: Not include the next, 2: Equivalent to the
next, 3: Not equivalent to the next, 4: Starts with the next, 5: Finishes
with the next
Default value
4
Supplement/memo
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol): Registering LDAP
server enables to search e-mail address, etc. from LDAP server and
the result can be registered in the Address Book, etc. Registration is
available by the following: Set Destination > Register LDAP Server
8-162

FROM-OF
Lv.1 Details
Deletion of mail senders address

To set whether to delete the senders address (From) at the time of
e-mail transmission.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Retained, 1: Deleted
Default value
0
DOM-ADD
Additional entry of mail destn domain
Lv.2 Details
To set to automatically add the domain specified in user mode to the
sending address (To) entered at the time of e-mail transmission.
If specifying xxx.com as a domain in user mode in advance, just
entering aaa enables to display aaa@xxx.com when sending
e-mail.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Not added, 1: Added
Default value
0
FILE-OF
File send prohibition to entered address
Lv.1 Details
To set to prohibit address entry at the time of file transmission.
File transmission is not available by entering the address because of
no display of File on the transmission screen.
The addresses already registered in the Address Book can be used.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
To restrict addresses for transmission, be sure to manually delete
them because the addresses registered in the Address Book can be
used.
0 to 1
Default value
0
8-163
MAIL-OF
Lv.1 Details
Mail send prohibition to entered address

To set to prohibit address entry at the time of e-mail transmission.
E-mail transmission is not available by entering the address because
of no display of E-Mail on the transmission screen.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
used.
0 to 1
Default value
0
IFAX-OF
IFAX send prohibition to entered address
Lv.1 Details
To set to prohibit address entry at the time of I-Fax transmission.
IFAX transmission is not available by entering the address because
of no display of I-Fax on the transmission screen.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
used.
0 to 1
Default value
0
LDAP-DEF
Initial condtn set of LDAP server search
Lv.1 Details
To set initial condition for search target attribute that is specified at
the time of LDAP server Details search.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 6
0: Name, 1: E-mail, 2: FAX, 3: Organization, 4: Organization unit, 5:
No registration 1 (any setting), 6: No registration 2 (any setting)
Default value
0
COPIER > OPTION > USER > LDAP-SW
8-163

FREE-DSP
Lv.2 Details
Display/hide of charge disable screen

To set whether to display or hide the Use Charge Management
screen for switching between charge and no charge.
The hardware switch for switching charge/no charge in the Coin
Manager enables the mode in which all the services are available
for free (store manager mode) by temporarily releasing the charging
system.
Even without the hardware switch, the mode can be switched
with the software switch when it is set to display the Use Charge
Management screen in Settings/Registration.
Use case
When enabling all the services to be provided for free by temporarily
releasing the charging system
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
0
Related UI menu
Management Settings > Charge Management > Use Charge
Management
TNRB-SW
Display/hide of Toner Container counter
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to display the Toner Container counter on the Counter
Check screen.
Use case
When not showing the screen to users
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
0
HDCR-DSW
Dspl/hide of HDD complete delete ON/OFF
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to display or hide Hard Disk Data Complete Deletion
in user mode.
With this setting, HDD data complete deletion function is available
with ON/OFF button on the screen.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
Related UI menu
Management Settings > Data Management > HDD Data Complete
Deletion > Hard Disk Data Complete Deletion
8-164
DK1-ASST
Lv.1 Details
Setting of machines Deck Air Heater

To set the condition to turn ON the machines Deck Air Heater for air
floatation.
When the media is switched from non-coated paper to coated paper,
pickup operation does not start until the Air Heater for air floatation
reaches the specified temperature. To shorten the wait time, set to
non media-dependent.
When the use environment is near the threshold for turning ON/OFF
the Air Heater, switching occurs frequently, which increases the wait
time. To shorten the wait time, set to Always ON.
Use case
When receiving a request to shorten the wait time
Caution
When setting non media-dependent, be sure to receive approval
from the user in advance after explaining that there is a possibility
that transfer performance for non-coated paper may decrease.
When setting Always ON, be sure to receive approval from the
user in advance after explaining that there is a possibility that
transfer performance may decrease if humidity decreases.
0 to 2
0: Media and environment condition-dependent
1: Environment condition-dependent (No media-dependent)
2: Always Air Heater ON (No environment/media-dependent)
Default value
0
SNMP-COA
Inside comty name SNMPaccess limit:admin
Lv.2 Details
To restrict SNMP access by the community name (administrator
right) that is kept internally.
This machine internally retains the community name (administrator
right) other than the SNMP community name that is specified in
user mode. Canon-made utility software, such as NetSpot, uses this
community name.
Because of security concern, select 0/1 in the case to restrict SNMP
access with the internal community name.
Use case
When restricting SNTP access with the community name
(administrator right) that is retained internally
0 to 2
0: OFF, 1: Read only, 2: Read/Write
Default value
1
Related UI menu
Preferences > Network > SNMP Settings > Community Name 1
Settings
8-164

SCALL-SW
Lv.1 Details
Display/hide of repair request button

To set whether to display or hide the repair-request button on the
Control Panel.
Use case
When the sales company supports service by the repair-request
button
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
0
SCALLCMP
Set of repair request complete notice
Lv.1 Details
With this setting enabled, a notification of repair completion is sent
to UGW server to clear the repair-request status that is retained
internally.
Use case
Service technician uses this mode after completing repair.
0 to 1
Default value
0
USBH-DSP
Display/hide of Use USB Host
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to display Preferences > External Interface > USB
Settings > Use USB Host.
By selecting 1: Display, whether to use USB host on USB Settings
screen can be selected.
Use case
When switching to display or hide Use USB Host on USB Settings
screen
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
0
Related UI menu
Preferences > External Interface > USB Settings > Use USB Host
8-165
USBM-DSP
Lv.2 Details
Dspl/hide of USB ex-memory device driver

Settings > Use MEAP Driver for USB External Device.
By selecting 0: Hide, the item is not displayed, and the user
administrator cannot change the setting of the MEAP driver for the
USB external memory device.
Use case
When prohibiting the user administrator to change the setting of
Use MEAP Driver for USB External Device, set 0 after the specified
setting is completed.
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
Related UI menu
Preferences> External Interface> USB Settings> Use MEAP Driver
for USB External Device
USBI-DSP
Dspl/hide of USB input device driver set
Lv.2 Details
Settings > Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device.
By selecting 0: Hide, the item is not displayed, and the user
administrator cannot change the setting of the MEAP driver for the
USB input device.
Use case
When prohibiting the user administrator to change the setting of Use
MEAP Driver for USB Input Device, set 0 after the specified setting
is completed.
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
Related UI menu
Preferences > External Interface > USB Settings > Use MEAP Driver
for USB Input Device
CTCHKDSP
Display/hide of counter print
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to display or hide Print List on the Counter Check
screen.
Model name, model number information, counter check date and
counter information can be output as a total count management
report.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
1
8-165

DFLT-ADJ
Lv.1 Details
Tgt Auto Adj Gradation initial dspl set

To set the initial display (highlight in blue) of the target Full Adjust/
Quick Adjust items on Auto Adjust Gradation screen of user mode.
This setting is enabled when EFI Controller is connected or only on
the copy model which Adobe PS/PDF is available.
When 0 is set, the adjustment item is not displayed.
When 1 to 3 is set, the target adjustment item (Copy/Printer/Both) is
displayed to select (highlighted in blue).
Use case
When switching the initial display at the time of Auto Adjust Gradation
0 to 3
0: Adjustment item is not displayed.
1: Copy in the target adjustment items is selected.
2: Printer in the target adjustment items is selected.
3: Both in the target adjustment items is selected.
Default value
0
Related UI menu
Settings/Registration> Adjustment/Maintenance> Auto Adjust
Gradation
USBR-DSP
Dspl/hide of USB infrared device driver
Lv.2 Details
Settings > Use MEAP Driver for USB Infrared Device.
Use case
When prohibiting the user administrator to change the setting of
Use MEAP Driver for USB Infrared Device, set 0 after the specified
setting is completed.
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
0
Related UI menu
Preferences > External Interface > USB Settings > Use MEAP Driver
for USB Infrared Device
POL-SCAN
Dspl/hide Rights Management Server set
Lv.1 Details
When 1: Display is set, the Rights Management Server function
screen is displayed.
While the Rights Management Server function is a standard feature,
it is possible to hide if not necessary.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
8-166
PH-D-SL2
Lv.2 Details
Set halftone process in text/photo mode

When copying or B&W scanning to Inbox in text/photo mode,
halftone processing of the image which reproduces gradation of text
and photo judgment areas can be specified with this setting.
Set to 1 when jaggy occurs or request to use the same halftoning
method (text area) as conventional one is raised.
Set to 2 when moire occurs frequently or request to use the same
halftoning method as conventional B&W MFP method is raised.
Even 0 is set, TBIC is used for text judgment area and low screen
ruling for photo judgment area at the time of B&W Inbox scan.
The setting is disabled when the B&W Inbox scanning density is set
to auto.
Use case
When jaggy occurs on the edge of text or thin lines at copy output.
Especially when jaggy occurs in the text or thin lines (text in
halftone dots) of the area where gradation in the halftone density
is expressed like photo, graphics, etc.
When moire occurs frequently at the time of copy or B&W
Inbox scan Especially when moire frequently occurs in the area
where gradation in the halftone density is expressed like photo,
graphics, etc. and this symptom is not alleviated with PH-D-SEL or
sharpness adjustment
When receiving a request to use the same halftoning method (text
area) as the conventional one (model with image area separation
method) at copy output
When receiving a request to use the same halftoning method (both
text and photo areas) as the conventional B&W MFP method at
the time of copy or B&W Inbox output
0 to 2
0: Low screen ruling (134 lines) is used for photo judgment area and
high screen ruling (141 lines) for text judgment area.
1: Low screen ruling is used for photo judgment area and TBIC for
text judgment area.
2: TBIC is used for both photo and text judgment areas.
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> USER> PH-D-SEL
SCAN-RSL
Setting of scanned image resolution
Lv.2 Details
To set the resolution of image which is generated by scan
processing.
Use case
When the scan processing performance with 1200 dpi is low
0 to 1
0: 1200 dpi, 1: 600 dpi
Default value
0
8-166
8-167

JA-SBOX
Lv.2 Details
Setting of linking with Advanced Box:SAM

To set the link with Advanced Box when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, linking with Advanced Box is enabled.
Use case
When the operation restriction is cleared at the time of iW SAM
0 to 1
Default value
0
JA-DFAX
Setting of direct fax transmission: SAM
Lv.2 Details
To set the direct fax transmission when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the direct fax transmission is enabled.
Use case
0 to 1
Default value
0
JA-REP
Setting of TX Report with image: SAM
Lv.2 Details
To set the TX Report with image when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the TX Report with image is enabled.
Use case
0 to 1
Default value
0
JA-FREP
Setting of Fax TX Report with image: SAM
Lv.2 Details
To set the Fax TX Report with image when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the Fax TX Report with image is enabled.
Use case
0 to 1
Default value
0
JA-BOX
Setting of Inbox document operation: SAM
Lv.2 Details
To set the operation for Inbox document at the time of iW SAM
When 1 is set, the Inbox document can be operated.
Use case
0 to 1
Default value
0
JA-FORM
Setting of image composition: SAM
Lv.2 Details
To set the image composition when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the image composition is enabled.
Use case
0 to 1
Default value
0
JA-PREV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
JA-PULL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
JA-PDLB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
JA-JOBK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
JA-JDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Setting of preview page deletion: SAM

To set whether a page is deleted from the scan preview screen at the
time of iW SAM
When 1 is set, a page is deleted from the scan preview screen.
0 to 1
0
Setting of network scan: SAM
To set the network scan when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, the network scan is enabled.
0 to 1
0
Set of printer driver multi box save:SAM
To set whether a document can be simultaneously saved to multiple
Inboxes from the printer driver at the time of iW SAM.
When 1 is set, a document can be saved to multiple Inboxes from
the printer driver.
0 to 1
0
Setting of job merge allowance:SAM
To set whether merging jobs is allowed when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, jobs can be merged.
0 to 1
0
Setting of JDF: SAM
To set the use of JDF when iW SAM is enabled.
When 1 is set, JDF can be used.
0 to 1
0
8-167

JA-RUI
Lv.2 Details
Setting of Inbox document access: SAM

To set the Inbox document access from remote UI at the time of iW
SAM
When 1 is set, accessing to the Inbox document from remote UI is
enabled.
Use case
0 to 1
Default value
0
JA-WEB
Setting of Inbox document upload: SAM
Lv.2 Details
To set the Inbox document upload with the Web browser at the time
of iW SAM.
When 1 is set uploading to the Inbox document with the Web
Browser is enabled.
Use case
0 to 1
Default value
0
EXP-CRYP
Confdntial encrypt ON/OFF:add book exprt
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to encrypt the confidential part (password part) in the
Address Book when exporting the Address Book and device settings
via RUI.
When 0 is set, the confidential part in the Address Book is exported
without encryption.
Use case
When there is a need to export password without encryption because
of operation and tool
Caution
Be sure not to allow the user to execute export without encryption
because of security concern.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
1
SLEEP1SW
Power supply when shifting to SLEEP1
Lv.1 Details
When shifting to SLEEP1 mode, the power stops to be supplied, so it
takes time to activate after a job is received.
When 1 is set, the power keeps to be supplied even after shifting to
SLEEP1 mode, so the activation of job processing becomes earlier.
Use case
Upon users request (when job processing after shifting to SLEEP1
is slow)
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
8-168
CNCL-ATH
Lv.1 Details
ON/OFF of secure print domain judgment

To set whether to conduct authentication when stopping a secured
job.
By setting 1, security for the secured job is enhanced when user
authentication is not conducted.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
EZY-SCRP
ON/OFF of secure print simple auth
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to conduct secure print simple authentication.
When 1 is set, secured print, encryption secured print and inbox print
are received, but the normal print jobs are canceled.
If the password 3758211 is entered at job sending, authentication
by entering the password on the Control Panel is not required. If the
password is not entered at job sending, authentication by entering
the password on the Control Panel is necessary at job output.
In addition, the following selection is added as auto deletion time of
secure job: 10 minutes, 20 minutes, 30 minutes
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
DMN-MTCH
ON/OFF of secure print domain judgment
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to display only the job which matches the domain in
the My Job Status screen of the secure print.LS
When 1 is set, only the job which matches the user name and
domain name is displayed in the My Job Status screen, so the job
which does not match the domain is not displayed.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
8-168
8-169

SCN-RSLG
Lv.1 Details
Set outpt resolution at composition copy

To set the output resolution when the composition function is used at
copy in Text/Photo mode.
When 0 is set, image quality becomes the same level (1200dpi)
as when the composition function is not used, but productivity
decreases.
Use case
Upon users request (to improve image quality)
Caution
Be sure to receive approval from the user in advance by explaining
that productivity decreases by changing the setting.
0 to 1
0: 1200 dpi, 1: 600 dpi
Default value
1
Supplement/memo
Composition function: Page Numbering, Copy Set Numbering,
Watermark, Print-Date
SMD-EXPT
Setting of export target data: remote UI
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to export service mode data from remote UI.
When 1 is set, service mode data is displayed as the target data
of export on remote UI. When installing more than 1 machine at the
same time, the same service mode data can be registered.
Use case
When installing more than 1 machine at the same time
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
If selecting service mode data as the target data of export on
remote UI after setting SMD-EXPT to 1, service mode data can be
exported.
SNDSTREN
Set of setting delete aftr scan and send
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to delete the transmission settings except for the
address after transmission from the Scan and Send screen.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Delete, 1: Retain
Default value
FAXSTREN
Lv.1 Details
Set of setting delete aftr fax transmit

To set whether to delete the transmission settings except for the
address after transmission from the Fax screen.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Delete, 1: Retain
Default value
T-8-66
8-169
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > CST
CST
COPIER > OPTION > CST

U1-NAME
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
U2-NAME
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
U3-NAME
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
U4-NAME
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
8-170
Dspl/hide ppr name in ppr size group U1

To set whether to display or hide paper name at paper size group U1
detection.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
detection.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
detection.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
detection.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
P-SZ-C1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Setting of Right Deck paper size

To set the paper size used in the Right Deck.
Upon users request
Caution
Be sure to match with the hardware setting size.
0 to 2
0: A4, 1: B5, 2: LTR
Default value
0
P-SZ-C2
Setting of Left Deck paper size
Lv.1 Details
To set the paper size used in the Left Deck.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
0 to 2
0: A4, 1: B5, 2: LTR
Default value
0
CST3-P1
Setting of Cassette 3 paper size
Lv.1 Details
To set the paper size used in Cassette 3.
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
0 to 1
0: A5R, 1: STMTR
Default value
Related UI menu
Preferences> Paper Settings> Paper Settings> A5R/STMTR Original
Selection
CST3-P2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
0 to 1
0: B5, 1: EXEC
Default value
Related UI menu
Preferences> Paper Settings> Paper Settings> B5/EXEC Original
Selection
8-170

CST4-P1
Lv.1 Details
Use case

Upon users request
Caution
0 to 1
0: A5R, 1: STMTR
Default value
Related UI menu
Preferences> Paper Settings> Paper Settings> A5R/STMTR Original
Selection
CST4-P2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Upon users request
Caution
0 to 1
0: B5, 1: EXEC
Default value
Related UI menu
Preferences> Paper Settings> Paper Settings> B5/EXEC Original
Selection
CST3-U1
Set Cst3 overseas special ppr category 1
Lv.1 Details
To set the overseas special paper category 1 used in Cassette 3.
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 42
0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 22: Not used, 23: K-LGL-R, 24:
FLSP, 25: A-FLSP, 26: OFI, 27: E-OFI, 28: B-OFI, 29: Not used, 30:
A-LTRR, 31: Not used, 32: G-LTRR, 33: A-LGL, 34: G-LGL, 35: Not
used, 36: A-OFI, 37: M-OFI, 38 to 41: Not used, 42: FA4
Default value
0
CST3-U3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 31
0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 21: Not used, 22: K-LGL, 23 to 28:
Not used, 29: A-LTR, 30: Not used, 31: G-LTR
Default value
0
8-171
CST4-U1
Lv.1 Details
Use case

Upon users request
0 to 42
0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 22: Not used, 23: K-LGL-R, 24:
FLSP, 25: A-FLSP, 26: OFI, 27: E-OFI, 28: B-OFI, 29: Not used, 30:
A-LTRR, 31: Not used, 32: G-LTRR, 33: A-LGL, 34: G-LGL, 35: Not
used, 36: A-OFI, 37: M-OFI, 38 to 41: Not used, 42: FA4
Default value
0
CST4-U3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Upon users request
0 to 31
0: Special paper is not used, 1 to 21: Not used, 22: K-LGL, 23 to 28:
Not used, 29: A-LTR, 30: Not used, 31: G-LTR
Default value
0
T-8-67
8-171
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ACC
ACC
COPIER > OPTION > ACC

COIN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Related UI menu
Supplement/memo
DK-P
Lv.1 Details
Default value
8-172
Setting of charge management

To set charging management method.
At installation of Coin Manager
Following items are automatically specified when changing the value
to 3 (from 0 to 2). The change will not be returned even if changing
back the value to 0 to 2 (from 3) once the mode has been changed.
COPIER> OPTION> USER> CONTROL=1
COPIER> OPTION> NETWORK> DA-CNCT=1
COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-BOX, UI-SEND, UI-FAX=0
Function Settings > Send > E-Mail/I-Fax Settings > Communication
Settings > SMTP Receive, POP=OFF
Preferences> Network > TCP/IP Settings > DNS Settings > FTP
Print Settings > Use FTP Printing=OFF
Preferences> Network > TCP/IP Settings > DNS Settings > IPP
Print Settings > Use IPP Printing=ON
0 to 7
0: No charge
1: Charge with Coin Manager
2: Charge with remote counter
3: Charge with DA (only in Japan)
4: Charge with this machine itself
5: Not used
6: External charge mode 6
7: External charge mode 7
0
COPIER> OPTION> USER> CONTROL
COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> DA-CNCT
COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> UI-BOX, UI-SEND, UI-FAX
COPIER> OPTION> ACC> PDL-THR
Function Settings > Send > E-Mail/I-Fax Settings > Communication
Settings
Preferences> Network > TCP/IP Settings > DNS Settings > FTP
Print Settings
Preferences> Network > TCP/IP Settings > DNS Settings > IPP Print
Settings
Control card can be used with 0: No charge.
DA: Digital Accessory
Setting of Paper Deck paper size
To set the paper size used in the Paper Deck.
0 to 2
0: A4, 1: B5, 2: LTR
0
CARD-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
PD-SIZE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
CC-SPSW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
UNIT-PRC
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Screen set when Coin Manager connected

To set coin or card that the user is urged to insert on the Control
Panel when the Coin Manager is connected.
Upon users request
0 to 3
0: Card, 1: certification by external device, 3: Coin and card, 3: Card
Setting of Side Paper Deck paper size
To set the paper size used in the Side Paper Deck.
Although the setting value 0 to 37 can be set, by setting 1 to 21, the
basic paper size can be set from the user mode.
In the service mode, set the special paper size.
Upon users request
0 to 37
0
Support setting of control card I/F
To set support level for control card (CCIV/CCV) interface.
Upon users request (when connecting to the external counter
management system using the control card interface)
0 to 1
0: No support, 1: Support
0
Setting of Coin Manager currency unit
To set currency unit to be handled with Coin Manager
0 to 6
0: Japanese yen, 1: Euro, 2: Pound, 3: Swiss Franc, 4: Dollar, 5: No
currency unit (no fractional unit), 6: No currency unit (with fractional
unit)
0
8-172

MIN-PRC
Lv.1 Details
Set of Coin Manager minimum price

To set the minimum amount to be handled with Coin Manager.
Enter 10 when specifying 10 Japanese yen as the minimum amount
to be handled with the Coin Manager that supports Japanese yen.
In the case to specify 1 to 4 (Euro/Pound/Swiss Franc/Dollar) by
going through the following: COPIER> OPTION> ACC > UNIT-PRC,
entry is in fractional unit. Entry of 50 indicates 50 cents ($ 0.50).
Use case
Caution
This mode is enabled when selecting 4 for the following: COPIER >
OPTION > ACC > COIN.
0 to 9999
Default value
10
COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN, UNIT-PRC
Supplement/memo
As for the charging amount, it causes an error if specifying the
value that is smaller than the minimum currency unit with Settings/
Registration mode.
The unit differs according to the setting value by the following:
COPIER> OPTION> ACC> UNIT-PRC.
MAX-PRC
Set of Coin Manager maximum price
Lv.1 Details
To set the maximum amount to be handled with Coin Manager.
Enter 8800 when specifying 8800 Japanese yen as the maximum
amount to be handled with the Coin Manager that supports Japanese
yen.
In the case to specify 1 to 4 (Euro/Pound/Swiss Franc/Dollar) by
going through the following: COPIER> OPTION> ACC > UNIT-PRC,
entry is in fractional unit. Entry of 50 indicates 50 cents ($ 0.50).
Use case
Caution
This mode is enabled when selecting 4 for the following: COPIER >
OPTION > ACC > COIN.
0 to 9999
Default value
8800
COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN, UNIT-PRC
Supplement/memo
As for charging amount, it causes an error if specifying the value that
is larger than the maximum currency unit with Settings/Registration
mode.
The unit differs according to the setting value by the following:
COPIER> OPTION> ACC> UNIT-PRC.
8-173
MIC-TUN
Lv.1 Details
Manual adj of voice recognize microphone

To manually adjust the voice receiving level (sensitivity) of the
connected voice recognition microphone.
Microphone sensitivity is automatically tuned in user mode; however,
adjust it manually as needed.
Use case
When the sensitivity of microphone is not improved by auto tuning
0 to 255
Default value
128
Related UI menu
Preferences > Accessibility > Voice Navigation Settings > Tune
Microphone
SRL-SPSW
Setting of Serial I/F Kit support
Lv.1 Details
To set the support level of the Serial Interface Kit.
To keep processing performance of printer engine, select 1: Priority
on speed.
To correctly stop the output by the upper limit number of sheets,
select 2: Priority on upper limit number of sheets.
Use case
At installation of Serial Interface Kit
Caution
With priority on speed, output cannot be correctly stopped by the
upper limit number of sheets.
With priority on the upper limit number of sheets, processing
performance of the printer engine is decreased depending on pickup
location.
0 to 2
0: No support, 1: Priority on speed, 2: Priority on upper limit number
of sheets
Default value
0
PDL-THR
Norm PDL pnt set:External charge mode6/7
Lv.2 Details
To set normal PDL print job processing at external charge mode 6/7.
When 1 is set and external charge mode 6/7 is set with COIN,
normal PDL print job is executed without being cancelled.
Use case
When setting the normal PDL print processing in external charge
mode 6/7
0 to 1
0: Cancel, 1: Execute
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN
8-173
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > INT-FACE
INT-FACE

CR-TYPE
Lv.1 Details
Setting of Card Reader

To set the model of the Card Reader.
Set 1 in the case of connecting the Card Reader-C1. It operates
even 0 is set, but recognition rate decreases.
Use case
When connecting the Card Reader-C1
0 to 1
0: Card Reader-F1, 1: Card Reader-C1
Default value
0
COPIER > OPTION > INT-FACE

IMG-CONT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
T-8-68
Default value
AP-OPT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
AP-ACCNT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
AP-CODE
Lv.2 Details
Default value
NWCT-TM
Lv.2 Details
Default value
Supplement/memo
8-174
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > INT-FACE
Connection setting of print server

To set connection with print server.
At installation
0 to 4
0: Normal mode (Print server not connected), 1, 2: Not used, 3: Print
server connected, 4: Not used
0
Output set of appli with print server
To set whether to permit output from the application (PrintMe)
equipped with print server.
Upon users request
0 to 2
0: Permits the specified account only, 1: Permits, 2: Permits the
specified department ID only
0
Job dept ID set of appli w/ print server
To set department ID to the print job from the application (PrintMe)
equipped with print server.
Upon users request
0 to 9999999
0
Set output pass code from print server
To set the pass code for output from print server.
0 to 9999999
0
Timeout setting of network connection
To set the time to keep network connection between this machine
and the PC application (keep-alive setting).
As the value is incremented by 1, the time is increased by 1 minute.
1 to 5
5
Expected PC application: Network print application, E-mail function,
cascade copy, MEAP network application, etc.
8-174
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > TEMPO
8-175
TEMPO
COPIER > OPTION > INT-FACE

CNT-TYPE
Lv.1 Details
Connection setting of print server

To switch print server to be connected.
Specify print server with EFI Controller ID.
Use case
At installation of print server
1 to 999
445: imagePASS-U1
Default value
1
COPIER > OPTION > TEMPO

F-POT-SW
Lv.2 Details
T-8-69
Setting at Potential Sensor failure

To set the control at the Potential Sensor failure.
If the potential control, D-max control, etc. are executed at the
Potential Sensor failure, an image failure or error occurs.
When 0 is set, the potential control and D-max become OFF, so the
device can be run temporarily although the Potential Sensor failure
occurs.
Use the item as a temporary measure when it takes time until
replacing the Potential Sensor.
Use case
Caution
Be sure to set the value back to 1 (ON) after replacing.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
1
F-HUM-SW
ON/OFF of humidity manual entry
Lv.2 Details
To set whether to enable F-HUM-D setting when an error (failure) in
the Environment Sensor occurs.
When 1 is set, the F-HUM-D setting is enabled. Use the item as a
temporary measure until replacing the Environment Sensor.
Use case
When an error (failure) in the Environment Sensor occurs
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
COPIER> OPTION> TEMPO> F-HUM-D
F-HUM-D
Manual entry of humidity
Lv.2 Details
Enter the humidity at the installation location manually when an error
in the Environment Sensor occurs.
When F-HUM-SW is 1, this setting is enabled.
30 to 99
Default value
35
COPIER>OPTION>TEMPO>F-HUM-SW
T-8-70
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > TEMPO
8-175
Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR
LCNS-TR
COPIER > OPTION > LCNS-TR

ST-SEND
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-SEND
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ST-ENPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-ENPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
8-176
Installation state dspl of SEND function

To display installation state of SEND function when transfer is
disabled.
When checking whether SEND function is installed
1) Select ST-SEND.
When installation has been completed, the transfer license key is
displayed under TR-SEND.
When operation finished normally: OK!
1
Trns license key dspl of SEND function
To display transfer license key to use SEND function when transfer is
disabled.
When replacing HDD
When replacing the device
1) Select ST-SEND.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SEND.
24 digits
Install state dspl of Encryption PDF
To display installation state of Encryption PDF when transfer is
disabled.
When checking whether Encryption PDF is installed
1) Select ST-ENPDF.
displayed under TR-ENPDF.
0
Trns license key dspl of Encryption PDF
To display transfer license key to use Encryption PDF when transfer
is disabled.
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-ENPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-ENPDF.
This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed.
24 digits
ST-SPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-SPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
ST-EXPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-EXPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Install state dspl of Searchable PDF

To display installation state of Searchable PDF when transfer is
disabled.
When checking whether Searchable PDF is installed
1) Select ST-SPDF.
displayed under TR-SPDF.
0
Trns license key dspl of Searchable PDF
To display transfer license key to use Searchable PDF when transfer
is disabled.
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-SPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SPDF.
24 digits
Instal state of Encry PDF + Searchbl PDF
To display installation state of Encryption PDF + Searchable PDF
when transfer is disabled.
When checking whether Encryption PDF + Searchable PDF is
installed
1) Select ST-EXPDF.
displayed under TR-EXPDF.
0
Trns lcns key of Encry PDF+Searchbl PDF
To display transfer license key to use Encryption PDF + Searchable
PDF when transfer is disabled.
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-EXPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-EXPDF.
This mode is enabled when SEND function is installed for Japan.
24 digits
8-176

ST-PDFDR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-PDFDR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ST-SCR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-SCR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Install state dspl of Direct Print PDF

To display installation state of Direct Print PDF when transfer is
disabled.
When checking whether Direct Print PDF is installed
1) Select ST-PDFDR.
displayed under TR-PDFDR.
0
Trns lcns key dspl of Direct Print PDF
To display transfer license key to use Direct Print PDF when transfer
is disabled.
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-PDFDR.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PDFDR.
24 digits
Install state dspl of Encry Secure Print
To display installation state of Encrypted Secure Print when transfer
is disabled.
When checking whether Encrypted Secure Print is installed
1) Select ST-SCR.
displayed under TR-SCR.
0
Trns license key dspl: Encry Secure Pnt
To display transfer license key to use Encrypted Secure Print when
transfer is disabled.
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-SCR.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCR.
This mode is enabled when there is 3DES+USH-H Board.
24 digits
8-177
ST-HDCLR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-HDCLR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
ST-BRDIM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-BRDIM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Installation state display of Data Erase

To display installation state of Data Erase (for old model) when
When checking whether Data Erase (for old model) is installed
1) Select ST-HDCLR.
displayed under TR-HDCLR.
0
Transfer license key dspl of Data Erase
To display transfer license key to use Data Erase (for old model)
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-HDCLR.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-HDCLR.
This mode is enabled when there is 3DES+USH-H Board.
24 digits
Install state dspl: PCL Barcode Printing
To display installation state of Barcode Printing for PCL when transfer
is disabled.
When checking whether Barcode Printing for PCL is installed
1) Select ST-BRDIM.
displayed under TR-BRDIM.
0
Trns lcns key dspl: PCL Barcode Printing
To display transfer license key to use Barcode Printing for PCL when
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-BRDIM.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-BRDIM.
24 digits
8-177

ST-VNC
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-VNC
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ST-WEB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-WEB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Install state dspl of Remote Oprtr Soft

To display installation state of Remote Operators Software when
When checking whether Remote Operators Software is installed
1) Select ST-VNC.
displayed under TR-VNC.
0
Trns lcns dspl of Remote Operators Soft
To display transfer license key to use Remote Operators Software
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-VNC.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-VNC.
24 digits
Install state dspl: Web Access Software
To display installation state of Web Access Software when transfer is
disabled.
When checking whether Web Access Software is installed
1) Select ST-WEB.
displayed under TR-WEB.
0
Trns license key dspl of Web Access Soft
To display transfer license key to use Web Access Software when
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-WEB.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-WEB.
24 digits
8-178
ST-HRPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-HRPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ST-TRSND
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-TRSND
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Install state dspl of High Compress PDF

To display installation state of High Compression PDF when transfer
is disabled.
When checking whether High Compression PDF is installed
1) Select ST-HRPDF.
displayed under TR-HRPDF.
1
Trns lcns key dspl of High Compress PDF
To display transfer license key to use High Compression PDF when
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-HRPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-HRPDF.
24 digits
Install state dspl: Trial SEND function
To display installation state of Trial SEND function when transfer is
disabled.
When checking whether Trial SEND function is installed
1) Select ST-TRSND.
displayed under TR-TRSND.
0
Trns lcns key dspl: Trial SEND function
To display transfer license key to use Trial SEND function when
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-TRSND.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-TRSND.
24 digits
8-178

ST-WTMRK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-WTMRK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ST-TSPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-TSPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Install state dspl of Secure Watermark

To display installation state of Secure Watermark when transfer is
disabled.
When checking whether Secure Watermark is installed
1) Select ST-WTMRK.
displayed under TR-WTMRK.
0
Trns license key dspl: Secure Watermark
To display transfer license key to use Secure Watermark when
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-WTMRK.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-WTMRK.
24 digits
Install state dspl of Time Stamp PDF: JP
To display installation state of Time Stamp PDF (JP only) when
When checking whether Time Stamp PDF (JP only) is installed
1) Select ST-TSPDF.
displayed under TR-TSPDF.
0
Trns lcns key dspl of Time Stamp PDF: JP
To display transfer license key to use Time Stamp PDF (JP only)
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-TSPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-TSPDF.
24 digits
8-179
ST-USPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-USPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
ST-DVPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-DVPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Install state dspl of Dgtl User Sign PDF

To display installation state of Digital User Signature PDF when
When checking whether Digital User Signature PDF is installed
1) Select ST-USPDF.
displayed under TR-USPDF.
0
Trns lcns key dspl of Dgtl User Sign PDF
To display transfer license key to use Digital User Signature PDF
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-USPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-USPDF.
24 digits
Install state dspl of Device Sign PDF
To display installation state of Device Signature PDF when transfer is
disabled.
When checking whether Device Signature PDF is installed
1) Select ST-DVPDF.
displayed under TR-DVPDF.
0
Trns lcns key dspl of Device Sign PDF
To display transfer license key to use Device Signature PDF when
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-DVPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-DVPDF.
24 digits
8-179

ST-SCPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-SCPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
ST-AMS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-AMS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Install state dspl of Trace & Smooth PDF

To display installation state of Trace & Smooth PDF when transfer is
disabled.
When checking whether Trace & Smooth PDF is installed
1) Select ST-SCPDF.
displayed under TR-SCPDF.
0
Trns lcns key dspl of Trace & Smooth PDF
To display transfer license key to use Trace & Smooth PDF when
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-SCPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-SCPDF.
24 digits
Install state dspl of Access Mngm System
To display installation state of Access Management System when
When checking whether Access Management System is installed
1) Select ST-AMS.
displayed under TR-AMS.
0
Trns lcns key dspl of Access Mngm System
To display transfer license key to use Access Management System
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-AMS.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-AMS.
24 digits
ST-ERDS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
Supplement/memo
TR-ERDS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Supplement/memo
ST-PS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-PS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
8-180
Install state dspl: E-RDS 3rd Pty Expnsn

To display installation state of E-RDS 3rd Party Expansion when
When checking whether E-RDS 3rd Party Expansion is installed
1) Select ST-ERDS.
displayed under TR-ERDS.
0
E-RDS 3rd Party Expansion: A function to send charge counter to
the third partys charge server.
Trns lcns key dspl: E-RDS 3rd Pty Expnsn
To display transfer license key to use E-RDS 3rd Party Expansion
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-ERDS.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-ERDS.
24 digits
E-RDS 3rd Party Expansion: A function to send charge counter to
the third partys charge server.
Install state display of PS function
To display installation state of PS function when transfer is disabled.
When checking whether PS function is installed
1) Select ST-PS.
displayed under TR-PS.
0
Transfer license key dspl of PS function
To display transfer license key to use PS function when transfer is
disabled.
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-PS.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PS.
24 digits
8-180

ST-PCL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Install state display of PCL function

To display installation state of PCL function when transfer is disabled.
When checking whether PCL function is installed
1) Select ST-PCL.
displayed under TR-PCL.
Default value
0
TR-PCL
Transfer license key dspl: PCL function
Lv.2 Details
To display transfer license key to use PCL function when transfer is
disabled.
Use case
When replacing HDD
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-PCL.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCL.
24 digits
ST-PSLI5
Install state dspl: PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX: JP
Lv.2 Details
To display installation state of PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX function (JP only)
Use case
When checking whether PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX function (JP only) is
installed
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-PSLI5.
displayed under TR-PSLI5.
Default value
0
TR-PSLI5
Trns lcns key dspl: PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX: JP
Lv.2 Details
To display transfer license key to use PS/LIPS4/LIPS LX function (JP
only) when transfer is disabled.
Use case
When replacing HDD
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-PSLI5.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLI5.
24 digits
8-181
ST-LIPS5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-LIPS5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ST-LIPS4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-LIPS4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Install state dspl:LIPS LX/LIPS4 func:JP

To display installation state of LIPS LX/LIPS4 function (JP only) when
When checking whether LIPS LX/LIPS4 function (JP only) is installed
1) Select ST-LIPS5.
displayed under TR-LIPS5.
0
Trns lcns key dspl:LIPS LX/LIPS4 func:JP
To display transfer license key to use LIPS LX/LIPS4 function (JP
only) when transfer is disabled.
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-LIPS5.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS5.
24 digits
Install state display of LIPS4 func: JP
To display installation state of LIPS4 function (JP only) when transfer
is disabled.
When checking whether LIPS4 function (JP only) is installed
1) Select ST-LIPS4.
displayed under TR-LIPS4.
0
Trns license key dspl of LIPS4 func: JP
To display transfer license key to use LIPS4 function (JP only) when
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-LIPS4.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LIPS4.
24 digits
8-181

ST-PSPCL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-PSPCL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ST-PCLUF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-PCLUF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Install state dspl of PS/PCL function

To display installation state of PS/PCL function when transfer is
disabled.
When checking whether PS/PCL function is installed
1) Select ST-PSPCL.
displayed under TR-PSPCL.
0
Transfer license key dspl of PS/PCL func
To display transfer license key to use PS/PCL function when transfer
is disabled.
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-PSPCL.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCL.
24 digits
Install state dspl: PCL/UFR II function
To display installation state of PCL/UFR II function when transfer is
disabled.
When checking whether PCL/UFR II function is installed
1) Select ST-PCLUF.
displayed under TR-PCLUF.
0
Trns license key dspl of PCL/UFR II func
To display transfer license key to use PCL/UFR II function when
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-PCLUF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PCLUF.
24 digits
8-182
ST-PSLIP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-PSLIP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ST-PSPCU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-PSPCU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Install state dspl of PS/LIPS4 func: JP

To display installation state of PS/LIPS4 function (JP only) when
When checking whether PS/LIPS4 function (JP only) is installed
1) Select ST-PSLIP.
displayed under TR-PSLIP.
0
Trns license key dspl: PS/LIPS4 func:JP
To display transfer license key to use PS/LIPS4 function (JP only)
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-PSLIP.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSLIP.
24 digits
Install state dspl of PS/PCL/UFR II func
To display installation state of PS/PCL/UFR II function when transfer
is disabled.
When checking whether PS/PCL/UFR II function is installed
1) Select ST-PSPCU.
displayed under TR-PSPCU.
0
Trns lcns key dspl of PS/PCL/UFR II func
To display transfer license key to use PS/PCL/UFR II function when
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-PSPCU.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-PSPCU.
24 digits
8-182

ST-LXUFR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-LXUFR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ST-HDCR2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-HDCR2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Install state display of UFR II function

To display installation state of UFR II function when transfer is
disabled.
When checking whether UFR II function is installed
1) Select ST-LXUFR.
displayed under TR-LXUFR.
1
Trns license key dspl of UFR II function
To display transfer license key to use UFR II function when transfer
is disabled.
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-LXUFR.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-LXUFR.
24 digits
Install state dspl:HDD Init All Data/Set
To display installation state of HDD Initialize All Data/Settings when
When checking whether HDD Initialize All Data/Settings is installed
1) Select ST-HDCR2.
displayed under TR-HDCR2.
0
Trns lcns key dspl:HDD Init All Data/Set
To display transfer license key to use HDD Initialize All Data/Settings
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-HDCR2.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-HDCR2.
24 digits
8-183
ST-JBLK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-JBLK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ST-AFAX
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-AFAX
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Install state dspl of Document Scan Lock

To display installation state of Document Scan Lock when transfer is
disabled.
When checking whether Document Scan Lock is installed
1) Select ST-JBLK.
displayed under TR-JBLK.
0
Trns lcns key dspl of Document Scan Lock
To display transfer license key to use Document Scan Lock when
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-JBLK.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-JBLK.
24 digits
Installation state display of Remote Fax
To display installation state of Remote Fax when transfer is disabled.
When checking whether Remote Fax is installed
1) Select ST-AFAX.
displayed under TR-AFAX.
0
Transfer license key dspl of Remote Fax
To display transfer license key to use Remote Fax when transfer is
disabled.
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-AFAX.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-AFAX.
24 digits
8-183

ST-POPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-POPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ST-REPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-REPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Install state display of PDF w/ Policy

To display installation state of PDF function with Policy when transfer
is disabled.
When checking whether PDF function with Policy is installed
1) Select ST-POPDF.
displayed under TR-POPDF.
0
Trns lcns key display of PDF w/ Policy
To display transfer license key to use PDF function with Policy when
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-POPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-POPDF.
24 digits
Install state dspl:Reader Extensions PDF
To display installation state of Reader Extensions PDF when transfer
is disabled.
When checking whether Reader Extensions PDF is installed
1) Select ST-REPDF.
displayed under TR-REPDF.
0
Trns lcns key dspl:Reader Extensions PDF
To display transfer license key to use Reader Extensions PDF when
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-REPDF.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-REPDF.
24 digits
8-184
ST-OOXML
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-OOXML
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ST-XPS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-XPS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Install state display of Office Open XML

To display installation state of Office Open XML when transfer is
disabled.
When checking whether Office Open XML is installed
1) Select ST-OOXML.
displayed under TR-OOXML.
0
Trns lcns key display of Office Open XML
To display transfer license key to use Office Open XML when transfer
is disabled.
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-OOXML.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-OOXML.
24 digits
Install state dspl of Direct Print XPS
To display installation state of Direct Print XPS when transfer is
disabled.
When checking whether Direct Print XPS is installed
1) Select ST-XPS.
displayed under TR-XPS.
0
Trns lcns key dspl of Direct Print XPS
To display transfer license key to use Direct Print XPS when transfer
is disabled.
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-XPS.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-XPS.
24 digits
8-184

ST-2600
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-2600
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ST-OPFNT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
TR-OPFNT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Instal state dspl: IEEE2600.1 scrty func

To display installation state of the IEEE2600.1 security function when
When checking whether the IEEE2600.1 security function is installed
1) Select ST-2600.
displayed under TR-2600.
0
Trn lcns key dspl: IEEE2600.1 scrty func
To display transfer license key of the IEEE2600.1 security function
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-2600.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-2600.
24 digits
Install state display of PCL Font Set
To display installation state of PCL Font Set when disabling the
function with license transfer.
When checking whether PCL Font Set is installed
1) Select ST-OPFNT.
displayed under TR-OPFNT.
0
Trns license key display of PCL Font Set
To display transfer license key to use the PCL option Font when
disabling the function with license transfer.
When replacing HDD
1) Select ST-OPFNT.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-OPFNT.
24 digits
8-185
ST-NCAPT
Lv.2 Details
Install state display of NetCap function

To display installation state of network packet capture function when
disabling the function with license transfer.
Use case
When checking whether network packet capture function is installed
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-NCAPT.
displayed under TR-NCAPT.
Default value
0
TR-NCAPT
Transfer license key dspl of NetCap func
Lv.2 Details
To display transfer license key to use the network packet capture
function when disabling the function with license transfer.
Use case
When replacing HDD
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select ST-NCAPT.
The transfer license key is displayed under TR-NCAPT.
24 digits
T-8-71
8-185
Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > PG
TEST
COPIER > TEST > PG

DENS-K
Lv.1 Details
PG
COPIER > TEST > PG
TYPE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
TXPH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
8-186
Test print
To execute the test print.
At trouble analysis
Enter the setting value, and then press Start key.
Test print is executed.
Be sure to return the value to 0 after the test print output.
0 to 50
0: Normal print
1: Grid
2: 17 gradations Tbic rank 2
3: 17 gradations 600dpi (134-line screen or 141-line screen)
4: Solid white
5: Halftone (density: 80H, Tbic rank 2, without image correction)
6: Halftone (density: 80H, 134-line screen or 141-line screen, without
image correction)
7: Solid black
8: Horizontal line (4 dots, 27 spaces)
12: Halftone (density: 80H, 134-line screen or 141-line screen,
14: Halftone (density: 30H, 134-line screen or 141-line screen,
15-50: For development
0
Setting of test print image mode
To set the image mode at the time of test print output.
This mode is enabled for test print only.
At trouble analysis
0 to 6
0: Error diffusion
1: Low screen ruling (approx. 133 to 190 lines)
2: High screen ruling (approx. 200 to 268 lines)
3: Copy screen (approx. 220 lines)
4: REOS screen (no screen structure)
5: Error diffusion (with trailing edge adjustment)
6: High screen ruling (with trailing edge adjustment)
Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > PG
Use case
F/M-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
PG-PICK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
2-SIDE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
PG-QTY
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Adj of Bk color density at test print

To adjust Bk color density when performing test print (TYPE=5).
As the greater value is set, the image gets darker.
At test print (TYPE=5)
1 to 25
Setting of PG full color/mono color
To set for the output in full color/monochrome color with PG.
When separating (identifying) the cause whether its due to color or
monochrome.
0 to 1
0: Full color, 1: Single color
0
Setting of test print Pickup Cassette
To set the Pickup Cassette for test print output.
At trouble analysis
At test print output
1 to 8
1: Cassette 1 (Right Deck), 2: Cassette 2 (Left Deck), 3: Cassette
3 (Option Cassette 2), 4: Cassette 4 (Option Cassette 2), 5: Paper
Deck, 6: Multi-purpose Tray, 7 to 8: Not used
Setting of PG 2-sided mode
To set 1-sided/2-sided print for PG output.
At trouble analysis
0 to 1
0: 1-sided, 1: 2-sided
0
Setting of PG output quantity
To set the number of sheets for PG output.
At trouble analysis
1 to 999
1
8-186
Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NETWORK
COPIER > TEST > PG

FINISH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Accessory processing function test print

To execute the test print relating to accessory processing function.
When checking operation of accessory processing function
1) Enter the number of sheets for PG-QTY, and then press OK key.
3) Press Start button.
The machine outputs a test print.
0 to 99
0: N/A
1: Staple (front) *1
2: Staple (2 points) *1
3: Staple (rear) *1
4: Booklet (saddle stitch) *1
5: Z-fold (single sleeve) *1
6: 2-fold *1
7: C-fold *2
8: V-fold *2
9: 4-fold *2
10: Z-fold (out-3-fold) *2
11: Punch (Inner Puncher) *3
12: Multiple-hole punch *4
13: Shift *1
14 to 99: Spare (for future use)
*1 Finisher, *2 Multi-folding machine, *3 Inner Puncher, *4 Multiplehole Puncher
0
COPIER> TEST> PG> PG-QTY
T-8-72
8-187
NETWORK
COPIER > TEST > NETWORK
PING
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Network connection check

To check connection between this machine and TCP/IP network.
When checking network connection at the time of installation
At network connection failure
Adj/set/operate method 1) Turn OFF the main power switch.
2) Connect the network cable to this machine, and then turn ON the
main power switch.
3) Inform the system administrator at users site that installation of
this machine is complete, and ask for network setting.
4) Ask the system administrator to check the network connection,
and check the remote host address of PING transmission target.
5) Select the item and enter the remote host address, and then press
OK key and Start key.
OK: Connection is normal. Checking procedure is complete.
NG: Connection failed. Go to step 6) if the cable connection is OK.
In case of cable connection failure, connect again and then go
to step 5).
6) Select the item and enter loopback address, and then press OK
key and Start key.
OK: TCP/IP setting of this machine is normal. Go to step 7) to
check NIC.
NG: TCP/IP setting of this machine has failure. Go to step 3) to
check the setting again.
7) Select the item and enter the local host address, and then press
OK key.
OK: N
etwork setting of this machine and NIC are normal. Inform
the system administrator that the trouble is due to network
environment and ask for countermeasure.
NG: Connection failure/fault with NIC. Check connection of NIC/
replace NIC.
0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
At normal state: OK
At failure occurrence: NG
Supplement/memo
Remote host address: IP address of PC terminal in network.
Loopback address: 127.0.0.1. Checking TCP/IP of this machine is
available because the signal is returned before NIC.
NIC: Network interface board
Local host address: IP address of this machine
Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NETWORK
8-187
Service Mode > COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP
COPIER > TEST > NETWORK

IPV6-ADR
Lv.1 Details
Caution

PING-IP6
Lv.1 Details
IPSECPOL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
IPSECINT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Setting of PING send address (IPv6)

To set the IPv6 address to send PING.
When PING is sent to this address by COPIER> TEST> NETWORK>
PING-IP6, the network connection condition in the IPv6 environment
can be checked.
Enter a consistent character string as an address of IPv6.
Enter an address within 39 characters including hexadecimal
numbers (0-9, a-f) and a separator (:).
COPIER> TEST> NETWORK> PING-IP6
PING transmission to IPv6 address
To send PING to the address specified by IPV6-ADR.
The network connection condition in the IPv6 environment can be
checked.
COPIER> TEST> NETWORK> IPV6-ADR
Polling test of IPSec Encryption Board
To execute polling test of IPSec Encryption Board.
To check whether a hardware failure has occurred.
When checking whether a hardware failure has occurred to the
IPSec Encryption Board
At normal state: OK
At failure occurrence: NG (0: The board cannot be recognized. 1: An
error occurred to the result.)
Interrupt test of IPSec Encryption Board
To execute the interrupt test of IPSec Encryption Board.
To check whether a hardware failure has occurred.
When checking whether a hardware failure has occurred to the
IPSec Encryption Board
At normal state: OK
At failure occurrence: NG (0: The board cannot be recognized. 1: An
error occurred to the result.)
T-8-73
8-188
NET-CAP
COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP
CAPOFFON
Lv.2 Details
Default value
Related UI menu
STT-STP
Lv.2 Details
Related UI menu
CAPSTATE
Lv.2 Details
Related UI menu
PONSTART
Lv.2 Details
Default value
Related UI menu
OVERWRIT
Lv.2 Details
Default value
Related UI menu
PAYLOAD
Lv.2 Details
Default value
Related UI menu
FILE-CLR
Lv.2 Details
ON/OFF of NetCap function

To set ON/OFF of network packet capture function.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
COPIER> TEST> NET-CAP
Store Network Packet Log
Start and stop of network packet capture
To start and stop network packet capture.
State display of network packet capture
To display the state of network packet capture.
Set network packet capture start timing
To set whether to perform network packet capture from power-on.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Setting of NetCap data overwriting
To set whether to finish network capturing or overwrite when HDD
becomes full.
0 to 1
0: No overwriting (finish network packet capture), 1: Overwriting
1
Set network packet capture data save
To set whether to discard payload when saving the captured packet
data.
0
Deletion of network packet capture data
To delete the captured packet data.
8-188
8-189
COPIER > TEST > NET-CAP

SIMPFILT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
ENCDATA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Settings of packet data filtering

To set whether to perform filtering when capturing packet data.
When 0 is set, filtering is not performed (All the data are captured.)
When 1 is set, packet data is captured only when the receivers or
senders address coincides with the Mac address of this machine.
At problem analysis (at packet data analysis)
0 to 1
0: Not filtered, 1: Filtered
Setting of packet data encryption
To set whether to encrypt the packet data when writing the captured
packet data to the USB memory.
At problem analysis (at packet data analysis)
When improving security of written packet data
This setting is enabled only when writing data to the USB memory.
Even when the packet data is loaded using SST, the file is specified,
therefore the setting is disabled.
0 to 2
0: Encrypted (encrypted file)
1: Not encrypted (plain text file)
2: Encrypted (encrypted file + plain text file)
0
T-8-74
8-189
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL
COUNTER
COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL

RPT-PRT
Lv.1 Details
TOTAL
COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL
SERVICE1
Lv.1 Details
SERVICE2
Lv.1 Details
COPY
Lv.1 Details
PDL-PRT
Lv.1 Details
FAX-PRT
Lv.1 Details
RMT-PRT
Lv.1 Details
BOX-PRT
Lv.1 Details
8-190
Service-purposed total counter 1

To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine.
Large size: 1, small size: 1
A blank sheet is not counted.
0 to 99999999
Service-purposed total counter 2
0 to 99999999
Total copy counter
0 to 99999999
PDL print counter
To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine
according to the charge counter at PDL print.
0 to 99999999
FAX reception print counter
according to the charge counter at FAX reception.
0 to 99999999
Remote print counter
To count up when the paper is delivered outside the machine and
2-sided print is stacked according to the charge counter at report
print.
0 to 99999999
Inbox print counter
according to the charge counter at Inbox print.
0 to 99999999
2-SIDE
Lv.1 Details
SCAN
Lv.1 Details
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > TOTAL
Report print counter

according to the charge counter at report print.
0 to 99999999
2-sided copy/print counter
according to the charge counter at 2-sided copy/print.
0 to 99999999
Scan counter
To count the number of scan operations according to the charge
counter when the scanning operation is complete.
0 to 99999999
T-8-75
8-190
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > FEEDER
PICKUP
FEEDER
COPIER > COUNTER > PICKUP
C1
Lv.1 Details
C2
Lv.1 Details
C3
Lv.1 Details
C4
Lv.1 Details
MF
Lv.1 Details
DK
Lv.1 Details
2-SIDE
Lv.1 Details
8-191
COPIER > COUNTER > FEEDER
Cassette 1 pickup total counter

Small size: 1
Small size: 1
Large size: 1, Small size: 1
Multi-purpose Tray pickup total counter
Deck pickup total counter
2-sided pickup total counter
T-8-76
FEED
Lv.1 Details
Use case
L-FEED
Lv.1 Details
Use case
S-FEED
Lv.1 Details
Use case
DFOP-CNT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
DADF original pickup total counter

DADF original pickup total counter
When checking the total counter of original pickup by DADF
0 to 99999999
DADF large size pickup total counter
DADF large size pickup total counter
When checking the total counter of large size pickup by DADF
0 to 99999999
DADF small size pickup total counter
DADF small size pickup total counter
When checking the total counter of small size pickup by DADF
0 to 99999999
DADF hinge open/close counter
DADF hinge open/close counter
When checking the DADF hinge open/close counter
0 to 99999999
T-8-77
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > FEEDER
8-191
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > MISC
JAM
MISC
COPIER > COUNTER > JAM
TOTAL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
FEEDER
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SORTER
Lv.1 Details
Use case
2-SIDE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
MF
Lv.1 Details
Use case
C1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
C2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
C3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
C4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
DK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
8-192
COPIER > COUNTER > MISC
Host machine total jam counter

Host machine total jam counter
When checking the total jam counter of the host machine
Feeder total jam counter
Feeder total jam counter
When checking the total jam counter of feeder
Finisher total jam counter
Finisher total jam counter
When checking the total jam counter of finisher
Duplex Unit jam counter
Duplex Unit jam counter
When checking the jam counter of Duplex Unit
Multi-purpose Tray jam counter
Multi-purpose Tray jam counter
When checking the jam counter of Multi-purpose Tray
Right Deck jam counter
Right Deck jam counter
When checking the jam counter of machines Right Deck
Left Deck jam counter
Left Deck jam counter
When checking the jam counter of machines Left Deck
Cassette 3 pickup jam counter
When checking the jam counter of machines Cassette 3
When checking the jam counter of machines Cassette 4
Pickup decks jam counter
Pickup decks jam counter
When checking the jam counter of all pickup decks
FIX-WEB
Lv.1 Details
T-8-78
Fixing Cleaning Web counter

The number of Fixing Cleaning Web Drive Solenoid (SL9) operations
executed after the Fixing Cleaning Web Level Sensor (PS45) is ON.
When the counter reaches 2000, E005-0001 occurs.
Use case
At the time of Fixing Cleaning Web level detection/replacement
Adj/set/operate method To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
Caution
Clear the counter value after replacement.
WST-TNR
Waste toner counter
Lv.1 Details
This item is used to clear the warning when the Waste Toner full
warning is displayed.
Use case
When replacing the Waste Toner Container
T-SPLY-K
Toner supply counter
Lv.1 Details
Number of toner supply blocks.
Counted for every one rotation of Toner Feed Screw.
Use case
When checking the usage status of toner
ALLPW-ON
Number of DCON PCB power-on times
Lv.1 Details
Number of power-on times (Non-all-night Power Unit).
To count up when power is turned ON (Non-all-night Power Unit).
Use case
When checking the usage status of the product
HDD-ON
Number of HDD start-up times
Lv.1 Details
To count up at HDD start-up.
Use case
When checking the usage status of the product
ST-NDL
Staple needle counter: Fin-N1/P1
Lv.1 Details
To count the use of the staple needle.
ENT-PTH
Entrance paper path counter: Fin-N1/P1
Lv.1 Details
Entrance paper path counter
TRAY-CHA
Tray change counter: Fin-N1/P1
Lv.1 Details
Tray change counter
PUNCH
Punch Unit counter: Fin-N1/P1
Lv.1 Details
Punch Unit counter
PUN-CAB
Punch Unit Cable counter: Fin-N1/P1
Lv.1 Details
Punch Unit Cable counter
PUN-WST
Punch waste counter: Fin-N1/P1
Lv.1 Details
Punch Unit punch waste counter
ESC-PTH
Escape paper path counter: Fin-N1/P1
Lv.1 Details
Escape paper path counter
T-8-79
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > MISC
8-192
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1
JOB
PRDC-1
COPIER > COUNTER > JOB
DVPAPLEN
Lv.1 Details
DVRUNLEN
Lv.1 Details
8-193
COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1
Average paper length of job

Average paper length in the period from when the printer engine
starts printing operation to when it stops the operation.
Since the printer engine considers small jobs that are executed
continuously as a large job, the average paper length affects
calculation of the life.
0 to 99999999
Average distance of job
Average running distance in the period from when the printer engine
starts printing operation to when it stops the operation.
Since the printer engine considers small jobs that are executed
continuously as a large job, the average running distance affects
calculation of the life.
0 to 99999999
T-8-80
PRM-WIRE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Supplement/memo
PO-WIRE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PRM-CLN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PO-CLN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1
Primary Charging Wire parts counter

1st line: Total counter value from the previous replacement
2nd line: Estimated life
When checking the consumption level of parts/replacing the parts
To clear the counter value: Select the item, and then press Clear key.
To change the estimated life: Select the item, enter the value, and
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
This is commonly used as operator maintenance parts counter.
Pre-transfer Charging Wire parts cntr
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Primary Charge Wire Clean Pad prts cntr
Primary Charging Wire Cleaning Pad 1, 2
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Pre-trn Charge Wire Clean Pad prts cntr
Pre-transfer Charging Wire Cleaning Pad 1, 2
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
8-193
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1
COPIER > COUNTER > PRDC-1

FIX-TH1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
FIX-TH2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
OZ-FIL1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Supplement/memo
AR-FIL1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Supplement/memo
Fixing Main Thermistor parts counter

then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Fixing Sub Thermistor parts counter
Fixing Sub Thermistor 1, 2
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Fixing Ozone Filter parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Primary Suction Air Filter prts cntr
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
8-194
DRBL-1
COPIER > COUNTER > DRBL-1
PRM-UNIT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PO-UNIT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
T-CLN-BD
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
T-CN-BRU
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Primary Charging Assembly parts counter

then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Pre-transfer Charging Assy parts cntr
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
ETB Cleaning Blade parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Transfer Cleaner Brush prts cntr
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
T-8-81
8-194

TR-BLT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
TR-ROLL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Supplement/memo
PT-DRM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
CLN-BLD
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Transfer Belt (ETB) parts counter

then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
COPIER> ADJUST> FEED-ADJ> TBLT-ADJ
COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> TR-BLT
Transfer Roller parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Photosensitive Drum parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Drum Cleaning Blade parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
8-195
SP-CLAW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
BS-SL-F
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
BS-SL-R
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
DVG-CYL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
DVG-ROLL
Drum Cleaner Separation Claw prts cntr

then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Drum Cleaner Side Seal (Front) prts cntr
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Drum Cleaner Side Seal (Rear) prts cntr
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Developing Cylinder parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
[Not used]
8-195

C1-PU-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
C1-SP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
C1-FD-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
C2-PU-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Right Deck Pickup Roller parts counter

then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Right Deck Separation Roller parts cntr
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Right Deck Feed Roller parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Left Deck Pickup Roller parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
8-196
C2-SP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
C2-FD-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
C3-PU-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
C3-SP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Left Deck Separation Roller prts counter

then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Left Deck Feed Roller parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Cassette 3 Pickup Roller parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Cassette 3 Separation Roller parts cntr
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
8-196

C3-FD-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
C4-PU-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
C4-SP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
C4-FD-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Cassette 3 Feed Roller parts counter

then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Cassette 4 Pickup Roller parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Cassette 4 Separation Roller parts cntr
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Cassette 4 Feed Roller parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
8-197
M-SP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
M-FD-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
FX-UP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
FX-LW-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Multi-purpose Tray Sprtn Roll prts cntr

then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Multi-purpose Tray Feed Roll prts cntr
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Fixing Roller parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Pressure Roller parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
8-197

FX-IN-BS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
FX-WEB
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
FX-L-STC
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
DLV-UCLW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Fixing Roller Insulating Bush parts cntr

then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Fixing Cleaning Web parts counter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Press Roller Static Eliminator prts cntr
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Delivery Upper Separation Claw prts cntr
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
8-198
FX-RTNR
Lv.1 Details
Fixing Roller Thrust Stopper parts cntr

Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Default value
0
EXP-SCRP
Pre-exposure Scraper parts counter
Lv.1 Details
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Default value
0
T-8-82
8-198
DRBL-2
8-199

DF-PU-RL
Lv.1 Details
Pickup Roller parts counter: DADF

Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
Regardless of the read mode (1-sided/2-sided), the counter is
advanced every time a sheet is fed.
DF-FD-RL
Feed Roller parts counter: DADF
Lv.1 Details
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
DF-SP-RL
Separation Roller parts counter: DADF
Lv.1 Details
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
LNT-TAP1
Lv.1 Details
Dust Removal Sheet 1 counter: DADF

Dust-colleting
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
LNT-TAP2
Dust Removal Sheet 2 counter: DADF
Lv.1 Details
Dust-colleting type E
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Default value
0
Supplement/memo
STAMP
Stamp parts counter: DADF
Lv.1 Details
To display the estimated life and parts counter of DADF stamp.
2nd line: Estimated life to be entered by operator
Use case
At replacement
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Default value
0
8-199

PD-PU-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PD-SP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
PD-FD-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
FIN-STPR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Pickup Roller parts counter: Deck

Pickup Roller (Front/Rear) of Paper Deck/POD Deck Lite/Multi Deck
(Upper)
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Separation Roller parts counter: Deck
Separation Roller of Paper Deck/POD Deck Lite/Multi Deck (Upper)
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Feed Roller parts counter: Deck
Feed Roller of Paper Deck/POD Deck Lite/Multi Deck (Upper)
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Stapler parts counter: Fin-N1/P1
Stapler Unit
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
8-200
SDL-STPL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Saddle stitcher staple counter

Saddle stitcher staple counter
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Default value
0
FN-BFFRL
Buffer Roller parts counter: Fin-P1
Lv.1 Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Default value
0
DL-STC-L
Static Eliminator prts cntr: Fin-N1/P1
Lv.1 Details
Fin-N1: Swing Guide Assembly Static Eliminator (Front/Rear)
Fin-P1: Delivery Static Eliminator (Left)
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Default value
0
DL-STC-R
Static Eliminator prts cntr: Fin-N1/P1
Lv.1 Details
Fin-N1: Feed Guide Assembly Static Eliminator
Fin-P1: Delivery Static Eliminator (Right)
Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Default value
0
8-200

ENT-STC
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
CENT-STC
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
BACK-ROL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
IS-P-RL1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Inlet Static Eliminator prts cntr:Fin-P1

then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Swinging Sttc Elim prts cntr: Fin-P1
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Paper Return Roller parts counter:Fin-P1
Paper Return Roller (Front/Rear)
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Pickup Roll prts cntr: INS-K1/L1, PF/INS
INS-H1: Upper Tray Pickup Roller
INS-J1, PF/INS: Inserter Pickup Roller
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
8-201
IS-S-RL1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
IS-F-RL1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
IS-TQLM1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
IS-COLL1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Default value
Sprtn Roll prts cntr: INS-K1/L1, PF/INS

INS-H1: Upper Tray Separation Roller
INS-J1, PF/INS: Inserter Separation Roller
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Feed Roller prts cntr: INS-K1/L1, PF/INS
INS-H1: Upper Tray Feed Roller
INS-J1, PF/INS: Inserter Feed Roller
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Drive Torque Limt cntr:INS-K1/L1,PF/INS
INS-H1: Upper Tray Torque Limiter
INS-J1, PF/INS: Inserter Drive Torque Limiter
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
Horz Feed Drive Roller prts cntr: PF/INS
then press OK key.
0 to 99999999
0
8-201
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > LF

IS-COLL2
Lv.1 Details
Fold Uni Ppr Fd Drv Rol prts cntr:PF/INS

Use case
then press OK key.
Caution
0 to 99999999
Default value
0
8-202
LF
COPIER > COUNTER > LF
K-DRM-LF
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Display of Drum Unit (Bk) life

To display how much the Drum Unit (Bk) is close to the end of life in
% (percentage).
When checking the life of Drum Unit
1%
0
COPIER> FUNCTION> INSTALL> DRM-INIT
T-8-84
T-8-83
Service Mode > COPIER > COUNTER > LF
8-202
Service Mode > FEEDER > DISPLAY
FEEDER
FEEDER > DISPLAY

DRSN-RCV
Lv.1 Details
Use case
DISPLAY
FEEDER > DISPLAY
FEEDSIZE
Lv.1 Details
TRY-WIDE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SPSN-LMN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
SPSN-RCV
Lv.1 Details
Use case
RDSN-LMN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
RDSN-RCV
Lv.1 Details
Use case
DRSN-LMN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
8-203
Dspl of original size detected by DADF

To display the original size detected by DADF.
N/A (Display only)
Distance of Original Width Detect Slider
To display the distance between the Original Width Detection Sliders.
At original size detection error
Check whether the value matching the slide position is displayed
when the Original Width Slider is moved to the specified size width
position.
0 to approx. 2970
Dspl of Post-sprtn Sensr emit voltage
To display the light-emitting voltage value for the Post-separation
Sensor.
When jams frequently occur
N/A (Display only)
0 to 255
Dspl of Post-sprtn Sensr recv voltage
To display the light-receiving voltage value for the Post-separation
Sensor.
Remove and insert the paper at the sensor position, and check the
value at presence/absence of the paper.
0 to 1023
Display of Lead Sensor emission voltage
To display the light-emitting voltage value for the Lead Sensor.
N/A (Display only)
0 to 255
Display of Lead Sensor reception voltage
To display the light-receiving voltage value for the Lead Sensor.
0 to 1023
Dspl of Delivery Sensor emission voltg
To display the light-emitting voltage value for the Delivery Sensor.
N/A (Display only)
0 to 255
Service Mode > FEEDER > DISPLAY
Dspl of Delivery Sensor reception voltg

To display the light-receiving voltage value for the Delivery Sensor.
0 to 1023
RGSN-LMN
Display of Rgst Sensor emission voltage
Lv.1 Details
To display the light-emitting voltage value for the Registration Sensor.
Use case
0 to 255
RGSN-RCV
Display of Rgst Sensor reception voltage
Lv.1 Details
To display the light-receiving voltage value for the Registration
Sensor.
Use case
Adj/set/operate method Remove and insert the paper at the sensor position, and check the
0 to 1023
T-8-85
8-203
Service Mode > FEEDER > ADJUST
ADJUST
8-204
FEEDER > ADJUST
LA-SPD2
Lv.1 Details
FEEDER > ADJUST

DOCST
Lv.1 Details
Adj of DADF img lead edge margin: front

To adjust the margin at the leading edge of the image for DADF
scanning.
Execute when the output image after DADF installation is dislocated.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin at the leading edge of
the image is decreased by 0.1mm. (The image moves in the direction
of the leading edge of the sheet.)
Use case
When installing DADF
-50 to 50
Unit
0.1mm
Default value
0
LA-SPEED
Fine adj of DADF image magnifictn: front
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the image magnification in vertical scanning direction for
DADF scanning.
As the value is incremented by 1, the image is reduced by 0.1% in
vertical scanning direction. (The feeding speed increases, and the
image is reduced.)
Use case
-30 to 30
Unit
0.1%
Default value
0
DOCST2
Adj of DADF img lead edge margin: back
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the margin at the leading edge of the image for DADF
scanning.
Execute when the output image after DADF installation is dislocated.
As the value is incremented by 1, the margin at the leading edge of
the image is decreased by 0.1mm. (The image moves in the direction
of the leading edge of the sheet.)
Use case
-50 to 50
Unit
0.1mm
Default value
0
Service Mode > FEEDER > ADJUST
Use case
Unit
Default value
ADJMSCN1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
ADJMSCN2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
ADJSSCN1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
Fine adj of DADF image magnifictn: back

To adjust the image magnification in vertical scanning direction for
DADF scanning.
vertical scanning direction. (The feeding speed increases, and the
image is reduced.)
-20 to 20
0.1%
0
Zoom adj in 2-sided horz scan way: front
To make a fine adjustment of the front side image magnification in
horizontal scanning direction at the time of DADF duplex scanning.
When a displacement occurs to the front/back side image
magnification at the time of duplex scanning
-10 to 10
0.1%
0
Zoom adj in 2-sided horz scan way: back
To make a fine adjustment of the back side image magnification in
horizontal scanning direction at the time of DADF duplex scanning.
-10 to 10
0.1%
0
Zoom adj in 2-sided vert scan way: front
To make a fine adjustment of the front side image magnification in
vertical scanning direction at the time of DADF duplex scanning.
vertical scanning direction.
-10 to 10
0.1%
0
8-204
Service Mode > FEEDER > FUNCTION
FEEDER > ADJUST

ADJSSCN2
Lv.1 Details
Zoom adj in 2-sided vert scan way: back

To make a fine adjustment of the back side image magnification in
vertical scanning direction at the time of DADF duplex scanning.
vertical scanning direction.
Use case
-10 to 10
Unit
0.1%
Default value
0
T-8-86
8-205
FUNCTION
FEEDER > FUNCTION
SENS-INT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Initialization of DADF Sensors

To initialize DADF Sensors.
When replacing Reader Controller PCB / Post-separation Sensor 1
(SR2) / Post-separation Sensor 2 (SR3) / Post-separation Sensor 3
(PCB2) / Registration Sensor (PCB3) / Lead Sensor 1 (PCB4) / Lead
Sensor 2 (SR5)
MTR-CHK
Specification of DADF Operation Motor
Lv.1 Details
To specify the DADF Motor to operate.
The motor is activated by MTR-ON.
Use case
At operation check
0 to 9
0: Pickup Motor (M1), 1: Feed Motor (M2), 2: Registration Motor (M3),
3: Read Motor (M4), 4: Delivery Motor (M5), 5: Disengagement Motor
1 (M6), 6: Disengagement Motor 2 (M7), 7: Tray Lifter Motor (M8), 8:
Glass Shift Motor (M9), 9: Pickup Roller Unit Lifter Motor (M10)
FEEDER> FUNCTION> MTR-ON
TRY-A4
Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref 1: A4
Lv.1 Details
To automatically adjust the paper width detection reference point 1
for the DADF Tray. (A4)
Use case
When replacing the Original Width Volume (VR)
TRY-A5R
Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref 2: A5R
Lv.1 Details
for the DADF Tray. (A5R)
Use case
TRY-LTR
Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref 1: LTR
Lv.1 Details
for the DADF Tray. (LTR)
Use case
TRY-LTRR
Adj of DADF Tray width detect ref2: LTRR
Lv.1 Details
for the DADF Tray. (LTRR)
Use case
8-205
8-206
FEEDER > FUNCTION

FEED-CHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case

FAN-CHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case

FAN-ON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution

SL-CHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
FEEDER > FUNCTION
Specify DADF individual feed mode

To specify the feed mode for DADF.
Feed operation is activated by FEED-ON.
At operation check
0 to 3
0: 1-sided pickup/delivery operation
1: 2-sided pickup/delivery operation
2: 1-sided pickup/delivery operation (with stamp)
3: 2-sided pickup/delivery operation (with stamp)
FEEDER> FUNCTION> FEED-ON
Specification of DADF Operation Fan
To specify the DADF Fan to operate.
The fan is activated by FAN-ON.
At operation check
0 to 1
0: Motor Driver Cooling Fan (FM1)
1: Read Motor Cooling Fan (FM2)
FEEDER> FUNCTION>FAN-ON
Operation check of DADF Fan
To start operation check for the fan specified by FAN-CHK.
At operation check
The unit operates for approximately 5 seconds and automatically
stops.
2) Press OK key.
The operation check is completed.
Be sure to press the OK key again after execution. The operation
automatically stops after approximately 5 seconds, but is not
completed unless the OK key is pressed (STOP is not displayed).
FEEDER> FUNCTION> FAN-CHK
Specification of DADF Operation Solenoid
To specify the DADF solenoid to operate.
The solenoid is activated by SL-ON.
At operation check
0 to 1
0: Disengagement Solenoid (SL1)
1: Stamp Solenoid (SL2)
FEEDER> FUNCTION> SL-ON
SL-ON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Operation check of DADF Solenoid

To start operation check for the solenoid specified by SL-CHK.
At operation check
stops.
2) Press OK key.
Caution
FEEDER> FUNCTION> SL-CHK
MTR-ON
Operation check of Motor
Lv.1 Details
To start operation check for the motor specified by MTR-CHK.
Use case
At operation check
stops.
2) Press OK key.
Caution
FEEDER> FUNCTION> MTR-CHK
ROLL-CLN
Rotation of DADF Rollers
Lv.1 Details
To rotate for cleaning the DADF Rollers.
Clean the roller by putting the lint-free paper moistened with alcohol
while it is rotating.
Use case
At roller cleaning
2) Clean the rotating rollers with lint-free paper moistened with
alcohol.
3) Press OK key.
The rollers stop.
FEED-ON
Operation check of DADF individual feed
Lv.1 Details
To start operation check for the feed mode specified by FEED-CHK.
Use case
At operation check
FEEDER> FUNCTION> FEED-CHK
T-8-87
8-206
Service Mode > FEEDER > OPTION
8-207
OPTION
FEEDER > OPTION
SIZE-SW
Lv.1 Details
ON/OFF of mixed paper detection:AB, Inch

To set ON/OFF of mixed paper detection: AB configuration and Inch
configuration
Use case
When enabling to mix AB and Inch configuration sizes original
0 to 1
0: OFF (Mixed paper is not detected), 1: ON (Mixed paper is
detected)
Default value
0
T-8-88
Service Mode > FEEDER > OPTION
8-207
Service Mode > SORTER > ADJUST
SORTER
8-208
SORTER > ADJUST
STP-R1
Lv.1 Details
ADJUST
SORTER > ADJUST
STP-F1
Lv.1 Details
Front 1-staple position (R size)

To adjust the A4R/LGL/LTRR paper front 1-staple position on
Finisher.
As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves by
0.1mm.
+: Toward front
-: Toward rear
Use case
When the A4R/LGL/LTRR paper front staple position is displaced
-6 to 6 (Even if the value out of range is set, the same result as that
of maximum/minimum value is expected.)
Unit
0.49mm
Default value
0
STP-F2
Front 1-staple position(half size)
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the A3/B4/A4/B5/LDR/LTR/EXEC/8K/16K paper front
1-staple position on Finisher.
0.1mm.
+: Toward front
-: Toward rear
Use case
When the A3/B4/A4/B5/LDR/LTR/EXEC/8K/16K paper front staple
position is displaced
Unit
0.49mm
Default value
0
Rear 1-staple position (R size)

To adjust the A4R/LGL/LTRR paper rear 1-staple position on
Finisher.
0.1mm.
+: Toward front
-: Toward rear
Use case
When the A4R/LGL/LTRR paper rear staple position is displaced
Unit
0.49mm
Default value
0
STP-R2
Rear 1-staple position (half size)
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the A3/B4/A4/B5/LDR/LTR/EXEC/8K/16K paper rear
1-staple position on Finisher.
0.1mm.
+: Toward front
-: Toward rear
Use case
When the A3/B4/A4/B5/LDR/LTR/EXEC/8K/16K paper rear staple
position is displaced
Unit
0.49mm
Default value
0
STP-2P
Adj front/rear 2-staple position
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the front/rear 2-staple position on Finisher.
0.1mm.
+: Toward front
-: Toward rear
Use case
When the front/rear 2-staple position is displaced
-50 to 50
Default value
0
8-208
8-209
SORTER > ADJUST

SDL-STP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
SDL-ALG
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
ST-ALG1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
ST-ALG2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
SORTER > ADJUST
Adj Saddle staple position: Fin-P1

To adjust the staple position at the time of saddle stitching.
As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves
downward by 0.5 mm.
When the fold position and the staple position are misaligned at the
time of saddle stitching
Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and
press OK key.
-3 to 3
1mm
0
Adj Saddle alignment position: Fin-P1
To adjust the shift position of the Alignment Plate at the time of
saddle stitching.
As the value is incremented by 1, the alignment position moves
toward the center of the paper by 0.1mm.
When an alignment failure occurs at the time of saddle stitching
0 to 1
1mm
0
Adj Stacker A4 size align pstn
To adjust the A4 size paper alignment position of the Process Tray.
As the value is incremented by 1, the Alignment Plate moves inward
by 0.1 mm.
When misalignment occurs in A4 size paper
-10 to 10
0.42mm
0
Adj Stacker LTR size align pstn
To adjust the LTR size paper alignment position.
As the value is incremented by 1, the travel length of the Alignment
Plate is increased by 0.42 mm.
When misalignment occurs in LTR size paper
-10 to 10
0.42mm
0
STP-F3
Lv.1 Details
A4R front stpl pstn (<45 deg): Fin-P1

To adjust the one front staple position on the A4R size paper.
As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves to the
rear side by 0.49 mm.
The item can be also set with DIP switch of the Finisher (with
common setting range and setting value). The latest setting value is
enabled regardless of service mode/DIP switch.
Use case
When misalignment occurs at the front staple position on A4R size
paper
-6 to 6
Unit
0.49mm
Default value
0
STP-F4
LTRR frt stpl pstn (<45 deg): Fin-P1
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the one front staple position on the LTRR size paper.
Use case
When misalignment occurs at the front staple position on LTRR size
paper
-6 to 6
Unit
0.49mm
Default value
0
STP-R3
A4R rear stpl pstn (<45 deg): Fin-P1
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the one rear staple position on the A4R size paper.
Use case
When misalignment occurs at the rear staple position on A4R size
paper
-6 to 6
Unit
0.49mm
Default value
0
8-209
8-210
SORTER > ADJUST
SORTER > ADJUST
STP-R4
Lv.1 Details
LTRR rear stpl pstn (<45 deg): Fin-P1

To adjust the one rear staple position on the LTRR size paper.
Use case
When misalignment occurs at the rear staple position on LTRR size
paper
-6 to 6
Unit
0.49mm
Default value
0
SW-UP-RL
Adj Swing Roller falling pstn: Fin-P1
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the Swing Roller fall position.
As the value is incremented by 1, the Swing Roller fall position
moves downward by 0.2 mm.
Use case
When paper fails to be transported to the Processing Tray and
misalignment occurs
-17 to 33
Unit
0.2mm
Default value
0
PUN-V-RG
Adj punch vertical rgst pstn: Fin-P1
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the vertical registration position of the paper to be punched.
As the value is incremented by 1, the punch hole position moves
toward the edge by 1 mm.
Use case
When misalignment of punch hole position occurs
-4 to 2
Unit
1mm
Default value
0
PRCS-RET
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
UP-CL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
DW-CL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
THC-CL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Adj Process Tray return amount:Fin-P1

To adjust the pull-back amount of the paper on the Processing Tray.
As the value is incremented by 1, the amount to return papers to the
Process Tray Stopper is increased by 1.4 mm (paper feed amount of
the Swing Roller is increased).
When the paper is bent in the Processing Tray
0 to 5
1.4mm
0
Upward curl prevention mode: Fin-P1
Set 1 when upward curl occurs on the paper delivered to the Stack
Tray, and paper leaning due to the curl occurs.
When upward curl occurs on the paper delivered to the Stack Tray,
and paper leaning due to the curl occurs
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
ON/OFF of downward curl alleviation mode
Set 1 when a stacking failure occurs due to downward curl on the
paper delivered to the tray.
When a stacking failure due to downward curl on the paper occurs
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Heavy ppr curl prevention mode:Fin-P1
Set 1 when upward curl occurs on the heavy paper delivered.
When 1 is set, the amount of Stack Tray descension for stack
delivery increases. The paper surface detection is performed for
every sheet, not for every 5 sheets.
When upward curl occurs on the heavy paper delivered
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
8-210
8-211
SORTER > ADJUST
SORTER > ADJUST
THC-PUSH
Lv.1 Details
Heavy ppr out prevention mode:Fin-P1

Set 1 when the already stacked paper is pushed out at the time of
heavy paper delivery.
When 1 is set, the Stack Tray moves down temporarily before the
heavy paper is delivered to the Processing Tray if the leading sheet
is heavy paper.
Use case
When the already stacked paper is pushed out at the time of heavy
paper delivery
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
OFST-STC
Poor offset stack prev mode:Fin-P1
Lv.1 Details
Set 1 when paper is not appropriately stacked in the small-size offset
mode.
When 1 is set, buffer operation is not performed in the small-size
offset mode.
Use case
When paper is not appropriately stacked in the small-size offset
mode
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
THN-STC
Poor thin ppr stack prev mode:Fin-P1
Lv.1 Details
Set 1 when thin paper is not appropriately stacked.
When 1 is set, the stacking condition of thin paper improves.
Use case
When thin paper is not appropriately stacked
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
STP-P-CH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
TRY-NIS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
TRY-SU
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
FIN-NIS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Stpl stack displace prev mode:Fin-P1

Set 1 when the paper on the top is misaligned in the staple delivery
mode.
When 1 is set, paper stack alignment operation is executed twice
immediately before stapling.
When the paper on the top is misaligned in the staple delivery mode
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Tray switch noise reduct mode:Fin-P1
Set 1 when the operation noise after switching the Stack Tray is loud.
When 1 is set, the Stack Tray rise operation becomes slow.
When the operation noise after switching the Stack Tray is loud
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Tray switching speedup mode: Fin-P1
Set 1 when the Stack Tray switching time is long.
When 1 is set, the Stack Tray rise speed becomes fast.
When the Stack Tray switching time is long
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Tray drive noise reduct mode: Fin-P1
Set 1 when the Finisher operation noise is loud.
When 1 is set, the initial Finisher operation is minimized.
When the Finisher operation noise is loud
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
8-211
8-212
SORTER > ADJUST

1SHT-SHF
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
SDL-SWCH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
SDL-ALM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Z-FL-CH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
SORTER > ADJUST
Set 1-sheet Offset+Collate: Fin-P1

Set 1 when setting Offset and Collate for 1-sheet document.
When setting Offset and Collate for 1-sheet document
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Sddl stck capacity switch mode:Fin-P1
Set 1 when increasing the stacking capacity for saddle stitching.
When 1 is set, the stacking capacity increases over the upper limit.
When increasing the stacking capacity for saddle stitching
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Saddle full stack alarm mode: Fin-P1
Set 1 when disabling the stack full alarm for saddle stitching.
When disabling the stack full alarm for saddle stitching
0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
0
Set Z-fold stapleable quantity:Fin-P1
To set the maximum number of stitch pages in Z-fold stapling.
This item is used to prevent missing pages in Z-fold stapling by
decreasing the maximum number of stitch pages.
When missing pages occurs in Z-fold stapling
0 to 1
0: 10 sheets, 1: 5 sheets
5sheet
0
THN-STCL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Set poor stack prev mode: large thin ppr

Set 1 when large size thin paper is not appropriately stacked.
When large size thin paper is not appropriately stacked
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
T-8-89
8-212
Service Mode > SORTER > FUNCTION
FUNCTION
SORTER > FUNCTION

PF-SENS3
Lv.1 Details
SORTER > FUNCTION

FIN-BK-R
Lv.1 Details
Use case
FIN-BK-W
Lv.1 Details
Use case
FIN-CON
Lv.1 Details
Caution

PF-CON
Lv.1 Details
PF-SENS1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
PF-SENS2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
8-213
Finisher backup data saving: HDD

To read the backup data from Finisher Controller PCB and save in
HDD.
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB
termination: NG
SORTER> FUNCTION> FIN-BK-W
Fin Controller PCB backup data write
To write the backup data saved in HDD to Finisher Controller PCB.
When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB
termination: NG
SORTER> FUNCTION> FIN-BK-R
Controller PCB RAM clear
To execute the RAM clear of Finisher Controller PCB to delete all the
adjustment contents and counter information.
OFF/ON.
Controller PCB RAM clear: PFU
To execute the RAM clear of Inserter/Folder Controller PCB on
Paper Folding Unit to delete all the adjustment contents and counter
information.
Adj Slowdown Timing Sensor output: PFU
To adjust the output of Slowdown Timing Sensor on Paper Folding
Unit automatically.
When replacing the Slowdown Timing Sensor
When replacing the Controller PCB
Adj Release Timing Sensor output: PFU
To adjust the output of Release Timing Sensor on Paper Folding Unit
automatically.
When replacing the Release Timing Sensor
Service Mode > SORTER > FUNCTION
Adj Fold Position Sensor output: PFU

To adjust the output of Fold Position Sensor on Paper Folding Unit
automatically.
Use case
When replacing the Fold Position Sensor
PF-SENS4
Adj Upper Stopper Path Sensor output:PFU
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the output of Upper Stopper Path Sensor on Paper Folding
Unit automatically.
Use case
When replacing the Upper Stopper Path Sensor
T-8-90
8-213
Service Mode > SORTER > OPTION
OPTION
8-214
SORTER > OPTION
TRY-OVER
Lv.1 Details
SORTER > OPTION

BLNK-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Set Saddle Finisher fold position margin

To set the margin width of fold position on Saddle Finisher.
When changing the margin width of fold position
0 to 2
0: Normal, 1: Wider, 2: Entire image (no margin)
Default value
2
MD-SPRTN
Restricted operation at Finisher error
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to stop the machine when an error occurs at Finisher.
Use case
When preferring to run the machine at Finisher error occurrence
Caution
When 1 is set, staple operation or alignment operation is not
executed. Set 0 normally.
0 to 1
0: Normal, 1: Restricted operation
Default value
0
BUFF-SW
ON/OFF of finisher buffer opertn: Fin-P1
Lv.1 Details
To set ON/OFF of buffer operation in the Finisher.
When misalignment occurs, set 1 to 4.
When 1 is set, buffer operation is not performed for all jobs.
Alignment performance is improved, but productivity decreases.
When 2 is set, buffer operation is not performed only for non-binding
jobs. Since buffer operation is performed for binding jobs, productivity
improves, but alignment performance decreases.
When 3 is set, buffer operation is not performed only for binding jobs.
When 4 is set, it is not performed only for binding jobs with coated
papers.
Use case
When the misalignment of paper stack occurs (either lowest 3 sheets
in side-stitching are displaced or center 3 sheets in saddle-stitching
are displaced.)
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value and press OK.
Caution
When the buffer operation is set to OFF, productivity is decreased.
0 to 1
0: ON, 1: OFF
Default value
0
Set of fold ppr stack limit: Fin-P1

To set the limit of stack capacity for half fold paper and Z-fold paper.
When clearing the limit of stack capacity, paper can be stacked
beyond the maximum stack capacity.
Use case
When stacking the paper beyond the maximum stack capacity of the
Tray.
0 to 1
0: Normal operation, 1: Clearing limit of stack capacity
Default value
0
PRCS-SP1
Proc Tr fd SPD accelerate ON/OFF: Fin-P1
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to accelerate the speed to feed paper to the Process
Tray Stopper in the Process Tray of the Finisher.
When misalignment occurs in the sort and staple mode due to paper
return failure, set 1.
Use case
When misalignment occurs in the sort and staple mode
0 to 1
0: OFF (600mm/sec), 1: ON (700mm/sec)
Default value
0
RTNRL-UP
Set Inserter pckup ppr drop prev:Fin-P1
Lv.1 Details
To set the Paper Return Roller rise timing when stacking papers (256
g/m2 or more) picked up from the Inserter on the Process Tray.
Set 1 if papers picked up from the Inserter fall from the Finisher Tray
when stacking on the Process Tray.
Use case
When papers picked up from the Inserter fall from the Finisher Tray
at the time of stacking on the Process Tray
0 to 1
0: Normal, 1: Slow down
Default value
0
8-214
8-215
SORTER > OPTION
SORTER > OPTION
FDPL-SL
Lv.1 Details
Set soil prev for back of Saddle:Fin-P1

To set ON/OFF of the Feed Plate Engagement Solenoid at the time
of Saddle stacking operation.
When 1 is set, the Intermediate Feed Roller is disengaged by turning
OFF the Feed Plate Engagement Solenoid at the time of Saddle
stacking operation.
Set 1 when the back of paper is soiled by the Intermediate Feed
Roller. But the alignment condition of papers at the time of saddle
stitching decreases.
Use case
When the back of paper is soiled due to the Intermediate Feed Roller
at the time of Saddle stacking operation
0 to 1
0: ON (Engagement), 1: OFF (Disengagement)
Default value
0
STCR-DWN
Set occasional misalign prev mode:Fin-P1
Lv.1 Details
When misalignment in feed direction occurs at approx. every 30
sheets for thin/plain paper, set 1.
Use case
When misalignment in feed direction occurs occasionally for thin/
plain paper
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
BUFF-INT
Lv.1 Details
Ppr intvl after buffer ppr ejctn: Fin-P1

In case of paper with excessive upward curl, paper right after the
buffer paper is ejected at the Finisher hits the Stack Delivery Roller,
causing Saddle Delivery Sensor stationary jam.
When 1 is set, the jam can be avoided since the paper intervals
between the present and the following papers after the buffer paper
ejection become wider.
Use case
When stationary jam occurs at the Stack Delivery Roller at buffer
operation
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
PRCS-SP3
Proc Tr fd SPD decelerate ON/OFF: Fin-P1
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to decelerate the speed to feed paper to the Process
Tray Stopper in the Process Tray of the Finisher.
Set 1 to 5 when misalignment (buckling on the trailing edge) occurs
in staple mode because papers without buffer return too much.
As the value is incremented by 1, the feed speed is decelerated by
50 mm/sec.
Use case
When misalignment occurs for thin/plain paper in the staple mode
Caution
When changing the setting, adjustment of Process Tray return
amount (SORTER> ADJUST> PRCS-RET) may be required.
0 to 8
0: OFF (700 mm/sec), 1: ON (650 mm/sec), 2: ON (600 mm/sec), 3:
ON (550 mm/sec), 4: ON (500 mm/sec), 5: ON (450 mm/sec), 6 to 8:
Not used
Default value
0
SORTER> ADJUST> PRCS-RET
NSRT-STC
Set poor stack prev mode at non-collate
Lv.1 Details
To set ON/OFF of poor stack prevention mode when not collating.
Set 1 when the stackability is low when not collating.
Use case
When the stackability at non-collating is low
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
8-215
8-216
SORTER > OPTION

THN-TRSW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
THN-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Supplement/memo
SWGUP-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
CALG-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Default value
Set narrow width thin paper delvry dest

When delivering thin paper (63 g/m2 and less) which width direction
is 139.6 mm and smaller to the Stacker, delivery stationary jam may
occur.
When 1 is set, thin paper which width direction is 139.6 mm and
smaller is forcibly delivered to the tray of the host machine.
When delivery stationary jam occurs at the time of delivering narrowwidth thin paper to the First/Second Delivery Tray
0 to 1
0: Destination specified on UI, 1: Tray of the host machine
0
Change of thin paper stack capacity
To increase the stack capacity of the stacking tray for thin paper.
As for the thin paper, the stack capacity same as the large size
changes to its same as the small size.
When a user wants to increase the stack capacity of the stacking
tray for the thin paper.
1) Enter the setting value and press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power.
0
0: Thin paper stack capacity increment mode OFF
1: Thin paper stack capacity increment mode ON
ON/OFF Swing Unit diseng oprtn:thin(1st)
To set whether the Swing Unit performs disengagement operation
when feeding the 1st sheet of thin paper.
When the dog ear appears on the first sheet in the thin paper feeding
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
ON/OFF ctr align oprtn: corner-stpl mode
To set whether to perform center alignment operation in cornerstaple mode.
When switching the alignment position from center to front/rear side
in corner-staple mode
0 to 1
0: Center alignment, 1: Front/rear side alignment
0
T-8-91
8-216
Service Mode > BOARD > OPTION
8-217
BOARD
OPTION
BOARD > OPTION
MENU-1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
MENU-2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
MENU-3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
MENU-4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Default value
FONTDL
Lv.1 Details
Default value
Hide/dspl of printer set menu level 1

To set whether to display or hide the level 1 of printer setting menu.
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
Upon users request
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
ON/OFF of font setting screen display
To set whether to display the service-purposed setting screen of
fonts which are listed using PS Kanji Font Downloader.
0 to 1
0: Hide, 1: Display
0
T-8-92
Service Mode > BOARD > OPTION
8-217
Installation
before
Checking
Installation
of Options
Table
Combination
the Contents
Checking
Unpacking
Installation
Relocating the
When
Machine
Cover -B1
Printer
Tray-E1
Shift
Heater Unit
Reader
Heater Unit
Cassette
9
Installation
Deck Heater
Paper
Unit-A1
Tray-A2
Utility
Reader-C1/Copy
Card
Card Reader-F1
Guidance Kit-F1/F2
Voice
Procedure
Installation
for Expansion Bus-F1/
F2, IPSec Board-B2 and
Wireless LAN Board-B1
Memory Type
Additional
B (512MB)
of HDD
Combination
Options
Installation > Checking before Installation > Checking Installation Space
Checking before Installation
9-2
Checking Installation Space

1) The foot of this equipment should be in contact with the floor. This equipment should be
Following shows requirements for the installation site.

Therefore, it is desirable to see the installation site in advance before bringing in the machine
to the user's site.
kept on the level.

2) The machine must be away from the wall by 100mm or more to secure a sufficient space to
operate the machine.
Checking Power Supply

1) There must be a properly grounded source of power that can be used exclusively by the
following machines:
The optional Booklet Finisher, External 2/3 Hole Puncher, Document Insertion/Folding
Unit, Duplex Color Image Reader Unit, Upright Control Panel, and Paper Deck Unit-D1 are
attached.
EUR: 200V/10A
USA: 120V/16A
800 mm or more
Checking the Installation Environment

1,353 mm
1) The environment of the installation site must be in the range as shown below. Avoid
installation near the faucet, water boiler, humidifier or refrigerator.
Guaranteed range for operation/image Temperature: 10.0 to 30.0 deg C, Humidity: 20 to
80%
2) The machine must not be installed near a source of fire or in an area subject to dust or
ammonium gas. If the area is exposed to direct rays of the sun, provide curtains to the
window.
3) Be sure to provide adequate ventilation of the room to keep the work environment
comfortable. Room odor can be bothering when running the machine for a long time in a
poorly-ventilated room although the ozone amount generated while running this equipment
500 mm
or more
does not harm human health.
2,608 mm
500 mm
or more
500 mm
or more
F-9-1
Installation > Checking before Installation > Checking Installation Space
9-2
Installation > Checking before Installation > Points to Note at Installation Work
9-3
Points to Note at Installation Work
The optional Copy Tray, Duplex Color Image Reader Unit are attached.
100 mm or more
Take note of the following points when installing the host machine.
1) Moving the host machine from a cool place to a warm place can generate condensation,
causing moisture beads on the metal surface. Using the host machine while the machine
is condensed can cause image failure. Therefore, when moving the machine from a cool
1,353 mm
place to a warm place to install, unpack the host machine and leave it for 2 hours or more
500 mm
or more
1,533 mm
500 mm
or more
before the installation work so that the machine becomes used to the room temperature.
2) Be sure to work with a group of 4 or more people to install the host machine.
500 mm
or more
F-9-2
NOTE: Securing Space for Servicing

The space required behind the machine differs according to whether any of the following
options is installed or not.
Be sure to make necessary space in accordance with the conditions.
Document Insertion / Folding Unit-H1
<Space required behind the machine>
When any of the foregoing options is installed: 800mm or more
When any of the foregoing options is not installed: 100mm or more
3) To install the host machine, install it in a well-ventilated place. Especially when there are
multiple host machine s, be sure to locate the machine where the machine is free from
direct exhaust of other machines. Be sure to keep the machine away from the air-inlet duct
which is used for ventilation of the room.
Installation > Checking before Installation > Points to Note at Installation Work
9-3
Installation > Table of Options Combination > Order to Install the Host machine and the Options
Table of Options Combination
Order to Install the Host machine and the Options
NOTE:
Following table shows the combination of options to be installed at the right side of the
host machine.
Refer to the table below to install the options described in the table. Be sure to check
the combination before the installation work.
Utility Tray
Utility Tray
9-4
Voice Guidance Kit Card Raeader Voice Operation Kit
NOTE:
In the case of installing the host machine and the other options at the same time, follow
the order as described below to install the options first so that the installation operability
is improved.
1.
2.
Unpacking
3.
Installation of the Reader Unit or the Printer Cover
No
Yes
No
4.
Installation of the Developing Assembly
Voice Guidance Kit
No
Yes
No
5.
Installation of the Pickup Assembly
Card Reader
Yes
Yes
Yes
6.
Installing the Fixing Assembly
Voice Operation Kit
No
No
Yes
7.
Installation of Toner Container
8.
Installing the Exhaust Filter
9.
Setting the Environment Heater Switch
T-9-1
Yes: installation is available, No: installation is not available
10.
Turning ON the Main Power
11.
Installation of the Host Machine
12.
Other Installation Work
13.
Setting the Deck and Paper Cassette
14.
Auto Adjust Gradation
15.
Image Position Adjustment
Installation > Table of Options Combination > Order to Install the Host machine and the Options
9-4
Installation > Checking the Contents
Checking the Contents
9-5
[10] Finisher Connector
Cover X 2
[11] Cleaning Tool X 1
[12] Terminal Connector

X1
[13] Touch Pen X 1
[14] Screw
(Binding; M4x6) X 3
[15] Screw (RS Tightening

; M4x10) X 8
<Parts to Be Used to Install the Host Machine>

NOTE:
Use the correct power code to mach the location/area of installation. Make sure not to
leave unused power code at the site.
The [13] and [14] are used both at installation of the host machine and at installation of
the Reader Unit/Printer Cover.
[1] Developing
Assembly X 1
[2] Toner Container X 1
AUS only
[3] Exhaust Filter X 1
Use 1 of them
[16] Case Sheet (EU) X1
EUR only
[4] Power Code X 1
230V region only
[5] Service Book

Holder X 1
Use 1 of them
[17] Hook-and-Loop
Fastener X1
EUR only
[6] Size Plate R X 2
The connector has a

different shape depending
on locations.
F-9-4
[7] Size Plate L X 1
[8] Connection Seal

(Middle) X 1
[9] Connection Seal

(Front) X 1
F-9-3
9-5
<Parts to Be Used to Install the Reader Unit or the Printer Cover>

[1] Reader Fixation Plate L
X1
[4] Left Rear Inner Cover

X1
[2] Reader Fixation Plate R

X1
[5] Left Upper Cover X 1
9-6
<CD/GUIDES>
CD/GUIDES
e-Manual
[3] Left Rear Cover X 1
Users Guide
Setup Guide
Basic Operation Guide
Before Using This Machine
Drum Unit Warranty
UFR II User Software
iW Enterprise Management
Console
iW Management Console
PCL User Software
AMS KIT Software / Manual
CD
Features of AMS
[6] Right Upper Cover X 1
North America
EUR
ASIA / AUS
1
1
1
1
1
2
(UK, FRA/SPA, ITA/
GER)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
T-9-2
[7] Upper Rear Cover X 1
[8] Screw
(RS Tightening; M4x10) X 8
Use 7 of them
[9] Screw
(Binding; M4x6) X 3
Use 2 of them
[10] Rubber Cap X 4
F-9-5
9-6
Installation > Unpacking
Unpacking
9-7
3) Hold the handles at the right side of the host machine and lift the host machine to remove
the pad. Put the plastic bag aside in the direction of the arrow.
CAUTION:
The host machine weighs about 240kg. For safety, be sure to work carefully to move
and install the machine.
CAUTION:
Be sure not to lift the host machine too much. Otherwise, it will lose the balance.
Be sure to work with a group of 4 or more people to install the host machine.
Handle
Handle Cover
NOTE:
The dimension of the host machine and the transport container is as shown in the figure.
Be sure to secure a space to unpack, and then start the installation work.
1,305 mm
plastic bag
Pad
F-9-7
1,064 mm
4) Hold the handles at the left side of the host machine and lift the host machine to remove
893 mm
the pad and the plastic bag.
F-9-6
CAUTION:
Be sure not to lift the host machine too much. Otherwise, it will lose the balance.
1) Pull the plastic bag all the way down.

2) Open 4 Handle Covers.
Handles
1 Claw each
Pads
Plastic Bag
F-9-8
9-7
5) Take out the 2 Slope Plates stored at the right side of the Pallet and remove the 2 pins
9-8
8) Remove tapes on the exterior surface of the host machine.
which are secured at the back of the Slope Plate with tape.
6) Turn around the 2 Slope Plates to install as shown in the figure, and then fit the pin-holes of
the pallet with the pin-holes of the Slope Plates to put the 2 pins into the holes.
NOTE:
Do not remove 2 tapes for tags and a tape for the Filter Cover at this step. These tapes
will be removed later on.
Pin
Slope Plate
F-9-9
F-9-11
7) Hold the handles at the right side of the host machine, and then, while supporting the
corner of the host machine, fit the casters to the center of the Slope Plate to slowly bring
the machine down.
9) Close 4 Handle Covers.
CAUTION:
10)
Be careful not to make the casters off from the Slope Plate.
When installing the Upright Control Panel at the same time, install it before installing
the Reader Unit. (Refer to "Installation Procedure" included in the Upright Control Panel.)
11)
When installing the Reader Unit at the same time, install it before installing the Main
Body. (Refer to "Installation Procedure" included in the Reader Unit.)
Handle
Handle
F-9-10
9-8
Installation > Installation > Installing the Developing Assembly
Installation
9-9

4) Turn the Lock Lever, and open the Developing Assembly Pressure Cover.
Installing the Developing Assembly

1) Unpack the Developing Assembly.
2) Check if there are any scratches on the cylinder while rotating the gear manually in the
direction of the arrow.
CAUTION:
Do not damage and touch the cylinder.
Do not turn the gear inversely.
F-9-13
F-9-12
9-9
9-10
CAUTION:
CAUTION: How to Hold the Developing Assembly
Before installing the Developing Assembly, be sure to check that the Buffer Shutter is
not opened.
When holding the Developing Assembly, be sure to hold the handle of the
Developing Assembly as shown in the figure.
If forcedly inserting the Developing Assembly while the Buffer Shutter is open, the
Buffer Shutter may get damage. When the Buffer Shutter is open, be sure to close it by
pulling it toward the front.
Do not touch the shutter area of the Developing Assembly. The shutter area is
slippery, so it may cause a fall of the assembly.
F-9-16
F-9-14
Whether the Developing Assembly is installed properly can be checked with the Shutter
Arm.
<Buffer Shutter is closed>
Shutter Arm
<Buffer Shutter is open>
Shutter Arm
F-9-15
9-10
5) Hold the Developing Assembly as shown in the figure, and align the protrusions at both
sides of the assembly with the rails on the host machine.
9-11
6) Along the rails, insert the Developing Assembly horizontally.

1 Connector
rail
Protrusion
Protrusion
F-9-18
7) Close the Developing Assembly Pressure Cover and return the Lock Lever to the original
position.
8) Secure with the Screw (Binding; M4x6).
rail
Protrusion
F-9-17
F-9-19
9) Close the Right Cover.
9-11
Installation > Installation > Installing the Pickup Assembly
Installing the Pickup Assembly
9-12
6) Loosen the screw and slide the Deck Pressure Plate in the direction of the arrow. Check
that the screw position is at the engraved mark [1], and then tighten the screw.
1) Remove tapes securing tags from the Vertical Path Cover.

2) Open the Vertical Path Cover and remove 2 Pressure Release Spacers at pickup slot for
Engraved Mark
Deck Pressure
each cassette.
Plate
Screw
F-9-21
7) Close the Left and Right Decks.

F-9-20
3) Close the Vertical Path Cover.

5) Press the Release Button to open the Left and Right Decks, and remove the tape.
NOTE:
Be sure to release the Release button slowly because it may not come out if releasing it
abruptly.
Installation > Installation > Installing the Pickup Assembly
9-12
Installation > Installation > Installing the Fixing Assembly
Installing the Fixing Assembly

1) Remove the tapes securing the tag.
2) Turn the Fixing Feed Unit Release Lever in the direction of the arrow and pull the Fixing
9-13
NOTE:
In the case that the Fixing Nip Pressure Release Screw is hard to be removed, release
the lock by pressing the Lock Springs at both rails, and pull out the Fixing Feed Unit
further until it stops.
Lock Spring
Feed Unit all the way out.
Lock Spring
F-9-22
F-9-23
9-13
3) Remove the tape securing a tag on the Fixing Upper Cover.
5) Close the Inner Delivery Unit.
4) Open the Inner Delivery Unit, and remove the 2 Fixing Nip Pressure Release Screws.
6) Remove the ETB Spacer.
Fixing Nip Pressure

Release Screw
9-14
Fixing Nip Pressure

Release Screw
F-9-25
7) Return the Fixing Feed Unit and lock the Fixing Feed Unit Release Lever.
NOTE:
In the case of pulling out the Fixing Feed Unit further, be sure to return the Fixing Feed
Unit while releasing the Lock Spring.
8) Close the Front Cover.
Inner Delivery Unit
F-9-24
9-14
Installation > Installation > Installing the Exhaust Filter
Installing the Toner Container
9-15
3) Remove the cap of the Toner Container.
1) Open the Toner Exchange Cover, and turn the Lock Lever in the direction of the arrow to
release.
4) Set the Toner Container to the Main Body, and turn the Lock Lever in the direction of the
arrow to secure the Toner Container in place.
F-9-28
F-9-26
5) Close the Toner Exchange Cover.
2) Unpack the Toner Container and shake it approx. 10 times horizontally.
Installing the Exhaust Filter

1) Remove the tape, and remove the Filter Cover.
F-9-27
F-9-29
Installation > Installation > Installing the Exhaust Filter
9-15
Installation > Installation > Installing the USB Device Port (only with the products designed for Europe)
2) Hold the Exhaust Filter as shown in the figure, and install it to the Main Body.
9-16
Installing the USB Device Port (only with the products

designed for Europe)
CAUTION:
Use the Card Reader prepared by each sales company.
When installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2, refer to "Installation" > "USB
Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 (p. 9-321)" > "Install the Multimedia
Reader/Writer (p. 9-9)" of this Service Manual.
1) Open the DADF, and remove the Transparent Cover and the Device Port Sheet of the
Upper Left Cover.
3 Claws
F-9-30
3) Install the Filter Cover.
x3
1 Screw (RS Tightening; M4x10)
F-9-32
F-9-31
9-16
2) Connect the Card Reader to the PCB, and store the cable inside the Upper Cover by rolling
9-17
4) Place the Card Reader by aligning it with the position where the cover is installed.
it up.
F-9-35
F-9-33
5) Replace the Device Port Sheet with the Case Sheet.

6) Install the Transparent Cover and the Case Sheet.
3) Put 4 cushions by piling them up.
NOTE:
Be sure to adjust the number of cushions according to how the cable of the Card
Reader is stored.
x3
F-9-36
7) Close the DADF.
F-9-34
9-17
Installation > Installation > Turning ON the Main Power
Setting the Environment Heater Switch
9-18
Turning ON the Main Power
1) Check that the Leakage Breaker is ON.
1) Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet.
2) Turn ON the Environment Heater Switch and the Cassette Heater Switch in accordance
2) Remove the protection sheet on the control panel.

3) Open the switch cover and turn ON the main power switch.
with the installation environment.

Set the environment switches in accordance with the installation environment.
In the case of high humidity environment, turn ON the Environment Switch. (The Drum
CAUTION:
Heater is turned ON regardless of the main switch status).
If "E732-8888 is displayed after turning ON the main power switch, turn OFF and then
ON the main power switch, and then perform the following steps.
Environment
Switch
Cassette Heater
Switch
4) Check that the following service mode (Level 1) value is set to "1".
COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM > SCANTYPE
5) Exit the Service Mode.
6) Change the operation panel screen to "Scan and Send", and press "Other Function".
7) Press "Finished Stamp" in the second page of the "Other Function" screen.
8) Set to the feeder and conduct transmission test to check that the originals are stamped.
NOTE: Turning OFF the Main Power

1) Open the Switch Cover and turn OFF the main power switch.
2) Check that the control panel display and the main power lamp are OFF, and then
Leakage Breaker
F-9-37
Installation > Installation > Turning ON the Main Power
9-18
Installation > Installation > Other Installation Work
Toner Stirring
9-19
Other Installation Work

<Service Book Holder>
1) Check that "Check the developer" is displayed in the following service mode (Level 1).
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > TONER-S
Remove the double-sided tape on back side of the Service Book Holder, and affix the holder
2) Press OK after checking the installation of the Developing Assembly and the Developing
on the Base Plate of the host machine.
Assembly Pressure Plate.

3) Toner supply is executed. (For approx. 17 minutes. Countdown is shown on the screen)
NOTE:
While stirring toner,"Installation of the Host Machine", "Other Installation Work",
"Setting the Deck" and "Setting the Paper Cassette" can be executed.
Installation of the Host Machine

1) Confirm the position to install the Host Machine and turn the 2 adjusters with your hand
until they closely contact the floor.
NOTE:
If you failed to turn the adjusters with your hand, use a screwdriver so that they can be
turned by your hand.
2) Use a screwdriver to turn the adjusters in the direction of the arrow to make them secured.
F-9-39
<Finisher Connector Cover>

Install the 2 Finisher Connector Covers to the left side of the host machine.
1 Protrusion each
NOTE:
Securing of the adjuster is not earthquake resistant.
1 Claw each
Claw
Protrusion
F-9-38
Installation > Installation > Other Installation Work
F-9-40
9-19
Installation > Installation > Setting the Deck
9-20
Setting the Deck
<Cleaning Tool>
Store in an empty space at front side of the Cassette 3 to use for maintenance.
1) Push the Deck Release Button to pull out the Left and the Right Decks to the front.
2) Remove the 3 screws fixing the Trailing Edge Guide Plate, Left Guide Plate, and Right
Guide Plate in place, and fix each of the guide plates at users desired size.
NOTE:
Setting at the time of shipment: A4 size
Left
Guide Plate
x3
Trail Edge
Guide Plate
Screw
Right
Guide Plate
F-9-41
<Touch Pen>
Open the Upper Right Cover, and store the Touch Pen.
F-9-42
3) Put the specified size of papers in the Left/Right Deck.
9-20
4) Following the paper size, put the Size Plate L in the Right and Left Deck through the
9-21
5) Push the Left/Right Deck in.
clearance at the handle area.
6) When the size is switched, register paper size for the Front Deck in service mode (Level 1).
Right Deck: COPIER > OPTION > CST > P-SZ-C1
Left Deck: COPIER > OPTION > CST > P-SZ-C2
A4=0, B5=1, LTR=2
7) Exit from the service mode.
F-9-43
NOTE:
When taking out the size plate, access it from back side of the Deck Cover and push it
out upward.
F-9-44
9-21
Installation > Installation > Setting the Paper Cassette
Setting the Paper Cassette
9-22
5) Cut the 2 points of the Size Plate R with nippers.

Cut
1) Push the Cassette Release Button to pull out the Cassette to the front.
2) Hold the Lever of the Side Guide Plate to set the Side Guide Plate to the specified size.
3) Hold the Lever of the Trail Edge Guide Plate to set the Trail Edge Guide Plate to the
specified size.
Side Guide Plate
F-9-47
Side Guide
Plate Lever
Trail Edge
Guide Plate Lever
Trail Edge
Guide Plate
6) Following the paper size, set the Size Plate R (unused size plates should be put together).
Side Guide Plate
F-9-45
4) Set paper and open the cover at the insertion area of the Size Plate.
Paper
F-9-48
7) Close the cover at the insertion area of the Size Plate and push in the Cassette.
Cover
8) Set another cassette as well.
F-9-46
NOTE:
Paper size is set to be automatically recognized.
Installation > Installation > Setting the Paper Cassette
9-22
Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)
9-23
Image Position Adjustment

Left Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)
<In the Case of Copier Model only>
Adjustment of Cassette/Deck
1) Clean the Copyboard Glass surface of the host machine.

2) Set A3, A4, 11x17, or LTR size papers in a cassette. (Refer to the cassette settings.)
3) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Adjustment /Maintenance] > [Adjust Image Quality] > [Auto
Adjust Gradation].
Print from each cassette/deck, and check that the left edge margin of the image (L1) is within
2.5 +/- 1.5mm.
If it is not within the range, execute adjustment by following the procedure below.
4) Select the source of paper for test print, and press [OK].
Feeding direction
of paper
5) From this point on, follow the instruction on UI.
L1
image
F-9-49
1) Adjust the image position in service mode (Level 1).

Right Deck: COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C1
Left Deck: COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C2
Cassette 3: COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C3
Cassette 4: COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C4
NOTE:
<Setting Range>
-20 to 20 (0.1mm per unit)
As the value is incremented by 1, the left edge margin is increased by 0.1mm.
2) When the setting value was changed in step 1), write down the new numerical value in the
service label.
4) Print from the cassette/deck, and check that the left edge margin of the image is within 2.5
+/- 1.5mm.
NOTE:
If the adjustment cannot be made with the setting value of -20 to 20 (adjustment
amount: -2.0 to 2.0mm), execute step 5) and later steps.
9-23
5) Pull out the Cassette.
9-24
8) According to the scale in which the position was checked in step 6), adjust the position of
6) Check the Cassette position by the scale of the Cassette Button Link Unit.
the Cassette Button Link Button.

In the case of larger margin at the rear side, move the Cassette Button Link Unit to the rear
side.
Cassette Button
Link Unit
Scale
In the case of larger margin at the front side, move the Cassette Button Link Unit to the
front side.
Cassette Button
Link Unit
Scale
F-9-50
7) Loosen the 4 screws of the Cassette Button Link Unit.

F-9-52
9) Tighten the 4 screws (which have been loosened in step 7)).
Cassette Button
Link Unit
Cassette Button
Link Unit
F-9-51
9-24
NOTE:
If you concern alignment of the Cassette Front Cover, adjust the left and right sides of
the cover as necessary.
10)
9-25
NOTE:
When a mechanical adjustment was made, be sure to execute the service mode in step
1) again.
Loosen the 4 screws and adjust the position of the Cassette Front Cover by referring
to the scale.
11)
When moving the Cassette Button Link Unit, adjust the left side of the Cassette Front
Cover by shifting it with the same shifting amount of the unit.

Scale
Scale

F-9-53
12)
Once the position of the Cassette Front Cover is confirmed, tighten the 4 screws
(which have been loosened in step 10)).

13)
Print from the cassette/deck, and check that the left edge margin of the image is
within 2.5 +/- 1.5mm.
9-25
Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)
Left Edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side)
9-26
Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)
NOTE:
By executing the margin adjustment (2nd side) for the Cassette 3, the adjustment is
applied to all source of paper.
NOTE:
By executing the leading edge margin adjustment for the Cassette 3, the adjustment is
Execute printing from the Cassette 3, and check that the leading edge margin is within L1 2.5
Execute duplex printing from the Cassette 3, and check that the left edge margin is within 2.5
+1.5/- 0.5mm.
+/- 1.5mm.
L1
Feeding direction
of paper
Feeding direction
of paper
image
L1
image
F-9-55
F-9-54
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REGIST
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-REFE

2) Execute duplex printing from the Cassette 3, and check that the left edge margin is within 2.5
+/- 1.5mm.
service label.
As the value is incremented by 1, the leading edge margin is decreased by 0.1mm.

2) Execute duplex printing from the Cassette 3, and check that the leading edge margin is
within 2.5 +1.5/- 0.5mm.
service label.
Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)
9-26
Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Adjusting margin of Multi-purpose Pickup Tray
Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side)
9-27
Adjusting margin of Multi-purpose Pickup Tray

Print from the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup, and check that the left edge margin of the image is
NOTE:
By executing the leading edge margin adjustment for the Cassette 3, the adjustment is
within 2.5 +/- 1.5mm.

Feeding direction
of paper
Execute duplex printing from the Cassette 3, and check that the leading edge margin on the
image
L1
2nd side is within L1=2.5 +1.5/- 0.5mm.

L1
F-9-57
Feeding direction
of paper
image
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-MF

NOTE:
<Setting Range>
-20 to 20 (0.1mm per unit)
F-9-56

COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REG-DUP1
within 2.5 +1.5/- 0.5mm.
service label.
service label.
4) Print from the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup, and check that the left edge margin of the image
is within 2.5 +/- 1.5mm.
NOTE:
If the adjustment cannot be made with the setting value of -20 to 20 (adjustment
amount: -2.0 to 2.0mm), execute step 5) and later steps.
Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Adjusting margin of Multi-purpose Pickup Tray
9-27
Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (Multi-purpose Tray Pickup)
9-28
Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (Multi-purpose Tray Pickup)
5) Open the MP Pickup Tray.

6) Loosen the screw and adjust the position of the Slide Guide by referring to the scale.
In the case of larger margin at the rear side, move the Slide Guide to the front side.
In the case of larger margin at the front side, move the Slide Guide to the rear side.
NOTE:
By executing the leading edge margin adjustment for the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup, the
adjustment is applied to all source of paper.
Execute duplex printing from the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup, and check that the leading edge
Scale
margin is within L12.5 +1.5/- 0.5mm.

L1
Feeding direction
of paper
image
Slide Guide
F-9-59
F-9-58
7) Tighten the screw loosened in step 6).

8) Print from the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup, and check that the left edge margin of the image
is within 2.5 +/- 1.5mm.
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > RG-MF

NOTE:
When a mechanical adjustment was made, be sure to execute the service mode in step
1) again.
within 2.5 +1.5/- 0.5mm.

service label.
Installation > Installation > Image Position Adjustment > Leading Edge Margin Adjustment (Multi-purpose Tray Pickup)
9-28
Installation > Installation > Checking the Network Connection > Checking by the Remote Host Address
Checking the Network Connection
9-29
Operation Procedure Using Ping
Overview
CAUTION:
If the user's network environment is TCP/IP, use the Ping function to check that the network
setting is properly performed.
To execute Ping command with the Windows Vista-installed PC, set OFF the firewall, or
execute Ping command from the Windows Vista-installed PC to the Host Machine.
If the user's network environment is IPX/SPX or Apple Talk, there is no need to check the
network environment.
1) Select the following: [Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [TCP/IP setting]
> [IPv4 setting] > [PING command]
Checking the Network Connection
2) Enter the IP address with the numeric keypad on the Control Panel and press "Execute"
key. "Response from the host" is displayed if Ping command is succeeded while "no
CAUTION:
Be sure to use the network cable with Category 5e or higher. In addition, a sealed type
(STP cable) is recommended.
Using the non-shield type can affect the peripheral electrical equipment through the
network cable.
response from the host" is displayed if failed.
Checking by the Remote Host Address

Using the remote host address to execute Ping can check whether connection to the network
is enabled or not.
Remote host address: IP address of PC terminal connected/running on TCP/IP network
1) Turn OFF the main power switch.
environment that connects to this equipment.
2) Connect the network cable to the Host Machine and turn ON the main power switch.
3) Inform the system administrator at the installation site that installation of the Host Machine
is complete, and then, ask for the network setting.
1) Inform the system administrator about checking of the network connection using Ping.
2) Confirm the remote host address with the system administrator.
NOTE:
Network setting cannot be executed unless logging in as an administrator.
Factory default password is as follows.
System administration division ID: 7654321
System administration password: 7654321
3) Enter the remote host address to Ping.

The network is properly connected if the message say "Response from the host".
The network is not properly connected if the message say "No response from the host",
therefore, execute the following troubleshooting.
CAUTION:
To perform the network setting, the following Additional Functions items must be set
"ON".
[Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [Change network settings/
check connection]
[Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Setting] > [IPv4
setting] > [Use IPv4]
4) Turn OFF and then ON the main power.
Installation > Installation > Checking the Network Connection > Checking by the Remote Host Address
9-29
Installation > Installation > Checking Network Function on the Main Controller
Network Troubleshooting
9-30
Checking the Network Setting of the Host Machine
Checking Connection of the Network Cable
Check if the IP address specified in the Host Machine is correct.
To check whether the network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet Port.
1) Select the following: [Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Setting]
> [IPv4 setting] > [IP address setting]; and write down the address in the IP address field.
Operation Procedure Using Ping
> [IPv4 setting] > [Ping Command]; and enter the IP address.
The IP address specified in the Host Machine is correct if the message say "Response
1) Ask the network administrator at the users site to write down the IP address of the PC that
is connected to the network.
2) [Additional Functions] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Setting] > [IPv4 setting] >
[Ping Command]; and enter the IP address of the PC with the numeric keypad and press
Execute key.
The network is properly connected if the message say "Response from the host".
from the host".

If the message say "No response from the host", check the following.
NOTE:
When setting the address by manually input, set the Subnet Mask by following the
instruction of the administrator.
If the message say "No response from the host", check the following.
NOTE:
The IP address of the PC can be checked by the following procedure:
Select the following on a Windows PC: Start > Program > Accessory > Command
Prompt; and enter ipconfig and press Enter key to display information of the IP
address.
Checking Network Function on the Main Controller

Perform checking by the loopback address.
> [IPv4 setting] > [Ping Command]; and enter the IP address, "127.0.0.1" with the numeric
keypad and enter Execute key.
The network function of the Main Controller is working properly if the message say
"Response from the host".
If the message say "No response from the host", the network function of the Main Controller
is faulty.
2) Replace with a Main Controller that works properly, and then check connection.
9-30
9-31
9-31
9-32
9-32
Installation > When Relocating the Machine
When Relocating the Machine
9-33
5) Secure the Scanner Unit with the Scanner Fixation Tool that have been kept in a safe place
When moving the host machine to another place after installation, execute the operation
since image Reader Unit installation.
shown below.
1) Move the Scanner Unit to the position where it is going to be secured.

Service Mode (Level 2) > COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-R > RD-SHPOS

3) Check that the control panel display and the main power lamp are OFF, and then
4) Open the DADF, and remove the Left Upper Small Cover.
F-9-61
1 Protrusion
1 Claw
6) Close the DADF.
7) Lower lifters inside the Pickup Decks and cassettes.

7-1) Pull out all Pickup Decks and cassettes.
7-2) Confirm that lifters are lowered and close all Pickup Decks and cassettes.
CAUTION:
Protrusion
Make sure to turn the Main Power OFF and then perform these procedures. If the
Main Power is ON, lifters may rise again after closing Pickup Decks and cassettes.
Claw
If the machine is moved with lifters raised, the Lifter Drive Gear may be damaged
due to the shaking.
F-9-60
8) Lift the host machine off the floor by turning the 2 adjusters with a screwdriver.
9-33
9-34
<Pre-transfer Charging Assembly Cleaning Procedure>

9) After moving the host machine, be sure that there is no toner scattering on the Registration
Assembly and the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly. If there is any toner scattering, wipe off
the toner.

1 Screw (to loosen)
<Registration Assembly Cleaning Procedure>
Loosen

2) Turn the Fixing Feed Unit Pressure Release Lever in the direction of the arrow to pull
F-9-64
F-9-62
3) Wipe the top surface of the Registration Assembly with lint-free paper.
F-9-63
9-34
CAUTION:
9-35
4) Wipe the top surface of the Pre-transfer Charging Assembly with lint-free paper.
F-9-66
3) Turn the Lock Lever in the direction of the arrow to pull out the Pre-transfer Charging
Assembly.

Be sure to fit the Transfer Charging Assembly to the groove on the host machine and
install it horizontally.
F-9-65
F-9-67
9-35
Installation > Printer Cover -B1 > Installation Outline Drawing
Printer Cover -B1
9-36
Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power

Check that the main power switch is OFF.
Points to Note at Installation
1) Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine.

2) Be sure that Control Panel Display and Main Power Lamp are both turned OFF, and then
Be sure to install this equipment after installing the Upright Control Panel.
Installation Outline Drawing
NOTE:
Parts other than those shown in the figure below are included in the package of the
host machine. Therefore, use the parts contained in the package of the host machine to
install the equipment.
[1] Printer Cover X 1
[2] Screw (TP; M4x8) X 1
[3] Screw
(P Tightening; M4x10) X 8
Use 4 for them.
[4] Reader
Fixing Plate L X 1
[5] Reader
Fixing Plate R X 1
[6] Reader Mount X 1

F-9-69
[7] Screw
(RS Tightening; M4x8) X 2
F-9-68
9-36
9-37
9-37
9-38
9-38
9-39
9-39
9-40
9-40
Installation > Printer Cover -B1 > Installation Procedure
Installation Procedure
9-41
2) IInstall the Reader Fixation Plate R (Included in the host machine) to the installation
NOTE:
Installation procedures for iR-ADV 8205PRO/8295PRO/8285PRO Series and iR-ADV
6275/6265/6255 Series are the same.
Subsequent illustrations and pictures are the case of iR-ADV
8205PRO/8295PRO/8285PRO Series.
position of front side.

Flat Control Panel model only: Install the Reader Fixation Plate R to make the Control
Panel Cable and the Power Supply Cable over the plate.
2 Bosses
1 Screw (RS tight: M4x8) (Included in the host machine)
1) Remove the Reader Positioning Shaft, and secure it in the hole as shown in the figure.
1 Screw
F-9-71
3) Install the Reader Fixation Plate L (Included in the host machine) to the installation position
of front side.
2 Bosses
1 Screw (RS tight: M4x8) (Included in the host machine)
F-9-70
F-9-72
9-41
4) Install the Printer Cover.
5) Open the covers.
4 Screws (P tight: M4x10)
Front Cover
1 Screw (TP: M4x8)
Right Door
9-42
Box Cover
TP
Right Rear
Cover 1
P tight
Toner Exchange
Cover
Right Cover
F-9-74
x5
6) Install the Upper Rear Cover (Included in the host machine).
3 Protrusion
2 Claws
Claw
x2
F-9-73
Protrusion
Protrusion
F-9-75
9-42
7) Install the Right Upper Cover (Included in the host machine).
9) Close the covers.
3 Protrusions
Front Cover
2 Screws (RS tight: M4x10) (Included in the host machine)
Right Door
4 Rubber Caps (Included in the host machine)
Box Cover
9-43
Protrusions
10) Install the Left Rear Inner Cover (Included in the host machine).
x2
x2
BOSS
Rubber Cap
F-9-76
8) stall the Left Upper Cover (Included in the host machine) in the direction of the arrow.
4 Protrusions
F-9-78
3 Claws
11) Install the Left Rear Cover (Included in the host machine).
Protrusion
1 Protrusion
1 Claw
Claw
x3
x3
Claw
Claw
F-9-77
Protrusion
F-9-79
9-43
Installation > Printer Cover -B1 > Auto Adjust Gradation
9-44
Operation Check
1) Connect the power plug of the host machine to the outlet.
3) A message is displayed prompting to check that the Reader Unit Cable is connected
properly.
4) Select "0" for the following service mode (Level 1).
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/SCNR
5) Get out from service mode.
6) Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch..

1) Set A3, A4, 11x17, or LTR size papers in a cassette. (Refer to the cassette settings.)
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Adjustment /Maintenance] > [Adjust Image Quality] > [Auto
Adjust Gradation], and execute the item.
Installation > Printer Cover -B1 > Auto Adjust Gradation
9-44
Installation > Shift Tray-E1 > Installation Outline Drawing
Shift Tray-E1


[1] Shift Tray x 1
9-45
[2] Shift Drive Unit x 1
1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine.

[3] Shift Tray Cover x 1
[4] Shift Tray Support

Base x 1
[5] Reinforcing Plate x 1
[6] Shift Delivery

Support Base (1) x 1
[7] Shift Delivery

Support Base (2) x 1
[8] Face Cover x 1
[9] Rubber Cap x 3
[10] Shift Tray Shaft x 1
[11] Screw (RS Tightening;

M4x20) x 2
[12] Screw (RS Tightening;

M4x8) x 4
[13] Screw
(Binding; M4x6) x 2
F-9-80
Installation > Shift Tray-E1 > Installation Outline Drawing
9-45
Installation > Shift Tray-E1 > Installation Procedure
9-46
4) Remove the Left Upper Cover.

3 Screws
1) Remove the Left Rear Cover.
3 Claws
2 Protrusion
3 Protrusions
Protrusion
x3
x3
Claw
Claw
Claw
F-9-83
Protrusion
F-9-81
5) Remove the Delivery Cover.

5 Stepped Screws (The 3 removed Stepped Screws will be used in step 9).)
2) Open the Toner Replacement Cover.

3) Remove the 2 Finisher Connection Covers. (The removed Finisher Connection Cover will
2 Protrusions
not be used.)
1 Claw each
x5
x2
Protrusion
F-9-84
F-9-82
9-46
6) Remove the 2 screws, and install the Shift Delivery Support Base (1) using the removed
screws.
9-47
7) Remove the screw, and install the Shift Delivery Support Base (2) using the removed screw
and the screw included in the package.
x2
CAUTION:
x2
The 2 screws used are different in length. Be sure to install them to the correct
positions.
x2
Removed Screw
M4x10
F-9-85
Screw Included in The

Package M4x8
F-9-86
9-47
8) Install the Shift Tray Support Base.
10)
9-48
Install the Shift Tray Shaft.
2 Bosses
2 Screws (RS Tightening; M4x8)
x2
Boss
Boss
F-9-87
9) Install the Shift Tray Cover.Install the Shift Tray Cover.

2 Claws
3 Stepped Screws (Use the screws removed in step 5.)
F-9-89
x3
x2
F-9-88
9-48
9
11)
Install the Shift Tray.
13)
2 Protrusions
9-49
Install the Harness Fixing Plate attached to the end of the Shift Tray Cable.
1 Claw
1 Boss
2 connectors
Boss
x2
Protrusion
F-9-90
Hook
12)
Install the Reinforcing Plate.
F-9-92
2 Screws (RS Tightening; M4x20)
x2
F-9-91
9-49
9
14)
Install the Shift Drive Unit.
15)
Install the Left Upper Cover. (3 Screws)
16)
Remove the Face Cover from the Delivery Cover removed in step 5).
17)
Install the Face Cover removed in step 16) and the Face Cover included in the
9-50
2 Screws (Binding; M4x6)

3 Rubber Caps
CAUTION:
package.
Be sure to put the harness for connecting to the host machine into the groove when
installing the unit.
Rubber Cap
x2
F-9-94
Rubber Cap
18)
Close the Toner Replacement Cover.
19)
Return the Reader Communication Cable and the Reader Power Supply Cable to
their original position.
Checking after Installation

3) Press the counter check key on the control panel.
F-9-93
4) Press [Check Device Configuration].

5) Check that "Shift Tray-E1" is displayed in option field.
9-50
Installation > Reader Heater Unit > Installation Procedure
Reader Heater Unit
9-51
Checking the Contents (ASIA only)

Reader Heater Unit-G1
[1] Reader Heater X 1
[2] Flat Screw (M4x4) X 4
[3] Heater Sheet X 1sheet
Use 3 of them
* Binding screw
can also be used.
F-9-96
F-9-95
Checking the Parts to be Installed (Europe only)

Reader Heater Unit
1) Open the DADF.
Prepare the following parts because each part of the Cassette Heater Unit is assigned as
service part.
NO.
Parts name
Parts Number.
Q'ty
[1]
Reader Heater (200V)
FK2-7164-000
1 pc
[2]
Flat Screw (M4 x4)
XA9-1956-000
4 pc
[3]
Heater Sheet
FC8-6060-000
1 sheet
T-9-3

F-9-97
9-51
9-52
9-52
9-53
9-53
9-54
9-54
9-55
9-55
9-56
CAUTION:
2) Remove the Right Retainer Cover.
When removing the copyboard glass, be sure not to get your fingers touched with the
glass surface or the backside of the white plate.In case the glass is soiled, clean it with
lint-free paper.
2 Screws
x2
F-9-98
F-9-100
3) Remove the DF Cable Cover.

2 Screws
4) Remove the Copyboard Glass.
x2
F-9-99
F-9-101
9-56
5) Align the 5 Heater Sheets in the marking line and put them on.
9-57
7) Pass the connecter under the wire and the Scanner Rail.
CAUTION:
Marking line
Do not scratch surface of the wire and the Scanner Rail.
Wire
F-9-102
Scanner Rail
6) Install the Reader Heater.

4 Screws (flat-head ;M4X4)
2 Bosses
CAUTION:
Do not scratch surface of the wire and the Scanner Rail.
x4
Boss
F-9-104
Guide Shaft
F-9-103
9-57
8) To make a space [A] to put the harness through, remove the screw.
9-58
9) Put the harness along the claws of FFC Guide in the 4 places.
NOTE:
Make sure to keep the harness tightly put.
Hole
Guide
[A]
Guide
x4
F-9-106
10) Open the 2 Edge Saddles, put the connector through a hole of the plate, and then secure
in place using the 2 Edge Saddles.
F-9-105
edge
F-9-107
9-58
9-59
NOTE:
Be sure to check that the sheet is on the plate.
11) Release the Wire Saddle and connect the Connector.

Wire saddle
Sheet
F-9-108
12) Secure the harness in place using the Wire Saddle.

Wire saddle
sheet
Sheet
F-9-110
13) Aligning with the boss, tighten the screw that has been removed in step 8).
F-9-109
14) Install the removed cover.

Copyboard Glass
DF Cable Cover (2 Screws)
Right Retainer Cover (2 Screws)
15) Close the DADF.
16) Turn ON the environment switch
17) Insert the power plug to the outlet.
18) Turn the main power switch ON.
9-59
Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Checking the Contents
9-60
Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1

NOTE:
Every components of the paper deck heater unit (paper deck heater unit-A1)
are supplied as service parts, so have the following parts on hand.
< Paper Deck Unit-A1 >
[3]
[6]
[1]
< Paper Deck Unit-D1 >
[10]
[5]
[3]
[1]
[6]
[5]
[9]
[12]
[4]
[2]
[12]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[8]
[7]
[8]
[5]
[11]
[11]
F-9-111
No.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[5]
[7]
[10]
[9]
Parts Name
Heater Unit
AC Input Connector
Relay Harness Unit
AC Cable
Screw with Toothed Washer
Cable Protection Bushing
Power Supply Label
Screw (Binding; M4x4)
Screw (RS-tight; M4x8)
Wire Saddle
Cord Mount
Screw with Flat Spring
[5]
F-9-112
Parts Number
Q'ty
FG6-9651
FK3-0631
FG6-2957
FG6-1117
XB2-7400-607
WT2-5098-000
FS6-8725
XB1-2400-409
XA9-0732-000
WT2-5018-000
FC7-5473
XB2-8401-007
1pc.
1pc.
1pc.
1pc.
3pcs.
1pc.
1pc.
2pcs.
2pcs.
3pcs.
1pc.
1pc.
T-9-4
Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Checking the Contents
9-60
Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure (Paper Deck Unit-A1)

9-61
2) Release the paper deck from the host machine, and then press down the latch plate of the
paper deck housing with your finger to open the housing.

CAUTION:
When installing the heater to the paper deck, take the following precautions.
a. The AC power plug of the host machine must have been removed from the outlet.
b. Install the heater after installing the host machine and paper deck.
c. Use correct screws (length and diameters) at correct positions.
Installation Procedure (Paper Deck Unit-A1)

1) Disconnect the connector of the paper deck from the host machine.
x1
x1
F-9-114
F-9-113
9-61
3) Detach the right cover of the paper deck.
5) Detach the front-upper cover.
3 screws
3 screws
9-62
1 connector
x3
x3
x1
F-9-115
F-9-117
4) Detech the rear cover of the paper deck.

6 screws (M3x8: 2pcs, M4x8: 4pcs)
6) Detach the top cover.

2 screws
x6
x2
F-9-116
F-9-118
9-62
7) Atach the supplied cable protection bushing into the hole on the top panel of the paper
9-63
10) Attach the heater connector to the panel mount.
deck.
F-9-121
F-9-119
8) Place the heater unit under the top panel of the paper deck, and then take the connector
out from the hole on the top plate.
11) Remove the blindfold plate from the power core mount of the papar deck.
1 screw
9) Insert 2 hooks of the heater unit into the holes on the top plate of the paper deck, and then
secure the heater unit to the main body of the paper deck.
1 screw with toothed washer
x1
x1
F-9-122
F-9-120
NOTE:
Removed blindfold plate and screw are no longer reused.
9-63
9-64
12) Install the supplied AC input connector in 2 steps ([A] > [B]).
Secure the ground cable.
13) Install the relay hareness unit to the rear side panel of the paper deck.
2 screws (RS-tight; M4x8)
[B]
x2
[A]
x2
[A]
F-9-124
14) Insert the bind locks of the cable ties in the holes (at [A] shown below) in the rear side
panel to secure the relay harness.
15) Connect the connector at both ends of the relay harness unit to the heater connector and
AC power connector respectively.
x1
16) Reatach the exterior covers of the paper deck in the following sequence;
[1] Top cover (take care not to have the cables caught)
[2] Front-upper cover (insert the connector)
F-9-123
[3] Rear cover

2 screws (Binding; M3x8)
[4] Right cover
9-64
19) Remove the Rear Lower Cover in the direction of the arrow.
1 claw
3 screws
9-65
1 protrusion
x3
Claw
F-9-127
Protrusion
F-9-125
20) Remove the blindfold plate.

2 screws
18) Open the Controller Box in the direction of the arrow.

4 screws
x4
x2
F-9-128
F-9-126
NOTE:
9-65
21) Insert the AC cord into the hole of the cord mount, and then secure the ground cable to
the cord mount.
9-66
23) Secure the AC cord to the cord mount.

1 screw with flat spring
x1
x1
F-9-129
F-9-131
22) Attach the cord mount on the host machine.
24) Reatach the exterior covers of the host machine in the following sequence;
1 connector
[1] Rear Lower Cover

[2] Close the Controller Box.
[3] Connect the Reader Communication Cable.
1 claw
1 protrusion
[4] Fix the Harness.
x1
2 wire saddles
x2
25) Close the deck compartment.

Manually slide the paper deck to the left place in aside of the host machine.
F-9-130
9-66
26) Stick the power supply label on the rear panel of the paper deck.
9-67
28) Peel off the 4 blindfold seal at the rear side of the host machine, then fit the reuse band
of the AC cable and 3 wire saddles as shown.
Wire the AC cable as shown in the figure and joint the AC connector to the power cord
mount of the heater.
x3
x1
x3
F-9-132
27) Fix the paper deck cable in the wire saddle and joint the connector to the host machine.
F-9-134
CAUTION:
x1
To ensure smooth connection of the heater power connectors,
x1
[1]: Host machine [2]: Paper deck [A]: Front
explain to the user that any obstacle that can prevent the paper deck from opening
should not be placed in the hatched area.
F-9-133
[1]
[A]
[2]
F-9-135
9-67
Installation > Paper Deck Heater Unit-A1 > Installation Procedure (Paper Deck Unit-D1)
Installation Procedure (Paper Deck Unit-D1)
9-68
3) Detach the right cover of the paper deck.

3 screws
1) Disconnect the connector of the paper deck from the host machine.
x3
x1
x1
F-9-138
F-9-136
4) Detech the rear cover of the paper deck.

7 screws (M3x8: 2pcs, M4x8: 5pcs) [1]
2) Release the paper deck from the host machine, and then press down the latch plate of the
paper deck housing with your finger to open the housing.
x7
F-9-139
F-9-137
9-68
5) Detach the front-upper cover.
9-69
7) Atach the supplied cable protection bushing [1] into the hole on the top panel of the paper
4 screws
deck.
1 connector
8) Detach the heater support plate [3].

2 screws [2]
x4
x2
x1
F-9-140
F-9-142
6) Detach the top cover [2].

4 screws [1]
9) Atach the heater support plate [2] to the heater unit [3].
1 screw with toothed washer [1]
x4
x1
F-9-141
F-9-143
9-69
10) Place the heater unit [1] under the top plate [2], and take out the connector [3] from the
hole [4] of the top plate.
9-70
13) Remove the blindfold plate from the power core mount of the papar deck.
1 screw
11) Hang the two hooks [5] of the heater unit on the top plate, and fix by the 2 screws [6].
x2
x1
x2
F-9-144
12) Attach the heater connector [2] to the panel mount [1].
F-9-146
NOTE:
F-9-145
9-70
14) Install the supplied AC input connector in 2 steps ([A] > [B]).
9-71
15) Install the relay hareness unit [2] to the rear side panel of the paper deck.
Secure the ground cable
2 screws (RS-tight, M4x8) [1]
16) Insert the bind locks of the cable ties in the holes (at [3] shown below) in the rear side
panel to secure the relay harness.

17) Connect the connector at both ends of the relay harness unit to the heater connector [4]
and AC power connector [4] respectively.
[B]
[A]
x2
x2
F-9-148
18) Reatach the exterior covers of the paper deck in the following sequence;
[1] Top cover (take care not to have the cables caught)
x1

[2] Front-upper cover (insert the connector)
[3] Rear cover
[4] Right cover
F-9-147
9-71
21) Remove the Rear Lower Cover in the direction of the arrow.
1 claw
3 screws
9-72
1 protrusion
x3
Claw
F-9-151
Protrusion
F-9-149
22) Remove the blindfold plate.

2 screws
20) Open the Controller Box in the direction of the arrow.

4 screws
x4
x2
F-9-152
F-9-150
NOTE:
9-72
23) Insert the AC cord into the hole of the cord mount, and then secure the ground cable to
the cord mount.
9-73
25) Secure the AC cord to the cord mount.

1 screw with flat spring
x1
x1
F-9-153
F-9-155
24) Attach the cord mount on the host machine.
26) Reatach the exterior covers of the host machine in the following sequence;
1 connector
[1] Rear Lower Cover

[2] Close the Controller Box.
[3] Connect the Reader Communication Cable.
1 claw
1 protrusion
[4] Fix the Harness
x1
2 wire saddles
x2
27) Close the deck compartment.

Manually slide the paper deck to the left place in aside of the host machine.
F-9-154
9-73
28) Stick the power supply label on the rear panel of the paper deck.
9-74
30) Peel off the 4 blindfold seals at the rear side of the host machine, then fit the reuse band
of the AC cable and 3 wire saddles as shown.
Wire the AC cable as shown in the figure and joint the AC connector to the power cord
mount of the heater.
x3
x1
x3
F-9-156
29) Fix the paper deck cable in the wire saddle and joint the connector to the host machine.
F-9-158
CAUTION:
x1
To ensure smooth connection of the heater power connectors,
x1
[1]: Host machine [2]: Paper deck [A]: Front
explain to the user that any obstacle that can prevent the paper deck from opening
should not be placed in the hatched area.
[1]
F-9-157
[A]
[2]
F-9-159
9-74
9-75
9-75
9-76
9-76
Installation > Utility Tray-A2 > Checking the Contents
Utility Tray-A2
9-77

Although model with the Upright Control Panel is used for illustration in this procedure, the same procedure is applied to model with the Flat Control Panel.
Refer to "Combination of options" when installing this equipment before operation.

The parts with a diagonal line in the contents list will not be used.
[1] Utility Tray Unit X 1
[2] Wire Saddle X 5
Use when installing

the USB Keyboard
[3] Screw (TP ; M4x14) X 4
Use 3 of them
F-9-161
[4] Screw (TP ; M4x10) X 2
[5] Keyboard Table Plate

X1
[6] Screw (TP; M4x8 Black)

X 10
F-9-160
9-77
9-78
9-78
9-79
9-79
Installation > Utility Tray-A2 > Installation Procedure
9-80
3) While pulling the [A] part of the Utility Tray, remove the Utility Tray Mounting Plate.
1) Remove packing tapes.
CAUTION:
To avoid damage, do not pull the [A] part of the Utility Tray too much.
2) Loosen the 2 screws, and move the Utility Tray Mounting Plate in the direction of the arrow
[A]
until it stops.
F-9-163
Utility Tray Mounting Plate

F-9-162
4) Remove the 3 Rubber Caps from the Right Upper Cover. (The removed Rubber Caps will
not be used.)
F-9-164
Installation > Utility Tray-A2 > Installation Procedure
9-80
Installation > Utility Tray-A2 > When Installing the USB Keyboard
9-81
When Installing the USB Keyboard
5) Install the Mounting Plate.

3 Screws (TP; M4x14)
1) Remove the 2 Cap Covers, and install the 5 Wire Saddles.

Cap Cover
x3
Wire Saddles
F-9-167
F-9-165
6) Install the Utility Tray.

2 Screws (TP; M4x10)
2 Screws (TP; The screws loosened in step 2.)
x2
F-9-166
Installation > Utility Tray-A2 > When Installing the USB Keyboard
9-81
Installation > Card Reader-C1/Copy Card Reader-F1 > Checking the Contents > Contents of Card Reader-C1
9-82
Card Reader-C1/Copy Card Reader-F1

CAUTION:
To install this equipment, the Copy Card Reader Attachment-A2 is required.

Contents of Card Reader-C1
The parts with a diagonal line in the contents list will not be used.
[1] Card Reader X 1
[2] Toothed Washer X 1
[3] Screw (RS Tightening; M4x8) X 1
F-9-168
Installation > Card Reader-C1/Copy Card Reader-F1 > Checking the Contents > Contents of Card Reader-C1
9-82
Installation > Card Reader-C1/Copy Card Reader-F1 > Checking the Contents > Contents of Copy Card Reader Attachment-A2
9-83
Contents of Copy Card Reader Attachment-A2

[1] Card Reader Mounting Plate
X1
[2] Card Reader X 1
[3] Connector Cover1 X 1
[5] Card Reader External Relay

Harness X 1
[6] Connector Case X 2
[7] Cord Guide X 1
[8] PCB Spacer X 1
[10] Screw (RS tight; M4x8) X 1
[11] Screw (Bindeing; M4x20) X 1
F-9-169
9-83
Installation > Card Reader-C1/Copy Card Reader-F1 > Checking the Contents > Contents of Copy Card Reader Attachment-A2
Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Checking the Contents > Copy Card Reader Attachment-A2
Copy Card Reader-F1
9-84
Copy Card Reader Attachment-A2

[1] Card Reader
Mounting Plate X 1
[2] Card Reader X 1
[5] Card Reader External

Relay Harness X 1
[6] Connector Case X 2
[7] Cord Guide X 1
[8] PCB Spacer X 1
Used only for the

CAUTION:
To install this equipment, the Copy Card Reader Attachment-A2 is required.
NOTE:
Illustrations and photo of these steps may differ from the actual shape of parts but the
installation steps remain similar.

Copy Card Reader-F1
[1] Card Reader X 1
[2] Toothed Washer X 1
[3] Screw
(RS Tightening; M4x10)
X1
F-9-170
Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Checking the Contents > Copy Card Reader Attachment-A2
Used only for the

F-9-171
9-84
9
[10] Screw
(RS tight; M4x8) X 1
Used only for the

[11] Screw
(Binding; M4x20) X 1
Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Outline Drawing
9-85

Used only for the

Flat Control Panel

[13] Screw
(Binding; M3x6) X 1
F-9-172
F-9-173
Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Outline Drawing
9-85
Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Installation Procedure
9-86

1 Screw (The removed screw will be used in step 13.)
CAUTION:
2 Hooks
After installing the Card Reader, enter the card number to be used in the following
service mode of this equipment: COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD.
Otherwise, the card will not be recognized even inserting it.
Hook
1) Press [A] part, and open the Right Rear Cover 1.
Hook
F-9-175
[A]
3) Disconnect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Cable.

1 Edge Saddle
Edge Saddle
USB Cable
F-9-174
Control Panel
Connector
x2
Handle
F-9-176
9-86
9-87
5) Remove the Face Cover. (The removed Face Cover will not be used.)
7) Install the Card Reader Reply Unit.
2 Screws (The removed screws will be used in step 7.)
2 Screws (Use the screws removed in step 5.)

1 Screw (Binding; M3x6)
1 Connector
x2
x3
F-9-177
6) Remove the screw, and install the PCB Spacer. (The removed screws will not be used.)
F-9-179
F-9-178
9-87
8) Insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops.
10)
9-88
Remove the screw. (The removed screw will be used in step 12).
CAUTION: Points to Note when Inserting the Main Controller PCB 1

Be sure to install the Main Controller PCB 1 while paying attention not to trap cables.
x2
Be sure to push the handle [A] in horizontally. If pushing any part other than the
handle, the Main Controller PCB 1 may not be inserted horizontally. In such case,
note that connector connection error (or damage of connector) or deformation of
plate may occur.
F-9-181
11)
Connect the Card Reader External Relay Harness.
[A]
F-9-180
9) Connect the USB Cable and the Control Panel Cable.

1 Edge Saddle
F-9-182
9-88
9
12)
Install the Connector Cover to the Card Reader External Relay Harness.
9-89
14)
Close the Right Rear Cover 1.
15)
Remove the Lower Cover of the Card Reader Unit, and change the position of the
1 Screw (Use the screws removed in step 10.)

CAUTION:
When installing the Connector Cover, be sure to place the tie-wrap on the Card Reader
External Relay Harness on the inside of the Connector Cover.
cable.
1 Screw
1 Claw
16)
Install the Lower Cover of the Card Reader Unit.
1 Claw
Lower Cover
Claw
F-9-183
13)
Groove
Claw
Install the Side Cover by putting the Card Reader External Relay Harness through a
hole of the cover.
F-9-185
2 Hooks
17)
1 Screw (Use the screw removed in step 2.)
Disconnect the Short Connector on the Card Reader. (The removed Short Connector
will not be used.)
Hook
Hole
Hook
F-9-184
F-9-186
9-89
9-90
<In the Case of Flat Control Panel>

18)
Install the Card Reader.
<In the Case of Upright Control Panel>
18-1) Install the Card Reader.

2 Bosses
18-1) Install the Card Reader to the Card Reader Mounting Plate.
1 Toothed Washer
2 Bosses
1 Toothed Washer
Boss
Boss
F-9-189
F-9-187
19)
Put the connector of the Card Reader Unit through the hole on the Card Reader
Mounting Plate.(Upright Control Panel only)

20)
18-2) Install the Card Reader Unit assembled in step 18-1).
Connect the connectors of the Card Reader Unit and the Card Reader External Relay
Harness.
1 Boss
1 Screw (TP; M4x12)
Boss
F-9-190
F-9-188
9-90
9
21)
Install the Connector Case.
22)
9-91
Secure the Card Reader External Relay Harness to the Cord Guide.

CAUTION:
When installing the Connector Cases, be sure to place the tie-wrap on the Card Reader
External Relay Harness on the inside of the Connector Cases.
22-1) Remove the cover of Cord Guide, and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.
Tie-wrap
Tie-wrap
F-9-192
F-9-191
22-2) Put the Card Reader External Relay Harness through the Cord Guide, and install
the cover of the guide.
NOTE:
When installing it, be sure [A] part does not interfere when opening/closing the Right
Rear Cover 1.
[A]
F-9-193
9-91
9-92
22-3) Push the Card Reader External Relay Harness in the Right Rear Cover 1.
22-1) Remove the cover of Cord Guide, and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.
NOTE:
Be sure to affix the Cord Guide above the [A] parts for not interfering to open/close the
Right Rear Cover 1.
NOTE:
When pushing the Card Reader External Relay Harness in the Right Rear Cover 1, be
sure the guide does not interfere when opening/closing the cover.
[A]
F-9-196
F-9-194
22-2) Put the Card Reader External Relay Harness through the Cord Guide, and install
the cover of the guide.
23)
Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet.
24)
Turn the main power switch ON.
F-9-195
9-92
Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Setting After Installation
9-93
Setting After Installation

1) Select "0" for the following service mode.
Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > OPTION > ACC > CR-TYPE
NOTE:
The number of card (number of department) can be changed if a request arises from a
user. Make this setting before the step 3).
Specify the number of cards to be used in service mode (Level 2) > COPIER > OPTION >
FNC-SW > CARD-RNG.
To enable the number of sheets, turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
After that, go through the procedure from step 2).
2) Enter the card number to be used (1 to 2001).

Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CARD
NOTE:
1000 cards from the inputted number can be used.
3) To enable the number of sheets, turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
4) Insert the registered card, and check that it is in standby.
NOTE:
After setting, if a request arises from a user and changing the number of card (number
of department), make a following setting. In that case, the current counter information
by department will be reset.
Execute in service mode (Level 1) > COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CARD.
Specify the number of cards to be used in service mode (Level 2) > COPIER > OPTION >
FNC-SW > CARD-RNG.
To enable the number of sheets, turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
After that, go through the procedure from step 2).
Installation > Copy Card Reader-F1 > Setting After Installation
9-93
Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Checking the Contents
9-94
[10] Screw
[11] Screw
[13] Support Plate X 1
[14] Cable Face Seal X 1
[12] Card Spacer X 1

To use the equipment, the Reader Unit is required.
Although model with the Upright Control Panel is used for illustration in this procedure, the
same procedure is applied to model with the Flat Control Panel.

[1] Speaker Unit (Upper)
X1
[2] Speaker Unit (Lower)

X1
[3] Voice Guidance Board

Unit X 1
F-9-198
<CD/Guides>
User's Guide
[4] Speaker Cable X 1
[5] Cord Guide X 7
Voice Guidance Kit Users Guide
[6] Ring Core X 2
Voice Guidance Manual CD
Use 4 of them
[7] Screw
(Binding; M4x6) X 1
[8] Screw
FCC/IC-A DOCUMENT
F-9-197
Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Checking the Contents
9-94
Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Installation Procedure
9-95


[A]
F-9-200

2 Hooks
F-9-199
Hook
Hook
F-9-201
9-95
9-96
6) Install the Voice Guidance Board Unit to the Main Controller PCB 1.
1 Edge Saddle
1 Connector
4 Screws (TP; M3x6)
Edge Saddle
NOTE:
Check that the connector is connected properly.
USB Cable
Control Panel
Connector
x2
Handle
Connector
F-9-202
5) Remove the Face Plate. (The removed Face Plate and screws will not be used.)
x4
2 Screws
F-9-204
x2
F-9-203
9-96
9-97
9) Cut off [A] part of the Side Cover with nippers.
CAUTION:
When cutting off the part, be sure not to make burrs.
plate may occur.
[A]
F-9-206
[A]
F-9-205

1 Edge Saddle
9-97
10) Attach the 2 Ring Cores to both ends of the Speaker Cable.
9-98
11) Connect the Speaker Cable to the Voice Guidance Board Unit.
F-9-209
F-9-207
12)
CAUTION:
Be sure to attach the Ring Cores within 50mm from the end of the Speaker Cable.
Install the Side Cover by putting the Speaker Cable through a hole of the cover.
2 Hooks
13)
Put the Speaker Cable through the guide.

Hook
Hole
50mm
Guide
F-9-208
Hook
F-9-210
14)
9-98
9
15)
Remove the 2 Rubber Caps from the Right Upper Cover. (The removed Rubber Caps
will not be used.)
17)
Install the Speaker Unit (Upper).
F-9-211
16)
9-99
F-9-213
Install the Speaker Unit (Lower).
x2
F-9-212
9-99
9
18)
Remove the covers of 4 Cord Guides, and affix them to the area indicated in the
figure.
9-100
NOTE: When using together with the Copy Card Reader

Insert the Speaker cable into the hole.
NOTE:
When affixing it, be sure to keep 30mm or more distance from the end of the Rear
Upper Cover to prevent interfering with opening/closing the Right Rear Cover 1.
Hole
30 mm
F-9-215

F-9-214
F-9-216
9-100
9
19)
Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Operation Check
9-101
Insert the Speaker Cable to the Speaker Unit (Upper).
NOTE:
When changing the settings upon users request, it is required to log in as a system
manager in accordance with instructions from the user administrator.
1) Select Settings/Registration > Preferences > Accessibility > Voice Navigation Settings >
Use Voice Navigation, and check that the setting is ON.
2) Select Settings/Registration > Preferences > Accessibility > Voice Navigation Settings >
Voice Guide from Speakers, and check that the setting is ON.
Operation Check
F-9-217
20)
Put the Speaker Cable through the Cord Guide, and install the cover of the guide.
<When Starting to Use>

1) Press reset key 3 secs or more.
CAUTION:
Be sure to slack off [A] part for not interfering to open/close the Right Rear Cover 1.
2) Press [Main Menu] in Control Panel.

3) If the display in panel screen is boxed with red frame, Voice Guidance Kit is available.
If Voice Guidance Kit doesnt properly operate, check the below.
Enter Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION, and check whether
languages to be used for TTS-JA / TTS-EN / TTS-IT / TTS-FR / TTS-ES / TTS-DE are
properly installed.
<When Stopping to Use>

1) Press the Reset Key for 3 secs or more.
[A]
F-9-218
21)
22)
Installation > Voice Guidance Kit-F2 > Operation Check
9-101
Installation > Additional Memory Type B (512MB) > Installation Procedure
Additional Memory Type B (512MB)
9-102

[1] Expansion RAM x 1
F-9-220
F-9-219
< CD/Guides >

China RoHS Notice sheet
1) Remove the Rear Small Cover.

4 Screws

1) Check the memory capacity.
x4
Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS > RAM

F-9-221
Installation > Additional Memory Type B (512MB) > Installation Procedure
9-102
Installation > Additional Memory Type B (512MB) > Checking after Installation
9-103
2) Install the Expansion RAM.
1) Check that the memory capacity is increased.
NOTE:
Be sure to insert it until it stops.
Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS > RAM
F-9-222
3) Return the Rear Small Cover to its original position. (4 Screws)

5) Open the switch cover and turn ON the main power switch.
Installation > Additional Memory Type B (512MB) > Checking after Installation
9-103
Installation > Combination of HDD Options
Combination of HDD Options
9-104
Reference Pages in the Manual According to Product Combination:

Title
When installing the HDD options (5 products indicated below), refer to the pages indicated in
the following table.
2.5inch/160GB HDD-J1
2.5inch/1TB HDD-K1
Removable HDD Kit-AG1
HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C5
Combination of Product
When using the mirroring function, be sure to install 2 HDDs of the same capacity.
Remarks
Option HDD (1TB)
p. 9-109 to p. 9-113
TYPE-2
Standard HDD +
Removable HDD Kit
p. 9-114 to p. 9-125
TYPE-3
Option HDD (1TB) +

Removable HDD Kit
p. 9-126 to p. 9-139
TYPE-4
Standard HDD +
Option HDD (160GB) +
p. 9-140 to p. 9-155 TYPE-4 to 11

correspond
to CASE-8
described in HDD
Data Encryption
p. 9-161 to p. 9-176 & Mirroring Kit-C
Series Installation
Procedure
included in HDD
p. 9-182 to p. 9-193 Data Encryption &
Mirroring Kit-C5.
HDD Mirroring Kit

or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
CAUTION:
Reference Pages
TYPE-1
TYPE-5
2 Option HDDs (1TB) +

HDD Mirroring Kit
TYPE-6
Standard HDD +
HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
TYPE-7
Option HDD (1TB) +

p. 9-199 to p. 9-212
TYPE-8
Standard HDD +
Option HDD (160GB) +
Removable HDD Kit +
HDD Mirroring Kit
p. 9-219 to p. 9-241
TYPE-9
2 Option HDDs (1TB) +

Removable HDD Kit +
HDD Mirroring Kit
p. 9-246 to p. 9-266
TYPE-10 Standard HDD +

Removable HDD Kit +
p. 9-271 to p. 9-288
TYPE-11 Option HDD (1TB) +

Removable HDD Kit +
p. 9-294 to p. 9-312
T-9-5
Installation > Combination of HDD Options
9-104
Installation > Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
9-105
Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
Files in Advanced Box
Before performing work that will result in the loss of data, inform the system administrator of
*4 You may not be able to back up, depending on the type of the password.
Forms registered for the Superimpose Image
the inevitable loss, asking him to make a backup or export of important data items.
Backup or export work must not be performed by the service person because of security
[List of Data that can be backed up]
considerations.
In this Installation Procedure, a series of backup or export procedures are described for
Data that can be backed up

Address Book
Settings/Registration settings
Device Settings (Forwarding Settings, Address
List, Favorite Settings)
Printer Settings
Paper Information
Image forms stored in the Superimpose Image
Quick Menu Information
User Information of the Advanced Box
Favorite Settings for Web browser
reference.
[List of Data to be Deleted]
Data to be Deleted
Availability of
Backup
Information registered in the Address Book

Settings made from the Settings/Registration screen
Forwarding Settings
License files for MEAP applications
MEAP applications
Data saved using MEAP applications
Favorite Settings registered in the Copy and Mail Box functions
Data stored in Mail Boxes or the Advanced Box
Scan modes registered in the Send Function
Unsent documents (documents waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send
mode)
MEAP SMS (Service Management Service) password (the password will
return to its default password if it was changed)
Job logs
User authentication information registered in the Local Device Authentication
user authentication system of SSO-H (Single Sign-On H)
Registration information for the Network Place
Key Pair and Server Certificate
Log information for the IP address/MAC address restriction settings
Password that is protected by TPM
Encryption key that is protected by TPM
Information for Web browser settings
Yes
Yes *1
Yes
Yes
No
Yes *2
No
Yes *3
No
No
License files for MEAP applications

Data saved by MEAP applications
Yes
No
Data stored in Mail Boxes or the Advanced Box
No
Yes
SSO-H (Single Sign-On H) user authentication

information
No
No
No
Yes *4
No
Yes *5
Yes
Yes
Reference
See the "e-Manual > Remote UI".
See the e-Manual > Web Access.

(You can select this if web browser (Option) is
installed.)
For information on downloading license files, see
the "e-Manual > MEAP".
Data saved by MEAP applications may be
able to be backed up, depending on the MEAP
application.
See the documentation included with the MEAP
application.
See the e-Manual > Remote UI "Setting the
Backup Location for Stored Data ".
see the "e-Manual > MEAPI".
T-9-7
CAUTION: Work to Perform After Installing the Kit

When you start using this product, passwords set for Mail Boxes, Confidential Fax
Inboxes, and the Memory RX Inbox are erased. Set these passwords again.
T-9-6
*1 Can only be backed up using the Remote UI.
*5 Only the stored Favorite Settings can be backed up.
If you have logged on to the machine using a login service, such as SSO-H (Single
Sign-On H) before using this product, you must select the login service again
using SMS (Service Management Service) after restarting the machine. For more
information on using SMS, see the e-Manual > MEAP.
*2 Depending on the MEAP application.

*3 Only the following items are backed up.
Mail Box Settings (mail box names, passwords, and auto erase times)
Files in Mail Box
Installation > Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
9-105
Installation > Making a Backup of the Data (reference only) > Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download of Disabled License Files and Unin
9-106
Making a Backup of the Data (reference only)

The data items that have been backed up may be restored when the HDD Data Encryption &
Mirroring Kit-C Series has been installed.
These data items are property of the user, and the restoration work must be performed by the
system administrator.
The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide. See Table T-1-2/T-1-4 (Data to be
backed up) in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure.
Procedure for Import/Export ALL of User Settings

Following data can be batch exported.
Address Book
Backup of MEAP Application

When a MEAP application has been installed, the data and license that the MEAP application
retains will be deleted. If no MEAP application is installed, there is no need to make a backup.
If a MEAP application has a backup function, make a backup of the data peculiar to the
MEAP application using this function. With regard to the license, there is a need to stop all
applications from SMS (Service Management Service), invalidate the license, and download
the invalid license file.
The overview of procedures for stop of MEAP applications, Disabling of the license, and
download of an Disabled license file is described below. For more information, see the
MEAPSMS Administrator Guide
Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download of

Disabled License Files and Uninstallation
Settings/Registration settings
Device Settings (Forwarding Settings, Address List, Favorite Settings)
Printer Settings
1) Select the URL given below and access SMS.
Paper Information
http://[IP address of the device]:8000/sms/
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the user
to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
CAUTION:
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export ALL] > [Export].
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the
user to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
2) Click [MEAP Application Management].
3) Click [Stop] button of the application you want to stop on the MEAP Application
Management page.
4) Check the status of MEAP Application is [Stop],
3) Select items to export.
5) Click on the name of applications to disable.
CAUTION:
6) Click [License Control], and then click [Disable].
When exporting only specific items, this may cause setting information relating to
multiple items to lose its relations and cause setting details to be switched. In this case,
export all related items simultaneously.
7) Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for disabling the license.

8) Return to the MEAP Application Management page and click on the appropriate application
names.
9) Click [License Management] on the Application/License Information page.
4) Enter the password into [Encryption Password] and click on [Start Exporting].
10) Click [Download].
5) Click [Check Status].

6) Check the batch export result.
9-106
Installation > Making a Backup of the Data (reference only) > Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download of Disabled License Files and Unin
Installation > Making a Backup of the Data (reference only) > Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data
11) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Set
The procedure of backup and restoration of a box document data is described below.
a distinctive name for the disabled license file so that you can recognize it for which
Specify the backup destination of a document data:
application. After you download the disabled license file to your PC, click [Delete]. Click [Yes]
Backup to SMB server
in a confirmation window for license deletion.
9-107
Select SMB as a backup destination and specify an address, a user name, a password,
12) Return to the MEAP Application Management page, click [Uninstall] button of the
application you want to uninstall. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for uninstallation. If
there are several applications, repeat the procedures 1) to 7).
and a path to the SMB server to which saved data is backed up.
Backup to USB HDD
Select USB HDD as a backup destination and specify a path to the USB HDD folder to
13) After the use of this product is started, re-install the application using an application file (jar
which saved data is backed up.
file) of each application from SMS and the disabled license file (lic file).
CAUTION: Data which cannot be backed up
User Authentication Information Registered by SSO-H

(Single Sign-ON H)
In the case that the MEAP login application has been changed to SSO-H, there is a need to
If you back up/restore stored data without restarting the machine after changing the
language displayed on the touch panel display by pressing [Settings/Registration] >
[Preferences] from the control panel of the machine, the stored data may not be backed
up/restored properly. For more information on the data that cannot be backed up, see
Points to Note for Installation.
make a backup of the user authentication information.

1) Access the URL given below.
CAUTION:
http://[IP address of the device]:8000/sso/

2) Login with the user name and password registered as an administrator in SSO-H.
The default administrator user name and password are as follows:
User Name: Administrator
If the language setting in the common specification settings (Settings/Registration) is

set to ON, 'host address' and 'path to folder' might not be displayed correctly or cannot
be referred.
Password: password
3) Click [User Control].
CAUTION:
4) Put a checkmark to Select All, and then click [Export].

5) Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click [Start Export].
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file and click
[Save].
Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document

data
CAUTION: Backup of "Advanced Box"
When setting a SMB server as a backup destination, Advanced Box data saved in a
large capacity HDD cannot be backed up. The Advanced Box data backed up from the
large capacity HDD cannot be restored to the standard HDD. Depending on the system
version of the machine, both backup and restoration might not be performed.
Regarding the method of inputting characters, see 'Basic Operations' in the

e-Manual.
A host address can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,' 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A path to the folder can be up to 255 characters in 1 byte (127 characters in 2 bytes).
A user name can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,', 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A password can be up to 7 to 48 characters using the 'alphanumeric character' and
'mark (1 byte)' modes.
The voice sound symbol and the semi-voice sound symbol entered in the 'Katakana (1
byte)' mode are counted up as one 1-byte character.
Installation > Making a Backup of the Data (reference only) > Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data
9-107
Installation > Installation Outline Drawing
[Backup method of User inbox and Advanced Box document data]

1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Backup].
9-108
2) Select 'All' or 'Changes' for the backup method.

3) Click [Execute].
CAUTION:
If any of the host IP address, user name, password, or path to the folder is not
correctly entered, a backup cannot be made.
If you select to encrypt the backup data, the backup process may take longer.
Mirroring Board
or Encryption Board
[Restoring the backup data of User inbox and Advanced Box document data]
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Restore].
2) Click [Display Backup Data].
HDD
3) Select the backup data to restore from the list and then click [Execute].
CAUTION:
If you want to restore encrypted backup data, enter the same password used when
backing up the data.
F-9-223
Depending on the settings of the machine, the backup data may not be completely
restored, or some documents may be automatically printed.
Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine, or
documents that are being sent, received, or stored, are erased.
Installation > Installation Outline Drawing
9-108
Installation > [TYPE-1] Option HDD (1TB) > Checking the Contents
9-109
[TYPE-1] Option HDD (1TB)

[1] HDD Support Plate x 1
[2] HDD x 1
[6] Screw (TP; M3x6) x 2
[7] Gasket x 1
[3] Anti-vibration Damper x 4
[4] Spacer x 4
[5] Screw (W SEMS; M3x14) x 4
F-9-224
< CD/Guides >

FCC/IC Sheet
Installation > [TYPE-1] Option HDD (1TB) > Checking the Contents
9-109
Installation > [TYPE-1] Option HDD (1TB) > Assembling the Option HDD
9-110
1) Assemble the Option HDD (1TB).

1 HDD Support Plate
4 Anti-vibration Dampers
1) Turning off the Main Power Supply Switch of the Host Machine.
2) Check that the display on the Control Panel and the Main Power Supply Lamp are turned
off before disconnecting the outlet.
4 Spacers
1 Option HDD
4 Screws (W Sems; M3x14)
NOTE:
When tightening the screen, be sure to align the screw holes by lifting the HDD
Connector Plate and HDD.
Assembling the Option HDD
HDD
HDD Support Plate
CAUTION:
When assembling the Option HDD, be sure to pay attention to the direction.
Be sure that the label face of the Option HDD is up.
Be sure that the [A] part of the HDD Support Plate is on the other side of the
connecter.
Anti-vibration Damper
F-9-226
Connector
[A]
x4
Option HDD
HDD Support Plate
Connecter
Label
F-9-225
Spacer
F-9-227
Installation > [TYPE-1] Option HDD (1TB) > Assembling the Option HDD
9-110
Installation > [TYPE-1] Option HDD (1TB) > Procedure to Replace with the HDD
Procedure to Replace with the HDD
9-111
3) Turn the HDD Fixed Plate toward the front.

1 Screw
1) Push [A] part, and open the Right Rear Cover 1.
[A]
F-9-230
F-9-228
4) Remove the HDD. (The removed HDD will not be used.)

2 Connecters
2) Open the HDD Cap.

1 Rubber Cap
1 Screw
x2
F-9-231
F-9-229
9-111
5) Insert the assembled Option HDD.
9-112
7) Return the HDD Fixed Plate to its original position.

1 Screw
8) Close the HDD Cap.
1 Screw
1 Rubber Cap
9) Close the Right Rear Cover 1.
10) Connect the power plug to the outlet.
F-9-232
6) Connect 2 connecters to the Option HDD.
x2
F-9-233
9-112
Installation > [TYPE-1] Option HDD (1TB) > Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation
Installing the System Software Using the SST
9-113
4. Downloading the System Software

1) Click "Start Assist Mode" and click "Initialize" according to the instruction on the screen.
2) When initialization is completed, the machine is automatically restarted and it enters
NOTE:
Use the Service Support Tool with "Ver.4.72" or higher.
download mode.
3) Select the version to be downloaded and click "Start".
4) When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted.
The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when
the machine is first started up after installing this product.
It is important to install the system software used to control the host machine so that the
machine may start up properly after installation of this product.
5) When writing of the firmware is completed, the machine is automatically restarted.

6) Perform upgrading according to the instruction on the screen. When it is completed, it is
automatically restarted.
7) Terminate the SST.
8) Check the version of the downloaded firmware in service mode.
Details follow.
1. Requirements
1) PC
Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed.
2) Cross Ethernet Cable
Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation

When this product is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for
auto gradation adjustment.
2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine
Therefore be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust) after installing this kit.
1) If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off.

2) Connect the PC and the machine using an Ethernet cable.
3) Turn on the PC.
4) Start up the machine in download mode (safe mode).
3. Selecting the System Software
1) Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used.
2) Start up the SST.
3) Click Register Firmware.
4) Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set, and click search.
5) Click REGISTER.
6) Click OK.
Installation > [TYPE-1] Option HDD (1TB) > Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation
9-113
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Checking the Contents
9-114
[TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit

[1] HDD Drawer Unit X 1
[2] HDD Lock Pin X 2
[4] HDD Cover X 2
Use 1 of them.
[6] HDD Connector Plate X 2
Use 1 of them.
[11] HDD Caution Label X 1
[7] Conversion Connector X 2
Use 1 of them.
[8] Connector Fixation Block X 2
[9] Screw
(TP Round End; M3x6) X 8
Use 1 of them.
Use 6 of them.
Use 1 of them.
[10] Screw (P Tightening; M3x8) X 4
Use 2 of them.
[12] R-HDD Label X 1
F-9-234
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Checking the Contents
9-114
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit
9-115

1 Screw
2 Hooks
Hook
Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit
Hook
F-9-236

1 Claw
[A]
1 Protrusions
F-9-235
Claw
Protrusion
F-9-237
9-115
4) Remove the Rear Upper Cover.
4 Screws (RS Tightening)
1 Screw (The removed screw will not be used.)
9-116
3 Screws (Bindeing)
x7
F-9-240
F-9-238
8) Remove the HDD.

2 Connectors

1 Rubber Cap
x2
F-9-241
F-9-239
6) Return the rubber cap to the HDD Cap.
9-116
9) Open the Controller Box, and disconnect the Signal Cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Power
Supply Cable (A:Cont-Pow) on the host machine. (Disconnected Signal Cable (A:Cont-Sig)
10)
9-117
Remove the HDD Case Unit.
2 Screws (The removed screws will be used in Installing the HDD Case Unit step 1).)
and the Power Supply Cable (A:Cont-Pow) will not be used.)

2 Connectors
9 Wire Saddles
x2
2 Edge Saddles
F-9-243
x2
x11
F-9-242
9-117
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the Host Machin
9-118
Disassembling and Assembling of the HDD Removed from the

Host Machine
NOTE:
Use the parts disassembled in step 1) and parts included in the Removable HDD Kit.
1) Disassemble the removed HDD.
2) Assemble the HDD disassembled in step 1).
4 Screws (W Sems)
1 HDD Support Plate
1 HDD Support Plate
1 HDD Connector Plate (Included in the Removable HDD Kit)

1 HDD
4 Screws (W Sems)
x4
NOTE:
HDD
HDD Support Plate
HDD
HDD Support Plate
F-9-244
HDD Connector Plate

F-9-246

Be sure to install the HDD Connector to the side with screw holes of the HDD
Connector Plate.
HDD
Screw Hole
Label
Connector
Connector
x4
HDD Connector
Plate
Screw Hole
F-9-245
HDD Support Plate

F-9-247
9-118
9-119
4) Fit the 2 bosses of the Connector Fixation Screw into the holes of the Conversion
3) Install the Conversion Connector.
Connector to install, and tighten the screws in the order specified below.
2 Screws (P Tightening; M3x8)
CAUTION:
Be sure that there is no gap between the HDD Connector and the Conversion
Connector.
CAUTION:
Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws.
Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion
Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.
F-9-248
F-9-249
x2
Boss
Hole
F-9-250
9-119
9-120
5) Install the HDD Cover.
6) Install the HDD Handle.
1 Claw
2 Screws (TP Round End; M3x6)
1 Boss
CAUTION:
1 Screw (TP Round End; M3x6)
Be sure to use the round end screw included in the Removable HDD Kit as the TP
screw.
CAUTION:
screw.
x2
Boss
Claw
F-9-251
F-9-252
7) Affix the HDD No.1 of the R-HDD Label to the handle of the Removable HDD.
8) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number,
and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-253
9-120
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Case Unit
Changing Configuration inside of HDD Case Unit
9-121
4) Remove the Leaf Spring from the removed rail in the order of the arrows in the figure
1) Remove the E-ring from the removed HDD Case Unit, remove the shaft of the HDD Cap,
and then remove the HDD Fixed Plate. (The removed HDD Fixed Plate will not be used.)
below. (The removed Leaf Spring will not be used.)

2 Bosses
2 Arms
Boss
Arm
Boss
Turn over
HDD Fixed Plate

F-9-254
F-9-256
2) Put the HDD Cap and the shaft back to the HDD Case Unit, and secure the HDD Case Unit
with the E-ring.
5) Install the 2 HDD Lock Pins and the 2 HDD Lock Springs to the removed rail.
6) Return the rail to its original position.
2 Bosses
2 Screws (Use the screws removed in step 3).)
3) Remove the Upper Rail from the HDD Case Unit.

2 Screws (The removed screws will be used in step 6).)
Hole
Hole
x2
x2
Boss
F-9-257
F-9-255
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Case Unit
9-121
Installation > [TYPE-2] Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Case Unit
9-122
Installing the HDD Case Unit
7) Insert the HDD Drawer Unit into the hole on the HDD Case Unit to install it.
1) Install the HDD Case Unit.
CAUTION:
2 Hooks
screw.
2 Screws (Use the screws removed in Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit step 10).)
CAUTION:
8) Close the Edge Saddle.
x2
2 Bosses
Make sure that the bosses is fitted properly.

Edge Saddle
NOTE:
Be careful not to catch the plate of the host machine with the Wire Saddles on the rear
side of the HDD Case Unit, otherwise the installation work may become difficult.
Hook
F-9-258
x2
Boss
Hook
F-9-259
9-122
2) Connect the Signal Cable (A:HDD-Sig1 Red) and Power Supply Cable (A:HDD-Pow1) of
the HDD Drawer Unit to the Main Controller PCB 2.
9-123
3) Fold the extra length of "A:HDD-Sig2/Pow2" cable of the HDD Drawer Unit and secure
using 2 Wire Saddles.
2 Connectors
1 Edge Saddle
CAUTION:
4 Wire Saddles
Be sure that the cable is not in contact with the stepped screw [A] of Drawer.
When securing the cable, be sure that it does not go over to the front.
NOTE:
Be sure not to close the 2 Wire Saddles [A] in this step.
When the FAX Board is installed, be sure to avoid contact of the cable with the PCB
to secure the cable.
A:HDD-Sig1 (Red)
x2
A:HDD-Pow1
A:HDD-Sig1/Pow1
x2
x5
[A]
[A]
A:HDD-Sig2/Pow2
[A]
F-9-260
F-9-262
CAUTION:
Check that the connector of the Signal Cable is connected properly and that the cable
is not overloaded.
4) Insert the assembled Removable HDD.
F-9-261
F-9-263
9-123
5) Close the Controller Box.
9-124
7) Install the Side Cover.

2 Hooks
1 Screw
6) Install the Rear Upper Cover.

3 Screws (Bindeing)
Hook

NOTE:
Be sure to install the 3 Bindeing screws show in the figure below.
x3
Hook
F-9-265
8) Affix the HDD Caution Label in the appropriate language on the HDD Cap.
F-9-264
F-9-266
9-124
9-125
9) Close the HDD Cap, and install the key prepared by the user for locking.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the locking key which size is the one indicated below or smaller.
Size (width x depth x height) : 67mm x 14mm x 64mm
F-9-267

11) Return the Left Rear Cover to its original position.
9-125
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit > Checking the Contents > Option HDD (1TB)
9-126
[TYPE-3] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit

Option HDD (1TB)
[2] HDD x 1
[7] Gasket x 1
[4] Spacer x 4
< CD/Guides >
F-9-268
FCC/IC Sheet
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit > Checking the Contents > Option HDD (1TB)
9-126
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit > Checking the Contents > Removable HDD Kit
9-127
Removable HDD Kit

[4] HDD Cover X 2
Use 1 of them.
Use 1 of them.
Use 1 of them.
[9] Screw
Use 1 of them.
Use 6 of them.
Use 1 of them.
Use 2 of them.
F-9-269
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit > Checking the Contents > Removable HDD Kit
9-127
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD
9-128

1 HDD Support Plate
4 Spacers
1 Option HDD
NOTE:
HDD
HDD Support Plate

Connector Plate.
HDD Connector Plate

F-9-271
Screw Hole
Option HDD
Label
Connector
Connector
Screw Hole
HDD Connector Plate
F-9-270
x4
NOTE:
Use the parts included in the package of the Option HDD and the Removable HDD Kit.
(Included in Removable
HDD Kit)
HDD Support Plate

Spacer
Anti-vibration
Damper
F-9-272
9-128
9-129
CAUTION:
Connector.
CAUTION:
F-9-273
F-9-274
x2
Boss
Hole
F-9-275
9-129
1 Claw
9-130
1 Boss
CAUTION:
screw.
CAUTION:
screw.
x2
Boss
Claw
F-9-276
F-9-277
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-278
9-130
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD and HDD Case Unit
9-131

1 Claw
1 Protrusions
[A]
Claw
Protrusion
F-9-279
F-9-281
1 Screw
2 Hooks
3 Screws (Bindeing)
Hook
x7
Hook
F-9-280
F-9-282
9-131
9-132
1 Rubber Cap
2 Connectors
x2
F-9-285
F-9-283

F-9-284
9-132
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of HDD Case Unit
9-133
9) Open the Controller Box, and disconnect the Signal Cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Power
Supply Cable (A:Cont-Pow) on the host machine. (Disconnected Signal Cable (A:Cont-Sig)
11) Remove the HDD Case Unit.

2 Screws (The removed screws will be used in Installing the HDD Case Unit step 1).)
and the Power Supply Cable (A:Cont-Pow) will not be used.)

2 Connectors
9 Wire Saddles
x2
2 Edge Saddles
F-9-287

x2
x11
F-9-286
HDD Fixed Plate

F-9-288
with the E-ring.
9-133
9-134
5)Install the 2 HDD Lock Pins and the 2 HDD Lock Springs to the removed rail.

2 Bosses
x2
Hole
Hole
x2
F-9-289
Boss
F-9-291
2 Bosses
2 Arms
Boss
Arm
Boss
Turn over
F-9-290
9-134
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the HDD Case Unit
9-135
Installing the HDD Case Unit
CAUTION:
2 Hooks
screw.
2 Bosses
CAUTION:
x2
Edge Saddle
NOTE:
Hook
F-9-292
x2
Boss
Hook
F-9-293
9-135
2) Connect the Signal Cable (A:HDD-Sig1 Red) and Power Supply Cable (A:HDD-Pow1) of
the HDD Drawer Unit to the Main Controller PCB 2.
9-136
3) Fold the extra length of "A:HDD-Sig2/Pow2" cable of the HDD Drawer Unit and secure
using 2 Wire Saddles.
2 Connectors
1 Edge Saddle
CAUTION:
4 Wire Saddles
NOTE:
Be sure not to close the 2 Wire Saddles [A] in this step.
A:HDD-Sig1 (Red)
x2
A:HDD-Pow1
A:HDD-Sig1/Pow1
x2
x5
[A]
[A]
A:HDD-Sig2/Pow2
[A]
F-9-294
CAUTION:
is not overloaded.
F-9-296
F-9-295
F-9-297
9-136
9-137

2 Hooks
1 Screw

3 Screws (Bindeing)
Hook

NOTE:
x3
Hook
F-9-299
F-9-298
F-9-300
9-137
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit > Installing the System Software Using the SST
NOTE:
9-138

NOTE:
Details follow.
1. Requirements
1) PC
F-9-301

3) Turn on the PC.


5) Click REGISTER.
6) Click OK.
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit > Installing the System Software Using the SST
9-138
Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit > Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation
9-139

download mode.
Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation

Installation > [TYPE-3] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit > Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation
9-139
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (160GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > Option HDD
9-140
[TYPE-4] Option HDD (160GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened. Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn.
If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn, check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally.

Option HDD (160GB)
[2] HDD x 1
[7] Gasket x 1
[4] Spacer x 4
Use 1 of them.
F-9-302
< CD/Guides >

FCC/IC Sheet
9-140
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (160GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > Option HDD
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (160GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > HDD Mirrorin
9-141
HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

[1] Encryption Board X 1
[2] LED Board (A: LED) X 1
[3] Power Supply Cable

(A:HDD-Pow1) X 1

(A:HDD-Pow2) X 1
[5] Signal Cable

(A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)) X 1
[7] LED Cable (A:LED-Sig) X 1
[9] LED Label X 1
[5] Signal Cable

(A:HDD-Sig1 (Red)) X 1
F-9-303
< CD/Guides of HDD Mirroring Kit >

HDD Mirroring Kit User Guide
FCC/IC Sheet
< CD/Guides of HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit >
HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit User Documentation
HDD Data Encryption Kit Notice
FCC/IC Sheet
9-141
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (160GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > HDD Mirrorin
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (160GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the
9-142
Setting Before Turning OFF the Power
Removing the Covers
CAUTION:
Be sure to turn OFF the main power after executing this service mode setting.
Turning OFF the main power without executing service mode causes "E602-5001
(procedure error before installing the HDD
Encryption Board)" to occur when turning ON the main power after installing the
Encryption Board.
When this error occurs, the machine needs to be returned again to the initial state in
which no Encryption Board is installed.
[A]
1) Execute the following service mode (level 1).

COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > HD-CRYP
F-9-304

1 Screw
2 Hooks
Hook
Hook
F-9-305
9-142
9-143
1 Claw
1 Rubber Cap
1 Protrusions
1 Screw
Claw
Protrusion
F-9-308
F-9-306
1 Screw (The removed screw will be used in Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption
Board step 12).)
3 Screws (Bindeing)
x7
F-9-309
F-9-307
9-143
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (160GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the M
9-144
Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board
7) Remove the HDD.

2 Connectors
NOTE:
The following shows combination of the HDD and the Mirroring Board or Encryption
Board.
Connect CH A to Slot.1 (The original HDD)
Connect CH B to Slot.2 (The new HDD)
x2
A:HDD-Pow2
CH
CH
A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)
A:HDD-Sig1 (Red)
A:HDD-Pow1
2
DD
(H
t.2
Slo
Sl
D1
HD
1(
ot.
F-9-310
9) Remove the Face Plate. (The removed Face Plate and screw will not be used.)
1 Screw
F-9-312
1) Open the Controller Box, and free the Signal Cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Power Supply
Cable (A:Cont-Pow) of the host machine from the 4 Wire Saddles and the Edge Saddle at
the back of the HDD Case Unit.
x5
F-9-311
F-9-313
9-144
9-145
2) Pull out the cables to the front, and connect the Signal Cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Power
Supply Cable (A:Cont-Pow) to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.
4) Secure the Signal Cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Power Supply Cable (A:Cont-Pow) in place
using the 2 Wire Saddles at the back of the HDD Case Unit.
5) Free the cables from the 2 Wire Saddles at the front.
x2
x2
x2
F-9-314
F-9-316
3) Install the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.

4 Screws (TP; M3x6)
6) Fold extra length of the cable and secure it with the 2 Wire Saddles.
NOTE:
When installing the Encryption Board, the Signal Cable (A:Cont-Sig) and Power Supply
Cable (A:Cont-Pow) along the wavy line should be located on the back side of the HDD
Case Unit.
x2
x4
F-9-317
F-9-315
9-145
9-146
7) Install the LED Board (A: LED) to the side surface of the HDD Case Unit.
8) Connect the LED Cable (A: LED-Sig) to the LED Board (A: LED) and the Mirroring Board
2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
or Encryption Board.
2 Connectors
6 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
The tag label of "A:LED-Sig" should be located between Wire Saddles.
Secure the LED Cable (A: LED-Sig) in the direction of the arrow.
Check that the LED Cable (A: LED-Sig) is connected properly at the time of
installation because the machine can operate even when the cable is not connected
properly.
x2
F-9-318
x2
x6
Tag Label
F-9-319
9-146
9-147
9) Insert the removed HDD into the Slot.1.
10) Assemble the Option HDD (160GB). (for the second HDD)
1 HDD Support Plate
4 Spacers
1 Option HDD
Connector side
NOTE:
HDD
HDD Support Plate
Slot.1 (HDD1)
F-9-320
CAUTION:
F-9-322
Connector
connecter.
x4
Option HDD
HDD Support Plate
Spacer
[A]
Connecter
Label
F-9-321
F-9-323
9-147
9-148
11) Insert the assembled Option HDD into the Slot.2.
13) Connect the Signal Cables (A:HDD-Sig1 Red) and (A:HDD-Sig2 Blue) and Power Supply
Cables (A:HDD-Pow1) and (A:HDD-Pow2) included in the HDD Data Encryption/Mirroring
Kit.
NOTE:
Connect the Signal Cable (A:HDD-Sig2 Blue) and Power Supply Cable (A: HDD-Pow2) to
the Slot.2.
Connect the Signal Cable (A:HDD-Sig1 Red) and Power Supply Cable (A: HDD-Pow1) to
the Slot.1.
Connector side
Slot.2 (HDD2)
A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)
F-9-324
A:HDD-Sig1 (Red)
x4
12) Secure the HDD Fixed Plate.

1 screw (Use the screws removed in Removing the Covers step 6).)
1 Screw (TP; M3x6) (Use the contents included in the Option HDD.)
x2
A:HDD-Pow2
A:HDD-Pow1
F-9-326
F-9-325
9-148
9-149
14) Put the Signal Cables (A:HDD-Sig1 Red) (A:HDD-Sig2 Blue) and the Power Supply
Cables (A:HDD-Pow1) (A:HDD-Pow2) through [A] part.
15) Connect the 4 connectors of the Signal Cables (A:HDD-Sig1 Red) (A:HDD-Sig2 Blue)
and the Power Supply Cables (A:HDD-Pow1) (A:HDD-Pow2) to the Mirroring Board or
Encryption Board.
CAUTION:
Slot.1 side:
Be sure to connect "A:HDD-Sig1 (Red)" and "A:HDD-Pow1" to CH-A of the PCB.
[A]
Slot.2 side:
Be sure to connect "A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)" and "A:HDD-Pow2" to CH-B of the PCB.
A:HDD-Pow2
CH
CH
A:HDD-Pow2
x4
A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)
A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)
A:HDD-Sig1 (Red)
CH B
A:HDD-Pow1
CH A
(H
t.2
Slo
2
DD
1)
DD
(H
t.1
A:HDD-Sig1 (Red)
Slo
A:HDD-Pow1
F-9-328
F-9-327
9-149
9-150
16) Secure the Signal Cables (A:HDD-Sig1 Red) and (A:HDD-Sig2 Blue) and Power Supply
Cables (A:HDD-Pow1) and (A:HDD-Pow2) as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
If there is extra slack of the cables, be sure to tuck them to the host machine side.
1 Edger Saddle
9 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
Secure the cables so that there is no extra slack of the cables at [A] part.
Be sure that the Wire Saddle [B] is properly securing the cables.
x10
[A]
[B]
F-9-330
F-9-329
CAUTION:
is not overloaded.
F-9-331
9-150
9-151
1 Screw
CAUTION:
1 Rubber Cap
When closing the Controller Box, check that the LED Cable (A: LED-Sig) is not trapped
or does not contact with it.
CAUTION:
Be sure that the cables do not protrude from the [A] part of the HDD Cap.
If the cables protrude from the [A] part, allow extra slack of the cables at the [B] part
and tuck them to the host machine side.
[A]
[B]
F-9-333
F-9-332
9-151
9-152
21) Affix the LED Label.
3 Screws (Bindeing)
NOTE:
x3
F-9-336

F-9-334

25) Turn ON the main power switch. (Only when installing HDD Mirroring Kit)

2Hooks
1 Screw
Hook
Hook
F-9-335
9-152
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (160GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Security Mark (Only whe
9-153
Installing the System Software Using the SST (Only

when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)

NOTE:
Checking the Security Version (Only when installing

HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)
1) Press the Counter key (123 key) on the control panel.
Details follow.
2) Press the [Check Device Configuration] key appearing on the control panel.
3) Make sure that '2.00' or '2.01' is displayed in Canon MFP Security Chip as version
1. Requirements
information of the security chip.
1) PC
When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed.
CAUTION:
The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip
of the correct version with CC authentication is functioning normally by referring to the
version information indicated for Canon MFP Security Chip.

3) Turn on the PC.
Checking the Security Mark (Only when installing HDD

Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)
The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the Host

5) Click REGISTER.
machine to make sure that an appropriate level of security is being maintained.

The mark appears when the machine is equipped with an encryption board and the board is
operating correctly.
6) Click OK.
The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security mark:

download mode.
<Confirming the Security Mark>

When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark(
is displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.

9-153
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (160GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Security Mark (Only whe
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (160GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Setting the Mirroring
9-154
Setting the Mirroring

1) Make a setting of mirroring.
Specify 1 under Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > OPTION > FNCSW > W/RAID.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power of the host machine to enable the setting value.
3) Make sure that the UI screen is activated correctly.
4) Make sure that the LED blinks.
HDD1 (Slot 1): The green LED blinks.
HDD2 (Slot 2): The green and red LEDs blink.
CAUTION:
Rebuild process starts after setting 1 for W/RAID. If an error occurs during the rebuild
process at the initial installation The hard disk needs to be replaced. (Call service rep.),
reexecute the process with the following procedure.
F-9-337
1) Check that the lighting red LED is HDD2.

2) Select Service Mode (Level 1) > COPIER > OPTION > FNCSW > W/RAID, and set
0.
3) To enable the setting value, turn OFF/ON the Main Power Supply Switch of the host
machine.
"1".
machine.
The foregoing procedure is limited to the rebuild process at the initial installation.
An error during the rebuild process that is executed during operation is not included in
the consideration.
9-154
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (160GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Setting the Mirroring
Installation > [TYPE-4] Option HDD (160GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation (O
9-155
Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of

the Work (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption &
Mirroring Kit)
When you have completed all installation work, report to the system administrator for the
following:
At the point when installation is completed, make explanations about how to check that
the appropriate security function has been added and enabled so that, when the function
becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and
request <servicing work when a failure occurs>.
Completion of the Installation Work:
Ask the system administrator to make sure that '2.00' or '2.01' is indicated for Canon MFP
Security Chip as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description
of Checking the Security Version.
Maintenance of the Security Functions:
Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security
functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description
of Checking the Security Mark.
Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation (Only when

installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)
9-155
9-156
9-156
9-157
9-157
9-158
9-158
9-159
9-159
9-160
9-160
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > Option HDD
9-161
[TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

Option HDD (1TB)
[2] HDD x 1
[7] Gasket x 1
[4] Spacer x 4
Use 1 of them.
< CD/Guides >
F-9-338
FCC/IC Sheet
9-161
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > Option HDD
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > HDD Mirrorin
9-162


(A:HDD-Pow1) X 1

(A:HDD-Pow2) X 1
[5] Signal Cable

[9] LED Label X 1
[5] Signal Cable

F-9-339

FCC/IC Sheet
FCC/IC Sheet
9-162
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > HDD Mirrorin
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Assembling th
9-163
CAUTION:
Encryption Board.
CAUTION:
connecter.

[A]
Connecter
Label
F-9-340

9-163
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Assembling th
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the
9-164
Removing the Covers

1 HDD Support Plate
4 Spacers
1 Option HDD
NOTE:
HDD
[A]
HDD Support Plate
F-9-343
F-9-341
Connector

1 Screw
2 Hooks
Option HDD
Hook
x4
HDD Support Plate
Spacer
Hook
F-9-342
F-9-344
2) Assemble the other Option HDD (1TB) in the same way.
9-164
9-165
1 Claw
1 Rubber Cap
1 Protrusions
1 Screw
Claw
Protrusion
F-9-347
F-9-345
1 Screw (The removed screw will be used in Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption
Board step 10).)
3 Screws (Bindeing)
x7
F-9-348
F-9-346
9-165
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the
9-166
Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board

2 Connectors
NOTE:
Board.
Connect CH A to Slot.1 (The new HDD)
x2
A:HDD-Pow2
CH
CH
A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)
A:HDD-Sig1 (Red)
A:HDD-Pow1
2
DD
(H
t.2
Slo
Sl
D1
HD
1(
ot.
F-9-349
9) Remove the Face Plate. (The removed Face Plate and screw will not be used.)
1 Screw
F-9-351
F-9-350
9-166
9-167
3) Install the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.

4 Screws (TP; M3x6)

NOTE:
Case Unit.
x5
x4
F-9-352
Supply Cable (A:Cont-Pow) to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.
F-9-354
x2
x2
F-9-353
x2
F-9-355
9-167
9-168
6) Fold extra length of the cable and secure it with the 2 Wire Saddles.
8) Connect the LED Cable (A: LED-Sig) to the LED Board (A: LED) and the Mirroring Board
or Encryption Board.
2 Connectors
6 Wire Saddles
x2
CAUTION:
properly.
F-9-356
x2
2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
x6
x2
F-9-357
Tag Label
F-9-358
9-168
9-169
9) Insert the assembled 2 Option HDDs.
11) Connect the Signal Cables (A:HDD-Sig1 Red) and (A:HDD-Sig2 Blue) and Power Supply
Cables (A:HDD-Pow1) and (A:HDD-Pow2) included in the HDD Data Encryption/Mirroring
Kit.
NOTE:
Connect the Signal Cable (A:HDD-Sig2 Blue) and Power Supply Cable (A: HDD-Pow2) to
the Slot.2.
Connect the Signal Cable (A:HDD-Sig1 Red) and Power Supply Cable (A: HDD-Pow1) to
the Slot.1.
Connector side
Slot.2 (HDD2)
A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)
Slot.1 (HDD1)
A:HDD-Sig1 (Red)
x4
F-9-359

1 screw (Use the screws removed in Removing the Covers step 6).)
1 Screw (TP; M3x6) (Use the contents included in the Option HDD.)
A:HDD-Pow2
x2
A:HDD-Pow1
F-9-361
F-9-360
9-169
9-170
12) Put the Signal Cables (A:HDD-Sig1 Red) (A:HDD-Sig2 Blue) and the Power Supply
Cables (A:HDD-Pow1) (A:HDD-Pow2) through [A] part.
13) Connect the 4 connectors of the Signal Cables (A:HDD-Sig1 Red) (A:HDD-Sig2 Blue)
and the Power Supply Cables (A:HDD-Pow1) (A:HDD-Pow2) to the Mirroring Board or
Encryption Board.
CAUTION:
Slot.1 side:
Be sure to connect "A:HDD-Sig1 (Red)" and "A:HDD-Pow1" to CH-A of the PCB.
[A]
Slot.2 side:
Be sure to connect "A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)" and "A:HDD-Pow2" to CH-B of the PCB.
A:HDD-Pow2
CH
CH
A:HDD-Pow2
x4
A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)
A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)
A:HDD-Sig1 (Red)
CH B
A:HDD-Pow1
CH A
(H
t.2
Slo
2
DD
1)
DD
(H
t.1
A:HDD-Sig1 (Red)
Slo
A:HDD-Pow1
F-9-363
F-9-362
9-170
9-171
14) Secure the Signal Cables (A:HDD-Sig1 Red) and (A:HDD-Sig2 Blue) and Power Supply
Cables (A:HDD-Pow1) and (A:HDD-Pow2) as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
1 Edger Saddle
9 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
x10
[A]
[B]
F-9-365
F-9-364
CAUTION:
is not overloaded.
F-9-366
9-171
9-172

1 Screw
1 Rubber Cap
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
[A]
[B]
F-9-367
F-9-368
9-172
9-173
3 Screws (Bindeing)
NOTE:
x3
F-9-371

F-9-369

2 Hooks
1 Screw
Hook
Hook
F-9-370
9-173
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Security Mark (Only whe
9-174
Installing the System Software Using the SST (Only

when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)

NOTE:
Checking the Security Version (Only when installing

HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)
Details follow.
1. Requirements
1) PC
CAUTION:

3) Turn on the PC.
Checking the Security Mark (Only when installing HDD

Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)

5) Click REGISTER.

6) Click OK.

download mode.


9-174
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Security Mark (Only whe
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Setting the Mirroring
9-175
Setting the Mirroring

CAUTION:
F-9-372

0.
machine.
"1".
machine.
the consideration.
9-175
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Setting the Mirroring
Installation > [TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation (O
9-176
Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of

the Work (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption &
Mirroring Kit)
following:
Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation (Only when

installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)
9-176
9-177
9-177
9-178
9-178
9-179
9-179
9-180
9-180
9-181
9-181
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents
9-182
[TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been Installed


(A:HDD-Pow1) X 1

(A:HDD-Pow2) X 1
[5] Signal Cable

[9] LED Label X 1
< CD/Guides >
[5] Signal Cable

F-9-373

FCC/IC Sheet
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents
9-182
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the Covers
9-183
Removing the Covers
CAUTION:
Encryption Board.
[A]

F-9-374

1 Screw
2 Hooks
Hook
Hook
F-9-375
9-183
1 Claw
1 Rubber Cap
1 Protrusions
1 Screw
9-184
Claw
Protrusion
F-9-378
F-9-376
6) Disconnect 2 connectors from the HDD.

3 Screws (Bindeing)
x2
x7
F-9-379
F-9-377
9-184
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
Installing the Encryption Board
9-185
NOTE:
The HDD has been removed in the figures of the following steps 1) to 9), but it is not
necessary to remove the HDD to perform this procedure.
NOTE:
The following shows combination of the HDD and the Encryption Board.
No HDD to Slot.2
A:HDD-Pow2
CH
CH
A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)
A:HDD-Sig1 (Red)
Slo
k)
an
Bl
.2(
S
A:HDD-Pow1
x5
DD
(H
.1
lot
1)
F-9-380
F-9-381
Supply Cable (A:Cont-Pow) to the Encryption Board.
x2
F-9-382
9-185
3) Install the Encryption Board.
9-186
4 Screws (TP; M3x6)
NOTE:
Case Unit.
x2
x4
x2
F-9-384
6) Fold extra length of the cable and secure it with the 2 Wire Saddles [A].
F-9-383
x2
[A]
F-9-385
9-186
9-187
8) Connect the LED Cable (A: LED-Sig) to the LED Board (A: LED and the Encryption Board.
2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
2 Connectors
6 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
properly.
x2
F-9-386
x2
x6
Tag Label
F-9-387
9-187
9) Connect the Signal Cable (A:HDD-Sig1 Red) and the Power Supply Cable (A:HDD-Pow1)
to Slot.1.
9-188
10) Put the Signal Cable (A:HDD-Sig1 Red) and the Power Supply Cable (A:HDD-Pow1)
through [A] part.
A:HDD-Sig1 (Red)
x2
11) Connect the 2 connectors of the Signal Cables(A:HDD-Sig1 Red) and the Power Supply
Cables (A:HDD-Pow1) to the Encryption Board.
CAUTION:
Connect the Signal Cable (A:HDD-Sig1 Red) and Power Supply Cable (A: HDD-Pow1)
to the CH-A of the Encryption Board.
A:HDD-Pow1
F-9-388
[A]
A:HDD-Pow1
A:HDD-Sig1 (Red)
x2
CH A
F-9-389
9-188
12) Secure the Signal Cable (A:HDD-Sig1 Red) and the Power Supply Cable (A:HDD-Pow1).
1 Edger Saddle
9-189
CAUTION:
8 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
x9
[B]
[A]
F-9-390
13) Connect the Signal Cable (A:HDD-Sig2 Blue) and the Power Supply Cable (A:HDD-Pow2)
to CH B, and secure them in place using the 2 Wire Saddles [A].
F-9-392
14) Fold extra length of the cables and secure them in place using the 2 Wire Saddles [B].
A:HDD-Pow2
[A]
is not overloaded.
x2
x4
CAUTION:
CH B
A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)
[B]
[A]
F-9-393
F-9-391
9-189
9-190
1 Screw
CAUTION:
1 Rubber Cap
CAUTION:
[A]
[B]
F-9-395
F-9-394
9-190
9-191
3 Screws (Bindeing)
NOTE:
x3
F-9-398

F-9-396

2 Hooks
1 Screw
Hook
Hook
F-9-397
9-191
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Security Mark
9-192

NOTE:

Checking the Security Version
Details follow.
1. Requirements
1) PC
CAUTION:

3) Turn on the PC.
Checking the Security Mark


5) Click REGISTER.
6) Click OK.

download mode.
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Security Mark
9-192
Installation > [TYPE-6] HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment
9-193
Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the

Work
1) Open the HDD Cover, and check that the LED is flashing.
The green LED of HDD1 (Slot1) is flashing.
following:
F-9-399
Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment

9-193
9-194
9-194
9-195
9-195
9-196
9-196
9-197
9-197
9-198
9-198
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (1TB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > Option HDD (1TB)
9-199
[TYPE-7] Option HDD (1TB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

Option HDD (1TB)
[2] HDD x 1
[7] Gasket x 1
[4] Spacer x 4
F-9-400
< CD/Guides >

FCC/IC Sheet
9-199
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (1TB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > Option HDD (1TB)
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (1TB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
9-200


(A:HDD-Pow1) X 1

(A:HDD-Pow2) X 1
[5] Signal Cable

[9] LED Label X 1
[5] Signal Cable

F-9-401
< CD/Guides >

FCC/IC Sheet
9-200
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (1TB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (1TB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD
9-201
CAUTION:
Encryption Board.
CAUTION:
connecter.

[A]
Connecter
Label
F-9-402

9-201
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (1TB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Assembling the Option HDD
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (1TB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the Covers
9-202
Removing the Covers

1 HDD Support Plate
4 Spacers
1 Option HDD
NOTE:
HDD
[A]
HDD Support Plate
F-9-405
F-9-403
Connector

1 Screw
2 Hooks
Option HDD
Hook
x4
HDD Support Plate
Spacer
Hook
F-9-404
F-9-406
9-202
9-203
1 Claw
1 Rubber Cap
1 Protrusions
1 Screw
Claw
Protrusion
F-9-409
F-9-407

1 Screw (The removed screw will be used in Installing the Encryption Board step 10).)

3 Screws (Bindeing)
x7
F-9-410
F-9-408
9-203
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (1TB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installing the Encryption Board
9-204
2 Connectors
x2
x5
F-9-413
F-9-411
Installing the Encryption Board
Supply Cable (A:Cont-Pow) to the Encryption Board.
NOTE:
x2

No HDD to Slot.2
A:HDD-Pow2
CH
CH
A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)
A:HDD-Sig1 (Red)
k)
lan
Slo
(B
t.2
A:HDD-Pow1
HD
.1(
t
Slo
)
D1
F-9-414
F-9-412
9-204
9-205
6) Fold extra length of the cable and secure it with the 2 Wire Saddles [A].
4 Screws (TP; M3x6)

NOTE:
Case Unit.
x2
x4
[A]
F-9-417
2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
F-9-415
x2
x2
F-9-418
x2
F-9-416
9-205
8) Connect the LED Cable (A: LED-Sig) to the LED Board (A: LED) and the Encryption Board.
9-206
9) Insert the assembled HDD.
2 Connectors
6 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
properly.
Connector side
F-9-420
x2
x6

1 Screw (Use the screws removed in Removing the Covers step 6).)
F-9-421
Tag Label
F-9-419
9-206
11) Connect the Signal Cable (A:HDD-Sig1 Red) and the Power Supply Cable (A:HDD-Pow1)
to Slot.1.
9-207
12) Put the Signal Cable (A:HDD-Sig1 Red) and the Power Supply Cable (A:HDD-Pow1)
through [A] part.
A:HDD-Sig1 (Red)
x2
13) Connect the 2 connectors of the Signal Cable (A:HDD-Sig1 Red) and the Power Supply
Cable (A:HDD-Pow1) to the Encryption Board.
CAUTION:
Connect the Signal Cable (A:HDD-Sig1 Red) and Power Supply Cable (A: HDD-Pow1)
to the CH-A of the Encryption Board.
A:HDD-Pow1
F-9-422
[A]
A:HDD-Pow1
A:HDD-Sig1 (Red)
x2
CH A
F-9-423
9-207
14) Secure the Signal Cable (A:HDD-Sig1 Red) and the Power Supply Cable (A:HDD-Pow1).
1 Edger Saddle
9-208
CAUTION:
8 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
x9
[B]
[A]
F-9-424
15) Connect the Signal Cable (A:HDD-Sig2 Blue) and the Power Supply Cable (A:HDD-Pow2)
to CH B, and secure them in place using the 2 Wire Saddles [A].
F-9-426
16) Fold extra length of the cables and secure them in place using the 2 Wire Saddles [B].
A:HDD-Pow2
[A]
is not overloaded.
x2
x4
CAUTION:
CH B
A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)
[B]
[A]
F-9-427
F-9-425
9-208
9-209
1 Screw
CAUTION:
1 Rubber Cap
CAUTION:
[A]
[B]
F-9-429
F-9-428
9-209
9-210
3 Screws (Bindeing)
NOTE:
x3
F-9-432

F-9-430

2 Hooks
1 Screw
Hook
Hook
F-9-431
9-210
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (1TB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Security Mark
9-211

NOTE:

Details follow.
1. Requirements
1) PC
CAUTION:

3) Turn on the PC.


5) Click REGISTER.
6) Click OK.

download mode.
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (1TB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Security Mark
9-211
Installation > [TYPE-7] Option HDD (1TB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment
9-212

Work
following:
F-9-433

9-212
9-213
9-213
9-214
9-214
9-215
9-215
9-216
9-216
9-217
9-217
9-218
9-218
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (160GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the C
9-219
[TYPE-8] Option HDD (160GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring
Kit

Option HDD (160GB)
[2] HDD x 1
[7] Gasket x 1
[4] Spacer x 4
F-9-434
< CD/Guides >

FCC/IC Sheet
9-219
9-220
Removable HDD Kit

[4] HDD Cover X 2
[9] Screw
F-9-435
9-220
9-221

[2] LED Board

(A: LED) X 1
[3] LED Cable

(A:LED-Sig) X 1

(A:HDD-Pow1) X 1

(A:HDD-Pow2) X 1
[8] Signal Cable

[9] Signal Cable

[5] LED Label X 1
F-9-436

FCC/IC Sheet
FCC/IC Sheet
9-221
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (160GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proc
9-222
CAUTION:
Encryption Board.
[A]

F-9-437

1 Screw
2 Hooks
Hook
Hook
F-9-438
9-222
9-223

1 Claw
1 Protrusions
1 Rubber Cap
Claw
Protrusion
F-9-439
F-9-441

3 Screws (Bindeing)

x7
F-9-440
F-9-442
9-223
9-224
8) Remove the HDD.
2 Connectors
x2
x5
F-9-443
F-9-444
9-224
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (160GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Disas
9-225

2 Screws (The removed screws will be used in Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption
Host Machine (the First HDD)
Board and HDD Case Unit step 3).)

4 Screws (W Sems)
1 HDD Support Plate
x2
x4
HDD
F-9-445
HDD Support Plate

F-9-446

Connector Plate.
Screw Hole
Label
Connector
Screw Hole
F-9-447
9-225
9-226
NOTE:

CAUTION:
Connector.

1 HDD Support Plate
1 HDD
4 Screws (W Sems)
NOTE:
HDD
HDD Support Plate
F-9-450
HDD Connector Plate

F-9-448
HDD
Connector
x4
HDD Connector
Plate
HDD Support Plate

F-9-449
9-226
9-227

1 Claw
1 Boss
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
screw.
Boss
F-9-451
Claw
F-9-453
x2
Boss
Hole
F-9-452
9-227
9-228
Assembling the Option HDD (the Second HDD)

CAUTION:
screw.
Connector Plate.
Screw Hole
x2
Label
Connector
Screw Hole
F-9-456
NOTE:
F-9-454
1) Assemble the Option HDD.

1 HDD Support Plate
4 Spacers
1 Option HDD
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-455
9-228
9-229
NOTE:
HDD
HDD Support Plate

CAUTION:
Connector.
HDD Connector Plate

F-9-457
Option HDD
F-9-459
Connector
HDD Connector Plate
x4
HDD Kit)
HDD Support Plate

Spacer
Anti-vibration
Damper
F-9-458
9-229
9-230

1 Claw
1 Boss
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
screw.
Boss
F-9-460
Claw
F-9-462
x2
Boss
Hole
F-9-461
9-230
9-231

CAUTION:
screw.
x2
HDD Fixed Plate

F-9-465
with the E-ring.
F-9-463
3) Remove the Face Plate. (The removed Face Plate and Screw will not be used.)
1 Screw
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-464
F-9-466
9-231
9-232

2 Bosses
Hole
x2
Hole
x2
Boss
F-9-467
Boss
F-9-469
2 Bosses
2 Arms
Boss
Arm
Boss
Turn over
F-9-468
9-232
9-233
Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board and HDD
Case Unit

CAUTION:
screw.
NOTE:
Board.
A:HDD-Pow2
x2
CH
Edge Saddle
CH
A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)
A:HDD-Sig1 (Red)
2)
DD
H
.2(
lot
A:HDD-Pow1
(H
t.1
Slo
1
DD
F-9-471
F-9-470
9-233
9-234
1) Connect the Signal Cable (A:Cont-Sig) and the Power Supply Cable (A:Cont-Pow) of the
host machine to the Encryption Board.

2 Hooks
2 Bosses
x2
CAUTION:
NOTE:
Hook
F-9-472

4 Screws (TP; M3x6)
x2
x4
Boss
Hook
F-9-473
F-9-474
9-234
9-235
2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
5) Free the cables from the 3 Wire Saddles at the front, and pull out the extra lengths of the
cables to the front.
x3
x2
x2
F-9-477
F-9-475
6) Put cables through the Wire Saddle [A] and secure it.
7) Fold extra length of the Cable and secure it in place using the 2 Wire Saddles [B].
x3
[A]
[B]
F-9-476
9-235
9-236
2 Connectors
10) Connect the 4 Connectors of the Signal Cables (A:HDD-Sig1 Red) (A:HDD-Sig2 Blue)
and the Power Supply Cables (A:HDD-Pow1) (A:HDD-Pow2) to the Encryption Board.
6 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Connect "A:HDD-Sig1/Pow1" to the location of CH-A.
Connect "A:HDD-Sig2/Pow2" to the location of CH-B.
A:HDD-Sig2/Pow2
properly.
x4
A:HDD-Pow2
A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)
x2
x6
A:HDD-Sig1/Pow1
.
Ch
.
Ch
CH B
CH A
A:HDD-Sig1 (Red)
A:HDD-Pow1
F-9-479
Tag Label
F-9-478
9-236
9-237
11) Secure the "A:HDD-Sig2/Pow2" cable and "A:HDD-Sig1/Pow1" cable using the total of 3
Wire Saddles as shown in the figure.
12) Put the "A:HDD-Sig2/Pow2" cables through the Wire Saddle.

13) Fold the extra length of the "A:HDD-Sig1/Pow1" cables, and secure it with the Wire
Saddle.
CAUTION:
x3
F-9-480
[A]
CAUTION:
is not overloaded.
F-9-481
A:HDD-Sig2/Pow2
A:HDD-Sig1/Pow1
F-9-482
9-237
9-238

3 Screws (Bindeing)
CAUTION:
Be sure to insert the HDD No.1 to the Slot.1, and the HDD No.2 to the Slot.2.
NOTE:
x3
Slot.2 (HDD2)
Slot.1 (HDD1)
F-9-483
F-9-485

CAUTION:
2 Hooks
1 Screw
Hook
Hook
F-9-484
F-9-486
9-238
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (160GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > After Installing HDD
9-239

24) Turn ON the main power switch. (Only when installing HDD Mirroring Kit)
After Installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

NOTE:
F-9-487
NOTE:

Details follow.
1. Requirements
1) PC
3) Turn on the PC.
F-9-488
5) Click REGISTER.
6) Click OK.
9-239
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (160GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > After Installing HDD
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (160GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Setting for Mirro
9-240
Setting for Mirroring

download mode.
CAUTION:
0.
machine.

"1".
CAUTION:
machine.
the consideration.

9-240
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (160GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Setting for Mirro
Installation > [TYPE-8] Option HDD (160GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > After Installing H
9-241

Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work
following:
F-9-489

9-241
9-242
9-242
9-243
9-243
9-244
9-244
9-245
9-245
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the C
9-246
[TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring
Kit
Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been Installed

Option HDD (1TB)
[2] HDD x 1
[7] Gasket x 1
[4] Spacer x 4
F-9-490
< CD/Guides >

FCC/IC Sheet
9-246
9-247
Removable HDD Kit

[4] HDD Cover X 2
[9] Screw
F-9-491
9-247
9-248

[2] LED Board

(A: LED) X 1
[3] LED Cable

(A:LED-Sig) X 1

(A:HDD-Pow1) X 1

(A:HDD-Pow2) X 1
[8] Signal Cable

[9] Signal Cable

[5] LED Label X 1
F-9-492

FCC/IC Sheet
FCC/IC Sheet
9-248
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Pro
9-249
CAUTION:

Connector Plate.
Encryption Board.
Screw Hole
Label
Connector

Screw Hole
F-9-493
NOTE:


1 HDD Support Plate
4 Spacers
1 Option HDD
9-249
9-250
NOTE:
CAUTION:
HDD
Connector.
HDD Support Plate
HDD Connector Plate

F-9-494
Option HDD
F-9-496
Connector
HDD Connector Plate
x4
HDD Kit)
HDD Support Plate

Spacer
Anti-vibration
Damper
F-9-495
9-250
9-251

1 Claw
1 Boss
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
screw.
Boss
F-9-497
Claw
F-9-499
x2
Boss
Hole
F-9-498
9-251
9-252
8) Assemble the other Option HDD (1TB) in the same way according to steps 1) to 5).

CAUTION:
screw.
x2
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-502
F-9-500
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-501
9-252
9-253

1 Claw
1 Protrusions
[A]
Claw
Protrusion
F-9-505
F-9-503
1 Screw
3 Screws (Bindeing)
2 Hooks
Hook
x7
Hook
F-9-504
F-9-506
9-253
9-254
1 Rubber Cap
2 Connectors
x2
F-9-509
F-9-507

F-9-508
9-254
9-255

2 Screws (The removed screws will be used in Installing the Encryption Board and HDD
Case Unit step 3).)
x2
x5
F-9-511
F-9-510
9-255
9-256
x2
F-9-514
HDD Fixed Plate

F-9-512
with the E-ring.

2 Bosses
2 Arms
Boss
Arm
3)Remove the Face Plate. (The removed Face Plate and screw will not be used.)
1 Screw
Boss
Turn over
F-9-515
F-9-513
9-256
9-257
2 Bosses
CAUTION:
screw.
Hole
Hole
x2
Boss
x2
Edge Saddle
Boss
F-9-516
F-9-517
9-257
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Proc
9-258
Installing the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board and HDD

Case Unit
NOTE:
Board.
x2
A:HDD-Pow2
CH
CH
A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)
A:HDD-Sig1 (Red)
2)
DD
H
.2(
lot
A:HDD-Pow1
(H
t.1
Slo
1
DD
F-9-519

4 Screws (TP; M3x6)
F-9-518
x4
F-9-520
9-258
9-259
2 Hooks
2 Bosses
CAUTION:
x3
NOTE:
x2
Hook
F-9-522
x3
x2
Boss
Hook
[A]
F-9-521
[B]
F-9-523
9-259
9-260
2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
2 Connectors
6 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
x2
properly.
F-9-524
x6
x2
Tag Label
F-9-525
9-260
9-261
CAUTION:
x3

A:HDD-Sig2/Pow2
x4
A:HDD-Pow2
A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)
Ch
Ch
.A
.B
CH B
CH A
A:HDD-Sig1 (Red)
F-9-527
CAUTION:
A:HDD-Sig1/Pow1
is not overloaded.
A:HDD-Pow1
F-9-526
F-9-528
9-261
9-262
CAUTION:
Saddle.
Be sure to insert the HDD No.1 to the Slot.1, and the HDD No.2 to the Slot.2.
CAUTION:
Slot.2 (HDD2)
[A]
Slot.1 (HDD1)
F-9-530

CAUTION:
A:HDD-Sig2/Pow2
A:HDD-Sig1/Pow1
F-9-529
F-9-531
9-262
9-263
3 Screws (Bindeing)

NOTE:
x3
F-9-534
F-9-532
NOTE:

2 Hooks
1 Screw
Hook
Hook
F-9-535

F-9-533
9-263
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > After Installing H
9-264

NOTE:
download mode.

Details follow.
1. Requirements
1) PC

3) Turn on the PC.

CAUTION:


5) Click REGISTER.
6) Click OK.

9-264
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > After Installing H
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Setting for Mirro
9-265
Setting for Mirroring

CAUTION:
F-9-536

0.
machine.
"1".
machine.
the consideration.
9-265
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Setting for Mirro
Installation > [TYPE-9] 2 Option HDDs (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of Au
9-266

Work (Only When HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
has been Installed)
following:

9-266
9-267
9-267
9-268
9-268
9-269
9-269
9-270
9-270
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > Removable HDD Kit
9-271
[TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

Removable HDD Kit
[4] HDD Cover X 2
Use 1 of them.
Use 1 of them.
Use 1 of them.
[9] Screw
Use 1 of them.
Use 6 of them.
Use 1 of them.
Use 2 of them.
F-9-537
9-271
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > Removable HDD Kit
9
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring
9-272

[2] LED Board

(A: LED) X 1
[3] LED Cable

(A:LED-Sig) X 1

(A:HDD-Pow1) X 1

(A:HDD-Pow2) X 1
[8] Signal Cable

[9] Signal Cable

[5] LED Label X 1
F-9-538
9-272
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the HDD and HDD Case
9-273
< CD/Guides >


FCC/IC Sheet

[A]
CAUTION:
Encryption Board.
F-9-539

1 Screw
2 Hooks
Hook

Hook
F-9-540
9-273
9-274

1 Claw
1 Protrusions
1 Rubber Cap
Claw
Protrusion
F-9-541
F-9-543

3 Screws (Bindeing)

x7
F-9-542
F-9-544
9-274
9-275
8) Remove the HDD.
2 Connectors
x2
x5
F-9-545
F-9-546
9-275
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Disassembling and Assembling of
9-276

Host Machine
Case Unit step 3).)

4 Screws (W Sems)
1 HDD Support Plate
x2
x4
HDD
F-9-547
HDD Support Plate

F-9-548

Connector Plate.
Screw Hole
Label
Connector
Screw Hole
F-9-549
9-276
9-277
NOTE:

CAUTION:
Connector.

1 HDD Support Plate
1 HDD
4 Screws (W Sems)
NOTE:
HDD
HDD Support Plate
F-9-552
HDD Connector Plate

F-9-550
HDD
Connector
x4
HDD Connector
Plate
HDD Support Plate
F-9-551
9-277
9-278

1 Claw
1 Boss
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
screw.
Boss
F-9-553
Claw
F-9-555
x2
Boss
Hole
F-9-554
9-278
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Changing Configuration inside of H
9-279

CAUTION:
screw.
x2
HDD Fixed Plate

F-9-558
F-9-556
with the E-ring.

x2
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-559
F-9-557
9-279
9-280
2 Bosses
CAUTION:
2 Arms
Boss
screw.
Arm
Boss
Turn over
x2
Edge Saddle
F-9-560
2 Bosses
Hole
F-9-562
Hole
x2
Boss
F-9-561
9-280
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the Encryption Board and
9-281
Installing the Encryption Board and HDD Case Unit
NOTE:
No HDD to Slot.2
x2
A:HDD-Pow2
CH
CH
Sl
nk
Bla
2(
ot.
A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)
A:HDD-Sig1 (Red)
)
D1
A:HDD-Pow1
HD
.1(
t
Slo
F-9-564
F-9-563

4 Screws (TP; M3x6)
x4
F-9-565
9-281
9-282
2 Hooks
2 Bosses
CAUTION:
x3
NOTE:
x2
Hook
F-9-567
x3
x2
Boss
Hook
[A]
F-9-566
[B]
F-9-568
9-282
9-283
2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
2 Connectors
6 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
properly.
x2
F-9-569
x6
x2
Tag Label
F-9-570
9-283
9-284
CAUTION:
x3
A:HDD-Sig2/Pow2
x4
A:HDD-Pow2
A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)
Ch
Ch
.A
.B
CH B
CH A
A:HDD-Sig1 (Red)
F-9-572
CAUTION:
A:HDD-Sig1/Pow1
is not overloaded.
A:HDD-Pow1
F-9-571
F-9-573
9-284
9-285
Saddle.
CAUTION:
F-9-575
[A]
CAUTION:
A:HDD-Sig2/Pow2
A:HDD-Sig1/Pow1
F-9-574
F-9-576
9-285
9-286
3 Screws (Bindeing)

NOTE:
x3
F-9-579
F-9-577
NOTE:

2 Hooks
1 Screw
Hook
Hook
F-9-580

F-9-578
9-286
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Security Mark
9-287

NOTE:
download mode.

Details follow.
1. Requirements
1) PC


3) Turn on the PC.
CAUTION:

5) Click REGISTER.

6) Click OK.

Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Security Mark
9-287
Installation > [TYPE-10] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustment
9-288

F-9-581

Work
following:
9-288
9-289
9-289
9-290
9-290
9-291
9-291
9-292
9-292
9-293
9-293
Installation > TYPE-11] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > Option HDD (
9-294
TYPE-11] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit

Option HDD (1TB)
[2] HDD x 1
[7] Gasket x 1
[4] Spacer x 4
F-9-582
< CD/Guides >

FCC/IC Sheet
9-294
Installation > TYPE-11] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > Option HDD (
Installation > TYPE-11] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > Removable H
9-295
Removable HDD Kit

[4] HDD Cover X 2
Use 1 of them.
Use 1 of them.
Use 1 of them.
[9] Screw
Use 1 of them.
Use 6 of them.
Use 1 of them.
Use 2 of them.
F-9-583
9-295
Installation > TYPE-11] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > Removable H
Installation > TYPE-11] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > HDD Data En
9-296

[2] LED Board

(A: LED) X 1
[3] LED Cable

(A:LED-Sig) X 1

(A:HDD-Pow1) X 1

(A:HDD-Pow2) X 1
[8] Signal Cable

[9] Signal Cable

[5] LED Label X 1
F-9-584
< CD/Guides >

FCC/IC Sheet
9-296
Installation > TYPE-11] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Contents > HDD Data En
Installation > TYPE-11] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Assembling th
9-297
CAUTION:

Connector Plate.
Encryption Board.
Screw Hole
Label
Connector

Screw Hole
F-9-585
NOTE:


1 HDD Support Plate
4 Spacers
1 HDD Connector Plate (Included with the Removable HDD Kit)
1 Option HDD
9-297
9-298
NOTE:
CAUTION:
HDD
Connector.
HDD Support Plate
HDD Connector Plate

F-9-586
Option HDD
F-9-588
Connector
HDD Connector Plate
x4
HDD Kit)
HDD Support Plate

Spacer
Anti-vibration
Damper
F-9-587
9-298
9-299

1 Claw
1 Boss
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
screw.
Boss
F-9-589
Claw
F-9-591
x2
Boss
Hole
F-9-590
9-299
Installation > TYPE-11] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Removing the
9-300

CAUTION:
screw.
[A]
x2
F-9-594

1 Screw
2 Hooks
F-9-592
Hook
HDD No.
Serial No.
Hook
XXXXXXXX
F-9-595
F-9-593
9-300
9-301

1 Claw
1 Protrusions
1 Rubber Cap
Claw
Protrusion
F-9-596
F-9-598

3 Screws (Bindeing)

x7
F-9-597
F-9-599
9-301
9-302
2 Connectors
x2
x5
F-9-600
F-9-601
9-302
Installation > TYPE-11] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Changing Con
9-303
Case Unit step 3).)
x2
x2
F-9-604
F-9-602
2 Bosses
2 Arms
Boss
Arm
Boss
Turn over
HDD Fixed Plate
F-9-605
F-9-603
with the E-ring.
9-303
9-304
2 Bosses
CAUTION:

Hole
screw.
Hole
x2
x2
Edge Saddle
Boss
F-9-606
F-9-607
9-304
Installation > TYPE-11] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Installation Procedure > Installing the E
9-305
Installing the Encryption Board and HDD Case Unit
NOTE:
No HDD to Slot.2
x2
A:HDD-Pow2
CH
CH
Sl
nk
Bla
2(
ot.
A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)
A:HDD-Sig1 (Red)
)
D1
A:HDD-Pow1
HD
.1(
t
Slo
F-9-609

F-9-608
4 Screws (TP; M3x6)
x4
F-9-610
9-305
9-306
2 Hooks
2 Bosses
CAUTION:
x3
NOTE:
x2
Hook
F-9-612
x3
x2
Boss
Hook
[A]
F-9-611
[B]
F-9-613
9-306
9-307
2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
2 Connectors
6 Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
x2
properly.
F-9-614
x6
x2
Tag Label
F-9-615
9-307
9-308
CAUTION:
x3

A:HDD-Sig2/Pow2
x4
A:HDD-Pow2
A:HDD-Sig2 (Blue)
Ch
.
Ch
.B
CH B
CH A
A:HDD-Sig1 (Red)
F-9-617
CAUTION:
A:HDD-Sig1/Pow1
is not overloaded.
A:HDD-Pow1
F-9-616
F-9-618
9-308
9-309
Saddle.
CAUTION:
F-9-620
[A]
CAUTION:
A:HDD-Sig2/Pow2
A:HDD-Sig1/Pow1
F-9-619
F-9-621
9-309
9-310
3 Screws (Bindeing)

NOTE:
x3
F-9-624
F-9-622
NOTE:

2 Hooks
1 Screw
Hook
Hook
F-9-625

F-9-623
9-310
Installation > TYPE-11] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Security Mark
9-311

NOTE:
download mode.

Details follow.
1. Requirements
1) PC


3) Turn on the PC.
CAUTION:

5) Click REGISTER.
6) Click OK.

9-311
Installation > TYPE-11] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Checking the Security Mark
Installation > TYPE-11] Option HDD (1TB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit > Execution of Auto Gradation Adjustmen
9-312

F-9-626

Work
following:
9-312
9-313
9-313
9-314
9-314
9-315
9-315
9-316
9-316
9-317
9-317
Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Installation Outline Drawing
9-318

Points to Note Before Installation
To enable the function of "Image Data Analyzer Board", it is necessary to install the license
which comes with the product.
2) Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned
off, then disconnect the power plug.
Be sure to ask users to install the license after the installation.

CAUTION:
An error occurs when the license is installed before installing the Image Analysis Board,
so make sure to install the license after installing the Image Analysis Board.

[1] Image Data Analyzer
Board x 1
[2] PCB Spacer x 4
[5] Screw (Binding; M3x4)

x1
Use 2 of them
[3] Image Data Analyzer

Board Support Plate x 1
F-9-628
F-9-627
<CD/Guides>
License Access Number Certificate
Document Scan Code Analyzer for MEAP CD
FCC/IC sheet (only for USA/Europe)
Notice for Delivered Installation sheet
Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Installation Outline Drawing
9-318
Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Installation Procedure
9-319
3) Install the 4 PCB Spacers.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop the screw.
1) Remove the Rear Small Cover.

4 Screws
x4
F-9-631
4) Install the Image Data Analyzer Board.

4 Screws (TP; M3x6)
F-9-629
2) Remove the screw.(The removed screw will not be used.)
x4
F-9-632
5) Install the Rear Small Cover. (4 Screws)
F-9-630
Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Installation Procedure
9-319
Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Checking after Installation
9-320

3) Ask users to install license.
5) Press the counter check key on the control panel.
6) Press "Check Device Configuration" key.
7) Check that "Image Data Analyzer Board" is displayed in option field.
Installation > Document Scan Lock Kit-B1 > Checking after Installation
9-320
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Checking the Contents > USB Device Port-A2
USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2
9-321

USB Device Port-A2
Points to Note before Installation

Be sure to install the USB Device Port before installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer or the
[1] Case Plate X 1
[2] DUH-V3 Board X 1
[3] Cushion X 4
[5] Case Sheet X 1
[6] DP USB Cable X 1
Card Reader (sales company's option).

The Multimedia Reader/Writer cannot be used in combination with the Card Reader (sales
company's option).

[4] Case Sheet X 1
(with LED indication)
[7] USB Cable X 1
(without LED indication)
[8] Wire Saddle X 4
Use 3 of them
[10] Screw
(Binding; M4x6) x 2
F-9-633
F-9-634
[3],[4]: Used when installing the Card Reader (sales companys option)
<CD/Guides>
FCC/IC instruction sheet
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Checking the Contents > USB Device Port-A2
9-321
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the USB Device Port
Installing the USB Device Port
Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2
[1] Multimedia
Card Slot X 1
[2] Card Slot X 1
9-322
[3] Card Slot X 1
1) Open the Toner Exchange Cover.

3) Remove the Upper Right Cover.
1 Screw
[4] USB Cable X 1
[6] Multimedia Label X 1
[7] Slot Holder X 1
F-9-636
4) Remove the Bottle Regulation Rail.

1 Screw
F-9-635
<CD/Guides>
FCC/IC instruction sheet

Check that the main power is OFF.
2) Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned
off, then disconnect the power plug.
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the USB Device Port
F-9-637
9-322
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the USB Device Port > <For Upper Middle Cover>
9-323
6) Remove the 4 screws of the Upper Middle Cover or the Control Panel.
1 Screw
x4
F-9-640
F-9-638
When removing the Upper Middle Cover: See <For Upper Middle Cover>
When removing the Control Panel: See <For Control Panel>
NOTE:
When removing the screw, the Control Panel Hold Plate is also removed.
When opening the Front Cover, be sure to do so while holding the Control Panel Hold
Plate.
<For Upper Middle Cover>

1) Remove the Upper Middle Cover.
2) Install the Case Plate.
x2
F-9-639
F-9-641
9-323
9-324
3) Install the DUH-V3 Board.
5) Connect the removed USB Cable to the DUH-V3 Board.
3 Screws (TP; M3x6)
2 Wire Saddles
1 Connector
Connector
x2
x3
F-9-644
F-9-642
6) Install the 3 Wire Saddles to the Control Panel Plate.
4) Remove the USB Cable.

2 Screws
3 Wire Saddles
1 Edge Saddle (Close it after freeing the USB Cable)
x4
Edge Saddle
x2
F-9-645
Wire Saddle
F-9-643
9-324
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the USB Device Port > <For Control Panel>
7) Connect one end of the DP USB Cable to the DUH-V3 Board, and connect its other end to
the host machine.
9-325
<For Control Panel>

1) Place a sheet of paper, etc., to avoid damaging the Control Panel, and turn the Control
2 Screws
Panel over.
7 Wire Saddles
2) Disconnect the Control Panel Cable and the Power Supply Cable.
1 Wire Saddle
Control Panel Connector
x2
x2
Power Supply
Connector
Wire Saddle
x7
F-9-647
3) Disconnect the USB Cable, and remove the Control Panel.

2 Screws
Cable Guide
1edge saddle (Close it after freeing only the USB Cable)
F-9-646
x2
8) Install the Upper Middle Cover. (4 Screws)

9) Install the Upper Right Cover. (1 Screw)
NOTE:
When installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer simultaneously, it is efficient to install it
before performing the following procedure.
10)
Install the Upper Left Cover and Control Panel Hold Plate. (1 screw is used to tighten
both parts)
11)
Install the Bottle Regulation Rail. (1 Screw)
12)
Close the Toner Exchange Cover.
Guide
F-9-648
9-325
4) Install the Case Plate.
6) Connect the removed USB Cable to the DUH-V3 Board.
2 Wire Saddles
x2
9-326
x2
F-9-649
5) Install the DUH-V3 Board.
F-9-651
7) Install the 3 Wire Saddles to the Control Panel Plate.
3 Screws (TP; M3x6)

1 Connector
Connector
x3
F-9-652
F-9-650
9-326
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the Card Reader
8) Connect one end of the DP USB Cable to the DUH-V3 Board, and connect its other end to
the Control Panel by putting it through the guide.
13)
Install the Bottle Regulation Rail. (1 Screw)
14)
9-327
Installing the Card Reader
2 Screws
4 Wire Saddles
1) Open the DADF, and remove the Transparent Cover and the Device Port Sheet of the
Upper Left Cover.
x2
3 Claws
x3
USB Cable (large)
Guide
Wire Saddle
x4
F-9-654
2) Connect the Card Reader to the PCB, and store the cable inside the Upper Cover by rolling
it up.
F-9-653
9) Connect the Control Panel Cable and the Power Supply Cable (1 Wire Saddle).
10)
Install the Control Panel (4 Screws).
11)
Install the Upper Right Cover. (1 Screw)
NOTE:
When installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer simultaneously, it is efficient to install it
before performing the following procedure.
12)
Install the Upper Left Cover and Control Panel Hold Plate. (1 screw is used to tighten
both parts)
F-9-655
9-327
3) Put 4 cushions by piling them up.
9-328
5) Replace the Device Port Sheet with the Case Sheet.
NOTE:
Be sure to adjust the number of cushions according to how the cable of the Card
Reader is stored.
NOTE:
Be sure to replace it with the Case Sheet (with LED indication).
6) Install the Transparent Cover and the Case Sheet.
x3
F-9-656
F-9-658
4) Place the Card Reader by aligning it with the position where the cover is installed.
7) Close the DADF.
F-9-657
9-328
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer
Installing the Multimedia Reader/Writer
9-329
NOTE:
When installing the USB Device Port simultaneously, skip steps 1 and 3.
1 Screw

2) Remove the Bottle Regulation Rail.
1 Screw
F-9-660
NOTE:
When removing the screw, the Control Panel Hold Plate is also removed.
When opening the Front Cover, be sure to do so while holding the Control Panel Hold
Plate.
F-9-659
F-9-661
9-329
4) Install the Multimedia Card Slot and Slot Holder together.
9-330
6) Remove the Card Slot, and replace it with the Card Slot included in the package (The
4 Screws (TP; M3x6)
removed Card Slot will not be used).

2 Screws
Slot Holder
x4
x2
x2
Multimedia Card Slot

F-9-662
F-9-664
5) Remove the Plate.
7) Install the Plat. (2 Screws)
2 Screws
8) Install the Upper Left Cover and Control Panel Hold Plate. (1 screw is used to tighten both
parts)
9) Install the Bottle Regulation Rail. (1 Screw)
10)
x2
F-9-663
9-330
9
11)
Open the DADF, and remove the Transparent Cover and the Device Port Sheet of the
13)
9-331
Affix the Multimedia Label to the Device Port Sheet as shown in the figure.
Upper Left Cover.

3 Claws
x3
Multimedia Label
F-9-667
14)
F-9-665
12)
Return the Transparent Cover and the Device Port Sheet to the original position.
3 Claws
Install the USB Cable.
x3
x2
F-9-668
F-9-666
15)
Close the DADF.
16)
17)
Turn ON the main power switch.
9-331
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Operation Check [Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2] > Writing Check
9-332
Operation Check [Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2]
4) Make the following selection:[Scan and Store] > [Memory Media] > [Memory Media (A:)]
NOTE:
To the Multimedia Reader/Writer, Memory Media of the SC Card, Memory Stick, and CF
Card can be connected. With one of the 3 types of Memory Media, perform the oepration
check 1 through 3.
Writing Check
1) Select "1" for the following service mode (Level 2).(Default value "0")
CPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW > UI-MEM
2) To make the setting value effective, turn OFF/ON the main power of the Host Machine.
3) Mount the Memory Media to the Multimedia Card Reader/Writer. (Check that the Mount
F-9-670
Mark is indicated in the bottom right.)
5) Set originals to DADF (or Copyboard), and press the [Scan] button. Then, press the Start
button on the Control Panel.
F-9-669
F-9-671
9-332
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Operation Check [Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2] > Writing Check
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Operation Check [Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2] > Reading Check
9-333
6) After the completion of original reading, check that the data is stored in the media. After
that, press the [Main Menu] button on the Control Panel.
Reading Check
7) Make the following selection from Main Menu: [Access Stored Files] > [Memory Media] >
[Memory Media(A:)]
F-9-672
F-9-673
9-333
9-334
8) Select the files stored in step 4) and 5), and then press the [Print] button.
9) Press the [Start Printing] button, and print the file. Then check that the file is printed
correctly.
F-9-674
F-9-675
10)
Press the [Main Menu] button on the Control Panel.
F-9-676
9-334
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Operation Check [Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2] > Memory Media Removal
9-335
Memory Media Removal

11)
12)
Press the [Mount Mark ] in the bottom right.Then, select the memory media to be
Press the [OK] button. Then, check that the Mount Mark is not indicated in the bottom
right on the Main Menu screen.
removed, and press the [Remove] button.
F-9-678
F-9-677
9-335
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Operation Check [Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2] > Memory Media Removal
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power
9-336
Copy Control Interface KIT-A1
The following options cannot be used in combination with each other.
[1] CC-VI Cable X 1
Serial Interface Kit
[2] D-SUB Support Plate
Copy Control Interface Kit
X1
[3] Washer (large) X 2
Copy Card Reader

[4] Hexagonal Screw (Washer (Small) ,Nut) X 2
Serial Intreface KIT-K1

[1] Serial RS Conversion
Board X 1
Do not use a Nut
[2] IA Harness Protection

Sheet X 1
[5] IA Harness Protection
Sheet X 1
[3] RS Conversion
Cable X 1
F-9-680

[4] Hexagonal Screw X 2
[5] Washer X 2
[6] PCB Spacer X 1

F-9-679
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power
9-336
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installation Procedure > Removing the Main Controller PCB 1
9-337

1 Screw
2 Hocks
Hook
Hook
F-9-681
F-9-683
Removing the Main Controller PCB 1
1 Edge Saddle
Edge Saddle
USB Cable
Control Panel
Connector
x2
[A]
Handle
F-9-684
F-9-682
9-337
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installation Procedure > Removing the Main Controller PCB 1
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Serial Interface Kit-K1
9-338
Installing the Serial Interface Kit-K1
3) Connect the RS Conversion Cable to the Serial RS Conversion Board.
1) Remove the Face Cover from the Main Controller PCB 1. (The removed Face Cover will
not be used.)
2 Screws (The removed screw will not be used.)
x2
F-9-686
4) Install the Serial RS Conversion Board.

F-9-685

2 Washers
2 Hexagon Screws
2) Remove the screw, and install the PCB Spacer. (The removed screw will be used in step 4).
1 Connector
x3
F-9-687
9-338
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Serial Interface Kit-K1
Installation > USB Device Port-A2/Multimedia Reader/Writer-A2 > Installation Procedure > Installing the Copy Control Interface Kit-A1
9-339
Installing the Copy Control Interface Kit-A1
3) Connect the CC-VI Cable to the Main Controller PCB 1.
1) Remove the Face Cover from the Main Controller PCB 1. (The removed Face Cover will
not be used.)
2 Hexagon Screws
2 Spring Washers
2 Washers (Large)
2 Screws (The removed screws will not be used.)
1 Connector
CC-VI Cable
x2
x2
Washer (Large)
Spring Washer
Hexagon Screw
F-9-688
F-9-690
2) Put the CC-VI Cable through the D-SUB Support Plate.

CAUTION:
Install the extruded side of the D-SUB Support Plate as shown in the figure.
Inside
D-SUB Support Plate

CC-VI Cable
F-9-689
9-339
9-340
4) Install the Main Controller PCB 1.

Install the Main Controller PCB 1 while paying attention not to trap cables.
handle, the Main Controller PCB 1 may not be inserted horizontally. In such case, note
that connector connection error (or damage of connector) or deformation of plate may
occur.
F-9-691
[A]
5) Insert the USB Cable and the Control Panel Cable. (1 Edge Saddle)
6) Install the Side Cover. (1 Screw)
9) Turn ON the main power.
9-340
Installation > Voice Operation Kit-C2 > Checking the Contents
Voice Operation Kit-C2
9-341
[1] Speaker Unit X 1
[2] Voice Operation Board

Unit X 1
[3] Support Plate X 1
[4] DVI Cable X 1
[5] Ring Core X 2
[6] Cable Face Seal X 1
[7] Cord Guide X 7
[8] Card Spacer X 1
[9] Screw
(Bind; M4x14) X 2
[10] Screw
(TP; M3x6) X 2
[11] Ring Core X 1
[12] Wire Saddle X 3
To use the equipment, the Reader Unit is required.

Although model with the Upright Control Panel is used for illustration in this procedure, the
same procedure is applied to model with the Flat Control Panel.
F-9-692
Installation > Voice Operation Kit-C2 > Checking the Contents
9-341
9
[13] Screw
(Bind; M4x20) X 2
[14] Screw
(Bind; M3x20) X 1
These parts are in cluded

in only some packages.
Installation > Voice Operation Kit-C2 > Installation Outline Drawing
9-342
[15] Screw
(Bind; M4x6) X 1


[16] Screw
(Bind; M3x14) X 1

F-9-693
[11]: This is used for the user installed option and should be handed over to the user.
<CD/Guides>
User's Guide
Voice Guidance Kit Users Guide
Voice Guidance Manual CD
FCC/IC-A DOCUMENT
F-9-694
Installation > Voice Operation Kit-C2 > Installation Outline Drawing
9-342
Installation > Voice Operation Kit-C2 > Installation Procedure
9-343

1 Edge Saddle
Edge Saddle
USB Cable
Control Panel
Connector
x2
[A]
Handle
F-9-697
F-9-695
5) Remove the Face Plate. (The removed Face Plate will not be used.)
2 Screws (The removed screws will be used in later steps.)
2 Hooks
x2
Hook
Hook
F-9-698
F-9-696
9-343
6) Install the Voice Operation Board Unit to the Main Controller PCB 1.
9-344
1 Connector
2 screws (The removed screws from a previous step)

2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
plate may occur.
NOTE:
Check that the connector is connected properly.
x4
[A]
Connector
F-9-700
F-9-699

1 Edge Saddle
9-344
9) Cut off [A] part of the Side Cover with nippers.
11)
9-345
Connect the DVI Cable to the Voice Operation Board Unit.
CAUTION:
When cutting off the part, be sure not to make burrs.
[A]
F-9-703
Put the IDVI Cable through holes of the Side Cover and Right Rear Cover.
13)
Install the Side Cover.
2 Hooks
F-9-701
10)
12)
Attach the 2 Ring Cores to both ends of the DVI Cable.
Ring Core
Hook
DVI Cable
Cap
Hole
Hole
F-9-702
F-9-704
14)
9-345
9
15)
Remove the 2 Rubber Caps from the Right Upper Cover. (The removed Rubber Caps
will not be used.)
17)
9-346
Install the Speaker Unit (Lower).
x2
F-9-707
F-9-705
16)
18)
Remove the Speaker Unit (Lower) from the Speaker Unit.
x2
Install the Speaker Unit (Upper).
2 Screws (The removed screws will be used in step 18.)
Speaker Unit (Lower)
x2
F-9-706
F-9-708
9-346
9-347

19)
Use 7 Cord Guides.
Insert the DVI Cable to the Speaker Unit.
20 mm
Screw Hole
F-9-709
20)
Remove the cover of Cord Guide and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.
NOTE:
Affix the Cord Guide at the location indicated in the figure.
Screw Hole
F-9-710
Connector
Cord Guide
Screw
F-9-711
9-347
9-348
NOTE:
Steps for the rear are same with both the Upright Control Panel model and Flat Control
Panel model.
Use 6 Cord Guides.
20 mm
NOTE: When using together with the Copy Card Reader

Screw Hole
F-9-714

Screw Hole
F-9-712
Connector
Cord Guide
Screw
F-9-715
F-9-713
9-348
9
21)
Installation > Voice Operation Kit-C2 > Operation Check > When Stopping to Use
Put the Speaker Cable through the Cord Guide, and install the cover of the guide.
CAUTION:
Be sure to slack off [A] part for not interfering to open/close the Right Rear Cover 1.
9-349

NOTE:

1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Accessibility] > [Voice Navigation Settings]
> [Use Voice Navigation], and check that the setting is ON.
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Accessibility] > [Voice Navigation Settings]
[A]
> [Voice Navigation at Startup], and check that "Select Mode at Startup" is set.
3) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Accessibility] > [Voice Navigation Settings],
and check that "Tune Microphone" is displayed.
4) To make the setting value effective, turn OFF/ON the main power of the Host Machine.
Operation Check
When Starting to Use
[A]
F-9-716
1) Press "Reset" key or the Voice Recognition button for more than 3 seconds.
2) In "Select the Voice Navigation type." on the Control Panel screen, select "Manual + Vocal
Mode", "Vocal Mode" or "Manual Mode", and press OK.
3) Once the indication on the screen is framed in red, the "Voice Operation Kit" becomes
enabled.
[A]
NOTE:
When "Manual Mode" is selected in "Select the Voice Navigation type.", nothing
happens by pressing the Voice Recognition button.
In case the Voice Operation Kit fails to operate, check the following.
Make the following selection; [Service Mode (Level 1) ] > [COPIER] > [DISPLAY] >
[VERSION], and check that [TTS-JA/TTS-EN] and [ASR-JA/ASR-EN] are installed
correctly.
[A]
F-9-717
22)
23)
When Stopping to Use

1) Press "Reset" key or the Voice Recognition button for more than 3 seconds.
Installation > Voice Operation Kit-C2 > Operation Check > When Stopping to Use
9-349
Appendix
Tools
Service
Timing Chart
General
Circuit Diagram
General
of User Mode
List
Data
Backup
of HDD partition
Detail
Counter List
Soft
Appendix > Service Tools > Special Tools
II
Service Tools
Special Tools
In addition to the standard tools set, the following special tools are required when servicing the machine:
Tool No
Ctgr
Digital multimeter
Tool name
FY9-2002
Cover switch
TKN-0093
Tester extension pin
FY9-3038
Tester extension pin(L-shaped)
FY9-3039
Appearance
Remarks
Used for electrical checks; for adjustment of laser power in
com-bination with the laser power checker.
Used as a probe ex-tension when makingelectrical checks.
II
Tool name
Mirror positioning tool(front,
rear)
NA-3 Test Sheet
Electrode for checking potential

sensor
Tool No
Ctgr
FY9-3046-000
Appearance
Used for positioning the mirror mount 1 and the mirror mount 2.
FY9-9196
Use for image adjustment / check
FY9-3059-000
Surface potential sensor for zero-level check
III
Remarks
III
Tool No
Ctgr
FY9-9453
Appearance
Remarks
MTF adjustment
MTF (128g)
FY9-9453-000 MK0808 (100)
Tool name
MTF TEST SHEET
IV
T-10-1
IV
Appendix > Service Tools > Solvents and Oils
Solvents and Oils

Name
Uses
Composition
Remarks
Alcohol
Cleaning; e.g., glass, plastic, rubber; external covers.
Fluoride-family
hydrocarbon
Alcohol
Surface activating agent
Water
Do not bring near fire.

Procure locally.
Substitute: IPA (isopropyl alcohol)
Alcohol
Cleaning; e.g., metal; oil or toner stain.
Fluoride-family
hydrocarbon
Chlorine-family hydrocarbon
Alcohol
Do not bring near fire.

Procure locally
Substitute: MEK
Lubricating oil (EM-50L)
Lubrication; e.g., gears.
Special oil
Special solid
lubricating agent
Lithium soap
Tool No.: HY9-0007
Lubricating oil
Lubrication; e.g., scanner rail
Synthetic oil
Synthetic oil
NTN Corporation EU-1
Tool No.: FY9-6028 (50 cc)
Super lube grease
Apply to the gear of the fixing assembly
Chemical synthesis oil
Chemical synthesis oil

Tool No.: FY9-6005 (80g)
Tospearl (lubricant for Photo-sensitive drum cleaning blade)
Use it for preventing detachment of the drum cleaning blade.
Tool No.: FY9-6007
Conducting grease
Drum sliding Assembly
Ether, polytera
fluoethylene
Tool No.: FY9-6008 (10g)
Drum cleaning powder
Cleaning the photosensitive drum.
Aluminum oxide
Zirconium silicate
FO #6000
Fujimi Incorporated
Tool No.:
T-10-2
Appendix > Service Tools > Solvents and Oils
VI
Basic sequence at power ON
Appendix > General Timing Chart > Basic sequence at power ON
Appendix > General Timing Chart > Basic sequence at power ON
General Timing Chart
Main power ON
Print Unit
INITIAL
INITIAL ROTATION
STBY
Polygon Motor(M44)
ETB Motor(M43)
Drum Motor(M1)
Developing AC bias
Developing DC bias
Developing DC bias
Pre-exposure LED
Transfer bias
Fixing Motor(M3)
Fixing Heater(H3)
ETB Engagement
CCW
Detachment
CW
CCW
Delivery Motor(M13)
Reverse Motor(M14)
F-10-1
VI
VII
Appendix > General Timing Chart > Basic sequence at printing <Condition: A4 1-sided (2 sheets), Right deck, Reverse delivery>
Start key ON
Print Unit
STBY
INTR
PRINT
LSTR
STBY
Print Status
PTOP
Video Signal
Polygon Motor(M44)
ETB Motor(M43)
Drum Motor(M1)
Developing AC bias
Developing DC bias
Developing DC bias
Pre-exposure LED
Transfer bias
Fixing Motor(M3)
Fixing Heater(H3)
ETB Engagement
CCW
CCW
Detachment

Delivery Motor(M13)
Reverse Motor(M14)
CCW
CCW
CW
CCW
CW

F-10-2
VII
VIII
Start key ON
Print Unit
STBY
INTR
PRINT
LSTR
STBY
Print Status
PTOP
Video Signal
Polygon Motor(M44)
ETB Motor(M43)
Drum Motor(M1)
Developing AC bias
Developing DC bias
Developing DC bias
Pre-exposure LED
Transfer bias
Fixing Motor(M3)
Fixing Heater(H3)
CCW
CW CW
CW
CW CW
CCW
ETB Engagement

Delivery Motor(M13)
Reverse Motor(M14)
CCW
CCW
CW
CCW
CW

F-10-3
VIII
IX
General Circuit Diagram
Jack Abbreviated Signal

No.
Name
Signal Input/Output List

No.
Name
J401 12V_FUSE_SW_2
24VB_OCD_SW_2
J411 DRV1_1ST_J_CLKDRV1_1ST_J_CLK+
DRV1_1ST_J_M2S+
DRV1_1ST_J_M2SDRV1_2ND_J_M2SDRV1_2ND_J_M2S+
DRV1_1ST_J_S2MDRV1_1ST_J_S2M+
DRV1_2ND_J_S2M+
DRV1_2ND_J_S2MJ412 DRV1_3RD_J_S2MDRV1_3RD_J_S2M+
Signal Name
12V Fuse Switch 2
24VB OCD Switch 2
Main Driver High Speed Serial Clock Signal 1 (Differential -)
Main Driver High Speed Serial Clock Signal 1 (Differential +)
Main Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 1 (Differential +)
Main Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 1 (Differential -)
Main Driver High Speed Serial Communication Reception Signal 1
(Differential -)
(Differential +)
(Differential +)
(Differential -)
(Differential -)
(Differential +)
Main Driver High Speed Serial Clock Signal 3 (Differential -)
Main Driver High Speed Serial Clock Signal 3 (Differential +)
Potential Sensor Detection Signal
Patch Sensor Detection Signal
IH Power Supply PWM Output 2
IH Power Supply Over Currency Detection Signal
Main Driver Connection Detection Signal
DRV1_3RD_J_CLKDRV1_3RD_J_CLK+
DRV1_3RD_J_M2S+
DRV1_3RD_J_M2SJ413 AD0
AD1
IH_PWM2
IH_PWM1
IH_PWM0
IH_I_LIMIT
DRV1_ANALOG_IF
_CNCT_DTCX
J414 +5V
5V Power Supply
+3.3V
3.3V Power Supply
J421 DRV2_5TH_J_CLKDRV2_5TH_J_CLK+
DRV2_5TH_J_M2S+
DRV2_5TH_J_M2SDRV2_6TH_J_M2SDRV2_6TH_J_M2S+
DRV2_5TH_J_S2MDRV2_5TH_J_S2M+
DRV2_6TH_J_S2M+
DRV2_6TH_J_S2MJ431 DRV3_7TH_J_S2MDRV3_7TH_J_S2M+
DRV3_8TH_J_S2M+
DRV3_8TH_J_S2MJ432 DRV3_7TH_J_CLKDRV3_7TH_J_CLK+
DRV3_7TH_J_M2S+
DRV3_7TH_J_M2SDRV3_8TH_J_M2SDRV3_8TH_J_M2S+
DUP_DRAWER
_CNCT_DTCX
J441 PVD_K0
PVD_K1
PVD_K2
PVD_K3
PVD_K4
PVD_K5
PVD_K6
PVD_K7
PHSYNC_K
PVCLK_K
PBD_K
PVREQ_K
Signal Name
Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Clock Signal 5 (Differential -)
Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Clock Signal 5 (Differential +)
Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 5 (Differential +)
Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 5 (Differential -)
Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 6 (Differential -)
Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 6 (Differential +)
Pickup Driver High Speed Serial Communication Reception Signal 5
(Differential -)
(Differential +)
(Differential +)
(Differential -)
Duplex Driver High Speed Serial Communication Reception Signal 7
(Differential -)
(Differential +)
(Differential +)
(Differential -)
Duplex Driver High Speed Serial Clock Signal 7 (Differential -)
Duplex Driver High Speed Serial Clock Signal 7 (Differential +)
Duplex Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 7 (Differential +)
Duplex Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 7 (Differential -)
Duplex Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 8 (Differential -)
Duplex Driver High Speed Serial Transmission Signal 8 (Differential +)
Fixing Feed Drawer Connection Detection Signal
Printer Video Data Signal 0
Printer Horizontal Synchronization Signal
Printer Video Transmission Clock
Printer BD Signal
Printer Image Request Signal
IX
X
No.
Name
J442 DDI_PPRTST
DDI_PPOWER
DDI_PRTS
DDI_RXD
DDI_PCTS
DDI_TXD
DDI_PSCNST
DDI_PPRDY
DDI_DCON_LIVE
DDI_PPO1
DDI_INT_DCON
DDI_PCPRDY
DDI_PPI2
DDI_PLIVEWAKE
DDI_DOWNLOAD
J451 RMT_TEIHANX
DTC_24VA_ILX
DTC_24VB_ILX
DTC_12V_LZX
DCP_FAN_FULLX
DCP_FAN_ERR
RELAY_IF
_CNCT_DTC
J461 CHOUHI_CLK
DECK_CLK
CHOUHI_TXEND
CHOUHI_TXD
CHOUHI_RXLOAD
CHOUHI_RXD
CHOUHI_TXOUTEN
J462 FIN_RMTX
IPC_RXD
IPC_TXD
FIN_MODE
FIN_RESET
FIN_DOWNLOAD
J471 K_LDG_P
K_LDG_N
K_LDH_P
K_LDH_N
K_LDF_P
K_LDF_N
K_LDE_P
K_LDE_N
Signal Name
Printer Start Signal
Printer Power Supply Control Signal
Controller Receivable Signal
Printer Serial Command Signal (Main ControllerDC Controller)
Printer Receivable Signal
Printer Serial Status Signal (DC ControllerMain Controller)
Scan Start Signal
Printer Power Ready Signal
Printer Operation Signal
Printer Universal Output Signal
Printer Interruption Signal
Controller Power Ready Signal
Printer Reset Signal
Printer Live Wake Mode Signal
Printer Download Mode Signal
Duplex Driver Power Supply Remote
24VA Interlock Detection Signal
24VB Interlock Detection Signal
12V Interlock Detection Signal
Power Supply Fan Full Speed Signal
Power Supply Fan Error Detection Signal
Relay Board Connection Detection Signal
Clock (Option Deck Communication IF)
Option Deck Pickup Motor Clock
Transmission is complete (Option Deck Communication IF)
Reception Request Signal (Option Deck Communication IF)
Reception is complete (Option Deck Communication IF)
Reception Signal (Option Deck Communication IF)
Output Enable (Option Deck Communication IF)
Finisher Remote Signal
Finisher Communication Reception Signal
Finisher Communication Transmission Signal
Finisher Mode Signal
Finisher Reset Signal
Finisher Download Signal
LDG Data (Differential +)
LDG Data (Differential -)
LDH Data (Differential +)
LDH Data (Differential -)
LDF Data (Differential +)
LDF Data (Differential -)
LDE Data (Differential +)
LDE Data (Differential -)

No.
Name
J471 K_5V_MON
K_SDCLK
K_WENN
K_WCLK
K_SD_DATA_E
K_SD_DATA_F
K_SD_DATA_H
K_SD_DATA_G
K_AKM_SCLK
K_DIO
K_AKM1_IC_SELN
K_INT_APC
K_APC_SEL
K_CTL0
K_CTL1
K_CTL2
K_CTL3
K_GAIN_FIX
K_AKM2_IC_SELN
K_SD_DATA_A
K_SD_DATA_B
K_SD_DATA_C
K_SD_DATA_D
K_LDD_N
K_LDD_P
K_LDC_N
K_LDC_P
K_LDA_N
K_LDA_P
K_LDB_N
K_LDB_P
J472 K_E2PROM_CS
K_AKM_2_CSN
K_AKM_1_CSN
K_PO_DEC
K_PO_ACC
K_PO_FG
S/S
K_SYS_OE
K_BD
Signal Name
5V Monitor Signal
Shading Clock
Serial Interface Right Enable Signal
Shading IO Clock
Shading Data(E)
Shading Data(F)
Shading Data(H)
Shading Data(G)
AKM Clock
Data Input/Output
APC Control Chip Selection 1
Initial APC Signal
APC Selection Signal
Laser Operation Control Signal 0
Gain Fixed Signal
APC Control Chip Selection 2
Shading Data (A)
Shading Data (B)
Shading Data (C)
Shading Data (D)
LDD Data (Differential -)
LDD Data (Differential +)
LDC Data (Differential -)
LDC Data (Differential +)
LDA Data (Differential -)
LDA Data (Differential +)
LDB Data (Differential -)
LDB Data (Differential +)
EEPROM Chip Selection
AKM2 Chip Selection
AKM1 Chip Selection
Polygon Motor Deceleration Signal
Polygon Motor Acceleration Signal
Polygon Motor Rotation Signal (FG Signal)
Start/Stop Signal
System Output Enable Signal
BD Signal
XI
No.
Name
J463 -CLK
+CLK
+TX
-TX
+RX
-RX
Signal Name
Clock Signal (-CLK)
Clock Signal (+CLK)
Transmission Signal (+TX)
Transmission Signal (-TX)
Reception Signal (+RX)
Reception Signal (-RX)
T-10-3
XI
XII
120V
100V(HIGH)
100V(LOW)
200V
Fixing Power Supply

PCB
P01
RMT_SW_VCC
RMT_SW
3.3R
3.3R_SW
MT7
J500
N.C.
SOLD7
H(B)
FT47
J3637D
J3637DH
J3637L
J3639F
J2
PCB25
Choke Coil PCB
J1
2
Noise Filter(200V)
J620
PCB6
13 12 11 10 9
AC_N(W)
J607
AC_H(B)
N.C.
AC_H(B)
AC_H(B)
AC_N(W)
AC_H(B)
AC_N(W)
AC_N(W)
J602
J602X
200V
AC_H(B)
J802
AC_N(W)
AC_H(B)
AC_H(B)
AC_N(W)
AC_N(W)
AC_H(B)
200V
J601X
FT12
J810
1
J3801
3.3
SHUT RL ON_(Y)
GND
3
1
PCB18
J802X
J3639X
J3639M
GND
SOLD6
SOLD5
1
U
R
CB1004
W
T
Leakage BreakerFT46
FT44
N(W)
H(B)
N(W)
U
CB1003
W
T
FT10
Noise Filter(100V)
J803
J3012M
FT13
F-7
To P.23
FT11
1
J507F
12V
N(W)
FT15
FT09
SW04
Environment Switch
1
PCB17
Leakage Breaker FT43
FT42
H(B)
N(W)
1
U
CB1002
Leakage Breaker
FT04
W
T
2
2
SW01
J3800
H(B)
3
Power ON Switch
SW03
J801
FT41
H(B)
N(W)
FT29
CB1001
Leakage Breaker
FT14
1
2
3
GND
MT01
1
2
3
J523
1
PCB10
PCB5
Relay PCB
AC_N(W)
AC_H(B)
10
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (1/23)
General Circuit Diagram (1/23)
J601
J611
AC Driver PCB(100V)
PCB7
AC_H(B)
J9020
1
J101A
PCB29
DC Power Supply PCB

(12V)
10
J102A
PCB30
DC Power Supply PCB

(24V)
J102B
PCB31
DC Power Supply PCB

(24V)
PCB33
All-night Power Supply

PCB
POD Deck Lite-A1

Paper Deck Unit-C1
J3119F
J613
3
J9019M
J9019F
J614
1
J3174D
1
J3174DH
9 10 11 12 13
J3176M
J3176F
J3174L
J681
AC_N(W)
AC_H(B)
2
AC_N(W)
AC_N(W)
AC_H(B)
100V
N.C.
(V)
(V)
200V
J3173F
AC_N(W)
100V
AC_N(W)
AC_H(B)
AC_N(W)
AC_H(B)
AC_N(W)
AC_H(B)
AC_N(W)
AC_H(B)
AC_N(W)
200V
J3173M
J615
3
TEST +12V
J3115F
C-10
E-8
To P.3
To P.12
J220M
J220F
N.C.
FIN_GND
TEST_+12V
CST_H_SERIAL_DTC
CRNT_SNS_SERIAL_DTC
CRNT_SNS_REF_ANALOG
GND_1
GND
J610
GND_2
TEST_+3_3V
J608
CRNT_SNS_DTC_ANALOG
CST_H_ON
J604
1
DRUM_H_LATCH_ON
DRUM_H_LATCH_OFF
N.C.
AC_H(B)
AC_N(W)
AC_N(W)
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
AC Driver PCB(200V)
J603
N.C.
N.C.
J606
N.C.
J605
AC_H(B)
General Circuit Diagram
J127
J3638D
F-1
H02
D-5
B-5
To P.8
To P.3
To P.9
P.1
F-10-4
XII
XIII
FM14
FM15
DC Power Supply PCB

(12V)
J692
J691
1
J693
3
DC Power Supply PCB

(24V)
J201X
3
DC Power Supply PCB

(24V)
123
10
123
CT
J202B
J202A
PCB31
PCB30
PCB29
PCB33
10
J2134DH
10
CT
J2154DH
J2134D
J2154D
J3224L
J510
J511
10
J512
10
J513
GND
N.C
PS FAN2 ERR
J3224D
3.3VB
GND
PS FAN1 ERR
3.3VB
1
GND
GND
GND
GND
24V
24V
24V
24V
GND
24V-RMT
GND
GND
GND
GND
24V
24V
24V
24V
GND
GND
24V-RMT
GND
GND
GND
12VB
GND
12VB
GND
12VB
3VB
12VB
3VB
GND
3VB
12V_RMT
J3224LH
J509
PCB5
Relay PCB
J519
3
J501
J508
J503
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
J504
1
POW_FAN_FULL_ON
POW_FAN_ERR
GND
QUICK
SHUTOFF_SW
GND
GND
12V
12V
GND
3.3VA
24VA IL SS 1
GND
GND
GND
24VB IL SS 1
12V OCD SW 3
GND
24VB OCD SW 3
GND
GND
12V OCD SW 2
24VA IL OCD 2
GND
24VB OCD SW 2
GND
24VA IL OCD 1
GND
12V OCD SW 2
GND
24VB OCD SW 2
GND
12V
J517
3
GND
12V
RMT_DCON
R_PW_MONI
RMT_RCON
RMT_CONT
GND
J516
3
GND
RMT_SYS
N.C
GND
12V
SEESAW
N.C.
N.C.
J515
J522
12VLOOPBACK
J3225M
J3225X
J3225F
Flat Panel
Type
1
1
J3099F
PCB51
To P.5
J2024
J101
J3002
F-6
Feed Driver PCB
Main Driver PCB
To P.16
J776F
J776M
J1
J709
PCB3
J201
PCB2
J18
J21
7
USB Device
Port-A1
ECO_DOUT
ECO_DIN
GND
ECO_SCK
ECO_CS
J108
GND
J5
C-4
Uplighe Panel
Type
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J4
3.3VA
(J1)
CPU PCB
A
Control Panel
J1
HDD_1
10
SOFT-ID
4
P.2
F-10-5
XIII
XIV
10
PCB5
Relay PCB
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J401
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
GND
24VB IL
GND
24VB IL
GND
24VA IL
CONNECT_LOOPBACK
GND
N.C
N.C
N.C
J520
N.C
GND
RMT_TEIHAN
RMT_RESERVE
GND
GND
24VB
24VA_IL_DTC
GND
CONNECT_DTC
12V
24VB_IL_DTC
12LZ_DTC
GND
N.C
24VA
PS_FAN_FULL_ON_DCON
GND
PS_FAN_ERR_DCON
GND
J502
N.C
N.C
GND
GND
GND
24VA
12VB
F
J514
J518
J505
24V
24V
J451
PCB1
DC Controller PCB
J462
9 10 11 12 13
J3241LH
9 10 11 12
J3130LH
J3241L
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
J3123D
J3130L
J3237F
J3237M
J3123LH
A7
B8
N.C.
MT23
J9040B
B8
A7
24V
GND
MT23
J9043B
J3218F
J9040
C-10
Deck Lattice
Finisher Lattice
J3102M
J3638L
J9043A
J9043
J3102F
J9040B_BUS[0:8]
J9043B_BUS[0:8]
J9043A_BUS[0:7]
MT26
To P.1
J3638LH
A-3
FIN_GND
TEST_+12V
TEST_+3_3V
10
J3123L
J3130D
J3238M
GND
J3118F
12 11 10 9
GND
CHOUHI_TXOUTEN
GND
FINE_DOWNLOAD
FINE_RESET
FINE_MODE
GND
GND
GND
IPC_TXD
IPC_RXD
GND
FIN_RMT
GND
J3238F
CHOUHI_CLK
DECK_CLK
CHOUHI_TXEND
CHOUHI_TXD
CHOUHI_RXLOAD
CHOUHI_RXD
J3241D
J461
N.C.
N.C.
24V
J2151
J2152
1
A-8
To P.11
To P.9
A-9
To P.9
P.3
F-10-6
XIV
8
9
GND
J3017D
J3017DH
8
5
6
9
RESERVE_IN_4
J3002DA_BUS[0:12]
3
4
5
6
7
8
J413
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5
GND
B1
A2
B2
J441
A3
B3
A4
B4
GND
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8
A9
B9
B10
J432
10 11
1
9
8
GND
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
J491
8
J2087
6
5
4
2
1
PCB51

(J22)
J712
A10
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
A10
J442
PCB1
DC Controller PCB
J493
4
J3002DA
J3002DB
PCB3
GND
PPRTSU
PPOWER
GND
PRTS
RXD(PCMD)
GND
PCTS
TXD(STS)
GND
PSCNST
PPRDY
PPO2
PPO1
PPO0
GND
GND
PCPRDY
B10
PPI2(DDIP_RST)
B9
GND
A9
PLIVEWAKE
B8
PDOWNLOAD
A8
GND
B7
PVCLK_K
A7
GND
B6
GND
A6
GND
B5
PHSYNC_K
A5
PV_00/02
B4
PV_01/03
A4
PV_04/06
B3
GND
A3
PV_05/07
B2
PV_08/10
A2
PV_09/11
B1
PV_12/14
A1
PV_13/15
GND
PVREQ_K
PBD_K
DRV1_ANALOG_IF_CNCT_DTC
GND
RESERVE_OUT_2
RESERVE_OUT_1
RESERVE_IN_2
RESERVE_IN_1
GND
IH_I_LIMIT
GND
IH_PWM_0
IH_PWM_1
IH_PWM_2
GND
DCON_FUNC_0
DCON_FUNC_1
DCON_FUNC_2
DCON_FUNC_3
GND
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
BOOT
D
3
(J21)
J711
N.C.
9
2
ANALOG_RESERVE
PCB2
Main Driver PCB
N.C.
PACTH_VOP
J124
RXD
TXD
EPC_SNS_ANALOG
+3_3_CPU
3RD
GND
J412
DOWNROAD_PC
DRV1_ANALOG_IF_CNCT
GND
GND
M2S-
GND
M2S+
3RD
3RD
DUP_DRAWER_CNCT_DTC
GND
GND
CLK+
M2S+
CLK-
M2S-
GND
M2S-
J431
2
8TH
GND
S2M+
2ND
1ST
M2S+
CLK-
10 11 12
CLK+
S2M-
GND
S2M-
S2M+
GND
2ND
1ST
1ST
7TH
7TH
DUP_DRAWER_CNCT
GND
RESERVE_OUT_4
RESERVE_OUT_3
7
5
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
4
GND
RESERVE_IN_3
10 11 12 13 14 15
2
2
S2M-
J421
S2M+
J411
S2M+
E
8
B
9
4
2
1
GND
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
S2M+
GND
9
8TH
M2S+
S2M-
M2S-
5
3
7TH
GND
S2M-
M2S-
6
4
GND
M2S+
7
5
GND
GND
8
6
S2M-
CLK+
10
11
S2M+
CLK-
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
9
7
8
8
J125
7
9
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
RESERVE
C
9
6
7
GND
J126
15 14 13 12 11 10
4
6
6TH
S2M+
J414
S2M-
3
4
M2S+
5TH
M2S-
GND
GND
6TH
M2S-
+5v
A1
+3_3V
GND
GND
J128
10
10
11
A
2
M2S+
10
12
CLK+
CLK1
5TH
5TH
XV
J2102
J3017L
J3002DB_BUS[0:11]
J3002D
A12 B11
To P.16
F-5
J204
1
Feed Driver PCB
P.4
F-10-7
XV
XVI
10
PCB2
Main Driver PCB
J3098D
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
1
PRIM_HV_24V_RDY
+5V
PRIM_HV_PCB_RMT_ONX
PRIM/GRID_HV_ONX
GND
PRIM_HV_CNT_DA
PRIM_HV_CNCTX
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
GND
+5V
GND
POST_HV_24V_RDY
POST_HV_PCB_RMT_ONX
POST_HV_DC_ONX
DEV_HV_DC_ONX
DEV_HV_AC_ONX
DEV_HV_AC_CNT_DA
DEV_HV_DC_CNT_DA
DEV_HV_AC_CLK_A
DEV_SLOPE_CNT_DA
GND
POLLER_BIAS_OFFX
DEV_HV_PCB_CNCTX
J3098LH
J111
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
POST_HV_DC_CNT_DA
POST_HV_AC_ONX
POST_HV_CLK_25K
POST_HV_AC_CLK_A
GND
POST_HV_AC_CLK_B
+5V
POST_HV_PCB_CNCTX
GND
DEV_HV_24V_RDY
DEV_HV_PCB_RMT_ONX
GRID_HV_CNT_DA
J112
J3098L
13 12 11 10 9
J3221M
J3221F
1
1
2
2
24V
GND
GND
J3545
J3222F
2
2
3
3
4
4
PCB11

FT18
PIN3
MT03
J3502
MT8
J3217M
J3005M
J3005F
J3217F
J3004M
J3004F
B-6
J3099M
J3003M
J3003F
1
1
2
2
J3214M
J3214F
To P.3
FT1
MT10
J3547
MT6
J3222M
J3097LH
J3501
J3500
24V
24V
J3548
MT5
PIN2
J3510
J3513
PIN1
PCB26
GND
PCB12
J3512
J3544
J3511
13 12 11 10 9
J3097D
J3097L
MT02
J3129M
2
J3129F
FT22
FT34
10
FT23
FT21

J9001
FT2
UN75
END51
END50
END60
P.5
F-10-8
XVI
XVII
10
PCB2
J3088D
5V
POST_SHUT_OPEN_SNS
GND
5V
ENV_HUM_ANALOG
GND
ENV_THM_ANALOG
5V
MLT_DOOR_OPEN_SNS
GND
POST_WIRE_CLN_M_DIR2
POST_WIRE_CLN_M_DIR1
24V
DEV_TNR_CNCT
DEV_TNR_DTC
GND
DEV_TNR_ANALOG
24V
GND
EPC_DTC_ANALOG
+24V
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J3088LH
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
5V
EPC_RMT_ON
GND
+3.3V
GND
EROM_DM
EROM_CLK
EROM_DOUT
EROM_DIN
PRIM_SHUT_HP_SNS
Main Driver PCB
J114
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
J3088L
J3089D
J3055D
J3055DH
J3055L
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
J3089DH
J3089L
END10
END9
J2025
J2029
PCB54
Drum ROM PCB
J3168D
1
1
J3168LH
J3168L
PS94
Primary Charging
Shutter Sensor
J3047D
J3047DH
J2133D
6
J2026
J2133DH
J2133L
J3252D
J3108D
PCB23
Contact A PCB
J3047L
J3252LH
J3252L
6
5
1
2
3
2
Voltage Control PCB
2
1
TS01
J427
MT21
J3169DH
J3169D
J2133
J3108L
J2132
3
3
M7
2
2
J3048
THU01
Wire Cleaning Motor
MT20
10
Contact B PCB
PCB32
BK
2
3
J3169L
J3170LH
J3170D
BK
J3170L
J3172
PCB15
Voltage Sensor
PCB
PCB24
PS03
Environment Sensor
Multi-purpose Cover
Open/Close Sensor
P.6
F-10-9
XVII
XVIII
PCB2
Main Driver PCB
J3063D
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
+5V
POST_HP_SNS
GND
POST_FRONT_STOP
DEV_FAN2_STOP
GND
POST_FRONT_POW
DEV_FAN2_POW
DEV_FAN1_STOP
GND
GND
DEV_FAN_POW
PRIM_FAN_ERR
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J3066LH
J3091LH
J3063L
J3066D
J3091D
GND
24V
24V
N.C
N.C
SUBHOP_UNDER_TNR_CNCT
SUBHOP_UNDER_TNR_DTC
GND
SUBHOP_UNDER_TNR_ANALOG
DEV_BUF_M_CNCTX(YOBI)
DEV_BUF_M_ON(24V)
24V
GND
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J3063LH
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
24V
DEV_BUF_TNR_CNCT
DEV_BUF_TNR_DTC
24V
GND
DEV_BUF_TNR_ANALOG
DEV_BUF_CL_ON
J3091L
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
J3066L
N.C
24V
+5V
BOTTLE_DOOR_OPEN_SNS
GND
GND
GND
BOTTLE_M_PWM
GND
BOTTLE_M_CNCTX
J130
J115
PRIM_FAN_PWM
J117
10
BOTTLE_M_ON
J3090DH
J3080D
J3067DH
J3090D
J3080DH
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J3090L
J3080L
J3067D
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
J3067L
N.C
J3215D
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J2037D
J3106D
J3124D
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J3215DH
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
J3215L
J2037LH
J2037L
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
J3124LH
J3124L
J3106LH
J3106L
J2131D
J2170D
J2171D
J2177D
J2131DH
J2114
J2039DH
J2036DH
J2039D
J2036D
J2034
3
1
2
2
1
2
J2036L
M10
PS54

Sensor
Toner Supply
Motor
3
4
2
5
TS03
CL
1
6
J2035D
J2038D
6
J2035L
M28
CL05
5
2
4
3
3
4
2
5
123
123
123
FM02
Primary Charging Air

Supply Fan
TS02
J2177H
3
3
123
2
2
1
1
PS95
J2038L
Buffer Toner Sensor
FM30
Developer Lower
Cooling Fan
FM31
Developer Upper
Cooling Fan
Pre-transfer
FM32 Charging Shutter Sensor
Assembly Air Supply Fan
Toner Excess Supply

Sensor
Toner Feed Motor
Magnet Roller
Clutch
10
J2038DH
J2039L
J2171H
J2170H
J2035DH
P.7
F-10-10
XVIII
XIX
10
PCB2
Main Driver PCB
J3235D
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
J3272LH
N.C.
J3235L
FRONT_DOOR_DTC
A-3
To P.1
J3235LH
5V
RETURN_FROM_SE
END13
COLLCT_TONER_SW_ON
5V
5V
FIX_LEVER_SNS
GND
5V
EX_DELI_SNS
GND
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
DRUM_H_LATCH_OFF
DRUM_H_LATCH_ON
CST_H_ON
GND_2
CRNT_SNS_DTC_ANALOG
GND_1
CRNT_SNS_REF_ANALOG
CRNT_SNS_SERIAL_DTC
CST_H_SERIAL_DTC
N.C.
5V
GND
VPATH_UPPER_SNS
5V
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
LS_WRITE_SNS
GND
GND
MLT_PAPER_WIDTH
3.3V
5V
MLT_PAPER_SNS
GND
GND
J110
12V_TO_DR
J103
J106
N.C
MLT_RELEASE_SL_VCC
J3272D
J3272L
J3121D
MT04
J3121DH
J3167D
5
J3167DH
9 10 11 12 13 14
J3167L
OR
BR
BR
J3121L
OR
14 13 12 11 10 9
J3251D
2
J3050D
J3050LH
J3251LH
J3050L
MT05
J3253F
1
1
1
3
J2001L
J2136D
MT3
MT1
SL02
Multi-purpose
Pickup Solenoid
10
3
3
SL
UN13
PS23
Multi-purpose Tray
Paper Sensor
Multi-purpose
Tray Paper
Width Sensor
J2005
J2053
J2003
2
2
PS28
2
2
3
3
2
2
3
3
2
2
1
1
1
P
PS24
MT13

Multi-purpose Tray
Paper Last paper Sensor
J2140D
J3101L
J3122L
J2002
OR
PS36
PS96
Outer Delivery
Sensor
Fixed Feed Lever

Sensor
SW05
Waste Toner Lock
Detection Switch
SOLD4
1
1
SOLD3
J3101D
J3122D
J2001D
SOLD2
MT2
J3253M
MT14
J2001DH
MT4
J3101DH
J3122DH
OR
J3251L
SOLD1
FT30
FT31
SW06
SW02
Multi Door Switch
FT02
FT01
Front Door Open

Detection Switch
P.8
F-10-11
XIX
XX
10
PCB2
Main Driver PCB
F
J127
J109
POST_REAR_FAN_ERR
A-2
GND
PRIM_OZON_FAN_ERR
POST_REAR_FAN_POWER
GND
PRIM_OZON_FAN_PWM
24V
REAR_COOL_FAN_ERR
GND
REAR_COOL_FAN_PWM
24V
DEV_SLV_CL_ON
DEV_SLV_CL_CNCTX
GND
5V
DEV_DRV_M_ON
DEV_DRV_M_ERR
DEV_DRV_M_CCW
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
DEV_DRV_M_GAIN
DEV_DRV_M_CLK
GND
5V
DRUM_M_ON
DRUM_M_ERR
DRUM_M_CCW
DRUM_M_GAIN
DRUM_M_CLK
To P.1
C
J2006DH
J2006D
2
J2006L
J2007LH
J2139
J2138
8
M01
J2151
10
Drum Motor
J2008D
4
J2004D
J2007D
J2004DH
3
J2008LH
M02
Developing Motor
J2152
1 2
1 2
A-1
A-2
To P.3
To P.3
J2007L
123
123
123
CL
CL01
Developing Clutch
FM16
Laser Scanner
Cooling Fan
FM17
Primary Charging
Exhaust Fan
FM33
Exhaust Fan
P.9
F-10-12
XX
10
9
8
7
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
F-2
J101
6
5
4
2
1
2
1
To P.1
2
J104
1
8
7
6
5
4
J9005L
4
5
8
7
6
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13
4
3
12V_TH
12V_TH
GND
I_LIMIT
GND
12V
5V
GND
IH_FAN_ERR
GND
5
4
J2130DH
4
3
2
Main Driver PCB
PCB2
J119
9 10 11 12 13
J3111L
A
12V
12V
13 12 11 10 9
GND
GND
I_LIM
J3111LH
N.C.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
J3111D
3
5V
GND
IH_FAN_PWM
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
IH_FAN_ERR
J118
24V
N.C.
IH_HIGH_UNIT_DTCX
IH_ON
GND
IH_PID0_LOW_SPEED(E233)
IH_PID1_LOW_SPEED(E233)
GND
IH_CURRENT_ANALOG_TO_AD
IH_VOLTAGE_ANALOG_TO_AD
GND
GND
GND
FROM_DCON_IH_PWM0
FROM_DCON_IH_PWM1
FROM_DCON_IH_PWM2
GND
IH_VIN_CMP
IH_FAN_PWM
N.C.
24V
INV_ON
GND
PID0
PID1
GND
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
IH_CRNT_DTC
V_MONI_AC
GND
ZC_IN
GND
PWM0_OUT
GND
PWM1_OUT
J3172L
J3172LH
1
IH_12V_MONI
PWM2_OUT
J3172D
IH_RELAY1_ON
VIN_CMP
E
IH_RELAY2_ON
GND
D
END18
10
V_MONITOR
XXI
J103
PCB10
J107
1
J2130D
123
J9005D
FM7
A
IH Coil
1
P.10
F-10-13
XXI
J3231F
1
2
3
1
2
3
GND
1
2
3
J3001DB_BUS[0:20]
J3218M
4
5
8
1
Option
B
J2200D
J3200DWH
J3200DB
J3200DA
3
J9058L
M13
J652
3
2
1
1
2
3
123
10 9
J2009
10 11
J650
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
4
5
6
5
Delivery Motor
J2200DH
J2201DH
4
5
6
3
2
1
J2200L
2
3
FM10
FM11
Front
Rear
M
8
9 10 11
J9058DH
J9058D
J2201D
J2201L
123
J2202DH
1
2
3
3
2
1
1
2
3
3
4
GND
24V
GND
J122
5V
N.C
GND
STRAY_FULL_ON
STRAY_CWX
STRAY_CCWX
STRAY_P_FULL
J102
STRAY_PAPER_SNS
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
STRAY_HP_L_SNS
J105
STRAY_HP_R_SNS
STRAY_CNCT
GND
N.C.
MTR_B*
END20
END19
FIX_CNCT2
+5S
FIX_CLAW_JAM_SNS
MTR_B
+5S
GND
FIX_EXT_SNS
GND
GND
+5V
FIX_M_ON
FIX_M_ERR
10
11
12
13
FIX_M_CCW
FIX_M_GAIN
FIX_M_CLK
WEB_SL_ON
WEB_SL_CNCTX
14
15
16
17
A20 B20
+5S
FIX_ENT_SNS
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
GND
+5V
N.C.
MTR_A*
MTR_A
MTR_B*_OUT_B1*
MTR_B_OUT_B1
MTR_A*_OUT_A2*
MTR_A_OUT_A1
+5S
FIX_SHUT_HP_SNS
GND
+5S
WEB_LESS_SNS
J104
18
F-5
19
J3001DA_BUS[0:20]
20
FT25
3
3
5
4
6
10
11
8
12
A
13
MT06
GND
SUB_R_THM_ANALOG_TO_OVER
THM_CNCT_DTCX
GND
SHUT_THM_ANALOG_TO_OVER
14
C
3
GND
MAIN_THM_ANALOG_TO_OVER
+5V
15
9
GND
SUB_L_THM_ANALOG_TO_OVER
16
10
2
17
A-2
(V)
END3
END4
END5
J3231M
12V_IH_POWER
J129
18
To P.3
9
END1
END2
D
(OR)
E
12V IH LATCH
10
19
20
2
1
Main Driver PCB
PCB2
F
J123
2
3
4
J651
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
J9059M
Shift Tray
D
J9059F
FAN_DRV
7
J2202L
J32001D
XXII
J653
J2202D
123
Center
FM12
Exhaust Fan
To P.20
P.11
F-10-14
XXII
XXIII
10
PCB2
Main Driver PCB
J107
1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
To P.1
A-5
3
J3116M
12 11 10 9
DRM_HP_SNS
5V
GND
PRE_LED_ON
24V
PATCH_SHUT_SL_ON
24V
GND
PATCH_Vref
PATCH_OUT
5V
J3116F
5V(DKIT_CNCT_DTC)
DKIT_CNST_DTCX
PRIM_WIRE_CLN_M_ON2
PRIM_WIRE_CLN_M_ON1
J3115M
J3177D
J3177L
9 10 11 12
J4120M
J4120F
N.C
N.C
N.C
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J4060D
J4141D
J4141DH
J4141L
J4060L
N.C
DKIT_CNCT
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
N.C
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
N.C
N.C
J3177LH
N.C
J4107D
PCB19
Primary Charging
Contact A PCB
PCB20
Primary Charging
Contact B PCB
FT16
PCB27
PCB28
LED03
LE1
10
J153
J4107L
2
1
FT17
J2137
3
M06

Cleaning Motor
PS61
Drum Home Position

Sensor
P.12
F-10-15
XXIII
XXIV
10
PCB3
Feed Driver PCB
E
5V
VPATH_LOW_PAPER_SNS
GND
5V
C4_LIFT_SNS
GND
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5V
GND
5V
C4_PAPER_SNS
C4_PAPER_LIMIT_SNS
GND
5V
GND
C4_PICKUP_SL_VCC
END22
5V
R_LOW_DOOR_OPEN_SNS
GND
GND
5V
MID_UP
VPATH_LOW_PAPER_SNS
5V
GND
5V
C3_LIFT_SNS
GND
J224
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
5V
GND
C3_PAPER_SNS
GND
5V
5V
C3_PAPER_LIMIT_SNS
C3_RETRY_SNS
GND
GND
C4_RETRY_SNS
J223
GND
C3_PICKUP_SL_VCC
N.C.
J3635D
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J3636D
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J3128D
J3636LH
J3635LH
J3635L
J3636L
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
N.C.
J3128LH
J3128L
J2075DH
J2073DH
J2075D
J2073D
J2078
J2073L
3
3
S
2
2
1
1
SL
SL03
3
3
2
2
1
1
3
3
2
2
1
1
2
3
1
2
2
2
B
J2075L
PS68
PS13
Cassette 3
Cassette 3
Cassette 3
Pickup Sensor 1 Upper Limit Sensor Paper Sensor
J2089
3
2
2
PS17
J2054
PS26
Cassette 3
Vertical Path
Paper Height Sensor
Sensor 3
3
S
2
2
1
1
J2066
3
3
2
2
PS22
SL
SL04
PS25
Cassette 3 Pickup
Solenoid
10
J2081D
J2080D
J2079D
PS21
J2055
PS02
Cassette 4
Pickup Solenoid
1
1
J2090
J2056
3
2
3
1
2
2
2
J2091
2
2
1
1
J2092
3
3
2
2
1
1
PS71
Cassette 4
Cassette 4
Pickup Sensor 1 Upper Limit Sensor
PS14
Cassette 4
Paper Sensor
PS18
PS27
Cassette 4
Vertical Path
Paper Height Sensor
Sensor 4
Vertical Path Vertical Path Cover

Sensor 2
Open/Close Sensor
P.13
F-10-16
XXIV
XXV
PS07
PS19
PS47
PS32
SL
1
2
2
J2060
J2070L
J2070DH
3
3
2
2
2
2
1
1
J2062
J2061
PS50
SL
1
J2148
J2063
Right Deck
Paper Level Sensor 2
PS33
Left Deck
PS11
M05
PS20
PS49
Left Deck
Left Deck
Left Deck
PS12
PS10
Left Deck Paper Level Sensor 2 Left Deck
Pull Out Sensor
Paper
Sensor
Lifter
Motor
Pickup
Sensor
1
Left
Deck
Left
Deck
SL07
Paper Height Sensor
Left Deck
Paper Height Sensor
M
3 2 1
3 2 1
Pickup Solenoid S P
PS48
Right Deck
Right Deck
Right Deck
Right Deck
PS08
PS06
SL06
Right Deck Pickup Sensor 1 Right Deck Paper Sensor Right Deck Pull Out Sensor
Upper Limit Sensor
Paper Height Sensor
Pickup Solenoid
10
J2149
J2042
J2064
J2044
J2043
J2045
J2048
J2049
J2051
J2046
J2070D
J2052L
J2052DH
J2052D
J3633LH
J3028D
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J3634L
J3634DH
J3634D
J3132D
GND
L_DECK_LIFT_M_VCC
5V
L_DECK_PAPER_LEVEL_LOW
L_DECK_PAPER_LEVEL_UP
GND
GND
5V
5V
L_DECK_PULL
GND
5V
L_DECK_LIFT_SNS
GND
5V
L_DECK_PAPER
GND
5V
L_DECK_PAPER_LIMIT
GND
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
GND
N.C.
J3633D
5V
5V
R_DECK_PULL
GND
5V
R_DECK_LIFT_SNS
GND
5V
R_DECK_PAPER
GND
5V
GND
5V
R_DECK_RETRY
GND
GND
R_DECK_SL_VCC
R_DECK_PAPER_LIMIT
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J3132L
J3132LH
N.C.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
L_DECK_RETRY
GND
5V
GND
R_DECK_PAPER_LEVEL_LOW
L_DECK_SL_VCC
GND
5V
MT36
MT35
R_DECK_PAPER_LEVEL_UP
J3633L
J3028L
J3028LH
N.C.
N.C.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
J221
J222
PCB3
Feed Driver PCB

3
C
3
GND
3_3V
5V
GND
12V
MTR_B*
MTR_B
MTR_A*
MTR_A
MTR_B*
J218
J215
J214
MTR_B
J213
MTR_A*
MTR_A
MTR_B*
MTR_B*
MTR_B
MTR_B
MTR_A*
MTR_A*
MTR_B*
MTR_A
MTR_B
MTR_B*
MTR_A*
MTR_B
MTR_B*
MTR_A*
MTR_A
MTR_B
MTR_B*
MTR_A*
MTR_B
MTR_A
MTR_A*
MTR_A
J212
MTR_A
J211
MTR_A
B
MTR_B*
MTR_B
MTR_A*
MTR_A
MTR_B*
MTR_B
J9033
PCB8
MTR_B*
MTR_B
MTR_A*
MTR_A
MTR_A*
MTR_A
DC-DC Converter PCB
J2146
J2071
M11
Right Deck
Pickup Motor
10
J2050
10 11
Left Deck
Pickup Motor
M24
10 11
M33
6
2
7
3
10 11
M26
M31
Vertical Path
Upper Motor
5
1
Multi-purposeTray
Registration Front Motor
Vertical Path
Middle Motor
J2077
J2097
J2076
J2147
3
M12
Cassette3.4
Pickup Motor
10 11
5
1
6
2
7
3
10 11
M27
Vertical Path
Lower Motor
P.14
F-10-17
XXV
XXVI
10
PCB3
Feed Driver PCB
J226
END25
1
9 10 11 12 13
END27
J3008D
5V
N.C.
C4_PAPER_LEVEL_UP
5V
GND
GND
C4_PAPER_LEVEL_LOW
GND
C4_WIDTH_BIT0
C4_WIDTH_BIT1
C4_WIDTH_BIT2
5V
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
C4_WIDTH_BIT3
5V
GND
C3_PAPER_LEVEL_UP
GND
C3_PAPER_LEVEL_LOW
GND
J227
4
C3_WIDTH_BIT0
123
FM40
J3031D
11 10 9
J3031LH
J3031L
11 10 9
J3273D
9 10 11
J3033D
9 10 11
J3033LH
J3033L
J3273LH
J3273L
END29
13 12 11 10 9
END24
C3_WIDTH_BIT3
C4_LENGTH_BIT0
GND
C4_LENGTH_BIT1
C4_LENGTH_BIT2
C4_LENGTH_BIT3
C3_LENGTH_BIT0
GND
C3_WIDTH_BIT2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
C3_LENGTH_BIT1
C3_LENGTH_BIT2
C3_LENGTH_BIT3
GND
LOW_EXHAUST_FAN_ERR
GND
C4_LIFT_M_VCC
LOW_EXHAUST_FAN_VCC
GND
C3_LIFT_M_VCC
GND
C3_WIDTH_BIT1
J225
1
R_DECK_LIFT_M_VCC
J3088L
J3088LH
J2069
2
J2072
2
J2088DH
J2074
2
J2085
J2088D
5
J2083
3
M04
M20
M21
Right Deck
Lifter Motor
Cassette 3
Lifter Motor
Cassette 4
Lifter Motor
J2084
J2096
123
FM03
SW9
SW10
Cassette 3
Paper Length
Detection Switch
Cassette 4
Paper Length
Detection Switch
2 1
SW7
Cassette 3
Paper Width
Detection Switch
Making Image
Exhaust Fan
J2095
J2082
3
2
2
PS69
PS70
Cassette 3
J2094
3
J2093
3
3
SW8
PS72
Cassette 4
Paper Width
Detection Switch
Cassette 4
Cassette 3
PS73
Cassette 4
10
P.15
F-10-18
XXVI
B
J310
1
MT11
PCB34
6
7
8
9
10
RESERVE_IN_4
RESERVE_OUT_3
RESERVE_OUT_4
3
2
Transfer High Voltage

Resistance PCB
J3306M
J3306F
MT9
FT20
5
11 10
5
6
GND
8
7
6
7
8
9
10
11
M2SM2S+
GND
GND
DUP_DRAWER_CNCT_DTC
8TH
M2S-
M2S+
7TH
J300
5
4
3
2
J3061
2
1
PCB13
7
6
5
J3002LA
J3002LB
J3002L
E
E
J301
Duplex Driver PCB
PCB4
J311
1
A
J3002LB_BUS[0:11]
J3002LA_BUS[0:12]
24V
GND
A12 B11
GND
CLK+
CLK-
12
RESERVE_IN_3
11
GND
DUP_DRAWER_CNCT
S2M-
GND
S2M+
S2M+
GND
12 11 10
12V
J3233M
S2M-
D
5
GND
J3233F
B-7
5V
To P.4
A-7
3_3V
To P.2
GND
GND
24V
7TH
8TH
7TH
GND
24V
24V
12V
GND
GND
24V
12V
10
GND
GND
10
24V
GND
XXVII
J9034
DC-DC Converter PCB
PCB9
PIN4
MT12
P.16
F-10-19
XXVII
XXVIII
10
PCB4
Duplex Driver PCB
J333
1
J331
J330
J332
3
J342
3
9 10 11
+5V
REGI PAP DTC
GND
MTR_B*
MTR_B
MTR_A*
MTR_A
MTR_B*
MTR_B
MTR_A*
MTR_A
MTR_B*
MTR_B
MTR_A*
MTR_B*
MTR_B
MTR_A
MTR_A*
MTR_A
MTR_B*
MTR_B
MTR_A*
MTR_A
MTR_B*
MTR_B
MTR_A*
N.C.
MTR_A
J3042M
J3042F
J3263D
J3263DH
J3263L
J2145D
J2144D
4
J2144LH
J2107
J2111
J2167
10 11
10 11
J2108
1
J2109
1
2
3
1
2
M43
M19
M14
Reverse Motor
Duplex Feed
Left Motor
M32
Duplex Feed
Merging Motor
M18
Duplex Feed
Right Motor
123
123
PS29
M34
J2116
1
Registration Sensor
ETB Motor
J2145LH
J2098
FM41
Duplex Driver
Cooling Fan
FM42
Registration Motor/
Duplex Motor Cooling Fan
Registration
Motor
10
P.17
F-10-20
XXVIII
XXIX
PCB4
10
Duplex Driver PCB

J343
+5V
TR_24V_RDY
GND
TR_HV_RMT_ONX
TR_P_CV_ONX
TR_RV_CC_ONX
TR_P_CC_ONX
TRN_P_CV_CNT
TR_P_CC_CNT
TRN_RV_CC_CNT
N.C.
TR_I_SNS_AD
TR_V_SNS_AD
GND
TRN_HV_PCB_CNCTX
+5V
DUP_MERGE_PAP_DTC
GND
+5V
DUP_EXT_PAP_DTC
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
GND
LDECK_MERGE_SL_ON1
LDECK_MERGE_SL_DTC
+5V
TRBELT_PLESS_DTC
GND
+5V
TRBELT_PLESS_HP_DTC
GND
J3270DH
J3265D
J3270D
J3265DH
J3265L
J3270L
J3269D
3
J3269DH
J3269L
B
J2106D
J2101
3
3
J2106DH
J2106L
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
2
SL
PS56
ETB Engage
Sensor
10
PS55
SL11
ETB Disengage
Left Deck
Sensor
Merging Solenoid
J2105
J2104
J2100
N.C
PCB13
PS64
PS67
Duplex Outlet
Sensor
Duplex Merging
Sensor
15 14 13 12 11 10 9
J3062
P.18
F-10-21
XXIX
XXX
PCB4
10
Duplex Driver PCB

J340
N.C.
DUP L PAP DTC
E
+5V
GND
DECURL_FAN_ON
GND
DECURL_FAN_ERR_DTC
REV SEP SL ON
REV SEP SL DTC
REV UPFLAP SL ON1
REV UPFLAP SL DTC
5V
REV VPATH PAP DTC
GND
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
5V
INDELI PAP DTC
GND
5V
DUP_SIDEREGI_DTC
GND
MTR_B*
MTR_B
MTR_A*
MTR_A
J3236D
J3242D
J3242LH
J3236LH
J3236L
J2124D
J3243DH
J3243D
J2124DH
J2124L
J2176DH
J2115DH
2
J3243L
4
3
Side Registration
Motor
10
J2125
J2113
3
2
3
1
2
3
1
3
S
M16
PS31
Side Registration
Sensor
J2176D
J2115D
3
J2115L
J3021D
J2121DH
J3020LH
J3020L
J3242L
J2121D
PS35
Inner Delivery
Sensor
1
P
PS65
123
J2117
1
J2118D
J2118DH
123
2
3
SL
FM08
SL05

Solenoid
Reverse Vertical Path
Sensor
Transfer Cleaner
Cooling Fan
FM05
Paper Cooling Fan
J2120
1
2
1
P
PS66
Duplex Left Sensor
P.19
F-10-22
XXX
XXXI
10
To P.11
A-7
MT07
FUSER HNS
FT26
4
J3001LWH
A20 B20
J3001LA
J3001L
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
J3001LB_BUS[0:20]
13
12
11
10
J3001LA_BUS[0:20]
J3095F
J3095M
J3096M
A-4
J3001LB
12V IH LATCH
12V IH LATCH
(V)
(OR)
J2157D
J2156D
J2156DH
J2157DH
1
J2156L
J2157L
J2158D
6
J3006D
J2158DH
J2158L
J3006DH
J3006L
J3007D
J3007DH
J3007L
J3009D
J3009LH
J3092D
J3092LH
J2014D
3
2
TP
1
1
TP01
THM01
Thermal Switch 1
Fixing
Main Thermistor
THM03
Fixing
Sub Thermistor 2
THM02
Fixing
Sub Thermistor 1
2
2
1
1
PS45
PS53
J3094D
J3094DH
J3094L
J3093DH
J3093D
J3093L
J2015D
1
2
J2015DH
J2015L
5
5
J2016
2
2
1
1
PS52
Fixing Motor
1
J2019
3
M03
Fixing Inlet Sensor
Fixing Shutter
Motor
Fixing Cleaning Web

Level Sensor
PS51
M15
Fixing Shutter
Home Position Sensor
J2018
4
J2017
J2014DH
J2011
J3092L
J3009L
J2012
PS04
Fixing Toenail
Jam Sensor
J2016P
SL
SL09
Fixing Cleaning Web

Drive Solenoid
J3096F
E-8
10
P.20
F-10-23
XXXI
N.C.
10
3
2
6
5
2
3
4
4
J2160
PCB 36
BD PCB
9
3
5
6
7
8
9
DEC
2
1
J3011D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
3
4
8
1
7
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
J2159
2
1
J9912
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
33
31
32
34
35
33
34
36
37
35
36
37
38
K_LDB_P
32
K_LDB_N
31
K_LDA_P
30
K_LDA_N
29
K_LDC_P
28
K_LDC_N
27
K_LDD_P
26
K_LDD_N
25
K_5V_MON
24
K_SDCLK
23
K_WENN
22
K_WCLK
K_SD_DATA_D
21
K_SD_DATA_C
20
K_SD_DATA_A
19
K_SD_DATA_B
18
K_AKM_SCLK
17
K_DIO
16
K_AKM1_IC_SELN
15
K_INT_APC
14
K_APC_SEL
13
K_CTL0
12
K_CTL1
11
K_CTL2
K_CTL3
10
K_GAIN_PIX
K_AKM2_IC_SELN
K_SD_DATA_G
K_SD_DATA_H
K_SD_DATA_F
K_SD_DATA_E
N.C
K_LDE_N
K_LDE_P
K_LDF_N
K_LDF_P
K_LDH_N
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
K_LDH_P
J472
K_LDG_N
2
1
PCB1
F
J471
DC Controller PCB
38
39
40
J3018DH
J3018L
Laser Driver PCB
Polygon Motor
M 44
N.C
K_LDG_P
GND
GND
K E2PROM CS
GND
5V
GND
K AKM 2 CSN
GND
K AKM 1 CSN
GND
DEC
ACC
24V
FG
S/S
GND
BD
5V
10
GND
ACC
FG
24V
S/S
J3011L
GND
BD
J3018D
5V
XXXII
J3011LH
39
J2169
40
PCB35
A
P.21
F-10-24
XXXII
XXXIII
Removable HDD 1 (with encryption)
HDD 1 fixed (with encryption)
J12
HDD1
J2
J12
J2
J1
DRV2_FAIL
DRV2_FAIL
N.C.
DRV2_ACT
DRV2_ACT
N.C
J2
LED BOARD
HDD Encryption PCB
PCB51
7
6
5
GND
DRV1_FAIL
DRV1_ACT
J6
5V
GND
LED BOARD
DRV1_FAIL
J2
J3
5V
DRV1_ACT
J2024
J6
PCB51
J3
HDD1
J1
HDD Encryption PCB
J2024
10
D
Removable HDD 1 and 2 (without encryption)
HDD 1 and 2 fixed (without encryption)

J2
J2
HDD1
J3
J12
J1
7
6
5
4
N.C
J2
LED BOARD
DRV2_FAIL
DRV2_ACT
RAID MIRROR BOARD
PCB51
4
3
2
GND
DRV1_FAIL
N.C
5V
DRV1_ACT
DRV2_FAIL
J6
DRV2_ACT
J5
GND
LED BOARD
HDD2
DRV1_FAIL
J2
J4
5V
DRV1_ACT
J5
J6
HDD2
J2024
PCB51
J4
RAID MIRROR BOARD
HDD1
J3
J12
J1
J2024
Removable HDD 1 (without encryption)
PCB51
10
J12
HDD1
J2024
P.22
F-10-25
XXXIII
XXXIV
10
F
To P.1
D-9
J2
Are2
J1
BK
J3140D
2
1
SP1
J3140LH
J3140L
N.C.
R
1
BK
N.C
N.C
T1
T2
CT1
CT2
J751
L1
L2
2_LINE_L1
3_LINE_L1
2_LINE_L2
3_LINE_L2
4_LINE_L1
4_LINE_L2
Are1
N.C.
J4
6
J3012
BL
BL
J7
J2
J3
J6
J8
MONI_USB
GND
#FC_USB_IN
Super G3 2nd Line

Fax Board-AF1
Super G3 3rd/4th Line

Fax Board-AF1
Super G3 FAX Board-AF1
monitor-2
J2
monitor-1
J3141L
J3141DH
J3141D
GND
2
2
J2
+12V
J5
1
J4
1
J403
BK
J1
J19
B
GND
#MODEM_SNS
#INT_FAX
#FCID_USB
+3.3R
#FCID
#RESET_FAX
#FOFFHK
#EXB_CS1
#EXB_WE
#EXB_OE
EXB_DT7
EXB_ADDR8
EXB_DT6
EXB_ADDR7
GND
GND
EXB_ADDR6
EXB_DT5
EXB_DT4
EXB_ADDR5
EXB_DT3
EXB_ADDR4
EXB_DT2
EXB_ADDR3
EXB_DT1
EXB_DT0
EXB_ADDR2
EXB_ADDR1
GND
+12V
GND
GND
+12V
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
GND
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
J2083
J20
PCB51
10
P.23
F-10-26
XXXIV
Appendix > List of User Mode > Device Information Delivery Settings
XXXV
List of User Mode

Registering device information in your machine enables you to set the machine to deliver the same device information to other machines that are connected to the same network. This enables you to
easily manage multiple machines at the same time.
Your machine is capable of both sending and receiving device information, which can be delivered manually and automatically.
parent machine
child machines
child machines
child machines
F-10-27
XXXV
Appendix > List of User Mode > Device Information Delivery Settings
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Paper Settings
XXXVI
Environment Settings
Paper Settings
* Default Settings
Item
Paper Settings
A5R/STMTR Original Selection

B5/EXEC Original Selection
Register Multi-Purpose Tray Defaults

Register Custom Size
Setting Description
Thin, Plain*, Heavy 1, Heavy 2, Heavy 3, Color,
Recycled, Tracing, Transparency, Labels, Bond, Tab,
Pre-punched, Letterhead
A5R, STMTR*
B5, EXEC*
Details/Edit
Name, Category, Basis Weight, Type, Finish, Creep
(Displacement) Correction Adjustment, Color
Duplicate, Delete
On, Off*
Register/Edit, Delete, Register Name
Device Information
DeliveryAvailable
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
T-10-4
XXXVI
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Paper Settings
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Display Settings
XXXVII
Display Settings
* Default Settings
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
*2 If the Duplex Color Image Reader Unit is not attached, the default setting is [On].
Item
Default Screen at Startup
Default Screen (Status Monitor/Cancel)
Copy Screen Display Settings*1

Display Fax Function*1
Store Location Display Settings
Language/Keyboard Switch On/Off

Language/Keyboard Switch
Display Remaining Paper Message
No. of Copies/Job Duration Status
Display Original Scanning Cleaning Area*1
Select Paper Screen Priority
mm/Inch Entry Switch
ID/User Name Display On/Off
Setting Description
Main Menu*, Quick Menu, Copy*1, Scan and Send,
Fax*1, Scan and Store, Access Stored Files, Fax/
I-Fax Inbox, Secured Print, Web Browser, Workflow
Composer, Remote Scanner, Print Server, Scan Lock
Analyzer, Tutorial
Open Status Monitor/Cancel: On, Off*2
Default Status Type: Copy/Print*, Send, Receive,
Store, Consumables
Status/Log: Job Status*, Log
Details: Print Jobs, Send Jobs, Receive Jobs, Copy*1,
Fax*1, Forward, Local Print, Printer, Cascade Copy, RX
Print, Print Report
Regular Copy*, Express Copy
On*, Off
On
Enable Fax in Scan and Send Function: On*, Off
Mail Box: On*, Off
Advanced Box/Network: On*, Off
Memory Media: On, Off*
On, Off*
Language, Keyboard Layout
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
Simple*, Detailed
mm, inch*
On*, Off
Device Information
DeliveryAvailable
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
T-10-5
XXXVII
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Display Settings
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Timer/Energy Settings
XXXVIII
Timer/Energy Settings
* Default Settings
Item
Adjust Time
Date/Time Settings
Time Format
Auto Reset Time
Function After Auto Reset
Auto Sleep Time
Sleep Mode Energy Use
Weekly Timer Settings
Energy Saver/Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings
Change Energy Saver Mode
Silent Mode Time
Setting Description
Device Information Delivery Available
00: 00 to 23: 59, in one minute increments (00: 00*)

Date and Time Setting (12 digit number)
Time Zone: GMT -12: 00 to GMT +12: 00 (GMT -05:00*)
Daylight Saving Time: On, Off*
24 Hour, 12 Hour*
0 (Off), 10 to 50 seconds in 10 seconds increments, 1 to 9 minutes in one minute increments (2minutes*)
Initial Function*, Selected Function
10 secs, 1, 2, 10, 15*, 20, 30, 40, 50 min., 1 hour, 90 min., 2, 3, 4 hours (1 mins*)
Low*, High
Sunday to Saturday, 00: 00 to 23: 59, in one minute increments
00: 00 to 23: 59, in one minute increments
-10*,-25,-50%, None
0 (Off) to 9 minutes, in one minute increments (1 mins*)
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-10-6
XXXVIII
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Timer/Energy Settings
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
XXXIX
Network
If you are configuring the settings for the first time in "Interface Settings," "TCP/IPv4 Settings," "TCP/IPv6 Settings," or "Settings Common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6," use the control panel of the
machine. After configuring the TCP/IP settings, you can change them using the Remote UI.
In the NetWare or AppleTalk network, the TCP/IP protocol must be used to specify the settings with software other than the control panel of the machine. The setting items are shown below.
Some items can be set using the Remote UI. Use the control panel of the device to set items which cannot be set using the Remote UI.
* Default Settings
*2 Indicates items that appear only when the PS Printer Kit is activated.
Item
User Data List
Confirm Network Connection Set. Changes
TCP/IP Settings
IPv4 Settings
Use IPv4
IP Address Settings
PING Command
IPv6 Settings
Use IPv6
Stateless Address Settings
Manual Address Settings
Use DHCPv6
PING Command
Host Name
DNS Settings
DNS Server Address Settings
IPv4
IPv6
DNS Host/Domain Name Settings
IPv4
Setting Description
Can be set in Remote Device Information

UI
Delivery Available
Plint List
On, Off*
Yes
No
No
Yes
On*, Off
IP Address: 0.0.0.0*
Subnet Mask: 0.0.0.0*
Gateway Address: 0.0.0.0*
DHCP: On, Off*
RARP: On, Off*
BOOTP: On, Off*
IP Adress: 0.0.0.0*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
On, Off*
Use Stateless Address: On*, Off
Use Manual Address: On, Off*
Manual Address: IPv6 Address (39characters maximum)
Prefix Length: 0 to 128 (64*)
Default Router Address (39 characters maximum)
On, Off*
IPv6 Address: (39characters maximum)
48 characters maximum
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
Primary DNS Server: IP Address:0.0.0.0*

Secondary DNS Server: IP Address:0.0.0.0*
Primary DNS Server: IPv6 Address
Secondary DNS Server: IPv6 Address
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Host Name: 47 characters maximum

(Canon + represents the last six digits of a MAC address)
Domain Name: 47 characters maximum
XXXIX
Item
IPv6
DNS Dynamic Update Settings

IPv4
IPv6
WINS Settings
WINS Resolution
WINS Server Address
Node Type
Scope ID
LPD Print Settings
LPD Print Settings
LPD Banner Page*1
RAW Print Settings
RAW Print Settings
Bidirectional Communication
SNTP Settings
Use SNTP
Polling Interval
NTP Server Address
Check NTP Server
FTP Print Settings
Use FTP printing
User
Password
WSD Print Settings
Use WSD
Use WSD Browsing
Use Multicast Discovery
Use FTP PASV Mode
Use FTP PASV Mode
IPP Print Settings
IPP Print Settings
Use SSL
Use Authentication
User
Password
Setting Description
XL

UI
Delivery Available
Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4:On, Off*

Host Name: 47 characters maximum
(Canon + represents the last six digits of a MAC address)
Domain Name: 47 characters maximum
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
DNS Dynamic Update: On, Off*

DNS Dynamic Update: On, Off*
Register Stateless Address: On, Off*
Register Manual Address: On, Off*
Register Stateless Address: On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
IP Address: 0.0.0.0*
Auto Set, display only
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
On*, Off
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Interval for performing time synchronization (1 to 48 hours) (24hours*)
IP address or host name
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
User name for FTP server login (24 characters maximum)
Password for FTP server login (24 characters maximum)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
User name for IPP authentication (24 characters maximum)
Password for IPP authentication (24 characters maximum)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
XL
Item
Multicast Discovery Settings
Response
Scope name
Use HTTP
Use Web DAV Server
SSL Settings
Key and Certificate
Set as the Default Key
Certificate Details
Display Use Location
Proxy Settings
Use proxy
Server Address
Port Number
Use Proxy within the Same Domain
Set Authentication
Use Proxy Auth.
User
Password
Confirm Dept. ID PIN
IPSec Settings
Use IPSec
Receive Non-policy Packets
Edit
Delete
Policy On, Off
Register
Policy Name
Register: Selector Settings
IKE Settings
IPSec Network Settings
XLI

UI
Delivery Available
Setting Description
On* Off
Scope name to be used for a multicast discovery
(32 characters maximum) (default*)
On* Off
On, Off*
Settings that use SSL
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Version/Serial Number/Signature Algorithm/Issue Destination/Start Date of Validity/End Date of Validity/Issuer/

Public Key/Cert Thumbprint/Certificate
Displays what the key pair is being used for
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
On, Off*
IP address or FQDN (128 characters maximum)
1 to 65535 (80*)
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
Allow*/Reject
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Local Address:
All IP Addresses*/IPv4 Address/IPv6 Address/IPv4 Manual Settings/IPv6 Manual Settings
Remort Address:
All IP Addresses*, All IPv4Address, All IPv6Address, IPv4Manual Settings, IPv6 Manual Settings
Port: Specify by Port Number*/Specify by Service Name
IKE mode : Main*/Aggressive
Authentication Method : Pre-Shared Key Method*/Digital sig. Method
Auth./Encryption Algorithm : Auto*/Manual Settings
Validity : Time (1 to 65535minuites)(480minuites*)
Validity : Size (1 to 65535 MB)(65535 MB*)
PFS : On, Off*
Auth./Encryption Algorithm : Auto*/Manual Settings
Connect. Mode : Transport, display only
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
XLI
Item
Netware Settings
Use NetWare
Frame Type
IPX External Network Number
Node Number
Print Service
Packet Signature
Bindery Pserver Settings
Print Server Name
File Server Name
Print Server Password
Printer Number
Polling Interval
Printer Form
Buffer Size
Service Mode
Rprinter Settings
Print ServerName
File ServerName
Printer Number
NDS PServer Settings
Printer Number
Tree Name
Context
Print Server Password
Printer Number
Polling Interval
Printer Form
Buffer Size
Service Mode
NPrinter Settings
Print ServerName
Tree Name
Context
Printer Number
Apple Talk Settings
Use Apple Talk
Phase
Service Name
Zone
Print Mode*2
XLII

UI
Delivery Available
Setting Description
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
0 to 15 (0*)
1 to 15seconds (5sedonds*)
0 to 255 (0*)
1 to 20 KB (20KB*)
Service only currently mounted form/Change forms as needed/Minimize form changes across print queues/
Minimize form changes within print queues*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
0 to 15 (0*)
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
0 to 254 (0*)
1 to 255 seconds (5seconds*)
0 to 255 (0*)
3 to 20KB (20KB*)
Service only currently mounted form/Change forms as needed/Minimize form changes across print queues/
Minimize form changes within print queues*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
0 to 254 (0*)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
Phase 2 (fixing)
32 characters maximum (Model name*)
Both*, Spool, Direct
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
Auto Detect*/Ethernet II/Ethernet 802.2/Ethernet 802.3/Ethernet SNAP
Bindery PServer, R Printer, NDS Pserver*, NPrinter
XLII
Item
SMB Server Settings
Use SMB Server
ServerName
Workgroup
Comment
LM Announce
SMB Printer Settings
Use SMB Print
Printer Name
SMB Auth. Settings
Use SMB Authentication
Authentication Type
SNMP Settings
Get Printer Mgmt Info from Host
Use SNMPv1
Community Name1Settings
Community Name1
MIB Access Permission
Community Name
Community Name2 Settings
Community Name2
MIB Access Permission
Community Name
Use SNMPv3
User Settings
User On, Off
Register
Details/Edit
Delete
Context Settings
Register
Edit
Delete
Use Spool Function
Use Spool Function
Startup Settings
Startup Settings
XLIII

UI
Delivery Available
Setting Description
On, Off*
15 characters maximum (Canon+represents the
last six digits of a MAC address)
15 characters maximum (WORKGROUP*)
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
On, Off*
13 characters maximum (PRINTER*)
Yes
Yes
No
No
On, Off*
NTLMv1*, NTLMv2*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
On, Off*
On*, Off
On*, Off
Read/Write/Read Only*
Community Name (32 characters maximum) (public*)
On, Off*
Read/Write/Read Only*
Community Name (32 characters maximum) (public2*)
On, Off*
User/MIB Access Permission/Security Settings/Authent.Algorithm/Authent.Password/Encryption Algorithm/
Encryption Password
User/MIB Access Permission/Security Settings/Authent.Algorithm/Authent.Password/Encryption Algorithm/
Encryption Password
-
Yes
No
Yes
No
Context Name (32 characters maximum)

Context Name (32 characters maximum)
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
30 to 300 seconds (30*)
Yes
No
XLIII
Item
Ethernet Driver Settings
Auto Detect
Communication Mode
Ethernet Type
MAC Address
IEEE802.1X Settings
Use IEEE802.1X
Login Name
User
Password
TLS Settings
Use TLS
Key and Certificate
Set as the Default Key
Certificate Details
TTLS Settings
Use TTL
TTLS Settings
PEAP Settings
Use PEAP
Same User Name as Login Name
Firewall Settings
IP Address Block Log
IPv4 Address Filter
TX Filter
Use Filter
Default Policy
IPv4 Address
RX Filter
Use Filter
Default Policy
IPv4 Address
IPv6 Address Filter
TX Filter
Use Filter
Default Policy
IPv6 Address
RX Filter
Use Filter
Default Policy
IPv6 Address
XLIV

UI
Delivery Available
Setting Description
On*, Off
Half Duplex*/Full Duplex
10 Base-T*, 100 Base-TX, 1000 Base-T
Display only
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
Name of the user to be authenticated with IEEE802.1X authentication
Password of the user to be authenticated with IEEE802.1X authentication
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
Yes
No

Public Key/Cert.Thumbprint/Certificate
Displays what the key pair is being used for.
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
On, Off*
MSCHAPv2*, PAP
Yes
Yes
No
No
On, Off*
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
No
No
Time, Category, IP Address, Result
Yes
No
On, Off*
Allow*/Reject
Up to 16 IPv4 addresses can be stored.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
Allow*/Reject
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
Allow*/Reject
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
On, Off*
Allow*/Reject
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
XLIV
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Accessibility
Item
MAC Address Filter
TX Filter
Use Filter
Default Policy
MAC Address
RX Filter
Use Filter
Default Policy
MAC Address
Setting Description
XLV

UI
Delivery Available
On, Off*
Allow*/Reject
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
On, Off*
Allow*/Reject
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
T-10-7
External Interface
* Default Settings
Item
USB Settings
Use USB Device
Use MEAP Driver for USB Device
Use MEAP Driver for USB External Drive
Setting Description
On*, Off
On, Off*
On, Off*

Yes
Yes
Yes
T-10-8
Accessibility
* Default Settings
Item
Key Repetition Settings
Reversed Display (Color)
Setting Description
Standard*, Slightly Slow, Slow
On, Off*

No
No
T-10-9
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Accessibility
XLV
Appendix > List of User Mode > Adjustment/Maintenance > Maintenance
XLVI
Adjust Image Quality
*1
* Default Settings
Item
Correct Density
Device Information
Delivery Available
Setting Description
Automatic after the machine prints and scans four sets of test pages
Copy/Scan and Store (Mail Box), Black Send/Scan and Store (other than Mail Box), Color
Send/Scan and Store (Other Than Mail Box)Light, Dark: 1 to 9 levels (5levels*)
X, Y: -1.0% to +1.0%, in 0.1% increments (X: 0.0%* Y: 0.0%*)
Fine Adjust Zoom
No
No
No
T-10-10
*1
Adjust Action
* Default Settings
Item
Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning
Adjust Saddle Stitch Fold Position
Adjust Fold Position
Adjust Z-Fold Position
Adjust C-Fold Position
Setting Description
Device Information
Delivery Available
Press [Start]
-2.00 mm to +2.00 mm, in 0.25 mm increments (0.00 mm*)
No
No
-2.0 mm to +1.5 mm, 0.5 mm increments (0.0 mm*)

A: 0.0 mm to +6.0 mm, 0.5 mm increments (0.0 mm*)
B: 0.0 mm to +3.0 mm, 0.5 mm increments (0.0 mm*)
No
No
T-10-11
Maintenance
Item
Clean Feeder*1
Clean Wire
Clean Drum
Original Scanning Area Cleaning Method*1
Setting Description
Press [Start]
Press [Start]
Press [Start]
Display the cleaning method

No
No
No
No
T-10-12
Appendix > List of User Mode > Adjustment/Maintenance > Maintenance
XLVI
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common
XLVII
Function Settings
Common
* Default Settings
*2 Indicates information that is delivered only if the number of output trays in the host machine and client machines is the same.
*3 Indicates items that cannot be used with the default setting. Also, the Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES is necessary. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Item
Paper Feed Settings
Paper Drawer Auto Selection On/Off
Multi-Purpose Tray
Other
Copy
Suspended Job Timeout On
Paper Output Settings
Output Tray Settings
If the Staple Finisher/Booklet Finisher Is Attached
Tray A
Tray B
Tray C
Tray Home Position
Offset Jobs*1
Job Separator Between Jobs
Job Separator Between Copies
Different Paper Sizes for the Output Tray
Unfinished Tab Paper Forced Output
Print Settings
Print Priority
Copy
Printer
Access Stored File, Receive/Fax*1, Other
Local Print Default Settings
Select Paper
No. of Prints
Finishing*1
If No Finisher is Attached and the Copy Tray is Attached
If the Stapele Finisher is Attached.
Device information
DeliveryAvailable
Setting Description
Copy, Printer, Access Stored Files, Receive/Fax*1, Other
On, Off*
On*, Off
Consider Paper Type : On*, Off
On, Off*
0 to 999 min. (5min*)
No
No
No
No
Yes
Copy, Access Stored Files*, Printer, Receive, Fax, Other

Copy*, Access Stored Files*, Printer, Receive, Fax, Other
Copy*, Access Stored Files*, Printer*, Receive, Fax, Other
Off, Tray B*, Tray C
On*, Off
On, Off*
On, Off*
On*, Off
On, Off*
No*2
No*2
No*2
No*2
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
1*,2,3
1,2*,3
1,2,3*
Yes
Yes
Yes
All Paper Sources, Auto*

1 to 9,999 sets (1set*)
No
No
Do Not Collate, Collate (Page Order)*, Rotate Collate, Group

(Same Pages), Rotate Group, Face Up/Face Down
Do Not Collate, Collate (Page Order), Offset*, Group (Same
Pages), Offset Group, Staple (Corner: Top Left, Bottom Left, Top
Right, Bottom Right), (Double: Left, Right), Face Up/Face Down
No
No
XLVII
XLVIII
Item
If the Booklet Finisher is Attached.
If the Staple Finisher and External 2/3 Hole Puncher Are Attached.
If the Staple Finisher/Booklet Finisher and Document Insertion/Folding Unit

Are Attached:
If the Staple Finisher/Booklet Finisher, External 2/3 Hole Puncher and

Document Insertion/Folding Unit-G1 Are Attached.
2-Sided Printing
Delete File After Printing
Merge and Print
Output Report Default Settings
2-Sided Printing
Register Form
Register Characters for Page No./Watermark
Copy Set Numbering Option Settings
Number Option ON
ID/User Name
Date
Text
Secure Watermark/Document Scan Lock*1
Forced Secure Watermark/Doc. Scan Lock
Copy
Mail Box
Printer
Printer Driver Watermark/Doc. Scan Lock
Adjust Background/Character Contrast
Relative Contrast
Standard Value Set. (imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075)
Standard Value Set. (imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6065/6055)
Latent Area Density (imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075)
Latent Area Density (imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6065/6055)
Adjust TL Code
Dot Size
Device information
DeliveryAvailable
Setting Description
Right, Bottom Right), (Double: Left, Right), Face Up/Face Down
Do Not Collate, Collate (Page Order), Offset, Group (Same
Right, Bottom Right), (Double: Left, Right), Hole Punch, Face
Up/Face Down
Right, Bottom Right), (Double: Left, Right), Fold, Face Up/Face
Down
Right, Bottom Right), (Double: Left, Right), Hole Punch, Fold,
Face Up/Face Down
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
No
No
No
No
On, Off*
Register (Solid/Transparent)*1, Delete, Check Print, Details
Register, Edit, Delete
On, Off*
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Do Not Set*, Forced Secure Watermark, Forced Document Scan

Lock
Lock
Lock
Do Not Set*, Driver Secure Watermark, Driver Doc. Scan Lock
Print Settings, Sample Print, Initialize
-7 to +7 (2*)
1 to 64 (20*)
1 to 64 (16*)
1 to 36 (9*)
1 to 36 (8*)
Dot Size, Dot Density, Relative Contrast (Sample Print),
Standard Value Settings, Initialize
4*
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
XLVIII
Item
Dot Density
Relative Contrast (imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6075)
Relative Contrast (imageRUNNER ADVANCE 6065/6055)
Standard Value Settings
Scan Settings*1
Timing to Raise Feeder Tray
Feeder Jam Recovery Method
Scanner Noise Settings
Streak Prevention
LTRR/STMT Original Selection
Remote Scan Data Compression Ratio
Remote Scan Gamma Value
Auto Online
Auto Offline
Generate File
High Compression Image Quality Level
Image Level in Text/Photo Mode or Photo Mode
Image Level in Text Mode
OCR (Text Searchable) Settings
Smart Scan
No. of OCR File Name Characters
Trace & Smooth Settings
Outline Graphics
Graphics Recognition Level
Background Image Level
Format PDF to PDF/A
Optimize PDF for Web
Rights Management Server Settings
Document Scan Lock Settings

Use Document Scan Lock/Embedded. Info.
Multiple Embedded Information Action
Use Document Scan Lock
Restrict Options
XLIX
Device information
DeliveryAvailable
Setting Description
Standard*, Rough
-7 to +7 (2*)
-7 to +7 (0*)
1 to 64 (16*)
No
No
No
No
When Start is pressed*, When Panel Is Touched

From 1st Page*, From Stopped Original
Speed Priority*, Quiet
On*, Off
Select Manually, Use LTRR Format*, Use STMT Format
High Ratio, Normal*, Low Ratio
Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8*, Gamma 2.2
On, Off*
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Data Size Priority, Normal*, Image Quality Priority

Yes
Yes
On*, Off
1 to 24*
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
Normal, Moderate*, High
On, Off*
On, Off*
Server URL: 128 characters maximum
User: 128 characters maximum
Password: 24 characters maximum
Use Password for Each User: On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
On*, Off
Continue Job, Cancel Job*
On*, Off
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-10-13
XLIX
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Printer
Copy
*1
* Default Settings
Item
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 3
Shortcut 4
Shortcut 5
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 3
Shortcut 4
Shortcut 5
Shortcut 6
Auto Collate
Image Orientation Priority
Auto Orientation
Photo Printout Mode
Register Remote Device for Cascade Copy
Cascade Copy Communication Timeout
Setting Description
Register/Edit, Delete (M1 to M9), Check Content

Register, Initialize
No
No
Finishing*, Unassigned
2-Sided*, Unassigned
Density* Unassigned
Original Type*, Unassigned
Unassigned*
No
No
No
No
No
No Settings*
No Settings*
No Settings*
No Settings*
No Settings*
No Settings*
On*, Off
On, Off*
On*, Off
On, Off*
Register (Seven devices maximum), Details, Delete
5 to 30* seconds
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
T-10-14
Printer
* Default Settings
Item
Output Report
PCL
Configuration Page
Font List
PS
Configuration Page
Font List
Printer Settings
Restrict Printer Jobs
PDL Selection (Plug-n-play)
Setting Description
Device Information
Delivery Available
Print
Print
No
No
Start
Print
Setting the Machine (PS/PCL/UFR II Printer)
On, Off*
UFR II, PCL5e, PCL6, PS3, FAX
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
T-10-15
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Printer
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send
LI
Send
* Default Setting
*4 Indicates item that appears only if the Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board is installed in addition to installing the Super G3 FAX Board.
*5 Indicates item that appears only if the Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board is installed in addition to installing the Super G3 FAX Board.
*6 Indicates item that appears according to the telephone line number specified in [No. of Sending Lines].
*4 Indicates item that appears only if the Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board is installed in addition to installing the Super G3 FAX Board.
*5 Indicates item that appears only if the Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board is installed in addition to installing the Super G3 FAX Board.
*6 Indicates item that appears according to the telephone line number specified in [No. of Sending Lines].
Item
Output Report
TX/RX User Data List
Fax User Data List*1
Common Settings
Register Favorite Settings Edit Favorite Settings
Show Comment
Display Confirmation for Favorite Settings
Default Screen
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
TX Report
Report with TX Image
Communication Management Report
Auto Print (100 Transmissions)
Specify Print Time
Timer Setting
Send/Receive Separate
TX Terminal ID
Delete Failed TX Jobs

Retry Times
Data Compression Ratio
YCbCr TX Gamma Value
Use Divided Chunk Send for WebDAV TX
Limit New Destinations
Fax
E-mail
Device Information
Delivery Available
Setting Description
Print List
Print List
No
No
Register/Edit, Delete (M1 to M18), Check Content

On, Off*
On*, Off
Standard*, Address Book, One-Touch, Favorite Settings
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
2-Sided Original*, Unassigned

Different Size Originals*, Unassigned
For Error Only*, On, Off
On*, Off
No
No
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
On, Off*
00 : 00 to 23 : 59 (00 : 00*)
On, Off*
Print*, Do Not Print
TX Terminal ID: Print
Printing Position: Outside
Display Destination Unit Name: On, Off
Telephone # Mark*1: FAX, TEL
On*, Off
0 to 5 times (3 times*)
High Ratio, Normal*, Low Ratio
Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8*, Gamma 2.2
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LI
Item
I-Fax
File
Always Add Device Signature to Send*1
Restrict File Formats
E-mail/Ifax Settings
Register Unit Name
Communication Settings
SMTP RX
POP
SMTP Server
E-mail Address
POP Server
POP Address
POP Password
POP Interval
POP AUTH Method
POP Authentication before Sending
SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH)
User
Password
Allow SSL (POP)
Allow SSL (SMTP Send)
Display Auth. Screen When Send
Allow SSL (SMTP Receive)
Maximum Data Size for Sending
Default Subject
Use SMTP Authentication for Each User
Specify Authentication User Dest. to Reply
Set Authorized User Destination to Sender
Allow Sending to Unregistered Destinations
Full Mode TX Timeout
Print MDN/DSN upon Receipt
Use Send via Server
Allow MDN Not via Server
Restrict TX Destination Domain
Restrict Sending to Domains
Permitted Domains
Fax Settings*1
Default Screen
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
LII
Device Information
Delivery Available
Setting Description
On, Off*
On, Off*
On*, Off
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
On, Off*
On* Off
Server name or IP Address (48 characters maximum)
Server name or IP Address (48 characters maximum)
0* to 99 (If the interval is set to '0', the incoming e-mail is not
checked automatically.)
Standard*/APOP/POP AUTH
On, Off*
On, Off*
User name for SMTP authentication (64 characters maximum)
Password for SMTP authentication (32 characters maximum)
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
Always SSL,On, Off*
0=(Off)/1 to 99 MB (3MB*)
40 characters maximum (Attached Image*)
On*, Off
On, Off*
On*, Off
On, Off*
1 to 99 hours (24hours*)
On, Off*
On, Off*
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Register, Details/Edit, Delete
Yes
No
Standard*, Address Book

No
No
Density*, Unassigned
Original Type*, Unassigned
No
No
LII
Item
Shortcut 3
Shortcut 4
Register Sender Name (TTI)
ECM TX
Set Pause Time
Auto Redial
Redial Times
Redial Interval
Redial When TX Error
Check Dial Tone Before Sending
Fax TX Report
Report with TX Image
Fax Activity Report
Auto Print (40 Transmissions)
Specify Print Time
Timer Setting
Send/Receive Separate
Set Line
Register Unit Telephone Number
Register Unit Name
Select Line Type
Line
Select TX Line
TX Start Speed
PIN Code Access
Confirm Entered Fax Number
Allow Fax Driver TX
Remote Fax TX Settings
LIII
Device Information
Delivery Available
Setting Description
2-Sided Original*, Unassigned
Different Size Originals*, Unassigned
01 to 99: Register/Edit, Delete
On*, Off
1 to 15 seconds (2 seconds*)
On*, Off
1 to 10 times (2 times*)
2 to 99 minutes (2 minutes*)
Error and 1st page*, All pages, Off
On*, Off
For Error Only*, On, Off
On*, Off
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
On, Off*
00: 00 to 23: 59 (00: 00*)
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
20 digits maximum
Pulse, Tone*
If the Super G3 FAX Board and Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board
are installed:
Line 2
If the Super G3 FAX Board, Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board, and
Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board are installed:
Line 2, Line 3, Line 4
If the Super G3 FAX Board is installed:
Line 1: Priority TX*, Prohibit TX
If the Super G3 FAX Board and Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board
are installed:
Line 2: Priority TX, Prohibit TX
If the Super G3 FAX Board, Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board, and
Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board are installed:
33600 bps*, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, 7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400
bps
On, Off*
On, Off*
On*, Off
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
LIII
Item
Remote Fax Server Address
TX Timeout
No. of Sending Lines
Select Priority Line
Remote Fax Settings
Use Remote Fax
LIV
Device Information
Delivery Available
Setting Description
Host name or the IP address (48 characters maximum)
1 to 99 hours (24 hours*)
1 to 4 lines (1*)
Auto*, Line 1, Line 2*6, Line 3*6, Line 4*6
No
Yes
No
No
On*, Off
Yes
T-10-16
LIV
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Receive/Forward
LV
Receive/Forward
* Default Setting
*7 Indicates item that is not delivered as device information.
Receive Type, Details/Edit, Delete, Print List, E-Mail Priority
Item
Output Report
Fax User Data List*1
Common Settings
Print on Both Side
Select Drawer
Switch A
Switch B
Switch C
Switch D
Reduce Fax RX Size
2 On 1 Log
Received Page Footer
Handle Files with Forwarding Errors
Forwarding Settings
Set Fax/I-Fax Inbox

Set/Register Confidential Fax Inboxes
Inbox No.
Register Box Name:
PIN
URL Send Settings
Initialize
Memory RX Inbox PIN
Use Fax Memory Lock*1
Use I-Fax Memory Lock
Memory Lock Start Time
Memory Lock End Time
Divided Data RX Timeout
Always Send Notice for RX Errors
Fax Settings*1
ECM RX
Setting Description
Device Information
Delivery Available
Print List
Print List
No
No
On, Off*
Yes
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On
Reduction Mode: Auto
Reduction %: 90%
Reduction Direction: Vertical Only
On, Off*
Print, Do Not Print*
Always Print*, Store/Print, Off
Type, Validate/Invalidate, Register (Registered Forwarding
Settings), Forward w/o Conditions, E-Mail Priority, Details/Edit,
Delete, Print List
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes*7
00 to 49
Seven digits maximum
Seven digit number
On, Off*
On, Off*
Everyday, Select Days, Off*
Everyday, Select Days, Off*
0 to 99 hours (24hours*)
*On, Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
Yes
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Receive/Forward
LV
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Store/Access Files
Item
Setting Description
Fax RX Report
Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report
RX Start Speed
For Error Only, On, Off*

On*, Off
33600 bps*, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, 7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400
bps
20 digits maximum
RX Password
Store/Access Files
LVI
Device Information
Delivery Available
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
T-10-17
* Default Setting
Item
Common Settings
Scan and Store Settings
Photo Printout Mode
Access Stored Files Settings
Mail Box Settings
Set/Register Mail Boxes
Mail Box No.
Register Box Name
PIN
Time Until File Auto Delete
URL Send Settings
Print upon Storing from Printer Driver
Initialize
Settings for All Mail Boxes
Time Until File Auto Delete
Print When Storing from Printer Driver
Advanced Box Settings
Open to Public
WebDAV Server Settings
Authentication Type
Use SSL
Allow to Create Personal Space
Delete All Personal Spaces
Initialize Shared Space
Prohibit Writing from External
Authentication Management
File Formats Allowed for Storing
Network Settings
Network Place Settings
Protocol for External Reference
Setting Description
Register, Rename, Delete (Up to 9 Set Keys), Check Content

On, Off*
No
Yes
No
Register, Rename, Delete (Up to 9 Set Keys), Check Content

No
No
00 to 99
Seven digits
0 (Off), 1, 2, 3, 6, 12 hours, 1, 2, 3*, 7, 30 days
On, Off*
-
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
0 (Off), 1, 2, 3, 6, 12 hours, 1, 2, 3*, 7, 30 days

On, Off*
No
No
By SMB, By WebDAV, Off*
Yes
Basic, Off*
On*, Off
On*, Off
Delete
Initialize
On*, Off
On, Off*
Printable Formats Only*, Common Office Formats, All
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Register, Details, Delete
No
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Store/Access Files
LVI
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Encrypted Secure Print
Item
SMB
WebDAV
Setting Description
On*, Off
On*, Off
LVII

No
No
Encrypted Secure Print
T-10-18
* Default Setting
Item
Only Allow Encrypted Print Jobs*1
Setting Description
On, Off*

Yes
T-10-19
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Encrypted Secure Print
LVII
Appendix > List of User Mode > Set Destination > Set Destination
LVIII
Set Destination
Set Destination
* Default Setting
Item
Address List
Rename Address List
Register One-Touch
Change Default Display of Address Book
Address Book PIN
Manage Address Book Access Numbers
Auto Search When Using LDAP Server
Acquire Remote Address Book
Acquire Address Book
Remote Address Book Server Address
Communication Timeout
Fax TX Line Auto Select Adjustment
Make Remote Address Book Open
Make Address Book Open
Setting Description
Device Information
Delivery Available
Address List 1 to 10, One-touch
No
Print List: Print

Register New Dest., Details/Edit, Delete, Search by Name
Rename
Register/Edit, Delete
Local*, LDAP Server, Remote
Seven digit number
On, Off*
Register, Details/Edit, Delete, Register/Edit LDAP Search, Print
List
On* Off
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
On*, Off
IP Address or Host Name (128 characters maximum)
15 to 120 seconds (30 seconds*)
On*, Off
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
T-10-20
Appendix > List of User Mode > Set Destination > Set Destination
LVIII
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Device Management
LIX
Management Settings
User Management
* Default Settings
Item
System Manager Information Settings
System Manager ID
System PIN
System Manager
E-Mail Address
Contact Information
Comment
Register PIN
Page Totals
Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs
Allow Remote Scan Jobs With Unknown IDs
Setting Description
Seven digit number maximum (7654321*)

Seven digit number maximum (7654321*)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Register, Edit, Delete, Limit Functions
Clear, Print List, Clear All Totals, Large2 Count Management
On*, Off
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
T-10-21
Device Management
* Default Settings
Item
Device Information Settings
Device Name
Location
Set Auto Settings

Settings/Registration Value
Dept. ID
Address Book
Printer Settings
Paper Information
Setting Description
No
No
Auto Search/Register, Register, Details, Delete, Print List

Auto Search/Register
List
Search Depth (Router): 1 to 8
Display Host Name: On, Off
Start Auto Search
Everyday, Specify Days, Off*
On, Off*
Network Settings: Include, Exclude*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
LIX
Item
Manual Delivery
Dept. ID
Address Book
Printer Settings
Paper Information
Restrictions Receiving Device Information
Restore Data
Restrict Restriction for Each Function
Dept. ID
Address Book
Printer Settings
Paper Information
Set Paper Information
Communication Log
Setting Description
On, Off*
Network Settings: Include, Exclude*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On*, Off
Settings/Registration Value, Dept. ID, Address Book, Web Access Favorites, Printer Settings, Paper Information
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On, Off*
On*, Off
On*, Off
All, Basic Only*
Details, Print List, Report Settings
Report Settings
Auto Print (100 transmissions): On*, Off
Specify Print Time: On, Off*
-00: 00* to 23:59
Separate Report Type: On, Off*
On, Off*
Certificate Details: Certificate
Certificate Details: Certificate
Limited Functions Mode*1

Confirm Device Signature Certificate
Confirm User Signature Certificate
Certificate Settings: Generate Key: Generate Network Communication Key
Key Name
Key Algorithm
RSA, Display only
Key Length (bit)
512*, 1024
Start Date of Validity
Month, Date, Year (2000/01/01~2048/12/31)
End Date of Validity
Month, Date, Year (2000/01/01~2048/12/31)
Country/Region
Country/Region name and code (2 characters maximum) (US*)
State
City
Organization
Organization Unit
Common Name
IP address or FQDN (24 characters maximum)
Certificate Settings:Generate Key
Generate/Update Device Signature
Key*1
LX
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
LX
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > License/Other
Item
Setting Description
LXI
Certificate Settings: Key and Certificate List: Key and Certificate List for this Machine Editing Key Pairs and Server Certificates Confirming a Key Pair and Device Certificate
Certificate Details
Version/Serial Number/Signature Algorithm/Issue
Destination/Start Date of Validity/End Date of Validity/Issuer/
Public Key/Cert. Thumbprint/Certificate
Delete
Displays what the key pair is being used for
Certificate Settings: Key and Certificate List: Key and Certificate List for Users*
Certificate Details
Public Key/Cert. Thumbprint(SHA1)/Certificate
Delete
Certificate Settings: CA Certificate List
Certificate Details
Public Key/Cert. Thumbprint/Certificate
Delete
Certificate Settings: Register Key and Certificate
Register
Key Name (24 characters maximum)
Password (24 characters maximum)
Delete
Certificate Settings: Register CA Certificate
Register
Delete
Display Status Before Authentication
On*, Off
Display Log
On*, Off
Off
Obtain Job Log From Management Software: Permit, Do Not Allow*
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
T-10-22
License/Other
* Default Settings
Item
Register License
MEAP Settings
Print System Information
SSL Settings
Remote UI
Use Reference Print

Delete Message Board Contents
Setting Description
No
Print
On
Use SSL:On, Off*
On*, Off
On
Use SSL:On, Off*
On, Off*
Clear
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
T-10-23
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > License/Other
LXI
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Data Management
LXII
Data Management
* Default Settings
Item
HDD Data Complete Deletion*
Timing of Deletion
Overwrite Method for Deletion Mode
Initialize All Data/Settings
TPM Settings
Setting Description
During Job*, After Job

0 (Null) Data 1 Time*, Random Data 1 Time, Random Data 3 Times, DOD Standard
Initialize
Use TPM: On, Off*
Backup TPM Key, Restore TPM Key
No
No
No
No
No
T-10-24
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Data Management
LXII
LXIII
Data
Location Replace
Delete
Backup by User
User function
Replace Replace Replace DC
the HDD / the Main the Main ContAll format PCB 1 PCB 2 roller
PCB
Reader Replace Initialize

Cont- the TPM All Data/
roller
PCB
Settings
PCB
Send >
Common
Settings
> Change
Default
Settings >
Initialize
Send
Printer
> Fax
Settings
Settings > Custom
> Change Settings >
Default
Initialize
Settings >
Initialize
Advanced
Box
Settings
> Delete
Personal/
Shared
Space >
Delete All
Function> Function> Function> Function Function> Function> Yes/

CLEAR CLEAR > CLEAR > > CLEAR CLEAR > CLEAR > No
> MNMMI
DC-CON >R-CON ADRS-BK JV-CASHE
CONT
Method
Copy >
Change
Default
Settings >
Initialize
Settings/Registration > Function Settings
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
No
Yes
(*1)
USB memory
No
Yes
(*1)
USB memory
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
Remote UI
PC
(Export/Import)
Yes
Yes
(*1)
SST, Download PC
Menu(HDD/USB)
Yes
Yes
(*1)
SST, Download PC
Menu(HDD/USB)
Yes
Yes
(*1)
SST, Download PC
Menu(HDD/USB)
Yes
Yes
(*1)
SST, Download PC
Menu(HDD/USB)
Yes
Yes
(*1)
SST, Download PC
Menu(HDD/USB)
Yes
Yes
(*1)
SST, Download PC
Menu(HDD/USB)
-
Address List
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Forwarding Settings
HDD/
Clear
SRAM
(MCON2)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
(*2)
Yes
(*3)
Settings / Registration
Preferences
SRAM
(MCON2)
Backup by Service
Service function
Location Yes/No
Method
to be
Back- Restored
up
store
Location
to be
stored
Adjustment/
Maintenance
SRAM
(MCON2)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Function Settings
SRAM
(MCON2/
DCON)
SRAM
(MCON2)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
(*4)
Clear
(*5)
Yes
(*6)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Management Settings SRAM

(MCON2)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
(*7)
Printer Settings
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Clear
Yes
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
No
No
Yes
Yes
(*9)
SST
(Meapback)
PC
Yes
Yes
(*10)
(*11)
Yes
(*10)
Yes
(*10)
SST
(Meapback)
PC
SST
(Meapback)
SST
(Meapback)
PC
Yes
(*1)
(*12)
Yes
(*1)
(*12)
Yes
(*1)
(*12)
Yes
(*1)
(*12)
SST
(Meapback)
PC
SST
(Meapback)
PC
SST
(Meapback)
PC
SST
(Meapback)
PC
Yes
(*1)
USB memory
Set Destination
SRAM
(MCON2)
Set Paper Information HDD
Clear
Setting items for each menu in Main Menu (Copy, Scan and Send, Fax, Scan and Store, Access Stored Files, Fax/I-Fax Inbox)
Favorite Settings
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
(*8)
Default Settings
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
No
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
-
Shortcut settings for

Options
Previous Settings
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
No
Yes
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
No
Yes
Setting items for Quick Menu

Button Size
HDD
information
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
PC
Yes
Wallpaper Setting
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
PC
Yes
Button information in HDD

Quick Menu
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
PC
Yes
Restrict Quick Menu
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
PC
Yes
Setting items for Main Menu

Button settings in
HDD
Main Menu
Remote UI
(block of
Export/Import)
Remote UI
(block of
Export/Import)
Remote UI
(block of
Export/Import)
Remote UI
(block of
Export/Import)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Remote UI
(block of
Export/Import)
Yes
PC
LXIII
Appendix > Backup Data
Backup Data
LXIV
Location Replace
Delete
Backup by User
User function
PCB

roller
PCB
Settings
PCB
Button settings on the HDD

top of the screen
Clear
Wallpaper Setting for HDD

Main Menu
Clear
Other settings for

Main Menu
HDD
Clear
User Box specification HDD

settings (Register Box
Name, Password,
Time until Document
Auto Erase, Print
uponstoring from the
printer driver)
Image data of User
HDD
Box, Confidential Fax
Box, and System Box
Image Data
Data File of Advanced HDD
Box
Clear
Clear
Clear
HDD
Network place setting HDD

information
Backup by Service
Service function
Send
Printer
> Fax
Settings
Settings > Custom
> Change Settings >
Default
Initialize
Settings >
Initialize

> MNMMI
CONT
Clear
Clear
Yes
Clear
Clear
Yes
Clear
Clear
Yes
Remote UI
(block of
Export/Import)
Remote UI
(block of
Export/Import)
Remote UI
(block of
Export/Import)
Clear
Clear
Yes
(*13)
Remote UI
(Bacup/
Restore)
Clear
(*29)
Yes
(*13)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
HDD
Clear
Clear
License files for MEAP HDD

applications
User authentication HDD
information registered
in the Local Device
Authentication user
authentication system
of SSO-H (Single
Sign-On H)
Data saved using
HDD
MEAP applications
SMS (Service
HDD
Management Service)
password of MEAP
Universal data settings
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
(*20)
Send >
Common
Settings
> Change
Default
Settings >
Initialize
Advanced
Box
Settings
> Delete
Personal/
Shared
Space >
Delete All
Method
Copy >
Change
Default
Settings >
Initialize
Location Yes/No
Method
to be
Back- Restored
up
store
Location
to be
stored
Yes
Yes
(*1)
USB memory
Yes
Yes
(*1)
USB memory
Yes
Yes
(*1)
USB memory
PC/USB- No
HDD
Yes
(*1)
USB memory
Remote UI
(Bacup/
Restore)
PC/USB- No
HDD
Yes
(*1)
USB memory
Yes
(*14)
Remote UI
(Bacup/
Restore)
PC/USB- No
HDD
(*15)
Yes
USB memory
Clear
Yes
(*16)
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
Yes
Yes SST
(*1)
(Meapback),
(*17) USB memory
PC
Yes
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
No
Yes
(*1)
USB memory
Yes
(*13)
Remote UI
(Bacup/
Restore)
No
No
Yes
(*18)
Remote UI
PC
(block of
Export/Import)
Yes
Yes
(*1)
SST, Download PC
Menu(HDD/USB)
Clear
No
Yes
Yes
PC
Clear
Yes
SMS
PC
Yes
Yes
Clear
Yes
SSO-H
PC
Yes
Yes
SST
(Meapback)
SST
(Meapback)
SST
(Meapback)
Clear
Yes
Yes
Clear
Yes
Yes
SST
(Meapback)
SST
(Meapback)
PC
Yes
(*19)
No
Box settings
Advanced box settings

Advanced box
account
Box settings
Image forms stored in HDD
the Form Composition
mode
Web browser settings
Web Access setting HDD
information
MEAP settings
MEAP application
PC
PC
PC
PC
LXIV
Data
LXV
Location Replace
Delete
Backup by User
User function

PCB
Unsent documents
(documents waiting
to be sent with the
Delayed Send mode)
Job logs
Key Pair and
Server Certificate in
in TCP/IP Settings
in Network Set-tings
in System Settings
(from the Additional
Functions screen)
setting values

roller
PCB
Settings
PCB
Backup by Service
Service function
Send >
Common
Settings
> Change
Default
Settings >
Initialize
Send
Printer
> Fax
Settings
Settings > Custom
> Change Settings >
Default
Initialize
Settings >
Initialize
Advanced
Box
Settings
> Delete
Personal/
Shared
Space >
Delete All

> MNMMI
CONT
Method
Copy >
Change
Default
Settings >
Initialize
Location Yes/No
Method
to be
Back- Restored
up
store
Location
to be
stored
SRAM
Clear
(MCON2)
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
No
No
No
HDD
HDD
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
No
No
No
No
No
No
HDD
(SRAM
(MCON2))
PS font
HDD
Clear
Key information to be SRAM
Clear
used for encryption
(MCON2) (*21)
when TPM is OFF
Key and settings
SRAM
Clear
information to be used (MCON2) (*24)
for encryption when HDD
TPM is ON
TPM
Board
Clear
Clear
Clear
No
Yes
Yes
SST, Download PC
Menu(HDD/USB)
Clear
(*22)
Clear
Clear
Clear
(*22)
Clear
(*22)
No
No
(*23)
No
No
No
No
Clear
(*25)
Clear
Clear
(*26)
Clear
(*25)
Clear
(*25)
Yes
(*27)
Settings/
USB
No
Registration
memory
Management
Settings > Data
Managemnet >
TPM Settings
No
Service mode setting SRAM

values (MN-CON)
(MCON2)
Clear
Clear
Clear
Yes
Service mode setting SRAM

values (DC-CON)
(DC-CON)
Clear
Clear
Yes
Remote UI
(block of
Export/
Import)
COPIER>
OPTION>
USER>
SMD-EXPT>
ON Only
(*28)
Service mode setting EEPROM values (R-CON)

(R-CON)
Clear
Clear
Yes
Audit Log
Clear
Clear
No
Service Mode
HDD
Clear
PC
Yes
Yes
SST, Download HDD/

Menu(HDD/USB) USB
PC
Yes
Yes
PC
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
COPIER>
FUNCTION>
SYSTEM>
DSRAMBUP
COPIER>
FUNCTION>
SYSTEM>
RSRAMBUP
SST
(Meapback)
HDD
HDD
PC
T-10-25
*1
If there are the backup data which exported in USB memory, Restore is possible in Download Menu (USB).
*2
The following items are Deleted.

Preferences > Paper Settings > Register Envelope Drawer
Preferences > Paper Settings > B5/EXEC Paper Selection
Preferences > Paper Settings > A5R/STMTR Paper Selection
*3
An exclusion item:
Preferences > Timer/Energy Settings > [Adjust Time]/[Date/Time Settings]
*4

Function Settings > Common > Paper Feed Settings > Paper Drawer Auto Selection On/Off
Function Settings > Common > Paper Feed Settings > Feed Method Switch
LXV
Data
*5

Function Settings > Common > Scan Settings > Scanner Noise Settings
Function Settings > Common > Scan Settings > Timing to Raise Feeder Tray
Function Settings > Common > Scan Settings > Streak Prevention
*6
The following data are impossible of backup

Function Settings > Common > Print Settings > Register Form
Function Settings > Receive/Forward > Common Settings > Set Fax/I-Fax Inbox
*7
The following data are impossible of backup

Management Settings > User Management > Department ID Management > Page Totals
*8
Backup is available only "Favorite Settings" in "Scan to Send"
*9
:If start-up in download mode in safe mode is available in the event of an HDD failure, it is assumed that MEAP applications can be backed up using SST in some cases. In that case, the data can be recovered with the information of the MEAP applications maintained by
checking that the machine starts normally after installation of the system after replacement of the HDD, starting the machine in download mode in safe mode, and restoring the backup data.
*10
*11
If there are the backup data which exported in USB memory except a history, Restore is possible in Download Menu (USB).
*12
*13
Login System Administrator and do backup.
*14
IIt is possible only when logging in as an administrator user.

When ON is selected for the authentication management of Advanced Box, Advanced Box account needs to be exported in advance and imported at restoration.
*15
When the optional high-capacity HDD is installed, backup can be done only to USB-HDD.
*16
When ON is selected for the authentication management of Advanced Box, Advanced Box account needs to be exported in advance and imported at restoration.
*17
*18
Only "favorites of web browser" can be backed improves when You perform individual export of RUI.
*19
Only when MEAP applications have a backup function
*20
Since the password is TPM-encrypted and saved, password backed up after all data/settings have been initialized cannot be restored. When all data/settings have been initialized, initialize the password using a switch license for password initialization.
[Reference] Since TPM encryption key is updated when all data/settings are initialized, the password which was backed up cannot be read.
*21
If the backup key information in the HDD is missing, it is automatically recovered from the key in the SRAM (MCON2).
*22
If the key information in the SRAM (MCON2) is missing, it is automatically recovered from the backup key in the HDD.
*21,22
When You change Main PCB 2 and HDD at the same time, the automatic restoration of the key information is not performed.
*23
No means is available to back up externally.
*24
An error code is displayed when the TPM setting is ON. After all data/settings are initialized after restart, select "ON" for the TPM setting to enable the TPM setting.
*25
If the TPM key information in the SRAM of the HDD or the Main Controller PCB 2 becomes missing, the key information in the SRAM is automatically recovered from the backup of the common key in the HDD. Then the internal state of TPM setting changes to "ON". Note that
the TPM setting needs to be manually changed to "ON" since "OFF" is displayed for UI.
*26
TPM settings becomes "OFF" when all data/settings are initialized.
*27
Backup only against TPM PCB failure is possible. In addition, restoration cannot be done to other machines whose TPM setting is set to "ON".
*28
Backup is possible in SramImg, DSRAMBUP, RSRAMBUP.

When You set it in COPIER>OPTION>USER>SMD-EXPT>ON, a backup/restore is possible in Service Mode Settings from the Remote UI.
There is a backup button on the TOP page of the service mode.
HDD and USB memory can back up Service Mode Settings by backup button.
The contents of Settings/Registration become the object of the collective backup.
The exclusion item refers to "a list of DCM backup exclusion items".
*29
Because clearing MN-CONT changes the memory reception setting to "OFF", the image data saved in the Memory RX Inbox is automatically printed after restart. After a print, it is deleted from a system box.
LXVI
T-10-26
LXVI
LXVII
DCM backup exclusion items
Paper Settings
Display Settings

Register Envelope Drawer
Register Multi-Purpose Tray Defaults
Erasing the Remaining Toner Error Message
Timer/Energy Settings
Current Time Adjustment
Network
Output Report
TCP/IP Settings
IPSec settings
IEEE802.1X Settings
Accessibility
Adjustment/
Maintenance
Adjust Image Quality

Adjust Action
Maintenance
Function Settings
Common
Firewall Settings
Voice Navigation Settings
Receive/Forward
Store/Access Files
Set Destination
Management
Settings
Paper Drawer Auto Selection On/Off

Local Print Default Settings
Form for Superimpose Image
Secure Watermark Settings > Adust Background/
Character Contrast
Output Report

Fax User Data List
Communication Settings
E-Mail/I-Fax Settings
Output Report
Common Settings
Mail Box Settings
Advanced Box Settings
Network Settings
Device Management
Restrict Receiving Device Information
Data Management
IP Address Block Log

Tune Microphone
Paper Feed Settings

Print Settings
Address Lists
Auto Serarch when using LDAP Server
User Management
License/Other
IP Address Settings (IPv4)

IP Address Settings (IPv6)
IPP Print Settings
SSL Settings
Confirm Dept. ID PIN

Conect Shading
Auto Correct Color Mismatch
Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning
Change Fold/Stitch Position
Printer
Send
Custom Type > Details/Edit > Change

Preferences
Limit Function when Security key is off

Register License
MEAP Settings
Back Up
Restore
Back Up/Restore Log
Initialize All Data/Settings
TPM Settings
Forwarding Settings
Settings for All Mail Boxes
Delete All Personal Spaces
Page Totals
Print List
Manual Delivery
Resor Data
Communication Log
Register Destination > Auto Serch/Registor
Print System Information

Remote UI On/Off
Delete Massage Board Contents
T-10-27
LXVII
Appendix > Soft Counter List > Soft Counter List > 000 to 099
Soft Counter List

Soft counter specifications
Soft Counter List

000 to 099
Valid or invalid
Number
000 to 099: Remote copy
no
002
Remote copy (full color 1)
100 to 199: Total
no
003
Remote copy (full color 2)
200 to 299: Copy
no
004
Remote copy (mono color 1)
300 to 399: Print
no
005
Remote copy (mono color 2)
yes
006
Remote copy (black and white 1)
yes
007
Remote copy (black and white 2)
no
008
Remote copy (full color / large)
no
009
Remote copy (full color / small)
no
010
Remote copy (mono color / large)
400 to 499: Copy and print

500 to 599: Scan
600 to 699: Box
700 to 799: Reception print
800 to 899: Report print
900 to 999: Transmission
Counter Details
no
011
Remote copy (mono color / small)
yes
012
Remote copy (black and white / large)
yes
013
Remote copy (black and white / small)
no
014
Remote copy (full color + mono color / large)
no
015
Remote copy (full color + mono color / small)
no
016
Remote copy (full color + mono color 2)
no
017
Remote copy (full color + mono color 1)
S: Small size (smaller than B4 size)
no
018
Remote copy (full color / large / double sided)
Numbers 1, 2 indicated under "Counter Details": Number of counts for large size paper
no
019
Remote copy (full color / small / double sided)
It can be changed by the service mode (COPIER > OPTION > USER > B4_L_CNT) so that
no
020
Remote copy (mono color / large / double sided)
- Explanation of symbols shown in the table yes: Valid counter for this machine
4C: Full color
Mono: Mono color (Y, M, C / R, G, B / retro monochrome)
Bk: Single black color
L: Large size (larger than B4 size)
the paper larger than B4 size can be counted as large size paper.
no
021
Remote copy (mono color / small / double sided)
Copy: Local copy + remote copy
yes
022
Remote copy (black and white / large / double sided)
Copy A: Local copy + remote copy + box print
yes
023
Remote copy (black and white / small / double sided)
Print: PDL print + report print + box print
no
071
Toner bottle black
no
072
Toner bottle yellow
no
073
Toner bottle magenta
no
074
Toner bottle cyan
no
075
Toner bottle clear
no
081
Toner bottle + Halfway replacement black
no
082
Toner bottle + Halfway replacement yellow
no
083
Toner bottle + Halfway replacement magenta
no
084
Toner bottle + Halfway replacement cyan
no
091
1/10 Toner bottle black
Print A: PDL print + report print

Scan: Black and white scan + color scan
LXIX
LXIX
Valid or invalid
Number
no
092
no
093
no
no
Counter Details
Valid or invalid
Number
1/10 Toner bottle yellow
no
130
Total A (full color 1)
1/10 Toner bottle magenta
no
131
Total A (full color 2)
094
1/10 Toner bottle cyan
yes
132
Total A (black and white 1)
095
1/10 Toner bottle clear
yes
133
Total A (black and white 2)
no
134
Total A (mono color / large)
no
135
Total A (mono color / small)
yes
136
Total A (black and white / large)
yes
137
Total A (black and white / small)
yes
138
Total A 1 (double sided)
yes
139
Total A 2 (double sided)
yes
140
large A (double sided)
yes
141
small A (double sided)
no
142
Total A (mono color 1)
no
143
Total A (mono color 2)
no
144
Total A (full color / large)
no
145
Total A (full color / small)
no
146
Total A (full color + mono color / large)
no
147
Total A (full color + mono color / small)
no
148
Total A (full color + mono color 2)
T-10-30
100 to 199
Valid or invalid
Number
Counter Details
yes
101
Total 1
yes
102
Total 2
yes
103
Total (large)
yes
104
Total (small)
no
105
Total (full color 1)
no
106
Total (full color 2)
yes
108
Total (black and white 1)
yes
109
Total (black and white 2)
no
110
Total (mono color / large)
no
111
Total (mono color / small)
yes
112
Total (black and white / large)
yes
113
Total (black and white / small)
yes
114
Total 1 (double sided)
yes
115
Total 2 (double sided)
yes
116
large (double sided)
yes
117
small (double sided)
no
118
Total (mono color 1)
no
119
Total (mono color 2)
no
120
Total (full color / large)
no
121
Total (full color / small)
no
122
Total (full color + mono color / large)
no
123
Total (full color + mono color / small)
no
124
Total (full color + mono color 2)
no
125
Total (full color + mono color 1)
yes
126
Total A1
yes
127
Total A2
yes
128
Total A (large)
yes
129
Total A (small)
LXX
Counter Details
no
149
Total A (full color + mono color 1)
yes
150
Total B1
yes
151
Total B2
yes
152
Total B (large)
yes
153
Total B (small)
no
154
Total B (full color 1)
no
155
Total B (full color 2)
yes
156
Total B (black and white 1)
yes
157
Total B (black and white 2)
no
158
Total B (mono color / large)
no
159
Total B (mono color / small)
yes
160
Total B (black and white / large)
yes
161
Total B (black and white / small)
yes
162
Total B1 (double sided)
yes
163
Total B2 (double sided)
yes
164
large B (double sided)
LXX
Valid or invalid
Number
yes
165
no
166
no
167
no
168
no
no
Counter Details
Valid or invalid
Number
small B (double sided)
no
218
Copy (full color 2)
Total B (mono color 1)
no
219
Copy (mono color 1)
Total B (mono color 2)
no
220
Copy (mono color 2)
Total B (full color / large)
yes
221
Copy (black and white 1)
169
Total B (full color / small)
yes
222
Copy (black and white 2)
170
Total B (full color + mono color / large)
no
223
Copy (full color / large)
no
171
Total B (full color + mono color / small)
no
224
Copy (full color / small)
no
172
Total B (full color + mono color 2)
no
225
Copy (mono color / large)
no
173
Total B (full color + mono color 1)
no
226
Copy (mono color / small)
no
191
Toner replacement / yellow
yes
227
Copy (black and white / large)
no
192
Toner replacement / magenta
yes
228
Copy (black and white / small)
no
193
Toner replacement / cyan
no
229
Copy (full color + mono color / large)
no
194
Toner replacement / black
no
230
Copy (full color + mono color / small)
no
195
Toner replacement / clear
no
231
Copy (full color + mono color / 2)
no
196
Toner replacement / expansion
no
232
Copy (full color + mono color / 1)
no
233
Copy (full color / large / double sided)
no
234
Copy (full color / small / double sided)
no
235
Copy (mono color / large / double sided)
no
236
Copy (mono color / small / double sided)
yes
237
Copy (black and white / large / double sided)
yes
238
Copy (black and white / small / double sided)
no
245
Copy A (full color 1)
no
246
Copy A (full color 2)
no
247
Copy A (mono color 1)
no
248
Copy A (mono color 2)
yes
249
Copy A (black and white 1)
yes
250
Copy A (black and white 2)
no
251
Copy A (full color / large)
no
252
Copy A (full color / small)
no
253
Copy A (mono color / large)
no
254
Copy A (mono color / small)
yes
255
Copy A (black and white / large)
yes
256
Copy A (black and white / small)
no
257
Copy A (full color +mono color / large)
no
258
Copy A (full color +mono color / small)
T-10-31
200 to 299
Valid or invalid
Number
Counter Details
yes
201
Copy (Total 1)
yes
202
Copy (Total 2)
yes
203
Copy (large)
yes
204
Copy (small)
yes
205
Copy A (Total 1)
yes
206
Copy A (Total 2)
yes
207
Copy A (large)
yes
208
Copy A (small)
yes
209
Local copy (Total 1)
yes
210
Local copy (Total 2)
yes
211
Local copy (large)
yes
212
Local copy (small)
yes
213
Remote copy (Total 1)
yes
214
Remote copy (Total 2)
yes
215
Remote copy (large)
yes
216
Remote copy (small)
no
217
Copy (full color 1)
LXXI
Counter Details
LXXI
LXXII
300 to 399
Valid or invalid
Number
Counter Details
no
259
Copy A (full color +mono color 2)
Valid or invalid
Number
no
260
Copy A (full color +mono color 1)
yes
301
Print (Total 1)
no
261
Copy A (full color / large / double sided)
yes
302
Print (Total 2)
no
262
Copy A (full color / small / double sided)
yes
303
Print (large)
no
263
Copy A (mono color / large / double sided)
yes
304
Print (small)
no
264
Copy A (mono color / small / double sided)
yes
305
Print A (Total 1)
yes
265
Copy A (black and white / large / double sided)
yes
306
Print A (Total 2)
yes
266
Copy A (black and white / small / double sided)
yes
307
Print A (large )
no
273
Local copy (full color 1)
yes
308
Print A (small)
no
274
Local copy (full color 2)
no
309
Print (full color 1)
no
275
Local copy (mono color 1)
no
310
Print (full color 2)
no
276
Local copy (mono color 2)
no
311
Print (mono color 1)
yes
277
Local copy (black and white 1)
no
312
Print (mono color 2)
yes
278
Local copy (black and white 2)
yes
313
Print (black and white 1)
no
279
Local copy (full color / large)
yes
314
Print (black and white 2)
no
280
Local copy (full color / small)
no
315
Print (full color / large)
no
281
Local copy (mono color / large)
no
316
Print (full color / small)
no
282
Local copy (mono color / small)
no
317
Print (mono color / large)
yes
283
Local copy (black and white / large)
no
318
Print (mono color / small)
yes
284
Local copy (black and white / small)
yes
319
Print (black and white / large)
no
285
Local copy (full color + mono color / large)
yes
320
Print (black and white / small)
no
286
Local copy (full color + mono color / small)
no
321
Print (full color +mono color / large)
no
287
Local copy (full color + mono color 2)
no
322
Print (full color +mono color / small)
no
288
Local copy (full color + mono color 1)
no
323
Print (full color +mono color / 2)
no
289
Local copy (full color / large / double sided)
no
324
Print (full color +mono color / 1)
no
290
Local copy (full color / small / double sided)
no
325
Print (full color / large / double sided)
no
291
Local copy (mono color / large / double sided)
no
326
Print (full color / small / double sided)
no
292
Local copy (mono color / small / double sided)
no
327
Print (mono color / large / double sided)
yes
293
Local copy (black and white / large / double sided)
no
328
Print (mono color / small / double sided)
yes
294
Local copy (black and white / small / double sided)
yes
329
Print (black and white / large / double sided)
yes
330
Print (black and white / small / double sided)
yes
331
PDLPrint (Total 1)
yes
332
PDLPrint (Total 2)
yes
333
PDLPrint (large)
yes
334
PDLPrint (small)
T-10-32
Counter Details
LXXII
LXXIII
Valid or invalid
Number
no
335
no
336
yes
yes
Counter Details
Valid or invalid
Number
Counter Details
PDLPrint (full color 1)
yes
421
Copy + print (black and white / large / double sided)
PDLPrint (full color 2)
yes
422
Copy + print (black and white / small / double sided)
339
PDLPrint (black and white 1)
no
431
Clear mixed + mono-clear (total 1)
340
PDLPrint (black and white 2)
no
432
Clear mixed + mono-clear (total 2)
no
341
PDLPrint (full color / large)
no
433
Clear mixed + mono-clear (full-page 1)
no
342
PDLPrint (full color / small)
no
434
Clear mixed + mono-clear (full-page 2)
yes
345
PDLPrint (black and white / large)
no
435
Clear mixed + mono-clear (partial 1)
yes
346
PDLPrint (black and white / small)
no
436
Clear mixed + mono-clear (partial 2)
no
351
PDLPrint (full color / large / double sided)
no
437
Clear mixed + mono-clear (full-page / large)
no
352
PDLPrint (full color / small / double sided)
no
438
Clear mixed + mono-clear (full-page / small)
yes
355
PDLPrint (black and white / large / double sided)
no
439
Clear mixed + mono-clear (partial / large)
yes
356
PDLPrint (black and white / small / double sided)
no
440
Clear mixed + mono-clear (partial / small)
no
441
Clear mixed (total 1)
no
442
Clear mixed (total 2)
no
443
Clear mixed (full-page 1)
no
444
Clear mixed (full-page 2)
no
445
Clear mixed (partial 1)
no
446
Clear mixed (partial 2)
no
447
Clear mixed (full-page / large)
no
448
Clear mixed (full-page / small)
no
449
Clear mixed (partial / large)
no
450
Clear mixed (partial / small)
no
451
Mono-clear (total 1)
no
452
Mono-clear (total 2)
no
453
Mono-clear (full-page 1)
no
454
Mono-clear (full-page 2)
no
455
Mono-clear (partial 1)
no
456
Mono-clear (partial 2)
no
457
Mono-clear (full-page / large)
no
458
Mono-clear (full-page / small)
no
459
Mono-clear (partial / large)
no
460
Mono-clear (partial / small)
T-10-33
400 to 499
Valid or invalid
Number
Counter Details
no
401
Copy + print (full color / large)
no
402
Copy + print (full color / small)
yes
403
Copy + print (black and white / large)
yes
404
Copy + print (black and white / small)
yes
405
Copy + print (black and white 2)
yes
406
Copy + print (black and white 1)
no
407
Copy + print (full color + mono color / large)
no
408
Copy + print (full color + mono color / small)
no
409
Copy + print (full color + mono color / 2)
no
410
Copy + print (full color + mono color / 1)
yes
411
Copy + print (large)
yes
412
Copy + print (small)
yes
413
Copy + print (2)
yes
414
Copy + print (1)
no
415
Copy + print (mono color / large)
no
416
Copy + print (mono color / small)
no
417
Copy + print (full color / large / double sided)
no
418
Copy + print (full color / small / double sided)
no
419
Copy + print (mono color / large / double sided)
no
420
Copy + print (mono color / small / double sided)
T-10-34
LXXIII
LXXIV
500 to 599
Valid or invalid
Number
Counter Details
Valid or invalid
Number
Counter Details
no
619
Box print (full color + mono color 2)
620
Box print (full color + mono color 1)
yes
501
Scan (Total 1)
no
yes
502
Scan (Total 2)
no
621
Box print (full color / large / double sided)
622
Box print (full color / small / double sided)
yes
503
Scan (large)
no
yes
504
Scan (small)
no
623
Box print (mono color / large / double sided)
Black and white Scan (Total 1)
no
624
Box print (mono color / small / double sided)
625
Box print (black and white / large / double sided)
yes
505
yes
506
Black and white Scan (Total 2)
yes
yes
507
Black and white Scan (large)
yes
626
Box print (black and white / small / double sided)
631
Memory media print (Total 1)
yes
508
Black and white Scan (small)
yes
yes
509
Color scan (Total 1)
yes
632
Memory media print (Total 2)
Color scan (Total 2)
yes
633
Memory media print (large)
yes
634
Memory media print (small)
yes
639
Memory media print (black and white 1)
yes
640
Memory media print (black and white 2)
yes
645
Memory media print (black and white / large)
yes
646
Memory media print (black and white / small)
yes
655
Memory media print (black and white / large / double sided)
yes
656
Memory media print (black and white / small / double sided)
yes
510
yes
511
Color scan (large)
yes
512
Color scan (small)

T-10-35
600 to 699
Valid or invalid
Number
Counter Details
yes
601
Box print (Total 1)
yes
602
Box print (Total 2)
yes
603
Box print (large)
yes
604
Box print (small)
no
605
Box print (full color 1)
Valid or invalid
Number
no
606
Box print (full color 2)
yes
701
Reception print (Total 1)
702
Reception print (Total 2)
T-10-36
700 to 799
Counter Details
no
607
Box print (mono color 1)
yes
no
608
Box print (mono color 2)
yes
703
Reception print (large)
704
Reception print (small)
yes
609
Box print (black and white 1)
yes
yes
610
Box print (black and white 2)
no
705
Reception print (full color 1)
Box print (full color / large)
no
706
Reception print (full color 2)
no
707
Reception print (Gray scale 1)
no
611
no
612
Box print (full color / small)
no
613
Box print (mono color / large)
no
708
Reception print (Gray scale 2)
709
Reception print (black and white 1)
no
614
Box print (mono color / small)
yes
yes
615
Box print (black and white / large)
yes
710
Reception print (black and white 2)
Box print (black and white / small)
no
711
Reception print (full color / large)
712
Reception print (full color / small)
yes
616
no
617
Box print (full color + mono color / large)
no
no
618
Box print (full color + mono color / small)
no
713
Reception print (Gray scale / large)
no
714
Reception print (Gray scale / small)
LXXIV
Valid or invalid
Number
yes
715
yes
716
no
717
no
718
no
no
Counter Details
Valid or invalid
Number
Reception print (black and white / large)
yes
750
Network print (black and white 2)
Reception print (black and white / small)
no
751
Network print (full color / large)
Reception print (full color + Gray scale / large)
no
752
Network print (full color / small)
Reception print (full color + Gray scale / small)
yes
753
Network print (black and white / large)
719
Reception print (full color + Gray scale 2)
yes
754
Network print (black and white / small)
720
Reception print (full color + Gray scale 1)
no
755
Network print (full color / large / double sided)
no
721
Reception print (full color / large / double sided)
no
756
Network print (full color / small / double sided)
no
722
Reception print (full color / small / double sided)
yes
757
Network print (black and white / large / double sided)
no
723
Reception print (Gray scale / large / double sided)
yes
758
Network print (black and white / small / double sided)
LXXV
Counter Details
no
724
Reception print (Gray scale / small / double sided)
yes
759
Mobile print (Total 1)
yes
725
Reception print (black and white / large / double sided)
yes
760
Mobile print (Total 2)
yes
726
Reception print (black and white / small / double sided)
yes
761
Mobile print (large)
yes
727
Advance box print (Total 1)
yes
762
Mobile print (small)
yes
728
Advance box print (Total 2)
no
763
Mobile print (full color 1)
yes
729
Advance box print (large)
no
764
Mobile print (full color 2)
yes
730
Advance box print (small)
yes
765
Mobile print (black and white 1)
no
731
Advance box print (full color 1)
yes
766
Mobile print (black and white 2)
no
732
Advance box print (full color 2)
no
767
Mobile print (full color / large)
yes
733
Advance box print (black and white 1)
no
768
Mobile print (full color / small)
yes
734
Advance box print (black and white 2)
yes
769
Mobile print (black and white / large)
no
735
Advance box print (full color / large)
yes
770
Mobile print (black and white / small)
no
736
Advance box print (full color / small)
no
771
Mobile print (full color / large / double sided)
yes
737
Advance box print (black and white / large)
no
772
Mobile print (full color / small / double sided)
yes
738
Advance box print (black and white / small)
yes
773
Mobile print (black and white / large / double sided)
no
739
Advance box print (full color / large / double sided)
yes
774
Mobile print (black and white / small / double sided)
no
740
Advance box print (full color / small / double sided)
yes
741
Advance box print (black and white / large / double sided)
yes
742
Advance box print (black and white / small / double sided)
yes
743
Network print (Total 1)
yes
744
Network print (Total 2)
yes
745
Network print (large)
yes
746
Network print (small)
no
747
Network print (full color 1)
no
748
Network print (full color 2)
yes
749
Network print (black and white 1)
T-10-37
800 to 899
Valid or invalid
Number
Counter Details
yes
801
Report print (Total 1)
yes
802
Report print (Total 2)
yes
803
Report print (large)
yes
804
Report print (small)
no
805
Report print (full color 1)
no
806
Report print (full color 2)
no
807
Report print (Gray scale 1)
LXXV
LXXVI
Valid or invalid
Number
Counter Details
Valid or invalid
Number
Counter Details
no
808
Report print (Gray scale 2)
no
914
Transmission scan total 1 (black and white)
yes
809
Report print (black and white 1)
yes
915
Transmission scan total 2 (color)
yes
810
Report print (black and white 2)
yes
916
no
811
Report print (full color / large)
yes
917
no
812
Report print (full color / small)
yes
918
no
813
Report print (Gray scale / large)
no
919
no
814
Report print (Gray scale / small)
no
920
yes
815
Report print (black and white / large)
yes
921
yes
816
Report print (black and white / small)
yes
922
no
817
Report print (full color + Gray scale / large)
yes
929
no
818
Report print (full color + Gray scale / small)
yes
930
no
819
Report print (full color + Gray scale 2)
no
931
no
820
Report print (full color + Gray scale 1)
no
932
no
821
Report print (full color / large / double sided)
no
933
no
822
Report print (full color / small / double sided)
no
934
no
823
Report print (Gray scale / large / double sided)
no
935
Universal transmission scan total (color)
no
824
Report print (Gray scale / small / double sided)
no
936
Universal transmission scan total (black and white)
yes
825
Report print (black and white / large / double sided)
yes
937
Box scan (color)
yes
826
Report print (black and white / small / double sided)
yes
938
Box scan (black and white)
yes
939
Remote scan (color)
yes
940
Remote scan (black and white)
no
941
Transmission scan / Fax (color)
no
942
Transmission scan / Fax (black and white)
no
943
Transmission scan / I Fax (color )
no
944
Transmission scan / I Fax (black and white)
yes
945
Transmission scan / E-mail (color)
yes
946
Transmission scan / E-mail (black and white)
no
947
Transmission scan / FTP (color)
no
948
Transmission scan / FTP (black and white)
no
949
Transmission scan / SMB (color)
no
950
Transmission scan / SMB (black and white)
no
951
Transmission scan / IPX (color)
no
952
Transmission scan / IPX (black and white)
no
953
Transmission scan / Database (color)
no
954
Transmission scan / Database (black and white)
T-10-38
900 to 999
Valid or invalid
Number
Counter Details
no
901
Copy scan total 1 (color)
no
902
Copy scan total 1 (black and white)
no
903
no
904
no
905
no
906
no
907
no
908
no
909
Local copy scan (color)
no
910
Local copy scan (black and white)
no
911
Remote copy scan (color)
no
912
Remote copy scan (black and white)
no
913
LXXVI
LXXVII
Valid or invalid
Number
Counter Details
no
955
Transmission scan / Local print (color )
no
956
Transmission scan / Local print (black and white)
no
957
Transmission scan / Box (color)
no
958
Transmission scan / Box (black and white)
yes
959
Media scan (color)
yes
960
Media scan (black and white)
yes
961
Application scan (Total 1)
yes
962
Application black and white scan (Total 1)
yes
963
Application color scan (Total 1)
yes
964
Super Box Local scan (color)
yes
965
Super Box Local scan (black and white)

T-10-39
LXXVII
Appendix > Removal > Removal > Work Procedure
LXXVIII
Removal
Work Procedure
If the user uses MEAP applications, ask the user to uninstall the MEAP applications if
Removal
Overview
User data kept by the machine contains address books and inbox documents that users
can recognize.
By using the copy, print, or send function, there is also information left on the HDD of
necessary.
User data delete procedure

Settings/Registration > System Management > Initialize
Select a deletion mode
If the user has not given any instruction on which item in the deletion mode should be used,
select the default "Once with 0 (Null) Data".
MFPs that is generally not recognizable but can be recovered as documents. (Refer to the
illustration on the next page.)
For security, the user mode is provided to delete data on SRAM and perform overwrite
deletion to render user data on HDD unrecoverable.
User data delete

To delete user data, execute Settings/Registration > System Management > Initialize
All Data/Settings in user mode. Performing Initialize All Data/Settings returns user mode
setting values to their factory defaults.
Usually, one overwrite is enough. Note that increasing the number of overwrite increases
the time required for the deletion operation.
Note:
When you perform Initialize All Data/Settings, license and data of MEAP application are
initialized to the state same as when the HDD is replaced. If MEAP application may be
used by other users after the machine is removed, disable the MEAP application and
uninstall it in advance.
Performing Initialize All Data/Settings does not delete the license of the system option.
F-10-28
Deletion of Service Mode Settings

The user mode setting values may have been changed at the user's request. In that case, the
service mode setting values should be changed back to the default values before removing
the machine.
Note:
When all the data are initialized, the user data on the HDD and the user data on the
SRAM of the Main Controller PCB 2 are deleted. For the items to be deleted, refer to the
backup list.
Performing "Initialize All Data" turns auto gradation adjustment values and TPM settings
to OFF. Therefore, to enable normal operation the next time, the operation performed at
installation is necessary.
Performing Initialize All Data/Settings does not delete the license of the system option.
LXXVIII
LXXIX
Deletion of Service Mode Setting Values

Service Mode Lev1 > Function> CLEAR > MN-CONT
F-10-29
Note:
When MN-CON clear is executed, the address book on the HDD is not deleted. As for
the user data, initialize all the data.
LXXIX

IR 6275i ADVANCE SERVICE MANUAL PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

IR 6275i ADVANCE SERVICE MANUAL PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

imageRUNNER ADVANCE

6275 / 6265 / 6255 Series

inconsistent with local law.

of the individual companies.

edition of this manual.

consent of Canon Inc.

CANON INC. 2011

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

The following symbols are used throughout this Service Manual.

Remove the claw.

Insert the claw.

Check the noise.

Use the bundled part.

Disconnect the connector.

Push the part.

In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked

Connect the connector.

Plug the power cable.

Remove the cable/wire

Set the cable/wire to the

Remove the screw.

Tighten the screw.

Service Information bulletins.

About Toner-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 0-3

Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery---------------------------------0-3

Main Body---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-2

Scanning System Options-------------------------------------------------------- 1-4

Function Expansion System Options------------------------------------------ 1-5

Product Features-------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-7

Product Specifications------------------------------------------------------------ 1-11

Power Supply Specifications:---------------------------------------------------1-12

External View/Internal View----------------------------------------------- 1-25

Functional Configuration---------------------------------------------------------- 2-2

Boot/Shutdown sequence---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-11

Laser Exposure System---------------------------------------------------- 2-37

Image Formation System-------------------------------------------------- 2-46

Periodical Servicing List---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-119

Pickup / Feed System----------------------------------------------------- 2-122

Deck/Cassette Pickup Unit---------------------------------------------------- 2-130

Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Unit----------------------------------------------- 2-139

Registration Unit----------------------------------------------------------------- 2-141

Delivery/Reverse Unit----------------------------------------------------------- 2-144

Duplex Unit------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-146

Jam Detection-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-152

Jam Code List----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-152

External Auxiliary System------------------------------------------------ 2-156

Preparation for Using SSO-H------------------------------------------------- 2-170

Preparation for Using SMS---------------------------------------------------- 2-172

Login to SMS---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-180

Installing an MEAP Application----------------------------------------------- 2-182

Check License-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-219

MEAP Specifications------------------------------------------------------------ 2-186

MEAP Application Management--------------------------------------------- 2-189

Enhanced System Application Management----------------------------- 2-198

System Application Management-------------------------------------------- 2-210

Setting the method to login to SMS----------------------------------------- 2-213

MEAP Application System Information------------------------------------- 2-216

MEAP Application Information------------------------------------------------ 2-218

Changing SMS Login Password--------------------------------------------- 2-220

MEAP Application Setting Information Management and Log

Embedded RDS------------------------------------------------------------ 2-251

Product Overview---------------------------------------------------------------- 2-251

Service cautions------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-253